JP2022111313A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving an interest in a game of a player.

SOLUTION: A variable performance for varying a performance value is executed by variable performance execution means, based on a result of executing a determination by determination means, based on performance information. The game machine has first performance value determination means for determining a first performance value for varying a performance value, when the variable performance is executed by the variable performance execution means, and second performance value determination means for determining a second performance value different from the first performance value capable of varying the performance value, when the first performance value is determined by the first performance value determination means. Therefore, it is possible to improve an interest in a game of a player.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine that executes a production (battle production) in which a player character and an enemy character play against each other, and notifies the result of winning or not based on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the production. There is In this conventional gaming machine, the result of winning can be suggested by the effect, so that the player can be interested in the effect to be executed. This was intended to increase interest.

JP 2015-9075 A

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises: determining means for executing determination based on performance information; Effect execution means, first effect value determination means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value when the variable effect is executed by the variable effect execution means, and the first effect value determination. a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the effect value when the first effect value is determined by the means. is.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, an effect state setting means capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed; A performance value updating means for continuously variably updating the performance value when the state is set, and a first performance value storage capable of storing the first performance value determined by the first performance value determining means. The effect value updating means variably updates the effect value based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value updating means; and an effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode set by the mode setting means.

A gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the second effect value determined by the second effect value determining means is set as a selectable selection range of the first effect value. A selection range storage means having a range or a second range different from the first range, and a determination value for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. determining means, wherein the second effect value determining means selects one selected range from among the plurality of selected ranges stored in the selected range storing means based on the determination result of the determined value determining means. Then, the second effect value is determined.

In the gaming machine according to claim 5, in the gaming machine according to claim 4, the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased. and a second selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be decreased is stored. When it is determined that the first effect value is less than the predetermined value, the second selection range is selected and the second effect value is set.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, determination means for executing a determination based on the performance information; variable performance execution means for executing a variable performance for varying the performance value based on the determination result of the determination means; a first effect value determining means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value when the variable effect executing means executes the variable effect; A second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the effect value when the effect value is determined.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed, and the effect value is continuously set by the effect state setting means. a production value updating means for variably updating; and a first production value storage means capable of storing the first production value determined by the first production value determining means; 1 The effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value stored in the effect value storage means.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2, the following effects are achieved. Namely, effect mode setting means for setting a effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value updating means, and effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. and

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, selection range storage means having a first range or a second range different from the first range as a selection range from which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determination means can be selected; determination value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, wherein the second effect value determination means is the determined value determination means; Based on the determination result of (1), one selection range is selected from among the plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means, and the second effect value is determined.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased and decreased and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased are stored. The second effect value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value when the determination result of the determined value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than the predetermined value. The second effect value is set by selecting the second selection range.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the displacement unit; FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member; FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; FIG. 4A is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; FIG. 20 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; 22 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21; FIG. Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; 24 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the displacement unit in the second aspect; 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 25; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of a displacement unit in a third embodiment; 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27; FIG. 4 is a front view of the projection unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the projection unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. It is a front view of a back base. FIG. 4B is a rear view of the front base and the illumination unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the front base; 35 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34; FIG. 4 is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member and groove forming member; FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member and groove forming member taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37; FIG. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). (a) to (c) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). 44(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 44(b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit taken along line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 44(b). (a) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block along line XLVIb-XLVIb in FIG. 46(a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block taken along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in a second position; FIG. 4B is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position; (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the intermediate position, and (c) is the transmission in the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (a) to (c) are rear views of a transmission gear and a connecting member in the first drive range. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 57 is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXc-LIXc of FIG. 56; FIG. 60(a) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. 64(a) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. (a) is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and (b) is a projection plate along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a); FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the second block. FIG. 11 is a front view of a projection unit in a fifth embodiment; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. Fig. 10 is a rear view of the front base; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the projection unit; (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. FIG. 21 is a front view of a projection unit in a sixth embodiment; FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the front base with the front base and the irradiation unit assembled. (a) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing game states and effects in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the effect 1 during the big win in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the effect 2 during the big win in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the effect 3 during the big win in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing another example of the effect content of the effect 1 during the big win in the first control example. is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when an additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is started, and (b) is a diagram showing the first It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big-hit continuous production|presentation among the additional production|presentations displayed by 3 design display devices. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the number of rounds is added among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big-hit continuous production among the additional production|presentations displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1 control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot ending screen among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when a big hit is complete|finished among the additional effects displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the end of a big hit among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a continuous jackpot effect among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a special symbol high-speed change after the end of a big win, in the normal winning effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; [FIG. 11] is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a big win is won among normal winning effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. 8 is a timing chart showing the flow of a battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the battle mode displayed with the 3rd design display device in the 1st example of control. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pre-battle effect in the battle mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a battle ready-to-win display mode among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when winning Battle Reach among the battle modes displayed on the device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a draw in battle reach among the battle modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of being defeated by battle reach among the battle modes displayed with a 3rd design display device. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a battle ready-to-win resurrection effect in the battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the prognostic effect among the suggestive effects displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the countdown effect|presentation among the suggestive effects displayed on a display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the specific production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the 1st example of control. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of suggestive effects executed within one variation among the suggestive effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of suggestive effects that are executed in multiple variations among the suggestive effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an expectation level suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an expectation level suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the expectation degree suggestion production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is the main controller in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of this. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the variation pattern table for big hits (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (d) is a schematic representation of the specified contents of the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the special variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot transition setting table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example; (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 1 table; 2C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 2 table, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 3 table. , (e) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 4 table, and (f) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 5 table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a state transition 6 table out of the state transition tables set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a state transition 7 table FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, (c) schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 8 table, and (d) schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 9 table. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the first control example; ((a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example) be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol reserved ball number counter in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the reserved rank selection table in the first control example. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the effect selection table during the jackpot. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the addition number selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the continuous effect mode selection table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the continuous value main selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first continuous value sub-selection table. , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second continuation value sub-selection table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the final mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the contents of effects set as the final mode. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the expectation level selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the expectation level effect selection table. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 7 is a flow chart showing variation count subtraction processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process during a jackpot performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows processing during addition production which is performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 1st example of control. 9 is a flow chart showing an additional display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process after a big hit performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing extension management processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing continuous value setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an expectation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing countdown effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a multiple variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing continued value-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing expectation level effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing countdown effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a character effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the example of adding the effect of the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a character effect displayed on a third symbol display device in an example of adding an effect of the first control example, and (b) is an example of adding an effect of the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which resets the title displayed with the 3rd design display device in an example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the additional example of the effect of the first control example; (b) is the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the example of the additional effect of the first control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the transformation pattern table in the additional example of the effect of the first control example, and (b) is the stipulation of the title system selection table in the example of the additional effect of the first control example. FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically showing the contents, and FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the title selection table in the effect addition example of the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the role object action level selection table in the example of addition of effect of the first control example, and (b) is a group of effect settings in the example of addition of effect of the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing change processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing title setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, and (b) is the prescribed contents of the falling lottery table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example; (d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a fall state transition 1 table out of the fall state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a falling state transition 2 table out of the falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the example of addition of the effect of the second control example. is a block diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the final mode selection 3 table in the second control example. is a diagram shown in FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing state determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in another example of the second control example; It is a schematic diagram. 10 is a flow chart showing countdown effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of effect. 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of effect. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the third control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the third control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example, (b) is the variation pattern selection table in the third control example Among them, it is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the (variable probability) variation pattern table for the big hit, and (c) is the first out (variable probability) variation pattern for the first out of the variation pattern selection table in the third control example FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the table, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the second outlier (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table among the fluctuation pattern selection tables in the third control example. It is a figure, (e) is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the special (probability variation) variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables in the 3rd control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example; (b) to (d) are diagrams in the third control example; FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of fluctuation scenarios 1 to 3 defined in a fluctuation scenario table. (a) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the defined contents of variation scenarios 4 to 7 defined in the variation scenario table in the third control example, respectively. (a) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the defined contents of variation scenarios 8 to 11 defined in the variation scenario table in the third control example, respectively. FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example, and FIG. 8B is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a first continuous value main selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a second continuous value main selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a third continuous value main selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the continuous production|presentation mode selection 4 table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a third control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 10 is a flow chart showing variation count subtraction processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the third control example. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; 14 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a continuous value setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing continued value-related command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing final mode command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example; is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example, and (b) is a third control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation scenario A1 defined in a variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example; ) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the post-small hit variation scenario stipulated in the variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in another example of the suggestive effects described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in another example of the suggestive effects described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing countdown effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second precursor effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 6 in the additional explanation of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of an effect in another example of the expectation level suggesting effect explained in the first control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing display screens in another example of the expectation level suggesting effect described in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing display screens in another example of the expectation level suggesting effect described in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing countdown effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the expectation degree suggesting effect described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring and effect processing 7 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the expectation degree suggesting effect explained in the first control example; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported on the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16. - 特許庁

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when the prize balls are being paid out and when an error occurs.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball while the pressing operation is being performed, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing probability, shortening the working hours, or normal, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 judges whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also judges the kind of big win when it is judged as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state in which the probability is not variable or the time is shortened (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric role product 140a is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric role product 140a is in the closed state (closed state) The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric role product 140a is opened once. At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric role product 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric role product 140a and the second electric role product 82 are opened at one time. It is also possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol so as to be higher than in the normal state, without changing the number of times of winning.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays a variable pattern, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is to perform a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role object 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player more chances of opening the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the state is such that the ball can easily enter 140 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 140 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 140 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a like the second prize winning port 140, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 140 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to set the first electric accessory 140a in an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to form a pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include respective drive motors 481 , 491 , 661 , 880 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions. 400, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the motion unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are placed in the inner space of the rear case 300. housed in order.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a frame-shaped base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a base member 410 which are displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projection member 485 are retracted to the back side of the projection unit 600, and the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third pattern display device). 81) can be displaced between the projecting position projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485), By selecting the driving means to drive, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied (a plurality of types of displacement modes can be formed). Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape in front of the displacement unit 400 , a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged inside the base member 610 , and a projection plate member 620 . It includes a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 . The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

In this case, the projection unit 600 employs a structure that enhances the efficiency of incidence of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 on the projection plate member 620, and intensifies the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and designs). clearly emerge). Also, a structure is adopted that enhances workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation units 650 ) to the base member 610 . Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 arranged above the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. , the other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, the third pattern display device 81) and a projecting position projecting toward the front side. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a biasing spring SP that biases the displacement member 850. At a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the biasing spring SP By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) around the balanced position (predetermined position) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The displacement unit 400 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 9-28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400. FIG.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and displacement members (a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L) displaceably disposed on the base member 410. member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) driving means (lower driving mechanism 480 and upper driving mechanism 490) for applying driving force to the displacement member. When displacing the displacement member by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when displacing the displacement member by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when displacing the displacement member by driving the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 491) When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed to be displaced in different manners. The details of the structure will be described below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18. FIG.

First, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R that are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement. , the left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the truck member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is an elongated member arranged in a vertical posture, and includes a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the rear surface, a connecting hole 422 formed at the upper end, and a sliding member formed at the lower end. and a moving groove 423 . The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the rear side of the left displacement member 420L.

The length of the connecting shaft 421 is set so that the tip of the connecting shaft 421 protrudes from the rear surface of the left driven member 430L. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421 to displace the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one connecting shaft 441 of two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 described later is rotatably inserted therethrough. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative attitude change (rotation around the axis of the connection hole 422) with respect to the truck member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a driving pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of a lower left rack 488L, which will be described later, is rotatably and slidably inserted. . Therefore, when only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the attitude change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410 can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being installed between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L. and a sliding pin 432 protruding from the rear surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The slide pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a slide groove 410 a formed in the side of the base member 410 . Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing the relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The carriage member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending in the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It comprises two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441 . Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) via the truck member 440 by rolling on the rolling surface of the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440. .

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended from the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440 and supported.

The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide extending along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 are rotatably inserted. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R, the right driven member 430R, the left driven member 430L, the upper right rack 450R, and the upper left rack 450L are formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, respectively. Since they have substantially the same configuration, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the upper right rack 450R has a rack gear 452 engraved on its front surface. In addition, the upper right rack 450R is offset to the front side at the portion where the connecting hole 451 is formed, and is arranged in a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 is meshed with both rack gears 452 .

Accordingly, as the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the number of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is reduced. The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (the direction toward or away from each other). However, an even number of pinion gears 459 may be provided, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be displaced in the same direction.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. FIG. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. 13 to 16, illustration of the raising cover 413 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a driving mechanism with which the pinion gear 482 is meshed. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the rear surface of the protruding member 485, and the rack gear 486. It mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) in which the leading gear 487a is meshed with the gear train, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R that are meshed with the trailing gear 487e of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 projecting from the back of the left front cover 411L. be. The drive gear 483 and the drive arm 484 are rotatably supported on the rear surface of the left front cover 411L and the front surface of the base member 410, respectively.

The drive gear 483 is provided with an eccentric pin 483a that is positioned eccentrically from its center of rotation and that protrudes from its rear surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, It has a drive pin 484c projecting from the front at the end opposite to the side where the support hole 484a and the slide groove 484b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction through the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 moves from the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 484 rotates in the forward or reverse direction around the pivot hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The projecting member 485 has a linear sliding groove 485a through which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extending and retracting direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a base end rail provided on the front surface of the base member 410, a tip rail provided on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and a base end rail interposed between the base end rail and the tip rail. and an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be longitudinally displaceable relative to each other.

Therefore, when the driving arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484, the slide rail SL is extended and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is moved to the base. The member 410 is raised and lowered in the vertical direction.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the upward/downward direction of the projecting member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is arranged in a state where the top gear 487a is meshed with the rack gear 486, and the front and right front surfaces of the base member 410. They are rotatably pivotally supported between the rear surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, the linear motion of the rack gear 486 can be used to rotate the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) by moving the protruding member 485 up and down.

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-like members, and include a rack gear 488a engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488b protruding from the front at the longitudinal end. and respectively. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are arranged at different positions in the vertical direction, with the rack gears 488a opposed to each other, and between the rear surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the rear cover 412 in the horizontal direction (width direction). , left-right direction in FIG. 19).

A gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to an adjacent gear 487d, and protrudes rearward through an opening 410b formed in the base member 410 to form a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488L. It meshes with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) rotates as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487a at the end of the gear train causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to mutually move. They can be linearly moved in opposite directions (towards or away from each other).

The driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R protrude to the front side through linear insertion grooves 410c drilled in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. and the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R so as to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R, which will be described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG.

17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. FIG. 17 and 18, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a driving mechanism with which the pinion gear 492 is meshed. It mainly comprises a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 which together with the drive gear 493 form a crank mechanism.

The upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper side portion formed in a substantially picture frame shape when viewed from the front) is formed as a divided structure in which an upper rear portion 410e, an upper intermediate portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially superimposed on the front side. be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of the upwardly projecting portion of the upper intermediate portion 410f. 492 is attached (fixed). A drive gear 493 and a drive arm 494 are rotatably journalled to the rear surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 is provided with an eccentric pin 493a located eccentrically from the center of rotation thereof and protruding from the rear surface. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and It has a linear drive groove 494c located at the end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction through the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 moves from the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 494 rotates forward or backward around the pivot hole 494a, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced left and right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted through the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating about the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c that is displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is supported. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced left and right.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is laterally displaced and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) rolls on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L moves to the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. The displacement (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the right displacement member is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459. 420R can be displaced. The rolling surfaces on which the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440 roll are formed in the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28. FIG.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). A first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24. FIG.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of displacement unit 400 in the first mode, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are views of displacement unit 400 in rear view of FIGS. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. and a state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhang position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the outermost positions (positions where they are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), A protruding member 485 is arranged at the bottom.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, the states shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protruding member 485 is raised to the state (extended position in the first aspect). In the extended position in the first mode, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are combined (the side surfaces of the three members are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the projection member 485 (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (Figs. 16), the driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surfaces of the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby displacing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420L. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction approaching each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 becomes the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. 421. As a result, the truck member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L (the truck member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, thereby displacing the right displacement member 420R. The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In this embodiment, the amount of displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (the width direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 20) is such that the amount of displacement on the lower end side is smaller than the amount of displacement on the upper end side ( In other words, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is made shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start to displace substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the extended position in the first mode ( 23 and 24) are driven substantially simultaneously. That is, the lateral displacement speed of the upper end side (carriage member 440) is made faster than the lower end side (driving pin 488b).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while being rotated, instead of being non-rotatably displaced in the left-right direction while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to rotate and displace the displacement member in this way with the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. It has become possible for the first time to utilize the driving means of

Further, when the lateral displacement speed of the upper end side (the truck member 440) is different from that of the lower end side (the drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the truck member 440 changes. Since the driving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending vertically with a length larger than the diameter of the driving pin 488b, it is possible to absorb the change in the distance between the two. That is, since it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b can be formed to be rotatable and slidable, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability and durability of the operation can be improved. be able to.

23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in directions opposite to those described above, FIGS. 19 and 20 (retracted position), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) in a direction away from each other, and the protruding member 485 is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in a non-driving state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, A second mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. Note that FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are also referred to as appropriate in the description of the second mode.

25 is a front view of displacement unit 400 in the second mode, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of displacement unit 400 in rear view of FIG. 25 and 26 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the extended position in the second mode.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged at the retracted position), the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is such that the left displacement member 420L rotates on its upper end side (the axial center of the connection hole 422). It is placed in an attitude that allows it to rotate about its center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), the drive pin of the lower drive arm 484 is driven as shown in FIGS. 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485, so that the protruding member 485 is lifted, and the driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R move the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced (linearly moved) in a direction toward each other. That is, in the second mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around their upper end sides (the axis of the connecting hole 422).

Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-driving state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and A third mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. Note that FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are also referred to as appropriate in the description of the third mode.

27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third mode, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 as viewed from the rear in FIG. 27 and 28 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the extended position in the third mode.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending vertically with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b. Member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 acts on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. Together, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, displacing the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (linear motion).

That is, in the third mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around their lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side). Further, in the third mode, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the projecting member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the base member 410 is provided with guide means (for example, a guide groove), and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory along which the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way. As a result, the effect by displacing the displaceable member is one-pattern, and it is difficult to surprise the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (e.g., driving motor) is increased or decreased, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In contrast, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). Thus, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485) can be displaced in three modes (first mode, second mode and third mode). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one way, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode can be switched. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, in the first mode (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be caused to perform displacement dominated by parallel movement (linear motion), whereas in the second mode And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be caused to rotate (rotational motion) only, and the motion mode of the displacement can be different. can let As a result, it is possible to increase the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member, making it easier to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, there are some conventional products in which the rotation center is kept constant and only the rotation direction is changed to change the displacement mode. , It is not that the rotation center is the same but only the rotation direction is different. In this case, the lower end side is the center of rotation), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, making it easier to surprise the player.

In addition, in the first mode, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a combination of rotation and parallel movement (linear motion). is the same direction as the direction of rotation in Therefore, in the initial stages of the first mode and the third mode (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize that the displacement members are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other. can be hard to hit. On the other hand, in the first mode, the projecting member 485 is lifted as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the approaching direction, whereas in the third mode, the projecting member 485 is stopped. state can be maintained. That is, in the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction toward each other, if the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first mode. Players can be expected to

In the displacement unit 400, a carriage member 440, a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R are arranged (held) on a base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable. The upper end side (connection hole 422) is rotatably connected, and the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is in the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

Thereby, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first mode) including a rotational component and rotational motion (second and third modes). can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove. That is, if the trajectory is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the truck member 440, the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, but also the members 440, 488R It is necessary to provide a mechanism for continuously applying the driving force to 488L and 488R).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the truck member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can be guided in a straight line, and therefore the truck member 440 can be guided by the flat surface to be rolled. , the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize a rack and pinion mechanism, so their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operational reliability.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in any of the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. , One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by rolling of the carriage member 440 on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is guided by the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488L. 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between base member 410 and back cover 412 . That is, there is no need to provide different guide mechanisms for each mode, and therefore there is no need to employ a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the operational reliability and durability can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape when viewed from the front, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620 , a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620 , and a driving force of the drive motor 661 for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 661 to the projection plate member 620 . and a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped rear base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 612 arranged in front of the rear base 611, and is formed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

Note that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 when viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as a “display area”), and an area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. In (that is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the player to see the display of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side, and also the irradiation unit 650 emits light. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a form of a pattern or design, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the rear side and the front side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620 . The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 has a plurality of teeth engraved along its outer peripheral surface, and meshes with a gear 664 at the end of the gear train. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 with a U-shaped cross-section that continues in the circumferential direction between itself and the projection plate member 620, and includes a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641 , the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 . The detailed configurations of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposes the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (five in this embodiment) are arranged in a posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 passes through substantially the center of the projection plate member 620 . The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the rear side of the rear base 611 , and the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is connected (fixed) to the top gear 662 of the gear train. A gear member 630 provided on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33, the rear base 611 includes an inner standing portion 611a erected on the inner edge of the annular plate member and an outer standing portion 611a erected on the outer edge of the annular plate member. A setting portion 611c, an intermediate standing portion 611b standing between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611c, and an inner concave groove in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the inner standing portion 611a. 611d, an outer concave portion 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a restricting projection 611f projecting from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611a is erected from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member toward the front side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer erected portion 611c is erected from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member toward the front side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate erected portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611b. The intermediate upright portion 611b is divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end is connected to the outer upright portion 611c.

The inner recessed groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. formed by

The outer recessed groove 611e is a region for arranging an irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, inside, and is formed so as to surround the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. be.

The restricting protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C, which is pivotally supported by the front base 612, from rattling toward the rear side. and formed to protrude on the front side. In addition, in the present embodiment, the regulating projections 611f are formed at six locations at predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the rear surface of the front base 612, inner standing portions 611a, intermediate standing portions 611b, outer standing portions 611c and restricting projections 611f of the rear base 611 are provided. A set portion 612a, an intermediate erected portion 612b, an outer erected portion 612c, and a shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, when the base member 610 is assembled, the upright end surfaces of the upright portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 overlap the upright end surfaces of the upright portions 611a to 611c of the rear base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted through the restricting protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the rear surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g are shafts with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of LEDs 651, and is a unit for causing the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. are placed. That is, the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650 on its outer peripheral side.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the rear base 611 is superimposed on the rear surface of the front base 612. Thus, it is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612 .

36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36, the intermediate standing portion 612b of the front base 612 is formed with a cutout portion 612b1 having a substantially semicircular shape on the leading end side of the standing portion. Similarly, an approximately semi-circular notch 611b1 is formed at the same phase as the notch 612b1 on the upright distal end side of the intermediate upright portion 611b of the rear base 611 (see FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state in which the upright distal end surfaces of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b are superimposed (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b2 form a substantially circular opening when viewed from the front. be. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions with the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the cutouts 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b, and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. be done. In addition, the circular opening is set to have a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651 .

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of projection plate member 620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 640 taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. In FIG. 38, a virtual line M indicates the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 has a notch portion 621 in a portion of the outer edge and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation projection 611f of the rear base 611, and is formed by cutting out a portion of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line perpendicular to the radial direction. be done.

The reflecting portion 622 is a portion in which the interior of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front is processed into a shape such as a pattern or design. As a result, when the light that has entered the interior of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the reflecting portion 622, the light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the diffusely reflected light, and can visually recognize the shape of the reflecting portion 622 . That is, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620 by the light being incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620 , is formed from a plate-like body that is annular in front view, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the projection plate member 620 . It is set large and arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 37), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 includes a toothed portion 631 carved along the outer peripheral surface, a rear portion 632 on the side surface on the rear side, and an end portion on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the rear portion 632 inclined toward the front side. and a slanted surface portion 633 .

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface with which the gear 664 meshes as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that extends from an end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and that is inclined toward the front side. In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the rear surface portion 632. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ2 between the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (θ1=θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Also, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Furthermore, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (the upper side in FIG. 38), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 .

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641a on one side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b on the other side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. It has a front portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 that is inclined from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) end portion of the front portion 642 toward the rear side.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between facing the front side (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and is spaced apart from the front side plane of the projection plate member 620 by a certain interval around the axis. formed apart.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that rotatably holds the projection plate member 620 by contacting the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620, and the cross section thereof is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed circularly around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can form the guide groove 641 that guides the collar C by being arranged on the projection plate member 620 . That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 .

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from an end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 and that is inclined toward the rear side. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back side is the intersection angle θ3 between the front portion 642 and the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ4 between the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3=θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). 40(a) to 40(c) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. FIG. 40(a) to 40(c) illustrate the transition state when attaching the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. FIG. 39 and 40 illustrate a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the projecting portion C1 projecting radially outward is located on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 39(b)). 39(b) lower side) and the side face portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (the guide groove 641).

Also, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is greater than the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. is also set small (L1<L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap therebetween, the projection plate member 620 can rotate vertically and horizontally by the gap. The contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C even if the contact surface 641b is shifted. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be rotated smoothly.

Next, referring to FIG. 40(a) to FIG. 40(c), attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 40(a), the projection plate member 620 is placed on the front base 612 when the collar C is placed on the shaft portion 612f.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612 d of the front base 612 . That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner groove 612d is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640. By arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612d, the projection plate Member 620 can be positioned and placed.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the cutout portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the collar C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the back side (the upper side in FIG. 40(a)) is the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 40(a)) with respect to the axis of the shaft portion 612f. It is performed in a state of being tilted to the In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the projecting portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641. As shown in FIG.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(b)) around the tip of the projecting portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis of the collar C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40(c), by displacing the collar C to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(c)), the contact between the tip surface of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 are arranged at positions facing each other. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620 , the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641 .

Here, if a groove is formed in the outer edge of a circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are placed inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) to place the collars. Since it is necessary to arrange the collar and both hands are used for assembling, there is a problem that the assembling efficiency is low.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, so that it is not necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the color C as described above. do not have. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the projection unit 600 assembled in this way with the rear base 611 from the rear side.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG.

41(a) to 43(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In addition, in FIG.41(b), FIG.42(b), and FIG.43(b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate|omitted in order to make an understanding easy.

41(b), 42(b), and 43(b), the refraction angles when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 are Considered to have no effect on the invention, the light from light source A entering projection plate member 620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 640 is illustrated in an orthogonal manner. Furthermore, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is projected onto the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 . Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine (upper side in FIG. 41(b)).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is irradiated to the front or back of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, , the amount of light entering the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or rear side of the projection plate member 620 and traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed from a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. Even when the light traveling through the member 620 irradiates the front or back of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, It can be totally reflected on the sides of the back. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620 from decreasing.

That is, when light passing through a medium with a high refractive index travels to a medium with a low refractive index, the light is totally reflected without being incident on the medium with a low refractive index if the angle of incidence is increased. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like shape, and the light is incident from the end surface (edge) thereof, so the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, the light from the projection plate member 620 does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low refractive index, and the light can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 . As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

Similarly, the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and the air is similar. Since the refractive index of air is a value (refractive index 1) that is sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transparent material, light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 Light does not enter the air (atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 . As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620 . In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be made incident on the projection plate member 620 side. .

That is, at positions where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, the positions where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other are formed of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel like the light with the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the above irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 to be emitted. can.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters from the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 can enter from the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A. By increasing the amount of , it is possible to make (display) patterns and patterns clearly appear. Moreover, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

In addition, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 640. You can prevent it from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is different from the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. direction), the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on its inner side surface, but at least part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed such that the intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). ), the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) can be reflected toward the end portion 644 and then propagated along the inclined surface portion 643 so that the light with the irradiation angle β reaches the projection plate member. The area reflected to the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43( a ) and 43 ( b ), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 , the light with the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630 .

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620 . In this case, the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 adjoin (face) each other.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is in a state of being adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere). be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The projected light can be incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 620, like the light with the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the above irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LEDs 651 (light amount).

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. can be increased to make (display) the patterns and patterns clearly stand out (display). Moreover, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

In addition, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the gear member 630, and the appearance deteriorates accordingly. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is more likely to be incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A than when the gear member 630 is behind the light source A (downward in FIG. 43(a)). , the angle of incidence when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced. As a result, it becomes difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 at its side surface, but at least part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the state described above is achieved. (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 has the inclined surface portion 633, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed such that the intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). ), the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) can be reflected toward the end portion 634 and then propagated along the inclined surface portion 633, so that the light emitted at the irradiation angle γ can be The area reflected to the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge of the gear member 630 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the mounting structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG.

44(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44(b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). 45(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 45(b) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. is a cross-sectional view of. 44 and 45 show the state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, the state in which the board member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front, and a substrate on the back of the substrate member 652. It comprises a plurality of (two each in this embodiment) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 that are arranged.

The substrate member 652 is made of an elastically deformable material and formed into a horizontally long belt shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LEDs 651 are light emitting means for emitting light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along ( FIG. 44( b ) left-right direction).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and the two first blocks 653 are arranged on the central side of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction. Second blocks 654 are arranged on both longitudinal sides of the substrate member 652 with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed of a resin material in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and have higher rigidity (a characteristic of being less elastically deformable) than the substrate member 652 . Therefore, in the attached state to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG.

46(a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 along line XLVIb-XLVIb of FIG. 46(a). 46(c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c).

The first block 653 has a bottom wall portion 653a which is oblong in the front view, and side wall portions 653b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side (FIG. 46(a) paper surface). front side) is formed in a box shape with an open side.

Of the four side wall portions 653b, the facing side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a) has a fastening hole h recessed in the end face on the front side thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that Side wall portions 653b other than the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected to each other by a connecting wall 653c, and a projection 653c1 protrudes from the end face of the connecting wall 653c on the front side.

The second block 654 has a rectangular bottom wall portion 654a when viewed from the front and side wall portions 654b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. side) is formed into an open box shape. The bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a rectangular opening 654a1 in a front view, through which an electrical connection line can be inserted.

Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h in the front end face thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Side wall portions 653b erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h in the end face on the front side. can be concluded.

In the first block 653 and the second block 654, through-holes 653b1 and 654b1 are formed at two locations in each of side wall portions 653b and 654b erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (a) and FIG. 46(b)). The holding pins 612g of the front base 612 are inserted through the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, it is possible to position the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and to hold the blocks 653 and 654 at the positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(a)) (that is, a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes h). Moreover, it is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to a second imaginary plane passing through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46(a)) and perpendicular to the first imaginary plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the first blocks 653 can be shared, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the product cost. can be done. In addition, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 does not have orientation in both the vertical direction and the longitudinal direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so workability during assembly work is improved. can be achieved.

Similarly, the second block 654 is positioned with respect to a first virtual plane (that is, a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(c)). It is formed into a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two second blocks 654 are arranged for one substrate member 620, since the second blocks 654 can be shared, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. can be done. Further, when the second block 654 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have vertical directionality with respect to the substrate member 620, so that workability during assembly work can be improved. can be done.

Returning to FIGS. 44 and 45, description will be made. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the rear side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and with a predetermined gap between adjacent blocks. be.

Specifically, the front surfaces of the first block 653 and the second block 654 are superimposed on the rear surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back side of the substrate member 652 . In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 toward the front side.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the board member 652 , and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back side of the board member 652 . In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in the shape of a box with an open front, and are arranged with the open side overlaid on the back of the substrate member 652 . That is, both blocks 653 and 654 are provided with recesses in the surfaces on which they are superimposed (arranged) on the substrate member 652, so that the recesses (internal spaces) accommodate electronic components and connectors mounted on the substrate member 652. can be accommodated. Therefore, the electronic parts and connectors can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, thereby suppressing damage to the electronic parts and connectors due to contact with surrounding displaceable members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Also, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the rear surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, thereby suppressing damage (disconnection) of the circuit due to contact with a surrounding displaceable member (for example, the projection plate member 620). can. In addition, since the portion of the substrate member 652 where the blocks 653 and 654 are not disposed is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that protrudes toward the rear side (see FIG. 34), the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be spaced apart from the plate member 620 . As a result, it is possible to suppress damage (disconnection) of the circuit even in the portion where the blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

A method for arranging (assembling) the irradiation unit 650 thus configured to the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 in the region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, the holding pins 612g erected from the rear surface of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. .

As a result, both the blocks 653 and 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, the front surface of the rear base 611 is overlaid on the rear surface of the front base 612 , so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612 . That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (attached) to the base member 610 .

In this embodiment, when the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, as described above. That is, not only the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the others. be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 allows light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 . In addition to the large number of LEDs 651, the arrangement (mounting) of the LEDs 651 is such that each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do so, and the time and effort of the arrangement work increases.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on a substrate member 652 that is elastically deformable. are arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), the work of arranging a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the installation work of the LEDs 651 .

Further, by inserting the holding pins 612g of the rear base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. The direction of the illuminated surface can be defined (see Figure 34). In other words, it is not necessary to assemble the plurality of LEDs 651 to the rear base 612 while individually adjusting their irradiation surfaces. Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), it is possible to reduce labor for the work of arranging (attaching) the LED 651 from this point as well.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the rear base 612, vibrations and the like are prevented. By suppressing the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force, or by correcting the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself, it is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warpage and bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in the area where the first block 653 or the second block 654 of the substrate member 652 is arranged (that is, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in front view). is set. Therefore, warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to input of external force such as vibration can be easily suppressed, or warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself can be easily corrected. Easy to define. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the rear surface of the substrate member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at regular intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, one of the two fastening holes h formed in the second block 654 is formed in the connecting wall 654c. can be shortened. Also, the second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 in such a posture that the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed faces the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are positioned on both longitudinal end sides of the substrate member 652 .

Accordingly, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured while ) can be shortened to provide spacing between adjacent illumination units 650 . In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be arranged using such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily made close.

On the other hand, the first block 653 has two fastening holes h formed in the connecting wall 654c, so that the distance between the fastening holes h and the LEDs 651 can be shortened. In other words, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought closer to the LED 651 . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LEDs 651 to be affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration. Therefore, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, the distance between the fastening holes h formed at the two locations is large, so there is a possibility that the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes h at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, connecting walls 653c are provided between the side walls 653b in which the fastening holes h are formed, and projections 653c1 projecting from the connecting walls 653c are inserted through the substrate member 652. pass through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the projection 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by eliminating the need to provide the screw S1 separately. It can be easier to maintain.

Both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 (outermost in the longitudinal direction, left and right ends in FIG. 45(b)) are free ends (that is, not constrained by the second block 654). The attitude of the LEDs 651 positioned at both ends may become unstable. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the center of the arc is located on the front side. ) (see FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the rear surfaces of both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 against the front surface of the second block 654 . As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG.

47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a rear base 830 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 830, and a rear base 820 on the rear side of the rear base 830. A drive motor 880 arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the driving force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

The rear base 830 protrudes into an opening 831 formed to have a size through which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 can be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes shaft portions 832 and 833 formed thereon, and a back-side restricting portion 834 that protrudes toward the front side and extends in a curved shape.

A shaft portion of a driving motor 880 attached to the rear side of the rear base 830 is inserted through the opening 831 . Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the rear base 830 .

Also, the opening 831 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 . Accordingly, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of work processes for parts replacement when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts for supporting and rotatably holding transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 to be described later, and project from the rear base 830 toward the front side in a cylindrical shape.

The back-side restricting portion 834 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (backward direction of the paper surface of FIG. 47). It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view with an external shape slightly larger than that of the rear base 830 . The front base 820 includes a shaft supporting portion 821 recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 erected at the edge of the back side, and a side wall 822 protruding to the back side. , a front-side restricting portion 824 that protrudes toward the back side and extends in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 that protrudes toward the back side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 (to be described later) is inserted, and is recessed on the lower right side of the front base 820 in front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap between the rear base 830 and the front base 820 for arranging a transmission mechanism 860 and a connecting member 870 to be described later. It is erected on the upper and left and right edges (other than the lower end) of the front base 820 with a size larger than the size. Accordingly, when the front base 820 and the rear base 830 are fastened together, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be displaceably arranged therebetween.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion that engages with one end side (the upper side in FIG. 48 ) of a biasing spring SP, which will be described later.

The front-side restricting portion 824 is a projection that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 47). It extends in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP (to be described later) with a predetermined gap therebetween, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front base 820 toward the rear side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, which mesh with each other in series. is transmitted to

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a projecting portion 863c that projects in an arc shape about the shaft, and the rotation position of the shaft portion 863c. and a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting .

The toothed portion 863 a is a meshing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863 , so that the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863 .

The shaft portion 863 b is a shaft that is connected to the connecting member 870 , protrudes in a columnar shape toward the rear side, and is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863 .

The protruding portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the frontward displacement of the connecting member 870, and is formed to protrude from the outer edge portion on the back side of the transmission gear 863. It is formed curved in a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 is formed thereon. It is formed so as to protrude radially outward on the non-contact side surface.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850. The connecting member 870 is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front. A gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through, a displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and a contact formed projecting upward from the outside of the curved portion. a portion 873;

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870 .

The displacement-side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853 . Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850 .

The abutting portion 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the rear-side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 facing each other. be done.

In addition, the contact portion 873 has a front-to-rear width dimension of the front end that is slightly smaller than the distance between the rear-side regulation portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front-side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820 . It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the abutting portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back-side restricting portion 834 and the front-side restricting portion 824, thereby increasing the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced. can be prevented from becoming On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by contacting the front base 820 or the rear base 830 .

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (the right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft supporting portion 841 that is recessed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (supports) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the front end of the pin member 890 , and is positioned opposite the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 . formed in As a result, the pin member 890 is arranged between the opposing shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 , so that it can be prevented from falling out of the vertical displacement unit 800 .

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (the right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the other end side (the left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. The displacement member 850 is formed with a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a projection 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 for transmitting the driving force of the connecting member 870 .

The shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, as described above. is also formed large. Therefore, the displacement member 850 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 in a state in which the pin member 890 is inserted through the shaft hole 851 . , the displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a rotatable state about the axis of the shaft hole 851 .

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and protrudes from the back side of the displacement member 850 . Further, when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position protruding from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 to the back side, and the protrusion distance is set to the front side of the back base. is formed up to a position substantially coinciding with the side surface of the . Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the gravitational direction with respect to the front base 820 .

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft that is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, it is positioned below the front base 820 (see FIG. 50). lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870 .

The pin member 890 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 as described above, and is formed of a metal rod-shaped body that is harder than the displacement member 850 . As a result, damage to the rotating shaft can be suppressed when force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

In addition, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is divided into the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft supports 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistance can be divided into two parts, it is possible to suppress damage to the part due to an increase in resistance at one point.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. FIG. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. is. 54 to 56 show a state in which the rear base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 52) is positioned upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is positioned upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

At the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b connects the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. are arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, at the first position, the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 to form a state (that is, a dead point) in which no force component is generated to rotate the transmission gear 863 . As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

51 and 54, power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to rotate the drive motor 880, and the transmission gears 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are rotated. The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed in the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacing member 850, thereby rotating the displacing member 850.

In this case, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the displacement of the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the connecting member 870 A straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 intersects. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can cancel the state (that is, the dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 begins to rotate in the direction of rotation displacing the displacement member 850 (right rotation in FIG. 54), the gravity of the displacement member 850 pulls the gear-side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780. , in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, the energy consumed by the drive motor 880 during displacement from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the transmission gear 863 At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are substantially orthogonal, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, by turning off the power supply to the drive motor 880, the displacement member 850 is moved around the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be caused to reciprocate by the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction can be an orthographic projection of uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can perform interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if electric power is supplied to the driving motor 880 and driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement (the orthogonal projection of uniform circular motion) described above is different. In this manner, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, thereby increasing variations in displacement. That is, only by switching on or off the power supply to the driving motor 880 to switch whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, the variation of displacement can be increased, and the structure and control can be changed. Since there is no need for complication, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force to the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is cancelled, and the gravitational force of the displacement member 850 is applied. and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. The displacement can also be a combination of rotational motion about the shaft hole 851 as the center of rotation. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be made to perform interesting displacements.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (vertically displaced) as the displacement member 850 is displaced to rotate the transmission gear 863 . Since the posture of 863 is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the pushing/pulling direction. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocatingly displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be varied, and the displacement member can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axial center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 A straight line connecting the axial centers and a straight line connecting the axial centers of the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are located at substantially orthogonal positions. The magnitude of the force component in the direction to rotate the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the balanced position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced from the balanced position in either direction of pushing or pulling. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocatingly displaced, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balanced position. can be easily continued.

When power is supplied to the drive motor 880 from the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55 to further rotate the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (the transmission mechanism 860), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 moves further downward. is displaced to Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacing member 850 to rotate the displacing member 850 .

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (the left side in FIG. 53) is placed in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is placed downward. , a connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. As a result, since the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged downward, the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

At the second position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 A straight line connecting the axes of the holes 872 is arranged with the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 to create a state (that is, a dead point) in which no force component is generated to rotate the transmission gear 863 . As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

Next, transmission gear 863 and connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position. (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. 57(a) to 57(c), a portion of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), at the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the rear base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the rear base 830 or the transmission gear 863 .

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, at the first position, the displacement member 850 is arranged upward to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, so that the displacement member 850 is preferably stopped. However, by increasing the resistance to drive the displacement member 850, the stopped state can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 57(c), electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is rotated to the second position). 6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 do not face each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connection member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased. can be made smaller.

Therefore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace the displacing member 850 in front of the third pattern display device 81 in a short period of time. , the displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(c), the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 at the second position.

Here, when the displacing member that displaces up and down is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacing member is added to the inertial force at the time of stopping, so there is a problem that the displacing member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the vertical displacement unit 800 can bring the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 into contact with the transmission gear 863. is stopped by connecting member 870 contacting transmission gear 863, and by stopping rotation of transmission gear 863 (driving of drive motor 880). can be distributed in one As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), transmission gear 863 and connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described. 58(a) to 58(c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first driving range θ5. 58(a) to 58(c) illustrate transition states from the first position. 58(a) to 58(c), a portion of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced within the first drive range θ5, the first position is changed to the second position. As the transmission gear 863 shifts to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced along with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

Further, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while displacing the displacement member 850 to the first position of the retracted position. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to the position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be brought to a stopped state quickly.

That is, when displacing and stopping the displacement member 850, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force that stops the movement, but since the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, the stopped state can be quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced within the second drive range θ6, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. can be formed, the resistance to displace the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second driving range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the extension operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second driving range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced about the intermediate position (balanced position), The reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be smoothly performed by avoiding the generation of resistance by the portion 863c.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820 and the rear base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c). 59(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along the LIXa-LIXa line in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along the LIXb-LIXb line in FIG. FIG. 59(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along line LIXc-LIXc in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front-side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820 and the rear-side regulation portion 834 of the rear base 830. placed in

That is, the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 . This restricts the longitudinal displacement of the connecting member 870 .

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement-side connecting hole 872, the displacement member 850 tilts in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from tilting in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59(c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in

Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 and the front base 820 and the rear base 830 at the second position can be increased. As a result, resistance when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, in the vertical displacement unit 800, the abutting portion 873 is on a substantially straight line connecting the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear-side connecting hole of the connecting member 870. It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear-side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the rear base 830 , the abutting portion 873 of the connecting member 870 abuts against the front base 820 and the rear base 830 . Inclination of the portion 863b and the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 .

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. FIG. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is It is set to have the same outer diameter as the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 .

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 60(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60(b) is a projection along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640;

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the rear and front sides of the projection plate member 2620, respectively. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter that is the same as the outer diameters of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 . In addition, the projection plate member 2620 has a notch portion 621 in a part of the outer edge and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section that is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. and a guide groove 2641. The groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 60(b)) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. As shown in FIG. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and is formed to have a width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide grooves 2641 .

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. FIG. In addition, in FIG.61(b), FIG.62(b), and FIG.63(b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate|omitted in order to make an understanding easy.

61(b), 62(b) and 63(b), the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The angle of refraction at that time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is illustrated in a manner in which they are orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light of the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is projected onto the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620 . Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis center). Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. This allows the edge of the projection plate member 2620 to be placed near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LEDs 651 .

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 62(a)) from the guide groove 641. Light at angle β2 is incident on the front edge of groove forming member 2640 .

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620 . In this case, as in the first embodiment, at positions where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light irradiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is projected onto the projection plate member 2620 . can be made incident on

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 irradiates the groove forming member 2640 on the back side of the guide groove 641 (lower side in FIG. 62(a)). The light with the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the rear edge of the groove forming member 2640 .

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surfaces of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 at positions where they are adjacent (facing).

That is, by recessing the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is directed to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and made incident on the projection plate member 2620 .

Therefore, by recessing and forming the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the collar C and the role of collecting the light onto the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. .

Moreover, compared to the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the additional irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the emitted light from the LEDs 651 . .

Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 2640. You can prevent it from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light emitted to the gear member 630 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. In the first embodiment, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620. However, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are , a floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620 .

First, referring to FIGS. 64 and 65, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630 and groove forming member 640 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a projection along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 640;

65(a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and FIG. 65(b) is a side view of FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 along the LXVb-LXVb line, and FIG. 65(c) is the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 along the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65(a). and a cross-sectional view of a groove forming member 640. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. arranged on each side. The projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and is formed with protrusions 3623 projecting to the front side and the back side at the outer edge thereof.

The projecting portion 3623 is formed to have a substantially triangular cross section projecting toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64(b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) toward the outer edge. In addition, the projection 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the virtual line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the recessed groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. be done. On the other hand, the projection 3623 protruding to the back side is set on a virtual line G connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a recessed groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630, which will be described later. be.

The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 . In addition, the gear member 3630 includes a recessed groove 3635 which is recessed at a predetermined interval in the side surface on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 64(b)) and a screw-fixing member which is formed through the recessed groove 3635 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. and a stop hole 636 for.

The recessed grooves 3635 are grooves that are recessed in the radial direction and are formed on both circumferential sides of each stop hole 636 . Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64(b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate-like body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 . In addition, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the groove 3645 which is recessed at a predetermined interval in the side surface on the back side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. and an opening 646 for screwing.

The recessed groove 3645 is a groove that extends in the radial direction and is formed at a position facing the recessed groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630 . Thereby, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620 .

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface where the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are grounded is an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 is inserted. The planes overlap in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the holding force. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG.

66(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In addition, in FIG.66(b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate|omitted in order to make an understanding easy.

In FIG. 66(b), as in the first embodiment, the angle of refraction when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 does not affect the present invention. , the light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is illustrated in an orthogonal fashion. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 Incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620 . As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 toward the central side (axial side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end face of the projection plate member 3620 is can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the projection plate member 3620 can be made to reach the reflecting portion 622 more easily. and patterns can be made to stand out clearly.

On the other hand, the light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 . In this case, since the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side unlike the mode.

Therefore, light emitted from a light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected toward the projection plate member 3620, and is made incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630. can be suppressed from being incident. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the display provided on the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from being highlighted (displayed) by light other than the LEDs 651 .

In addition, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A portion where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646 , when light enters from the radially outer side of the opening 646 , the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

Furthermore, in this case, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion of the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed in the entire area overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction. Displacement of the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 with respect to the plate member 3620 can be suppressed.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light from the LED 651 is passed through the gap toward the axial center of the projection plate member 3620, There is a risk that light may leak from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed on the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Furthermore, the projection 3623 can increase the dimension in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66(a)) of the edge side surface of the projection plate member 3620, so that the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 . .

Next, an irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 67(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67(b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. FIG. 68(a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68(b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. FIG. In addition, FIG.67(b) respond|corresponds to FIG.44(b). 68 schematically shows a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 with screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651 . That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the board member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651 .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is the height of the projection plate member 620 at the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. The dimensions are set so that the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot come into contact with the LEDs 651 disposed between the two screws S2 when the outer peripheral surface is brought into contact (circumscribed).

This allows the LED 651 to be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, if it comes close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to rattling in the radial direction based on dimensional tolerance or assembly tolerance, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is twisted. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is made of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is made of a metal material. can increase the effectiveness of In addition, if the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn out, causing the projection plate member 620 to rattle in the radial direction. Also, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided.

Since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2 in this way, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since complicated shapes can be omitted, the shapes of the rear base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

In addition, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, it is possible to reduce the allowable amount of rattling in the radial direction due to the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of the parts, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LEDs 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 .

Next, a projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disc shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated around the center of the circle. , and is slidably displaced in one direction.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 includes a base member 5610 formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and having an opening at the center, and a base member 5610 slidably disposed in the opening of the base member 5610. a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 for emitting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 for driving the projection plate member. A gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmission to 5620 is mainly provided.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rear base 5611 having a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center, and is arranged in front of the rear base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the rear base 5611 . A projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) are stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. a central opening 5612h, an inner standing portion 612a erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h, It mainly includes two shaft portions 5612k projecting rearward from between the pair of holding portions 5612i, and a sliding projection 5612m projecting rearward from below the central opening 5612h. be.

The central opening 5612h has a horizontally long rectangular shape at the central portion of the front base 5612 when viewed from the front. The player can visually recognize patterns and patterns of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portions 5612i are projecting portions for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later. Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 that is recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) on the projecting surface thereof.

The concave groove 5612i1 is recessed from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 71) toward the end portion so as to have an arcuate cross-sectional shape. formed larger than The pair of recessed grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is equal to the axis of the rod member 5625. Set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after disposing the rod member 5625 on the inner peripheral surface of the recessed groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is formed at a position facing the recessed groove 5612i1 from the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). By arranging the holding part covers 5628 provided at both ends, the rod members 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion that serves as a rotation shaft of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the lower side of the central opening 5612h toward the rear side. Also, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at symmetrical positions about a vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 as an axis.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmissive material so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of the pattern. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end, and a reflecting portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620 . The rack 5627 is arranged below the central opening of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612) and is arranged at a position that is not visible from the front side of the assembled projection unit 5600. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620 (horizontal direction in FIG. 72). As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620 .

The rack 5627 is formed with a rack gear 5627a that meshes with the gear 5668 on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). and is formed over the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627 .

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the inclination of the rack 5627 when the rack 5627 is displaced in the horizontal direction by driving the drive motor 661. The sliding groove 5627b is elongated in the horizontal direction. A pair of sliding projections 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the rear base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated, and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the rear side of the projection plate member 5620 is a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally long rectangle in a front view facing the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 interposed therebetween. A shaped front cover 5626 is provided.

The bar member 5625 is longer in the left-right direction than the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction and shorter than the outer diameter of the rear base 5611 . It is arranged on the projection plate member 5620 sandwiched therebetween.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the bar member 5625, and the length in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. It is disposed on the projection plate member 5620 with the bar member 5625 sandwiched between it and the member 5620 .

The front cover 5626 has a groove portion 5626a recessed in the left-right direction on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620 and recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 72). The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged, and is recessed to have a substantially U-shaped cross section. be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626a. This allows the projection plate member 5620 to be slidably displaced relative to the rod member 5625 in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 .

Also, the bar member 5625 is arranged on the back side rather than the front side surface of the front cover 5626 . That is, since the bar member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626 , the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620 .

Here, if the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the rear side of the projection plate member 5620. FIG. However, since the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits the light incident thereon from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or design, the projection plate member 5620 is formed with grooves. If the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the amount of light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel due to the reduced thickness dimension, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be placed on the front cover 5626 in which the bar member 5625 is arranged without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the incident light from traveling inside the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult, and to prevent the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

In addition, as described above, since the bar member 5625 is attached to the front base 5612 at both ends so as not to fall off, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the bar member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid laterally. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the horizontal direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the first block are aligned with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. They are arranged in opposite positions. Accordingly, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is made incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the patterns and patterns of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be highlighted.

The side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged is formed with a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in a rear view toward the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 toward the rear side, and the raised dimension is set larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670, which will be described later. Thereby, a rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512 .

A projection 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the rear base 5611. FIG.

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650 .

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent into an L-shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front base 5612 with the bent portion positioned at the center in the left-right direction. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. A through hole 5671 is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, it can rotate with respect to the front base 5612 about the shaft portion 5612k.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670 , the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612 . That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670 , the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653 .

The rotating member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction of displacing the tip portion on one side of the shaft portion 5612k downward. 5612. Further, a displacement regulating projection 5612j projecting to the rear side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement restricting protrusion 5612j is a member that restricts the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip of the protrusion is located behind the rotating member 5670 arranged on the front base 5612 (toward the rear base 5611). It is positioned on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 . As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is restricted by the displacement restricting projection 5612j, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 toward the projection plate member 5620 is directed to the displacement restricting projection. It is possible to suppress being blocked by 5612j.

Next, the operation of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. 73(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

75(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. 76(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76 show a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed. In addition, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is just a left-to-right reversal of the displacement operation from the first state to the second state, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged substantially in the center of the central opening 5612h in the left-right direction, the rotational The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end thereof is displaced downward. Thereby, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotary member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed to It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light from the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be made incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 (left and right sides in FIG. 74(a)). The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, and the driving force is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) to the rack 5627. When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is slid rightward in front view (rightward in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 is also slid rightward (see FIGS. 73(b) and 74(b)). ). As a result, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side of the central opening 5612h when viewed from the front.

In this case, the front cover 5626 provided on the front side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 abuts on the other side of the L-shaped rotation member 5670 arranged in the sliding direction. As a result, a rotational moment can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k, which serves as the rotation axis, in a direction that pushes the one end side upward. Accordingly, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74) is displaced. (b) left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

As a result, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is slid, and the amount of light incident from the upper end face of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

In addition, as the projection plate member 5620 is slid and displaced, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed. can be changed. In other words, it is possible to change the mode of patterns and designs displayed on the projection plate member 5620 . As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, an LED arranged at a different position is turned on according to the displacement to keep the light amount of the projection plate member constant. As a result, it is necessary to control the lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs. As the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LEDs becomes more complicated, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Furthermore, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LEDs are arranged at different positions.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since there is no need to control the LED 651 to turn on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to irradiate a displaced irradiated object (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiating objects (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated object, the irradiation range of each irradiating object There is a problem that a portion with a weak amount of light is created between them, and when the object to be illuminated is displaced, brightness and darkness are created, which reduces the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-described problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the number of irradiators to be arranged increases, so the problem is that the product cost increases. there was a point

However, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 can be displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is displaced. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of brightness and darkness of light accompanying the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby suppressing loss of interest of the player. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the projection plate member 5620 is slid and displaced so that the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed. The drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654 can be combined, and it becomes unnecessary to newly provide a driving means for displacing the second block 654 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the product.

Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 and the respective blocks 653 and 654 made of an elastically deformable material, there is no need to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit is arranged on the front base 5612 and then connected with the wiring, so that the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base 5612, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, by reversing the driving of the drive motor 661, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h. Accordingly, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid to form the first state.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 on the side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is pushed up by the projection plate by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the front base 5612 and the front base 5612 . As the member 5620 is slid to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shape in the front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated around the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotational range of the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is restricted by being brought into contact with the displacement restricting protrusion 5612j.

As described above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. Description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the central opening 5612h in front view (see FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b)).

Next, a projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. possible.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 with the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member arranged so as to be partially visible through an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620 , an irradiation unit 650 that allows light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620 , a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620 , and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is transmitted to the projection plate member 6620 . A gear train (gears 662 to 664) for

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped rear base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 arranged in front of the rear base 611. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650 and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has an annular shielding member 6612r formed on the inner edge of the annular front base 612 of the first embodiment. A portion 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the rear side visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 which is annular in front view, The shielding member 6612r has a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 6612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c on the outer edge of the opening 6612p. are accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the bases 611 and 612 by overlapping the front surfaces of the bases 611 and 612 .

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612 . Also, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612 . Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the rear side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). ), so that it is difficult for the player to see it, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the display of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side to pass through and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. In addition, when the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design. , through the opening 6612p of the player. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or design in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 .

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside. Reflecting portion 6622 is a portion whose interior has been roughened by laser processing or the like, and a pattern, pattern, or the like is formed by dividing the projection plate member 6620 in the circumferential direction over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 when viewed from the front. be. In the present embodiment, the shape of the reflective portion 6622, such as patterns and patterns, is divided into six in the circumferential direction, and reflection areas 6622a to 6622f, such as six patterns and patterns, are formed (see FIG. 80). .

Further, the projection plate member 6620 has the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the rear side and the front side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge. Accordingly, as in the first embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664).

Next, referring to FIG. 80, the operation of projection unit 6600 will be described. 80(a) to 80(c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 80(a) to 80(c) illustrate transition states of the projection plate member 6620. FIG. Also, FIG. 80 illustrates a state in which the rear base 611 is removed. Also, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflecting portion 6622 (reflecting areas 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when the projection plate member 6620 is arranged at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is located inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front (viewed from the back to the front of the page). A reflective area 6622a is provided. Therefore, when the light from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to display the patterns and patterns of the reflection area 6622a inside the opening 6612p. In other words, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern that appears inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflective areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflective area 6622a. The display in areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be seen. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player will not be able to visually recognize the display other than the display surface, and other areas will be visible, which will spoil the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(b) and 80(c), when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, patterns and patterns of the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in front view are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and patterns can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or pattern is printed on the front surface of the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 6620), and the object to be irradiated is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible area (opening portion) of the object to be irradiated can be changed. 6612p), the pattern and pattern switching of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can understand which display will be displayed next before finishing the switching of the pattern and pattern. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed until the end.

In addition, even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates light to the object is turned off and the display surface of the object is darkened, the object to be irradiated may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lights in the store. By being irradiated, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns of the object to be irradiated.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmissive material, and by turning off the light from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the projection plate member 6620 becomes transparent, making it difficult to see the patterns and designs. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the illumination of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching of the patterns and patterns of the projection plate member 6620. 6620 displacements can be enjoyed to the end.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated about its center as the rotation axis. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of the 6612.

That is, when the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the installation space in the horizontal or vertical direction is limited. , the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and designs.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments described above, in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600, the substrate member 652 is provided with a total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654. However, this is not necessarily the case. The total number of the first blocks 653 and the second blocks 654 may be three or less, or may be five or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and the first block 653 alone or the second block 654 alone may be used.

In the first and second embodiments, the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface. Alternatively, the LED 651 , the first block 653 and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652 . In this case, the LED 651 is accommodated inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is made incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 .

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 of the projection unit 600 are made of a light transmissive material has been described. 630 and channel forming members 640, 2640 may be formed from two layers of light transmissive material and non-transmissive material.

For example, the rear portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of non-permeable material, and the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 and 2620 sides of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of non-permeable material. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of non-transmissive material can prevent light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . That is, light emitted by devices other than illumination unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transmissive material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from other devices It is possible to prevent light from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

Also, in this case, the layer formed of non-transmissive material is formed of a highly reflective metallic material or flexible material, or between the non-transmissive material layer and the transparent material layer. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material having a high reflectance or a flexible material. As a result, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the rear surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portions 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described. For example, the rear view 632 and the front part 642 are attached with a seal of a member (for example, silver foil, aluminum, etc.) having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, or a color with a high reflectance is attached. (for example, white) may be printed.

In this case, it is possible to prevent light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by stickers or printing. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from other devices It is possible to prevent light from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

Furthermore, the seal or printing makes it easier to reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted.

When a seal is attached, it may be attached in such a manner that the seal protrudes from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portions 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 toward the outer edge. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the projected seal portion, so that the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily collected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

In the above-described third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620, a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided. May be interposed.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is certainly totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material with high reflectance, and can travel from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3. Patterns and patterns can be made to stand out clearly.

In addition, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance can prevent light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate member 3620 . That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member made of a highly reflective non-transmissive material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is projected onto the projection plate. It is possible to prevent patterns and designs from being incident on the member 3620 and displayed in front of the projection plate member 3620 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the coil spring is used as the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a leaf spring. As for the mounting method, a mode of connecting the projections 852 and 823 and mounting, or a mode of mounting between the rotating shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820 are exemplified.

In the first embodiment, the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotated around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. 850 may slide in a guide groove formed in front base 820 . In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (the direction of gravity), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be controlled as in the first embodiment. Since the motion can be an orthographic projection of uniform circular motion and the displacement speed can be varied, the displacement member 850 can be caused to perform interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light from the LED 651 is made incident from the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate Patterns and designs can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620 , 2620 , 3620 , 6620 .

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is positioned so as not to face the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 The surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 are arranged at positions different in the front-rear direction from the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620), and the light emitted from the LED 651 The projection plate members 620 , 2620 , 3620 , 6620 , the gear members 630 , 3630 and the groove forming members 640 , 2640 , 3640 may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end surfaces thereof.

In this case, the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are irradiated with light emitted in a direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LEDs 651, while the irradiation surfaces of the LEDs 651 are obliquely irradiated. Part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used both as light for displaying patterns and patterns on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and as light for irradiating other objects to be irradiated.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 are arranged in parallel. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620 , 2620 , 3620 and 6620 .

Specifically, the projection plate members 620, 2620, and 3620 are arranged such that the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the rear side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged. , 6620 may be irradiated. In this case, when a pattern or pattern is displayed on the surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620, the light from the LEDs 651 leaks from the inner edges of the front bases 612 and 6612, which are annular in shape when viewed from the front. can be suppressed.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged facing the front side, and the light irradiated in the direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Furthermore, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the rear side or the front side, and is arranged in a state of being inclined with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. The position may be such that the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 are irradiated with the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of .

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the back side or the front side and arranged in a state inclined with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is changed. The position may be such that the light irradiated in the direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated to the front portions 632 of the groove forming members 640 , 2640 , 3640 or the rear portions 632 of the gear members 630 , 3630 .

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is made incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is illuminated. Although the case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620 may be different.

That is, by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 to divide the region of the reflection part 622 (for example, into three regions), the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is divided into three regions. The light incident from the section is emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the first area, and the light incident from the left side is emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the second area, and is emitted from the right side. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 of the third region. Thereby, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns of patterns and designs to be displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the loss of interest of the player.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for illuminating the first to third regions are provided around the object to be illuminated (projection plate member 5620) to illuminate the first to third regions (for example, The light source arranged on the left side emits light from the upper end to illuminate the first area, the light source arranged on the left side emits light from the left end surface to illuminate the second area, and the light source arranged on the right side emits light from the right edge. It is also possible to irradiate the third area by irradiating the light from the surface), but it is necessary to arrange a plurality of light sources for that, and there is a problem that the product cost increases.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, that is, the case of irradiating the second or third area and the case of irradiating the first area. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be provided can be reduced accordingly, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by connecting it to the shaft of a newly provided drive motor.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654. It is possible to partially increase or decrease the amount of light emitted from the front of the . That is, by changing the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620, it is possible to change the display density of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 for irradiating the projection plate member 620, and the gear for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 are placed between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. Although the case where the trains (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. Two or more of the plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying a pattern or a pattern on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize a combination of the patterns and patterns displayed on each projection plate member 620.例文帳に追加As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a display pattern of a plurality of patterns and designs, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

In the above-described third embodiment, the light from the LED 651 does not enter the central side from the side edge of the projection plate member 3620 where the bolt T is arranged, but this is not necessarily the case. Alternatively, the bolt T may be made of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) so that the light projected on the side surface of the bolt T is reflected toward the center of the projection plate member 3620 . In this case, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 can be easily collected on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620 .

In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals to partially form a portion where no pattern or design is displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 (the light from the LEDs 651 is not incident). You may make it divide|segment a display.

In addition, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A portion where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646 , when light enters from the radially outer side of the opening 646 , the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while the LED 651 provided in the irradiation unit 650 is emitting light, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is being displaced (rotated). .

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It can be anything.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 123. FIG. In this first control example, an effect (fluctuation effect) for showing the lottery result of special symbols executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and an effect (variation effect) for showing that a jackpot game is being executed ( A big hit effect) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In this control example, as an effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, a jackpot effect (continuous jackpot effect) spanning the multiple jackpot games is executed. It is configured as follows. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the ball entrance information can be stored. It is discriminated whether or not ball entry information for winning a big win exists in the ball information, and when it is discriminated that the ball entry information for winning a big win exists, a plurality of jackpot games are straddled. A continuous jackpot effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is finished, depending on the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game. You can make them interested in the jackpot performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is possible to vary the contents of the jackpot presentation based on the ball entry information that is newly stored during the jackpot game as well as the ball entry information that is stored at the timing at which the jackpot game is executed. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball-entering information, to facilitate the execution of consecutive big win effects, and to make the players interested in the big win effects.

In addition, in this control example, as a continuous jackpot effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be varied based on the number of stored pieces of ball-entering information (the number of pending memories) at the time the jackpot game is executed. ing.

In addition, in this control example, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric sapo) (variable state (high probability, with electric sapo), time saving state (low probability, with electric sapo) )), an effect (battle effect) is executed to indicate that the game state is continuing. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuing.

Furthermore, the above-described battle effect is composed of a effect (battle ready-to-win) that suggests whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will end, and a effect (pre-battle effect) to determine the effect mode of the battle ready-to-win. Configure. By constructing in this way, when the game state advantageous to the player actually ends, for example, when the game state shifts to the normal state after the end of the big win, the battle performance is continued in a period other than when winning the normal jackpot. Therefore, the player continues to have a sense of anticipation for the continuation of the game state advantageous to the player and an uneasiness that makes the player think that the game state advantageous to the player has ended. It is possible to play a game while holding the robot.

In addition, in this control example, as an effect for suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, a plurality of effects with different degrees of expectation for big win are executed. As a result, the player can have different expectations for the big win depending on which performance is executed. Furthermore, a plurality of expectation degree suggesting modes capable of stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win can be displayed in one variable performance, and the expectation degree suggesting mode is configured to be variable during one variable performance. .

In addition, in the present control example, the amount of stepwise variation of a plurality of expectation level suggesting modes during one variable performance is summed up to execute the variable expectation level suggesting performance suggesting to the player. ing. By constructing in this way, a player who grasps the performance contents of the variable expectation suggestion performance can play the game while predicting which expectation level suggestion mode will be changed to what extent, and the performance effect. can increase

Furthermore, in this control example, a specific effect (PUSH display effect ) is executed, and a foreshadowing effect is executed to notify that the countdown effect will be executed. During one variable performance, the start timing of the precursor performance, the execution timing of the specific performance, and the period of the countdown performance can be determined from a plurality of times, and the precursor performance is determined based on the determined contents. It is configured such that the presentation mode and the presentation mode of the countdown presentation are set.

By configuring in this way, the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, compared to the structure in which the suggestive effect is executed for a predetermined period of time.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. The third pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main patterns imitating the numbers "0" to "9". . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (to be described later) is a big win, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are arranged (for example, "777"). It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this first control example), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

A small display area Dn1 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dn1 displays a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) (see FIG. 85(a)). That is, in this control example, the small display area Dn1 is used as the guidance display area Dn1. By constructing in this way, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot toward just by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dn1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

A small display area Dn2 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dn2 is configured to be able to simply display the variable display of the third pattern. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dn2, for example, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region Dm. is the case. During execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more comprehensible effect. Further, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area Dn2 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third pattern is continuing. can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this secondary display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 81(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In the first control example, since the maximum number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this control example, the number of reserved symbols is varied according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 even though the player has continuously shot the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game is not played at all by the pachinko machine 10 because the player quits the game. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters A variable display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140, the balls that have not been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of held balls. Although the details will be described later, the sub-display area Ds is divided into a first display area Ds1 and a second display area Ds2 for displaying game contents and effect contents to the player (see FIG. 102 ( a) see). The pending symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds are the pending symbols corresponding to the next variation (front view of FIG. ) is erased, and the remaining reserved symbols are shifted to the left and displayed.

Here, the symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed (the reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost during the previous variation) is the symbol display area during execution (the area where the expectation degree display mode Dk1 in FIG. 102 is displayed) ). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which reserved symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 81(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and left end (outside the active line) of the main display area Dm, three parts of the main pattern and three parts of the sub-symbol of the third pattern are displayed.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or enters the second ball entrance 140 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of times the ball enters are each held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the ball entering the second ball entrance 140 can be held up to four times each, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is It is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the second ball entrance 140 are not limited to be the same. The upper limit of the number of held balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be greater than the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the second ball entrance 140, or conversely, it may be less. good. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the flow of each effect executed in the first control example will be roughly described. FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the content of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 82( a ), in this control example, different effects are executed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, when the game state is "normal", that is, when the game state is a normal state that is not during the jackpot, the variable probability state, or the time saving state, the normal effect is executed, and the game state is the "jackpot". ”, the production during the jackpot is executed, and if the gaming state is “probability variable or time saving”, that is, if the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state, during probability changing (probability variable state or time saving state Middle) The production is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the currently set game state just by looking at the effect being executed, and to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine. In this control example, each effect is executed in association with the game state, but for example, a common effect that can be executed when a plurality of game states are set may be provided. . As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the game state that is currently set by visually recognizing the effect that is being executed, and the player can play the game while expecting that the game state that is advantageous to the player is set. You can let people play games.

In addition, although FIG. 82 explains that the effect contents (display contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differ according to the game state, the aspect included in the effect contents is the third symbol. It is not limited to the display mode displayed on the display device 81, and includes, for example, the output mode of sound output by the audio output device 226 and the lighting mode of the lamp executed by the lamp display device 227. be.

First, the effects executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. First, in this control example, the number of special symbol reserved balls and the contents of reserved and stored ball entry information (for example, determination of whether or not there is entry ball information that wins a prize) at the time the jackpot game is executed result), the content of the effect to be executed during the jackpot game is set.

Specifically, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed continuously, an effect (for example, 15 rounds of jackpot games is executed) that partially informs the content of the previous jackpot game (first jackpot game) a performance 1 during a jackpot, in which a performance of notifying the number of rounds for 5 rounds is continuously executed across a plurality of jackpots to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. , Execute the production corresponding to each individual jackpot game, and between the plurality of jackpot games (during the special symbol fluctuation period performed during the period from the end of the previous jackpot game to the execution of the next jackpot game) By continuing to display the ending effect of the jackpot game, a mid-jackpot effect 2 that directs as if a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed, and the following when the previous jackpot game is executed. A performance 3 during a big win, which notifies execution of a big win game and executes a continuous performance for a plurality of big win games, can be set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 83(a), the content of the above-described effect 1 during the big win will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect 1 during the jackpot. During the jackpot production 1, as shown in FIG. 83(a), when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "3" (a state in which a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a production during a big win that can be set when information on entering a winning ball is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the effect 1 during the jackpot is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, first, a part of the number of rounds of the jackpot 1 (5 rounds (R ))) is executed (5R effect) After that, the 5R effect is continuously executed until the next big win game (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) is completed. is set so that a jackpot game effect for 25R is executed.

In other words, instead of setting the production content (production scenario) to be executed during one jackpot game as a series of production content (production scenario), it is configured to be set in units of a predetermined period (for example, 5 rounds). , a new performance content (scenario) is set based on the ball entry information retained and stored at that time.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 83(a), when the jackpot 1 (15R) is started, the 5R effect 1 (see FIG. 85(a)) is executed. When this 5R effect is started, an effect (fixed round number notification) is executed to inform the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least 5 rounds. Then, when the jackpot game progresses up to the 4th R, a suggestive effect (see FIG. 85(b)) that suggests whether or not the next 5R effect will be executed is executed, and in the 5th R, the 5R effect is executed next. A notification effect (see FIG. 86(a)) for notifying the result of whether or not is executed is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 83(a), the 15th round jackpot is set as the first jackpot, so the 5R effect is executed three times. Here, the 5R effect executed for the third time (5R effect 3) is a period until the start of the second big win to be executed next, that is, the ending period of the first big win and the first big win. It is set so as to be executed even during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation which is executed after the end (see FIGS. 87(a) and 88(a)). Then, the 5R effect 4 is executed along with the start of the second big win (the start of the opening period of the second big win).

As a result, a new reserved memory is generated during the jackpot game, and if the reserved memory contains information on entering a ball corresponding to a jackpot with a special symbol, the information on entering a ball (for example, the number of rounds) is used. It is possible to set a new effect (additional round number display). Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the contents of the big win performance to be executed during the big win are set as a series of performance scenarios at the start of the big win, the performance to be executed during the big win (display of the number of additional rounds) can be easily changed. .

Note that FIG. 83(a) shows an example in which a period of five rounds is set as one performance unit during the jackpot game, but the content of the performance may be set for each round. Further, it is also possible to perform a discrimination management process for discriminating the content of winning ball information for each round, and to set the effect contents for each predetermined round (for example, every five rounds). In addition, when new ball entry information is generated, the content of the entry information is determined, and the information (whether or not there is a jackpot, the number of rounds) used when setting the content of the performance during the jackpot is stored in the storage area. can be configured to

As a result, it is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the processing load at the timing (every five rounds in FIG. 83(a)) of setting the content of the effect during the jackpot game.

Here, the display contents of the effect 1 during the big win will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the performance 1 during the jackpot is executed, and FIG. FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an effect display for indicating whether or not the 5R effect continues, and FIG. 86(a) is an effect display for indicating that a new 5R effect will be executed; 86(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen in the round before the end of the jackpot 1, and FIG. 87(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example. FIG. 87(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that the jackpot will continue during the ending period of the jackpot 1, and FIG. 87(b) is a display showing that the jackpot will end during the ending period of the jackpot 1. FIG. 88(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the screen, and FIG. 88(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the special symbol variation after the end of the first jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the effect 1 during the jackpot is executed, the characters "jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been won and "777" indicating that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the special symbols. The third symbol stopped and displayed at is displayed in the main display area Dm. In the small display area (guidance display area) Dn1 of the main display area Dm, characters "Right shot" are displayed to guide the player to shoot the ball to the right shot area. On the upper right side, in a round number display area Dm2 for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game, a number of running rounds display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds currently being run is displayed, and the number of rounds being executed is confirmed. A fixed round number display mode Dm4 indicating the fixed round number is displayed.

In this control example, as the effect 1 during the jackpot, a 5-round (R) effect for informing the player in advance that a jackpot game for at least 5 rounds will be executed is executed. , "5" is displayed as the fixed round number display mode Dm4.

Then, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game (number of running rounds display mode Dm3) becomes "4", as shown in FIG. 86(a) reference) is executed (jackpot continuation effect). In this control example, selected images Dm5 to Dm7 imitating a "treasure box" are displayed as a display mode that can be selected by the player as a continuous jackpot effect, and a selected image Dm8 imitating an "arrow" is displayed. are displayed so as to correspond to each of Dm7. The player selects one of the selection images Dm8 displayed corresponding to each of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7, thereby selecting one of the three displayed "treasure chests". Select Treasure Chest.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, one of the three "arrows" that are the selection image Dm8 is displayed such that the display mode of one "arrow" is regularly varied. The selected images Dm5 to Dm7 corresponding to the changed display mode (variable display mode Dm9) become the selected images selected by the player, and the player's arbitrary "arrow" becomes the variable display mode Dm9. When the frame button 22 is operated, an arbitrary selected image is selected.

It should be noted that the method by which the player selects an arbitrary image to be selected is not limited to the content described above, and other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured so that it can be selected by touching the display area of any selected image among the selected images Dm5 to Dm7 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the player can select a frame. By operating the button 22, it may be configured such that the selection image Dm8 that becomes the variable display mode Dm9 can be selected.

Furthermore, in this control example, the same display mode is displayed as the display mode of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7, but different display modes may be displayed for each of the selected images. In this case, when the selected image is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode, the following 5R effect may be easily executed. As a result, the expectation that the big win game will continue can be enhanced at the stage when the selected image is displayed, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

When the number of rounds of the jackpot game enters the fifth round with the selected image Dm5 selected, the screen shown in FIG. 86(a) is displayed. In FIG. 86(a), only the "treasure box" (selected image Dm5) selected in the jackpot continuation effect executed in the fourth round of the jackpot game is displayed, and from among the "treasure box", the number of confirmed rounds is displayed. "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 to be added to the mode Dm4, and an additional effect is displayed in which the value of the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10".

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least the next five rounds. Note that FIG. 86(a) shows the display screen when "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10, but in the jackpot continuation effect (see FIG. 85(b)), the selected selected image , the content of the additional round number display mode Dm10 is set differently. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the continuous jackpot effect.

In addition, in this control example, the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed with a numerical value corresponding to the number of rounds. Any display mode may be used as long as the display mode is variable corresponding to the character, and a display mode using abstract expressions such as the movement, color, and size of the character may be used. By using an abstract display mode as the fixed round number display mode Dm4 in this way, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of predicting the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game for the player.

In addition, since a player who has been playing games for a long time can understand the regularity of the display mode using abstract expressions, it becomes easier for the player to understand the content of the jackpot game than other players. satisfaction can be increased. As for the contents of the jackpot game in this case, the number of rounds of each jackpot game is displayed in the middle jackpot effect in which the effect that the first jackpot and the second jackpot are continuously executed is executed. It is preferable to make it possible to comprehend by the regularity of the mode.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to predict whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will be set especially after the second big win game is finished, based on the number of rounds of the second big win game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who has been playing the game for a long time with game information that is more advantageous than the other players, so that the player can be motivated to continue playing the game for a long time.

In addition, in FIG. 86(a), "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 to be added to the fixed round number display mode Dm4 while the fifth round of the round game is being executed. An example is shown in which the value of the display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10". The content of the effect may be set so as to be the inter-round interval period from the end of the 1st round game to the start of the 6th round game.

In addition, means for determining the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the continuous jackpot effect shown in FIG. 3 seconds), the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed during the fifth round of the game, and the operation timing is set for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). If it exceeds or if it is not operated, the additional round number display mode Dm10 may be displayed during the inter-round interval period after the end of the fifth round.

In this way, by varying the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode Dm10 based on the timing of the player's operation of the frame button 22 and the presence or absence of the operation, the player can actively participate in the production. , and the performance effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the number of additional rounds display mode Dm10 may be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 or the presence or absence of the operation. A determination means may be provided for determining whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 during a specific one second), and the timing for displaying the additional round number display mode Dm10 may be varied based on the determination result. . Further, only when the operation content of the frame button 22 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated during a specific one second during the fourth round of the round game), the additional round number display mode Dm10. may be configured so that the values displayed in are different.

Next, the production content for showing that a plurality of (two) jackpot games are continuously executed, that is, the special from the end of the first jackpot game to the start of the second jackpot game The contents of the effect during the symbol variation period will be described with reference to FIGS. 86(b) and 87(a).

First, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the continuous jackpot effect is executed based on the start of the round (14th round) immediately before the final round of the first jackpot game. FIG. 86(b) shows an effect mode different from the continuous jackpot effect shown in FIG. 85(b), and the number of selected images displayed on the display screen and the display mode are different. Specifically, the number of images to be selected is changed from three to two, and a more gorgeous display mode than usual is set as the display mode of the selected image Dm5. In this way, by varying the effect mode of the continuous jackpot effect, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the big win game will continue depending on the effect mode of the continuous jackpot effect to be executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the contents of the performance, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

FIG. 86(b) shows an effect mode different from FIG. 85(b) in order to explain variations of the continuous jackpot effect. The same effect mode as that of FIG. 85(b) is naturally set to be executed as the continuous jackpot effect executed in the round. In this way, by using the same performance mode for the continuous jackpot performance performed during the first jackpot game and the continuous jackpot performance performed at the end of the first jackpot game, it is possible to perform the first game at any timing. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the jackpot game has ended (how many rounds the first jackpot was in).

In addition to the method of setting the continuous jackpot production described above, for example, the continuous jackpot production is executed in the final round of the jackpot game according to the selected image ("treasure box") selected in the continuous jackpot production. It may be configured to suggest to the player that it is a continuous jackpot effect.

When the selected image Dm5 is selected in the continuous jackpot effect shown in FIG. 86(b) and the final round (15th round) is entered, the same display as the additional effect shown in FIG. 86(a) is executed. The display is continued during the ending period after the end of the final round, as shown in FIG. 87(a). Then, when the ending period of the jackpot ends (the jackpot ends) and the special symbols start to fluctuate, the display screen shown in FIG. 88(a) is displayed.

This FIG. 88(a) is an example of the display screen during the period when the first jackpot game is over and the special symbols are changing. As shown in FIG. 88(a), even after the first jackpot game is over (after the special symbols are started to change), the display of the additional effect is continuously executed. In the small display area Dn2, the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Then, when the variation of the special symbols that have won the jackpot stops, a combination of symbols (for example, "777") indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dn2, and the additional effect display is executed. The next jackpot game is started while the state is maintained.

In this control example, when the additional effect is set as the effect during the jackpot, the number of rounds set for the running jackpot and the next jackpot that will be held ) and the number of rounds set in ), so that the display mode of the additional effect can be set. An additional round number display mode Dm10 including the number of rounds set for the next big win can be displayed during the first big win.

In the above example, the period from the final round of the jackpot to winning the next jackpot (the period from winning the next jackpot, passing the opening period of the jackpot, and running the first round game) period), an additional effect is displayed continuously, but other effects may be used. For example, the additional effect is completed in the final round (15th round), 87(a)) and during the special symbol fluctuation period (see FIG. 88(a)), a blessing effect may be executed to congratulate the addition of the number of rounds, or the final round (15 round), and during the ending period (see FIG. 87(a)), the addition effect is completed, and during the special symbol fluctuation period (see FIG. 88(a)), the effect of congratulating the addition of the number of rounds. may be executed, and in the final round (15th round), the jackpot continuation effect (see FIG. 86(b)) executed in the 14th round is continuously displayed, and during the ending period (FIG. 87 (a)) and during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88(a)), the additional effect may be executed.

When executing the above-mentioned blessing effect, the round following the round in which the additional effect (for example, the additional effect executed in the fifth round (see FIG. 86(a))) is executed during one jackpot ( For example, it is preferable to configure so that a similar blessing effect is executed also in the sixth round). As a result, a performance mode in which it is difficult for a player to grasp how many times the jackpot has been won while the top-up performance is being executed, that is, a performance mode of the top-up performance executed during one big win; The effect mode of the additional effect executed between two big wins can be the same (same except for an error that makes it difficult for the player to identify).

On the other hand, when there is no round number to be added by the additional effect, as shown in FIG. ”, a comment “unfortunately, the big win is over” is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the big win ends.

In addition, this control example is configured such that a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as an interval period (interval interval period between rounds) between each round game executed during the jackpot game. may be used, for example, even if the number of jackpot rounds is the same according to the type of jackpot won, it may be configured to vary the period of the inter-round interval. In this case, as the inter-round interval set during one jackpot, the inter-round interval before the end of a round that is a multiple of 5 (for example, the inter-round interval set between 5 and 6 rounds) is set to 5 seconds, and the other round interval is set to 2 seconds, and the interval between rounds two rounds before the start of a round that is a multiple of 5 (for example, a round set between 3 and 4 rounds Interval between rounds is set to 5 seconds, and interval between other rounds is set to 2 seconds.

Moreover, when using the jackpot types with different inter-round intervals as described above, it is preferable to switch the effect during the jackpot at the timing when the long-term inter-round interval is set. Furthermore, as in this control example, when executing the effect during the jackpot with a predetermined period (5 rounds) as one unit, from the start of the jackpot (start of the opening period of the jackpot, or the start of the first round) Since the interval until the long interval between rounds is first set (for example, the end of the third round) is less than one unit of the performance during the jackpot, the performance other than the additional performance is executed. good to do

Furthermore, in this control example, regardless of the type of jackpot, a certain period (for example, 1 second) is set as the ending period of the jackpot. It may be configured to be different for each type, and the opening period of the jackpot may be configured to be different for each jackpot type to be set.

In this way, the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) is the same, but the opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period set for the jackpot are varied according to the set jackpot type. and setting the performance during the jackpot across a plurality of jackpot games, the player is asked how many times the jackpot has been won while the performance during the jackpot is executed once. can be difficult to grasp.

In addition, when the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the winning of the next jackpot is different, that is, when the next jackpot is won with the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the previous jackpot. Even if the special symbol variation period executed between the big wins differs between the case of winning the next big win in the special symbol variation of the third rotation, the opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the period set for the big win. By configuring the ending period to be different according to the type of the set big win, the performance during the big win can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, referring back to FIG. 83(b), the contents of the above-described jackpot mid-effect 2 will be described. FIG.83(b) is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation 2 during a big hit. During this jackpot production 2, as shown in FIG. 83(b), when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "2" (a state in which a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a production during a big win that can be set when the winning ball entry information is not included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the effect 2 during the jackpot is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the jackpot game effect (15R After the end of the jackpot 1, the next jackpot (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) is executed. Then, when the jackpot 2 is executed, the contents of the effect are switched from the ending effect to the 10R effect.

This production during the jackpot 2 is such that a plurality of consecutively executed jackpot games are continuously executed when ball entry information corresponding to the hit is included in the reserved ball newly acquired during the jackpot game. It is directed to In other words, the jackpot game production corresponding to the jackpot 1 is the normal jackpot game production (15R production), and based on the ball entry information of the reserved ball newly acquired during the jackpot game, the content of the ending production is changed continuously. A plurality of jackpot games that are executed as a result can be produced so that they are continuously executed.

By configuring in this way, the production (continuous jackpot production) in which a plurality of jackpot game machines are continuously executed can be set based on the reserved balls obtained during the jackpot game, so that the continuous jackpot production can be performed. Execution can be facilitated, and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, even if the normal jackpot game effect is executed, the player can play the jackpot game while expecting to shift to the continuous jackpot game effect.

88(b) to 89(b), the contents of the effect displayed between two big wins in the effect 2 during the big win (see FIG. 83(b)) will be described. FIG. 88(b) is a diagram schematically showing the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first jackpot, and FIG. 89(a) shows that the first jackpot ends and the special symbols start to fluctuate. FIG. 89(b) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen in the state where the special symbols are won.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first big win, information for showing the number of rounds of the current big win and the number of balls acquired during the big win in the main display area Dm. (acquired points) is displayed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the special symbols start to change, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the ending display is continuously displayed and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is suggested to the player. In the round number display area Dm2 for the game, a running round number display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds that are currently being performed and a confirmed round number display mode Dm4 indicating the confirmed number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed are displayed during the jackpot. continue to be displayed in the same way. In addition, a small display area Dn2 for displaying the variation of the third symbol, a pending execution area Dn3, and a pending symbol display area Dn4 are displayed. In FIG. 89(a), the second reserved design from the left in the reserved design display area Dn4 (a reserved design with a circle marked with a 3 that is displayed in a variable manner one after another) wins the jackpot. It shows a state where

Then, when the special symbol jackpot is won (when the variable display of the reserved symbols marked with a circle 3 stops), as shown in FIG. A comment ``the jackpot will continue'' for notifying that a new jackpot will start is displayed, and a fixed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed so as to indicate the round number ``10'' of the second jackpot. The value is variably displayed from "15" to "25". Also, in the small display area Dn2, the third symbol combination "777" indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed.

Although the contents of the effects executed in the 2nd effect during the big win have been described above, the same effect may be used in the 1st effect during the big win. That is, in the above-described jackpot middle production 1, since the production using a plurality of rounds is executed as the jackpot continuous production, for example, during the final round of the first jackpot or the ending period after the final round, the jackpot When a new reserved ball containing ball entry information to be won is obtained, it is difficult to execute the performance during the jackpot so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots. In such a case, by executing the same effect as the above-described effect 2 during the big win, the effect during the big win can be smoothly executed so as to straddle a plurality of big wins.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84(a), the content of the above-described effect 3 during the big win will be described. FIG. 84(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect 3 during the big win. As shown in FIG. 84(a), during this jackpot production 3, when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "4" (a state where new reserved balls cannot be acquired during the jackpot game). ), and when information on entering a winning ball is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired, the effect during the jackpot can be set.

When the effect 3 during the jackpot is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the next jackpot game (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) A jackpot game effect (25R effect) is executed in which the game content of the game is also integrated.

The performance 3 during the jackpot is a state in which it is not possible to acquire a new reserved ball during the jackpot game, that is, a state in which it is already possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is won continuously at the timing when the jackpot 1 is executed. It is a production that is executed in When the performance 3 during the jackpot is executed, the player can be immediately notified that the jackpot has been won in succession, and the player can be given a sense of security, and a new hold is made during the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the player's excessive expectations for successively winning the big wins due to the execution of the performance 2 during the big wins in a state in which the ball cannot be acquired.

As described above, in this control example, when the jackpot is won consecutively within a predetermined period (within the holding memory), the jackpot is designed to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are being continuously executed. A plurality of middle performances are prepared, and the middle-big-hit performances to be executed are set based on the number of special pattern reserved balls at the time when the previous big-hit game is executed and the determination result of the ball entry information stored in the reservation. is doing.

Furthermore, the plurality of mid-jackpot productions have different timings for informing the player of successive jackpot wins. As a result, the player can enjoy the jackpot game to the end while expecting to win consecutive jackpots.

In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed in a state in which there is a vacancy in the reserved memory number of special symbols (a state in which a new reserved memory is possible during the jackpot game), it corresponds to a jackpot of special symbols during the jackpot game. Even if the reserved pattern is reserved and stored, the performance is reserved and stored at the time of execution of the big winning game because the performance during the big winning can be executed to make it appear that a plurality of big winning games are continuously executed. Compared to the case of determining the performance during the big win based on the information, the performance during the big win is easily executed to make it appear that a plurality of big win games are continuously executed, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

In addition, as one of the plurality of effects during the jackpot, the number of rounds to be executed in the previous jackpot game can be divided into a plurality of times and partially notified to the player, so that the effect during the jackpot this time is one time. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the performance is executed in the jackpot game or the performance is executed across a plurality of jackpot games. Therefore, the player can play while expecting that the big winning game will continue for a long time.

In this control example, during the special symbol variation period after the end of the jackpot game, the small display area Dn2 displaying the variation of the third symbol, the pending execution area Dn3, Although a configuration is used in which the reserved symbol display area Dn4 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, other configurations may be used. If it is determined by the means that the conditions for executing the continuous jackpot performance are established, the variation display of the third symbol or the above-described reserved symbol is provided even during the special symbol variation period. It is preferable to execute a process that does not display the related information, or execute a process that displays the contents in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the contents (for example, reduced display or movement of the display area).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the end timing of the first big win game and the start timing of the second big win game based on the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can make it harder to be

In addition, during the interval between rounds in the first jackpot game, a pseudo-ending display, a pseudo-fluctuation display that fluctuates the pseudo-pattern imitating the third pattern, and a pseudo-stopping of the fluctuating pseudo-pattern in a combination corresponding to the big win. A pseudo-game executing means for executing a stop display and a pseudo-jackpot start display after the pseudo-stop display is provided, and a pseudo-game execution means is provided as if a plurality of jackpots are being executed while one jackpot game is being executed. You may comprise so that production may be performed. By configuring in this way, the special pattern (main pattern) displayed on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b at the time of winning the first big win is a special pattern (main pattern) corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot game. ) can be made difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the production during the big win executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84(b), another example of the effect 1 during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 84(b) is a timing chart showing the contents of another example of the effect 1 during the big win. In this example, the content of the additional effect is changed from the 5R effect to the 10R effect with respect to the contents shown in FIG. The difference is in the presence or absence of prize winning information that indicates a win.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 84(b), the jackpot 1 (15R) is started in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is "1" and there is no winning. , 10R effect 1 is executed as the first additional effect. Then, while the 10R effect 1 is being executed, a new reserved ball containing winning ball entry information is acquired (the number of reserved balls becomes "2"), and the 10R effect 1 is performed. In the continuous jackpot performance, the performance indicating that the 10R performance 2 is executed is executed using the round number obtained by summing the round numbers corresponding to the jackpot 2. - 特許庁

By executing such a production, one additional production is executed so as to straddle multiple jackpots (one additional production is executed in the period from 11R of jackpot 1 to 5R of jackpot 2) Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds set for one big win. In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 84(b), the 10R effect 1 and the 10R effect 2 are executed because the effect for 10R is executed as an additional effect executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots. Later, the same 5R effect 5 as in FIG. 83(a) described above can be executed, and the data used for the additional effect can be shared.

It should be noted that FIG. 83(a) or FIG. 84(b) shows an example of an additional effect, and is configured to execute an additional effect other than the contents illustrated above. Specifically, in addition to the 5R production using a period of 5 rounds, the 10R production using a period of 10 rounds, the 7R production using a period of 7 rounds and the 8 rounds production 8R performance using a period is configured to be executable.

In this way, by using a plurality of effects corresponding to different numbers of rounds as the additional effects, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds to be executed during one big win. While predicting how long (how many rounds) the current big win will continue, the game can be played with the expectation that it will continue for a long time.

In addition, the game state set at the time when the production 1 during the jackpot executed corresponding to one or more jackpots is completed, that is, the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) executed last corresponding to the production 1 during the jackpot , normal jackpot) may be configured to vary the additional performance to be executed, for example, when it is determined that the game state set at the time when the performance 1 during the jackpot is completed is the probability variable state. , it is easy to set an additional performance (for example, 10R performance) corresponding to a long number of rounds as an additional performance executed at the beginning of the performance 1 during the big win, or at the time when the performance 1 during the big win is completed. It may be configured to execute an additional effect (for example, 7R effect) that is executed only when the set game state is the variable probability state.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player predict both the number of rounds to be executed during the big win and the game state to be set after the end of the big win by the extra performance to be executed, and the performance effect is obtained. can increase

Returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. In this control example, when the game state becomes a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) advantageous to the player, a specific production (probability variable medium production or time saving medium production (hereinafter referred to as high probability medium production )) is executed. The period during which the high-probability middle production is executed is a period during which a predetermined production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, and whether or not the game state advantageous to the player ends based on the result of the battle production. is executed to notify the player.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97, the contents of the high-probability middle effect (continuous effect) will be described in detail. FIG. 90 shows that the flow of the high-probability production (continuous production) executed when the gaming state is in an advantageous state (probability variable state or time-saving state) is continuously executed until the jackpot is won. It is the timing chart which showed production (continuous production). As shown in FIG. 90, during the high-probability middle production (continuous production), the battle production is configured to be repeatedly executed. The battle production is a battle reach (see FIGS. 93 to 96) in which the production for notifying whether the advantageous state (probability variable state or time saving state) ends is executed in a period of one rotation of the special figure fluctuation (see FIGS. 93 to 96), The effect for changing the display mode when the battle ready-to-win is executed is composed of a pre-battle effect (see FIGS. 91 and 92) executed in a period corresponding to a plurality of rotations of the special figure variation.

Details of the effect will be described later, but in Battle Reach, the effect (attack effect) in which the HP value (continuous value) of the own character and the opponent character is reduced is executed multiple times (three times). When the HP value (continuous value) of becomes "0" (in the case of the defeat pattern battle reach), the condition for ending the advantageous state (won the jackpot where the advantageous state ends, or the number of times the special pattern fluctuates is set. When the HP value (continuous value) of the opponent character becomes "0" (in the case of the battle reach of the winning pattern), it indicates that a jackpot in which the advantageous state continues is won, When the mutual HP value (continuous value) does not become "0" (in the case of the battle reach of the draw pattern), it indicates that the high-probability middle production continues.

In addition, in the pre-battle effect, the effect of increasing or decreasing the HP value (continuous value) of the opponent's character at the time when the battle reach is started is executed. This pre-battle effect is configured so that the effect mode is set based on the look-ahead result of the reserved symbols and the number of times the battle effect is set repeatedly, and based on the effect mode, a plurality of special symbol variations are performed. HP management using is executed.

FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a battle effect is started as a high-probability medium effect (continuous effect). When the battle production is started, first, the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, is executed. In this pre-battle effect, an effect for increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent in the battle reach, which is the second half of the battle effect, is executed.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), when the pre-battle effect is executed, a boy character Dm11 is displayed on the left side of the center of the main display area Dm, and an opponent for selecting an opponent candidate for battle reach is displayed. A selection mode is displayed. In this opponent selection mode, selection sections Dm13 to Dm16 corresponding to four types of characters A to D are displayed as opponent candidates to be battle reach opponents, and one of the selection sections is selected. Note that FIG. 91(a) shows a state in which the selection portion Dm13 corresponding to the character A is selected.

Furthermore, an HP display area Dm17 indicating the continuous value (HP value) corresponding to each of the four characters A to D is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. The HP display area Dm17 is composed of a display portion showing the HP value with a horizontally long gauge and a display portion (Dm18) showing the HP value numerically. The value (display mode) displayed in the HP display area Dm17 is variably displayed so as to vary (decrease) according to the attack on the opponent during the pre-battle effect.

In the pre-battle effect, when the opponent is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 92(a) is displayed next, the effect of decreasing the HP value of the opponent is executed, and the HP display area Dm17 selects and displays it. A display (a circle mark on the character A) for identifying the HP display corresponding to the opponent character is displayed. This allows the player to easily grasp the HP value of the opponent character currently selected.

Also, during this pre-battle effect, only the effect of decreasing the HP value of the opponent character is executed, and the HP value of itself (character Dm11) does not decrease. As a result, until the Battle Reach is executed, as a result of the effect of attacking the opponent, the HP value will not decrease, so it is expected that many effects of attacking the opponent will be executed. You can play while In addition, since the HP value of the player (character Dm11) is not displayed on the screen during the pre-battle effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy that the HP value of the character Dm11 will decrease as a result of the effect being executed. can do.

It should be noted that the production mode of the pre-battle production is not limited to the contents described above. You may perform the production|presentation which increases the HP value of. In addition, in the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, the HP value of the opponent is reduced until it becomes "0", and the big hit (definite variable state after the big win ends, or , a jackpot where a time saving state is given) may be executed.

In FIG. 92(a), since the character ADm13 was attacked by reducing the HP by "200" (main attack effect), the display portion Dm18a corresponding to the character A in the HP display area Dm17 is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is variably displayed at "800" corresponding to the content of the presentation.

On the other hand, in the display example shown in FIG. 92(b), in addition to the effect in which the character Dm11 makes an attack (main attack effect), the cat character Dm20 appears and performs an additional attack (secondary attack effect). is also executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92(b), the character ADm13 is attacked to reduce its HP by "230", and the display portion Dm18c corresponding to the character C in the HP display area Dm17 becomes the main display area Dm. "770" is variably displayed corresponding to the content of the presentation.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), during this pre-battle production, the opponent may be changed in the middle, and if the opponent is changed, the current opponent can be identified. The HP display area Dm18 is displayed (the character A is circled).

Here, a brief description will be given of a method for setting the HP value that is decreased by the attack effect. In this control example, based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the pre-determination result (prefetching result) of the entering ball information that is reserved and stored, the result of the battle production and rough production contents (HP value Decrease value (100's place) and main attack effect) are determined. Then, with the aim of diversifying the types of effects for the effect contents (HP value reduction value and main attack effect) determined by the continuous value management means, the lottery result and the look-ahead result are determined by the effect setting means. It is configured such that detailed presentation contents (HP value decrease value (10's place) and secondary attack presentation) are determined without being affected.

Then, the continuation value (HP value) determined by the continuation value management means is stored, and the continuation value (HP value) is increased or decreased using the continuation value management means with respect to the stored continuation value (HP value). Configure.

Specifically, in FIG. 92(a) described above, an effect (main attack effect) in which the continuation value (HP value) is decreased by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the continuation value (HP value) is reduced by the effect setting means. This shows an example of the display when the content is set so that the value is not increased or decreased, and as a pre-battle effect, a main attack effect (character Dm11's attack effect) is executed to reduce the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 200. there is

On the other hand, in FIG. 92(b) described above, an effect (main attack effect) in which the continuation value (HP value) is decreased by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the value of the continuation value (HP value) is reduced by 20 by the effect setting means. This shows an example of a display when a reduction effect (secondary attack effect) is set. A secondary attack effect (attack effect of the cat character Dm20) is executed to reduce the continuous value (HP value) of the ADm13 by 30, and a total effect of reducing the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 230 is performed as a pre-battle effect. is running.

By configuring in this way, the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased with respect to the number of effects set by the continuous value management means. In other words, with respect to the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to reduce the number of effects managed by continuously increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value). The burden of control can be reduced.

Further, when the opponent during one pre-battle effect is changed, the HP value of the opponent character before the change is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, when the opponent is changed and the same opponent character is selected again, the effect can be continued from the previous HP value. In this way, by gradually reducing the HP of the opponent character who can be the opponent of the battle reach during the pre-battle production, and then executing the battle reach, the battle reach is frequently performed in the high-probability medium production. A series of productions can be executed without being generated.

In addition, during the pre-battle production, if the degree of decrease in HP of a plurality of opponent candidates is uneven, the player is made to watch the production while expecting that the battle reach will be executed with an opponent with a low HP value as much as possible. be able to.

After the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, is completed, next, battle ready-to-win battles with specific opponents are executed. If the player wins this battle reach (the opponent's HP is set to "0"), it indicates that the player has won a big win in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, and the player is defeated (his own HP is set to "0"). If it becomes), it indicates that the player has won a game in which a game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player is set. In addition, when the battle ready-to-win is executed at the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a hit, the game ends in a draw (the HP of the game itself and the opponent does not become "0"), and the high-probability medium performance is continued.

This battle reach is when a jackpot is won during high probability (variable probability, short time), or when a predetermined condition is met during high probability (for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the battle If the ready-to-reach production lottery is won), and if the result of the battle ready-to-win is a draw, the pre-battle production is performed again. In this case, all HP values of the opponent character are set to initial values. That is, since the pre-battle production is performed to reduce the HP value of the opponent character, for example, if the period during which the special symbol is not won during the probability change state continues for a long time, the pre-battle production In order to prevent the opponent character's HP from becoming "0" at the beginning of the battle, it is necessary to make it difficult to execute the effect (attack effect) that reduces the opponent character's HP, and there is a risk that the effect of the pre-battle effect will be reduced. there were.

In this control example, a battle reach is generated even when a special symbol is won, and a "draw" is provided as a result of the battle reach. Since the HP value of is reset to the initial value and the pre-battle effect is resumed, the effect of the pre-battle effect decreases due to the execution of one pre-battle effect for a long period of time. can be resolved. In addition, by providing a "draw" as a result of the battle reach, even if an effect with a low degree of expectation is executed during the battle reach, the possibility of a "draw" can be left open.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 93(a) to 96(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during battle reach will be described. First, FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the start of battle reach. Here, the contents of the production of Battle Reach will be explained. In the battle reach of this control example, an effect is executed in which the attack of the player or the opponent is executed a total of three times, and the result is displayed according to the final HP value. There are three types of attacks: "strong attack", "medium attack", and "light attack", each of which is set to have a different HP value.

When the battle ready-to-win is started, the characters "battle start" and the characters "first time" indicating the number of battles in this battle are displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. be done. Below that, an HP gauge Dm21 indicating the value of the player's own HP and an HP gauge Dm22 indicating the value of the opponent's HP are displayed. The HP gauge Dm21 displays "1000" which is the upper limit value, and the HP gauge Dm22 displays "500" which is the value decreased in the pre-battle effect.

A storage gauge Dm23 is displayed below the HP gauge Dm21. This accumulation gauge Dm23 accumulates a value based on being attacked by the opponent, and when the accumulated value reaches "MAX", a reversal effect is executed, and an effect of winning the battle reach is executed. By enabling execution of this reversal performance, even if the performance in which the opponent side is superior is executed during the battle reach in which three battles are fought, the expectation of a big win can be made until the end.

A progress display area Dm24 for indicating the progress of the battle reach is formed below the main display area Dm, and the history of the attack effects during the battle reach is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93(b), the display contents when the first attack during battle reach is the player's own will be described. As shown in FIG. 93(b), an effect is executed in which the own character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (weakly attacks) the opponent's character Dm15 in the main display area Dm, and the value of the HP gauge Dm22 changes to " 500" to "300". Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "round mark" indicating that the first battle was the attack of the player himself is displayed.

When the second battle effect is executed following the first battle effect shown in FIG. 93(b), the second battle effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(a). Here, in FIG. 94(a), an effect in which the opponent's character Dm15 attacks is executed as the effect of the second battle, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuous value (HP value) of the own character Dm11 is "1000." ” to “700” and the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 is accumulated by half (50). Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "cross mark" indicating that the second battle was an attack by the opponent is displayed.

Next, when the effect for the third battle (last battle) is executed, the effect for the third battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(b). Here, in FIG. 94(b), as the third battle effect, the player's own character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (medium attack) the opponent's character Dm15 in the main display area Dm. The value of Dm22 is decreased from "300" to "0", and it is reported that the current battle reach was a battle reach showing that a big hit was won in which a game state advantageous to the player was set. Then, in the small display area Dn2, "777" is displayed as the combination display of the third symbol for indicating that the current special symbol lottery is a big win.

In addition to the battle reach (victory pattern) shown in FIG. 94(b), the battle reach in this control example is provided with a draw pattern and a defeat pattern as described above, and the battle reach of the draw pattern is set. If so, for example, instead of the third battle effect shown in FIG. 94(b), the effect shown in FIG. 95(a) is displayed. In the display example shown in FIG. 95(a), an effect in which the opponent's character Dm15 attacks is executed as the effect for the third battle. In the case of a draw pattern battle reach, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of your character Dm11 does not decrease to 0 (reduces to 500), and the battle reach ends without the continuous value (HP value) of yourself and the opponent becoming 0. do. In this case, a new battle effect is executed, and the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91) is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), even if the final attack (third attack) of Battle Reach is the opponent's attack, provide a draw pattern in which the continuation value (HP value) of the player does not decrease to 0. , the player can have expectations until the end of the battle reach. In FIG. 95(a), the pattern in which the opponent makes the third attack as the battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player is told that the current battle reach is either a defeat or a draw. I exemplified the production that seems to be a pattern, but in addition to that, there is a pattern in which the player makes the third attack as a battle reach of the tie pattern. An effect is also executed that makes one think that it is one of the draw patterns. In this case, when the third attack is made, the player will not be defeated in this battle reach, so the player can be relieved.

Also, when the battle reach of the defeat pattern is set, for example, instead of the third battle effect shown in FIG. 94(b), the effect shown in FIG. 95(b) is displayed. In the display example shown in FIG. 95(b), as the third battle effect, the opponent's character Dm15 attacks. Battle reach ends without accumulating to the upper limit (MAX).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96(a), even if the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 has decreased to 0, if the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 reaches the upper limit (MAX), the main The characters "Resurrection" are displayed in the upper center of the display area Dm, the player's own character Dm11 stands up, and as shown in FIG.

As described above, the battle reach effect in this control example is such that the result of the effect varies depending on the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 in addition to the decrease in the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 and the HP gauge Dm22 of the opponent character Dm15. Because it is structured, you can expect a big hit until the end of the battle reach.

In addition, in the first control example, the content of the pre-battle production (production mode) is based on the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed, and the reserved storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle production. Configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is configured to be variable.

Here, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 97 (a) ~ (d), and the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, HP display area Dm17 that is variably set based on the reservation storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect It is the figure which showed the display mode.

FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 in a pattern in which the opponent's character is not replaced during the battle effect. is. As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the HP display area Dm17, only the characters of the same opponent (character ADm13) have different continuous values (HP values) (four levels from "700" to "1000"). is displayed. When such an HP display area Dm17 is displayed, the character ADm13 will always be set as the opponent for the pre-battle effect, and the player's own attack will be executed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 92(a)). , an effect is executed in which all HP values displayed in the HP display area Dm17 are reduced.

By using such a display mode, since a plurality of HP values are reduced at once, the effect to be executed can be flashy. Also, even with the same character ADm13, since the initial value of the continuous value (HP value) is different, it is expected that the character ADm13 with a low continuous value (HP value) will be selected when the battle reach is developed. A game can be played while Further, by making the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) different for the same character ADm13, it is possible to set a plurality of expectations for a big win for the same character ADm13. The types of image data for displaying a character can be reduced compared to the case where a different partner character is set for each time.

Next, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 97(b) shows a display mode in which the characters A to D are displayed in a different order than the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). It is a schematic diagram shown. When such a display mode is used, for example, in the case where the degree of selection as an opponent character during the battle effect is configured to vary depending on the position displayed in the HP display area Dm17, an opponent character who is likely to be selected during the battle effect is displayed. Characters can be changed. Furthermore, the display order of the characters A to D displayed in the HP display area Dm17 may be changed even while the battle effect is being executed.

FIG. 97(c) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the opponent character is displayed, which is different from the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). As shown in FIG. 97(c), in this display mode in which the opponent characters E and F are displayed, the opponent character is a special opponent character having a lower initial value of continuation value (HP value) than the normal opponent characters A and B. E and F are displayed as selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect to win the battle reach in the current battle presentation.

FIG. 97(d) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the number of selectable opponent characters is reduced with respect to the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). By using such a display mode, in order to reduce the options of the opponent character to be selected in the pre-battle production, the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character when the battle reach is developed is reduced in advance (during the pre-battle production). can be made easier.

As described above, in this control example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is changed based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, and the reserved storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbols when the battle effect is set. By variably setting, the variation of the battle production is increased and the production effect is enhanced. It may be configured to

For example, when the special opponent character E described above in FIG. 97(c) is selected as the battle ready opponent, the battle ready battle of the defeat pattern may be configured not to be executed. Thus, in addition to the pre-battle effect of reducing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character, the player can be interested in the opponent character selected in the battle reach. In addition, in the display mode shown in FIG. 97(a), when the opponent character E is set instead of the opponent character A, the battle reach of the defeat pattern is performed during the current battle production period at the timing when the battle production is executed. is not executed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, if the reservation memory information (entering ball information) of the special pattern at the time of setting the battle effect contains entering ball information for executing the battle reach of the winning pattern, the battle reach of the winning pattern is selected. may be displayed in a display mode including a specific opponent character for which is executed.

Further, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be variably set based on the operation result of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. In this case, the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 shown in FIG. 91 is displayed until the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. The display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be changed, for example, to the display modes described above with reference to FIGS. 97(a) to (d).

In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 97(a) to (d), the length of the HP gauge is configured to be constant even when different continuation values (HP values) are set. Therefore, for example, when the continuous value (HP value) is reduced by “100”, the decrease rate of the HP value gauge is variably displayed according to the set continuous value (HP value). It is also possible to display the HP gauge with a length corresponding to the set continuous value (HP value). In addition, in order to easily grasp the remaining continuous value (HP value) from the length of the HP gauge, the display mode (for example, color) of the HP value gauge is configured to vary according to the length of the HP gauge. You can

By configuring as described above, even if the battle effect is repeatedly executed for the player, the effect mode can be changed, and the player quickly gets tired of the effect content. It can be suppressed. In addition, in this control example, the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed, and the production mode of the pre-battle production based on the reservation storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle production (at the time of setting the production before the battle) is configured to be variably set, but the effect mode may be variably set using other conditions, for example, the first game state (for example, the probability variable state ) and a second game state (for example, time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state at the time of setting the battle production (at the time of setting the production before the battle) is the second game state. The effect mode may be set based on the result of determining whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state, or ball entry information retained and stored at the time of setting the battle effect (at the time of setting the pre-battle effect). is determined, and as a result of the determination, an effect mode may be set based on the determination result of whether or not there is entering ball information indicating that the game state is to shift from the first game state to the second game state. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the suggestive effect, which is the effect executed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This suggestive effect is a game that a specific effect for showing the high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed in the variable effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variation of the special symbol. It is a production for suggesting to the person in advance, and is a production that consists of a premonition production in the first half part and a countdown production in the second half part.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, the contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestive effect will be described. FIG. 98(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is started, and FIG. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the countdown effect, which is the second half part, is started, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), when the suggestive effect is started, the predictive effect is executed in the sub-display area Ds. In the example shown in FIG. 98(a), a dynamic effect is executed in which a character Dc1 imitating a "car" advances from left to right, and the character Dc1 reaches an arrival point Dc3 where characters "Goal" are displayed. By arriving at , the production is executed so as to switch to the countdown production.

As a moving route for the character Dc1 to move to the arrival point Dc3, either a first route Dc2a showing a straight route or a second route Dc2b showing a meandering route is set. In the example shown in FIG. 98(a), the second route Dc2b is selected, and a dynamic effect is executed in which the character Dc1 moves along the meandering route.

Here, a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 100, but in the first control example, the start timing of the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, can be selected from a plurality of points. Since the period during which the precursor effect is executed is indefinite, the path of the character Dc1 is selected according to the length of the period during which the precursor effect is executed. Thereby, when the portent effect is executed, the timing at which the countdown effect is started can be visually grasped.

In addition, in FIG. 98(a), an effect indicating the timing at which the countdown effect is started is used as the precursor effect, but other effects may be used as the predictive effect, for example, the countdown effect is executed. It is also possible to use an effect suggesting to the player that the countdown effect is to be performed, an effect suggesting the period of the countdown effect, or an effect suggesting the type of specific effect to be the target of the countdown effect. In other words, it is sufficient if the effect is to inform in advance of the information regarding the effect to be executed in the future as the suggestive effect.

When the portent effect ends, as shown in FIG. 98(b), a comment "Start countdown" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and in the subdisplay area Ds, the character Dc1 arrives at the arrival point Dc3 and counts down. A character "3" indicating that the period is 3 seconds is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4. As a result, the player can be specifically notified that the current countdown effect is an effect starting from "3" and the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed.

The example shown in FIG. 98(b) shows a countdown effect in which the countdown period is 3 seconds, but in the first control example, another countdown period (for example, 7 seconds) is set. It also has a countdown effect, and is set so that the longer the countdown period, the higher the expectation of a big hit. By configuring in this way, during the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, the countdown effect with a long countdown period set is executed while predicting the timing at which the countdown effect will start and the current variation pattern. can be expected.

When the countdown effect shown in FIG. 98(b) ends, as shown in FIG. 99, a character "0" indicating that the countdown period has ended is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 of the sub-display area Ds, and the main display. In the area Dm, an operation effect is executed in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed as a specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, the flow of setting the precursor effect and the countdown effect to be executed as the suggestive effect of the first control example will be described. In this first control example, a suggestive effect is executed to inform the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and in the countdown effect executed in the second half of the suggestive effect, the target specific effect execution timing is executed (see FIG. 98(b)) to accurately (concretely) notify the effect (see FIG. 98(b)). (See FIG. 98(a)) is executed.

Here, conventionally, in the variable effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a suggested effect for suggesting (notifying) the player that a specific effect will be executed at a predetermined timing is predetermined. A configuration that executes for a predetermined period of time has been used. If the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is predetermined in this way, the execution period overlaps with other effects that are executed in the variable effect (for example, the effect that suggests a higher degree of expectation for winning than the suggestive effect). In some cases, prohibition processing was performed to prevent the suggestive effect from being executed. Also, there is a problem that the suggestive effect cannot be executed for the specific effect executed at the timing when the period for executing the suggestive effect cannot be secured.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, if a plurality of suggestive effect data with different predetermined periods are prepared, the storage capacity increases and the process for setting the variable effect becomes complicated. A new problem arises.

Therefore, in this control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestive effect are set separately so that the period during which the suggestive effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect, and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the first half part, the omen The start timing of the production) can be set from a plurality of points.

By configuring in this way, the suggestive effect can be executed without presetting the period during which it is executed. In addition, since the start timing of the suggestive effect can be set from multiple points, for example, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is variable based on the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, when the jackpot is won, It is possible to set the period during which the suggestive effect is executed longer) or to change the start timing of the suggestive effect according to the execution timing of other effects. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting the suggestive effect.

FIG. 100(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of executing the suggestive effect in the variable effect in which the variable time of 60 seconds is set. In the example shown in FIG. 100(a), the timing at which the suggestive effect can be started is set 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the specific effect "PUSH effect" is executed 33 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. is set to Then, a countdown period (30 to 33 seconds from the start of variation) is set so that the countdown performance (execution period of 3 seconds) ends at the timing (33 seconds after the start of variation) at which the specific performance is executed. Then, since the variation this time is a case of winning a jackpot, the timing (timing 10 seconds after the start of the variation) that can set a longer suggestive effect period from among the multiple start timings is selected as the start timing of the suggestive effect. set as

As a result, in the example shown in FIG. 100(a), after 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the precursor effect (20 seconds of the effect period) is executed (30 seconds after the start of the change), and then the countdown effect (3 seconds of the effect period) ) is executed. Then, a specific effect (“PUSH effect”) is executed at the end timing of the effect period of the countdown effect. It should be noted that, if the variation of this time does not win the jackpot, the timing at which the suggested presentation period is shortened (the timing after 20 seconds from the start of the variation) is set as the start timing of the suggested presentation (the start timing of the omen presentation). .

In this way, when the suggestive effect is executed for the specific effect executed at the specific timing of the predetermined variable effect, by using the configuration of setting the start timing of the suggestive effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol, The length of the suggestive presentation period can be varied based on the lottery result of the special symbols, and the player can be made aware of the length of the presentation period. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, even if the length of the suggestive effect period is variable, the countdown effect period, which is the second half of the suggestive effect, that is, the period for executing the effect that specifically (accurately) notifies the execution timing of the specific effect is , since it is configured to be set based on the execution timing of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the suggestive effect.

That is, when the length of the suggestive effect period is variable, only the period during which the premonitory effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is executed is variable. This foreshadowing effect directly or indirectly suggests that a specific effect will be executed as described above, and even if the length of the effecting period is changed, the second half part of the suggestive effect will be executed. A player can be surely notified of the timing at which the specific performance is executed by the countdown performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100(b), the flow of the suggestive effect executed in the variable effect B different from the variable effect A described above with reference to FIG. 100(a) will be described. FIG. 100(b) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of effects executed in the variable effect B. FIG.

The variable effect B shown in FIG. 100(b) is different from the variable effect A described above, and is a variable effect in which a plurality of specific effects that can be targeted for suggestive effects are set. A method of setting the variable effect executed in the variable effect B will be described, centering on the differences from the variable effect A described above. The variable performance B is set with a timing capable of starting a suggestive performance 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the variation, and a timing capable of executing a specific performance 26 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the variation is set.

In the variation effect B, as a specific effect that can be executed 26 seconds after the start of the variation, there is a "cut-in effect" (not shown) in which a boy character is displayed in a large size so as to cover the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81. , "PUSH effect" (see FIG. 99) can be set as a specific effect that can be executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The two specific effects are set with the same degree of expectation for big win, and the specific effect corresponding to the set suggestive effect is executed.

In the variable effect shown in FIG. 100(b), similarly to FIG. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the timing of starting the suggestion performance is set to 10 seconds after the start of the variation, and the specific performance is set to "PUSH performance" which is executed 40 seconds after the start of the variation. is doing.

More specifically, the above-described suggestive effect is the pattern with the highest expected degree of jackpot in descending order of the expected degree of jackpot, and then the timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation is set as the start timing of the suggested effect, A pattern that sets "PUSH effect" as a specific effect, a pattern that sets the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation as the start timing of the suggestive effect, and a pattern that sets the "cut-in effect" as the specific effect, the timing 17 seconds after the start of the change. is set as the start timing of the suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect is set corresponding to the degree of expectation for the big hit in the order of the pattern in which the "cut-in effect" is set as the specific effect.

Furthermore, in the variable production B shown in FIG. 100(b), the start timing of the countdown production (the length of the countdown period) can be varied according to the length of the set suggestive production period. When a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is set, the start timing of the countdown performance is set 7 seconds before the execution of the specific performance, and immediately after the start of the countdown performance, the sub of the third pattern display device 81. A countdown effect is executed in which the character "7" is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 (see FIG. 98(b)) of the display area Ds.

In addition, in the first control example, it is possible to execute suggestive effects across a plurality of variable effects. The flow of suggestive effects that are executed across a plurality of variable effects will be described with reference to FIG. 101 . FIG. 101 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the production when the suggestive production is set across the variable production corresponding to two consecutive special symbol fluctuations.

As shown in FIG. 101, in this control example, when a new pending memory is acquired during the execution of the variable effect, the information contained in the newly acquired pending memory (results of determination of success or failure, variation patterns, etc.) is determined in advance. (Read ahead), and based on the determination result, it is possible to set the effect mode of the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the corresponding reserved memory.

Specifically, the fluctuation of the variable production C (variation time 30 seconds) is started in a state where there is no pending memory, and at the timing after 15 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (the remaining period of the fluctuation production C is 15 seconds), the second When a ball enters the 1st ball entrance 64 or the 2nd ball entrance 140 and acquires a new reserved memory (a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable performance), the information contained in the new reserved memory is used. , determines whether or not to execute a suggestive effect.

Here, when it is determined that the next variable performance is the variable performance for executing the suggestive performance, it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the current variable performance is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In the example shown in FIG. 101, since the timing when the new reserved memory is acquired is the timing when the remaining period of the variable effect C is 15 seconds, it is determined that the remaining period of the current variable effect is longer than or equal to the predetermined period. Set the start timing of the suggestion production at a predetermined timing (timing 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) in the fluctuation production, and in the next fluctuation production (variation production D), a specific production (specific A countdown effect (effect period of 3 seconds) is set for the effect C).

As described above, by setting the start timing of the suggestive effect and the end timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the specific effect) across the continuously executed variable effects (variable effects C, D), the variable effect C When 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the premonitory production, which is the first half of the suggestive production, is executed for a period (10 seconds) until the fluctuation production C ends. Then, during the period (2 seconds) from the start timing of the fluctuation of the variable production D to the execution of the countdown production, the precursor production is continuously executed, and after that (2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation production D), the countdown production is executed. After being executed for 3 seconds, the privilege effect C is executed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 101, since it is possible to execute the suggestive effect in the variable effect that is executed before the variable effect in which the specific effect is executed, the beginning of the variable effect (for example, after 5 seconds from the start of the variation ), it is possible to execute the suggestive effect also for the specific effect executed in . Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of suggestive presentation.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 101, if the timing at which the new reserved memory is acquired is less than the predetermined period (less than 10 seconds) of the remaining period of the variable effect C (for example, the timing of the additional winning B shown in FIG. 101) case), it is not possible to secure a period for executing the suggestive performance for the specific performance C of the variable performance D, so that the suggestive performance for the specific performance C is not set.

In the above example, based on the timing of the additional winning (the timing of acquiring a new reserved memory), it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestive effect for the specific effect to be executed in the next and subsequent variable effects. Although the configuration is used, other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of additional winning (the timing of acquiring a new reserved memory), the timing of executing the specific effect in the next and subsequent variable effects is determined. It may be configured to be variable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the setting of suggestive effects that are executed across a plurality of variable effects, and to enhance the effect of effects.

In addition, in FIG. 101, as an example of the suggestive effect executed across a plurality of variable effects, the flow of the suggested effect when the condition for starting the next variable effect is satisfied during the execution of the variable effect has been described. It is also possible to execute a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable effects under other conditions.

For example, in a state where the condition for starting the next variable performance is satisfied, when the condition for starting the next variable performance is satisfied, any timing in the next variable performance is set as the execution timing of the specific performance, and the current The timing for executing the suggestive effect may be set to either the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the period during which the next variable effect is executed.

In this case, the performance to be executed in the variable performance currently being executed and the details of the performance to be executed during the next variable performance are discriminated, and the result of the determination and the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the next variable performance. It is preferable to configure so as to set the start timing of the suggestive effect based on the result. By configuring in this way, for example, when a continuous effect is set as a series of the currently changing variable effect and the next variable effect, a suggestive effect is provided for the next variable effect. If it is set to execute a special performance at the end timing of the currently fluctuating variable performance without execution, that is, at the start timing of the next variable performance, the suggestive performance will be performed within the next variable performance period. is set, and if there is no factor that prohibits the setting of the suggestive performance in the currently fluctuating variable performance and the next variable performance, the remaining period of the currently fluctuating variable performance or the next fluctuation The start timing of the suggestive effect can be set to any of the periods of the effect.

In addition, when the conditions for starting the next (one after another) variable performance are met, it is determined whether the variable performance is a variable performance corresponding to winning a jackpot, and the start timing of the suggestive performance is being executed based on the determination result. or the execution period of the next (one after another) variable performance. This makes it possible to easily set a suggestive performance period longer than one variable performance period.

In addition, in the first control example, the suggestive effect is executed for one specific effect, but the suggestive effect may be executed for a plurality of specific effects. In this case, it is preferable to set a precursor period during which a common precursor effect is executed and a countdown period during which a countdown effect is executed corresponding to each of a plurality of specific effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while predicting how many specific effects the suggestive effects have been executed for, thereby enhancing the effect of the effects.

In addition, it may be configured to execute a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect while the portent effect is being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the suggestive effect was executed for the specific effect to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, the expectation degree suggesting effect, which is the effect executed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This expectation level suggesting effect includes the expectation level display effect of displaying a plurality of expectation level display modes capable of informing the winning expectation level of the jackpot in stages, and the display mode of the expectation level display mode being variable (the expectation level of winning the jackpot). It is an effect composed of an expectation level increasing effect for changing to a high display mode).

First, with reference to FIG. 102(a), an expectation level display mode used for the expectation level suggesting effect of the first control example will be described. FIG. 102(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the degree-of-expectation display mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 102(a), in this control example, a plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed.

The expectation degree display mode Dk1 indicates the degree of expectation for the jackpot by using the display during execution indicating information corresponding to the variable effect being executed, and in FIG. ” is displayed. Although details will be described later, the degree of expectation display mode Dk1 is displayed 10 seconds after the start of the variable effect, and is displayed on the display screen earliest among the plurality of degree of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3. be.

The expectation degree display mode Dk2 indicates the degree of expectation for a big win using a character appearing during the variable effect, and "LV1" indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed in FIG. 102(a). The degree-of-expectation display mode Dk2, which will be described in detail later, is displayed 24 seconds after the variable effect is started.

The expectation degree display mode Dk3 indicates the degree of expectation for a big hit by using a dialogue display indicating the contents of the variable effect and progress information, and in FIG. It is The degree of expectation display mode Dk3 is displayed 36 seconds after the variable effect is started, although the details will be described later.

In addition, in FIG. 102 (a), each expectation level display mode is shown by LV display showing step by step, but it is sufficient if it is a mode that can notify the jackpot expectation level step by step, for example, corresponding to the jackpot expectation level It is also possible to use a configuration in which the color of each display mode, the speed of the dynamic effect, and the magnitude of the sound volume and the amount of light to be output are varied step by step. Also, a configuration may be used in which the presentation mode indicating the growth process or the transformation process is changed step by step toward the final mode.

In addition, regarding the display during execution displayed in the degree-of-expectation display mode Dk1, for example, the display mode of the pending symbol display displayed in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is continuously displayed. good too. As a result, when an effect (reserved pattern advance notice effect) for changing the display mode of the reserved pattern is executed while the reserved pattern is being displayed, the changed display mode of the reserved pattern can be continuously used as a display during execution. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the relationship between the variable display being executed and the reserved symbol display.

When the expectation level suggestion effect is executed, in addition to the expectation level display effect in which the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 shown in FIG. ) is executed (see FIG. 102(b)).

As shown in FIG. 102(b), when the expectation increase (addition) effect is executed, first, as the expectation setting effect, a display having selection areas Dk4a to Dk4c in which different increase (addition) values are displayed. Mode (roulette) Dk4 is rotated and displayed, and when roulette Dk4 stops, the increase (addition) value displayed in the selection area designated by arrow Dk5 is set.

This increase (addition) value indicates a variable amount for varying the display mode of each expectation display mode displayed during the expectation suggesting effect, and when "1UP" is set as the increase (addition) value means that, for any one of the respective expectation level display modes, an effect is executed in which the jackpot expectation level is changed step by step to a display mode one higher than the currently displayed display mode. showing.

By configuring in this way, by executing the expectation level increase (additional) effect, it is possible to notify only the variable amount of each expectation level display mode displayed during the current expectation level suggesting effect. . Therefore, the player can enjoy the expectation level increase (addition) effect while expecting that the expectation level of the expectation level display mode in which the display mode corresponding to the already high jackpot expectation level is displayed will further change (increase). can be done.

In addition, in this control example, as the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) production, each expectation that is variable (increases) while the current expectation increase (addition) production is being executed It is configured such that a value obtained by adding up the variable amount of the display mode is set. As a result, for example, when "3UP" is set as an increase (addition) value, whether the display mode of one expectation level display mode is variable by three levels, or each of the three expectation level display modes is variable by one level It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the effect result of the expectation-suggesting effect at an early stage, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

next. With reference to FIG. 103(a), description will be given of the effect content when "3UP" is set as the increase (addition) value. FIG. 103(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the display mode of each expectation level display mode is varied (raised) using a set increase (addition) value.

According to the example shown in FIG. 103(a), "3UP" is set as an increase (addition), and each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is The display is variably displayed one step at a time. Specifically, the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk1 is changed from "LV2" to "LV3", the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk2 is changed from "LV1" to "LV2", and the expectation level display mode Dk3 is changed. is changed from "LV2" to "LV3".

Note that FIG. 103(a) described above exemplifies a pattern in which the display modes of all the degree of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are changed at the same time. It may be configured to be variable. In this case, of the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) production, the increase (addition ) value is displayed on the display screen as a remaining increase (addition). By configuring in this way, it is possible to specifically predict the performance result based on the remaining increase (addition) value displayed on the display screen and the expectation level display mode in which the display mode is not changed. You can increase the effect. Furthermore, it may be configured to execute the expectation level increasing (additional) effect so as to vary the display mode a plurality of times with different timings for the same expectation level display mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

In addition, in this control example, each of the plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed at different timings in one variable effect is continuously displayed, thereby displaying as shown in FIG. 103(a). Although it is configured to be displayed on the screen at the same time, it is not necessary to provide a period in which each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at the same time. , at least some display timings may be set at the same time.

Furthermore, in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the player may be notified of the expectation display mode for which the increase (addition) value is set (see FIG. 103(b)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the comment "I will raise the level of the boy" suggesting the desired degree of expectation display mode is displayed above the main display area Dm. By displaying this comment, the player can grasp what kind of expectation level display mode is the target of the current expectation level suggesting performance, and can enjoy the game while predicting the future progress of the performance. It can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the flow of the degree-of-expectation display effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 104 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the degree-of-expectation display effect. As shown in FIG. 104, in one variation pattern (super reach 60 seconds), the expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 showing the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in stages are displayed with different timings. Specifically, the expectation level display mode Dk1 (expectation level 1 display) is displayed 12 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the expectation level display mode Dk2 (expectation level 2 display) is displayed 24 seconds after the fluctuation start, and the expectation level display Mode Dk3 (expectation level 3 display) is displayed 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

Then, an expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) for increasing (adding) the display mode of each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at any timing of 5 seconds, 17 seconds, or 29 seconds from the start of fluctuation. . Here, the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is configured so that the expectation level display mode to be targeted for increasing the expectation level is different depending on the timing of display (execution). It is configured so that the expectation level display mode displayed after the performance of increasing the level of expectation (display with added level of expectation) is executed.

Specifically, if the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, all of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are targeted, and the expectation level rises 17 seconds after the fluctuation start When the production (expectation level added display) is displayed, the expectation level display modes Dk2 and Dk3 are targeted. An effect targeting only the display mode Dk3 is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect content of the expectation level increasing effect, which is the same effect mode, simply by changing the display timing (execution timing). In addition, since the expectation level increase effect is executed for a plurality of expectation level display modes, the player can determine how much the expectation level notified by the expectation level increase effect increases the expectation level of which expectation level display mode. It is possible to play the game while expecting the

In this control example, as described above, the target of the expectation level increase effect (expectation level added display) is the expectation level display mode in which the display timing is set later, but other configurations may be used. For example, the expectation level display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is executed may be targeted, or the above-mentioned expectation level display mode may be used as a target. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which display mode of the expectation level display mode will be changed (whether the expectation level will increase) by the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display). , can enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in order to enhance the effect of the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level addition display), a selection means that allows the player to select at least one of a plurality of expectation level display modes, and an expectation level selected by the selection means. A target determination means for determining whether the degree display mode is an object whose display mode is to be changed by the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display), and the expectation level display mode selected by the selection means is an expectation level increase effect ( a variable control means for varying the display mode by means of an expectation level increasing effect (expectation level added display) when the object determination means determines that the object is an object whose display mode is to be changed by the expectation level added display). Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a player-participation type effect, and to make the player participate in the game willingly.

In this case, for example, a suggestion notification suggesting an expectation level display mode to be subjected to an expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is provided during a period prior to the period in which the player selects the expectation level display mode by means of the selection means. It is preferable to provide means for notifying the suggestion to be executed. As a result, it is possible to limit the target range to be selected by the selection means for the player, and to increase the probability that the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level increasing display) is executed.

Further, when the expectation level display mode selected by the selection means is determined by the target determination means not to be subject to change in the display mode by the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display), It is preferable to provide an effect switching means for executing different effects using the increase (additional) value set in the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display). As a result, the increased (additional) value that has already been displayed on the display screen can be eliminated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

As the above-mentioned different effects, for example, effects for informing the player in advance of the contents of the winning information stored in reserve, and values accumulated by the player to obtain benefits (for example, game level, experience, etc.) It may be a production that is advantageous to the player, such as a production for increasing the value), or a production that is disadvantageous to the player, such as a production that changes the production mode so that the expectation level of the expectation display mode is lowered (expectation level lowering production). A performance is fine.

In addition, there is provided a means configured to vary the display mode of the performance switched by the performance switching means in correspondence with the increase (addition) value set in the expectation level increase performance (expectation level addition display). Also good. Further, when the player does not select the expectation level increasing mode by the selection means, the non-target expectation level display mode may be automatically selected. may be automatically selected. In addition, in the case where the target expectation level display mode is automatically selected, an effect is executed in which it is more advantageous for the player to select the non-target expectation level display mode by the selection means. good to do As a result, the player can actively select the degree-of-expectation display mode by means of the selection means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 125. FIG. First, the details of the main controller 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 113) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, first, with reference to FIG. 113, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

The setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 includes a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). Hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of stop in the special symbol, variation type counter CS1 used to select the variation pattern, initial value setting of the first hit random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 136). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and each counter value for the winning to the second ball entrance 140. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is provided. As described above, in this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls are provided for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140 . For this reason, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol lottery is possible, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is changed to a special value. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a ball wins in any of the second ball entrances 140, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the oldest counter value in terms of time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processes are executed for the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 .

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 during a period in which the special symbol 1 cannot be drawn, such as during the variable display of the special symbols or during the jackpot game. When the number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball It is stored in the storage area 203b. In addition, when the corresponding number of reserved balls is the upper limit value (4 in this control example) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired and only prize balls (three prize balls in this embodiment) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of held balls is four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140. 3), or more than 4 (eg, 8). In addition, the upper limit of the number of held balls may be different between the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140, or the upper limit may not be set. Furthermore, a reserved ball storage area may be provided only for either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 so that only one of them can store a reserved ball.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 238). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 238, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 238. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 136).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is specified in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches with the value of the random number for the big winning defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big winning.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 106(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each game state are set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106(a), when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is "7", and if it is "7", it is determined to be a big win. Also, when the game state is the high probability game state, it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is within the range of "5 to 9". If it is within the range of "5 to 9", it is determined as a jackpot.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a special symbol. It will be the one at the time of the big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-238. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 239, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 1, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol is "1/239". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of special symbols, there are five values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 239, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 10. Therefore, the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/47.8".

Returning to FIG. 113, the description continues. The value of the first win type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-199. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, one of the big wins A to K is selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the first winning type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107). A jackpot type is selected.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, details of the first winning type selection table 202c will be described. As shown in FIG. 107, in this first hit type selection table 202c, a jackpot type to be selected is defined in association with each value range of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Jackpot A" is defined in correspondence. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a variable state of special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player, the "jackpot A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 20 random values select "jackpot A". ' is 10%.

In addition, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 79", and "jackpot B" is defined in correspondence. . This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state with special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. The number of rounds executed during the jackpot is smaller than that of the "jackpot A", but the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. is. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 random numbers select "jackpot B". ' is 30%.

The corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 114" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the time-saving state is set 100 times as the game state after the jackpot, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers select "jackpot C". ' is 17.5%.

In addition, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "115 to 164", "jackpot D" is defined in correspondence. . This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state of special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers select "jackpot D". ' is 25%.

Then, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", and the "jackpot E" is defined in correspondence. . In this "jackpot E", when the number of rounds is 5 and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state (in the case of a normal state), the game state after the jackpot ends is the normal state. is set, and when the game state at the time of winning the big win is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), the time saving state is set 100 times as the game state after the big win is finished. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers select "jackpot E". ' is 17.5%.

Next, when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special figure 2), the "jackpot F ” to “jackpot K” are selected. Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2 is the jackpot type selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1 (First win type) is set so that the ratio of selecting a jackpot (“jackpot F”) with a round number of 15 rounds is high (selection ratio is 80%). As a result, when the special pattern jackpot is won, the jackpot that allows the player to obtain a large amount of balls in one jackpot is higher when winning the jackpot with the special pattern 2 than with the special pattern 1. The degree of advantage of the player can be made different between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery.

On the other hand, when the corresponding pattern type is special figure 2, the jackpot type (first hit type) that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding design type is special figure 1 may be selected. Specifically, when "jackpot I" to "jackpot K" are selected, 2 rounds less than 5 rounds, which is the smallest number of rounds among the jackpot types selected in the case of special figure 1 set.

In addition, when the jackpot types "jackpot H", "jackpot J", and "jackpot K" are selected as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the corresponding pattern type is a special figure. In the jackpot type (first hit type) selected in the case of 1, the number of times (number of times of time reduction) set when the time reduction state is given as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot (100 times) less than the number of times ( 50 times or 25 times) is set.

In this way, when the special figure 1 lottery wins and when the special figure 2 lottery wins the jackpot, the contents of the jackpot game to be executed (the number of rounds) and the jackpot game are set after the end. By making the game states different from each other, the game can be made complicated, and it is possible to prevent the player from always being given an excessive privilege.

Furthermore, since the game state set after the end of the big win is configured to be different based on the game state at the time of winning the big win, the set game state is taken into account in the game aiming for the big win with special symbols. I will play while playing. Specifically, even in a gaming state in which a jackpot lottery is performed with the same probability (for example, a low probability state), the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends in the case of the time saving state and the normal state Differently, a game state is set that is more advantageous to the player in the time-saving state. As a result, the game can be played while strongly anticipating winning a special symbol jackpot during a specific period (during time saving).

In addition, in this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the ratio of setting the high probability state in which the jackpot probability is improved after the jackpot ends is the same. Although the first winning type selection table 202c is defined as above, the rate at which the high probability state is set may be varied without being limited to this. In addition, by selecting a jackpot type (first hit type) based on the first hit type selection table 202c and passing the ball through a specific area during the jackpot, a probability variable state (high probability state) is given after the jackpot ends. In the gaming machine, in the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the ball passes through the above-mentioned specific area It may be configured to vary the easiness of application. As a result, it is possible to further differentiate the benefits given to the player depending on the special symbols won in the jackpot.

Furthermore, as a method of differentiating the privilege given to the player according to the special symbol that has won the jackpot, for example, a plurality of variable prize winning devices 65 (see FIG. 2) are provided and executed so that balls can win prizes during the jackpot game. The variable prize winning device 65 that allows the ball to win a prize during the jackpot game may be configured differently depending on the jackpot. In this case, the ease of winning the ball to the variable winning device 65, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins, and the end condition (number of entering balls and time limit) to end one opening operation should be different. As a result, it is possible to further differentiate the benefits given to the player depending on the special symbols won in the jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description continues. The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the ready-to-win occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before or after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for when the probability of special symbols is high and one for when the probability of special symbols is low. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 136), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109) storing a random number for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables are set according to the game state, and variation pattern tables are set for each result of win/fail determination. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126) is performed, and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 66, 67 where the ball is left or right (Hereinafter referred to as a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67) is acquired when it is detected, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

The value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is defined in the second winning random number table 202b (see FIG. 106(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a hit defined in the second winning random number table 202b, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second winning random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 106(b).

FIG. 106(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202b. In the second symbol random number table 202b, when the normal symbol probability is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are two random numbers that are normal symbol hits, and the range is "5 to 6". there is Among the 240 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the total number of winning random numbers is 2, so the probability of winning the normal symbol is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 140a associated with the second ball entrance 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". .

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. At , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entrance 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, the open period of the electric accessory 140a is shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 second x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 140 . In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 140a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The details will be described later with reference to the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132) described later, but in this control example, the normal symbol state (low probability or high probability ), the variable display time of the normal design is determined, and depending on the state of the normal design (low probability or high probability) at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal design stops, it is granted when the normal design is won. The content of the privilege to be held, that is, the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a is determined.

In other words, when the fluctuation of the normal design is started during the high probability of the normal design (during the time saving state), a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal design, and the normal during the short fluctuation When the state of the pattern shifts to the low probability state (when the state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state), the electric accessory 140a is the normal pattern even if the normal pattern indicating the win is stopped after the short fluctuation is finished. The opening operation (for example, "0.2 seconds x 1 time") is performed during a low probability of (during normal state).

With such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation of the special symbols and the variation of the normal symbols are executed separately and independently, is based on the game state that can be varied according to the lottery result of the special symbols and the number of lotteries. In the case where the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the privilege contents at the time of winning are determined, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined based on the game state at the time of the lottery of the normal pattern, and the privilege contents at the time of winning the normal pattern can be determined based on the game state when the fluctuation of the normal symbols stops (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a). occurrence can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the normal symbol variation control is not limited to the contents of the above-described control example, and other controls may be used. The content of the privilege (the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) may be set. In addition, only when the normal pattern lottery and the normal pattern fluctuation stop (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) are in the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state), the benefits at the time of winning the normal pattern (Details of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) may set a privilege (for example, "1 second x 2 times") that is advantageous to the player, or at the time of lottery of normal symbols and when fluctuation of normal symbols is stopped. Only when both (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) are in the normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the benefit at the time of winning the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "0.2 seconds × 1 time”) may be set.

In addition, it may be configured to switch and execute a plurality of setting methods described above. And when the fluctuation of the normal symbols stops (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a), all of the combinations are given advantageous benefits to the player except when both are in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbols. , During the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, a combination that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the variable state It may be configured to set a combination in which an advantageous privilege is given to the player when . By constructing in this way, it is possible to further set advantages and disadvantages in the high-probability state of normal symbols, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 136).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 105(a), the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 105(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a second winning random number table 202b, and a first winning type selection table 202c as part of the fixed value data. , variation pattern selection table 202d, jackpot transition setting table 202e, and state transition table 202f are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)) is, as described above, a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter C1 is stored. The second winning random number table 202b (see FIG. 106(b)) is a data table in which the winning determination value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored, as described above. The first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type. It is defined in association with the type. Since each of these tables has already been described in detail together with the description of the various counters, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG.

FIG. 108(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 108(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example includes a large winning variation pattern table 202d1 and a large winning variation pattern table 202d1 used for selecting a variation pattern when winning a large winning regardless of the gaming state. , The game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), and the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss used for selecting a variation pattern when winning a loss And, in a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) other than the normal state, a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 used to select a variation pattern when winning a deviation, and a lottery of special symbols It is composed of a special variation pattern table 202d4 used for selecting a variation pattern when a special condition is established regardless of the result.

First, with reference to FIG. 108(b), the details of the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 108(b), in the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" in association with various types of normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds, and "50 to 179". In the range of , various types of super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are associated and defined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the range of "180 to 198" with various types of special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds. ing. In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol wins a jackpot, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds is set as the variation pattern, and a command indicating this variation pattern is issued. By transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 executes a variation effect corresponding to the variation time.

As shown in FIG. 108(b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 is 60 seconds (selection rate is about 55%), 30 seconds (selection rate is about 25%). , 90 seconds (selection rate is about 20%). This is related to the specified contents of the variation pattern table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery result is lost, which will be described later, and the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit By the ratio and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation when the specific fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In addition, in this control example, regardless of the jackpot type won, it is configured to use the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, but it is not limited to this. A different variation pattern table may be used for the case of the jackpot type indicating . In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot selects a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. It should be configured so that it is easy to As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

Further, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, details of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 108(c). As shown in FIG. 108(c), the outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 includes the range of values of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "completely out" and "common reach", and the variation pattern. are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(c), the stop type is "complete failure", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", and the fluctuation time is 7 seconds. The range of "99 to 198" is defined in association with a long fluctuation time of 10 seconds. When "Completely Missing" is selected as the stop type, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without entering the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the stop type is "common reach", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149", and the normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of "149 to 197". , various types of super reach with a variable time of 60 seconds are associated with each other, and various types of special reach with a variable time of 90 seconds are associated with the range of "198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(d), the details of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 will be described. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is a deviation and the game state is a probability variation state (time saving state). In this deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above, the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "complete failure" and "common reach" A range and a variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(d), the stop type is "completely out", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190" and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. are defined in association with each other, and the range of "191 to 198" is defined in association with a short deviation of a fluctuation time of 5 seconds.

In addition, the stop type is "common reach", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 190", and the normal reach with the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of "191 to 198" , various types of super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are defined in association with each other. In other words, when the game state is the variable probability state (time saving state), it is defined so that the variation time of 90 seconds is not selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. Therefore, when the game state is the probability variable state (time saving state) and the variation time of 90 seconds (variation pattern) is selected, it is only when the special symbol jackpot is won. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 executes a special effect to congratulate the big win. As a result, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction of the player by notifying the player that the special symbol is missing after the long-time variation pattern is executed in the variable probability state (time-saving state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. can be done.

As described above, when the variable probability state (time saving state) is set as the gaming state and the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 is used, the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the deviation (normal ) Since the variation time of the special symbols is set to be shorter than when the variation pattern table 202d2 is used, the lottery of the special symbols during the probability variation state (time saving state) which is a game state advantageous to the player is performed. can be done efficiently. Although the detailed explanation is omitted, if the variable probability state (time saving state) is set as the gaming state, the stop type is reach when the special pattern is removed than when the normal state is set. It is set so that the percentage of outliers is low. Therefore, while the game state is a probability variable state (time saving state), the frequency of appearance of reach out is reduced (because it is difficult to execute deviation fluctuation with a long fluctuation time), which is a game state that is advantageous to the player. The lottery for the special symbols in the time saving state can be performed more efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, details of the special variation pattern table 202d4 will be described. This special variation pattern table 202d4 is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for 4 rotations of the special figure variation in the case where the game state after the end of the jackpot is a probability variation state or a time saving state, and is a continuous jackpot production described above. It is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation (see FIG. 89 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 109, the special variation pattern table 202d4 defines a variation pattern in association with the number of special symbol (special symbol) variations after the end of the jackpot, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Specifically, in the first to third special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit, the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the special symbol lottery result and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. short hit) is defined.

In the fourth special symbol variation after the end of the big hit, if the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation time is 0.5 seconds, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as an ultra-short hit with a variation time of 0.5 seconds in the range of "0 to 179", and a variation time of 32 in the range of "180 to 198". A special hit of .5 seconds is defined.

By configuring in this way, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is the variable probability state or the time saving state, the variation for four rotations of the special symbol can be immediately executed. As a result, when a series of jackpot performances are executed using a plurality of jackpot games, such as the above-described continuous jackpot performance, the variation period of the special symbols executed between the jackpot games can be shortened. You can increase the effect.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, in the state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set as the game state (during the continuous mode), the variable probability state or the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot. It is configured such that when winning, a variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table 202d4. By configuring in this way, only in a state in which the variable probability state (time saving state) is continuously executed, it is possible to shorten the special symbol variation time for a predetermined number of times (four times) after the end of the big win.

As a result, for example, in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, when the jackpot (for example, jackpot A to jackpot D) in which the variable probability state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, that is, the jackpot ends Later, since there is a reserved memory for the special pattern 1 and there is no reserved memory for the special pattern 2, in a state where the pattern variation of the special pattern 1 is easily executed, the variation pattern table 202d1 for big hits or for loss (probable variation) A variation pattern is set by referring to the variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, in the state where the probability variable state (time saving state) is set, when the jackpot (for example, jackpot F to jackpot K) in which the probability variable state or time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, that is, after the jackpot ends, In a state where the special symbol 2 is reserved and the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is easily executed, the special variation pattern and the special symbol variation are set to a very short variation of 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in the special variation pattern table 202d4 in FIG. 109, in this control example, at a rate of a part (about 10%) when winning in the fourth rotation after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern corresponding to the special hit (Variation time 32.5 seconds) is selected.

By configuring in this way, when a big win is won in a state in which a variation pattern is selected with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4, what is a series of big win effects (continuous big win effects) that continues from the previous big win game? Separately, it is possible to execute a special performance to congratulate the winning of successive jackpots. Therefore, various jackpot effects can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that the special variation (32.5 seconds) is selected in part of the fourth variation after the end of the big win, but this is not the case. Instead, the special winning variation (32.5 seconds) may be selected even in some of the first to third variations after the end of the big winning. In addition, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that a variation pattern in which a variation time other than 0.5 seconds is set (for example, a variation time of 10 seconds) is selected when the special symbol lottery result is lost. good too. By constructing in this way, when the variation for 0.5 seconds or more is executed before the number of variations after the end of the big win reaches 4 times, the player can be expected to win the big win. Therefore, it is possible to play a game considering the fluctuation time of the special symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the jackpot transition setting table 202e will be described. This jackpot transition setting table 202e is a table for defining the gaming state set after the jackpot ends, and includes jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot K) selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202c. , state transition statuses (state transition 1 to state transition 9) are defined in association with the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

This jackpot transition setting table 202e is referred to (S1213) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 134) described later (S1211: Yes), and the selected state transition status , the game state is set according to the contents defined in the state transition table 202f, which will be described later.

Specifically describing the contents of the jackpot transition setting table 202e, the jackpot type is any one of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “jackpot F”, “jackpot G”, and “jackpot H”. There, when the game state at the time of jackpot winning is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, and "variable state (with high probability short working hours) (ST2)", or " In the case of "shortening working hours state (with low probability short working hours) (ST3)", "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status.

When "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, the game state is set based on the contents defined in a state transition 1 table 202f1 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111), which will be described later. 2” is set, the game state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 2 table 202f2.

Next, when the jackpot type is “jackpot C” and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is “normal state (ST1)”, “state transition 3” is set as the state transition status, and “probability variable state (high In the case of "time saving with probability) (ST2)" or "time saving state (low probability with time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is "jackpot E" , When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status, and "variable state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)" or "time saving state (There is a low probability of reduced working hours) (ST3)", "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status.

Furthermore, when the jackpot type is "jackpot H" or "jackpot J" and the game state when the jackpot is won is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status, and " In the case of a variable state (with high probability of time saving) (ST2)” or “time saving state (with low probability of time saving) (ST3)”, “state transition 7” is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is “jackpot K ”, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is “normal state (ST1)”, “state transition 8” is set as the state transition status, and “probability variable state (with high probability short working hours) (ST2)”, Alternatively, in the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status.

When any one of "state transition 3" to "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status, the state transition 3 table 202f3 to state transition 9 table 202f9 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) to be described later. , the game state is set based on the contents defined in the corresponding table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 111(a), the contents of the state transition table 202f will be described in detail. This state transition table 202f is a table used for transitioning the state status such as a game state or a variation pattern table based on the number of variations of special symbols, and is a specified number counter 203j stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. It transitions the state status based on the value of This state transition table 202f is referred to when acquiring the specified number of times counter 203j (S1214), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: Yes), When it is determined that the value of the specified number counter 203j is 0 in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S409: Yes), it is referred to set the next state status (S410).

FIG. 111(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table 202f in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the state transition table 202f in the first control example is a state transition status ("state transition 1" to "state transition 9") set using the jackpot transition setting table 202e described above. ) (“state transition 1 table 202f1” to “state transition 9 table 202f9”).

First, the details of the state transition 1 table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111(b). The state transition 1 table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status. )” is stipulated. In other words, in the state in which the state transition 1 table 202f1 is used (state in which "state transition 1" is set), the variable probability state is continuously set until the next big hit is won.

Next, the details of the state transition 2 table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 111(c). The state transition 2 table 202f2 is a table referred to when "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 2 table 202f2, the state status "ST2a (variable probability state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and the state status "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j "ST2 (variable probability state)" is defined. That is, after the jackpot is finished, first, "ST2a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0", and then "ST2" is set as the state status.

Here, when "ST2a" is set as the state status, the special variation pattern table 202d4 of the variation pattern selection table 202d is set to be used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, in a state where the same gaming state (probability variable state) is set continuously, it is possible to preset a rule for selecting a variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for a specific period. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the main controller 110 .

FIG. 111(d) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 3 table 202f3. The state transition 3 table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 3" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 3 table 202f3, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "100" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 111(e) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 4 table 202f4. The state transition 4 table 202f4 is a table referred to when "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 4 table 202f4, the state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "96" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are defined. In other words, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates 4 times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 96 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. Thereby, when the time saving state (100 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the first 4 special symbol variations.

FIG. 111(f) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 5 table 202f5. The state transition 5 table 202f5 is a table referred to when "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status. The state transition 5 table 202f5 defines a state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j. That is, the normal state is set without setting the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit.

FIG. 112(a) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 6 table 202f6. The state transition 6 table 202f6 is a table referred to when "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 6 table 202f6, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "50" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112(b) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 7 table 202f7. The state transition 7 table 202f7 is a table referred to when "state transition 7" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 7 table 202f7, the state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the state status is set to "ST3a" until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates 4 times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 46 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (50 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the first four times of special symbol variation.

FIG. 112(c) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 8 table 202f8. The state transition 8 table 202f8 is a table referred to when "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 8 table 202f8, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "25" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 25 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112(d) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 9 table 202f9. The state transition 9 table 202f9 is a table referred to when "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 9 table 202f9, the state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "21" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are defined. In other words, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 21 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (25 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the first 4 special symbol variations.

As described above, in the first control example, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the jackpot type of the jackpot won and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot are based on. , the game state set after the end of the big win and the variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the big win can be made different. As a result, the content of the game can be made more complicated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the period for selecting the variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 is the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big hit, but other configurations may be used. Alternatively, the special variation pattern table 202d4 may be used in the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the big win, instead of the special symbol variation executed immediately after the end of the big win. When configured in this way, the state transition table is set to the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "10" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. The state status "ST3a (time saving state)", the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j It is preferable to configure so that the defined "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select the variation pattern for the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the big win using the special variation pattern table.

In this way, by using the configuration of the state transition table described above, the state status set with the end of the jackpot as a starting point and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (predetermined number of times) for which the state status continues are set in association with each other. The game specifications can be easily set just by doing so, and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced. Also, when changing the game specifications, it is sufficient to change the contents of the state transition table, so that the game specifications can be easily changed.

Furthermore, in the first control example, when the normal state is set as the game state (when ST1 is set as the state status), the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set to "0", and always The same variation pattern table (variation pattern table 202d1 for big win or (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for losing) is configured to be referred to, but the variation pattern table that can be referred to when the game state is the normal state A plurality of them may be provided, and different variation pattern tables may be referred to in correspondence with the values of the specified number counter 203j. In this case, for example, in a state in which the time saving state is set as the game state, the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50 times), and the game state shifts to the normal state (when the value of the prescribed number of times counter 203j becomes "0" in the state transition 6 table 202f6), the value of the prescribed number of times counter 203j is set to "10" corresponding to the state status ST1.

Then, when the value of the specified number counter 203j is greater than "0" while the state status ST1 is set, the special variation (normal) pattern table may be referenced to select a variation pattern. By configuring in this way, immediately after the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, it is possible to select a different variation pattern than usual, so that the player can have a game state that is advantageous to the player. It can make you think that it is still continuing.

It should be noted that, in the state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the period for referring to the special variation pattern table is the effect mode of the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and output from the voice output device 226. It is preferable that the sound mode and the light emission mode output from the lamp display device 227 are configured to be a special mode corresponding to the period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a more special feeling. Further, even when a big win is won during a period in which a special variation pattern table is referred to, it is preferable to execute a special performance mode different from the usual performance during the big win. As a result, the player can feel that he or she has won a jackpot during a special period, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the first control example, the state transition table is provided in correspondence with each state transition status, but a common state transition table may be used for portions where the setting contents of the state transition table are common. By configuring in this way, the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the first control example, the configuration is used to switch the variation pattern table to be referenced by varying the state status based on the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. may be made variable. For example, in the state of referring to the state transition 6 table 202f6, when the state status ST3 is set and the value of the specified number counter 203j is "40", the lottery result of the special symbol is out, but a small amount of privilege is obtained. When winning a lottery result (a so-called small win) that can give (the privilege of opening the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time (for example, 3 seconds)), the state status is changed from ST3 to ST3b, and the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. is set to "4", the state status ST3b is set, and if the value of the specified number counter 203j is greater than "0" (in the case of "1" to "4"), the fluctuation pattern table dedicated after the small hit See The variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched. By configuring in this way, a dedicated variation pattern can be selected only for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbols are varied four times) after winning the small prize.

If the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" while the state status ST3b is set, the state status ST3b is set again as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. By configuring to set "35" subtracted by the value counted while is set, the period in which the time saving state is set as the game state (the period until the special symbol fluctuates 50 times) Without changing it, a dedicated variation pattern can be selected and executed for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbols are varied four times) based on the small win won during the time saving state.

In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is subtracted when the variation of the special symbol is executed, but other configurations may be used. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has the above-described small win as a special symbol lottery result, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j may be subtracted based on the number of times the small win is won. In this way, by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol (based on the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result) instead of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, time is reduced. Since the variation pattern table to be referred to can be changed at a timing different from the transition of the number of variations of the special symbol in the state, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 105(b). FIG. 105(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 105(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a probability variation flag 203g, a time saving medium counter 203h, a state status storage area 203i, a specified number counter 203j, and other memory areas 203z. have.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. Each value of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a special symbol lottery or the like is determined.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the original special symbol is displayed. Aside from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, based on the data corresponding to the starting winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1), various types obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting the information is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the start winning to the second ball entrance 140 is stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the holding area of 1 to a holding area with an area number smaller by 1. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) ( It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed) up to a maximum of 4 times. The value N1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is initially set to zero. 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S504 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 127).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is the variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 140 (the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81). ) is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) up to four times. The value N2 of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Every time the number of held balls of symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S510 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 127).

Values of these special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of variable display in special symbol 1) and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of variable display in special symbol 2) are reserved balls. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 127, and S505 and S511 in FIG. 130). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. command.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, are controlled by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reserved in the device 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number (standby number of times) up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See S804 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 133: No).

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols). Indicates that it is a probability variation state of special symbols. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203g is in an off state, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON each time the "jackpot A, B, D, F, G, I" ends (jackpot control process (see FIG. 137 ) of S1212). On the other hand, the variable probability flag 203g is turned off every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered off or the start of the jackpot is set (S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127)).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) is executed by the MPU 201, the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is executed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the state is ON, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203g is off, a lottery for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 128).

In addition, in this control example, while the variable probability state is set as the game state, the time saving state of normal symbols is also set. Therefore, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed, the variable probability flag 203g and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol working time saving state. Specifically, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203g is ON (if the time saving state or the probability variation state), it is determined that the time saving state of the normal design, A lottery for normal symbols is performed based on a random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off (if neither the time saving state nor the probability variation state), based on the normal symbol per random number table for low probability, the normal symbol A lottery is held (see S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203h for time saving is set to 0, and a special symbol jackpot is won in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot (S1212 in FIG. 137). ). Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C", "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h at the end of the jackpot. "50" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h, and in the case of "jackpot K", "25" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h at the end of the big win.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot E", the value of the time-saving medium counter 203h set at the end of the jackpot is set differently depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. If the game state is a time saving state (with low probability of time saving) or a variable state (with high probability of time saving), "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state ( If there is no low probability time saving), the value of the counter 203h is not set during time saving.

After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 ends until the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0 (S402 in FIG. 129). Also, even if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more, the value is reset to 0 when the jackpot is won (S218 in FIG. 127).

When the normal pattern winning lottery is performed, the value of the time saving counter 203h is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the normal pattern lottery is performed based on the normal pattern random number table for high probability. is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, and if the probability variation flag 203g described later is off, the normal design lottery is performed based on the normal per design random number table for the low probability time. (See S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The state status storage area 203i is a storage area for storing current state status (ST) information set by the state transition table 202f. In the state status storage area 203i, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, at the end of the jackpot, the acquired state status is Stored, after that, in the fluctuation frequency subtraction process (see FIG. 129), when the value of the prescribed number counter 203j subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuates becomes 0 (S409: Yes), it is newly set State status is stored.

The specified number of times counter 203j is a counter for measuring that the number of variations of the special symbols has reached the specified number of times. This stipulated number counter 203j corresponds to the stipulated number of times acquired when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: Yes), that is, at the end of the jackpot. A value is set (S1213), and then subtracted every time the special symbol fluctuates in the fluctuation frequency subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S407). When the value of the specified number counter 203j changes from "1" to "0", a new state status is set based on the contents specified in the corresponding state transition table 202f.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 114(a), the ROM 222 includes a variation pattern table 222a, a pending rank selection table 222b, a jackpot middle effect selection table 222c, an addition number selection table 222d, a continuous effect mode selection table 222e, and a continuous effect mode selection table 222e. It has at least a value main selection table 222f, a continuous value sub-selection table 222g, a final mode selection table 222h, an expectation level selection table 222i, and an expectation level effect selection table 222j.

The variation pattern table 222a is referred to for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the aspect of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. is a table. A variation pattern command for display is set based on the aspect of the variation effect selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S3812 in FIG. 147).

The reserved rank selection table 222b is a table for selecting a reserved rank based on the reserved status of special symbols, and the effect during the big win is determined based on the selected reserved rank. Here, the details of this reserved rank selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b).

FIG. 115(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 115(b), this reservation rank selection table 222b has the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 (the number of reserved balls of special symbol) and whether there is winning information indicating a big hit in the reserved balls of special symbol 2. A pending rank is defined in association with the determination result of whether or not. By constructing in this way, the performance executed during the big win can be determined based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special pattern (special pattern 2) executed after the big win.

Here, in this control example, when both the reserved ball of special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of special symbol 2 exist, the process of preferentially digesting the reserved ball of special symbol 2 is executed (see FIG. 127). ). That is, the timing at which the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 are digested is indefinite.

Therefore, in this control example, based on the winning information included in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 that preferentially fluctuates after the end of the big hit (the held ball whose fluctuation order is fixed after the end of the big hit) and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is configured to select a reserved rank, and a jackpot performance can be executed based on the fluctuation result (lottery result) of the special symbols executed after the jackpot is finished.

In addition, when both the reserved ball of special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of special symbol 2 exist, the reserved ball is in the order of being reserved (the order of entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140). If it is a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration (so-called winning order digestion) that digests, instead of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, all the reserved balls or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4) in order of digestion It may be configured to select the pending rank as a target. As a result, it is possible to execute the big win performance based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbols executed after the big win is finished.

Referring to FIG. 115(b), the contents of the reservation rank selection table 222b will be specifically described. If there is prize winning information, the reserved rank "3" is selected, and if there is no prize winning information indicating winning, the reserved rank "2" is selected.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols (special pattern 2) is "4" and there is winning information indicating winning among them, the reserved rank "4" is selected and there is no winning information indicating winning. ', the reserved rank '1' is selected. When the reserved number of special symbols (special symbol 2) is "0", the reserved rank "1" is selected without using the reserved rank selection table 222b.

The reserved rank selected with reference to the reserved rank selection table 222b is referred to in the later-described jackpot effect selection table 222c. Next, with reference to FIG. 115(c), the effect selection table 222c during the jackpot will be described. This jackpot middle effect selection table 222c is a table for selecting the effect to be executed during the jackpot. It is referred to when executing the setting process (see FIG. 143) (S3406).

In this jackpot middle effect selection table 222c, the jackpot middle effect is defined in association with the reserved rank selected in the reserved rank selection table 222b and the first effect counter 223y1. Specifically, when the reserved rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 99", the "ordinary win effect" is defined. This "ordinary win effect" is an effect (see FIG. 83(b)) that is completed during one big win game, and an effect corresponding to the jackpot type to be executed is executed.

When the reserved rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "100 to 149", the "additional effect" is defined. As described above with reference to FIG. 83(a), this "additional effect" partially displays the number of round games executed in one jackpot (for example, in the case of 15 rounds, first 5 rounds are displayed), and as the jackpot game progresses, the number of remaining rounds (undisplayed number of rounds) is displayed.

When the ``additional performance'' is executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds the jackpot currently being executed is, and to make the player pay attention to the performance during the jackpot game. . Furthermore, the "additional effect" of the first control example is when multiple jackpots are won in a short period of time (the next jackpot is included in the winning information (holding pattern) acquired at the end of the previous jackpot case), by adding the number of rounds of the next big win to the number of rounds of the previous big win, it is configured to run across a plurality of big wins.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the jackpot has been won while the "additional effect" is being executed. Therefore, the game can be played while enjoying how many rounds in total are displayed by the "additional effect".

Furthermore, in the "additional effect" of this control example, the number of rounds executed in one jackpot can be divided and displayed, and the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpots can be summed and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times of winning big wins and the number of rounds to be executed for each big win while one "additional effect" is being executed. As a result, for example, when the number of rounds executed during one big win is 15 rounds, the pachinko machine 10 always sets the variable probability state as the game state after the end of the big win, and wins the jackpot of 15 rounds. is difficult to understand, and the game can be played while predicting which game state will be set after the end of the big win.

In addition, when using an effect suggesting a game state set after the end of the big win as the effect to be executed during the big win, the effect is executed during one big win before the result of the effect is displayed. By grasping the number of rounds to be played, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game state set after the end of the jackpot is specified and the performance effect is lowered.

Next, when the pending rank is "2" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", the "normal winning effect" is defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is In the range of "50 to 149", "additional effects" are defined. When the reserved rank is "3" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", the "normal win effect" is defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "50 to 49". "Additional effect" is defined in the range of "99", and "Continuous winning effect" is defined in the range of "100 to 149" of the value of the first effect counter 223y1.

As described above with reference to FIG. 84, this "continuous winning effect" is an effect ( See FIG. 84). As the "continuous winning effect" executed here, for example, the sum of the number of rounds of the first big win (eg 15 rounds) and the number of rounds of the second big win (eg 10 rounds) (eg 25 rounds) Round) is executed when one big win game is started (the first round of the first big win is started).

By executing the ``continuous win effect'' in this way, it is possible to quickly inform the player that he or she has won a plurality of jackpots, and to give the player a sense of superiority while playing the jackpot game with peace of mind. can let

The reserved rank is "4" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", "normal win effect" is defined, and in the range of "50 to 149", "Continuous hit production" is stipulated.

As described above, in this control example, a different effect (during the big win) is executed during the big win based on the selected pending rank and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223y1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the effect executed during the big win.

Furthermore, since the timing of informing the player that the next big win is included in the hold is made different depending on the effect during the big win selected, for example, at the timing when the previous big win game ends, the next big win Compared to pachinko machines that notify the presence or absence of reserved patterns to win the jackpot (whether or not there is a reserved inner ring), compared to the case of notifying the presence or absence of a reserved inner ring only at a specific timing, It is possible to execute a jackpot game while making the player have expectations for the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the content and ratio of the performance during the big win selected according to the holding rank are made different, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations and the second ball entrance during the big win game. It is possible to execute an effect in which the look-ahead result of the winning ball 140 can be taken into consideration, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, if the reserved rank is "1", that is, if the number of reserved symbols is the upper limit value at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved symbols, Since the game is not executed, it is specified that either the normal win effect or the additional effect is selected, and the selection ratio is defined so that the normal win effect is more likely to be selected. In other words, if the pending rank is "1" at the time of winning the jackpot, the player will not have excessive expectations for the pending inner resort, or Any of the "additional effects" that makes it difficult to understand how many rounds the jackpot is is executed.

If the reserved rank is "2", that is, if the number of reserved symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved symbols, the reserved rank is different from "1", There is a possibility of acquiring new reserved symbols during the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the reservation is not confirmed at the time of winning the jackpot, in order to cope with the case where the reservation is confirmed during the jackpot game, the "additional Production” is set to be selected at a high rate. Thus, when a reserved symbol for winning a jackpot is acquired during a jackpot game, the fact can be notified to the player by the "additional performance".

If the reserved rank is "3", that is, if the number of reserved symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot, and if there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved patterns, that is, if the reserved pattern is not the upper limit, When a jackpot game is executed in a state in which the consecutive residence is confirmed, in addition to the above-mentioned "normal winning effect" and "additional effect", it is possible to notify early that the reserved consecutive residence is confirmed. If the reserved rank is "4", that is, if the reserved design is the upper limit and there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved design, "normal winning It is stipulated that either one of "effect for winning" or "effect for continuous winning" is selected.

In other words, among the reserved ranks "3" and "4" in which the reserved inner renso has already been determined, the reserved rank "3" is in a state in which a new reserved ball (winning information) can be acquired during the jackpot game. Therefore, by making the ``additional presentation'' selectable, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the next big win by the reserved ball (winning information) acquired during the big win game.

On the other hand, in the case of the reservation rank "4", a new reservation ball (winning information) cannot be acquired during the jackpot game, and the next jackpot will not be won during the jackpot game. "Effect" is not selected, and the effect by "continuous winning effect" is executed. By configuring in this way, the result of determining whether or not the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot is the upper limit and in other cases, that is, whether or not new reserved balls can be obtained during the jackpot game. By differentiating the options of the performance executed during the big win based on the above, it is possible to suppress the execution of the performance with a sense of incongruity with respect to the actual holding situation.

It should be noted that, in this control example, even if any of the pending rank is selected, because it is defined that the "production for normal hit" is selected, even if the "production for normal hit" is executed Even if there is, it is possible to leave the possibility of reservation. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to execute the game during the big win while making the player expect the reservation within the reserve until the end.

Next, the add-on number selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 116(a). This addition number selection table 222d is a fixed round number display mode Dm4 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when "addition effect" is selected as the effect executed during the big win. This is a table for selecting a value (additional round number) to be added to (see FIG. 86(a)).

This additional number selection table 222d, in the win-related command process (see FIG. 142), when a new round number command is received (S3304: Yes) and when the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON ( S3306: Yes) is referred to in part of the processing during the addition effect (see FIG. 144) executed (S3506). The selected additional number is stored in the area for storing the value to be added to the determined round number display mode Dm4 in the display round number storage area 223g (S3506).

Then, the value displayed in the running round number display mode Dm3 (the number of jackpot rounds that are currently running) and the value displayed in the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 (the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed) are different. If they are the same, the additional number stored in the display round number storage area 223g is displayed in the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86(a)).

As shown in FIG. 116(a), the addition number selection table 222d includes the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot, whether or not there is a winning prize (whether or not the reservation is confirmed), and the second effect counter 223y2. The number of additions is defined in association with . Specifically, when the value of the number of remaining rounds is "5", "5" is selected as the additional number regardless of the presence or absence of a winning prize and the value of the second effect counter 223y2.

In this first control example, the number of rounds of all jackpots (the number of rounds of jackpots in which the jackpot effect is executed) is set to a multiple of 5 (5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), and the number of remaining rounds is 5. This is because, in the case of a round, it is necessary to display the number of remaining rounds in the fixed round number display mode Dm4 at this timing.

If the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10, 15", the winning prize is "yes", and the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the number of additions is "5", and the value of "50 to 99" is added. The number of additions "10" is defined in the range, the number of additions "15" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10, 15", the winning prize is "none", and the second When the value of the effect counter 223y2 is in the range of ``0 to 49'', the number of additions is ``5'', when the value is in the range of ``50 to 99'', the number of additions is ``15'', and in the range of ``100 to 149'', the number of additions is `` 10” is defined.

As described above, when the number of remaining rounds is the same (for example, "15"), it is stipulated that the ratio of the number of additions to be selected differs depending on whether or not there is a winning prize. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not there will be a reserve house on the basis of the value added during the "additional effect", and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The value of the number of remaining rounds is "20~", the winning prize is "yes", the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the number of additions is "5", and the range of "50 to 99". , and the range of "100 to 149" defines the number of addition "15". In addition, in this first control example, since the maximum value of the number of jackpot rounds executed in one jackpot game is set to "15 rounds", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 ~", The winning prize is never "none". Therefore, if the number of remaining rounds is "20 or more" and the winning prize is "none", the additional number "-" is defined, and if selected, an error command is set. .

Here, when an error command is set, that is, when the remaining number of rounds actually executed is different from the remaining number of rounds managed by the sound lamp control device 113, the additional effect is continued. Since there is a high possibility that an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort will be executed if the game is played, the execution of the additional effect is stopped, and based on the information received from the main controller 110 for the jackpot that is currently being executed. , the number of rounds set for the jackpot that is currently being executed and the number of rounds that are currently being executed are preferably configured to start execution of performance for displaying on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the performance during the big win, which gives the player a sense of discomfort, is continuously executed.

Next, the continuous effect mode selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG.116(b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the continuous production|presentation mode selection table 222e. This continuation effect mode selection table 222e is the effect mode ( It is a table for selecting the continuous effect mode for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect), and is referred to in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) (S4005 in FIG. 149). ), the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m (S4006). Then, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), in this continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the value of a continuous effect setting counter 223q, which will be described later, the presence or absence of a winning prize (whether or not the reservation is confirmed), A different continuous effect mode is defined in association with the value of the third effect counter 223y3.

Here, the continuous production setting counter 223q is a counter for counting the number of times the continuous production is set in the variable probability state or the time saving state, and by continuing the variable probability state or the time saving state for a long period of time, the battle It is used to determine that the effect has been executed multiple times. The detailed contents of the continuous effect setting counter 223q will be described later with reference to FIG. 114(b).

Specifically describing the contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "1" and the winning is set to "yes" in the pending information (winning prize information). The value of the third effect counter 223y3 is set to the continuous effect mode "1" within the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "2" is defined to be within the range of "100 to 149". there is

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "1" and the winning information (winning information) is "Yes", the continuous effect mode "5" is set regardless of the value of the third effect counter 223y3. stipulated. As a pattern corresponding to this continuous performance mode "5", there is a case where the first spin in which the battle performance is executed first after the end of the big win wins the jackpot, and it is intended to provide the player with a special feeling. , a dedicated continuous production mode is set.

Next, when the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q is "2 to 5" and the win is "none" in the pending information (winning information), the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is within the range of "0 to 99". A continuous effect mode "2" is defined, a continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and when the pending information (winning information) is "yes", the third effect counter 223y3 The continuous effect mode "2" is specified in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "1" is specified in the range of "100 to 149".

Then, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "6 or more" and the hit is "none" in the pending information (winning information), the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is within the range of "0 to 99". The mode "3" is defined, the continuous effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and when the pending information (winning information) wins "yes", the value of the third effect counter 223y3 The continuous effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

In this control example, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuous effect mode selected with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e. ), the type of your character, the type and order of the opponent characters that are selectably displayed, the type and HP value of the opponent characters that are actually selected, etc. The type and color of the background displayed during the pre-battle production and the pattern of attacking the opponent character, which are not related to the display mode during the development of the battle reach, are set based on the continuous production mode in which the production mode is selected.

For example, when the continuation effect mode "5" is selected (that is, when the first battle effect is executed and there is a win during the hold), the player is notified that the jackpot will be won soon. A production mode for doing so is set. Specifically, a premier character that is set when there is winning information that will win a jackpot in the hold is set as the character of the player or the opponent, or a specific value is set as the initial value or intermediate value of the HP value of the opponent character. (for example, "777" or "333"), or all the same characters are displayed as a combination of selectable opponent characters. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest to the player that he/she will win a big prize using a plurality of fluctuation periods.

Next, the contents of the continued value main selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f. Here, the continuation value in this control example will be described. In this control example, when a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, a battle effect is executed as a continuous effect to indicate that the game state is continuing. be done.

In this battle production, a battle reach (final mode) production for indicating whether or not the advantageous game state is over, and a pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed are executed. When the advantageous game state is not ended as a result of the battle ready-to-win effect, the pre-battle effect is executed again.

During the pre-battle effect, the third symbol display device 81 executes the effect of decreasing the opponent's HP value (continuous value) as described above with reference to FIG. Based on the continuation value decreased during the pre-battle production, a battle ready-to-win production mode (opponent's HP (continuous value) at the start of battle ready-to-win) is determined.

In the first control example, the continuation value to be decreased during the pre-battle effect is obtained by adding the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f and the value selected by the continuation value secondary selection table 222g. configured to be calculated. By setting the continuous value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining a plurality of values in this manner, the processing load when increasing the variation of the continuous value can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 117(a), the description is continued. In the continuous value main selection table 222f, based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a, the result of determining the number of remaining fluctuations until the fluctuation of the special symbol that wins the big hit is executed, and the currently displayed result. A continuation value to be selected in association with a continuation value that is specified is specified.

That is, the continuous value main selection table 222f defines that the continuous value is selected based on the special symbol lottery result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the battle ready-for-hire effect is executed by taking over the opponent's HP (continuous value) that is variable during the pre-battle effect.

Here, if the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f are set more complicated in order to increase the variation of display of increase/decrease of the continuous value executed during the pre-battle effect, for example, in this control example, 100 Although the continuous value is managed in units of , the continuous value is managed in smaller units (units of ten), and the special pattern lottery results are further subdivided, and each subdivided lottery result is In the case of specifying the continuation value in correspondence, there is a problem that the processing load for selecting the continuation value increases. However, in order to enhance the effect of the pre-battle production, it is necessary to increase the variation of the continuous value increase/decrease display.

Therefore, in this control example, when a continuation value is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value main selection table 222g, which is a table independent of the continuation value main selection table 222f, is used to select the continuation value main selection table 222g. The continuation value selected in the selection table 222f is configured to be further variable. Thereby, the variation of the continuous value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the first control example, the continuous value is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the difference value of the continuous value selected using the continuous value main selection table 222f. (HP value) is configured so as to set the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) to decrease. Then, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is displayed as the continuation value after reduction (after updating). It is configured as follows.

Then, an attack effect managed by a value (continuation value) selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f, and a continuation value ( The range of values selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is set so as not to differ from the difference value of HP value).

By configuring in this way, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) that decreases the continuous value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is selected in the continuous value main selection table 222f. Even if management is performed using only a rough continuation value, an effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Specifically, as the attack effect set based on the difference value of the continuation values selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, if the difference value is “0 to 200”, a “light attack” (see FIG. 92 (a)), "201 to 400" means "medium attack", and "401 or more" means "strong attack" (see FIG. 92(b)). be.

As a result, for example, even though the difference value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is in the range of “medium attack” (for example, 300), the displayed difference value of the continuation value is “weak”. It is possible to suppress the difference between the continuous value range based on the special symbol lottery and the continuous value range actually displayed.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), the continuous value main selection table 222f contains the number of remaining fluctuations until winning variation and the last selected continuous value (among the currently displayed continuous values, the continuous value main selection table 222f The value selected in ) is defined in association with the continuation value. Specifically, if the value of the residual variation counter 222t is "3" and the last selected continuous value is "1000", then "800" is selected, and if it is "900", then "700" is selected. A value with a difference value of "200" is selected so that Similarly, if the continuation value selected last time is "400" to "800", a value with a difference value of "200" is selected. If the continuation value selected last time is '300', '200' is selected (difference value '100'). 0” is selected.

Next, when the value of the residual variation counter 222t is "2", if the last selected continuation value is "300" to "700", a value with a difference value of "100" is selected. If the selected continuation value is '100' or '200', then a value with a differential value of '0' is selected. If the value of the remaining variation counter 222t is "1", that is, if the next variation is a winning variation, and if the last selected continuous value is between "300" and "700", the difference value is "200". is selected, and if the previously selected value is "200", the value ("200") that makes the difference value "0" is selected, and if the previously selected value is "100", , the value "0" is selected so that the difference value is "100".

As described above, in this control example, based on the continuous value main selection table 222f, out of the continuous values (HP values) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, roughly ( Hundred unit) value is configured to select, and the production mode of the attack production is set based on the difference value, so the continuation value displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 (HP value). The number of patterns can be reduced, and the processing load when setting effects can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 used as the continuation value subselection table 222g will be described with reference to FIGS. 117(b) and 117(c). FIG. 117(b) schematically shows the contents of the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, and FIG. 117(c) schematically shows the contents of the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2. It is a diagram.

As described above, the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is used to increase the variable pattern of the continuation value during the continuation effect, and is referred to after the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. table. In this control example, by adding the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (Continuation value for production) is set.

In this control example, the continuous value main selection table 222f is referenced to determine whether the selected continuous value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), and based on the determination result, a different continuous value secondary selection table 222g is selected. If the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value primary selection table 222f is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 200), the first continuation value secondary shown in FIG. The selection table 222g1 is referenced, and if it is less than a predetermined value (eg, 200), the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 shown in FIG. 117(c) is referenced.

The first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117(b) defines the continuation value in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuous value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 79", the continuous value "-10" is selected, In the range of "80-119", the continuous value of "-20" is selected, and in the range of "120-149", the continuous value of "+20" is selected.

As a result, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f is added to the continuation value selected using the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, thereby increasing the types of continuation values on display. can be done. Specifically, when the continuation value main selection table 222f is referred to and the continuation value is decreased (updated) from “1000” to “800”, the selected continuation value (“800”) is changed to the predetermined value ( For example, 200) or more, so the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 is referenced. When the value "+20" is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1, "820" is displayed as the continuous value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 ( See FIG. 92(a)). On the other hand, when the value "-20" is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1, "780" is displayed as the continuous value (HP value).

Thus, by adding the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g to the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 Value (HP value) variations can be increased.

Here, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 is referred to and the displayed continuation value ( HP value) is set, a value of "+20" will be selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 while "0" is selected as the continuation value in the continuation value main selection table 222f. As an attack effect, the HP value of the opponent character is set to "0", whereas the continuation value (HP value) on the display becomes "20".

Therefore, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200). It is configured to refer to the sub-selection table 222g2. As shown in FIG. 117(c), the second continuous value sub-selection table 222g2 defines a range of "-20" to "0" as values to be selected.

The first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117(b) defines the continuation value in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuous value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 99", the continuous value "-5" is selected, In the range "100 to 149", the continuation value "-10" is selected.

Here, differences between the above-described first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and second continuation value subselection table 222g2 will be described. The first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 provides a value to add ("+20") and a value to subtract ("- 10" and "-20") can be selected. On the other hand, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 provides values ("-5", "-10") to be subtracted from the continuation value (eg, 100) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f as values that can be selected. ) is configured to be selected.

By configuring in this way, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the displayed continuation value (HP value) range can be set wider. is possible, and the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set within a range that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of effects within a range that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition to the contents of the first control example described above, storage means for storing the value selected by the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 and determination of whether the value stored in the storage means is a positive value or a negative value. determining means for determining which of the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuous value sub-selection table 222g2 to use to select a value based on the determination result of the determining means; may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the values selected by the continuous value sub-selection table 222g from biasing toward the positive or negative direction.

In the first control example, as described above, a configuration is used in which the mode of the attack effect is selected based on the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. For example, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value (HP value) actually displayed on the display screen and the continuation value main selection table 222f and a calculation means for calculating a difference value from the continuation value (HP value) set based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g; It is good also as a structure using a means.

In the first control example, the audio ramp control device 113 has the continuous value sub-selection table 222g, but other configurations may be used. 222f only, and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g may be provided on the display control device 114 side, or the display control device 114 may perform the process of selecting the mode of the attack effect. With this configuration, the audio ramp control device 113 only needs to perform update management of continuous values using the continuous value main selection table 222f, and the processing load can be further reduced.

In addition, in the first control example, the continuous value selection using the continuous value main selection table 222f or the continuous value sub-selection table 222g described above is executed when there is winning information corresponding to a big hit as a result of pre-reading of reserved symbols. In addition to the setting, that is, even when there is no prize winning information corresponding to the big win as a result of the look-ahead of the reserved symbols, the process of changing the continuation value is executed. Although the detailed description is omitted, the continuous value variable processing in this effect is variable depending on the period during which the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is continuously executed and the type of the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. A later continuation value is configured to be selected.

By configuring in this way, the effect of decreasing the continuous value can be frequently executed while the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is being executed, and the player is prevented from becoming bored with the effect contents. can do.

In addition, in the first control example, as a continuation effect (pre-battle effect), continuation values of four opponent candidates (A to D) are displayed as possible opponent candidates during battle reach (see FIG. 91(a)). For example, even if the continuation value (HP) of a specific opponent is greatly reduced in the continuous production (pre-battle production), the continuous production (pre-battle production) can be continued by selecting another opponent. can be run as

With this configuration, only the continuous value continues to decrease when the continuous performance (pre-battle performance) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when winning is not won during probability variation). It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach production from becoming scarce.

In addition, in the first control example, in order to prevent the pre-battle effect from continuing for a long period of time, even if the special symbol is not won, a predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol is 10 If the pre-battle production continues while it fluctuates more than once, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a deviation fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds), the battle ready-to-win is executed, and the battle ready-to-win As a result of (2), when the win is not won, the continuation performance (second time) is executed again, and the continuation value is initialized. As a result, when the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is executed over a long period of time (for example, when the win is not won during the variable probability), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach production from becoming scarce.

Next, the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a). This final mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the effect mode of the battle ready-to-win that is executed during the above-described continuous effect, and is a table for determining the suitability of the special symbol variation in which the battle ready-to-win is executed, and the fifth effect. A different final mode is defined in association with the value of the counter 223y5.

Specifically, when the result of judging the success or failure of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot ends, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is increased. The range of "0-49" defines the final mode "1", the range of "50-129" defines the final mode "2", and the range of "130-149" defines the final mode "3".

When the result of judging whether or not the special symbols are successful is a big hit, and the game state advantageous to the player is not given after the big win is completed, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is changed to the range of "0 to 129" and the final mode "4". However, the final mode "5" is defined in the range of "130 to 149", and if the result of the judgment of the special symbol is out, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 will be in the range of "0 to 129". 6”, and the final aspect “7” is defined in the range of “130 to 149”.

In addition, in the case of a special figure variation in which the special symbol is out of the suitability determination result and the time saving end condition is established, the value of the fifth production counter 223y5 is in the range of "0 to 129" The final mode "4", The final mode "5" is defined in the range "130-149".

Here, the effect contents of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a diagram for explaining the effect contents of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96, as the final mode of the battle effect (battle reach), the effect is executed in which either the main character or the opponent character attacks a total of three times. different attack patterns are selected depending on the selected final mode.

Specifically, in the final modes "1" to "3", an attack pattern in which a winning battle is executed in which the main character wins is selected, and in the case of the final mode "1", all three attack opportunities , the attack pattern in which the main character attacks is selected, and in the case of the final mode "2", the main character attacks at the first and third attack opportunities, and the opponent character attacks at the second attack opportunity. The attack pattern to be performed is selected. In the case of the final mode "3", an attack pattern (resurrection effect (see FIG. 96)) in which the main character revives and defeats the opponent's character after the opponent's character has attacked in all three attack opportunities is selected. be done.

Although detailed description is omitted, the final mode selection table 222h is provided for each variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect to be executed. A final mode (final mode "1" and "2") completed with an attack is defined to be easily selected, and a variation pattern with a variable time of 90 seconds is defined to be easily selected for resurrection performance. Here, in the resurrection effect executed with a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, the effect data for the first three attacks is the same as the effect data of the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (final mode “5”). are used. As a result, the production data can be shared to reduce the data volume, and the first half of the production in which the winning battle is executed (the first half of the final mode “3”) and the production in which the losing battle is executed (the final mode “5”). ”), and by executing the same effect, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the result of the effect in the middle of the effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description continues. For the final modes "4" and "5", an attack pattern is selected in which a defeat battle in which the main character is defeated is executed. In this defeat battle, an effect is executed in which the HP gauge Dm21, which indicates the continuation value (HP) of the main character, finally becomes 0 as a result of the battle reach. In the case of the final mode "4", an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity, and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities, and the final mode "5". In the case of , an attack pattern is selected in which the opponent's character attacks in all three attack opportunities. Thus, in the attack pattern of the losing battle set in this control example, until the last attack (the third attack) is executed, other battles (winning battles, draw battles to be described later) and Since the same performance is executed, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the performance result in the middle of the performance.

In the final modes "6" and "7", an attack pattern is selected in which neither the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value of the main character nor the HP gauge Dm22 indicating the continuation value of the opponent character becomes 0, and a draw battle is executed. When this draw battle is executed, the battle reach ends, and the next pre-battle effect is executed. In the case of the final mode "6", an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity, and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities, and the final mode "7" is selected. In the case of , an attack pattern is selected in which the opponent's character attacks in all three attack opportunities. In this way, in the attack pattern of the draw battle set in this control example, since the same effect as that of another battle (defeat battle) is executed as the attack pattern, not only the attack pattern but also the It is possible to make the user pay attention to the degree of reduction of the HP gauge, and to surely suppress a situation in which the effect result is grasped in the middle of the effect.

In this control example, the same attack pattern as in the losing battle is selected as the attack pattern to be executed during the draw battle, but the same attack pattern as in other battles (winning battle) is selected. It may be configured such that an effect in which an attack pattern is executed is selected. As a result, when the third battle is executed, depending on the attack pattern executed at each attack opportunity (first to third attack opportunities), the current battle reach is either a winning battle or a draw battle (that is, , a battle without defeat), and can see the performance (battle reach) without worrying that the game state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 114(b). FIG. 114(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 stores a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a state storage area 223e, a jackpot information storage area 223f, and the number of display rounds. Area 223g, addition production flag 223h, display extension flag 223i, variation counter 223j, elapsed time counter 223k, continuous production mode storage area 223m, continuous value storage area 223n, duration counter 223p, continuation At least an effect setting counter 223q, a continuation effect flag 223r, an indication setting flag 223t, an effect counter group 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the special symbol 1, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the special symbol 2. ), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning is detected. , From the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (whether or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern ) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command; various types of information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223a when the winning information command is received; A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. By configuring in this way, an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be appropriately executed.

In this control example, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the setting of the performance mode such as the big win effect, the battle effect, and the degree of expectation display effect is executed as the look-ahead effect. In this way, various effects (read-ahead effects) are executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so that the player can see each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

As shown in FIG. 115(a), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b counts the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 for counting the reserved ball number of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball number of the special symbol 2. It has a special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 for doing, and the value of each counter according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a winning information command is received or when a variation pattern command is received. to update.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the special symbol 1 retained by the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance up to a maximum of 4 times for each type of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is a variable display of the special symbol 2 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended by the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance of the special symbol 2 up to 4 times at maximum for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S3208 in FIG. 140). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b1 of the audio lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b1 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b2 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol 1 or the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol 2 transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3202 in FIG. 140), and the third symbol display device It is turned off when the variable display is set in 81 (see S3802 in FIG. 147). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 140), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S3814 in FIG. 147). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The jackpot information storage area 223f is an area for storing information about the jackpot to be executed. This is an area for storing when received from 110 . In this control example, the aspect of the effect executed during the big win is set based on the information stored in the big win information storage area 223f.

The display round number storage area 223g is an area for storing information regarding the number of rounds displayed during the big win. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. A finalized round number display mode Dm4 for partially confirming and displaying the set number of rounds is displayed in the main display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information on the number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g. It is configured to be displayed in Dm.

This display round number storage area 223g stores 0 as an initial value, receives the round number command among the winning related commands transmitted from the main control device 110 (S3304 in FIG. 142: Yes), and adds the effect flag. 223h is set to ON (S3306 in FIG. 142: Yes) In the processing during the added effect (see FIG. 143) executed, the stored value (the number of rounds) is referred to and set internally. A difference between the current number of rounds and the number of finalized rounds is calculated, and the value of the number of finalized rounds (the number of rounds) newly determined based on the difference value is stored.

The number of rounds stored here is added for display so as to be displayed in the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 when the number of rounds is a predetermined number of rounds (the number of rounds n) in the additional display process (see FIG. 145). It is used when setting a display command (see S3604 in FIG. 145). Then, when the additional effect ends, the stored value is initialized.

In this way, in this control example, when a new round is started, the processing during the addition effect (see FIG. 144) is executed, the final number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g is updated, and a predetermined number of When the number of rounds (which is a multiple of 5 in this control example) is started, a display process for updating the display mode of the determined round number display mode Dm4 is executed. Therefore, since the number of fixed rounds is constantly updated (every round), a condition for updating the display mode of the number of fixed rounds display mode Dm4 may be added, or the display of the number of fixed rounds display mode Dm4 may be displayed based on the player's operation. By selecting whether or not to update the mode, even if the display timing of the fixed number of rounds is changed, it is possible to reliably cope with the situation.

Further, in this control example, when an additional prize generated during the jackpot wins the jackpot, the number of rounds is identified in advance based on the prize information corresponding to the additional prize, and the result of the advance identification indicates the number of rounds. The number of displayed rounds is set according to the total number of rounds including round number information.

The add-on effect flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the add-on effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the add-on effect is selected as the effect during the big win. This add-on effect flag 223h is set to ON when the add-on effect is read out as the effect during the jackpot in the process for setting the effect during the jackpot (see FIG. 143) (see S3408 in FIG. 143), and the hit-related command process (see FIG. 142 ) (S3304 in FIG. 142), the setting state is determined (S3306 in FIG. 142). Then, in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146), when it is determined that there is no pending residence (S3703 in FIG. 146: No), it is set to OFF.

The display extension flag 223i is a flag for indicating a state in which the effect during the big win (end display of the big win) is extended and displayed even during the period of fluctuation of the special symbol executed after the end of the big win, and the effect during the big win ( It is set to ON when extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot). In the state where this display extension flag 223i is set to ON, that is, while the effect during the big win (display of the ending of the big win) is being executed, if a new big win is won, information about the big win (winning ball number and number of rounds) are displayed in a manner continued from the information on the previous big win (number of winning balls and number of rounds).

This display extension flag 223i is, in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146), when the jackpot effect executed this time is a normal hit effect and the game state after the jackpot is a probability variable state or a time saving state ( S3709 in FIG. 146: Yes), it is set to ON (S3710 in FIG. 146). Then, when the special symbol has changed four times since the display extension flag 223i was set to ON (S3904 in FIG. 148: Yes), or when the elapsed time is 4 seconds (S5103 in FIG. 154: Yes) , is set to off (S3905 in FIG. 148, S5104 in FIG. 154).

As described above, in this control example, after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times), or a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. is configured to be set to off when This is because the period during which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON is a period during which the effect during the jackpot is continuously executed, and when the jackpot is won during that period, the effect during the jackpot is performed. This is because it is a period that continues (continuous execution of the previous jackpot effect).

To explain in detail, as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to OFF, when only the number of fluctuations in the special design reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the special design is reserved at the end of the jackpot. The value of the number of balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is less than the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (4 times), and the player interrupts the launch of the ball after the end of the big win. If this happens, the game will be interrupted without the number of variations of the special symbol reaching a predetermined number (4 times) after the end of the big win, and there is a risk that the performance during the big win will continue for a long period of time. be. Furthermore, if the player stops playing in such a state, the effect during the jackpot will be displayed even though no one is playing the game. There is a problem that the pachinko machine 10 hesitates to play a game and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered.

Therefore, in this control example, in addition to the number of times the special symbol changes, the elapsed time (4 seconds) is also provided as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to OFF. As a result, the period during which the performance during the big win is continuously displayed and the performance over a plurality of big wins can be executed can be set as a limited period. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win the jackpot during the limited period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The variation number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol during the period when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. The fluctuation number counter 223j executes the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and when the extension management process (see FIG. 148) is executed, "5" is displayed. is set (see S3902 in FIG. 148).

The elapsed time counter 223k counts the elapsed time during the period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. This elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000 (corresponding to 4 seconds)" as a counter value when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146) (see FIG. 146). S3711), the counter value is decremented by "1" every time the effect update process (S3112) of the main process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113, which is executed every millisecond, is executed (FIG. 154). (see S5102 of ).

Then, in the effect update process (see FIG. 154), when the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k becomes "0", the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (see S5104 in FIG. 154). By configuring in this way, when the elapsed time after the end of the big win has passed the predetermined time (4 seconds), the production during the big win is ended, and the normal production corresponding to each game state can be executed. , the game can be motivated to win a jackpot within a limited period.

In this control example, the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000" corresponding to 4 seconds, but the time to be set is not limited to this. Alternatively, each time the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, one of a plurality of times may be selected and its period may be set. Moreover, as a value to be set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k, it is preferable to set a value longer than the sum of the variation periods for four rotations of the special symbol 2 executed after the end of the big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 preferentially digested during the big win while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The continuous effect mode storage area 223m is a storage area for storing the continuous effect mode selected when the continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed when it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) and the game state is the time saving state or the probability variable state. In the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), the continuous effect mode selected by the continuous effect mode selection table 222e is stored, and the Qingshu mode is selected by the final mode selection table (battle reach is executed). until), an effect (pre-battle effect) corresponding to the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed.

The continuous value storage area 223n is a storage area for storing the value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f among the continuous values (HP values) increased or decreased during the continuous effect executed in this control example. Then, based on the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, update (increase/decrease) processing of the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect is executed.

In this control example, the continuation value (HP value) is roughly selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the detailed value of the continuation value (HP value) is selected based on the continuation value secondary selection table 222g. By configuring as follows, the increase/decrease pattern of the continuation value displayed during the continuation effect is increased. Since it is configured to execute only with the continuous value selected based on the can be reduced.

The continuation period counter 223p is a counter for measuring the period during which the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, and is used to suppress frequent execution of the final mode (battle reach) in the continuation effect. , is the counter used.

This continuation period counter 223p continues every time the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed in a state where the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, that is, each time the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed. 1 is added in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4009 in FIG. 149). Then, in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), when it is determined that the counter value is less than "6" (S4003 in FIG. 149: No), the final mode (battle reach) is not selected. Configure. By configuring in this way, the selection of the final mode (battle reach) is suppressed until the value of the duration counter is 6 or more, that is, after the pre-battle effect is executed until the special symbol variation is executed 6 times. be done.

The continuous effect setting counter 223q is a counter for measuring the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set (the number of times the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON) while the game state is set to the variable probability state or the time saving state. It is set so that a different continuous effect mode can be easily selected based on the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q. As a result, when the continuous effect is executed for a long period of time and the battle effect is repeatedly set, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of the same mode of battle effect. Further, by setting a continuous effect mode that is executed only when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is a specific value (for example, 1), it is possible to provide the player with a rare effect.

This continuous effect setting counter 223q is referred to when selecting a new continuous effect mode in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4005 in FIG. 149), and 1 is added when the continuous effect mode is selected. (See S4007 in FIG. 149). Then, when the continuous effect ends (when the game state shifts to the normal state, or when a jackpot is won), the counter value is cleared to 0.

The continuous effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect mode is selected (that the pre-battle effect is being executed) during execution of the continuous effect, and when the continuous effect mode is selected, set to on. While this continuation production flag 223r is set to ON, the pre-battle production is executed in the same continuation production mode without selecting a new continuation production mode.

This continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF at the beginning when the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect mode is selected (see S4008 in FIG. 149). While it is set to ON, the process for selecting the continuous effect mode is skipped (S4004 of FIG. 149: Yes). Then, when the final mode is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (that is, when battle reach is selected and the pre-battle effect is completed), it is set to OFF (see S4015 in FIG. 149).

The portent setting flag 223t is a flag used when the countdown effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations (see FIG. 101), and is set to ON when the variable display is switched during the portent effect period. When this precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147), when setting a new variable effect, Control is performed so that the precursor performance of the previous variation is continuously executed from the start of the variation.

This sign setting flag 223t has a countdown effect (see S3232 and S3233 in FIG. 141) having a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) as the look-ahead information in the winning information command process (see FIG. 141), and is currently being executed. If it is determined that the remaining display fluctuation period is 10 seconds or more (S3234 in FIG. 141: Yes), it is set to ON (see S3236 in FIG. 141).

Then, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), it is referred to when setting the effect mode (see S4301 in FIG. 152), and when it is determined that the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON in the process of S4301 In the multiple variation effect setting process (see FIG. 153) executed in , the effect is set to OFF after setting the effect mode (see S4405 in FIG. 153).

The effect counter group 223y is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. The effect counter group 223y has at least a first effect counter 223y1 to a sixth effect counter 223y6, and any counter is an IC for generating random numbers electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. (not shown) is stored in the range of 0 to 198. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for random number generation is an IC capable of operating at an operating clock (e.g., 1 MHz) at least for each performance counter, which can be updated to separate random values and execute judgment. is adopted. The value of the effect counter group 223y is used when executing various determinations executed by the sound lamp control device 113, such as whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, determination of the notice type of the normal pressing effect, and the like.

The other memory area 223z is provided with an area for storing data other than the above-described data and flags other than the above-described flags for setting the state, and other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored. This is an area for storing Specifically, for example, a power-off flag is provided that is used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. This power-off flag receives a power-off command from main controller 110 and is set to ON before power-off processing is executed. After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 138), if the power off flag is on (3008 in FIG. 138: Yes), a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) before the audible lamp controller 113 is activated, i.e., there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S3009 in FIG. 138). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND-type flash memory 234a generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 125) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND-type flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 140 is detected. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 .

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 155).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 121 . FIG. 121 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to perform the power-on main image shown in FIG. 121(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 22(c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, there is a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. 22(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 is detected. 121(b) and 121(c), the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b is used to draw the power-on variation image, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. While the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the ball is detected in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81 can be displayed immediately.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 . can be done. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. However, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation has stopped during the time until the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. can.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 122(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 122, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 122(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, the position a to the position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "Beach Stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122(b), for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, an image between position a and position b is resident. It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 122(a) and (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a stage change is determined by a lottery at the start of fluctuation, the resident video RAM 235 can be stored on the back side of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 for the rear B is stored in a rear image exclusive sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 120) of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described nine types of main patterns (see FIG. 81(b)) with numbers "0" to "9" as the third pattern are resident. be. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, but the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

Image data corresponding to sub-symbols not attached with numbers are also resident in the third design area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sub-symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "young man" and "woman" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are permanently stored in the character design area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 stores the character in the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a total value storage area 233k, and an omen effect flag 233m.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, etc. , a display data table corresponding to a jackpot middle effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display variation pattern command corresponding to a period of one special symbol variation (variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110) as a display stop type. It is configured to output together with the command and set the effect mode corresponding to each command received by the display control device 114, but other configurations may be used. Divide the display variation pattern command corresponding to one period of special symbol variation (eg, 60 seconds) into a plurality of (eg, first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and second half variation pattern (30 seconds) and display control device 114 By configuring in this way, the game content that occurred during the period when the first half variation pattern was executed (for example, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, a new ball entry Acquisition of information), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the second half variation pattern can be set.

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, after once outputting the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation, when the additional display variation pattern command is received, the additional display variation The processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced because there is no need to perform the process of rewriting the effect content in correspondence with the pattern command. In addition, as described above, the voice ramp control device 113 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation (eg, 60 seconds) into a plurality of commands (eg, the first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half When outputting the variation pattern (30 seconds) to the display control device 114, it is preferable to output the display stop type command together with the display variation pattern command that is output first.

In addition, in this control example, a display effect command for executing a continuous effect (see FIG. 96) that is continuously executed when the game state is advantageous to the player, and the continuous effect is terminated. The voice lamp control device 113 provides a display final mode command for executing an effect (battle ready-to-win) to notify whether or not the player wins, and various other commands for increasing the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. When various commands are received, effects corresponding to the various commands are displayed.

Furthermore, even if the presentation contents have already been set based on the reception of the predetermined display command, if the additional display command is received after that, the additional display command is responded to. It is configured so as to overwrite the contents of the presentation with the contents. As a result, based on the reception of the display variation pattern command, in a state in which the effect for the period corresponding to the predetermined period (variation period of the special symbol) is set (created) in advance, additional during that period When a display command (for example, a player's operation of the frame button 22 or a display command indicating acquisition of new ball entry information) is received, the display contents of the effect can be changed smoothly.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the sub-patterns with no numerals "1" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a young man's image, characters, and other characters used for various effects, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of the back face is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "morning stage", "evening stage", and "night stage"), or to display one of back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C (special back faces A to C, etc.), the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display. .

When the type of the back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back face type is specified as the drawing content of the back face image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 75) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 124). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 124).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 124, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 124, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 . The simple image display flag 233c is set to the main image executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to ON in the process (see FIG. 155) (see S6005 in FIG. 155). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting processing of the transfer setting processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, , is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 170(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 157(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 157(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6308 in FIG. 157(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 157 to 169) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 170(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 125) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing of V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed (FIG. 167(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 125), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, ..., error pattern ) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 157(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7607 in FIG. 167). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 157B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The total value storage area 233k is an area for storing (memorizing) a history displayed (displayed as a total value) as a continuous value (HP value) variably displayed in the above-described continuous effect (see FIG. 91). Based on the difference between the value (total value) stored (stored) in the total value storage area 233k and the newly received continuation value (HP value), the display content in the continuous effect (for example, in FIG. 92(a) The decrease value Dm12, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and the effect mode of the attack effect) are determined and displayed.

In other words, in this control example, means (total value storage area 233k) for storing the previously set total value is provided on the display control device 114 side without storing the previously set total value on the sound lamp control device 113 side. The display control device 114 calculates the difference between the previous total value and the current total value, and displays a display mode based on the calculation result. Thereby, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In this control example, means for setting the effect value for increasing the display variation of the continuous value (HP value) on the sound lamp control device 113 side (the continuous value sub-selection table 222g and S4105 to S4107 in FIG. 150). ) is provided, the display control device 114 may be provided with means for setting this effect value. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be further reduced.

The portent effect flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the portent effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. If this portent effect flag 233m is on, it means that the portent effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, and if it is off, the portent effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. It means that the The portent effect flag 233m is set to ON when the additional portent command for display transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7505 in FIG. 166). In addition, this portent effect flag 233m is referenced in the variation pattern command processing (see S6501 in FIG. 159), and after setting the display data table corresponding to the portent effect executed across a plurality of special figure variations, , is set to OFF (see S6503 in FIG. 159). Thereby, it is possible to execute the sign effect across a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

Although detailed description is omitted, when executing a precursor effect across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, the effect data of the precursor effect executed in the previous special figure fluctuation and the effect data at the time of execution When setting the effect corresponding to this special figure fluctuation (S6502 in FIG. 159), referring to the effect data stored in the above-described storage means, the last time It is configured so that the precursor effect executed in the special figure fluctuation is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the sign effect that is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this control example, the configuration is such that the precursor effect is set based on the reception of the display variation pattern command (that is, the configuration is such that the precursor effect is executed as part of the variation pattern). Without being limited to this, when a display command indicating execution of an indication effect is received, regardless of the variable display contents, the indication effect is displayed during the period indicated by the command, or the display indicating that the indication effect is stopped. It may be configured to display until a command is received.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 126 to 137. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 238, 199, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131.

After executing the starting winning process (S105), the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 is displayed. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

When it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

As described above, in this control example, when executing the process of starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is acquired, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is obtained. When the value (N2) of the number counter is 0, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired. . By configuring in this way, the variation of the special symbol 2 can be preferentially executed.

In addition, the processing for starting the variation of the special symbol is not limited to the configuration of this control example. And without setting priority to the special symbol 2, for example, the special symbols may be changed according to the order in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. . In this case, a storage area is provided to store the order in which the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, and the special symbol 1 is provided according to the order (ball entrance order) stored in the storage area. The value of the reserved ball number counter or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter may be acquired, or the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to use a common reserved ball number counter. .

Furthermore, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to vary independently and at the same time. In this case, when it is determined that one of the special symbols is in the middle of a jackpot, the other special symbol stops changing (stops subtraction of the variation time until one jackpot ends), or the other (Even if the fluctuation time has not passed, the lottery result is rewritten to be out and forced to stop). By constructing in this way, in the constitution in which a plurality of special symbols are varied at the same time, when one becomes advantageous to the player, the game can be played without worrying about the variation of the other special symbols. can.

Returning to FIG. 127, the description continues. In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if it is determined that the variation time has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1, and when the special symbol jackpot is determined, the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol The jackpot types (jackpots A to K) are determined according to the symbol 2) and the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In this control example, by varying the lighting pattern of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the jackpot types (jackpots A to K), it is possible to identify the hit jackpot type. Specifically, a plurality of lighting patterns are configured by lighting or extinguishing each of the plurality of LEDs (for example, seven) provided in the first pattern display device 37 . The lighting pattern of the first pattern display device 37 may be configured to have different lighting colors. Furthermore, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to notify the outside that the special symbol is fluctuating by blinking at least one of the plurality of LEDs, and this blinking display is used. So that the lighting period (lighting period for indicating the stop state of the special design) displayed from the stop of the special design to the execution of the next special design variation is longer than the lighting period of the LED. It consists of Thereby, it is possible for the player to grasp whether the special symbols are fluctuating or stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), an opening scenario for the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type (S217). After that, the variable probability flag 203g is reset to OFF, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is reset to 0 (S218), and the start of the jackpot is set (S219). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S219, when the jackpot control processing (S1104) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) is executed, branch to S1201: Yes, and the opening command is set be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

When the process of S219 is completed, next, a stop command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of information about the stop pattern is set (S220), and this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the lottery result of this time is a loss (S216: No), the variation count subtraction process is executed (S221). Note that the change count subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129 . After that, the process proceeds to the above-described S220 process, and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, a first hit random number counter stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols. If the flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (low probability state).

When the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the value for the high probability time A lottery result as to whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot is acquired based on a random number table (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. As described above, five random numbers from "5 to 9" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random numbers for these winnings. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the determination value for the big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 It is also possible to vary the determination value for a big hit. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be a loss in the special symbol 1 is determined to be a hit in the special symbol 2, and bias in the big win can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of determination values for the big hit, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number. The number of determination values that become a big hit may be varied. By constructing in this manner, the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2 can have different probabilities of winning a big hit, and when the lottery is executed with the special pattern with a higher probability of a big win, the player wins the big prize. can have expectations of

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203g is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of special symbols, the first per random number obtained in the process of S301 Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first winning random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big win is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. Only "7" is set as the random number value for the special pattern jackpot, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 coincides with "7", the special pattern jackpot is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes ), based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big winning is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202c, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot Among A to K), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot A (the number of rounds In the 15th round, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big win, the game state after the end of the big win is determined to be the jackpot type set to the variable probability state of the special symbol (see FIG. 107), and "20 to 79". If it is within the range, it is determined to be a jackpot B (a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state of special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won).

Also, if the value of the acquired first win type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 114", the jackpot C (the number of rounds is 10, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends) It is determined that it is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times), and if it is in the range of “115 to 164”, the jackpot D (the number of rounds is 5 rounds, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot) It is determined that the game state after the end is the jackpot type set to the probability variable state of the special symbol).

Furthermore, if the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", the jackpot E (the number of rounds is 5, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state and not a time saving state In the case (if it is in a normal state), the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot, and if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), after the end of the jackpot As a game state, it is determined that the time saving state is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times (see FIG. 107).

Also, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 2 (special figure 2), as in the case of special figure 1 described above, based on the contents defined in the first per type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) Then, the jackpot F to jackpot K are determined.

In the processing of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to K). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the big win types on the third symbol display device 81, the big win types (jackpots A to K) are set as the stop types.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until the big winning symbol stops. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108) as described above. After the process of S307 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot (no) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area) is set. 203b), based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of 203b), the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is front-rear off-reach, non-front-rear off-ready, or complete. Set whether it is out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the defined contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108), normal reach, Determines the variation time of symbol variations such as super reach and special reach. After the process of S309 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 ( S310). Next, a stop type command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127).

Next, the variation count subtraction process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this change count subtraction process (S221). In this fluctuation frequency subtraction process (S221), the time saving medium counter 203h and the specified number counter 203j are subtracted based on the end of fluctuation of the special symbols.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for measuring the remaining number of times the time saving state is set, and the number of time saving times is set when the game state shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot. The stipulated number counter 203j is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202f (see FIGS. 111 and 112). is set.

When the process of FIG. 129 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S401). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S401: Yes), that is, when the current state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S402), and the time saving counter 203h A remaining time reduction command indicating the value of is set (S403). The command for reducing the remaining time set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136), these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. be done. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the current game state, that is, the remaining time reduction count of the time reduction state from the remaining time reduction count command received as part of the state command, and stores it in the state storage area 223e.

When the processing of S403 is finished, next, whether the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0, that is, as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the counter 203h during time saving by the processing of S402, the value of the counter 203h during time saving becomes 0 (S404). In the process of S404, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S404: Yes), the game state is changed to the normal state, the corresponding state command is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S404, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (1 or more) (S404: No), the processing of S405 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S406. In addition, in the process of S401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), the process relating to the time saving counter 203h (S402 to S405) is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. .

In the processing of S406, it is determined whether or not the value of the prescribed number counter 203j is greater than 0 (S406). In the process of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is greater than 0 (S406: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S407), and the remainder indicating the value of the specified number of times counter 203j A variation count command is set (S408). The remaining variation count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136). The sound lamp control device 113 extracts the remaining variation count of each state status from the remaining variation count command received as part of the state command, that is, the remaining variation count until the game state and the referenced variation pattern selection table are switched. , is stored in the state storage area 223e.

When the processing of S408 is completed, next, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0, that is, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the specified number of times counter 203j by the process of S407. (S409). When it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202f, and the corresponding state command is set (S410).

In this process of S410, for example, the state transition 4 table 202f4 is set as the state transition table 202f, and the value "4" of the specified number counter 203j set for the state status ST3a is subtracted to become "0". When the state status changes from ST3a to ST3, information indicating the state status ST3 and information indicating the newly set specified number of times "96" are set as the state command.

When the process of S410 is finished, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set according to the set state transition table 202f (S411), and this process is finished. In the process of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S406: No), the processes (S407 to S411) relating to the specified number of times counter 203j are skipped. End this process.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, When there is a starting prize, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is added, and the corresponding various counter values are stored in each reserved ball storage area, and from the stored various counter values, in the special symbol To execute pre-reading processing for determining a lottery result in advance.

When the starting winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this first control example) (S503).

In the process of S503, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S504). . Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 136) described later. In the external output process (S1101), it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S505, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above Each value of the random number counter C4 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the ball has not won (entered) the first winning hole (entering ball hole) 64 (S501: No), or in the process of S503, the special symbol 1 reserved ball When it is determined that the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (is 4) (S503: No), the start winning process for the special symbol 1 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S507.

Next, in each process of S507-S512, the same process as each process of S501-S506 is executed for winning (entering a ball) into the second ball entrance 140. FIG. Each of the processes of S507 to S512 is different only in that the process of holding the held ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 140 is executed, and the other processes are the same as those of S501 to S506. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the processes of S507 to S512 are finished, the prefetch process is executed (S513), and this process is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 131, the look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S513). In this look-ahead processing (S513), if there is a new winning (ball winning) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the lottery result of the special symbol for that winning (ball winning) is announced in advance. A process of determining (reading ahead) and setting a command for outputting the result of the preliminary determination (reading ahead) to the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the command (winning (ball winning) information command) set here, the effect for the pending and stored winning (ball winning) information is produced based on the winning (ball winning) information. It is possible to execute at a time before the special symbol variation is executed.

In this look-ahead processing (FIG. 131, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new win (a winning ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (ball winning) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning (entering ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601: Yes), from the special symbol reserved ball storage area, (special symbol 1 reserved ball Storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) The value of the first winning random number counter C1, the value of the first winning type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to this winning prize A value is acquired (S602).

Next, among the judgment results defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)), the winning judgment result corresponding to the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is acquired (S603), Among the determination results defined in the first winning type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107), the winning type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired (S604).

After the processing of S604 is finished, next, out of the determination results defined in the stop type table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S605), and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is obtained. (See FIG. 108) obtains the fluctuation type determination result corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S606).

Then, the hit determination result information indicating the hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the variation indicating the variation type determination result obtained in the processing of S603 to S606 described above. A winning information command including type information is set (S607), and this process is terminated.

Winning (winning a ball) information acquired in the process of S602 described above is information for indicating in advance the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed for a new winning (winning a ball). Good to have. The lottery results may be selected in advance using various selection tables used for lottery of special symbols, or the same selection table as the various selection tables described above may be provided for prefetch processing.

In addition, in the process of S607, the game state information for indicating the game state when the special symbol variation based on the winning (ball winning) information to be the target of this prefetching process is executed is added to the winning (ball winning) information command. may be included. Here, the game state information will be explained. In this control example, the game state is configured to be able to set the normal state, the probability variable state and the time saving state, and depending on each game state, the special symbol lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot type, and variation pattern ) and the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 set by the sound lamp control device 113 are configured to be different.

Furthermore, in this control example, the game state is configured to be shifted based on the number of variations of the special symbols. Specifically, when the time saving state (100 times) is set as the game state, on the condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in that state, the game state changes from the time saving state to the normal state. migrated.

In this control example configured in this way, it is determined whether or not the lottery of special symbols based on the winning (entering the ball) to be the target of the look-ahead process is executed during the time saving state, and the determination result is the game state information is included in the winning (ball winning) information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As a result, while the game state is the time saving state, the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol based on the ball that has won (entered) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 changes the game state to the normal state. Even if it is executed after the shift, it is possible to set the winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to the game state when the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed. Further, as the winning (ball winning) information command, only the winning information command corresponding to the game state when the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern corresponding to the winning (ball winning) information command is executed is set, and the voice lamp is set. Since the data can be output to the control device 113, the amount of data to be output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The method of setting the winning (ball winning) information command by the look-ahead process is not limited to the content of this control example, and is set by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the content of the received winning (ball winning) information command. It is sufficient that the content of the effect (read-ahead effect) to be performed contradicts the lottery (variation) result of the special symbol that is changed by the transition of the game state.

For example, when setting the winning (ball winning) information command in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to a plurality of game states can be set, and the sound lamp control device 113 Determines the game state when the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to the winning (ball winning) information command is executed, and sets the pre-reading effect based on the winning (ball winning) information corresponding to the determination result. may be configured to do so. This eliminates the need to prefetch the game state in the prefetch processing of the main controller 110, so that the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, as the winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to the above-described plurality of game states, for example, as a jackpot determination result, the first determination result that the jackpot is won in any game state, the game state can be changed Either the second judgment result that the jackpot is won only in the state or the third judgment result that the jackpot is not won in any game state is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 side is made to correspond to the game state. Alternatively, the information indicating the value of each counter obtained in the look-ahead process is output as it is as a winning (ball winning) information command, and the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to be able to determine the lottery result based on the received information (information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the main controller 110 in the pre-reading process).

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 140a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second ball entrance 140 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S701: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708). Specifically, the value of the counter 203h during time saving of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203g is ON, it is determined that it is a time saving state of normal symbols, and the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0, And, if the variable probability flag 203g is off, it is determined that it is in the normal state of normal symbols (it is not in the time saving state).

In the processing of S708, when it is determined that it is normal symbol time saving state (S708: Yes), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second winning random number table 202b for high probability time Based on , the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S709). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202b for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202b in FIG. 106(b)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S708, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: No), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second winning for low probability time Based on the random number table 202b, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202b for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a winning of normal symbols, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202b in FIG. 106(b)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S709 or S710 is a normal symbol win (S711), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S711: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S712). In the process of S712, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S714. .

On the other hand, in the process of S711, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S711: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S714.

In the process of S714, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S714), and if it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S714: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second design display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S715), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S716), and this process exit. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability (time saving state), compared to the normal pattern when the probability is low (normal state), the time of the fluctuation display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds". As a result, the lottery frequency of normal symbols increases. Therefore, the frequency of wins in the normal pattern lottery increases, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entrance 140 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 140. state.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the game state of normal symbols is configured to be set to the normal state when winning during the jackpot of special symbols. By constructing in this way, the game state of the normal symbols becomes advantageous during the big winning that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player. In addition, the period during which the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (special symbol jackpot period) and the period during which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open (ordinary symbol winning period) overlap, and the most advantageous variable winning for the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the electric accessary 140a being opened hinders the winning of the ball to the device 65. - 特許庁

To explain the above-mentioned details in detail, when the electric accessory 140a is provided in the first flow path through which the ball flows so that the variable winning device 65 can win a prize, the electric accessory 140a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, there is a problem that the ball flowing down the first flow path wins the electric accessory 140a, and the ball cannot sufficiently enter the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, the electric accessory 140a is arranged at the lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and the ball that flows down the first flow path during the jackpot period (while the variable winning device 65 is open) Although the above-mentioned problem can be solved by using a configuration that makes it easier for the variable winning device 65 to win, in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted.

On the other hand, in this control example, normal symbols are shifted to a low-probability state (normal state) during the special symbol jackpot, so that the electric accessory 140a becomes difficult to open during the jackpot period, thereby solving the above-described problem. can do.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S717). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S715 or the process of S716 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S717, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S717: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S717, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S717: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S718). In the process of S718, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S712, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S718, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After completion, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S712 or the process of S713.

Next, when the variation display currently being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. (S719). If the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal design (S719: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the present is in the time saving state of the normal design (S720), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S720: Yes), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S722), and the process proceeds to S723. . On the other hand, in the process of S720, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (not the time-saving state) (S720: No), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S721), and the process proceeds to S723.

In the process of S723, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S721 or S722 (S723), and the process ends. By the process of S723, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140a is set, next when the electric accessory opening and closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, the electric accessory 140a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or S722 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S719, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S719: No), the processing of S720 to S723 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this first control example) (S803).

The ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is If it is not less than 4 (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S805), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (1 second in this first control example) is performed. Execute (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1012.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 in FIG. 136, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1008). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1101). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) and the start winning process (see FIG. 130). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the first control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this first control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 140a is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 140a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or S722 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this first control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) ends, the first symbol display device 37 ends the variation display being executed, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 128). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S715 or the process of S716 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. After finishing the variable display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S712 or S713 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132) ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this first control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process ( S1109), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (238 and 239 in this first control example), they are reset to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of S1108, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 134 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1112 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1112), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1113). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the initial setting processing (see S1001 in FIG. 135) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1201: Yes), an opening command is set (S1202), and this process is finished.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1203). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1203, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1203: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1204). If it is time to start a new round (S1204: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened (S1205), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1206). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1204, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1204: No), it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are met (S1207). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the process of S1207, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is met (S1207: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1208), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are not satisfied (S1207: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1209). Specifically, when a special game state (all round games set as jackpots (for example, 15 rounds)) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than normal is completed, it is the start timing of the ending effect. and discriminate.

In the processing of S1209, if it is time to start the ending effect (S1209: Yes), an ending command is set (S1210), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the process of S1209, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211), and if it is not the end time of the ending effect If it is determined (S1211: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1211, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing when all the jackpot games are completed, the first winning type selection table 202c is used. Then, the contents of the variable probability flag 203g and the counter 203h during time saving are set (S1212). By the processing of this S1212, the game state (presence or absence of variable probability state, presence or absence of time saving state and setting of the number of time saving times) after the end of the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won is set.

Next, referring to the jackpot transition setting table 202e, a state transition destination is selected based on the jackpot type won this time and the game state at the time of winning (see FIG. 110), and state transition corresponding to the selected state transition destination Based on the table 202f, the state status and the specified number counter 203j are acquired (S1213). For example, in the state where "with high probability time saving (probability variable state)" is set as the gaming state, if you win the "jackpot G" as the jackpot type, "state transition 2" is selected as the state transition destination, the state Of the transition tables 202f (see FIG. 111(a)), the state transition 2 table 202f2 (see FIG. 111(c)) corresponding to "state transition 2" is referenced.

After that, set a state designation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the special symbol game state (high probability state (variable probability state), low probability state (normal state)) after the jackpot is completed ( S1214), the end of the jackpot is set (S1215), and the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 154, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 138, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, initial setting is executed upon power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S3118 (see FIG. 139) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (S3115 in FIG. 139: Yes), it executes power-off processing in S3118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S3118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and S3118 of FIG. , or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). It is a thing. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), it will transfer to S3004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the power-off processing flag is ON (S3002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S3118. It is started when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset during execution of the process. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 of FIG. 139 is executed (see S3117 of FIG. 139). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010.

The reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process of S3008 is reached from S3004 via the process of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S3010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and time setting processing is executed to set reference timing information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time presentation (S3012). , to the main processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 139, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3113 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the process of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S3102 to S3112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short period (within 1 msec). , S3113 command determination processing, and S3114 variable display setting processing are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S3113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b2 is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting effects. Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) will be described.

In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107), first, it is determined whether or not an effective period flag indicating a period during which pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively handled is set to ON. Here, if the validity period flag is set to ON, next, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that the depression of the frame button 22 has been detected, the display depression command corresponding to the depression of the button is set, and this processing ends.

Note that the valid period flag described above is provided for each effect executed based on pressing of the frame button 22 . For example, if the background of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 can be varied based on the depression of the frame button 22, the valid period flag (first valid period flag) for indicating that effect is turned on. If it is a period during which an operation effect that changes the variation effect mode of the third symbol is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 (a period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted in the operation effect), that A validity period flag (second validity period flag) for indicating this is set to ON.

Furthermore, in the plurality of valid period flags described above, priority is predetermined corresponding to the privilege value given when the player presses the frame button 22, and the plurality of valid period flags are set to ON. When the valid period flag is set to ON, processing based on pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the valid period flag having the highest priority among the plurality of valid period flags set to ON.

By configuring in this way, when the period during which the pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted overlaps, for example, the period during which the background can be changed (the period during which the first effective period flag is set to ON) and the operation effect is executed (the period in which the second valid period flag is set to ON) overlaps, based on the second valid period flag set with a higher priority based on the pressing of the frame button 22 Since the processing is executed, an effect with a high privilege value can be executed for the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is similarly configured to execute the effect for indicating that the second validity period flag is set to ON. Since only the effect corresponding to the validity period set with a high priority is executed, the player can operate timing while watching the effect being executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The frame button 22 can be pressed without making a mistake. Therefore, an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In this control example, as a method of setting priority to each valid period flag, a configuration is used in which priority is set to each valid period flag in advance, but other configurations may be used. In the button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107), it may be determined whether or not the effective period flag is set to ON in descending order of priority. As a result, even if a plurality of validity period flags are set to ON at the same time, processing based on pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the validity period flag with the highest priority. It is possible to execute an effect with a high privilege value for the player, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

After frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) ends, lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S3109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S3110 ends, various counter update processes are executed (S3111). In this various counter update processing, processing for updating various counters used in the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Specifically, each counter value of the first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 included in the effect counter group 223y is updated so as not to be synchronized. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are counters used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed (1 ms each time), an update process is performed so that the values are different.

In the first control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, since a plurality of effect counters with different update values are used, when selecting a plurality of effects in the main process , the same counter value is referred to, and the selection of effects is prevented from being biased. are desired to be synchronized, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

In addition, in the first control example, a plurality of counters (first effect counter 223y1 to sixth effect counter 223y6) with different update patterns are used. may be calculated and each effect may be selected using the calculated value. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, of the updated value of the effect counter, the value of the last digit, the value of the second digit, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit It is preferable to calculate each value without regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

When the processing of S3111 ends, next, effect update processing (S3112) is executed. This effect update process is a process of updating various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the elapsed period. In this effect update process (S3112), the control for the effect (for example, the display extension effect executed after the end of the jackpot) is executed regardless of the variation of the special symbol. A detailed description of this effect update process (S3112) will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3113, a command determination process is executed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S3113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S3114). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to execute the production corresponding to the special design fluctuation in the third design display device 81 (variation production of the third design and other production), based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 Then, a display variation pattern command is generated and set. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . In the processing of S3115, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S3115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off processing is executed. (S3118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from main controller 110. FIG.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S3201). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S3203) and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to for determining the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3204). When the stop type command is received (S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3204 that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S3207). When it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (S3207: Yes), the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received pending ball number command is displayed in the pending ball number counter. , stores the value contained in the received pending ball count command (S3208), and terminates this process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the received reserved ball number command A value (number N1 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 223b1 of voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special The holding number N2 of the variable display in the symbol 2) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 of the sound lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the value of either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is changed in the process of S3208, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. A command for the number of pending balls for display is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, the correct number of reserved symbols can always be displayed in the reserved display area Dn4 of the third pattern display device 81. can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, if it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S3207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3209). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3209: Yes), the winning information command process is executed (S3210), and this process ends.

Here, the winning information command process (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information command process (S3210). This winning information command process (S3210) is a process executed when a winning information command is received from the main controller 110, and the information included in the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a. Execute processing for storing in the area (reserved storage area corresponding to the winning information command).

Here, the information included in the winning information command is information for winning balls such as information on the result of judging whether a special symbol is right or wrong, information on a stop type, and information on a variation pattern, but other information is also included. For example, it may include winning information about a ball that has already won a prize (for which a winning information command has been received in the past).

When the winning information command process (S3210) is executed, first, the information (prefetch information) of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3231). As described above, the winning information storage area 223a can store up to 4 winning information commands for special symbol 1 and up to 4 winning information commands for special symbol 2, for a total of 8 winning information commands. Winning information commands are stored in a designated storage area in accordance with the order in which the winning information commands are received.

Next, as information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time, it is determined whether or not there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232). In the processing of S3232, if it is determined that there is no variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: Yes), then a specific effect C (see FIG. 101), that is, a predetermined amount from the start of variation It is determined whether or not there is variation type information indicating a specific effect (for example, an effect for the player to operate the frame button 22) to be executed within a period (for example, within 5 seconds) (S3233).

Here, if it is determined that there is a specific effect C (S3233: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the currently executed variation display is 10 seconds or longer (S3234). In the process of S3234, based on the time (elapsed time with respect to the set fluctuation time) managed by the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113 A remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is determined.

In the processing of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes), it means that a period is secured in which the predictive effect can be added to the variation display being executed, so addition for display. A portent command is set (S3235), the portent setting flag 223t is set to ON (S3236), and this processing ends. By executing the above-described processing, it is possible to execute an indication effect across a plurality of variable displays as a suggestive effect targeting the specific effect C to be executed in the next and subsequent variable displays. As a result, the specific effect executed at the beginning of the variable display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variable display), that is, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed with only one variable display is reduced. Since suggestive effects can be executed using multiple variable displays even for specific effects that are executed at timings that cannot be secured, the frequency of occurrence of suggestive effects can be increased, and the range in which specific effects can be set can be increased. It is possible to widen it, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of presentation regarding the variable display.

In the processing of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is less than 10 seconds (S3234: No), that is, if the period during which the suggestion effect can be added to the variation display being executed cannot be secured, This processing ends without changing the display mode of the variable display. Here, if it is not possible to secure a period during which the suggestive effect can be added to the variable display being executed (S3234: No), the variable corresponding to the winning information determined to have the countdown effect in the winning information command process (S3210). When setting the display, a specific performance is set within a range in which the suggestive performance can be executed with only one variable display (for example, a range in which 15 seconds or more have passed since the start of variation), and the suggestive performance is set.

By configuring in this way, the timing (first ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance 64) at which the winning information is generated is The presentation mode of the countdown presentation can be varied depending on the timing at which the ball enters 140, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, a specific effect set at the beginning of the variable display (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) that is executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display) is changed to a specific effect set in another period (for example, It is defined to be an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than a specific effect executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. In other words, the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is stipulated so that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more likely to be selected.

As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning a big prize in the next and subsequent variations. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player ambitiously accumulate special symbols so that a suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, based on the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), a plurality of variable displays are displayed. , but other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). may be determined whether or not to be executed, and if it is determined to be executed, an omen effect is executed as a suggestive effect, and at the timing of starting the next variable display, a specific effect may be set. , a specific effect is set based on the contents of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the period in which the portent effect is being executed (the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Also good. By configuring in this way, based on the game situation after the suggestive effect is started (the lottery result of the next change, the variation pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)), the suggestive effect is produced. Aspects can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the presentation as compared with the configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

In addition, in this control example, as an example of executing a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display that is being executed and the variable display that will be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of variable display, the suggestive effect may be executed so as to extend from the variable display being executed to the variable display that is executed one after another, or it will be executed one after another from the variable display that is executed next time. A suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), it is determined whether the timing of executing the suggestive effect is set to the variable display being executed or to the next variable display. It is good to have a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113. For example, the number of pending balls of special symbols is displayed in the pending display area. In Dn4, in order to suggest a pending display (a pending pattern) corresponding to winning information indicating a big hit, a pending change notice effect for changing the display mode of the pending display is set, or a special pattern corresponding to winning information indicating a big win. It is referred to when setting a continuous advance notice effect that makes a big hit expected as a special symbol effect that starts to change before.

In addition, in the first control example, the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is referred to at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot, and the prize information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. (whether or not there is an on-hold renso), and based on the result of the determination, an effect is set during the jackpot game or after the jackpot ends. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the variable probability state, the content of the effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when an effect (read-ahead effect) referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is being executed, a flag ( For example, when the prefetching effect in progress flag) is set to ON and the prefetching effect in progress flag is set to ON, when a new prize information command is received, the winning prize included in the prize information command is displayed. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. This suppresses the occurrence of the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without an interval, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In order to solve the above-described problem, control other than the contents described above may be used. Comparing the priority rank of the pre-reading effect currently being given and the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command, the pre-reading effect with the higher priority rank may be controlled to execute In this case, when it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead performance is higher, the look-ahead performance switching notification is executed to notify the player that the look-ahead performance being executed will end in the middle. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the look-ahead effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the end timing initially set. You can

Further, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest. should be set to be high. By this. When the read-ahead performance being executed ends in the middle, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big win and can be made to pay attention to the new read-ahead performance to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description continues. In the processing of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3209: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning related command has been received (S3211), and if a winning related command has been received ( S3211: Yes), the hit related command process (S3212) is executed, and after the end of the hit related command process, this process ends.

Here, the contents of the hit-related command process (S3212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related command process (S3212). In the hit-related command process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3301). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), the process for setting the effect during the jackpot is executed (S3302). An opening command is set (S3303), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

Here, when the opening command is received (S3301: Yes), the content of the effect setting process (S3302) during the jackpot executed when the opening command is received will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S3302) during the big hit. In this jackpot middle effect setting process (S3302), the reservation status at the time of jackpot winning (contents of winning prize information stored in winning prize information storage area 223a and counter value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 (number of reserved balls)) A process for setting an effect to be executed during the jackpot is executed based on.

Specifically, the result of determining the presence or absence of winning information indicating that the special symbol jackpot has been won, and the result of determining whether the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit (4) The effect to be executed during the big win is selected using the effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 115(c)) during the big win.

When the jackpot middle effect setting process (S3302) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is extracted (S3401), and then based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2. The current number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is extracted (S3402), and it is determined whether the extracted number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is 0 (S3403).

Here, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (S3403; No), the reserved rank corresponding to the extracted winning information and the number of reserved balls is read from the reserved rank selection table 222b (S3404), The process proceeds to S3406, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the number of pending balls is 0, "1" is read as the pending rank, and the process proceeds to S3406.

A reserved rank selection table 222b is stored at the time of winning a jackpot in order to select a reserved rank based on the degree of expectation that there may be prize winning information that wins a jackpot again (continues to win during the reservation) during the reservation at the end of the jackpot. The result of determining whether or not the received prize information includes jackpot winning information, and whether or not there is a possibility that new prize winning information will be stored during the jackpot (whether the number of pending balls is the upper limit or not) ) is determined, and the pending rank is selected. Also, when the jackpot is won, if the number of pending balls is "0", there is no winning information, so the pending rank "1" is set without using the pending rank selection table 222b.

As described above, in this control example, when selecting the effect to be executed during the jackpot, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of pending balls, and the content of the winning information, that is, , and the result of the judgment of suitability. Based on the reserved rank selected here, an effect to be executed during the jackpot is selected in the processing of S3406, which will be described later.

By configuring in this manner, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls, and the contents of the winning information, that is, the winning/failing determination result, are executed during the big win. In addition to the effect of congratulating the player for winning the big win, the effect of suggesting the contents of the game after the end of the big win can be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the effect executed during the jackpot is configured to refer to the reservation rank selected by the above-described content. , The type of variation pattern and the transition of the game state (probability variable state, time saving state, normal state) (game state that can be determined when all the variations of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved ball are completed) Suspended rank based on information such as may be selected.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-described pending rank, the type of jackpot being executed this time, the number of times the winning of the jackpot is continued within a predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is within 50 times), and the player's advantage It is also possible to use the so-called number of consecutive games, such as the number of times a jackpot has been won while the game state is continuing, or the operation information indicating the details of the player's operation on the operation means. As a result, more various effects can be executed during the jackpot.

In addition, in this control example, the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-described pending rank is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 86(a)). The mode is not limited to this as long as the player can grasp the content during the big win, and the entire main display area Dm is used to execute a common big win production, and a partial area of the main display area Dm is executed. It may be possible to execute the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-described reservation rank as a secondary effect executed using , or a device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub display device, a lamp device, frame of pachinko machine 10, voice output device). As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player the contents of the game after the end of the big win based on the pending rank while standardizing the production for showing that the big win has been won (the production for showing that the big win is in progress). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the big win is in progress in an easy-to-understand manner, and to execute an effect that gives the player expectations after the big win is over.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description is continued. In the process of S3406, based on the read reservation rank and the value of the first effect counter 223y1, the effect during the big win is read by referring to the effect selection table 222c during the big win (S3406). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect during the jackpot read this time is an additional effect (S3407), and when it is determined that it is an additional effect (S3407: Yes), the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3408). , sets a display jackpot middle effect command corresponding to the read jackpot middle effect (S3409), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S3407, when it is determined that the effect during the jackpot read this time is not the additional effect (S3407: No), the process of S3408 is skipped and the process of S3409 described above is performed.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3304). Here, when the round number command is received (S3304: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3305), and then it is determined whether the addition effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306 ).

Here, if the add-on effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306: Yes), at the timing when a new round is started (that is, at the timing when the round number command is received), the process for the add-on effect is executed. Since it is necessary to do so, the processing during the addition effect is executed (S3307), then the display addition effect command is set (S3308), and the display round number command is set according to the number of rounds extracted this time (S3309 ), the process ends. The additional effect command for display and the number-of-rounds command for display set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (see FIG. 136) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 ( S3102), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Here, the contents of the process during addition effect (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process during addition effect (S3307). This process during the addition effect (S3307) is a process executed when the effect for addition is selected as the effect during the jackpot in the above-described effect setting process during the jackpot (see FIG. 143). This is a process for selecting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86(a)) displayed when the game is being executed.

This process during the addition effect (S3307) is a process executed when it is determined that the round number command is received (S3304: Yes) in the hit related command process (see FIG. 142). That is, during the jackpot, every time a new round is started, the above-described process during the addition effect is executed. As a result, the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the progress of the fixed round number display mode Dm4 and the running round number display mode Dm3 already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be selected.

In addition, in this control example, the number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) set for the jackpot being executed is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a as the number of rounds to be displayed in the additional effect. It is configured to add up the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) of the jackpot. In this control example configured as described above, by executing the processing during the addition effect (S3307) every time a new round is started, the winning information newly stored during the big win corresponds to the big win. Even if there is, it is possible to immediately execute an additional performance reflecting the contents thereof, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

When the process during the addition effect (S3307) is executed, first, the number of big winning rounds stored in the big winning information storage area 223f, that is, the number of rounds set for the currently running big winning is read out (S3501), and then Then, all winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S3502). Then, it is determined whether or not there is prize winning information corresponding to a big win in the prize winning information (S3503).

Here, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the number of rounds read by the process of S3501 (the number of rounds set for the jackpot currently being executed) and the winning information A summing process (S3508 to S3511) for summing the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot included in the sum is executed. Note that the addition processing will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the big hit (S3503: No), the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 The number of displayed rounds (“10” in the case of FIG. 86(a)) displayed as the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is read out (S3504), and the number of winning rounds read out in the process of S3501 is read out in the process of S3506. The displayed number of rounds is subtracted (S3505). By the processing of S3505, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds displayed so as to be recognized by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds to be internally executed, that is, the number of rounds The number of unrecognized rounds (number of remaining rounds) is calculated.

Next, based on the number of remaining rounds calculated in the process of S3505 and the presence or absence of winning information corresponding to the jackpot, the number of display rounds is selected by referring to the number of addition selection table 222d, and stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223g. (S3506), superimposed display processing is executed (S3507), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that there is prize winning information corresponding to the big win (S3503: Yes), the addition process is executed. In this summing process, first, the number of rounds corresponding to the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S3508). is calculated (S3509).

Next, the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the display round number displayed as the fixed round number display mode Dm4 in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 (Fig. 86 ( In the case of a), "10") is read out (S3510), and the number of display rounds read out in the process of S3510 is subtracted from the total number of rounds added up in the process of S3509 (S3511). By the processing of S3511, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds displayed so as to be recognized by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds to be internally executed, that is, the number of rounds The number of unrecognized rounds (number of remaining rounds) is calculated. Then, after executing the processing of S3506 described above, the overlay display processing is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, among the processing during the addition effect (S3307) described above, the processing of S3501 to S3511 is a process for setting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 during execution of the effect for addition, and is the process for setting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10. As described above, it is configured to be executed when a new round is started (a new round game is started) during the jackpot. Thereby, the processing for setting the display mode of the effect related to the number of rounds can be executed at the optimum timing.

Note that the execution timing and processing details of the processing for setting the display mode to be displayed as the round number display mode Dm10 are not limited to the contents of this control example. is started, by configuring to execute the processing during the addition effect, the winning information determination processing (S3502, S3503 processing) and the display round number setting processing (S3504 to S3506, SS3510 to S3506 process) and are integrally executed, the above-described winning information determination process is executed in advance at the timing of receiving the winning information command, the result is temporarily stored, and the stored result is used. may be configured to execute the display round number setting process described above.

In addition, in this control example, when the round number command is received (S3304 in FIG. 142: Yes), it is configured to execute the processing during the addition effect, but during the round game (interval period), the addition effect It may be configured to execute intermediate processing. By configuring in this way, during the jackpot in which various control processes are executed, during a round game (interval period) with a relatively small amount of processing, it is possible to execute the processing during the additional effect, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the processing load of

In this case, the number of rounds to be executed next is discriminated based on the winning information command already received, and the above-described processing during the addition effect is executed based on the discriminated result. good. Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured to execute the processing during the additional effect each time a new round is started, but when a specific round (for example, an even round, a multiple of 5 round) is started Alternatively, a lottery may be conducted to determine whether or not to execute the process during the addition effect, and the process may be executed based on the result of the lottery.

In this control example, the processing of S3501 to S3511 is executed each time a new round is started. A process for determining whether information has been added may be provided, and if no new winning information has been added, the processes of S3503 to S3511 may be skipped. This makes it possible to reduce the processing that is executed each round.

Returning to FIG. 144, the description continues. When the processing of S3506 is finished, next, the additional display processing (S3507), which is the processing for executing the effect display related to the number of display rounds set in the processing of S3506, is executed, and this processing is finished. Here, the superimposed display processing (S3507) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the contents of the superimposition display process (S3507). This addition display process (S3507) is a process for setting a display command for an addition effect corresponding to the number of display rounds (see S3508 in FIG. 144) determined in the process during addition effect (see FIG. 144). In this control example, when the number of rounds during the jackpot reaches a predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5, i.e., 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), the number of displayed rounds (fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 ), and when the number of rounds (i.e., 4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) is one before the predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5), the next round (the predetermined number of rounds n ), an indication effect (see FIG. 85(b)) suggesting that the number of displayed rounds (fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4) will be updated is executed.

When the additional display processing (S3507) is executed, first, the number of rounds n (specifically, 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, 10 rounds , a multiple of 5 such as 15 rounds), which is the number of rounds n−1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601). If it is determined that the number of rounds this time is n-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: Yes), an omen effect for displaying the fixed number of rounds in the next round (Fig. 85 (b) )), a corresponding display selection command is set (S3602), and the process ends.

In this control example, based on the number of display rounds stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223g, the effect mode of the aforementioned precursor effect (see FIG. 85(b)) is set. When the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is 10 or more, a production mode in which the number of "treasure chests" displayed during the omen production is reduced (see FIG. 86(b)) or A presentation mode (see FIG. 86(b)) is displayed in which the display mode of the "treasure box" displayed is gorgeous. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict the effect contents of the additional display effect at the time when the precursor effect is executed.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the precursor presentation is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g. It may be configured to set the performance mode of the portent performance based on the number of rounds (when the number of rounds on hold is determined, the number of rounds including the number of rounds set for the jackpot on hold is also added). Thus, the player can predict the number of rounds internally determined based on the performance mode of the sign performance and the performance mode of the additional performance for adding the number of displayed rounds, and is executed during the big win. You can continue to keep them interested in the production.

Furthermore, in this control example, by changing the display mode of the "treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" displayed during the omen effect, the player can see the future development of the additional effect executed during the big win. However, the display mode for other configurations may be changed, for example, the display of an "arrow (selected image Dm8)" for selecting a "treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" The aspect (for example, color and size) may be varied, and the sound and LED lighting pattern may be varied. Also, it may be configured such that the period during which the portent effect is executed is varied.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3601, if it is determined that the number of rounds this time is not n-1 rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: No), next the number of rounds this time is n rounds ( 5th round, 10th round, 15th round) is determined (S3603), and if it is determined to be the nth round (5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603: Yes), the number of displayed rounds is stored. An additional display command for display corresponding to the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is set (S3604), and this process is terminated. Also, in the processing of S3603, if it is determined that the number of rounds this time is not the n-th round (S3603: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

The superimposed display command for display set in the processing of S3604 described above is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 is performed. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the additional display command for display, it displays the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the content of the command on the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in this control example, the number of display rounds set in the process of adding effect during a specific round (the number of rounds n) is displayed (the display mode of the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is varied (added)). However, the display mode of the determined round number display mode Dm4 may be varied (added) at other timings. The lottery means may execute a lottery each time a new round starts, and set the timing for executing an effect for additionally updating the fixed round number display mode Dm4 based on the lottery result. As a result, it is possible to make the timing of updating the contents of the determined round number display mode Dm4 irregular, and to make the player continue to play the game during the big win while giving the player a sense of anticipation.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. In the processing of S3306, when it is determined that the addition production flag 223h is not ON (is OFF) (S3306: No), since there is no need to execute the processing during addition production (S3307), the processing of S3307 and S3308 is executed. It skips and executes the process of S3309 mentioned above, and ends this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3304 that the round number command has not been received (S3304: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S3310). When it is determined that an ending command has been received (S3310: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S3311), a jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3312), and this process ends. The ending command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

Here, the post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312) executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the contents of the post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312). This post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312) is a process for continuing to execute the effect executed during the big win in the period in which the big win is completed and the variation of the special symbol is executed. This is a process for setting a post-jackpot production corresponding to the executed production.

When the post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312) is executed, first, the game state after the jackpot is read from the information stored in the state storage area 223e (S3701), and then the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether the effect executed during the current jackpot is an additional effect (S3702). If it is determined that it is an additional effect (S3702: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is prize winning information about winning a jackpot in the prize winning information storage area 223a (whether or not the game is to be held) (S3703).

In the process of S3703, when it is determined that there is winning information that a jackpot has been won (S3703: Yes), a post-jackpot command for display additional effect is set (S3704), and this process is terminated. That is, in the processing of S3703, if it is determined that there is winning information that the jackpot has been won (S3703: Yes), all the total number of rounds calculated in the processing of S3505 of the processing during the addition effect of FIG. 144 (S3307) is displayed. Since it is not displayed as the number of rounds, the additional effect will continue until the next jackpot is executed (until the change in the special pattern corresponding to the winning information including the jackpot information ends). Set the command after the extra production jackpot for display so that it will be displayed.

The post-jackpot command for display that is set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136). , and transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the command after the display additional effect jackpot, while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 starts the display for continuously executing the additional effect (Fig. 88(a)). By configuring in this way, even after the end of the big win, the performance executed during the big win can be continuously executed.

In addition, in this control example, the display round number (fixed round number display mode Dm4) is partially displayed (for example, 5 rounds) for the number of rounds set for one big win (for example, 15 rounds). Since it is configured, from the production contents of the additional production displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to determine whether the additional production is being executed during one big win or between a plurality of big wins (the first big win is It is difficult to grasp whether it is an additional effect executed during a special symbol fluctuation period executed between the end of the game and the start of the second big win. By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the number of times of winning big wins or the number of rounds set for one big win while the performance for addition is continuously executed, in an incomprehensible manner to the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while making the player expect that the additional effect will continue for a long time (the big win will continue for a long time).

Returning to FIG. 146, the description continues. In the processing of S3703, if it is determined that there is no winning information that the jackpot has been won (S3703: No), all the total number of rounds calculated in the processing of S3505 of the processing during the addition effect (S3307) of FIG. 144 is the number of display rounds , the add effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S3705), the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3706), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3702, if it is determined that the effect executed during the current jackpot is not the additional effect (S3702: No), then the effect executed during the current jackpot is the continuous winning effect. (see FIG. 84) (S3707). Here, when it is determined that it is the effect for continuous winning (S3707: Yes), a command after the big win for continuous winning effect for display is set (S3708), and this processing is finished.

The post-jackpot command for display continuous winning effect set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the command after the display continuous win effect after the jackpot, the third symbol display device 81 executes the variable display of the third symbol, and starts the display of continuously executing the continuous win effect. do. By configuring in this way, even after the end of the big win, the performance executed during the big win can be continuously executed.

In the processing of S3707, if it is determined that it is not a continuous winning effect (S3707: No), that is, if the normal winning effect is executed during the big win, the game state after the end of the big win is a variable probability or a time saving state. It is determined whether there is (S3709), and if it is determined that it is a probability variable or time saving state (S3709: Yes), the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3710), and the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000" It sets (S3711) and ends this processing.

Here, the contents executed in the processes of S3710 and S3711 will be described. In this control example, the effect during the big win is selected with reference to the effect selection table 222c during the big win shown in FIG. 115(c). As shown in FIG. 115(c), the normal winning effect is the state of all the pending ranks "1" to "4", that is, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured as an effect that can be executed both when the (reserved pattern) contains the information that the jackpot is won (in the case of holding the reservation) and when it is not included (in the case of not holding the reservation). there is

Then, when the game state after the jackpot in which the production for the normal win is executed is the variable probability or the time-saving state, the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and the ending display displayed during the jackpot is changed to a predetermined value after the jackpot. The display is continued until the conditions are met (see FIG. 89(a)). By configuring in this way, the variation of the special symbols is executed while the ending display of the jackpot is displayed, and when the jackpot is won, the fact that the jackpot is won is displayed on the ending display screen (Fig. 89 ( b) see). As a result, even when the performance for normal win is executed, expectations can be given to the performance during the reservation, and the performance during the big win can be continued and executed in the case of the reservation.

Furthermore, in this control example, as a period during which the jackpot ending display is continued even after the jackpot ends, the number of times the special symbol changes is four times or four seconds after the jackpot ends until any condition is established. The period is set, and in the process of S3711, by setting the value of "4000" to the elapsed time counter 223k, the time elapsed after the end of the big hit (after the special symbol can be changed) are counted.

In this way, the period for executing the jackpot ending display is not set based on the number of variations of the special symbol (for example, 4 times), but is set based on the elapsed time after the jackpot ends. Even when the special symbols are not varied after the end (when the special symbols are not reserved), the jackpot ending display can be performed only for a limited period.

In addition, in this control example, when a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses after the end of the big win without the variation of the special symbol being executed after the end of the big win, the demo screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. is configured to be displayed.

In the processing of S3709, if it is determined that the game state after the end of the big win is not the probability variable or the time saving state (S3709: No), the effect executed during the big win during the special symbol fluctuation period executed after the big win is continued. The value in the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3712) without executing the process of displaying the number of rounds to display, and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. In the processing of S3310, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S3310: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S3313), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description continues. In the processing of S3211, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received (S3213), and if it is determined that the state command has been received (S3213: Yes), the current game state is extracted from the received command and stored in the state storage area 223e (S3214).

Incidentally, in the process of S3214, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main controller 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 is received, the current game state Separately, a process of storing the game state set after the end of the jackpot is executed. By configuring in this way, the state command indicating the current game state is distinguished from the state designation command indicating the game state (planned game state) set when a predetermined condition is established (when the jackpot ends). can be stored as After the jackpot is completed, a state command indicating the current game state is received. At that time, the content of the state command indicating the current game state and the content of the state designation command indicating the scheduled game state are combined. It is also possible to provide determination means for determining whether or not they match, and to determine whether or not the game state is appropriately set based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress fraudulent behavior such as illegally changing the game state after the end of the big win to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

In the process of S3213, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3213: No), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S3216), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

By this processing, commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S3114). This variable display setting process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process (S4014), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3801). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3801: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S3813. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is ON (S3801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S3802), and then in the processing of S3203 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 140) , the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 .

Next, it is determined whether the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3803), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3803: Yes), extension management processing is executed (S3804), and S3811 is executed. Go to processing. The extension management process (S3804) is a process for managing the end timing of the extension display effect for continuing (extending) the ending display during the big win even after the end of the big win. This extension management process (S3804) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, if it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3803: No), then the game stored in the state storage area 223e Information indicating the state is read out, and it is determined whether the current game state is a variable probability or a time saving state (S3805). When it is determined that the variable probability or the time saving state (S3805: Yes), the continuous effect setting process is executed (S3806), and then the process proceeds to S3811. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) (see FIG. 91) executed in the variable probability or time saving state. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3805, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the probability variation or the time saving state (S3805: No), based on the extracted variation pattern, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing the expectation performance. Determine (S3807). In the process of S3807, if it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the expectation effect (S3807: Yes), the expectation effect setting process is executed (S3808), and the process proceeds to S3811. The expectation level effect setting process (S3808) is a process of setting the effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 102) for suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. A detailed description of the degree-of-expectation setting processing will be given later with reference to FIG. 151 .

On the other hand, in the process of S3807, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute the expectation effect (S3807: No), the current variation pattern executes the countdown effect based on the extracted variation pattern. (S3809), and if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a countdown effect (S3809: Yes), a countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, and S3811 to process. The countdown effect setting process (S3810) informs the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed to suggest that the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit is high during the variable display of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect mode of the effect (refer to FIG. 98) for playing. This countdown effect setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3809, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute the countdown effect (S3809: No), or if the processing of S3804, S3806, S3808, S3810 is completed, the extracted variation Based on the pattern, the current variation display mode is determined from the variation pattern table 222a of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3811), and the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S3812).

After completing the processing of S3812, it is next determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S3813). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3813: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display setting is performed. The process (S3114) is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3813: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3814), and then in the processing of S3206 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 140), The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3815).

Next, in the process of S3815, it is determined whether the acquired stop type is a jackpot type indicating a jackpot (S3816), and if it is determined to be a jackpot type (S3816: Yes), acquired in the jackpot information storage area 223f Hit information corresponding to the type of jackpot (number of rounds of jackpot, information on game state set after jackpot) is stored (S3817), and the process proceeds to S3818. On the other hand, in the process of S3816, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot type (S3816: No), the process proceeds to S3818 as it is.

In the process of S3818, the stop type extracted by the process of S3815 is set (S3818), and based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set (S3819). ), the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, the extension management process (S3804) executed in the variable display setting process (S3114 in FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the content of the extension management process (S3804). In this extension management process (S3804), a process for managing whether or not the termination condition relating to the number of times of variation of the special symbol is met among the termination conditions for the jackpot ending display that is continuously displayed after the jackpot ends is executed.

When the extension management process (S3804) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223j is 0 (S3901). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is 0 (S3901: Yes), that is, if it is time to set the first fluctuation display after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the fluctuation number counter The value of 223j is set to "5" as a display termination condition (display extension termination condition) for the jackpot ending display (S3902), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3901, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S3901: No), that is, the second to fourth times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. If it is time to set the second variable display, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable number counter 223j (S3903), and then it is determined whether the value of the variable number counter 223j is "1" (S3904). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is "1" (S3904: Yes), that is, it is determined that it is time to set the fifth rotation display after the display extension flag 223i is turned on. If this is the case, the display extension flag 223i is set to off (S3905), and the present process is terminated because one of the end conditions for the display extension is "up to 4 changes in the special symbol". do.

In the process of S3904, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is not "1" (is "2" or more) (S3904: No), an extension effect command for display is set (S3906), and this process is executed. finish. By configuring in this way, while the end display of the big win is being extended and executed, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol satisfies the end condition of the display extension, the variation corresponding to the next special symbol variation The display extension flag 223i is set to OFF at the timing when the display is executed, and the extension effect (ending display) can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ending display from being terminated during the variable display of the special symbols, thereby giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In this control example, when the probability variation or time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, by using a dedicated variation pattern table (special variation pattern table 202d4), during a predetermined period (1 to 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot) , a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (see FIG. 109). As a result, if the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit (4) after the end of the jackpot, the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols (4 rotations) rather than the elapsed time (4 seconds) as the end condition of the extension effect The termination condition based on is satisfied first.

Therefore, during the period in which the ending display of the jackpot is extended and executed, many special symbols are varied, and the game is always played with the reserved balls secured to see the special performance (see FIG. 89(b)). can be performed, the operation of the game can be improved.

Regarding the management based on the elapsed time, which is one of the termination conditions of the extension effect, the effect update process ( S3112). The effect update process (S3112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the continuous effect setting process (S3806) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (S3806). This continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) executed during the variable probability or the time saving state. Specifically, as a continuous effect (battle effect), the effect mode of the final mode effect (battle reach) that informs whether the probability change or the time saving state ends, and the final mode effect (battle reach) are executed. The effect mode of the effect (pre-battle effect) up to is stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 based on the result of determination of whether the special symbol is appropriate, the variation pattern (variation time), and the duration of the pre-battle effect. A setting process is executed with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value secondary selection table 222g, and the final mode selection table 222h.

This control example is configured such that the above-described continuation effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed until the variable probability or the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, when the variable probability or time saving state continues for a long time, one continuous production (battle production) is delayed and each production executed during the continuous production (battle production) (for example, It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the performance of increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value).

In addition, when the continuous production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, that is, when the final state production (battle reach) occurs at the timing when the game state does not shift from the probability change or the time saving state, the final state production ( "Draw" is selected as the production result of the battle reach), and the pre-battle production starts again. When trying to suppress the change, the final state production (battle reach with victory or defeat) other than the final state production (battle reach with victory or defeat) for indicating that the game state is shifted is frequently executed. , there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the final mode presentation.

On the other hand, in this control example, the elapsed period (the number of fluctuations of special symbols) after the last final mode effect (tie battle reach) was executed last time is measured, and the measurement result is within a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol is less than 6 times), the final mode effect (tie battle ready-to-win) with no winning or losing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting tired of the performance due to the frequent execution of the draw battle reach in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured to suggest to the player the success/failure determination result in the suspension of the special symbols and the remaining period of the probability variation or time saving state depending on the production mode of the draw battle reach. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the draw battle reach, and it is possible to enhance the production effect of the entire continuous production.

In addition, in this control example, the number of times the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed is measured, and the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the measurement result. As a result, when the variable probability or time saving state continues for a long period of time and the continuous production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, the continuous production (battle production) of different production modes can be executed, and the player can quickly start the production. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Here, to briefly explain the processing executed in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) of this control example, first, in the variable display this time, the battle reach is executed as the continuous effect, or before the battle. A process (execution effect selection process) for determining whether to execute an effect is executed, and a process for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode setting process) based on the determination result of the execution effect selection process (first effect mode setting process) or , a process of setting the effect mode of battle reach (second (final) effect mode setting process) are executed.

As described above, in this control example, each time the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is determined whether the pre-battle effect or the battle ready-to-win effect is to be executed in this variable display. It is possible to smoothly switch the performance from the pre-battle performance to the battle reach.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a winning variation (variation of winning a special symbol jackpot) (S4001). Here, if it is determined that it is not a hit variation (S4001: No), next, whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (a variation pattern that can execute Battle Reach) ) (S4002), and if it is determined to be a variation pattern of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the duration counter 223p is 6 or more (S4003).

In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the duration counter 223p is not 6 or more (less than 6) (S4003: No), it is determined whether the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004). , When it is determined that the continuous production flag 223r is not ON (S4004: No), that is, when the continuous production is not executed, the continuous production mode is selected based on the continuous production mode selection table 222e (S4005). , The selected continuous production mode is stored in the continuous production mode storage area 223m (S4006), the value of the continuous production setting counter 223q is incremented by 1 (S4007), and the continuous production flag 223r is set to ON (S4008).

If it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223r is not turned on in the processing of S4004 described above, if the first variable display is set after the variable probability or time saving state is set as the gaming state, or the previous variable display is the final This is a mode effect (battle ready-to-win), and is a case where a new continuation effect (pre-battle effect) is set in the current variable display.

In such a case, in the process of S4005, an effect mode (effect mode) of pre-battle effect to be executed from the current variable display is selected based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222e. Here, as shown in FIG. 116(b), the continuous effect mode selection table 222e includes the number of times the continuous effect is repeatedly executed (the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q), and the winning stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Based on the information and the value of the third effect counter 223y3, a continuous effect mode (mode 1 to mode 5) is set, and the selected continuous effect is displayed until the next final mode effect (battle reach) is executed. A pre-battle production based on the mode is executed.

In this control example, when the continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is prefetched, and the continuous effect mode is set based on the result of the prefetching. Although a configuration is used in which a process for setting a variable display mode is executed based on the continuous effect mode set each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is prefetched. However, any configuration other than that used in this control example may be used as long as it is configured to execute an effect based on the look-ahead result. The stored winning information is read in advance, and the display mode of the variable display to be executed this time to the display mode of the variable display corresponding to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are set in advance based on the result of the prefetching. It may be configured to

On the other hand, in the process of S4004, when it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004: Yes), or when the process of S4008 is terminated, the value of the duration counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4009). . As a result, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q can be varied when the continuous effect mode is selected next time, and it is possible to prevent the same continuous effect mode from being selected continuously.

In addition, in this control example, it is suppressed that the same continuous production mode is continuously selected, and at a specific timing (the timing when the value of the continuous production setting counter 223q is 1), a specific condition (holding hit ) is established, in order to be able to execute a specific effect (continuous effect mode 5), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is added by 1, but the same continuous effect mode continues. Other configurations may be used to achieve the purpose of suppressing selection by

For example, the value to which the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is added may be determined by lottery (for example, a lottery value between -5 and 5). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the regularity of selecting the continuous effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q may be increased based on the operation result of the frame button 22 by the player. The value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q may be added based on the number of times the jackpot has been won consecutively without being hit) or the lottery result of the special symbol when the continuation effect mode is selected.

After completing the process of S4009, next, a continuation value setting process is executed (S4010). Details of the continuation value setting process executed in the process of S4010 will be described later with reference to FIG. A display effect command corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the continuation value setting process of S4010 is set (S4011), and this process is terminated. In the process of S4011, an effect command indicating the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as a pre-battle effect among the continuous effects. Specifically, the display mode corresponding to the continuation effect mode selected in the process of S4005 and the display mode corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the process of S4010 are collectively set as a display effect command. .

The display effect command set in the process of S4011 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. , and transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display effect command as the variation pattern command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a pre-battle effect.

The processing from S4001 to S4003 in the continuous effect setting processing (S3806) described above corresponds to the execution effect selection process, and the processing from S4004 to S4011 is the process of setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode setting process).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4001, when it is determined that the current variation is a winning variation (S4001: Yes), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is reset (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4013. Also, in the process of S4003, if it is determined that the value of the duration counter is 6 or more (S4003: Yes), that is, if the pre-battle effect continues for 6 special symbol variations or more, the process proceeds to S4013. Transition.

In the process of S4013, the effect mode of battle reach (final mode) is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (S4013), and the corresponding final mode command for display is set (S4014). The final mode command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display final mode command, the third symbol display device 81 performs battle reach using the continuation value (HP value) displayed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 93(a)). is executed. By configuring in this way, the effect can be switched from the pre-battle effect to the battle ready-to-win effect without making the player feel uncomfortable.

When the processing of S4014 is finished, next, the continuous production flag 223r is set to OFF (S4015), the continuous production mode storage area 223m is cleared (S4016), and the value of the duration counter 223p is cleared to 0 (S4017). , the process ends.

As described above, in this control example, a pre-battle effect is executed as a variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations that are executed while the game state is set to a variable probability or a short working time state, and a specific one It is configured to execute the final mode production (battle reach) for special pattern fluctuations (hit fluctuations in special patterns and loss fluctuations in which the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected), but in addition to that Also, for example, it may be configured to execute the final mode production (battle reach) using the variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (results of winning/failure judgments in suspension and variation patterns) (based on the results of prefetching), the production mode of the final mode (battle ready-to-win) is displayed in each variable display. It is preferable to configure the setting so as to correspond to . Thereby, it is possible to smoothly execute the final mode effect (battle ready-to-win) which is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

Also, when using a configuration that executes the final mode production (battle reach) across a plurality of special symbol variations, all the display modes displayed in the final mode production (battle reach) are targeted. It may be configured to be set in advance for each special pattern variation, or only the production contents of the battle reach, that is, the attack pattern and the production result are set in advance, and the continuous value (HP value) increase/decrease display control is performed. may be configured to be set each time the variable display of special symbols is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the types of final mode effects (battle ready-to-win) preset based on the look-ahead result.

Next, the continuation value setting process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process (S4010). This continuous value setting process (S4010) is a process for setting the value of the continuous value (HP value in the battle effect) that is variably displayed during the continuous effect. In this control example, when setting the value of this continuous value (the value of the continuous value after the variable), the value selected based on the lottery of the special symbols (the value of the hundredth place of the opponent's HP), and the effect It is set so as to add up the value selected based on the lottery (tenths place value of the opponent's HP). This makes it possible to increase the variation of displayed continuation values.

When the continuation value setting process (S4010) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is time to change the continuation value (S4101). Although detailed description is omitted, in S4101, the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the sound ramp control device 113 is continued based on the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. Determine if it is a pattern that changes the value.

In this control example, as described above, the timing for changing the continuous value (HP value) is determined based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the sound ramp control device 113. In addition, a measurement means is provided for measuring the number of times a variation pattern that does not change the continuous value is continuously selected, and when the number of times measured by the measurement means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), compulsory If the number of times measured by the above-mentioned measuring means is a specific number (for example, once), change regulation means that does not change the continuous value regardless of the extracted fluctuation pattern. You can set it. By configuring in this way, the continuous value (HP value) is not changed at all during the continuous effect (during the pre-battle effect) and the player gets tired of the effect (pre-battle effect), and the continuous value is frequently increased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which (HP value) is changed and the contents of the presentation become difficult to understand.

Further, the continuation value change timing may be set based on the operation result of the player's operation of the frame button 22 or the result of prefetching the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a. Further, the continuous value change timing is set based on the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the continuous value (HP value) selected from the continuous value main selection table 222f. It is also possible to change the frequency of

If it is determined in the process of S4101 that it is not the time to change the continuation value (S4101: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to change the continuation value (S4101: Yes), the continuation value in the hundreds is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f (S4102), and the selected continuation value (continuation value The continuous value selected based on the main selection table 222f) is stored in the continuous value storage area 223n (S4103). Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) executed when the continuation value is changed is set to the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, that is, the continuation value main It is configured to refer to and set the continuation value selected based on the selection table 222f.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected in the process of S4102 is 200 or more (S4104). Based on the continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117(b)), the effect value (tens place value) is selected (S4105), and if it is determined to be less than 200 (S4104; No), the second Based on the continuous value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)), the effect value (tens digit value) is selected (S4106). A continuous value is calculated by summing the value selected in the process of S4102 and the value selected in the process of S4103 (S4104).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 117(b) and 117(c), the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 are selected effect values (tens digit values). ) are configured differently, the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 defines the range of selectable effect values as "-20 to +20", and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is selectable. The range of effect values is defined as "-10 to 0". That is, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is configured so that a positive value (plus value) is not selected as the effect value. This is because, in the pre-battle effect, for example, when "0" is selected as the continuation value (the value in the hundreds place) based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, internally (in the continuation value storage area 223n Although "0" is set as a stored value, the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not "0" (for example, "20 ”) This is a configuration for suppressing execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort due to the value being displayed.

In this way, the value of the continuation value (the value in the hundreds place) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f is discriminated, and the range of selectable effect values is changed based on the discrimination result. In the normal state (continuation value is 200 or more), the value of the continuation value (HP value) can be changed in both positive and negative directions, increasing the variation of effects and increasing the continuation value. If it is less than 200, the value of the continuous value (HP value) is changed only in the negative direction, thereby suppressing contradictions in the presentation.

Then, after the processing of S4105 or S4106 is completed, the continuous value (value in the hundreds place) selected in the processing of S4102 and the effect value (value in the tens place) selected in either S4105 or S4106 are are added to calculate a continuous value (HP value) (S4107), a display sum command corresponding to the calculated continuous value (HP value) is set (S4108), and this processing ends.

As described above, in this control example, variable management of the continuation value (HP value) that is variably displayed (increased or decreased) while the continuation effect is being executed is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The displayed continuation value (HP value), that is, the continuation value (hundreds' value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value (HP value) selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g 10's digit) and , but only the continuation value (the 100's digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f. By configuring in this way, the number of patterns for performing variable management of the continuous value (HP value) can be reduced with respect to the display pattern of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can reduce the processing load.

Furthermore, in this control example, even if variable management of the continuation value (HP value) is performed using only the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value (HP value ) and the display contents of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are configured so as not to be different, so that the processing load is reduced while the continuation effect is suitable. can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the sound lamp control device 113 of this control example, a continuous value is selected based on the continuous value main selection table 222f and the continuous value sub-selection table 222g, and information (command) indicating the selected continuous value is displayed on the display controller. 114. Then, only the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, and the continuation value increase/decrease management is repeatedly executed based on the stored continuation value.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 164, but in this control example, the display mode of the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, the attack pattern display mode to be executed and a variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) are set and displayed by the display control device 114 . That is, the display control device 114 has an area (total value storage area) for storing the summed continuation value when the display control device 114 receives a command related to the continuation value output from the sound lamp control device 113. and calculating the difference between the total value stored in the total value storage area and the total value calculated from the command related to the continuation value received this time, and attack pattern display mode based on the calculated difference value; A variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) is set and displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferably execute the continuous effect while reducing the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a continuation value sub-selection table 222g for selecting the continuation value for effect, and the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to select the continuation value for effect. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with a configuration for selecting a continuation value for effect (for example, a continuation value sub-selection table 222g). By configuring in this way, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

Further, in this control example, when a continuation value is selected from the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value secondary selection table 222g is also referred to to select a continuation value for effect. Other configurations may be used. For example, even if no continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f (for example, S4104 in FIG. 149: No), the continuation value for effect ( It may be configured to increase or decrease only the tens place value). As a result, it is possible to finely set the increase/decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In this control example, only values that are less than the current continuation value (the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n) are selected as the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that a value increased from the current continuous value is selected. In this case, when a value increased from the current continuation value is selected, as the effect mode of the continuation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value is selected instead of the normal attack effect. It is preferable to configure so that a recovery effect for recovering (HP value) is executed. In this way, by using the configuration for increasing the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect, it is possible to increase the variation of the increase/decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, It is possible to prevent the continuous value (HP value) from reaching the lower limit (for example, “0”) even if the value (HP value) is frequently varied (increased or decreased).

In this control example, the HP of the character is used as the continuation value that is variably displayed during the continuation production. ) is set to the player based on a variable value. The number of operations performed (times) may be used.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is "0", the continuation value (HP value) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is In order to prevent a value greater than "0" from being set, if the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), Although it is configured such that a positive value is not selected as the continuous value, other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuous value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f is "0", may be configured so as not to select a continuation value for effect (selection using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g).

Further, as in this control example, out of the different control devices (sound lamp control device 113 and display control device 114), the first control device (sound lamp control device 113) performs the process of setting rough presentation contents. In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly displayed by executing a process for setting a specific display mode of the effect in the second control device (display control device 114), the second control device (display control device 114) is output to the first control device (sound lamp control device 113), and then the first control device (sound lamp control device 113) sets the rough performance contents. When executing, it is determined whether the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is within the allowable range, and if it is within the allowable range, the next effect content is set as it is. Execute the process, if it is out of the allowable range, correct the information about the rough effect content set when setting the previous effect content, and based on the correction result, execute the processing to set the next effect content, When the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) has not been received at the timing of setting the content of the next presentation, the processing of postponing the timing of setting the content of the next presentation is executed. It may be configured as

By configuring in this way, the next effect can be set in correspondence with the effect mode already displayed by the processing executed by the second control device (display control device 114). The performance can be continuously executed without giving a sense of incompatibility. In this case, when it is determined that the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is outside the allowable range, the processing result is within a wider range than the error range set as the allowable range. It is determined whether it is within the limit range, and if the determination result is within the limit range, the effect can be set continuously by performing the above-mentioned correction, and if it is outside the limit range, the above-mentioned It is preferable to forcibly end the production without performing correction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the expectation effect setting process (S3808) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the expectation effect setting process (S3808). This expectation level effect setting process (S3808) changes the display mode of the expectation level display mode displayed during the special symbol change effect to determine whether or not the current special symbol change wins the jackpot. This is an effect suggested to the player (see FIGS. 102 and 103).

In this control example, three types of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 (see FIG. 102(a)) are displayed as the expectation degree effect in response to the elapse of time of the special symbol variation. Then, an expectation increase mode Dk4 for changing one of the expectation level display modes to a display mode with a high expectation level is displayed, and any one of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed. Execute the production so that is variable. A display timing setting process for setting the timing at which the expectation degree increasing mode Dk4 is displayed is also executed.

Here, in this control example, the three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 described above are configured to be displayed at different timings. The target of the expectation level display mode whose display mode is variable can be changed according to the mode Dk4. As a result, even when the same expectation level rising mode Dk4 is used, the presentation content can be changed only by changing the timing of displaying the expectation level rising mode Dk4, and the storage capacity of the image data can be reduced. can do.

In this case, only a still image (for example, a character image) having a small amount of image data may be displayed in correspondence with the expectation degree display mode for increasing the degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation with a small amount of data.

Furthermore, in the present control example, display modes that serve as references for the three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are determined in advance according to the level of the expectation effect mode. As a result, it is possible to form a set of three kinds of display modes of the degree of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3, which are composed of a plurality of combinations, and to reduce the processing load of the display processing. In addition, since the standard display mode (reference display mode) is determined in accordance with the level of expectation rendering mode, it is possible to suppress uneven increase in the level of expectation.

In addition, the final display mode (the display mode that can be displayed after the completion of the expectation level performance) of the three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 that are set based on the variation pattern, and the expectation level level are set according to the level. If there is a difference in any of the expectation level display modes between the reference display mode and the standard display mode, the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is displayed. The effect can be executed while expecting that the display mode of the degree of expectation display mode will change to a display mode showing a higher degree of expectation.

When the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) is executed, first, the current degree of expectation is selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i (S4201), and then the standard display mode is displayed based on the expectation degree effect selection table 222j. is selected (S4202). After selecting the expectation level performance mode level, the display mode of each expectation level display mode predetermined for the expectation level performance mode level and the actual expectation level performance mode (each expectation level display set based on the variation pattern display mode) is extracted (S4203).

After the processing of S4203 is completed, it is determined whether there is a difference (S4204), and if it is determined that there is a difference, the difference is calculated for each expectation degree display mode (S4205), and based on the presence or absence of the calculated difference The display timing of the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 is determined (S4206). Next, the difference for each expectation degree display mode is summed up (S4207), the display contents (display mode, display timing) of the expectation level increase mode are determined based on the summed difference (S4208), and the expectation level effect is displayed. is set (S4209), and a high-display expectation level target mode notification command for informing the expectation level display mode targeted for the expectation level increase mode is set (S4210).

Specifically, the processing of S4208 described above will be described first. executed. Further, the difference discriminating means discriminates the degree of expectation display mode in which the difference occurs, determines a plurality of timings at which the degree of expectation display mode can be set based on the discrimination result, and selects one of the determined plurality of timings. , one timing is selected based on the degree of expectation selected by referring to the degree of expectation selection table 222i. As a result, the difference between the display contents of the expectation level display mode set in the process of S4202 and the display contents of the expectation level display mode set in the process of S4203 can be complemented by the expectation level increasing effect. Therefore, it is possible to set one timing to set the degree-of-expectation increase mode Dk4, so that variations of effects can be increased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above example, the display mode of each expectation level display mode is determined first, and the content of the expectation level display mode Dk4 is set based on the value corresponding to the difference. , the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk4 is set based on the expectation level selected by referring to the expectation level selection table 222i, and the display contents of each expectation level display mode are determined based on the set content. It may be configured as follows.

Next, referring to FIG. 152, the countdown effect setting process (S3810) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process (S3810). This countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the received variation pattern is the variation pattern for executing the countdown effect. A countdown effect that accurately informs the execution timing of the specific effect as a suggestion effect for suggesting the execution timing of the specific effect to be executed during the variable display to the player. A process of setting a performance mode, a process of setting a performance mode of a sign performance for suggesting that the countdown performance will be executed, and a specific performance determination process of determining a specific performance to be the target of the countdown performance are executed. do.

When the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301). If it is determined that the portent setting flag 223t is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4301: No), among the plurality of specific effects included in the current variation pattern, the suggestive effect can be executed. One specific effect set in the timing is set (S4302). That is, among the specific effects (specific effects a, b (see FIG. 100(b))) other than the specific effect (specific effect c (see FIG. 101)) executed at a timing when it is difficult to execute the suggestive effect, set any.

When the processing of S4302 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (S4303). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (S4303: Yes), the indication display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of variation (Fig. 100(b) (see)) is set (S4304), and in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that has not been won (no) (S4303: No), as the start timing of the precursor effect A precursor display b (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) is set (S4305). That is, in this control example, the start timing of the suggestive effect suggesting the execution timing of the specific effect (the start timing of the predictive effect) can be set based on the lottery result of the variation (result of determination of success or failure).

In the above-described example, based on the lottery result of the variation (response determination result), the configuration is used to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the prognostic effect), but based on other conditions It may be configured to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the omen effect), for example, the operation result of the player's frame button 22 or the determination of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is configured to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the predictive effect) based on the result (prefetch result), the time measurement result of the time measuring means (for example, real time clock) for measuring time, the past game history, etc. You can

In this way, in one variable display (variation pattern), a plurality of timings (suggestive effect start possible points) that can be set as the start timing of the suggestive effect (predictive effect) are prepared, and the various conditions described above are satisfied. By using a configuration in which one of a plurality of suggestive performance start possible points is set based on the point, the degree of freedom of the suggested performance to be executed can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the process of S4304 or S4305, when the start timing of the precursor effect (suggestive effect) is set, next, a countdown period is set based on the start timing of the specific effect and the start timing of the predictive effect (suggestive effect) ( S4306).

This process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. specified effect), and in the process of S4304, when the portent display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) is set as the start timing of the portent effect, the countdown period is 7. Seconds are set, and in the processing of S4302, the specific effect targeted for the suggestion effect in the current variable display is set to the specific effect a (the specific effect to be executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), and in the process of S4305, the precursor effect is set. 100 (see FIG. 100(b))) is set as the start timing of , 3 seconds is set as the countdown period.

Next, the timing for starting the countdown effect (display timing for the countdown effect) is calculated based on the start timing for the specific effect and the set countdown period, and the timing for starting the precursor effect and the display timing for the countdown effect are calculated. The interval, that is, the predictive effect period during which the predictive effect is executed is calculated (S4307). Next, in the processing of S4307, it is determined whether or not the calculated interval (predictive effect period) is within 15 seconds (S4308), and if it is within 15 seconds (S4308: Yes), the effect mode of the predictive effect (predictive effect If it is determined that the interval (predictive effect period) is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S4308: No), the long effect is set as the predictive effect mode (S4309). A mode is set (S4310).

When the processing of S4309 or S4310 is finished, the display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode (specific effect mode, countdown effect mode, omen effect mode) is set (S4311), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301: Yes), that is, if the precursor effect has already been executed (see S3210 in FIG. 141) in the winning information command process (see S3210 in FIG. 141) If the precursor effect is executed across the variable display), the multiple variable effect setting process (S4312) is executed, then the above-described process of S4311 is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312). In this multiple fluctuation effect setting process (S4312), the predictive effect continuation execution process for continuing the predictive effect executed during the previous variable display and the countdown effect for the specific effect corresponding to the predictive effect are set. and the processing to be performed.

When the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, first, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) is set as the specific effect (S4401), and the countdown period is set to 3 seconds (S4402). Then, a display precursor command is set (S4403). The display precursor command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display precursor command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the precursor effect simultaneously with the start of the current variation (including a time difference that the player cannot identify). By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the portent effect continuously from the previous variable display without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the display control device 114 of this control example is means for determining whether or not the portent effect is being displayed at the timing when the variable display ends (the port setting flag 223t is turned on from the sound lamp control device 113). means for determining that a command indicating the setting is received), and when it is determined by the determining means that the precursor effect is being displayed at the timing when the variable display ends, the precursor effect being executed is determined. A production data storage area for temporarily storing the data together with time data indicating the timing at which the variation ends; restart display means for restarting and displaying from the time when the variable display of is completed, and when the predictive effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a series of predictive effects (for example, the car to the destination The effect of running toward the target (see FIG. 98(a))) can be executed without interruption.

Furthermore, in this control example, since it is configured to output a display precursor command as a display variation pattern command indicating the variation display of the special symbol, a plurality of variations are straddled in correspondence with the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform display processing of the effect (continuous effect) executed in . Therefore, based on the processing of the conventional display control device 114, that is, the content of the variation pattern command received each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect mode of the period until the special symbol variation is completed is displayed. A continuous effect can be executed using the process, and the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, in such a configuration, when executing a continuous effect that continues the dynamic display even during the special symbol stop period (symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds)), based on the variation pattern command A continuous effect is set with a length obtained by adding the symbol fixing period described above to the calculated fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to smoothly execute the continuous effect even during the period during which the special symbols are determined, that is, during the period between the continuous variation patterns.

It should be noted that a configuration other than this control example may be used as long as it is possible to execute a series of predictive effects without interruption when the predictive effects are executed across a plurality of fluctuations. Execute the precursor effect without setting the precursor effect period (end timing of the precursor effect) in the previous variable display, and set the end timing of the precursor effect based on the timing at which the countdown effect is executed in the current variable display. can be configured to

Returning to FIG. 153, the description continues. After completing the processing of S4403, next, the display countdown effect command is set (S4404), the precursor setting flag 223t is set to OFF (S4405), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the rendering update process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing effect update processing (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the variation of the special symbols. This is a process for setting effects.

When the effect update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is greater than 0 (S5101). If it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5101: No), that is, if the elapsed time is not counted, the process related to measuring the elapsed time is executed. It skips and shifts to the processing of S5108.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is greater than 0 (S5101: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the elapsed time counter 223k (S5102), and then the value of the elapsed time counter 223k after subtraction is It is determined whether it is 0 (S5103). Here, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S5103: No), the process proceeds directly to S5108.

In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is 0 (S5103: Yes), then the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (S5104), and the special symbols are currently fluctuating. It is determined whether there is (S5105). In the processing of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbols are not currently changing (S5105: No), the normal effect for display for notifying the display control device 114 of ending the extended display of the ending display of the jackpot A command is set (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently fluctuating (S5105: Yes), the process of S5106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5107. By configuring in this way, when the extension effect (effect of extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot) is being executed after the end of the jackpot, the time condition (4 seconds elapsed), which is one of the termination conditions of the extension effect ) is established, if the special pattern does not fluctuate, the extension effect is terminated immediately, and if the special pattern fluctuates, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF, and the next special pattern fluctuation starts. When the extended performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the extended performance is abruptly terminated during the variation of the special symbols, which confuses the player, and complicated performance setting processing when the extended performance is terminated during the variation of the special symbols can be suppressed. Since there is no need to execute this, the processing load can be reduced.

In the processing of S5108, processing related to updating of other effects is executed. Specifically, for example, processing related to presentation based on time information acquired from a real-time clock (RTC) is executed (S5108). After that, this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 172. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 155, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, so that the NOR-type ROM can be operated at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 156, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by the DRAM. The program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 are transferred and stored. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 156, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and then transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

In this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, after starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 155 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 170(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 170(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157B), the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 157B) and the simple display setting processing are performed so that the power-on image is drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 157(b)) is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (start winning), and the instruction to start the variable effect is mainly When received from the control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and the simple variation presentation is performed. It can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure recovery. Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157(a). FIG. 157(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157(b). FIG. 157(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 125) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 157(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the next one-frame image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172 .

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete A stop type table and a stop type counter corresponding to "out" are compared with each other, and the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 158, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S6405) and returns to the processing of S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 159(a). FIG. 159(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, it is determined whether or not the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501). Here, if it is determined that the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), that is, if the portent effect is executed continuously from the previous variation, the portent effect is executed from the start of the variation. In order to do so, the variable display data table corresponding to the portent effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6502), and the portent effect flag 233m is set off (S6503).

Specifically, from the display data table set during the previous fluctuation and the time data set in the display data table, the displayed period information for indicating the period displayed during the previous fluctuation is obtained. A storage means for temporarily storing the extracted extraction information is provided, and in the processing of S6502, the continuation of the precursor effect executed during the previous special figure fluctuation is configured to be executed in this special figure fluctuation. . As a result, the portent effect can be displayed smoothly even when the portent effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In this control example, the content of the precursor effect executed during the previous variation is stored, and the continuation of the stored precursor effect is executed in the current variation, but other configurations may be used. Also, for example, the display data table corresponding to the precursor effect is divided into a plurality of effect blocks corresponding to the passage of time, the effect block executed during the previous change is determined, and in the current change, the previous change It may be constructed such that the effect block set next to the effect block executed in the middle is executed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the management of the portent effect that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In addition, in this control example, as the precursor effect executed across a plurality of fluctuations, only the precursor effect for two variations can be executed, so in the processing of S6501, the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON. If it is determined that there is, the current fluctuation is the end fluctuation of the precursor effect, so the precursor effect flag 233m is set to OFF in the processing of S6503. If it is configured to be executed across, a counter (for example, a precursor effect counter) that can determine the period (number of times of special symbol fluctuation) during which the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON and a storage means (for example, performance continuation number storage means) for storing how many fluctuations the predictive effect being executed continues, and each time the variation pattern command process is executed, the value of the predictive effect counter is set. is updated, whether or not the updated value matches the value stored in the performance continuation frequency storage means is discriminated, and when it is discriminated that they match, the portent performance flag 233m is set off.

In the processing of S6501, if it is determined that the portent effect flag 233m is not ON (is OFF) (S6501: No), or if the processing of S6503 is finished, then the variable effect indicated by the display variation pattern command A variable display data table corresponding to the pattern is determined, the determined variable display data table is read out from the variable effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6504).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6504 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6505).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6504, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6507). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6508), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 159(a)), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6507, the display data table buffer 233d is stored by the process of S6504. From the set variable display data table, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of 1, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In this control example, when the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), the variation display data table corresponding to the portent effect and the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern command are displayed. is set in the corresponding display data table buffer, and the display data corresponding to the indication effect is preferentially displayed where the display data overlaps. Specifically, the layer in which the precursor effect is executed and displayed is provided with priority over the layer in which the normal variable effect is executed and displayed. The player can visually recognize the contents displayed on the effect layer.

It should be noted that any configuration may be used as long as the aspect corresponding to the precursor effect is displayed with priority over the aspect corresponding to the normal effect. The display data for the normal effect set based on the above may be discriminated, and only the display data to be visually recognized by the player may be set in the display data table buffer.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 159(b). FIG. 159(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front/rear out reach, reach other than front/rear out, or complete loss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S6603), and the process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description continues. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether there is a win-related command for display among the unprocessed commands. The win-related command for display is a command to be referred to when the jackpot is won, and specifically, an opening command for display for indicating the start of the jackpot, a command for the number of rounds for display, and an ending for display. Executed when a command or the like is received.

Here, with reference to FIG. 160, the details of the win-related command process (S6409) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related command process (S6409). The hit-related command processing (S6409) executes processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

When the hit-related command process (S6409) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display (S6701), and if there is an opening command for display (S6701: Yes), the opening command process is executed. (S6702), and the process ends. This opening command processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 161(a). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6701 that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703).

In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is a display round number command (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and this process ends. The round number command processing (S6704) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 161(b). Then, in the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), it is determined whether there is a display ending command (S6705), and if there is a display ending command (S6705: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S6706), and this process ends. This ending command processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the process of S6705, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6705: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161(a), the opening command processing (S6702) executed in the win-related command processing of FIG. 160 will be described. FIG. 161(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the opening command process. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6805), the opening command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S8702. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped.

In addition, the ending command for display instructing the start of the ending effect is matched with the timing when all the round effects (for example, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. Therefore, if the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, the round effect will end. A lot of waiting time occurs between the start of the ending effect and the start of the ending effect, which may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or to have a sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in this control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect in the third pattern display device 81 is all (for 16 rounds). , or for two rounds), the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player may feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feel uncomfortable. do not have. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in this control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started, Control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the third pattern display device 81 finishes the variation effect that becomes a big hit. As a result, when the variation performance that becomes a big win is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the opening performance can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is worried whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Next, the round number command processing (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. 161(b). FIG. 161(b) is a flow chart showing the content of the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number processing, first, the round number display data table is read from the round number rendering table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

Next, the ending command processing (S6706) will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending command processing (S6706). This ending command process (S6706) executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the ending command process (S6706), first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b for the ending effect. It reads from the table storage area (not shown) and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S7001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S7002). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7001, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot ends, so that the player can recognize that the jackpot has ended. can be made

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display hit-related command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is an image change command (S6410: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 163, the details of the back image change command process (S6411) will be described. FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing the back image change command process (S6411). The back image change command processing (S6411) is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the back image change command process (S6411), first, the back image change flag is set to ON (S7101). As a result, it is possible to determine the change of the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C and special back faces A to C corresponding to time effects), the back face corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command The image determination flag is turned on, and the back image determination flag corresponding to the other back image type is set to off (S7102), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the back image determination flag set by the process of S7102 is used to determine the post-change image. Specifies the back image type of the . If the specified back image type is back B or C, image data corresponding to the back images are not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image data is not stored. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . If the back image type after change is back A, all the image data are resident in the resident video RAM 235, so the image is not transferred.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any one of the back faces A to C and the special back faces A to C corresponding to the time effect according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, Based on the background image determination flag set by the processing in S7102, the type of the background image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the range of the background image is determined. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there is no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as the rear image change command. In the process of S7102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). Otherwise (S6412: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). FIG. 163(b) is a flow chart showing error command processing (S6413). This error command processing (S6413) executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the error command process (S6413), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Returning to the description of FIG. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a continuation value related command (S6414), and if it is determined that there is a continuation value related command (S6414: Yes), continuation value related command processing (S6415) is executed, processing corresponding to S6401 and other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 164, the details of the continuation value related command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing continuous value related command processing (S6415). This continuation value related command processing (S6415) executes processing corresponding to the continuation value related command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the continuous value-related command processing (S6415), first, the continuous value display data table corresponding to the received command is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S7301), and the total stored in the total value storage area 233k. A value (total value set when the previous command was received) is read out (S7302), and a difference from the total value indicated by the command received this time is calculated (S7303).

Then, the display data table indicating the attack pattern corresponding to the difference calculated in the processing of S7303 is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7304), and the value of the command received this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k. (S7305). The total value storage area 233k is configured to be able to store the total values indicated by the commands received during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed in the order in which the commands are received. Furthermore, the value of the difference calculated in the process of S7303 can also be stored.

As a result, for example, when the received total values continuously satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, when 7 is added to any of the total values in succession), A special attack pattern display data table can be set when the number of consecutive differences is a predetermined number (for example, 300 or more).

After the process of S7305 is completed, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing the Null data (S7306). Then, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7301 and S7304, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7307), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S7308). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S7309), the continuation value-related command processing is terminated, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the sound ramp control device 113 only outputs a command indicating the total value of the continuous value (HP value), and the total value set in the previous continuous value-related command process is , and the value of the difference is determined on the display control device 114 side, and the display mode (effect mode) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the determination result is executed by the display control device 114 Running. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced while diversifying the display of the continuation value (HP value) in the continuation effect (battle effect).

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 has means for setting the total value, and the display control device 114 has difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the total value set last time and the total value set this time. and a means for setting the display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means. For example, the sound ramp control device 113 has means for setting the first continuation value (the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f) to vary the continuation value (HP value). and all other means (means for setting the second continuation value (continuation value selected using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g) for varying the continuation value (HP value), the previously set sum Means for setting the difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the value and the total value set this time, and the display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means) Display control device 114 or only the attack pattern among the above means may be set by the sound lamp control device 113 .

Returning to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an expectation level effect related command (S6416), and if it is determined that there is an expectation level effect related command (S6416: Yes), the expectation effect related command process (S6417) is executed, and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 165, the details of the expectation level effect related command process (S6417) will be described. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the expectation level effect related command process (S6417). This expectation effect related command processing (S6417) executes processing corresponding to the expectation degree related command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the expectation level effect related command process (S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the received expectation level effect related command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7402).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7402, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7403), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7404) and returns to command determination processing.

In this control example, in the expectation effect setting process (see S3803 in FIG. 151) set and executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the display mode (see FIG. 102A) at the start of the expectation effect , the display mode (see FIG. 103(a)) that is the effect result (final display mode), the expectation level effect command for display for indicating the expectation level effect display mode, and the expectation level display mode to be notified in the expectation level effect. A display expectation level target mode notification command for indicating the display mode (see FIG. 103(b)) is set including information indicating display timing.

Then, in the expectation level effect related command process (S6417 in FIG. 165), the display mode corresponding to each received command is set to be displayed at the display timing corresponding to the display timing information included in each command. Specifically, the display mode at the start of the expectation level performance (see FIG. 102(a)) is displayed corresponding to the timing at which the expectation level performance is started, and then the display mode corresponding to the expectation level increasing performance is displayed. (see FIG. 102(b)) is displayed. After that, if the command indicating the current expectation level increase effect includes information for notifying the expectation level display mode to be notified, the display mode is displayed corresponding to the display timing information included in the command. display in time. After that, the display mode (see FIG. 103(a)), which is the effect result (final display mode), is displayed.

In addition, if the player is configured to be able to select which of the plurality of displayed expectation level display modes is the expectation level display mode that is the target of the expectation level increase effect, the selection result (correct answer or A command for indicating incorrect answer) is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and whether or not to display the final display mode is determined based on the contents of the received command. In other words, if the player's selection result is correct, each information included in the display expectation effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing) is sent to the expectation effect related command process (S6417). If the player's selection result is incorrect, each information included in the display expectation effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing), The setting information regarding the display of the final display mode is cleared, and display processing is executed so that the final display mode is not displayed.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description continues. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no expectation level effect related command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a countdown effect related command (S6417). In the process of S6417, when it is determined that there is a command related to the countdown effect (S6417: Yes), the command process related to the countdown effect is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 166, the countdown effect related command process (S6419) will be described. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect related command process (S6419). This countdown production related command processing (S6419) executes processing corresponding to the countdown production related command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the countdown effect-related command processing (S6419), first, it is determined whether or not there is an additional precursor command for display (S7501). In the case of executing the sign effect continued from the display, the additional sign data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the additional sign command for display is set in the display data table buffer (S7502), and corresponds to the display data table set in S7502. The transfer data table to be used is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7503).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7503, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to command determination processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7501, if it is determined that there is no display usage precursor command (S7501: No), the countdown effect data table corresponding to the received display countdown effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S7506), the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7506 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7507).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7507, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7508), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description continues. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no countdown effect-related command (S6418: No), it is determined whether there are other display commands. The corresponding process is executed (S6420). Here, other display commands include, for example, a display reserved ball number command indicating an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, or an effect (so-called continuous notice) that targets a specific change across a plurality of changes. There are a continuous notice command for display and a time effect command for display that indicates a time effect based on the result of measurement by time measuring means (so-called real-time clock) of the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the command for the number of pending balls for display is received, the flag for the number of new pending balls is set to ON. Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command for display, and the number of reserved balls displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is updated by updating the number of reserved balls counter based on the extracted number of reserved balls. Display update. In addition, when the display continuous notice command is received, the new continuous notice command flag is set to ON. Then, the distribution between the back surface of the school of fish and the back surface of the bubble is extracted from the continuous advance notice command for display. Next, based on the extracted distribution, the continuous announcement information storage area is updated, and the continuous announcement corresponding to the updated contents is displayed.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 159(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands , the command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and Since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, In the process, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169. FIG. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 167, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7601). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7602 and S7603 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7604. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7602), an error occurrence flag is on (S7603), and if the error occurrence flag is on (S7603: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed based on the error determination flag (S7604).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the details of the warning image setting process. When the warning image setting process is executed, the warning image data is expanded based on the error determination flag (S7701), the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7702), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7603: No), the process of S7604 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7605.

In S7605 of FIG. 167, pointer update processing is executed (S7605). Details of the pointer update processing (S7605) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing (S7605). This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7801). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7801, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7802). As a result, if it is End information (S7782: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7803). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7804), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7805), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S7803, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7806), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7802: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 167 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7606). Here, along with the previously developed warning image and the like, based on the rendering content developed in the process of S7606, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and the display coordinate position and Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7608). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7608: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7608: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7609).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7609: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. The processing of S7615 is executed. In the process of S7610, the confirmed display data table is read from the confirmed display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7610), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By doing so, the contents are cleared (S7611). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7612).

When the process of S7612 is completed, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7613). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S7614), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7615), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In task processing, until a predetermined time elapses after the start of variation, from the last stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S7615, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one before is specified, and the specified The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7609, if the fixed display flag is ON (S7609: Yes), the processing of S7616 to S7621 is executed in order to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the processing of S7616, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7616). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7616: No), the demonstration display data table is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7617), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the contents are cleared (S7618). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7619).

When the process of S7619 ends, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7620), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7621), this process ends, and the V division is performed. return to load processing.

As a result, even after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after starting the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing contents can be set so that the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 170(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so resident image transfer setting processing is performed. is executed (S7902), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not ON as a result of the processing of S7901, that is, if it is OFF (S7901: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7902), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 170(b). FIG. 170(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S8001). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S8002). In the process of S8002, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S8002 that the transfer processing has not ended (S8002: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8002: Yes), the process proceeds to S8003. Further, as a result of the processing of S8001, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8001: No), the process proceeds to S8003.

In the process of S8003, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S8003). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8004), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S8003, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S8003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S8005), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157(b)), the command Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the normal image. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) (see S7901: No in FIG. 170(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 171, the normal image transfer setting process (S7903), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7605) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S8101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S8102). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S8103), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S8104), and the process proceeds to S8105.

Also, in the processing of S8102, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S8102: No), the processing of S8103 and S8104 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S8105. In the process of S8105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S8105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S8105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S8106).

In the process of S8106, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S8106 that the transfer process has not ended (S8106: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8106: Yes), the process proceeds to S8107. Also, as a result of the process of S8105, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S8105: No), the process proceeds to S8107.

In the processing of S8107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8107). is turned off (S8108), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S8103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S8113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S8107: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S8109: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S8111). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The top address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S8112), and the process proceeds to S8113.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S8111, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S8113, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113). The determination in the process of S8113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S8113, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S8113 (S8113: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S8114). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S8114, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S8115), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer process in this way, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process. When the received stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the jackpot performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated (S8201). That is, in the processing of S8201, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S8202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S8202, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S8203). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the load process (see FIG. 157(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first control example, in the third symbol variation display for showing the special symbol lottery result to the player, a specific effect (for example, "PUSH display" for operating the frame button 22 ”) as a suggestive effect to notify the timing of occurrence, a countdown effect that is set based on the timing at which the specific effect is set, and the period from the start of the suggestive effect to the start of the countdown effect It is configured to execute an omen effect that is set to

Therefore, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed (the period during which the predictive effect is executed) can be freely set as compared with the case where the suggestive effect for notifying the timing of occurrence of the specific effect is executed for a predetermined period. .

In the first control example, the timing for starting the suggestive effect and the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect are configured to be selectable from a plurality of options. By configuring in this way, it is possible to variously set the period in which the suggestive effect is executed by various combinations.

Further, it is determined whether there is a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) between the timing at which the suggestive effect is started and the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and based on the determination result, the form of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is determined. configured to be variable. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting the effects to be executed in the future based on the contents of the effects to be executed.

In addition, based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, it is configured so that the aspects of the portent effect and the countdown effect can be varied. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, it is configured such that a long period (for example, 7 seconds) is likely to be set as the period during which the countdown effect is executed. As a result, the game can be played while expecting that the variable display of this time corresponds to the special symbol won as a win by the mode of the countdown effect.

It should be noted that, as the form of the effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a mode other than the mode of the first control example may be used. Any aspect may be set. In this case, a part of the performance mode is configured to be variable according to the period during which the suggestive effect is executed (suggestive effect period), and the length of the suggestive effect period and the lottery result of the special symbol are different for the player. For example, the color of the display mode such as characters displayed during the suggestive effect is variable (blue → yellow → red → rainbow color) according to the length of the elapsed time. Alternatively, the stage index (for example, degree of expectation) displayed during the suggestive effect may be configured to vary according to the length of the elapsed period.

Moreover, it is also possible to set each of a plurality of specific effects to have different degrees of expectation for big wins, and to vary the degrees of expectation for big wins depending on the specific effects to be targeted. In this case, a plurality of points during the variable display period are provided with places where the specific effect can be executed, and among the plurality of points, the specific effect to be executed at the point targeted for the suggestive effect is selected by lottery of special symbols. It may be configured to be set based on the result. As a result, the countdown effect is started, and even after it is grasped at which timing (point during the variable display period) the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect executed for the player, as the specific effect It is possible to make it difficult to understand which production will be executed, and to enjoy the suggestive production until the end.

In addition, in the first control example, the effect executed as the precursor effect among the suggestive effects uses the effect mode (the effect mode that suggests the execution timing of the countdown effect) for indicating the period of the predictive effect. In this way, in addition to the effect for indicating the effect period to the player, for example, the effect mode for suggesting to the player the content of the specific effect that is the target of the current suggestive effect, and the current variable display , an effect mode (notification mode) for notifying the player that the countdown effect will be executed may be set.

In addition, in the first control example, the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect) and the end timing of the suggestive effect (end timing of the countdown effect) are set separately. Suggestive effects can be executed across a plurality of variable displays. As a result, the start timing of the suggestive effect can be set during the previous variable display even for the specific effect set at the initial point of the variable display (for example, 5 seconds from the start of the variable display). As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting the suggestive effect.

In the case of using the above-described technology, based on the contents of the plurality of prize winning information already reserved and stored, the suggestive effect may be set across a plurality of variable displays, or the variable display of the special symbols may be executed. A means for discriminating the winning ball (winning ball to be the next fluctuation) is provided while the game is being played, and the discriminating means performs a suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays when the remaining fluctuation period is longer than a predetermined period. May be set. In the latter case, it is difficult to store the reserved memory (when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, or when it is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140), and the special symbol is Even when the first reserved memory (the reserved memory used for the next fluctuation) occurs during the fluctuation, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

The fluctuation time of the special pattern is generally configured such that a long fluctuation time is likely to be selected when the jackpot is won. configured to be high. In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, there is a problem that the degree of expectation for a big win with respect to the current variable display is predicted depending on the timing at which the suggestive effect is started. On the other hand, in the first control example, the timing at which the suggestive effect starts and the timing at which the suggestive effect ends are provided at a plurality of points, respectively, so that the suggestive effect period cannot be predicted from the timing at which the suggestive effect starts. It consists of Also, even if the suggestive effect period is the same, the period during which the sign effect is executed and the period during which the countdown effect is executed are configured to be variable. Further, as the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect, any one of the specific effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins can be selected.

In this first control example configured in this way, even after the suggestive effect is started, the current suggestive effect period, the target specific effect, the sign effect period, and the countdown effect period. can be suppressed from being predicted early and the production effect being lowered.

In the first control example, the countdown display in which the number is regularly decreased (for example, every second) is used as the effect mode executed during the countdown effect. For example, it may be configured such that a plurality of partitioned areas are filled regularly (for example, every second) and a specific effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. may In this case, the number of partitioned areas becomes a display mode for indicating the period of the countdown effect. Also, other configurations may be used.

In this first control example, display data for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds) are stored in the storage area of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 as display data to be displayed during the countdown effect, and are executed this time. Based on the period information indicating the period of the countdown effect set in the suggestion effect to be performed, the corresponding display data is displayed. Storage capacity can be reduced by having display data in this way.

In this first control example, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect) is configured to be set based on the start timing of the specific effect set in the target variable effect, but the countdown The end timing of the production should match the start timing of the specific production. For example, in the case where the specific production is to be executed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), it is set based on the end timing of the specific production. may be configured.

As described above, in the first control example, the end timing of the countdown effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect so that the end timing of the countdown effect executed as the suggestive effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. Then, the countdown effect period is set by calculating back the period (time) during which the countdown effect is executed from the set end timing. This makes it possible to easily set the countdown effect for the predetermined period in correspondence with the execution timing of the specific effect.

In the first control example described above, as the period for executing the suggestive effect, the sign effect period in which the predictive effect is executed and the countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is executed are set in advance before the suggestive effect is executed. However, other methods may be used, for example, the timing at which the suggestive effect starts (the timing at which the premonition effect starts) and the timing at which the suggestive effect ends (the timing at which the countdown effect ends, that is, A configuration may be used in which only the timing at which the specific effect is started is set in advance, and the timing at which the portent effect is switched to the countdown effect is set after the suggestive effect is executed.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to perform display control so as to switch from the portent effect to the countdown effect based on execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the portent effect. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the game so as to execute the countdown effect as soon as possible. A period in which the countdown performance can be executed is determined in advance based on the lottery result of the special symbols, and the countdown performance can be executed at the timing when a predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the omen performance. It is preferable that the portent performance is switched to the countdown performance only when it is timing, and the operation performance of operating the frame button 22 during the portent performance is executed at various timings. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to participate in the operation effect executed during the precursor effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Also, it may be configured to execute a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect during the omen effect. By executing this pseudo-countdown effect, the player can be made to think that the precursor effect has ended, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the future development of the effect. In this way, the pseudo countdown effect is configured to be easily executed when a big win is won, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the executed countdown effect is pseudo. Until the countdown effect (pseudo-countdown effect) is finished, the player can pay attention to the continuously executed effect.

In the first control example described above, the length of the precursor effect period to be executed as the suggestive effect is determined, and the effect mode of the precursor effect period is set based on the determination result. A configuration in which the execution length is not determined may be used, and for example, it may be configured so as to set the effect mode of the precursor effect based on the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed. In this case, since the length of the portent effect period is not determined, it is preferable to use, as the effect mode to be executed as the portent effect, a effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort even if the end is made at any timing. It is preferable to use a dynamic display mode that is executed according to a fixed rule, such as an effect in which a car continues to run on a road at a constant speed.

By using such a performance mode, even if the portent performance is executed without determining the length of the portent performance period, it is possible to smoothly switch to the countdown performance without making the player feel uncomfortable. Even in the case of using such an effect mode, the display mode (for example, the color) of part of the effect mode (the car in the above example) changes depending on the elapsed period of the omen effect as described above. Naturally, it may be configured to be variable.

Further, instead of determining in advance the length of the portent effect period in which the portent effect is to be executed, the length of only a part of the period may be determined. For example, it may be divided into a first precursor effect period of the first half and a second precursor effect period of the latter half, and the length of only the second precursor effect period may be determined in advance. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a specific predictive effect only during a predetermined period (second predictive effect period) retroactively from the end timing of the predictive effect (the start timing of the countdown effect), so that the specific predictive effect can be executed more smoothly. The production can be switched from the omen production to the countdown production.

As described above, in the above-described first control example, the game state (variable probability state (high probability, with electric sapo), which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric sapo), It is configured to execute a production (battle production) to indicate that the time saving state (low probability, with electric sapo) is set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuing.

Furthermore, the above-described battle effect is composed of a effect (battle ready-to-win) that suggests whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will end, and a effect (pre-battle effect) to determine the effect mode of the battle ready-to-win. Configure. By configuring in this way, when the game state that is advantageous to the player actually ends (for example, when it is decided that the game state shifts to the normal state by lottery of special symbols), the battle is performed during the period other than. Since the performance can be continuously executed, the player feels anticipation for the continuation of the game state advantageous to the player and an uneasy feeling that the game state advantageous to the player has ended. The game can be continued while holding the robot.

Furthermore, during the above-described battle effect, an effect is executed in which the continuation value (HP value) increases or decreases to suggest whether or not the game state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player will continue to be set. . This continuation value (HP value) is configured to increase or decrease based on the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbols, the remaining period for which the advantageous state is set, or the like.

Here, when increasing the pattern of increase and decrease of the continuous value (HP value) described above and executing a production rich in variation, the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the advantageous state is set. It was necessary to perform complex management in which the displayed remaining period and the displayed continuous value (HP value) are associated with each other. Such management increases the processing load of the pachinko machine 10, and it is required to increase the variation of effects while reducing the processing load.

Therefore, in the first control example, the above-described expected value (HP value) is set based on the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the remaining period for which the advantageous state is set. (Main continuation value (e.g., 100th place value)) and a value (secondary continuation value (e.g., 10th place value)) set for the purpose of increasing production variation, Configured to display as a continuous value (HP value).

In this way, by summing the value actually managed and set and the value set for performance, the number of display patterns of performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be increased.

Further, in the above-described first control example, a display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuation value is displayed. By displaying this display mode, it is possible to visually inform the player of the degree of increase or decrease of the continuous value, so that an easy-to-understand effect can be executed.

In the first control example, as the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuous value, the display mode corresponding to the small difference amount (for example, the range of 50 to 150) is "weak attack", and the display mode corresponding to the large difference amount ( For example, the display mode corresponding to the range of 350 to 550) is "strong attack", and the display mode corresponding to the difference between them (for example, the range of 151 to 349) is "medium attack". , When the set display mode (attack pattern) is executed, a different effect is executed for each display mode, and then the continuation value is updated.

That is, by grasping the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player roughly grasps the amount of decrease (difference value) of the continuation value (HP), and after that, the updated continuation value can be used as a specific value. You will get a realistic numerical value. By displaying the information in such an order, it is possible to notify the player of the information regarding the game step by step, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Further, in the above-described first control example, when setting the above-described display mode (attack pattern) in order to reduce the control load of the effect, the main continuation It is configured to set a display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the values. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the patterns of the continuation values (pre-update continuation values, post-update continuation values) or difference values used when setting the display mode (attack pattern).

As described above, when the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the continuous value (HP value) is set based on the difference value of the main continuous value, the displayed continuous value (third symbol The difference value of the continuation value (sum of the main continuation value and the sub continuation value) displayed on the display device 81 does not match the difference value of the main continuation value, and the display mode differs from the apparent range of the difference value. (attack pattern) was set.

In order to solve the above-described problem, in the first control example, when the value of the continuation value (HP) is continuously updated a plurality of times, the difference value of the continuation value (HP) on the display and the main continuation value , the set display mode (attack pattern) is the same. By configuring in this way, the problem described above can be solved.

Further, in the first control example, main continuation value determining means for determining the value of the set main continuation value is provided, and the secondary continuation value set for the effect is determined based on the determination result of the main continuation value determining means. The selection tables for selection are configured to be different. Specifically, when the value of the primary continuation value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 200), a selection table that defines "-20 to +20" as a selectable range for the secondary continuation value is referred to, and a predetermined If the value is less than 200 (eg, 200), a selection table that defines "-30 to 0" as a selectable range for the secondary continuation value is referred to.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the selection of a positive value as the secondary continuation value when the primary continuation value is 0.

In the first control example, as described above, the first effect (pre-battle effect) and the second effect (battle ready-to-win) are effects for indicating a period (advantageous period) during which the game state is set to be advantageous to the player. ) to execute a unit effect (battle effect). In the first effect, an effect for suggesting the effect mode of the second effect is executed, and in the second effect, an effect for informing the player whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the above-described unit effect is repeatedly executed while the advantageous period is set. By configuring in this way, the second effect can be executed a plurality of times during the advantageous period, so that the player can play the game during the advantageous period while keeping the player feeling tense. .

Further, by making it possible to execute a plurality of unit performances while the advantageous period is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one unit performance continues for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the presentation from being slowed down.

In addition, in the first control example, as the condition for ending one unit effect (condition for executing the second effect), the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (the opportunity to end the advantageous period) In addition to the case of a lottery result), the case that the remaining period of the advantageous period is 0, and the case that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number or more. As a result, the second performance is executed even when the advantageous period is not terminated, but the second performance is executed when other conditions are satisfied. good too.

In addition, if the second effect for informing whether or not the advantageous period is over is executed a plurality of times in a short period of time, the player will quickly become bored with the second effect, so the first control is performed. In the example, the second effect (pseudo second effect) executed for the purpose of effect is suppressed from being executed multiple times within a predetermined period. Specifically, the number of variations of the special symbols after the unit performance is executed is counted, and the pseudo second performance is not executed when the counter value is less than a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the second effect early.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of expectation level performance modes are provided for stepwise suggesting the expectation level that the lottery result of the special symbol during fluctuation is a big hit, and any one of the expectation level performance modes displayed as the expectation level performance mode is provided. An expectation variable (increase) performance is executed to change the performance mode to a performance mode in which the expectation level is set higher than the performance mode.

Then, at least one of the plurality of expectation level presentation modes described above is configured to be displayed at a different timing, and the expectation level variable (increase) presentation determines which expectation level presentation mode the expectation level is to be varied. It is executed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to comprehend.

In the first control example configured in this manner, execution of the expectation level variable (increase) effect informs that the effect mode of any of the expectation level effect modes is variable (increased). In this state, the player watches the performance while expecting further variation (increase) of the desired expectation level performance mode (for example, the expectation level performance mode in which the expectation level that is already a big win is set high). can be done.

In addition, in the first control example, by varying the timing at which the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed, it is configured to vary the target expectation level effect mode. Specifically, it is configured to target the expectation level effect mode displayed after the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed.

In addition, in the first control example, the variable expectation (increase) effect is configured to be able to vary the effect modes of the plurality of expectation effect modes, and the variable amount to be varied for each expectation level effect mode It is configured to display a variable amount for indicating the sum of (steps). As a result, the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed, and after grasping that one of the expectation level effect modes will be changed, the player can grasp the amount by which the expectation level effect mode is changed in the current effect. can.

Furthermore, after the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed, a notification mode is displayed for informing the player of the target for which the expectation level is to be increased in the current effect, so that the player can receive the target expectation level effect mode. can be easily comprehended.

In the above-described first control example, a plurality of expectation level performance modes having a performance mode capable of displaying the jackpot expectation level in stages are provided, and each expectation level performance mode is configured to be able to display different stages, and displayed. It is constructed so as to predict whether or not the current variation wins the jackpot by combining and grasping the display contents of each expectation performance mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicate the aspect of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting. There is a problem that the processing load for control increases. Furthermore, when the performance modes for increasing the expectation level are biased, specifically, only one expectation level performance mode among the plurality of expectation level performance modes is changed to a performance mode indicating that the expectation for the big win is high. When the remaining expectation degree performance mode remains the performance mode indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is low, the player is made to have excessive expectations for the winning of the big win, and the player feels distrust in the content of the performance. There was a problem of giving

On the other hand, in the first control example, in the plurality of expectation level performance modes, the expectation level performance mode before being varied by the expectation level variable (increase) performance is set in a plurality of patterns, and the special symbols are set. According to the expectation degree set based on the lottery result of (1), the expectation degree of the expectation degree performance mode set by the pattern is configured to be variable (increased). By configuring in this way, the plurality of problems described above can be solved.

<Example of addition of effect to first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 181, an effect addition example of the first control example will be described. In this additional example, an effect (title giving effect) that progresses based on the operation content of the frame button 22 is added to the above-described first control example. This title giving effect includes the number of times an operation effect requiring a frame button operation has occurred, the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (the number of valid operations) for that operation effect, and the number of times the operation effect has been operated during a period in which the operation effect is not executed. Based on the number of operations of the frame button 22 (the number of invalid operations), it is executed so that the benefits (titles) given to the player are varied.

By using such an effect, the player can not only operate the frame button 22 as instructed, but also can be provided with the enjoyment of performing other operations (including non-operating), thereby allowing the player to enter the game early. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Furthermore, in this additional example, the appearance frequency of the operation effect for operating the frame button 22 (for example, the effect for dropping the accessory unit (displacement member) 450) is variable based on the privilege (title) granted to the player. It is configured to allow As a result, for a player who is willing to operate the frame button 22, the operation effect is made to appear frequently, and for a player who does not want to operate the frame button 22, the appearance frequency of the operation effect is reduced. can be lowered.

In addition, compared to the case of using a technique in which the player selects the appearance frequency of the operation presentation in advance, the appearance frequency of the operation presentation can be matched to the player's preference based on the operation result of the operation presentation executed during the game. Therefore, the operations performed by the player can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, the operation effect executed in this additional example will be described. FIG. 173(a) is a schematic diagram showing a conversation effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the content.

As shown in FIG. 173(a), in this additional example, a character unit (displacement member) 450 is provided so as to cover an upper part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2 for details). ). Then, the characters "You can talk with the button PUSH" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to prompt the operation of the frame button 22 . Here, when the frame button 22 is operated, as shown in FIG. 173(b), the characters "Hello" are displayed in the main display area Dm as if the character unit 450 were commenting. In this way, in this additional example, a conversation effect is executed in which the character unit 450 and the character unit 450 can have a conversation. Note that the accessory unit 450 can be moved to a position other than the position (initial position) shown in FIG. Therefore, for example, determining means for determining the role object position and comment display position setting means for displaying the comment in the display area corresponding to the role object position determined by the determining means may be provided. . As a result, regardless of the position of the character object, the character "Hello" can always be displayed in the main display area Dm as if the character unit 450 were commenting.

Further, as a determination means for determining the position of the role product, a means for directly detecting the position of the role product unit 450 using a proximity sensor may be used, a drive motor for driving the role product unit 450, or a drive motor for driving the drive motor may be used. A detecting means for detecting the drive state (for example, the number of steps) of a force transmitting means (pulley, etc.) may be provided, and means for determining the role object position based on the detection result of the detecting means, or a role object unit. In the case where the 450 is driven based on an action scenario, means for determining the position of the character object based on the progress of the action scenario may be used. When the latter configuration is used, it is possible to grasp not only the current character object position but also the future character object position based on the contents of the action scenario, so the display position of the comment is adjusted according to the character object position. Can be set in advance. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the operation scenario of the role product unit 450 is associated with the information regarding the display position of the comment in advance and stored, or a plurality of the above means may be combined.

A level display area Dr1 for indicating the current level (set value) and a title display area Dr2 for indicating the current title are displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. Here, the level (set value) is a value that is added (raised) based on the game history (game period, game result, effect content, etc.). 176(c)), and in FIG. 173(a), the lowest level, "Grade 3", is displayed.

A title is a benefit that is set based on the level (set value) described above and the details of the operation of the frame button 22 . Although a detailed description will be given later, a plurality of systems are set for this title, and one system is set according to game contents (operation contents of the frame button 22). A unique privilege (title) corresponding to each level is set for each system, and "beginner" is displayed in FIG. 173(a).

In FIG. 173(b), based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the state of FIG. 173(a), a comment is displayed from the character object unit 450, and the level displayed in the level display area Dr1 increases. Then, "2nd grade" is displayed, and "half serving" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. Note that the content of the comment of the role item unit 450 is variably set according to the level and title, and the higher the level and title, the more advantageous the player is to information (for example, the degree of winning expectation during fluctuation, the current game state, etc.). It is set so that information related to games such as As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, the contents of the character object-driven presentation, which is one of the operation presentations executed in this additional example, will be described with reference to FIG. 174(a). FIG. 174(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character-driven presentation. As shown in FIG. 174(a), when the character object driving effect is executed, as an effect for prompting the operation of the frame button 22, the characters "Press the button to drop the character object" are displayed in the main display area Dm. At the same time, an image simulating the frame button 22 is displayed.

Also, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Chance if you fall" suggesting the detection result of the character product driving effect are displayed. When the frame button 22 is operated during the period during which the character object driving effect is being executed (while the operation of the frame button 22 is valid), and the character object falls to the position covering the main display area Dm, the changing It suggests that there is a high possibility that the special pattern has won the jackpot. In this manner, in the operation presentation for operating the frame button 22, by operating the frame button 22, the player can be motivated to quickly perceive that he or she has won the big prize. A frame button 22 can be operated.

In this additional example, as described above, different benefits (titles) are given depending on whether the frame button 22 is operated intentionally or not. In addition, the player can voluntarily choose whether or not to operate the frame button 22, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this additional example, since different benefits (titles) are given according to the title system set as described above, even if the game is continued with one title system, It is configured so that all benefits (titles) cannot be obtained. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain all the benefits (titles) granted to the player, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, since the title system is set according to the operation contents of the frame button, it is configured so that it is not possible to obtain all the benefits (titles) unless the operation contents of the frame button 22 are devised. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain all the benefits (titles) granted to the player, and to provide the player with various effects that are executed based on the details of the operation of the frame button 22. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Here, in order to obtain various benefits (titles) as described above, it is necessary to set a different title system, so the current title system is initialized (the history of the operation contents of the frame button 22 is initialized). However, if all the histories based on the games that have been continuously played so far are initialized, there is a possibility that the motivation of the player will decrease. .

Therefore, in this additional example, there is a change operation that allows the player to select whether to initialize all histories or erase histories up to a stage where a different title system can be set. FIG. 174(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during this change operation.

As shown in FIG. 174(b), in the main display area Dm, the characters "from the beginning" and a part of the history are displayed as the all erasing selection mode Dr3 indicating the selection section to be selected when all the histories are initialized. A character "from the middle" is displayed as a partial erasure selection mode Dr4 that indicates a selection portion to be selected when erasing . Here, when the all-clear selection mode Dr3 is selected, the level (set value) displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title displayed in the title display area Dr2 are set to initial values. This all-delete selection mode Dr3 is mainly selected when erasing operation histories of different players.

On the other hand, when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected, a display going back to the stage where a different title system can be set is displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title display area Dr2. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the same privilege (title) is granted regardless of the title system as long as the level (set value) is low. becomes higher, one title system among the plurality of title systems further branches into a plurality of title systems.

As a result, the contents retroactively displayed when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected can be made different depending on the level (set value) or title when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected. It should be noted that a title system may be provided that is not set unless this partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected. As a result, it is necessary to not only add (increase) the level (set value), but also subtract (decrease) it, so that it is possible to provide a game with more variations.

As described above, in the first control example, as an effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, a jackpot effect spanning the multiple times of the jackpot game (continuous jackpot performance) is executed, and the content of the jackpot performance executed during the jackpot game suggests to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game ends. However, if the gaming machine has a special game state other than a big winning game, for example, a gaming machine having a small winning game in which the privilege that can be given to the player is set less than that of the big winning game, during a predetermined period When a small winning game or a big winning game (hereinafter referred to as a winning game) is executed a plurality of times, a winning performance (continuous winning performance) spanning the multiple winning games is executed. can be In this way, in the above-described first control example, the contents described for the big win may also be executed for game results other than the big win (for example, the small win). The game results include various game results that exist as conventionally well-known configurations.

In addition, in the first control example, as a game result after the end of the currently executed jackpot game, it is configured to suggest to the player whether or not to win the jackpot again within a predetermined period (within reserved memory). However, other game results may be suggested to the player by a winning effect executed during the winning game, for example, the number of winning big wins (including small wins) in the reserved memory, the number of winning big wins ( (including small hits) privilege content (number of rounds), the game state (probability variable state or time saving state) after the jackpot (including small hits) won in the reserved memory, and multiple game results (jackpots, small hits) If it is targeted, the type of the game result or the order of execution may be suggested.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the content of the big win performance is varied based on not only the ball entering information stored at the timing of executing the big winning game, but also the ball entering information newly stored during the big winning game. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball-entering information, to facilitate the execution of consecutive big win effects, and to make the players interested in the big win effects.

In addition, in this control example, as a continuous jackpot effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be varied based on the number of pieces of entering information stored at the time when the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, based on the number of winning ball information stored at the time when the jackpot game is executed, there are a plurality of different timings for suggesting (announcing) that the jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (within reserved storage). It is configured so that the jackpot production of is executed.

Of these, in the specific jackpot performance (additional performance) that can be executed when the number of reserved balls (number of ball entry information) of special symbols is not the upper limit, new ball entry information is acquired during the jackpot game, and the ball entry information is obtained. is won as a big win, the contents of the big win performance can be changed so as not to be noticed by the player.

In the above-described specific jackpot effect, the jackpot game (multiple round games (eg, 15-round game)) to be executed during one jackpot is partially notified (eg, 5 rounds). Since the performance is executed, it is possible to inform the player incomprehensibly how many rounds of the big winning game have been executed while the specific big winning performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the game state after the big win, depending on the number of rounds set for the big win game.

In this control example, it is configured to perform an additional display (additional display of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game by the additional effect every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). The length of the inter-round interval period in a predetermined round is set longer than the length of other inter-round interval periods. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts whether or not the big win will end in every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). In addition, since the variation of the special pattern for a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the big win is executed in a shortened time (0.5 seconds), every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval period and the special symbol variation period between big wins.

It should be noted that it is preferable that the variation period of the special symbols for a predetermined period, which is executed after the end of the big win, is always constant regardless of whether or not the big win is won. Specifically, the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols for four rotations after the end of the big win is defined to vary by 0.5 seconds for the entire period when the lottery result is lost, and when the lottery result is a big win. , a 2-second variation for the first rotation, a 1.5-second variation for the second rotation, a 1-second variation for the third rotation, and a 0.5-second variation for the fourth rotation. As a result, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbols for four rotations after the end of the big win, the predetermined period (the period until the special symbols fluctuate four times or the period until the big win is won) is fixed (2 seconds). be able to. In this case, by configuring the interval period of each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) to coincide with the above-described predetermined period (2 seconds), the interval period of each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) and the interval between the jackpots are increased. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the special symbol fluctuation period.

Also, in the first control example, as a jackpot effect executed during the jackpot, during the jackpot game (while the round game is being played), a normal jackpot that does not suggest that the jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (within the reserved memory) have a performance. When this normal jackpot production is executed, the end display mode displayed in the final period during the jackpot game (ending period after the end of the round game) is a predetermined period after the jackpot ends (4 variations of special symbols, or 4 seconds) is displayed continuously. Then, when a big win is won again within a period in which the end display mode is continuously displayed after the end of the big win, the performance for continuous winning is executed in which the big win performance is started again via the end display mode.

By constructing in this way, the ball entry information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during a predetermined period (4 variations of special symbols or 4 seconds) after the end of the big win game is acquired after the end of the big win game, Even when the acquired ball entry information has won a jackpot, the performance for continuous winning can be executed. In other words, since it is possible to include the ball entry information acquired after the end of the big win as the condition for executing the continuous jackpot effect indicating that the big win is continuously executed, the ratio of executing the continuous jackpot effect can be increased. , can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in the first control example, whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot performance is determined based on whether or not there is ball entry information for winning a jackpot in the reserved memory. When there is ball entry information for winning a big win, it is determined whether or not the big win is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous big win presentation. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a game state (for example, a variable probability state) advantageous to the player is set as a game state after the big win in the reserved memory is executed, and based on the determination result, continuous It may be determined whether or not to execute the jackpot effect. Furthermore, after the game state (normal state (low probability state)) that is once disadvantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win to be executed this time, the game state after the big win in the reserved memory is executed. It may be determined whether or not an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) is set, and whether or not to execute continuous jackpot effects may be determined based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the added value to the player when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, as in the above-described second control example, in a gaming machine having a drop lottery configuration, it is difficult for a player to grasp the game state when a jackpot is won, so the drop lottery is performed using the above-described continuous jackpot effect. The result of the lottery may be notified to the player.

Specifically, means for discriminating the game state at the time of winning the current jackpot, means for discriminating the game state set after the end of the current jackpot, and a falling lottery executed until the next jackpot is won. and a means for discriminating the lottery result, and whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect may be determined based on the discrimination result of each discriminating means described above. Only when the state is a low-probability state of the special pattern, that is, when the game state of the special pattern has fallen by the falling lottery, the continuous jackpot performance is executed, or after the end of this jackpot, the special pattern is high. A probability state is set, and only when it is determined that the game state of the special pattern shifts to a low probability state by a drop lottery until the next big win is won, a continuous jackpot performance is executed or a fall is made. The game state of the special pattern does not shift to the low probability state by lottery, and the continuous jackpot performance is executed in the case of the high probability state of the special pattern even when the game state of winning the current big win and winning the next big win. It may be configured as follows.

In this control example, as the winning information used to determine the content of the jackpot effect to be executed during the jackpot game, the winning information at the time the jackpot game is executed is used. The timing may be any timing as long as it is the timing after it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed. or a predetermined timing within a period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the jackpot effect. Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the variation of the special symbol that has won the big hit is started, or a predetermined timing during the period during which the variation is being performed.

In addition, in this control example, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric sapo) (variable state (high probability, with electric sapo), time saving state (low probability, with electric sapo) )), an effect (battle effect) is executed to indicate that the game state is continuing. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. FIG. 175(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 175(a), the ROM 222 in this additional example has the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114), and the content of the fluctuation pattern table 222a is partially changed. The difference is that a title system selection table 222aa, a title selection table 222ab, and a role item action level selection table 222ac are added. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 176(a), the contents of the variation pattern table 222a for the accessory action added in this additional example will be described. FIG. 176(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table 222a (for character goods). As shown in FIG. 176(a), the variation pattern table 222a (for role product) includes role product action levels (1 to 3) selected by role product action level selection table 222ac, which will be described later, and extracted variation patterns ( a to z), and character product action frequencies (low) to (high) and (no) are defined. By configuring in this way, even when the same variation pattern is selected, the frequency of the action of the character product can be varied.

Next, referring to FIG. 176(b), the contents of the title system selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 176(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title system selection table 222aa. In this title system selection table 222aa, a plurality of title systems (1 to 3) are defined in association with the ratio of valid and invalid operations of the frame button 22 and the button operation ratio during execution of the operation effect.

FIG. 176(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title selection table 222ab. This title selection table 222ab defines titles that are privileges given to the player in association with the current level (set value) (“3rd grade” to “hermit”) and the title system (1 to 3). there is The title selected here is displayed in the title display area Dr2 (see FIG. 173(a)).

As shown in FIG. 176(c), while the level (set value) is low (third class to first dan), the same title is set regardless of which title system is set. Unable to grasp the set title system. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the currently set title system from being grasped immediately after the start of the game, and the execution of an operation to change the title system.

Next, the contents of the role product action level selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. 177(a). FIG. 177(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the role product action level selection table 222ac. The role product action level set in the role product action level selection table 222ac is referred to when using the variation pattern table 222a (for role product) described above with reference to FIG. 176(a).

As shown in FIG. 177(a), the role action level selection table 222ac defines role action levels in association with set values (levels) and title systems. Among them, only the title system 3 in which the setting value can reach "hermit" is configured so that the character action level 3 can be selected. In this way, by providing a role action level that is selected only when the level (set value) is increased while a specific title system is set, It becomes possible to impart a special feeling, and to enhance the production effect.

FIG. 175(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 175(b), the RAM 223 in this modified example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114) in that an effect setting group 223aa is provided. . Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first control example.

Here, the contents of the effect setting group 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 177(b). As shown in FIG. 177(b), the effect setting group 223aa includes an operation effect number counter 223aa1, a valid operation number counter 223aa2, an operation ratio storage area 223aa3, a title system storage area 223aa4, a set value storage area 223aa5, and an invalid operation number. A counter 223aa6, a change flag 223aa7, and a role product action level storage area 223aa8 are stored.

The operation effect frequency counter 223aa1 is a counter for counting the number of times an operation effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. This operation effect number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) that it is the variation pattern for executing the operation effect (S3851 in FIG. 178: Yes), and the frame button input is performed. It is referred to when calculating the button operation ratio in the monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 179) (S5060 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), when the history of operation effects is changed (deleted), it is cleared (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

The valid operation number counter 223aa2 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect. In this control example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period of the operation effect. 179), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the effective period of the operation effect, 1 is added (see S5054 in FIG. 179), referred to when calculating the button operation ratio (see S5060 in FIG. 179), and further , is also referred to when calculating the valid operation ratio (see S5061 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), when the history of operation effects is changed (deleted), it is cleared (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

In this additional example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period of the operation presentation. Determination is made as to whether or not operation conditions are satisfied, such as pressing a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the case of an operation presentation to cause the frame button 22 to be pressed, and a success rate (for example, 50%) in the case of an operation presentation in which the frame button 22 is operated multiple times with good timing. However, if the determination result satisfies the operation condition, the value of the effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be incremented by one. As a result, the value of the counter can be added fairly regardless of the content of the operation effect to be executed.

Furthermore, in this additional example, the value of one effective operation number counter 223aa2 is added regardless of the instruction content of the operation presentation for the frame button 22 (press, repeated press, timing press, long press, etc.). However, for example, a valid operation number counter 223aa2 may be provided for each instruction content of the operation presentation for the frame button 22, and the value of the corresponding valid operation number counter 223aa2 may be added. With this configuration, the operation history indicating the details of the player's operation on the frame button 22 can be classified more finely, so that the details and frequency of the operation performance can be varied to suit the player. can be done.

The operation ratio storage area 223aa3 stores all operations of the frame button 22 based on the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 (value of valid operation number) and the value of invalid operation number counter 223aa6 (value of invalid operation number) described later. This is an area for storing the ratio (button operation ratio) of the number of valid operations to the number of times. This operation ratio storage area 223aa3 stores the button operation ratio calculated in S5060 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S4007) and the valid operation ratio calculated in S5061 (see S5062).

The title system storage area 223aa4 is an area for storing the title system selected using the title system selection table 222aa described above.

The setting value storage area 223aa5 is an area for storing game content and a level (setting value) set based on a change operation.

The invalid operation number counter 223aa6 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated at a timing other than the operation valid period (the operation valid period of the frame button 22 during operation presentation).

The change flag 223aa7 is a flag that is set to ON when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected by a change operation. By setting this flag to ON, an effect is executed that suggests to the player how to operate the frame button 22 for setting a different title system.

The role product action level storage area 223aa8 is an area for storing the role product action level selected using the above-described role product action level selection table 222ac. By referring to the role product action level stored in the role product action level storage area 223aa8, the appearance frequency of the role product action effect (operation effect) is variably set by the variation pattern table 222a (for role product).

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. FIG. Elements that are the same as those of the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 178, variable display setting processing 2 in this additional example will be described.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 2 in this additional example. In each of the processes of S3801 to S3810 and S3812 to S3817 of the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example, the same process as the variable display setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 147) is executed.

When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes of S3801 to S3810 as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are executed, and then the current variable pattern is a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851), and if it is determined to be a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: Yes), the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 (S3852). , S3853. On the other hand, in the process of S3851, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: No), the process of S3852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3853.

In the processing of S3853, the current variation display mode is determined based on the extracted variation pattern and the character action level (S3851). Specifically, based on the role product action level selected based on the role product action level selection table 222ac and the extracted variation patterns (a to z), a variation pattern table for role product action (see FIG. 176 ( a) Set the role object action frequency defined in (see a)), and determine the current variable display mode (variation effect display and presence/absence of role object action). Among the variable display modes determined here, for the contents to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the variable pattern command for display is set by the processing of S3812, and set by various processing of the sound lamp control device 113. In the same way as the display command, the display control device 114 is notified of the contents of the action of the character product, and the command output processing (see FIG. 139) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113. (see S3102 of )) sets the role product operation command to be notified to the device that drives and controls the role product unit 450 (the other device 228 (see FIG. 4)). After completing the processing of S3853, the same processing of S3812 to S3817 as in the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S3107).

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S3107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of frame button 22 has been detected (S5051). Here, if the pressing is not detected (S5051: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the conversation effect (see FIG. 173) of the operation effects is valid (S5052). If it is determined that it is the effective period of the conversation effect (S5052: Yes), the display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5053), the value of the valid operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054), and S5060 to process.

The display press command set in the process of S5053 is configured such that the content of the command is set based on the position of the role product unit 450, the role product action level, and the selected title. sets the comment display position of the conversation effect based on the result of determining the position of the role product unit 450, and determines the content of the comment to be displayed based on the role product action level and the selected title. is set. The display press command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display pressing command, the third pattern display device 81 displays the comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the character unit 450. An effect of having a conversation with the unit 450 can be displayed.

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the conversation effective period of the conversation production, the display press command is set so that the comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450. However, if the role object unit 450 is configured to be movable to a plurality of positions covered by the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the role object unit 450 and the position of the third symbol display device 81 The display content displayed on the display screen may be discriminated, and the timing of executing the conversation presentation (comment display) based on the discriminated result may be made different from the pressing timing of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加That is, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the character unit 450, and the main part of the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the display indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot, When it is determined that the above-described display areas do not overlap, that is, when the position of the character product unit 450 moves. The display area of the comment is changed, or the display area of the main part is changed by the progress of the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, so that the comment is made until the timing when each display area does not overlap. display may be delayed.

By constructing in this manner, both the variation performance displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the conversation performance, which is one of the operation performances, can be suitably executed, and the performance effect is enhanced. can be done. In addition, without using the above-described configuration, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the character unit 450 and the main part of the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, If it is determined that the display area for displaying the degree of expectation for a big win and the display area for displaying a pattern to be stopped overlaps, the conversation production may be stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5052, when it is determined that the conversation effect is not valid (S5052: No), it is determined whether the current is the valid period of the character action effect among the operation effects (S5055). If it is determined that it is the effective period of the role object action effect (S5055: Yes), the display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5056), and the value of the valid operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054). , S5060.

In the process of S5055, if it is determined that it is not the validity period of the character action effect (S5055: No), then it is determined whether it is the change valid period (S5057), and if it is the change valid period (S5057: Yes), change processing is executed (S5058), and then the process proceeds to S5060. Details of the change processing (S5058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, in the process of S5057, if it is determined that it is not within the change effective period (S5057: No), the current pressing operation is not during the effective period of the operation effect, so the value of the invalid operation counter 223aa6 is incremented by 1. (S5059), the process proceeds to S5060.

In the process of S5060, the button operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 and the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 (S5060). Next, the valid operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the valid operation counter 223aa2 and the value of the invalid operation counter 223aa6 (S5061), and the calculated button operation ratio and valid operation ratio are stored in the operation ratio storage area 223aa3. (S5062). After that, title setting processing is executed (S5063), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the change processing (S5058) will be described with reference to FIG. This change process (S5058) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the validity period of the change operation (see FIG. 174(b)), and various information is displayed based on the details of the player's operation. This is a process for clearing (the title system, the set value (level), and information on the button operation ratio and information on the valid operation ratio that are referred to when selecting the title system).

When the change processing (S5058) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current operation is all reset (whether the all erasure selection mode Dr3 is selected) (S5101). If it is determined to be a full reset (S5101: Yes), all information in the set value storage area 223aa5 is cleared (S5102), and the operation presentation number counter 223aa1 and effective operation number counter 223aa2. All the values of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 are cleared (S5103), the information of the title system storage area 223aa4 is cleared (S5104), and this processing ends. As a result, all the information based on the operation contents of the player is cleared, the initial value "3rd grade" is displayed in the level display area Dr1, and the initial value "beginner" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. (See FIG. 173(a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the reset is not complete (S5101: No), it is determined whether the operation content is a partial reset (whether the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected) (S5105). If it is determined to be a partial reset (S5105: Yes), the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5106), the information in the set value storage area 223aa5 is set to the first stage (S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103. . In the process of S5105, if it is determined that the reset is not partial (S5105: No), the process ends.

Next, the title setting process (S5063) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the details of the title setting process (S5063). When this title setting process (S5063) is executed, first, a title system is selected based on the title system selection table 222aa (S5201). Then, the selected title system is stored in the title system storage area 223aa4 (S5202), then the set value is determined based on the value of the operation effect counter 223aa1 and stored in the set value storage area 223aa5 (S5203).

Thereafter, a display setting value command is set (S5204), a title is selected based on the title selection table 222ab (S5205), and a display title command is set (S5206). Next, it is determined whether the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5207), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5207: Yes), a display operation instruction command is set (S5208), and the change flag is set. 223aa7 is set to off (S5209), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5207 that the change flag 223aa7 is not ON (it is OFF) (S5207: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the above-described additional example, the effect mode (for example, appearance frequency and effect content) of the operation effect, which is the effect for operating the frame button 22, is changed to the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. ), it is configured to be configurable. As a result, a desired presentation mode is set without making the player feel troublesome, compared with the case where the change operation for changing the frequency of the operation presentation to the frequency desired by the player is executed separately from the game. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 that changes the effect mode of the operation effect based on the player's operation history, in order to be able to set the effect mode of the operation effect suitable for various types of players, Although a plurality of presentation modes are prepared, while the same operation for the frame button 22 (for example, when the operation presentation is executed, the frame button 22 must be operated more than the required amount) is repeatedly executed. , there is a problem that only the same effect mode is set, and various operation effects cannot be provided to the player.

Therefore, in the above-described additional example, by accumulating game contents, a different privilege (title) is given to the player, and furthermore, the type of the privilege (title) is set at least by the player's frame button 22 It is configured to be different in accordance with the operation content (operation history) to.

By configuring in this way, various operations are executed on the frame button 22 in order to acquire different benefits (titles). Then, the effect mode of the operation effect is variably set based on the content of various operations executed with respect to the frame button 22 . Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various operation effects that can be variably set based on the operation contents (operation history) of the frame button 22 .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 having a structure in which different benefits (titles) are given by accumulating game contents, setting values (for example, levels) are variably set in stages according to the accumulation status of game contents. It is common to use a configuration that grants a privilege (title) corresponding to the set value (level), but when the set value (level) reaches the upper limit, a higher privilege (title) is obtained. There is a risk that the player will not be able to play the game, and the desire to play will decrease. Moreover, if the upper limit of the set value (level) is set high in order to prevent the set value (level) from reaching the upper limit, there is a problem that the storage capacity for the effect increases.

Therefore, in the above-described addition example, one of a plurality of systems (title system) with different benefits (titles) to be granted is set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. In this way, the privilege (title) given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system. As a result, since it is not possible to acquire all the benefits (titles) simply by accumulating the game contents, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in the above-described additional example, since there is an erasing means for erasing the past game contents, when setting a system different from the currently set system, the contents of operations executed in the past (operation history) It is possible to suppress the system from being set based on. In addition, in this additional example, in order to suppress the system from being set based on the details of operations (operation history) executed in the past, a deletion means for deleting the details of past operations (operation history) is used. , Other configurations may be used, for example, inputting the desire to set a different system (input by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22), in that case, for a predetermined period A new system may not be set until (period of operation history referred to when setting a system) has elapsed.

Further, in the above-described additional example, the erasing means includes a total erasing means for erasing all past game contents and operation contents and a partial erasing means for erasing a part of them. The partial erasing means is used when setting a different system from the currently set system, and the different system can set the past operation contents (operation history) referred to when setting the system. It is configured to erase up to the state. This eliminates the need to restart the game from the beginning when setting a different system, so that the player can be motivated to set a different system.

In this additional example, when the partial deletion means is operated, a part of the past operation contents (operation history) is deleted, and an initial value is set as a set value (level). However, by operating the partial erasing means, rather than restarting the game from the beginning (rather than operating the all erasing means), it is sufficient if a system different from the currently set system can be easily set. The set value (level) may be maintained and only part of the past operation contents (operation history) may be erased. Alternatively, the player may designate a desired system, and part of the past operation contents (operation history) may be erased until the designated system can be set.

Here, even if the player operates the partial erasing means to erase a part of the past operation contents (operation history) in an attempt to set a system different from the currently set system, the operation to be executed later is performed. If the frame button 22 is not properly operated for the effect, a different system will not be set, which may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Specifically, after operating the partial erasing means, if the operation effect is completed in the same operation mode as in the conventional art, the same system as the system set before operating the partial erasing means may be set. There is

Therefore, in this additional example, after operating the partial erasing means, there is provided guidance notification means for guiding the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player so that a different system is set. A different system can be easily set by executing the operation presentation based on the content notified by the guidance notification means. In addition, in order to set a different system, the guidance notification means notifies operation contents different from the conventional operation contents. The contents are also variably set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation presentation different from the one up to now, and enhance the presentation effect.

The content notified to the player by the guidance notification means may be content that simply prompts a different operation from the operation presentation, or content that specifically indicates the content of the operation to be executed. Further, in addition to the notification by the guidance notification means, a progress notification means may be provided for notifying the player of the progress until the condition for setting a different system is satisfied. As a result, the player can easily grasp whether or not the operation effect is completed so that a different system is set.

Furthermore, when the set system and the set value (level) satisfy the predetermined conditions for the system set in the additional example described above, the setting is possible only when the predetermined erasing means is operated. You can add system. By providing such a system, for example, when the set value reaches the upper limit, a dedicated system can be set only when the all erasing means is operated, or the set value is one lower than the upper limit. , a dedicated system may be set only when the partial erasing means is operated.

In addition, based on the erasing timing of the erasing means, it is also possible to change the system that can be set. Only a special system may be settable. In this case, it is preferable that the specific variable performance described above is executed only when the variable performance executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to set different systems depending on the timing of operating the erasing means, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

In the additional example described above, a configuration is used in which the privilege (title) is preset in correspondence with each set value (level) of each system, but other configurations may be used, and already acquired A storage means for storing the privilege (title) may be provided, and the privilege (title) to be given may be set based on the privilege (title) stored in the storage means.

In the above-described additional example, as the content of the privilege (title) given to the player (the content of the title), the content suggesting the setting condition of the currently set system is used. As a result, by grasping the content of the acquired benefits (titles), it is possible to predict the conditions necessary to set different systems.

Furthermore, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied, the player may be notified of the conditions necessary for setting the desired system, or the previously obtained benefits (titles) among the available benefits (titles) may be The number or ratio of (titles) may be notified to the player. As a result, the player's willingness to participate can be increased to obtain all the benefits (titles).

As described above, based on the operation contents (operation history) of the frame button 22, one of the plurality of systems (title system) with different benefits (titles) to be granted is set, In the case where the privilege (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system, the currently set system based on the granted privilege (title) There is a problem that it becomes easy for the player to grasp the

On the other hand, in the additional example described above, the same privilege (title) is granted until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage, regardless of which system is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage (unless the game is executed for a certain period of time after the predetermined system is set), the player cannot grasp which system is set. can be made difficult.

In addition, as the operation contents (operation history) to the frame button 22 referred to in the above-described addition example, for example, operation effect count information for indicating the number of times the operation effect has been executed, the frame button corresponding to the executed operation effect 22, operation success count information for indicating the number of successful operations (the number of times a predetermined operation condition is satisfied), and the period during which the operation effects are not executed (operation Information indicating the state of operation of the frame button 22 by the player, such as invalid operation count information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated outside the effective period, may be used.

Furthermore, as the content of the operation effect, in addition to the pressing effect of simply pressing the frame button 22 within a predetermined period, the timing operation effect of operating the frame button 22 at a predetermined timing, and the operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period. It is also possible to provide a repetitive-hit operation effect to make the user operate, and a long-press operation effect to keep pressing the frame button 22 continuously for a predetermined period or longer. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the operation contents (operation history) to the frame button 22 are managed for each type of the executed operation presentation.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine in detail whether the player simply dislikes operating the frame button 22 or dislikes predetermined operations (continuous hits, long presses, timing presses) on the frame button 22.例文帳に追加becomes possible. Therefore, when setting the operation presentation corresponding to the operation content (operation history), it is possible to provide the operation presentation more suitable for the player, and to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of operation means, each information may be managed for each operation means, or the operation contents for all the operation means may be combined and managed. may be configured. Furthermore, when an operation performance is executed to operate different operation means according to the degree of expectation of a big win, information indicating the number of times of execution of the operation performance and the number of times of operation of the operation means is managed in association with the degree of expectation of a big win. Alternatively, the operation content (operation history) may be managed only for the operation presentation executed when the jackpot is won.

In the above-described additional example, based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) for the operation effect, it is referred to when determining the operation effect mode (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) and the privilege (title) to be given. system and a set value (level) are set, but based on the operation contents of the operation means (frame button 22) , only one of the above-described system or set value (level) may be set.

In the additional example described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. Alternatively, a lever-shaped operation means that can determine that the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or back and forth, or a touch that can determine that it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A sensor-type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used, or a plurality of the above-described operating means may be provided.

As in the above-described additional example, when using a configuration that varies the mode of operation presentation based on the player's operation content (operation history) or grants a predetermined privilege (title), another day It is preferable to configure so that the game can be played while continuing the operation contents (operation history) of the game performed on the day. Information on game content and operation content is configured so that the player can acquire it (password issuing processing), and output information related to the acquired information is input to the pachinko machine 10, thereby continuing from the acquired information. It is preferable to configure so that a game in the state can be played.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 188. FIG. In the above-described first control example, when a special pattern jackpot is won and the variable probability state is set after the jackpot ends, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in the second control example, in addition to the jackpot lottery for judging whether or not special symbols ) (hereinafter referred to as a drop lottery) is executed each time the condition for judging whether a special symbol is true or not is established. In this way, in a gaming machine having a falling lottery function, even if a variable probability state (high probability state) is set, the period in which the high probability state continues reliably is not set, so the special symbol variation is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension every time.

Furthermore, in the second control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when the probability variable state is set, the high probability state in which the probability of the jackpot becomes high and the time-saving state in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open Even if you win the drop lottery and fall from the high probability state to the low probability state, for a predetermined period (for example, after the big win, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times until ) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the falling lottery is won immediately (for example, 3 rotations) after the end of the big win, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (100 rotations), so that the falling lottery is won depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the fact.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and when the fall lottery is won, the special symbol jackpot lottery is executed in a low probability state. be done. That is, if the falling lottery is won in a state exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of special symbol variations is 100 times), the game state is normal at the time when the special symbol variation is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if the effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the player has won the drop lottery is executed using the fluctuation time of the special symbol that wins the drop lottery, the player will fall just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There is a problem that it is easy to determine whether the lottery is successful or not. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state exceeding the above-described predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot ends), a special The game state is shifted to the normal state before the pattern variation is started.

By configuring in this way, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes the operation content of the non-time-saving state in a state exceeding a predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the jackpot). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he has won the fall lottery or the big win lottery, and to make the player have a sense of expectation until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. can.

In addition, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player whether the fall lottery is successful or not by using the continuous effect explained in the first control example. By configuring in this way, the player can pay more attention to the effect that is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 182(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 182(a), the ROM 202 in this control example is different from the ROM 202 in the first control example in that a falling lottery table 202ba and a state transition table for falling 202bb are added, and a first win type selection table 202c. (See FIG. 107), the game state after the end of the jackpot was defined as "probability variable time short next time", but it is different in that it is defined as "probability variable until fall lottery win, or fall lottery win or short time up to 100 times". , are otherwise the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The falling lottery table 202ba is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the probability changing state to the normal state in the probability changing state of the special symbol (falling lottery). counter value) is stored. In the probability changing state of the special symbols, every time the lottery of the special symbols is executed, the falling lottery table 202ba is referred to and it is determined whether or not to fall to the normal state. Details of the drop lottery table 202ba will now be described with reference to FIG. 182(b).

FIG. 182(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 182(b), a random number value (counter value) determined as a fall in the fall lottery is stored. Specifically, in the special symbol probability state (high probability state), two random numbers (counter value ) are stipulated. In the special symbol probability variable state, when executing the special symbol lottery, the value of the fall lottery counter (not shown) and the random number (counter value) corresponding to the fall defined in the fall lottery table 202ba are compared. , falls to the normal state if the values match. The falling lottery counter (not shown) is a loop counter that is periodically updated within the range of "0 to 299" (for example, each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed). Of the 300 possible random numbers (counter values) of the drop lottery counter, two random numbers determined as a fall are specified, so the probability of being determined as a fall in one drop lottery is 1/150. is. It should be noted that the random number (the value of the first per random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the variable probability state is five of "5 to 9" (see FIG. 106 (a)), and becomes a big hit during the variable probability state Since the probability is 1/48, it is set so that the probability of winning a big hit is higher than the probability of being determined to fall in the falling lottery during the variable probability state. Therefore, once the state is shifted to the variable probability state, the player can expect to win a large number of times before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in the game during the variable probability state can be improved. can.

The falling state transition table 202bb is a state transition table that is referred to when the falling lottery is won during the variable probability state. The description of the same elements as those of the state transition table 202f described in the first control example is omitted.

FIG. 182(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the falling state transition table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 182(c), the fall state transition table 202bb stores a fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 and a fall state transition 2 table 202bb2. Here, the contents of the falling state transition 1 table 202bb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(d).

FIG. 182(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 1 table 202bb1. This fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 differs from the state transition 1 table 202f1 described in the first control example in that a state status in the case of winning the falling lottery is added to each state status. are identical.

Specifically, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (maximum 100), if the falling lottery is won, the state status is set to ST3 (with low probability and short working hours). The value of the number counter remains unchanged. In addition, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0, and the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST1 (no low-probability short working hours).

In other words, even if 100 is set to the value of the specified number of counters, and even if the fall lottery is won before the value of the specified number of times counters is decremented to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of counters is decremented to 0. status is given.

Next, the falling state transition 2 table 202bb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(e). FIG. 182(e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling state transition 2 table 202bb2. This falling state transition 2 table 202bb2 is different from the state transition 2 table 202f2 described in the first control example in that a state status when winning the fall lottery is added to each state status. are identical.

Specifically, when the state status is "ST2a" and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (maximum 4), when the falling lottery is won, the state status is set to ST3a (special with low probability and short working hours), The value of the specified number counter is maintained as it is. Also, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is greater than 0 (up to 96), if you win the fall lottery, the status status is set to ST3 (with low probability and short working hours), and the value of the specified number of times counter continues as is. In addition, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0, and the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST1 (no low-probability short working hours).

In other words, even if 100 is set to the value of the specified number of counters, and even if the fall lottery is won before the value of the specified number of times counters is decremented to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of counters is decremented to 0. status is given.

FIG. 183(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 183(a), the ROM222 in this control example is provided with a continuous production mode selection 3 table 222e instead of the continuous production mode selection table 222e in the ROM222 in the first control example, and final mode selection. The difference is that a final mode selection 3 table 222h is provided instead of the table 222h, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 184(a), the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e will be described. FIG. 184(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e. This continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e is associated with the value of the remaining period (number of remaining fluctuations) stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb for the continuous effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above, The difference is that the response to the continuous effect mode is selected. In addition, if there is winning information indicating jackpot winning in the hold at the time of falling winning, it is a special state that the jackpot is won immediately after winning the falling lottery (jackpot in low probability state), so regardless of the remaining period Instead, the special mode B can be selected to give the player a special effect.

Next, the contents of the final mode selection 3 table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b). FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a final mode selection 3 table 222h; This final mode selection 3 table 222h is different from the final mode selection table 222h used in the first control example in that the final mode is changed according to the setting state of the fall flag 222ba. The points are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 184(b), even if the winning/failing judgment result is a failure, if there is prize winning information indicating a big win winning in the reserve, it is possible to suggest that in the final mode of this time.

Returning to FIG. 183(b), the description is continued. FIG. 183(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 183(b), the RAM 223 in the second control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a fall flag 223ba and a remaining period storage area 223bb are provided. be. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The drop flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the drop lottery has been won, and is set to ON when a state command indicating that the drop lottery has been won is received from the main controller 110. FIG.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in second control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 185, control processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. This control example is different in that a special symbol variation start process 3 (S213) is used instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example described above, and other points are the same. . The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special fluctuation start process 3 (S213) is executed, first, the processes of S301 and S302 are executed in the same manner as the special fluctuation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example. , and the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202ba (S351), and whether or not the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random number value corresponding to the fall (lottery result corresponding to the fall (S352).

In the process of S352, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to falling (S352: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state by setting the variable probability flag 203g to OFF (S353), and the falling ( (S354).

Then, in the same way as the special variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, after executing the processes of S303 to S307, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot has been won after a short period of time (S355). Here, when winning after the short period of time (S355: Yes), reset the counter 203h during the short period of time (S356), then S310, S311 in the same manner as the special fluctuation start processing of the first control example (see FIG. 128) , and terminate this process.

As described above, in the second control example, when an advantageous state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, when the special symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, a special symbol lottery (jackpot Before the lottery is executed, a drop lottery is executed for determining whether or not the game state is to be shifted from an advantageous state to a normal state (a game state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state).

Furthermore, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit in a state (probability variable state or time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a high probability state of normal symbols)) in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open, The high probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low probability state before starting the variation of the target special design.

According to the control process of the main controller 110 in the second control example described above, there are two end conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the first end condition is that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number (the number of time saving times given to the set state), and the game state is a probability change. When the state is set, the falling lottery is won as the second end condition, and when the two end conditions described above are met, the high probability state of the normal pattern is ended. . It should be noted that, regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned two end conditions are established, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the end condition of the time saving condition is established.

In other words, for example, if you win a jackpot in which the probability variable state (next time) is set as the game state after the jackpot ends, and the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times, the special symbol has changed 100 times The above-mentioned first end As a condition, winning the fall lottery is the second termination condition described above. Specifically, in the above example, if the fall lottery is won in the 10th round of special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, the second end condition is satisfied at that time, but the first end condition is Since it is not established, the high-probability state of the normal design is continued until the first end condition is established (the special design fluctuates 100 times) (until both of the two end conditions are established). Then, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 times, both of the two end conditions are satisfied, and the normal symbol high-probability state shifts to the low-probability state.

On the other hand, in the state where the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot ended exceeds 100 times (the first end condition is satisfied), the falling lottery is not won (the second end condition is satisfied) If not), the high probability state of the normal pattern continues until the fall lottery is won. Then, when the falling lottery is won (when the second end condition is satisfied), the normal symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state.

In this way, by providing a plurality of (two) conditions necessary for shifting the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state, the state transition timing of the normal design can be diversified. In addition, if only the second end condition described above is not satisfied (in the above example, if the high probability state of normal symbols is set in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 times ), since it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the normal pattern will be shifted to the low probability state (whether the falling lottery will be won), the normal pattern is kept in the high probability state for as long as possible. The game can be played while expecting that

In addition, in this second control example, as one of the conditions for shifting the high-probability state (time-saving state) of the normal design to the low-probability state (normal state), 100 special design fluctuation times are set. However, a plurality of times may be set according to the type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings for ending the high-probability state (time-saving state) of the normal design together with whether or not the falling lottery is won. Specifically, if the fall lottery is won before the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100 times), the number of special symbol variations is a predetermined number ( For example, when reaching 1, 25, 50, 100 times), the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal design ends, and for example 25 times is set as the number of special design fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, When the falling lottery is won in the time saving when the number of times of special pattern fluctuation exceeds 25 times, the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) is terminated immediately.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) ends.

Furthermore, in the second control example, as one of the conditions for ending the high-probability state (time-saving state) of normal symbols, the number of fluctuations of special symbols is used, but other end conditions may be provided, For example, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result (so-called small winning) in which a game that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time is executed (the number of times the variable winning device 65 operates). Or, the number of fluctuations of the special design is measured separately for the special design 1 and the special design 2, and the number of fluctuations of the special design 1 reaches 10 times, or the total number of fluctuations of the special design 1 and the special design 2 reaches 100 times. You may set what was done as end conditions.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed instead of command determination processing (see FIG. 140), and command determination processing 3 (see FIG. The difference is that a state determination process (see FIG. 187) is added as a sub-process, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example described above.

After completing the processing of S3214, next, the state determination processing (S3251) is executed, then the processing of S3215 is executed, and this processing ends. Here, details of the state determination processing (S3251) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this state determination process (S3251), various processes on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 are executed when the falling lottery is won.

When the state determination process (S3251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252). The command indicating this drop is set when the drop lottery is won (S352 in FIG. 185: Yes) by the special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 185) of the main controller 110 (see S354 in FIG. 185). If the command indicating the fall has not been received in the process of S3252 (S3252: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the command indicating the fall is received (S3252: Yes), it is determined whether the present is in the short period of time (S3253). Here, if it is determined that it is in the short working hours (S3253: Yes), then the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3254), and the number of remaining short working hours is calculated (S3255). Then, the calculated remaining time reduction count is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3256).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information that a jackpot has been won in the reserve (S3257), and if it is determined that there is (S3257: Yes), special condition fulfillment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3258). Here, when the special condition establishment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, the special mode B is selected when the continuous effect mode is set using the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e (see FIG. 184).

When the process of S3258 is finished, it is next determined whether or not a command indicating that the game state is normal is received (S3260), and if it is determined that a command indicating the normal state is received (S3260), the player falls It is determined whether the flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261). In the process of S3261, when it is determined that the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261: Yes), that is, when the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state with the falling lottery won If so, the fall flag 223ba is set to OFF (S3262), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3260, if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state has not been received (S3260: No), or the fall flag 223ba is not set to ON in the process of S3261 (it is set to OFF). ) (S3261: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for judging whether a special symbol is appropriate, the variable probability state (that is, a high probability state with a high jackpot probability) to a low probability state with a low jackpot probability. A transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) that shifts (falls). will be explained about the game machine which is executed every time the condition for judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is established. In this way, in a gaming machine having a falling lottery function, even if a variable probability state (high probability state) is set, the period in which the high probability state continues reliably is not set, so the special symbol variation is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension every time.

Furthermore, in the second control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when the probability variable state is set, the high probability state in which the probability of the jackpot becomes high and the time-saving state in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open Even if you win the drop lottery and the high probability state falls to the low probability state, for a predetermined period (for example, after the end of the big win, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times until ) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the fall lottery is won immediately (for example, three times) after the end of the big win, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period of time, so the player can be notified that the fall lottery has been won depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. It is possible to suppress being grasped by

In addition, although the details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and when the fall lottery is won, the special symbol jackpot lottery is executed in a low probability state. be done. That is, if the falling lottery is won in a state exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of special symbol variations is 100 times), the game state is normal at the time when the special symbol variation is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if the effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the player has won the drop lottery is executed using the fluctuation time of the special symbol that wins the drop lottery, the player will fall just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There is a problem that it is easy to determine whether the lottery is successful or not. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state exceeding the above-described predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot ends), a special The game state is shifted to the normal state before the pattern variation is started.

By configuring in this way, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes the operation content of the non-time-saving state in a state exceeding a predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the jackpot). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he has won the fall lottery or the big win lottery, and to make the player have a sense of expectation until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. can.

In addition, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode that can suggest to the player whether the fall lottery is successful or not by using the above-described continuous effect. By configuring in this way, the player can pay more attention to the effect that is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-described second control example, if the fall lottery is won during the variable probability state and the fall timing is during the short time period, the variation pattern table that is used during the short time period even after the fall is continued. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the fall lottery has been won by selecting the variation pattern using the . Alternatively, another example may be used in which a variation pattern is selected using a special variation pattern table upon winning the drop lottery.

Now, with reference to FIG. 188, the content of the above another example will be described. FIG. 188(a) is a block diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the case of using another example described above. As shown in FIG. 188(a), in the above another example, a post-fall fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is added.

The contents of this post-fall fluctuation pattern table 202d5 will be described with reference to FIG. 188(b). FIG. 188(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the post-fall fluctuation pattern table 202d5. As shown in FIG. 188(b), the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is a variation pattern table that is used for four rotations of the special symbol after winning the drop lottery during a short period of time. The post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is configured so that the variation pattern for 60 seconds is likely to be selected even in the case of a failure. Therefore, immediately after winning the fall lottery, battle reach is likely to occur. As a result, every time a battle reach occurs, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance while having a sense of tension.

In this case, depending on the effect mode of the battle reach, it is preferable to notify the player of the effect of notifying that the fall lottery has not been won at a predetermined rate. Specifically, depending on the battle reach opponent (opponent character) selected, it may be possible to suggest whether or not the fall lottery will be won, and depending on the production (attack pattern) performed during battle reach, the fall lottery The presence or absence of winning may be suggested, or the presence or absence of winning of the fall lottery may be suggested based on the result of the battle reach (remaining HP value at the time of the tie battle reach). As a result, as the outcome of the battle reach, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won, whether or not the falling lottery is won is also a matter of concern, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, when a big win is won during the period when the after-fall fluctuation pattern table is used, it is preferable that a special performance mode is executed as a special win. As a result, the player can easily understand that he or she has won a big win in a low probability state immediately after winning the falling lottery by watching the performance mode executed as a special win. In this case, the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the special win may be set to a variation time that cannot be set in other variation pattern tables. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the immediate hit after the fall due to the sense of incongruity due to the difference in the variation time.

<Description of another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example>
Next, another example of the suggestive effect explained in the above-described first control example will be explained. In the first control example described above, the effect mode of the suggestive effect composed of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is set in the variation display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the timing when the special figure variation is started. The configuration set in the countdown effect setting process (S3810 in FIG. 152), which is part of the process, was used. On the other hand, in this another example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, only the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect) is set, It is configured to set a specific effect to be the target of the current suggestive effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the precursor effect.

By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor production that is the trigger for the start of the suggestive production is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor production is being executed (while the suggestive production is being executed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the effect mode of the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the suggestive effect as compared with the case where the suggestive effect is executed for the predetermined specific effect.

Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, as suggestive effects, there are a sign effect that roughly informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed, and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific performance is set after the suggestive performance is executed (during execution of the portent performance), the suggestive performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

<Control Processing Executed by Sound Lamp Control Device 113 in Another Example of Suggestion Effect>
Next, referring to FIGS. 189 and 190, control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in this example will be described. In this example, the countdown setting process 3 (FIG. 189) is used in place of the countdown setting process (see FIG. 152) in contrast to the first control example described above, and the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 139 S3107) is changed to the processing content of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 190). Other elements are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 189, the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in this example will be described. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810). As shown in FIG. 189, when the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as in the first control example described above are executed, and then the current variation pattern is set. Based on the variable time and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect), the effect mode of the predictive effect is set (S4351), the command for starting the predictive effect for display is set (S4352), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is ON in the process of S4301 (S4301: Yes), the multiple variation effect setting process is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above (S4321), and then this process is executed. finish.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the suggestive effect The start timing of the premonitory effect that serves as a start opportunity is set. As a result, the precursor effect is set without setting the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect.

In addition, in this additional example, it is configured to vary the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the omen effect) according to whether or not the special figure change of this time is a variation pattern that wins the jackpot. Other conditions may be used to set the trigger for the start of the suggestive production (timing to start the predictive production). ) may be set, or a plurality of suggestive performance start timings (starting timings of predictive performances) that can be set for one variation pattern are provided, and the plurality of suggestive performance start timings (starting timings of predictive performances) are provided. A lottery means for performing a lottery for determining the start timing of one suggestive performance (the start timing of the omen performance) may be provided and set based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Furthermore, the start timing of suggestive effect (start timing of predictive effect) may be set based on the contents of the operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 before the start of the current variation of the special symbol.

Furthermore, based on the currently set gaming state, the trigger for starting the suggestive effect (timing to start the prognostic effect) may be varied. Specifically, for example, if the currently set game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variable state), the sign A ( It is preferable to set a point with a short period from the start of fluctuation (see portent pattern A shown in FIG. 100(a)). As a result, in addition to the lottery result of the variation, the currently set game state can be suggested to the player according to the effect mode of the suggestive effect, so that the player is interested in the suggestive effect to be executed. can let In addition, as in the above-described second control example, the pachinko machine 10 having transition (fall) means for transitioning (falling) from the variable probability state most advantageous to the player to the time-saving state without the player noticing. In , since the effect is to suggest the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested.

In addition, as a method of setting the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the omen effect), when a variation pattern corresponding to super reach or special reach is set as the variation pattern, a predetermined timing from the start of variation (for example , 5 seconds later, and 10 seconds later), the timing for starting the suggestive effect (starting timing of the prognostic effect) may be set.

As in this additional example, when the suggestive effect is started when the suggestive effect end trigger (countdown effect end timing), that is, the specific effect start trigger (start timing) to be the target of the suggestive effect is not set. Since the effect period of the suggestion effect is not set, there is a problem that the effect mode of the precursor effect cannot be set based on the effect period that is set as in the first control example described above. be.

On the other hand, in this additional example, in the process of S4351, the effect mode of the predictive effect is set based on the change time of the change pattern to be executed this time and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect). It is configured to Specifically, when the current variation pattern is 60 seconds or more and the trigger for starting the suggestive effect (timing to start the predictive effect) is omen A, a long-term predictive effect is selected as the effect mode of the predictive effect. A long production mode (second route Dc2b in FIG. 98(a)) corresponding to the production is set, and in other cases, a short production mode (first route Dc2b in FIG. 98(a)) corresponding to a short-term precursor production is set. A route Dc1a) is set.

In this way, by roughly setting the effect mode of the precursor effect based on the period in which the suggestive effect can be executed (the effect executable period based on the start trigger of the suggestive effect and the fluctuation time of the variation), it will be set later. It is possible to set an effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the specific effect (the effect period of the suggestive effect).

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107) executed in this example will be described. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107), the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed based on the pressing operation to the frame button 22 which is executed while the precursor effect set in the process of FIG. 189 is being executed. Setting processing is performed.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051). ), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the processing of S5051 (S5051; Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the premonition effect period is currently in progress (S5071).

In the processing of S5071, if it is determined that the present is not during the premonition effect period (S5071: No), other processing related to frame button operation is executed (S5078), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5071, if it is determined that the present is during the precursor effect period (S5071: Yes), next, a specific effect corresponding to the content of pressing the frame button 22 is set (S5072).

Here, the processing of S5072 will be specifically described. In this additional example, when the omen effect is being executed (that is, when the display of FIG. 98(a) is displayed), the player presses the frame button 22 in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. An operation presentation to operate is executed. In this operation effect, an effect of varying the movement mode (moving speed and movement position) of the car-like character Dc1 displayed in the sub-display area Ds is executed as an indication effect based on the operation of the frame button 22. . Then, in the secondary display area Ds scrolled corresponding to the movement of the character Dc1, a specific effect suggestion mode for indicating the type of the specific effect set in the current suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific effect suggestion obtained by the character Dc1 is displayed. A specific effect corresponding to the mode is set.

Here, the specific effect suggestion mode displayed in the sub display area Ds during the precursor effect is a mode (for example, with the characters "PUSH" attached) that allows the player to grasp the content of the corresponding specific effect (for example, PUSH effect). displayed). Then, this specific effect display mode is set based on a specific effect (specific effect corresponding to the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery) that can be set in this special figure variation pattern. ), a specific effect display mode corresponding to the "cut-in effect" executed 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and the "PUSH display effect" executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is displayed. be done.

In this additional example, the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed are associated, but the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be set separately. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of specific performance display modes displayed in the operation performance executed during the precursor performance should be acquired to set the suggestive performance period longer. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is grasped by a person. Therefore, even after the end of the operation performance, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the entirety of the suggestive performance, so that the player can continue to enjoy the suggestive performance.

Further, it is also possible to set the execution timing of the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect display mode obtained during the operation effect based on the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result). good. As a result, it is possible for the player to select a desired specific effect, and to motivate the player to participate in the game. Even when such a configuration is used, the timing at which the specific effect selected by the player is executed is based on the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result) as described above. By setting, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance executed during the variation of the special symbols.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. After finishing the process of S5072, the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated (S5073). In the process of S5073, the start timing of the countdown effect (3 seconds in this additional example) is calculated by calculating backward from the execution timing of the specific effect set in the process of S5072, and the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated. calculate. That is, the period calculated in the process of S5073 can be lengthened by quickly operating the frame button 22 during the operation effect executed during the omen effect.

Next, it is determined whether the interval calculated in the processing of S5073 is within 15 seconds (S5074). The mode is set to the short presentation mode (S5075), and on the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S5074: No), the presentation mode of the premonition presentation currently being executed is changed to the long presentation. The mode is set (S5076).

That is, in this additional example, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, first, based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern of this time (variation time, jackpot lottery result), the production mode of the precursor production is roughly set (S4351 in FIG. 189). ), the precursor effect is executed in accordance with the set effect mode. Then, during the execution of the predictive effect, at the time when the specific effect to be the target of this suggestive effect is set, the predictive effect is performed based on the remaining period of the suggestive effect (remaining period of the predictive effect). It is configured so as to vary the mode of presentation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the suggestive effect without discomfort toward the specific effect that is executed during the variable display. In addition, since it is possible to change the display mode of the predictive effect based on the operation content during the operation effect, for example, it is easy to intentionally set the short effect mode as the predictive effect mode (the remaining period of the predictive effect is short). ) The frame button 22 is operated at the end of the operation performance, which is the timing, and you can enjoy whether or not the long performance mode is set (whether or not the current variation pattern is a long variation time), or conversely. A frame button 22 is operated at the beginning of the operation performance, which is the timing when the long performance mode is likely to be set intentionally as the portent performance mode (the remaining period of the portent performance is long), and the portent performance is executed in the long performance mode. can be enjoyed, and an effect can be executed according to the player's request.

After setting the portent effect mode in the process of S5075 or S5076, the countdown effect command for display corresponding to the set effect mode is set (S5077), the above-described process of S5078 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown production setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, the start timing of the suggestive production (the start timing of the omen production) only is set, and a specific effect to be the target of the current suggestive effect is set based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the omen effect.

By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor production that is the trigger for the start of the suggestive production is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor production is being executed (while the suggestive production is being executed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the effect mode of the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the suggestive effect as compared with the case where the suggestive effect is executed for the predetermined specific effect.

Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, as suggestive effects, there are a sign effect that roughly informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed, and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific performance is set after the suggestive performance is executed (during execution of the portent performance), the suggestive performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this additional example, since it is possible to variably set the effect mode of the precursor effect, which is a part of the suggestive effect (effect executed in the first half) in stages, the effect mode of the entire suggestive effect can be changed. It can be set without discomfort. In this additional example, the effect mode of the countdown effect executed as part of the suggestive effect (effect executed in the second half) is fixed (countdown display for 3 seconds), but it is not limited to this. The interval until the specific effect is executed at the timing (see S5073 in FIG. 190) at which the specific effect to be executed this time is set is determined (see S5074 in FIG. 190), and based on the determination result, the effect of the countdown effect It may be configured to set the period (eg, 3 seconds or 7 seconds).

Each of the configuration and technical idea described in the above-described first control example may be added to this additional example described above. You may provide the pachinko machine 10 which respectively has.

<Description when the various effects described in the first control example are used in the second control example>
Next, the contents when the contents of the first control example and the contents of the second control example are combined will be described. Specifically, based on the lottery result of the fall lottery or the preliminary determination result of the fall lottery that is pre-determined based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the first control described above is performed. A description will be given of the contents of setting the effect mode of the various effects described in the example.

In the first control example described above, in the effect setting process during the big hit (see S3302 in FIG. 143) for setting the effect during the big hit, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the entering ball information that wins the big hit in the reserved ball Continuous jackpot effects can be set by referring to the jackpot middle effect selection table 222c based on the determination result of whether or not there is a drop lottery. Alternatively, it is preferable to set the effect during the jackpot with reference to the pre-determined result of the falling lottery pre-determined based on the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Specifically, a second pre-determining means capable of determining by associating winning information for winning a jackpot and winning information for a falling lottery as look-ahead information in the order in which special symbol variations are executed is provided, and When it is determined as a result of discrimination that the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize information winning the jackpot is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize information winning the fall lottery is executed, continuous jackpot performance is set. It is better to configure it so that it does not. As a result, when the continuous jackpot performance is executed, the prize information retained and stored at that point in time does not include the prize winning information for winning the falling lottery. value can be increased.

Further, when it is determined by the second advance determination means that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning prize information winning the jackpot is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning prize information winning the falling lottery is executed, continuous It may be configured to set a jackpot effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the continuous jackpot performance without executing the fall suggestion performance suggesting that the player has won the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy due to the execution of the fall suggestion effect.

In addition, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the first rotation after the end of the jackpot among the look-ahead information at the time of winning the jackpot contains information indicating that the player wins the falling lottery, the winning information during the jackpot is determined. As an effect, it is preferable not to execute an effect suggesting that a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win. In other words, when the fall lottery is won at the start timing of the special symbol variation in the first rotation after the end of the big win, the player never receives the special symbol big win lottery in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player. In such a state, if an effect suggesting that a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win during the big win, the player will be given an excessive sense of expectation. It will be. When the above-described configuration is used, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation.

Next, in the above-described first control example, a continuous effect (battle effect) for informing the player of the period in which the game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is continuously set can be executed. , the production form of the continuous production (the production form of the production before the battle and the production form of the battle reach) is the lottery result of the special symbol this time, the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and The display mode of the continuous production (battle production) is set based on the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed during one advantageous state (during the variable probability state or the time saving state). In a game machine having a fall lottery configuration, the result of the fall lottery or the prior determination result of the fall lottery that is pre-determined based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also referred to. It is preferable to configure so as to set the effect mode of the continuous effect.

In each control example described above, the variation pattern (variation effect) is set at the timing when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. In other words, the setting of the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also configured to be executed at the variation start timing of the special symbols. In this case, since the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e) is subtracted by 1 in order to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the prize is won. There is a problem that the variation pattern (variation effect) cannot be set when the information (read-ahead information) stored in the information storage area 223a reaches the upper limit number.

In order to solve the above-described problem, as a configuration for setting the variation pattern (variation effect) by the sound lamp control device 113, regardless of the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is executed in common. A first variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is preferable to have a second variation pattern setting means for setting two variation patterns (for example, a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a win in the hold), and use the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, only the first variation pattern described above is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140).

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (prefetch information ), and executes a variable performance in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variable performance executed in the first variation pattern. By constructing in this way, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation performance) based on the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

Therefore, when the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a reaches the upper limit number, it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation effect) based on the look-ahead information. read-ahead effect) can be made easier to execute.

It should be noted that, by the second variation pattern setting means described above, the timing at which the process of setting the second variation pattern is executed, even if it is set after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the variation of the special symbol is started Alternatively, the setting timing of the second variation pattern may be varied in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means. By configuring in this way, the timing of setting the look-ahead effect can be changed according to the variation pattern to be executed, so that the player can be motivated to reserve the reserved balls.

Here, as the execution timing set corresponding to the first variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means, for example, a relatively long variation time (variation time of 60 seconds or more) as the first variation pattern When set, the setting timing of the second variation pattern is set 15 seconds after the start of variation, and when a relatively short variation time (variation time of 30 seconds) is set as the first variation pattern, the second variation It is preferable to set the pattern setting timing to 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

In addition, if the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second variation pattern setting means may not be executed. By constructing in this way, when a variable time period during which it is difficult to execute a look-ahead performance is set, the look-ahead performance is not added during the variation, and a performance that is difficult for a player to understand is executed. can be suppressed.

In addition, as a second variation pattern (prefetch effect) that can be set by the second variation pattern setting means, a short effect (for example, comment display notice) that is executed in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds) and a long period (for example, 20 seconds) and a long effect (for example, chance eye stop notice) can be set, the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), by configuring not to execute the second variation pattern setting means, the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is a predetermined period In the case of (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the second variation pattern (prefetch effect) can be easily executed by the second variation pattern setting means.

In addition, as described above, when configuring so as not to execute the second variation pattern setting means according to the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means, in the winning information storage area 223a Of the stored winning information, the winning information for which the second variation pattern setting means has already determined whether or not to set the second variation pattern and the winning information for which the second variation pattern has not been determined are identifiably stored. When the second variation pattern setting means is executed, whether or not the second variation pattern is already set by the second variation pattern setting means among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a It is preferable to perform the setting determination of the second variation pattern by excluding the winning information for which the determination has been performed.

Further, in addition to the above-described example, a prefetch effect execution command indicating that the second variation pattern (prefetch effect) set by the second variation pattern setting means is executed by the display control device 114 is sent from the display control device 114 by a voice lamp. If it is configured to output to the control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 has set the second variation pattern (prefetching effect), the prefetching effect execution command cannot be received (prefetching effect was not executed case), the second variation pattern setting means may be executed again for the same winning information in the next variation.

Storage means capable of storing (holding) a plurality of starting prizes (first entrance 64 or second entrance 140) of special symbols, and special symbols based on information (winning information) stored in the storage means. Before the lottery (variation) is executed (before the special symbol lottery conditions based on the winning information stored in the storage means are established), the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means In a gaming machine having a pre-determining means (pre-reading means) that determines in advance, when executing a variation effect (pre-reading effect) based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, in advance There is a configuration of providing an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the special symbol variation of this time based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to set the effect mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means as the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. and the determination result of prize winning information stored in the storage means, and the performance that makes the player interested can be executed. However, since the effect mode is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination result at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the effect mode is set in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means has not reached the upper limit number. I had a problem that I had to In other words, the timing of setting the effect mode is the timing of executing the variation of the special symbol using the oldest winning information (winning information used for the next special symbol variation) stored in the storage means (stored in the storage means (the timing when the winning information stored in the storage means is reduced by one), the presentation mode cannot be set in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit number, and the preliminary determination means There is a problem that the execution frequency of the variable effect (prefetching effect) based on the determination result is lowered.

Furthermore, in the configuration described above, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbols, the processing of determining the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means, and the processing of setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation of the special symbols. Therefore, there is a problem that the processing is concentrated in a short period of time and the processing load increases.

Further, as a configuration for executing a variable effect (prefetch effect) based on the determination result of the prior determination means, in addition to the above-described configuration, the above-described prior determination means based on the fact that new winning information is stored in the storage means There is also a game machine that executes a determination by and based on the determination result, performs an effect (prefetch effect) for showing a pre-determined result different from the variable display of the special symbol.

With such a configuration, since the prefetch effect can be executed at the timing when new winning information is stored in the storage means, the effect can be smoothly performed based on the determination result of the advance determination means. However, since the effect to be executed is an effect for indicating the determination result of the preliminary determination means, the effect indicating the determination result of the special symbol currently being executed and the display content overlap, and the player is not notified. However, there is a problem that the display becomes difficult to understand. Moreover, since control is performed to execute the look-ahead effect at the timing when new winning information is stored in the storage means, there is a problem that the processing load increases temporarily.

In order to solve the above-described problem, as a configuration for setting the variation pattern (variation effect) by the sound lamp control device 113, regardless of the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is executed in common. A first variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is preferable to have a second variation pattern setting means for setting two variation patterns (for example, a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a win in the hold), and use the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, only the first variation pattern described above is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140).

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (prefetch information ), and executes a variable performance in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variable performance executed in the first variation pattern. By constructing in this way, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation performance) based on the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

<Third control example>
Next, another control example of the continuation effect explained in the above-described first control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 90, the first control example described above is configured such that the battle production (pre-battle production and battle reach) is repeatedly executed during high probability (during variable probability state or during short working hours state). . In the control content of the first control example described above, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, a variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or more) that can execute battle reach, and a variation pattern that cannot execute battle reach (Variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds) may be selected continuously. In the above-described first control example, in order to prevent the player from losing interest in the production, a variation pattern that can execute Battle Reach (a deviation variation pattern in which the variation time is 60 seconds or more) is set within a predetermined period. When multiple selections are made (for example, within an interval in which the special symbol fluctuates six times), the battle reach is not executed for the latter fluctuation pattern, so that the battle reach is executed unnecessarily. Although it is configured to solve the problem of lowering the performance effect, the variation pattern that can execute the battle reach and the variation pattern that cannot execute the battle reach are randomly selected based on the lottery results of the special symbols. In the first control example to be selected, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, a variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds) that does not allow battle reach to be executed is continuously selected, resulting in a pre-battle production. However, the problem of long-term persistence remained.

Therefore, in the third control example, a continuous effect (battle effect) is configured to be executed during the variable probability state as the game state, and a special symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the variable probability state. As a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of variation, a variation pattern table in which pre-battle production is (easily performed) and a variation pattern table in which battle reach is (easily performed) are predetermined. It is configured to be used according to the rules (fluctuation scenario).

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, when the special symbol variation frequency is the predetermined number (for example, the 14th rotation after the end of the big win), the battle reach is always executed. can solve the problems mentioned above. Furthermore, in the third control example, the variable scenario used while the variable probability state is set is configured to be selected from a plurality of variable scenarios with different contents. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game even when using a configuration in which a variation pattern is selected in accordance with a predetermined variation scenario.

Furthermore, in the third control example, a plurality of types of jackpots are prepared for jackpots that provide the same value (contents of the jackpot game, game state set after the jackpot ends), and the selected jackpot type The variation pattern to be executed after the end of the jackpot is selected based on the variation scenario corresponding to. As a result, the variation scenario to be executed after the end of the big win can be set according to the type of the big win, so that the variation pattern in accordance with the variation scenario can be surely selected from the special pattern variation of the first rotation after the end of the big win. be able to.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 202. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the content of the ROM 202 and the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main control unit 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and voice lamp control The difference is that the content of the ROM 222 and the content of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 are partially changed, and the content of the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 is partially changed. are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 191(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 191(a), the ROM 202 in this control example has a variable scenario setting table 202ca added to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and the content of the first hit type selection table 202c is partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 192, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202c in the third control example will be described. FIG. 192 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202c in the third control example. The detailed description of the same elements as those of the first win type selection table 202c used in the first control example described above will be omitted.

In the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example, the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot K) corresponding to the contents of the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed. Subdivided jackpot types (jackpots Aa to Aj) are defined. Specifically, among the values of the first winning type counter C2 "0 to 19" that are defined in association with the "jackpot A", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0, 1" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot Aa", in the range of "2, 3" is defined in association with "jackpot Ab", and in the range of "4, 5", "jackpot Ac” is defined in correspondence, the range of “6, 7” corresponds to “jackpot Ad”, and the range of “8, 9” corresponds to “jackpot Ae”. The range of "10, 11" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot Af", and the range of "12, 13" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot Ag". The range of "14, 15" is defined in association with "jackpot Ah", and the range of "16, 17" is defined in association with "jackpot Ai". 18, 19” is defined in association with “jackpot Aj”.

That is, in the third control example, 10 kinds of random numbers for 20 random numbers for which "jackpot A" is selected out of 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot types (jackpots Aa to jackpots Aj) are defined to be evenly distributed, and the selection rate of each jackpot type (jackets Aa to jackpot Aj) is set to 1%.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third control example, when any one of "jackpot Aa" to "jackpot Aj" is selected, the jackpot game (15 rounds) defined in "jackpot A" game) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a game state defined as "jackpot A" is set. Then, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbols executed after the end of the big win game is configured to be different depending on the selected big win type (big win Aa to big win Aj). .

By configuring in this way, when a specific jackpot game is set, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game ends can be varied, so that for example, the jackpot type is "jackpot Aa". Selection of ``big win Aj'' makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a shorter variation time as a variation pattern of special pattern variation to be executed after the end of the big win game than when is selected. That is, even if the same game state is set for the same jackpot game content, the number of fluctuations per unit time in the special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot game is finished can be varied depending on the jackpot type. A player who wants to win the next big win as soon as possible can have expectations for the winning big win type until the timing when the special pattern variation is executed after the end of the big win game.

Similarly to the above-described "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "jackpot G", and "jackpot I" defined in the first win type selection table 202c, that is, a high probability after the jackpot game ends State and time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as probability variable state) are given to the jackpot types, and it is defined that "a to j", which are small classifications of each jackpot type, are evenly allocated. On the other hand, "jackpot C", "jackpot H", "jackpot J", "jackpot K", that is, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state and the time saving state are not given (the low probability state and the time saving state are given ) For the jackpot type, a common fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game is completed without defining the small classification (a to j) of the jackpot type. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(a), the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example will be described. FIG. 193(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 193 (a), in this third control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is deleted from the first control example, and the big hit (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1, for the first deviation The difference is that a (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc2, a second outlier (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3, and a special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 are added.

Here, with reference to FIG. 193(b), the (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 for big hits will be described. FIG. 193(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc1. This big hit (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 is a variation pattern table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the game state is the probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 193(b), it is configured to select one of the variation patterns with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 179" in association with a variation pattern (various types of super reach) with a variation time of 60 seconds, and "180 to 198" The range is defined in association with a variation pattern (various types of special reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds. In this third control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the voice ramp control device 113 executes a battle reach (winning battle) in which three attacks are performed (see FIG. 94). When the variation pattern of 90 seconds is selected, a battle reach (victory battle) is executed in which a resurrection effect is performed after three attacks are performed (see FIG. 96).

Next, referring to FIG. 193(c), the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2 will be described. FIG. 193(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc2. This first loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a loss. One.

As shown in FIG. 193(c), in the first outlier (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, the variation pattern with a short variation time (eg, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) is the variation pattern with a long variation time (eg, 60 seconds). It is configured to be more easily selected than the variation pattern. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" in association with a variation pattern (short deviation a) with a variation time of 3 seconds, and "150 to 197" The range is defined in association with a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation b), and "198" is defined in association with a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a). It is

That is, in the first outlier (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, among 199 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the variation type counter C1, for 198 random values (range of "0 to 197") , a short deviation (short deviation a, short deviation b), which is a variation pattern with a short variation time, is defined, and for the remaining one random value (“198”), a long deviation pattern, which is a variation pattern with a long Since the deviation (long deviation a) is defined, in most cases (about 99.5%) when selecting a variation pattern with reference to the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, the variation time is short A variation pattern is selected.

In the third control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds (short deviation a) or a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation b) is selected, the sound ramp control device 113 performs a pre-battle effect (Fig. 91, see FIG. 92) are executed, and when "short loss b" is selected, an attack effect (see FIG. 92) for increasing or decreasing the opponent's continuous value (HP value) is executed. It should be noted that, when the "short out a" is selected, without executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent, A production for switching the characters of is executed. Further, when "Long-out a" is selected, a battle reach (a draw battle) is executed in which three attacks are performed (see FIG. 94).

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(d), the contents of the second deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc3 will be described. FIG. 193(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc3. This second loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a loss. There is one, and as shown in FIG. 193(d), any variation pattern is selected from among variation patterns with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds.

Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 197" in association with a fluctuation pattern (long deviation a) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and "198" A variation pattern (long deviation b) with a variation time of 90 seconds is associated and defined.

FIG. 193(e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc4. This special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the jackpot gaming state is a probability variation state. A variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is configured to be selected. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (ultra-short deviation) corresponds to the entire range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 198”). If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the entire range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 198”), and the variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (ultra-short hit) are defined in association with each other.

Returning to FIG. 191(a), the description is continued. The variation scenario setting table 202ca defines the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)), which is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, in correspondence with the number of variations of the special symbol. It is defined in association with the jackpot type. This variation scenario setting table 202ca, in the jackpot control process executed by the main controller 110 (see S1104 in FIG. 137), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production, that is, the jackpot game end timing (FIG. 137 S1211: Yes), reference is made to set a variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time, and the variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

Here, the contents of the variation scenarios defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. FIG. 194(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable scenario setting table 202ca. This variation scenario setting table 202ca, as shown in FIG. 194(a), corresponds to each variation scenario (variation Scenarios 1 to 11) are defined.

That is, in the third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the big win (special symbol variation executed after the big win ends) according to the jackpot type won and the gaming state when the big win was won. ) can be varied. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, in addition to the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game, the variation pattern set after the jackpot game can also be made different. Interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 194(a), the variable scenario set after the end of the big win is configured to differ depending on the gaming state when the big win is won. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is no time saving state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state common), any jackpot type (small classification of jackpot type (a to j)) Even if is set, a common variation scenario (variation scenario 1) is set, and if the game state when winning the jackpot is in a time-saving state (special symbol high probability state, low probability state common) , It is configured to set a variation scenario (variation scenarios 2 to 11) corresponding to the set jackpot type (small classification (a to j) of the jackpot type).

By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol variations per unit time is greater in the case of winning the jackpot (probable variable jackpot) in the time saving state than in the case of winning the jackpot (variable probability jackpot) in the state without time saving. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to make the player more conscious of the game state when winning the jackpot, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this third control example, when the jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is elected in the state with time saving, rather than the variation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when the jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is won in the state without time saving Each variation scenario is configured so that the set variation scenario (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) has more special symbol variations per unit time, but not limited to this, for example, no time reduction Each variation scenario may be configured so that the number of times of special symbol variation per unit time increases when a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is won in the state. By configuring in this way, for example, in the production mode that can be set only when winning the probability variable jackpot in the time saving state, it is possible to run the privilege video for a long time.

In addition, some of the variable scenarios (variable scenarios 2 to 11) that are set when the jackpot (variable jackpot) is won in a time-saving state are converted to jackpots (variable jackpots) in a time-saving state. It may be set so that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is less than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when winning, or when winning a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) without time saving. , It may be configured such that a plurality of variation scenarios are set based on the jackpot type (small classification (a to j) of the jackpot type).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 194(b) to 196(d), the contents of each variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be described. FIG. 194(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 1. As shown in FIG. First, the contents defined in the variable scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 194(b). The variation scenario is referred to when selecting the number of variations of special symbols executed after the end of the jackpot game (that is, one special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game becomes the number of variations 1) and the variation pattern of the variation. is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern table.

Further, in the third control example, as described above, when the jackpot type in which the variable probability state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the corresponding variable scenario is set by the variable scenario setting table 202ca, and the variable scenario is set. It is configured so that the variation pattern is selected according to the contents specified in .

As shown in FIG. 194 (b), in variation scenario 1, table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined as a variation pattern table to be referred to when the number of variations is "1 to 4", and the number of variations A table B (outlier (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined as a variation pattern to be referred to when is "5-".

This variation scenario 1, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), is set when all the jackpots to which the jackpot type (small classification) is given are won in a state where the time saving state is not given as the gaming state. be done. When the variation scenario 1 is set, the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 (table A) (see FIG. 193 (e)) is used during the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big hit, and the special symbol A variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the lottery.

Then, after the 5th round of special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (table B) (see FIG. 108 (d)) is used, and the variation time is 7 seconds to 90 seconds. A variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type CS1. Since the variation scenario 1 is a scenario that is set when the game state is a variable probability state, if a special symbol jackpot is won in a state in which the variation scenario 1 is set, as described above, A variation pattern is selected using the (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc1.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 194(c). As shown in FIG. 194 (c), in the variation scenario 2, the number of variations is in the range of "1 to 4", similar to the above-described variation scenario 1, the table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is associated. table C (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of "5 to 13" for the number of fluctuations, and table D (for the second deviation ( A probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "199", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is associated with nine fluctuations, and the table D (second A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association. In other words, during the period of "5 to 199" after the end of the jackpot, the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table C is executed 9 times, and then the variation pattern is selected using the table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

By configuring in this way, in the battle production executed during the period in which the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the special symbol variation in which the pre-battle production is executed (short out (short out a , special symbol variation in which short out b) is selected) and special symbol variation in which battle reach is executed (special symbol variation in which long out (long out a, long out b) is selected using table D) , can be set in advance, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the pre-battle effect toward the special symbol variation in which the battle ready-to-win is executed.

Further, in the third control example, when selecting a variation pattern using the table C, it is configured such that a slightly long deviation a (60 seconds deviation variation) is selected. As a result, when a variable scenario is set in advance, the battle reach can be executed at an unexpected timing. As a result, when the battle ready-to-win is executed at an unexpected timing (that is, when a variable time (60 seconds or more variable time) that allows the battle ready-to-reach is selected), the player will receive a big hit. A game can be played while expecting that the player has won the lottery.

In addition, as described above, by setting a variable scenario and making it possible to set in advance the period during which the pre-battle effect and the battle ready-to-win are executed, a long period of time (for example, suspension It is possible to set the production mode of the pre-battle production during the period in which the number of special symbol variations greater than the upper limit of memory is executed), but every time the battle production is executed, the same variation scenario is set every time. There is a problem that the player gets tired of the battle production itself if the production based on the game is executed.

In order to solve such a problem, in the third control example, the jackpot game content (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot ends are the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A"). , a plurality of jackpot types (for example, "jackpot Aa" to "jackpot Aj") are provided in which different fluctuation scenarios are defined, so that the player cannot easily grasp the contents of the fluctuation scenario during the battle production. Configure.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the demerit of scenario creation (monotonous presentation) while having the advantage of creating a scenario of variation patterns (providing a long-term presentation that does not make the player feel uncomfortable). In addition, since the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot is the same for the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A"), a plurality of variable scenarios are configured, To make it difficult for a player to grasp in which variation scenario the special figure variation is executed after the end of the big win even when the player comprehends the game contents of the big win and the game state set after the end of the big win. . Therefore, when the battle reach is executed, it is difficult to understand whether it is a predetermined battle reach (a draw battle) based on a variable scenario or a battle reach (a battle of victory or defeat) based on winning a jackpot. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, for all of the "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "jackpot G", and "jackpot I", the jackpot types given "a to j" are defined. However, the type of jackpot defined for each jackpot may be different. For example, when a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot A" is executed, a specific variation scenario (for example, a variation scenario It may be configured such that only 2) can be set. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing for a long time to grasp the relationship between the game content of the big win and the variable scenario. Therefore, when a battle ready-to-win is executed at a timing different from usual after a specific big winning game (for example, a big winning game corresponding to "big winning A") is finished, expectations for a big winning can be heightened.

Then, a table B (loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in association with the range of the number of variations of the special symbol "200-". By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability variable state continues until the next big win like this control example, it is not necessary to create variable scenarios infinitely, so that the data capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced. can be done. It should be noted that, in this third control example, for the special symbol jackpot probability (approximately 1/48 (see FIG. 106 (a)) in the variable probability state, variation reached when a lottery with a probability of 4 times or more is executed When the number of times "200" is exceeded, the table B (loss (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3) is executed. ) The variation pattern table 202d3) may be executed, for example, when the number of variations reaches “500” when a lottery with a probability of 10 times or more of the jackpot is executed, the table B is used. It is also possible to configure such that selection of the variation pattern is executed.

In addition, in the third control example, when the number of fluctuations "200", which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is exceeded, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed. A table may be used, for example, the selection of a variation pattern using Table A may be configured to be executed until the next jackpot is won, or the number of variations from "200", which is the upper limit of the variation scenario. Selection of the variation pattern using the table A is performed during the period of the number of times "399", and when the number of variations exceeds "400", selection of the variation pattern using the table B is performed until the next jackpot is won. It may be configured as follows.

As described above, in the third control example, the battle effect is executed based on the variation scenario for the special symbol variation within the range of the number of lotteries that can normally win the jackpot. However, when the upper limit of the variation scenario (the number of variations "200") is exceeded, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to execute an effect other than the battle effect. In this case, it is preferable to perform a privilege effect such as providing video and audio that the player cannot normally see, or awarding the points collected by the player. As a result, it is possible to give a special privilege to a player who has not been able to win a big prize for a long period of time. In addition, in the third control example, the above-described privilege effect is executed using a variation pattern different from the variation pattern corresponding to the variation scenario set to smoothly execute the battle effect executed during the variable probability state. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the privilege presentation.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 194(d). FIG. 194(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variation scenario 3. As shown in FIG. This variation scenario 3 is configured such that the period in which the variation pattern is selected using the tables C and D is different from the above-described variation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194(c)). Specifically, in fluctuation scenario 3, the number of fluctuations is defined in the range of "1 to 4" in association with table A (special (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) similar to fluctuation scenario 2 described above, and the number of fluctuations Table C (first outlier (probable variable) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of "5 to 9", and table D (second outlier (probable variable) variation pattern table when the number of fluctuations is "10" 202dc3) is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "190", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is associated with five fluctuations, and the table D (second A deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association. In other words, during the period of "5 to 190" after the end of the jackpot, the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table C is executed 5 times, and then the variation pattern is selected using the table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the change scenario is executed can be varied depending on the type of the set change scenario. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a victory battle or a defeat battle), and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Then, as in the above-described variation scenario 2, the table C (first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of variations "190 to 198", and when the number of variations is "199" Table D (second deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined, and table B (loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in the range of the number of variations "200-".

In this way, the period of the pre-battle production corresponding to the last battle reach (the battle reach executed when the number of fluctuations is "199") (the period when the number of fluctuations is "190 to 198") regardless of the jackpot type By unifying, it is possible to easily unify the performance contents to be executed regardless of which jackpot type is set. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to prepare for each jackpot type a production that suggests to the player that the battle production is over (a production that makes the production mode before the battle or the battle reach different from the usual), so the capacity of the production data can be reduced. can be reduced.

It should be noted that there is no need to unify the effects that suggest to the player that the battle effects will end (the effects that make the effects before the battle and the effects of the battle reach different from normal) for all the jackpot types, and at least two The variable scenario must be configured so that the production that suggests to the player that the battle production will end for each of the two jackpot types (the production before the battle and the production that makes the battle reach production mode different from the usual) is unified. , the capacity of performance data can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 4. FIG. In this variation scenario 4, the same contents as the above-described variation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194 (c)) are defined in the period from "1 to 14" for the number of times of variation, and the contents defined after that is configured to be different from the variation scenario 2. In this way, a plurality of variable scenarios define the same content for a predetermined period after the end of the big win, and change the content after the predetermined period. It can make it more obscure what the volatility scenario is.

FIG. 195(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of variation scenario 5. As shown in FIG. This variation scenario 5 is different from the variation scenarios 2 to 4 in that the variation pattern is selected using the table D after the variation number "1 to 4" in which the variation pattern is selected using the table A. is executed. That is, the battle reach (tie battle) is executed without executing the pre-battle production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of incongruity with respect to the battle presentation as compared with the case where other variable scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win for the battle ready-to-win that is executed immediately after the start of the battle production. Since other contents are the same as those of the above-described fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 195(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the change scenario 6. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 195(c), this variation scenario 6 does not have a period in which a variation pattern is selected using table A, and a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using table D. is set continuously, which is different from other variable scenarios. Other elements are the same as those in the above-described fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, for the above-described variation scenario 6, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the variation scenario, the variation pattern table defined in the variation scenario is made the same, and each variation pattern table is associated with the same variation pattern table. A variation scenario 7 (see FIG. 195(d)) in which only the number of times of variation is different is provided. As a result, even if a variation pattern is selected using the table C after the end of the big win (that is, when the battle effect is started immediately after the end of the big win), the currently set variation is applied to the player. It can obfuscate what the scenario is.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 8 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(a). FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of variation scenario 8. FIG. Variation scenario 8, as shown in FIG. 196(a), is different from the variation scenarios 1 to 7 described above in that the period in which the variation pattern is selected using table A is set longer. . Specifically, the table A is defined in association with the range of "1 to 10" for the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period for selecting a variation pattern using the table A in which a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. jackpot can be provided in a short period of time.

Also, during the period defined in association with this table A, the third symbol display device 81 displays the same display as the extended display of the first control example, that is, the ending screen showing the end of the jackpot game. configured to be displayed. As a result, a series of jackpot effects can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games.

Next, variation scenario 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(b). FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 9. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 196(b), this variation scenario 9 is different from the other variation scenarios in that the variation pattern table initially defined after the end of the jackpot is changed from table A to table B. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that the variable probability state is not set as the game state after the end of the big win. After that, when the period defined in association with table B (the period of the number of fluctuations "1 to 4") passes, the fluctuation pattern using table C and table D will be selected in the same way as other fluctuation scenarios. , and since the battle performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the selected variation pattern, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance.

FIG. 196(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 196(c), variation scenario 10 is different from other variation scenarios in that the period for selecting a variation pattern using table D is not set. That is, in this variation scenario 10, since the variation pattern is not selected using the table D during the period in which the battle effect is executed, a predetermined battle reach (tie battle) based on the variation scenario is executed. never be done.

In this variation scenario 10, when the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 when selecting the variation pattern using the table C is "198" and the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is selected Alternatively, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected using the (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 for the big win, the battle reach is executed. . Therefore, when this variable scenario 10 is set, the probability of winning a jackpot when battle reach is executed can be made higher than when other variable scenarios are set.

In addition, in the third control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, and the probability variable big win in which the probability variable state is given as the game state after the big win, and the big win As a game state after the end, there is a normal jackpot in which a normal state is given, and in the battle reach executed during the battle production, a winning battle is executed when the probability variable jackpot is won, and the normal jackpot is won. In this case, a losing battle is executed, and a draw battle is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out.

In other words, when this variable scenario 10 is set, the frequency of execution of draw battles can be reduced compared to when other variable scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the effect when the battle ready-to-win is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Note that if a variable scenario is set without using the table D like the variable scenario 10, there is a risk that the pre-battle effect will be executed for a long period of time. It is preferable to use a table (table C2) that can select a variation pattern with a shorter variation time (for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 to 1 second) than a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 to 5 seconds. . As a result, the period during which the pre-battle effect is continuously executed can be shortened.

Next, variation scenario 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(d). FIG. 196(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 11. FIG. In this variation scenario 11, as shown in FIG. 196(d), the variation pattern table specified first after the end of the big win is the table C, and after a predetermined period of time has passed after the end of the big win (the special symbol changes 249 times It is different from the other fluctuation scenarios in that Table A is defined in 1) and that the upper limit number of fluctuation scenarios is set to "400".

According to the variation scenario 11, as with the variation scenario 10 described above, there is no period in which the variation pattern is selected using the table D, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be won when the battle reach is executed. (the possibility that a winning or losing battle will be executed) can be increased, and the player can be made to pay attention to the contents of the battle ready-to-win production.

In addition, when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot exceeds a predetermined number (399 times), the table A, which has the highest number of fluctuations per unit time, is set as a game state. Dissatisfaction felt by the player when the period during which the jackpot is not won continues for a long period of time (for example, the period during which the special symbol variation is performed ten times as many times as the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability). Feelings can be suppressed.

As described above, in the third control example, a plurality (10 types) of variation scenarios can be set for the same jackpot type in which the same jackpot is executed, and battle reach (draw) based on the variation scenario Battle) and battle reach (victory or defeat battle) based on winning a special pattern jackpot are difficult to understand, but the type of change scenario is not limited to this, and there are more types. A variable scenario may be configured to be settable.

In addition, in the third control example, a variable scenario is determined for all periods during which the battle effect is executed, and the content of the battle effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) can be determined in advance. Only a part of the period during which the battle production is performed (for example, the period between the end of the jackpot and the execution of 50 special symbol fluctuations, or the period of 10 special symbol fluctuations calculated backward from the timing at which the battle production ends) It may be configured to define a variable scenario.

In the third control example, a configuration is used to set the variation scenario of the special symbol variation based on the winning jackpot type. Although the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure, the variable scenario may be set (variable) in the case of a lottery result (so-called small win) that gives a small amount of benefits to the player rather than the big win. Alternatively, the falling lottery means used in the second control example described above may be configured to set (variable) a variation scenario when the falling is won. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern fluctuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), a means for performing a lottery for varying the fluctuation scenario is provided, and the fluctuation scenario is set (variable) based on the lottery result. It may be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 191(b), the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 used in the third control example will be described. FIG. 191(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 191(b), the RAM 203 of the third control example differs from the RAM 203 of the first control example in that a variable scenario storage area 203ca is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The variable scenario storage area 203ca is an area for storing variable scenarios set using the variable scenario setting table 202ca. In this third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. In this variation scenario storage area 203ca, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a variation scenario corresponding to the winning jackpot type is stored, and variation frequency subtraction processing 4 ( (see S452 in FIG. 204). In this way, after the jackpot is won (after the process of starting the variation of the special symbols to indicate that the jackpot has been won), until the special symbol variation after the jackpot is completed. Since the variation scenario is stored in between, the variation pattern of the special symbol to be executed after the end of the big win can be reliably selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 197(a), the ROM 222 of the third control example has the continued value main selection table 222f and the continued value sub-selection table 222g deleted from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. A point, a change scenario storage area 222ca, a first continuous value main selection table 222cb, a second continuous value main selection table 222cc, a third continuous value main selection table 222cd, and a continuous effect mode selection 2 table 222ce. The difference is that they are added. Note that the third control example shows a modification of the continuation effect (battle effect) of the first control example described above. Descriptions of elements that are not related to the production are omitted, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the other elements, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The variable scenario storage area 222ca is an area in which information indicating the contents of a plurality of variable scenarios defined in the variable scenario setting table 202ca of the main controller 110 is stored, and output from the main controller 110. Based on a command for indicating the setting status of the variation scenario (for example, a command for indicating the type of jackpot or a command for indicating the set variation scenario), the voice lamp control device 113 side updates the variation scenario. Information used for management is stored.

This variable scenario storage area 222ca is stored when it is determined in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) of the sound lamp control device 113 that a state command including related information related to the variable scenario has been received (S3271 in FIG. 205: Yes ), the variable scenario corresponding to the received command is read and set in the variable scenario update area 223ca (see S3272 in FIG. 205).

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to synchronize the variation scenario set by the main controller 110 and the variation scenario managed by the audio lamp control device 113, the variation pattern selected in the future by the main controller 110 (Variation pattern selected based on the set variation scenario) can be grasped in advance on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a long-term effect without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, the contents of a plurality of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are determined, and based on the determination result, specific winning information (for example, the third winning information is Winning information in which special symbol variation is executed), long term using the variation period of special symbol variation (special symbol variation performed first and second among winning information) performed before that However, if, for example, a plurality of pieces of winning information are not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it becomes difficult to execute long-term effects. At the same time, the maximum value of the range in which long-term performance can be executed is the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation corresponding to the maximum number of winning information that can be stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so there is a problem that the performance period is limited. was there.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) is scenario managed, and the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) to be executed in the future can be easily discriminated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom for long-term production.

In addition, in the third control example, since the sound lamp control device 113 has the variable scenario storage area 222ca, it is not necessary for the main controller 110 to output all the contents of the variable scenario to be set. Information for indicating the variation scenario (for example, information indicating the winning jackpot type, identification information that can specify the variation scenario to be set from among a plurality of variation scenarios) may be output, so the main controller 110 The amount of data to be output can be reduced.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in this third control example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted (when power failure occurs), when the power supply is restored, the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 immediately before the power supply is interrupted (or after the power supply is interrupted until the processing of the main controller 110 is stopped). In the information for indicating the gaming state output in the restoration process, at least the type of jackpot that was previously won and the type of jackpot that is currently set as information for indicating the currently set variation scenario. Information for indicating any of the variation scenarios, information for indicating any of the update status of the currently set variation scenario, and the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the previous jackpot is completed, and It is configured so that As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the game, after the restoration, the update contents of the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 and the variation managed by the sound lamp control device 113 It can be easily synchronized with the update contents of the scenario.

In this case, a predetermined period after the update management process of the variation scenario by the audio lamp control device 113 is restored based on the information output from the main control device 110 as the recovery processing (for example, the special symbol is changed multiple times (five times) and the period until the variation pattern table specified in the variation scenario is switched) are managed by the update contents of the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. It is good to use it as a confirmation period for determining whether the update contents of the fluctuation scenario have been correctly updated. As a result, it is possible to more accurately restore the update management process of the variable scenario. It should be noted that during the confirmation period described above, to indicate that the variation production corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 and the recovery is in progress without being based on the variation scenario. It is preferable to configure so that the recovery display of is executed. As a result, since the third symbol display device 81 can display the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The first continuation value main selection table 222cb is a table that is referred to when updating the continuation value (HP value) when the continuation effect (battle effect) is being executed. period (remaining period) is a predetermined period or more (for example, when the number of special symbol variations until the special symbol variations corresponding to battle reach are executed is 4 or more), it is a table to be referred to.

Here, the method of setting the continuation value in the third control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-described first control example. The first control example described above sets the main continuation value for updating the continuation value in the sound lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. by referring to the corresponding table, calculating a total value by adding the set main continuation value and the sub continuation value, and issuing an information command for indicating the total value to the display control device 114, in the third control example, only the value of the main continuation value is set by the sound ramp control device 113, and the main continuation value set by the sound ramp control device 113 is indicated. An information command including information for is output to the display control device 114, and based on the information command received by the display control device 114 side, a secondary continuation value is set and a total value is calculated.

That is, in the third control example, when the continuation value is repeatedly increased or decreased, only the main continuation value, which is the value to be managed in order to correspond to the lottery result of the special symbols and the variation scenario, is selected by the sound lamp control device 113. , and all other processes are executed by the display control device 114 . As a result, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be greatly reduced.

The contents of the first continuous value main selection table 222cb will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first continuous value main selection table 222cb. In the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, the ratio of the selected value (main continuation value) to the value (main continuation value) stored in the current continuation value (continuation value storage area 223n) is different. is stipulated to be

It should be noted that this selection ratio is set by allocating each value to a range (for example, 0 to 199) that can be taken by a dedicated effect counter (not shown). In addition, the first continuation value main selection table 222cb defines the lower limit of selectable selection values to be "400". As described above, in the first continuous value main selection table 222cb, when the value of the remaining number counter is 4 or more, that is, at least four special symbol This is because the table is used when it is necessary to perform a change, so that an unnecessarily low selection value is set and the progress of the continuous value increase/decrease effect is prevented from being delayed. As a result, when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb becomes 3 or less, ie, when battle ready-to-win is about to start, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value can be performed without discomfort.

To explain the contents shown in FIG. 198, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "1000", the rate at which "1000" is selected as the selection value (main continuous value) to be selected. is 5%, "900" is selected by 50%, "800" is selected by 30%, "700" is selected by 10%, and "600" is selected by 3 %, and the rate at which "500" is selected is defined as 2%.

Here, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the increase/decrease of the continuation value (main continuation value) will be described. In the third control example, an effect corresponding to an increase or decrease in the total value obtained by summing the main continuation value selected by the sound lamp control device 113 and the secondary continuation value selected by the display control device 114 is executed. . Since the effect to be executed is configured such that the secondary continuation value is selected so that the range of increase/decrease of the main continuation value and the range of increase/decrease of the total value are the same as in the first control example described above, Substantially, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the selection value (main continuation value) selected using the first continuation value main selection table 222cb.

Specifically, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selected value is "1000", a "check-in" effect is executed to prevent the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen from increasing or decreasing. be done. Note that when a selection value that does not decrease the main continuation value is selected in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, a command to that effect is output to the display control device 114, and when that command is received, The display control device 114 is configured so that the secondary continuation value is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the secondary continuation value is selected even though the main continuation value does not decrease, and the displayed continuation value (HP value) increases or decreases.

Next, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "900" to "500", an "attack" presentation is executed to decrease the opponent's continuation value (HP value). The detailed effect mode of this "attack" effect is set by the difference value between the current main continuation value and the selected value. In the case of 300, "strong attack" is set, in the case of 400, "strong attack" is set, and in the case of 500, "strongest attack" is set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to predict the extent of decrease in the continuation value (HP value) according to the content of the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can be of interest.

Similarly, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "900", the rate of selecting "900" as the selection value (main continuous value) to be selected is 10%, and "800" is selected as 50%, "700" is selected as 30%, "600" is selected as 5%, and "500" is selected as 5%. When the value stored in the storage area 223n is "800", the rate of selecting "800" as the selection value (main continuation value) to be selected is 20%, and the rate of selecting "700". is 50%, "600" is selected at 20%, and "500" is selected at 10%.

Further, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "700", the rate of selecting "900" as the selection value (main continuous value) to be selected is 10%, and "700" is The percentage of selection is 30%, the percentage of selection of "600" is 40%, the percentage of selection of "500" is 20%, and the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "600". , the rate of selecting "800" is 10%, the rate of selecting "600" is 40%, and the rate of selecting "500" is 40%. If the stored value is "500", the percentage of "900" selected is 10%, the percentage of "700" selected is 10%, and the percentage of "500" selected is 80%. When the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "400", the rate of selecting "900" is 30%, the rate of selecting "700" is 20%, and the rate of selecting "500" is The percentage of selection is defined as 10%, and the percentage of selection of "400" is defined as 40%.

As described above, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "700" to "400", the selected value may be higher than the current continuous value. In this case, as an effect executed on the display screen, a "recovery" effect is executed in which the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent increases. By executing this recovery effect, when the continuous value (HP value) decreases unexpectedly, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value) can be continuously executed again.

As described above, the first continuous value main selection table 222cb, which is used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 4 or more, shows the rate at which the effect (weak attack) that gradually decreases the main continuous value is selected. is set higher than the rate at which other effects are selected. As a result, even when the pre-battle effect is executed over a long period of time, the continuous value increase/decrease effect can be advanced. Also, even if the percentage of "weak attacks" selected is set high, similar to the first control example described above, the effect mode executed on the display screen is varied in accordance with the selected secondary continuation value. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentation modes, and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description continues. The second continuous value main selection table 222cc is used when selecting the effect mode of pre-battle effect when the pending win flag 223cc is set to ON, that is, when the special symbol fluctuates several times and then the big win is achieved. table used. Next, referring to FIG. 199, the contents of the second continuous value main selection table 222cc will be described. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second continuous value main selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 199, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc has "777", "333", The difference is that "300" to "0" are added. Differences from the first continuous value main selection table 222cb will be mainly described below. Among the contents defined in the second continuous value main selection table 222cc, the detailed description of elements that are the same as those in the first continuous value main selection table 222cb or that differ only in selection ratio will be omitted. .

The second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured so that '777' and '333' can be selected as the main continuation value in order to inform in advance that winning information corresponding to a big win exists in the reserve. there is When "777" or "333" is selected as the selection value, a dedicated command indicating this is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, the display control device 114 performs secondary continuation. Configured so that no value selection occurs. As a result, the secondary continuation value is selected even though the main continuation value for indicating the winning of the jackpot is selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, and the displayed continuation value (HP value) can be prevented from increasing or decreasing.

In addition, in the third control example, when a main continuation value for indicating winning of a jackpot is selected, by prohibiting the selection of a secondary continuation value, Although the values ("777", "333") are configured to be able to be notified, other configurations may be used, and when a command regarding the main continuation value for indicating that the jackpot is won is received Then, the display control device 114 is configured to select a secondary continuation value using a dedicated selection table, and when the value (secondary continuation value) selected using the dedicated selection table is "0", Only "777" and "333" may be displayed as continuous values (HP values) on the display screen. In this case, for example, if the main continuation value is "777", the value obtained by adding "23" and "13", or "7" and "17" can be taken by the dedicated selection table described above. is preferably configured so that the value from which is subtracted can be selected. With this configuration, when a value other than "0" is selected as the secondary continuation value, the value of the last digit of the continuation value (HP value) can be set to "0". It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that '777' is selected as the continuous value, and the added value of displaying the continuous value (HP value) for indicating the winning of the jackpot on the display screen. can increase

Further, unlike the first continuous value main selection table 222cb, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc is configured so that selection values from "300" to "0" can be selected. As a result, when the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen in the pre-battle effect becomes less than "300", the player can predict that the battle ready-to-win will be executed soon. . Although the details will be described later, the third continuation value main selection table 222cd (a table used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less) also has "300" to "0" as the selection value, and the second It is configured to be selectable at a selection rate lower than that of the continuous value main selection table 222cc. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of expectation for the big win.

In addition, in FIG. 199, multiple values such as "1000 to 800" are collectively described as the current continuation value and selection value, but in reality, "1000", "900", and "800" have independent contents. are specified, and since the content specified for each is the same, multiple values are listed together.

In addition, in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, a value of "1000 to 800" is selected as a value to be selected when the resurrection effect is executed, regardless of the value of the main continuation value currently set. Set a high percentage. This is because the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured so that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuation values to indicate that a jackpot will be won, and the continuation value (HP value) is restored. In the pre-battle production after the game, the continuation value (HP value) is increased to a range in which the main continuation value indicating that the player will win the big win can be selected, so that the player is encouraged to win the big win again. The game can be played with the expectation that the main continuation value will be selected to indicate.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description continues. The third continuous value main selection table 222cd is for when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less, that is, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the Battle Reach is executed, which is set based on the fluctuation scenario, is 3 or less. This is a table used when selecting an effect mode of pre-battle effect. Next, referring to FIG. 200, the third continuous value main selection table 222cd will be described. FIG. 200 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third continuous value main selection table 222cd.

As shown in FIG. 200, the third continuous value main selection table 222cd has similar contents to the second continuous value main selection table 222cc shown in FIG. The percentage of selecting the main continuation values (“777”, “333”) is set to “0”, the percentage of selecting “0” as the selection value is set to “0”, and the overall The difference is that the rate of selecting low values (“300” to “0”) as the selection value is reduced, and the content other than that is the same with a slight difference in the selection rate.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description continues. The continuous production mode selection 4 table 222ce is a table for selecting the production mode (production mode) of the pre-battle production in the continuous production. Here, with reference to FIG. 201, the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce will be described. FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce. The continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce is different from the continuous effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above, when the upper limit of the variation scenario is reached (the number of times the special symbol is changed is 200 while the probability variation state is set). The difference is that a dedicated effect (mode 6) is selected when the number of times is exceeded). Other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the third control example, a variation scenario is set for the special symbol variation after the end of the big hit, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is determined using the variation pattern table defined in the set variation scenario. configured to be selected. Then, in view of the data capacity of the main control device 110, the variation scenario is set to a range where the number of variations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, the number of times of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability by 5). is constructed so that a variation pattern is selected using a specific variation pattern table (table B) until the next big win is won (see FIG. 194).

In this third control example configured in this way, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the above-described predetermined number of times, it becomes difficult to execute the continuous performance using the variation scenario, so a special performance mode "Mode 6" is selected as the When "mode 6" is selected, the battle production ends, and the variation pattern (see FIG. 108(d)) specified in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (table B) is specified. A performance is performed. As this specific effect, for example, an effect that cannot be seen normally is executed, such as an effect in which a party is held after reconciliation with an opponent with whom no settlement has been reached during the battle effect.

In addition, in this third control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is set to "200" or "400", and only when the period during which the jackpot is not won in the variable probability state is long It is configured to execute the above-mentioned specific effect and give the player a sense of satisfaction. The number of times of variation of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the variation scenario, may be set to "20" only for the specific variation scenario to be performed, so that the above-described privilege effect can be easily seen. As a result, when a plurality of jackpot types (minor classifications "a" to "k") are provided for jackpots (for example, large classification "jackpot A") in which the same jackpot game is executed, games are played for each small classification. It is possible to differentiate the privilege (ease of execution of the specific performance) to be given to the person, and to make the player interested in the winning jackpot type even after winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. Compared to the RAM 223 of the first control example, the RAM 223 of the third control example has a duration counter 223p removed, a variable scenario update area 223ca, a remaining number counter 223cb, a pending hit flag 223cc, and a continuation setting flag 223cd. The difference is that the In addition, in the third control example, since another control example related to the continuous effect of the first control example described above is explained, among the elements defined in the RAM 223, the elements that are not involved in the continuous effect are Description is omitted.

The variable scenario update area 223ca is an area updated and managed so that the sound lamp controller 113 side can grasp the variable scenario set in the main controller 110 and the update status of the variable scenario. This variable scenario update area 223ca is displayed when it is determined in command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 205) that variable scenario related information for indicating a variable scenario set in main controller 110 has been received (FIG. 205: S3271 : Yes), a variable scenario corresponding to the received variable scenario-related information is selected from a plurality of variable scenarios stored in the variable scenario storage area 222ca, the selected variable scenario is set, and a variable display setting process ( 147) is executed, the progress of the variable scenario is updated. Based on the update status of the variable scenario set in the variable scenario update area 223ca, the value of the remaining counter 223cb is set in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). Then, when the jackpot is won, the set variation scenario is cleared (not shown).

The remaining number counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the special symbols until the next battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario, and when the set value becomes 0, the battle reach is performed. is configured to run. This remaining number counter 223cb calculates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the information of the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). The value obtained is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb (S4052 in FIG. 207).

The value set in the remaining number counter 223cb is decremented by 1 (see S4057 in FIG. 207) each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed, and the battle ready-to-win is executed as the continuous effect or the pre-battle effect. It is referenced when determining whether to execute In addition, in the winning information command process (see FIG. 206), if it is determined that there is a winning prize in the pending state (S3251 in FIG. 206: Yes), the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is referred to correspond to the winning state in the pending state. ( S3253 in FIG. 206). Then, when battle reach is executed, the value is set (cleared) to 0 (S4060 in FIG. 207).

The pending winning flag 223cc is a flag for indicating whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a. This indicates that there is prize-winning information for winning a jackpot.

The pending winning flag 223cc is not always set to ON when there is winning information for winning a big win in the winning information storage area 223a. , is set to ON when it is determined that it will be executed before the value of the remaining counter 223cb becomes "0" (S3253 in FIG. 206: Yes). In the continuous value setting process 4 (see FIG. 208), it is determined whether the pending hit flag 223cc is set to ON (see S4151 in FIG. 208). S4151: Yes), the continuation value hundreds place is executed based on the second continuation value main selection table 222cc.

The continuation setting flag 223cd is a flag for determining whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set in the variable probability state, and the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set when set to ON. It indicates that

This continuation setting flag 223cd is determined in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) by determining the setting status (see S4051 in FIG. 207) and determining that it is not set to ON (set to OFF). (S4051 in FIG. 207: No), after the value of the remaining counter 223cb is set, it is set to ON (S4053 in FIG. 207). On the other hand, in the process of S4051 of FIG. 207, when it is determined that the setting is ON (S4051 of FIG. 207: Yes), the process of setting the value of the remaining counter 223cb is skipped. Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value of the remaining counter 223cb is cleared to 0 (see S4060 in FIG. 207).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent resetting the value of the remaining number counter 223cb in a state in which a value has already been set to the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, after setting the value of the remaining number counter 223cb, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is subtracted by 1 (see S4057 in FIG. 207) each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed. The update status of the variable scenario set in the main controller 110 and the update status of the variable scenario managed by the audio lamp controller 113 can be easily synchronized by simply executing .

Also, in the process of S3254 executed in the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 206), a value that does not correspond to the variation scenario, that is, a value that indicates the number of special symbol variations until the winning information for winning the jackpot is executed. When set in the remaining number counter 223cb, subtraction based on that value can be reliably executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202, details of the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration provided in the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 202, the display control device 114 of the third control example differs from the display control device 114 of the first control example in that a continuous value storage area 233ca is added to the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 The difference is that a first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 and a second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 are added to the NAND flash memory 234a.

The continuous value storage area 233ca is an area for storing the continuous value calculated based on the display continuous value command received from the sound ramp control device 113. In the continuous value related command process 4 (see FIG. 210), The calculated continuation value is stored (see S7305 in FIG. 210). Then, in the final mode command process (see FIG. 211), when it is determined that the final mode to be executed this time is not the winning battle (S8305 in FIG. 211: No), the stored value is referred to (see FIG. 211). (see S8306 of ).

The first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 are the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (FIG. 117(b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the first control example described above. ) and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)), which is the fourth effect provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the above-described first control example. The difference is that an effect counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is used instead of the counter 223y4.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the third control example>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in this third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, in place of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127), the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used for the above-described first control example, and the variation count subtraction processing (see FIG. 129 (see FIG. 204) in place of the change count subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204), and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 203, the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104). In this special symbol variation process 4, the variation time of the special symbol has passed (S214: Yes) in contrast to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the first control example described above, and the lottery result of this time is a big hit. The difference is that the content of the processing to be executed when it is determined (S216: Yes) is partially different, and the same processing is executed for other elements. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 4 is executed, first, the processes of S201 to S216 which are the same as the above-described special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) are executed. Then, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: Yes), then the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 192) Selected with reference to the jackpot type Set the opening scenario of the specific winning mouth based on. Specifically, the game contents of the jackpot to be executed this time (for example, 15 rounds), the opening period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, the interval period between each round, the last round (for example, , 15th round), including the ending period until the end of the jackpot, a scenario is set in which the specific winning opening is opened in this jackpot.

When the processing of S217 is completed, next, the variable probability flag 203g and the time saving medium counter 203h are reset (S218), the start of the jackpot is set (S219), and the state command based on the jackpot type is set (S251). Then, the process of S220, which is the same as that of the first control example described above, is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S216, even if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (no) (S216: No), the same process of S221 as in the first control example is executed, and the process of S220 is performed. and terminate this process.

In the process of S251 described above, a state command is set that includes at least information for indicating the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time. The status command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136). It is sent towards device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, it extracts information about the jackpot type from the state command, and responds from the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 222ca of the ROM 222 based on the extracted information. A variable scenario is selected, and the selected variable scenario is stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp which variation scenario is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the big win at the timing when the big win game is started. . As a result, for example, compared to the case of simultaneously outputting the information command indicating the variation pattern at the timing when the big hit ends and the variation of the special symbol starts and the command for indicating the variation scenario set this time, the variation is more reliable. You can set the production corresponding to the scenario.

In addition, in the third control example, the state command set at the start of the jackpot game includes information for indicating the variation scenario set after the jackpot ends, so the contents of the state command are included. You can also set the production during the jackpot. Therefore, since the effect executed during the big win can suggest to the player the variable scenario to be set after the end of the big win, the player can be interested in the effect executed during the big win. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the content of the variation count subtraction process 4 executed in the third control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart schematically showing the details of the change number subtraction process 4. FIG. The change count subtraction process 4 differs from the change count subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above in that the process for updating the change scenario stored in the change scenario update area 223ca (S451, S452) is added. They are different in that they are added, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the change count subtraction process 4 is executed, the processes 401 to S411 of S3709, which are the same as the change count subtraction process of the first control example (see FIG. 129), are executed. Next, it is determined whether a variable scenario is stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca (S451), and if it is determined that a variable scenario is stored (S451: Yes), the stored variable scenario is updated ( S452), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S451 that no variation scenario is stored (S451: No), this process ends without executing the process of S452.

Here, the content of updating the variable scenario executed in the process of S452 will be described in detail. First, the variation count subtraction process 4 (see S204) is executed as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process (see S203). As a result, when it is determined that the special symbol variation is started, the variation scenario can be reliably updated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 205 to 208, control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, command determination processing 4 (S205) is used instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 140), and instead of the winning information command processing (see S141), , Winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used, and variation count subtraction processing 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of variation count subtraction processing (see FIG. 129). are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, when the process of FIG. 205 is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3214 as in the first control example described above are executed. After the processing of S3214 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the received state command contains relevant information for setting the variation scenario (S3271), and if the relevant information for setting the variation scenario is included, (S3271: Yes), the variable scenario corresponding to the variable scenario related information included in the received status command is selected from the variable scenario storage area 222ca and stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca (S3272). . Then, a display status command is set (S3215), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3271 that the relevant information for setting the variation scenario is not included (S3271: No), the process of S3272 is skipped, the process of S3215 is executed, and this process is terminated. finish.

Next, referring to FIG. 206, winning information command processing 4 will be described. FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information command process 4. FIG.

When the winning information command process 4 is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area (S3231). (S3251). In the process of S3251, when it is determined that the prize is a hit (S3251: Yes), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time is based on the location where the winning information received this time is stored in the winning information storage area. is calculated (S3252).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is greater than the fluctuation order calculated in the process of S3252 (S3253), and if it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is greater (S3253: Yes) , the value set in the remaining number counter 223cb, that is, the value indicating the remaining number of times (the number of special symbol variations) until the battle reach is executed based on the content of the set variation scenario, has been won as a jackpot. is variably set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until battle reach is executed based on (S3254).

As a result, it is possible to flexibly set and determine the period until the battle reach is actually executed, so during the battle production, the pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed The content (increase or decrease content of the continuous value) can be set based on the remaining period until the next Battle Reach is executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

When the process of S3254 is completed, the on-hold hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S3255), other prefetching processes are executed (S3256), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3251, when it is determined that the winning command received this time is not a winning prize (S3251: No), the processing of S3252 to S3255 is skipped, the processing of S3256 is executed, and this processing ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4. FIG. This continuous effect setting process 4 (S3806 in FIG. 207) is for setting the effect mode of a plurality of effects to be executed during the continuous effect. When the continuation effect setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4051). If it is determined that the continuation setting flag 223cd is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S4051: Yes), then the remaining number counter is set based on the information stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca. 223cb is set (S4052).

Here, the processing of S4052 will be described. The variable scenario update area 223ca stores a variable scenario corresponding to (synchronized with) the variable scenario set by the main controller 110. FIG. Then, using the table D, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol until the special symbol fluctuation in which the fluctuation pattern is selected is executed is calculated, and the calculated number is set in the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb indicates the number of variations of the special symbols until the next battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario.

In the third control example, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is discriminated, and the table for setting the continuation value is varied based on the discrimination result. As a result, it is possible to vary the continuation value set corresponding to the period until the next battle reach is executed (the number of variations of the special symbols). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the continuation value is significantly reduced even though the battle ready-to-win is not executed for the time being (the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is large).

In addition, in a situation where the battle ready-to-win will soon be executed (a situation in which the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is small), the continuation value can be greatly reduced in order to make the player expect that a winning battle will be executed in the battle ready-to-win. can.

Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of times of special symbol variation until the special symbol variation in which Battle Reach is executed is determined in advance based on information (variation pattern information) defined in the variation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to determine the variation of the special symbol that the battle reach is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the content of the winning prize information that is reserved and stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not cause discomfort.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the variation pattern stored with hold, in the special symbol variation that is performed before the battle reach (draw battle) that is determined in advance using the variation scenario is performed, variation Variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is out at 60 seconds (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table (table C) Variation pattern selected when the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired. ) or when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) or more before the special symbol variation is executed, the special symbol A value corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations until is changed is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, even if the battle reach is performed without being based on the variation scenario, that is, even if the battle reach is performed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, in the special symbol variation performed by the battle reach (battle In the pre-production), the continuous value can be increased or decreased appropriately.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description continues. After completing the process of S4052, next, the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4053). As described above, while the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON, the determination processing of S4051 is configured so that the processing of S4052 is not executed. This prohibits the value of the remaining number counter 223cb from being set again in a state in which a value has already been set in the remaining number counter 223cb. Therefore, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb that is not based on the variation scenario (the value of the remaining number counter 223cb that is set corresponding to the special symbol variation that becomes the big hit when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win) is set. Even if the value is

When the processing of S4053 is completed, then, it is determined whether the current variation (special symbol variation) is a hit variation corresponding to a big hit (S4054), and if it is determined to be a hit variation (S4054: Yes), the battle In order to set the effect mode of battle reach, which is the final mode of the effect, the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a hit variation (it is a loss variation) (S4054: No), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223cb is 0 (S4055).

Here, if it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 0 (S4055: Yes), that is, the special symbol variation of this time is a special symbol variation in which battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario (table D If it is a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using, the process proceeds to S4013 described later, and when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is not 0 (1 or more) (S4055: No ) then determines whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (S4056).

In the process of S4056, it is determined whether the variation pattern (long deviation a) with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected using the first outlier (probable variation) variation pattern table (table C), and the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds If so (S4056: Yes), the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of 60 seconds (long deviation a) (S4056: No), the process proceeds to S4057.

That is, in the determination process of S4054 to S4056 described above, whether to set the pre-battle effect or set the battle reach as the variable effect (the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81) set corresponding to the special symbol change this time. Whether or not to set is discriminated, in S4054 it is discriminated whether or not a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, and in S4055 it is discriminated whether or not the battle reach is set based on the special symbol variation scenario. However, in S4056, it is determined whether or not it is a specific lottery result even though the winning lottery for the special symbol is out of the lottery.

When the variation performance to be executed corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is the pre-battle performance, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is subtracted by 1 (S4057), and then S4004 as in the first control example described above. The processing of S4008 is executed, then the continuation value setting processing 2 is executed (S4058), and this processing ends. The contents of this continuous value setting process 2 (S4058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the variation production to be executed in response to this special symbol variation is battle reach (if Yes is determined in any of S4054, S4055, and S4056), the final mode selection table 222h is used. A mode is selected (S4013), a corresponding final mode command for display is set (S4014), the continuation effect flag 223r, the continuation setting flag 223cd, and the on-hold winning flag 223cc are set to OFF (S4059), and the remaining counter 223cb is set to 0 (S4060), the contents stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m are cleared (process 4016 of S3709), and this process is terminated.

Next, the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058) executed in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see S3806 in FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process 4 (S4058). In this continuation value setting process 4 (S4058), a process of determining a selection table for selecting a continuation value is executed according to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb and the setting status of the on-hold hit flag 223cc. Thus, by varying the selection range of the continuation value set as the effect mode of the pre-battle effect according to the game situation, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A player can be interested.

When the continuous value setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the continuous value fluctuation timing. In the third control example, in the first deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc2 (table C), when the short deviation b with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected, it is determined that it is the continuous value variation timing. . In addition, in the third control example, as the variation pattern of the special symbol, a variation pattern (short deviation b) that is determined to be continuous value variation timing, and a variation pattern that is determined not to be continuous value variation timing (short deviation a ), but without being limited to this, if a lottery means is provided for determining whether or not to vary the continuous value in the sound ramp control device 113, and the continuous value is varied with respect to the same variation pattern. It may be configured to be able to set the case where it is not made and the case where it is not made. Further, when it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (operation means), it may be determined that it is time to change the continuous value. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the process of S4101, when it is determined that it is time to change the continuous value (S4101: Yes), in order to execute the process of setting the effect mode for increasing or decreasing (variable) the continuous value in the current variable effect, S4151 Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the continuation value change timing (S4101: No), the process ends.

In the process of S4151, it is determined whether the on-hold hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151). Here, if it is determined that the on-hold winning flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151: Yes), that is, if there is winning information corresponding to the special symbol that wins the jackpot, the second Based on the continuation value main selection table 222cc, a main continuation value (hundreds digit of HP) is selected (S4157), and the selected main continuation value is a specific value (“333” or “777”). It is determined whether there is (S4158).

In the process of S4158, when it is determined that the selected main continuation value is a specific value (S4158: Yes), display control is performed to display the selected value on the third symbol display device 81 as it is. The device 114 sets a display specific continuation value command to which the effect continuation value (secondary continuation value) is not added (S4159), and ends this processing. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 206, even if there is a special symbol that will win a big hit in the reserve of special symbols, it is possible to wait until the variation of the corresponding special symbol is executed based on the variation scenario. When a battle reach (tie battle) is executed, the pending hit flag 223cc is not set to ON, so the main continuation value is not selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. As a result, it is possible to execute the battle reach (win or lose battle) immediately after the battle reach (tie battle) based on the variable scenario is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player.

As described above, in the third control example, based on the variation order of the special symbols that win the jackpot existing in the reserve and the special symbols in which the battle reach (tie battle) is executed based on the variation scenario, the specific Technically, it is configured so that the value of the main continuation value is selected according to the contents corresponding to the special symbol variation to be executed first, but other configurations may be used, for example, it exists in the reserve. If the type of jackpot is determined in advance, and the determination result is a predetermined determination result (for example, a determination result corresponding to a probability variable jackpot in which a winning battle is performed), or a predetermined determination result (for example, a defeat battle is The selection table for selecting the value of the main continuation value may be different between the determination result corresponding to the executed normal hit and the determination result.

Specifically, for example, when the variation of the special symbol in which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the variation scenario is performed rather than the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot that exists in the reserve is executed first sets a new value of the remaining number counter 223cb to the number of times of variation until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot is executed, and the variation scenario is higher than the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the normal winning existing in the reservation. If the variation of the special symbol in which the battle ready-to-win (draw battle) based on is executed is executed first, the value of the already set remaining number counter 223cb is configured not to be changed. In this way, by varying the value of the main continuation value that can be selected until the battle reach is executed based on the type of jackpot to be executed (probable variable jackpot or normal jackpot), pre-battle production It is possible to predict the type of jackpot by the presentation mode of (1), and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, it may be configured such that the continuation value finally displayed in the battle ready-to-win, which is a draw battle, is inherited as it is to set the effect mode of the next battle effect. As a result, the relevance can be given to the battle effects that are repeatedly executed a plurality of times, and the players can be interested in the effects that are executed over a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the process of S4151, if it is determined that the pending hit flag 223cc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4151: No), then the value of the remaining counter 223cb is 4 or more (S4152), and if it is determined to be 4 or more (S4152: Yes), select the value of the main continuation value (hundreds place of HP) based on the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. (S4153), and the process proceeds to S4154.

Further, in the process of S4152, if it is determined that the value of the remaining count counter 223cb is not 4 or more (3 or less) (S4152: No), the main continuation value is determined based on the third continuation value main selection table 222cd. A value (hundreds place of HP) is selected (S4156), the process proceeds to S4154, a display continuation value command corresponding to the value of the main continuation value selected this time is set (S4154), and the process proceeds to S4155. Transition.

In the process of S4155, the values of the main continuation values selected in the processes of S4153, S4156 and S4159 are stored in the continuation value storage area 223n. As a result, at the next timing of setting the continuation value, the value of the main continuation value selected this time can be read out and a new continuation value can be selected. After finishing the processing of S4155, this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device 114 in the third control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 211. FIG. In this control example, command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) is used in place of the command determination processing (see FIG. 158) in contrast to the above-described first control example. ) in place of continuous value-related command processing 4 (see FIG. 210) and the addition of final mode command processing (see FIG. 211), but other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the third control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuation effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) is configured to be set by the display control device 114 . By setting the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen by the display control device 114 in this manner, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. As described above, the main continuation value set based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the variable scenario is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the command for indicating the set main continuation value is displayed and controlled. Since it is configured to output to the device 114, more information than necessary for the display control device 114 (for example, information for indicating the lottery result of special symbols, information for indicating the update status of the variable scenario) information) is not required to be output. Therefore, the load of processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 (processing for setting a continuation value, processing for setting a command to be output to the display control device 114) can be reduced.

First, the contents of command determination processing 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 4. FIG. In this command determination process 4, in contrast to the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above, the process executed when there is a continuous value-related command and whether or not there is a display final mode command are executed. The difference is that a process for determining is added.

When the command determination process 4 is executed, the same processes of S6401 to S6414 as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 158) are executed, and in the process of S6414, it is determined that there is a continuation value related command. If so (S6414: Yes), continuous value related command process 4 is executed (S6451), and the process proceeds to S6401. Continuation value related command process 4 executed in the process of S6451 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no continuation value-related command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is a display final mode command (S6452), and it is determined that there is a display final mode command. If so (S6452: Yes), the display final mode command process is executed (S6453), and then the process proceeds to S6401.

Details of the display final mode command processing executed in the processing of S6453 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6452 that there is no display final mode command (S6452: No), after executing the same process of S6420 as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 158), It shifts to process 6401 of S3709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the continuous value related command process 4 (S6451) executed in the above-described command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuation value-related command process 4. FIG. In this continuation value related command process 4, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while the continuation effect is being executed is set and displayed. A process for displaying the effect to be executed during is executed.

When the continuation value related command process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time includes a specific continuation value command for display (S7351). This specific continuation value command for display is a specific value ("333 , "777") is selected. Although a detailed description will be given later, in this processing, when it is determined that there is a display specific continuation value command, the main continuation value output from the audio lamp control device 113 is displayed as it is on the display screen. is doing. As a result, when a specific value (“333”, “777”) for indicating that a jackpot is won is selected as the main continuation value, the display control device 114 sets the secondary continuation value and sets the main continuation value. To prevent a situation in which a continuation value obtained by summing a continuation value and a sub continuation value is displayed on a display screen so that a player cannot be informed of a specific value ('333', '777') for indicating winning of a jackpot. can be done.

In the process of S7351, if it is determined that there is no display specific continuation value command (S7351: No), that is, if a display continuation value command is received, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the command received this time ) is calculated (S7352), and it is determined whether the calculated continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353). In the processing of S7353, if it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is not 0 (100 or more), a secondary continuation value is selected based on the first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3, and the process proceeds to S7356. Transition. Note that each secondary continuation value defined in the first continuation value subselection table 234a3 is the same as the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117(b)) of the first control example described above. , the description of which is omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7353 that the continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353: Yes), the secondary continuation value is selected based on the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4, and the processing of S7356 is performed. Move to Note that each secondary continuation value defined in the second continuation value subselection table 234a4 is the same as the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)) of the first control example described above. , the description of which is omitted.

Then, in the processing of S7356, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command and the secondary continuation value selected by the processing of S7354 or S7355 are added (S7356). As described above, when the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command is 0, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is greater than 0. Since it is configured to use the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 that defines sub-continuation values that cannot be values (that is, positive values cannot be selected as sub-continuation values), the sound lamp control device Regarding the content indicated by the continuation value (main continuation value) selected in 113 (the content indicating that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is set to "0" and that the probability variable jackpot is won in this battle production) , the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is inconsistent (a value other than "0" is displayed) can be suppressed.

After completing the processing of S7356, next, the sum value stored in the sum value storage area 233k is read out (S7357), and the sum value calculated in the processing of S7356 and the sum value read out in the processing of S7357 are compared. A difference is calculated (S7358). Then, the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), the total value calculated this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process of S7365 is performed. Move to

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7351 that there is a specific continuation value command for display (S7351: Yes), then the total value is read out from the total value storage area 233k (S7361), and the continuation value calculated in the process of S7352 is read. The difference between the value and the total value read out in the process of S7361 is calculated (S7362), the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), and the current calculated The continuous value is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process proceeds to S7365.

After the processing of S7360 or the processing of S7364 described above is finished, then the continuation value calculated in the processing of S7352 is stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca (S7365), and then the continuation value related to the first control example described above is stored. The same processing of S7306 to S7309 as the command processing (see FIG. 164) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the details of the final mode command processing (S6453) executed in the above-described command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the contents of final mode command processing. In this final mode command process, there is a process of setting a battle ready-to-win effect mode (continuous value (HP value) display mode) for indicating the result of the continuous effect (battle effect), and the set effect mode is displayed on the display screen. and a process for displaying are executed.

When the final mode command processing (S6453) is executed, first, the final mode data table corresponding to the received command is determined (S8301). The received command indicates the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118(a)) in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) executed in the sound lamp control device 113. The final mode data table corresponding to the information is read from the character ROM 234 and determined.

Next, the total value stored in the total value storage area 233k, that is, the continuation value (HP value) currently displayed on the display screen is read (S8302), and the initial value of the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read. It is set as value data (S8303). In this way, data related to the continuous value (HP value) that can be set to various values is additionally set for the effect data corresponding to the predetermined number of patterns of the Battle Ready effect effect mode (attack pattern mode). By enabling the configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the effect mode of battle reach.

After completing the processing of S8303, the final result information included in the received command is then read (processing 8304 of S3709), and it is determined whether the read final result is information indicating victory (S8305). Here, as the final result information included in the received command, information indicating the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118(a)) is used to determine the final result. Alternatively, the display final mode command process may be executed including dedicated information for indicating the final result of the battle.

In the process of S8305, if it is determined that the final result is not a victory (defeat or draw) (S8305: No), the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca and the total value storage area are stored. Calculates the difference from the calculated total value (S8306), and changes the subtraction value of the first own attack effect data among the determined effect data of the final mode data table to the subtraction value to which the calculated difference is added. (S8307), and the process proceeds to S8308.

Here, the processing contents of S8306 and S8307 described above will be described. In the third control example, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the main continuation value set by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the special symbol lottery result. , and the secondary continuation value set for the effect in the display control device 114 are added together. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113, thereby enhancing the performance effect. However, in battle ready-to-win where the results of continuous effects (battle effects) are displayed, a situation may occur in which the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is infinitely close to “0”.

In such a case, for example, even if the main continuation value (HP value) of the opponent is not set to "0" based on the lottery result of the special symbol in the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 There is a risk that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen will become "0" due to the effect secondary continuation value set in . That is, while the displayed continuation value (HP value) is large, there is an error between the main continuation value set and managed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. Even if there is, there is no adverse effect on the performance, and rather it has a positive effect of increasing the variation of the performance. An error between the main continuation value set and managed at 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen causes contradiction in the performance result, and execution of performance that makes the player feel distrustful. There is a problem that there is a possibility that

Therefore, in the third control example, when setting the effect mode of the final mode (battle reach) of the continuous effect (battle effect), the final result of the current continuous effect (battle effect) is determined. In cases other than victory, that is, when the opponent's continuous value (HP value) does not become "0", the error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is used as an attack during battle reach. I'm trying to solve it by directing.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the above-described problem caused by displaying the result of the continuation effect (battle effect) while leaving an error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. can be done. In addition, in the third control example, in the first own attack pattern set as the final mode (battle reach) of the continuation effect (battle effect), the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP) displayed on the display screen value), it is possible to share the effect mode of the remaining attack patterns (for example, the second and third attacks).

In addition, if the production mode of the final mode (battle reach) selected this time is set to the mode where the attack pattern is 0 times, the effect that the opponent's continuation value does not decrease during the battle reach. Since it is a mode, even if the error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is not eliminated, the error with the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen will be produced. In order to avoid the problem of inconsistency in the results, the process of S8307 is configured so that the process of changing the attack effect data is not executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8305, if it is determined that the final result is a victory (S8305: Yes), the processes of S8306 and S8307 are skipped and the process proceeds to S8308.

In the process of S8038, the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read from the countdown effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8308). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8308 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8309).

Then, based on the attack pattern display data table included in the final mode data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8309, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8310), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8311). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8312), the final mode command process is terminated, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding another control example of the third control example>
Next, another control example of the above-described third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. FIG. In the third control example described above, by setting a variation scenario based on the jackpot type and selecting a variation pattern based on the set variation scenario, during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, the pre-battle performance and , Battle Reach and was configured to be able to execute effectively. In addition, in order to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the continuous performance executed in accordance with a predetermined variation scenario, a plurality of variation scenarios are prepared and different according to the type of the jackpot. It was configured to select the variable scenario.

The third control example configured in this manner was configured to be able to enhance the production effect of the continuous production, but the storage capacity for storing a plurality of variable scenarios and the setting corresponding to the plurality of variable scenarios. There is a problem that the storage capacity for storing a plurality of jackpot types increases. In particular, the main controller 110 needs to store various processing related to games and data within a limited memory capacity. There is a risk that the players will be put under pressure and, as a result, lose interest in the game.

On the other hand, in another control example of the third control example, even if the number of variation scenarios is reduced, in order to provide a rich variety of continuous effects, the jackpot type In addition to the variation scenario set corresponding to, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result, a variation using a different variation scenario during a predetermined period (for example, 10 rotations of the special symbol variation) Configured for pattern selection.

By constructing in this way, even when one variable scenario is set, the contents of the continuous performance to be executed can be varied depending on the timing when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a specific lottery result. can. In addition, since the performance mode during the continuous performance is set by combining a plurality of variable scenarios, even if the number of stored variable scenarios is reduced, the continuous performance can be executed in a wide variety.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in another control example of the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214, the electrical configuration in this specific control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described third control example in that the content of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially changed and the content of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. is doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 212(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in another control example of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212 (a), in this control example, with respect to the above-described third control example, the point of adding a small hit type selection table 202da, and the contents of the first hit random number table 202a are partially changed The difference is that the content of the variable scenario setting table 202ca is partially changed. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The first winning random number table 202a in this control example provides a range for determining "small winning" in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out. The first hit random number table 202a in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 213(a). FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 213(a), in the above-described third control example, the range of the first winning random number counter value C1 ("5 to 299”), a “small win” is defined for the range of “295 to 299”. When a "small win" is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbols, a privilege which is less than the above-mentioned big win but advantageous to the player is given.

Specifically, control is executed to open the variable prize winning device 65 for a short period of time so that the ball can enter the specific prize winning port 65a. In addition, as described above, since the "small win" can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbols is not a big win, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 when the "small win" is won. It is possible to prevent the state from being set.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 213(b). FIG. 213(b) shows the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. As shown in FIG. 213(b), in another control example of the third control example, a small hit type is set from a plurality. Specifically, among the 100 counter values in total of "0" to "99", the acquired value of the small hit type counter value C5 that can acquire any value is in the range of "0 to 49" , “small win A” are defined in association with each other, and “small win B” is defined in association with the range of “50 to 99”.

Then, when the ``small win A'' is won, a variation scenario for executing a specific variation pattern is additionally set, and when the ``small win B'' is won, the specific variation pattern is performed. It is configured so that additional fluctuation scenarios are not set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b), the contents of the variable scenario setting table 202ca in this specific control example will be described. FIG. 214(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variable scenario A1 stored in the variable scenario setting table 202ca, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stored post-small hit variation scenario.

The variable scenario setting table 202ca in this control example stores only the two variable scenarios described above, and when winning the probability variable jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the variable scenario A1 is set after the jackpot ends. , is stored in the variable scenario storage area 203ca. Further, when a small win is won in the special symbol 2 lottery executed during the variable probability state, a post-small win variation scenario is set and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. After the end of the small win, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the contents specified in the post-small win variation scenario for the number of times of special symbol variation prescribed in the post-small win variation scenario. there is

Although detailed description is omitted, even in this control example, as in the above-described third control example, the variation count subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is executed, and each time a special symbol variation is performed ( In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 203), whenever it is determined that the special symbol variation time has passed, the variation scenario set in the variation scenario storage area 203ca is updated. .

The variable scenario storage area 203ca is configured to be able to store both the variable scenario A1 and the post-small winning variable scenario, and when a small winning is won during the probability variable state, both variable scenarios are subjected to the variable frequency subtraction process 4. (See FIG. 204). Therefore, the variation scenario A1 can be updated irrespective of the number of winning small wins during the variable probability state, and the table B can be set when the number of special symbol variations after the end of the big win reaches 200 times. .

As shown in FIG. 214 (a), the variation scenario A1 is defined in association with the above-described table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) in the range of the number of variations "1 to 4", and the number of variations Table C (first deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of “5 to 13”, and table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in the number of fluctuations “14”. is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "195", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is associated with nine fluctuations, and the table D (second A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association. In other words, during the period when the number of fluctuations in the special design after the jackpot is "5 to 195", the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C, and after executing the special design fluctuation nine times, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

Then, the table C (first deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of variations "195 to 198", and the table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation A pattern table 202dc3) is defined. Then, the range of the number of fluctuations from "200 to" is defined in association with Table B, as in the third control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 214 (b), the variation scenario after the small hit is defined by the above-described table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) associated with the range of the number of variations "1 to 9", A table D (second deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in the range of the number of variations "5 to 13", and a table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined for the number of variations "10". 202dc3) is defined. The variation scenario is terminated when the number of variations exceeds 10 times. When the post-small hit variation scenario ends, the variation pattern of the special symbols is continuously selected in accordance with the content defined in the variation scenario A1, in which the variation scenario is updated at the same time.

As described above, in another control example of the third control example, when a small hit is won as a special symbol lottery result, different variation scenarios occur during a predetermined period (for example, 10 variations in special symbols). Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to vary the variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the timing of winning the small prize. Therefore, it is possible to provide continuous effects of various patterns without preparing a plurality of variable scenarios in advance as in the third control example described above.

In addition, at the end of the variation scenario used when winning a small hit, a variation pattern table (table D) in which battle reach is executed (easily) is defined. This will prevent situations where Battle Reach will not run for a long period of time.

In addition, in this another control example, a configuration having one variation scenario (variation scenario A1) is used as a variation scenario set after the end of the probability variable jackpot, but a plurality of variation scenarios are used as in the third control example described above. configuration may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide continuous effects of more patterns. In addition, in this separate control example, when a small hit is won, the small hit type (small hit A) that sets a different variation scenario and the small hit type (small hit B) that does not set a different variation scenario are the same. Although it is configured to be the ratio (50%) of may be set based on the intervals defined in the variation pattern table (table D) in which is (easily) performed, and the content of the privilege (prize ball) provided when a small win is won.

In addition, in this control example, the same variable winning device (variable winning device 65) is opened in the case of winning a special symbol jackpot and in the case of winning a small prize. The machine 10 may be provided with a second variable prize winning device which is opened only when a small prize is won. In this case, the fact that the second variable prize winning device has been opened should be more difficult to grasp than the fact that the variable prize winning device 65 has been opened. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend this fact, it is possible to provide the player with continuous effects of various patterns without a sense of incongruity. In addition, in this case, the display mode of the third symbol to indicate that the small win has been won is also difficult for the player to understand, for example, at the third symbol stop timing, the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size, or the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size. In the main display area Dm of the 3-pattern display device 81, it is preferable to display a lively effect that is more conspicuous than the 3rd pattern.

In this control example, the first winning random number table 202a is configured so that only the special symbol 2 wins a small win, but the special symbol 1 may also win a small win. In this case, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may have different probabilities of winning a small prize.

In another control example of the third control example described above, as a condition for setting a variation scenario (variation scenario after a small hit) different from the variation scenario (variation scenario A1) predetermined based on the lottery result of the special symbol , shows the case where the special symbol wins a small hit, but when other conditions are met, it may be configured to set a different variation scenario, for example, in the above-described second control example It may be configured such that a different variation scenario is set when the falling lottery used is won.

<Regarding another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, another control example of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 100) described in the first control example will be described. In the first control example described above, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestive effect are set separately, and the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is configured to be adjustable. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect, and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the first half part, the omen The start timing of the performance can be set from a plurality of points, and the suggestive performance is executed without presetting the execution period, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive performance. In the suggestive effect of the first control example described above, the timing at which the specific effect targeted for the suggestive effect is executed is set from a plurality of timings, and the end timing of the suggestive effect (countdown effect) is set based on the execution timing of the suggestive effect. By setting the end timing) and setting the execution period of the suggestive effect, various combinations of suggestive effects can be executed.

On the other hand, in this control example, the suggestive effect is executed without setting the end timing of the suggestive effect, and the predetermined condition (operation content of the frame button 22) is satisfied during the period when the suggestive effect is being executed. Based on this, a specific effect to be a target of the suggestive effect is determined, and a countdown effect is executed toward the determined specific effect. By constructing in this way, the effect mode of the suggestive effect can be changed according to the operation contents of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the execution of the suggestive effect, so that the player can be motivated to participate in the game. can be done.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of suggestive effect in this specific control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is changed according to the operation content of the frame button 22 during the suggestive effect execution. The same elements as in the timing chart (see FIG. 100) showing the flow of suggestive effects in the first control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 215, when the variation of the special symbol capable of executing the suggestive effect is started, 10 seconds after the start of the variation, the precursor display (see FIG. 98(a)), which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is executed for 13 seconds. be done. A button operation effective period is set for the last 8 seconds of the display period during which the foreshadow is displayed, and the frame button 22 is activated during the button operation effective period. Depending on the content of the operation to , the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect, which is the second half of the suggestive effect, is determined.

Specifically, during the valid period of button operation, the comment "Press the button at the right time" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 in response to the display. The timing is discriminated by the operation timing discriminating means. The operation timing discriminating means is configured to be able to discriminate the operation timing of the player with respect to the frame button 22 in a plurality of stages, and the frame button 22 is operated with the best timing (for example, within a range of 0.2 seconds before or after the specified timing). When the operation (hereinafter referred to as button operation B) is performed, and the range deviated from the specified timing from button operation B (for example, the range of 1 second before or after the specified timing, excluding the range of button operation B) The frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter referred to as button operation A) in the range where the frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter referred to as button operation A), the frame button 22 is operated at other timings, or the frame button 22 is not operated (hereinafter, button operation is not performed). (referred to as ) can be at least discriminated.

Here, if the operation timing determination means determines that the button operation is A, that is, if the button operation is performed during the valid period of the button operation, but the operation timing is slightly deviated, it is executed during the current variation effect. A countdown effect is set for the specific effect b (cut-in display executed 26 seconds after the start of variation) among the specific effects to be performed. Specifically, a three-second countdown display is executed as a countdown effect (the values displayed in the second display area of the display screen in FIG. 98(b) are "3", "2", "1", " 0” is executed to count down). Then, at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes "0", the cut-in display, which is the specific effect b, is displayed.

Next, when the operation timing determining means determines that the button operation is B, that is, when the button is operated with good timing during the valid period of the button operation, the specified A countdown effect is set for effect a (PUSH display executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 99)). Specifically, a countdown display for 7 seconds is executed as the countdown effect. Then, at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes "0", the PUSH display, which is the specific effect a, is displayed.

Further, when the operation timing determination means determines that no button operation is performed, that is, when the button operation is not performed during the button operation valid period, or when the button operation is performed at a significantly deviated timing, a countdown effect is executed. Without doing, the suggestive effect ends at the timing when the sign effect ends (fake suggestive effect).

As described above, in this control example, similar to the above-described first control example, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestive effect are set at different timings (conditions). Based on the predetermined conditions (determined results of the operation contents of the frame button 22) that are established during the execution period of the precursor effect, which is the first half part, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect being executed is determined, and the second half part of the suggestive effect is determined. is configured to set the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in this control example, the later the timing at which the specific effects (specific effects a, specific effects b) executed at a plurality of timings are executed, the higher the expectation that the special symbol variation of this time will win the jackpot. configured to be high. Therefore, if the button operation is performed with good timing during the valid period of the button operation, the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect with high expectation for the big win, so that the player can feel at ease.

In other words, FIG. 215 shows an example of a variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed. 215. Therefore, in the variation pattern shown in FIG. , it is not possible to notify in advance whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern in which both the specific performance a and the specific performance b are executed, and the performance proceeds while making the player feel uneasy. Become.

However, when the frame button 22 is operated with good timing during the effective period of the button operation, the countdown effect for the specific effect a is executed, so that the player can play the game without feeling uneasy. can let Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game in which the frame button 22 is operated.

In addition, in this separate control example, in the variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed as one variation pattern, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set to a predetermined condition ( (operation content of the frame button 22), but it may be configured not to display a specific effect that was not targeted for the suggestive effect. In addition, in the variation pattern in which only the specific performance a is executed as one variation pattern, the timing at which the specific performance a, which is the target of the suggestive performance, is executed is determined based on a predetermined condition that is established after the suggestive performance is executed. It may be configured to By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 cannot be operated with good timing, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the content of the suggestive effect to be executed when the frame button 22 is operated with good timing, so that the player is motivated. can be made to operate the frame button 22 .

In the other control example described above, as the content of the operation of the frame button 22 after the suggestive effect is started, an operation effect for operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner is executed during the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect. Then, based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the operation performance, the specific performance to be the target of the suggestive performance is determined, and the performance mode of the countdown performance corresponding to the determined specific performance is set. ing.

In this case, as the operation effect, the display screen of the third pattern display device displays the characters "Press the button at the right time" as a display mode indicating the content of the operation effect, and the index display for indicating the designated timing of the operation effect. It is preferable to display the mode and the movement display mode that moves with the passage of time so as to indicate to the player that the timing at which the movement display mode overlaps the index display mode is the best timing. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the operation effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as a result of operation of the frame button 22 for the operation effect, the movement display mode is stopped and displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is actually operated, and the error from the indicator display mode is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. It is preferable to display characters of "excellent" or "good" for notifying whether the error range is within the allowable range (whether it corresponds to button operation A or button operation B). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the operation presentation in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the example described above, in order to change the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the operation details of the frame button 22, the configuration is such that the error between the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the designated timing specified in advance is discriminated. However, other configurations may be used as long as the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation can be varied based on the specified conditions determined in advance and the actual operation content. The number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (depressed) may be discriminated, and the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be varied based on the determination result. An operation means other than 22 may be provided, it may be determined whether or not a specific operation means is operated among a plurality of operation means, and the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be varied based on the determination result.

In another control example shown in FIG. 215, it is configured to set the effect mode of the suggestive effect (the effect mode of the countdown effect, which is the second half of the suggestive effect) based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the valid period of the button operation. However, in order to achieve the same effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be set based on the timing at which the pressing operation is performed during the valid period of the button operation. A detailed description will now be given with reference to FIG.

FIG. 216(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is varied according to the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the suggestive effect. The same elements as in the timing chart (see FIG. 100 or FIG. 215) showing the flow of suggestive effects in the above-described first control example and another control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 216, in this specific control example, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) set during the precursor effect period, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is determined to be the first half (2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds). separated as possible. 216(b) to (d), the effect mode of the suggestive effect set based on the operation timing (press timing) of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period will be described.

FIG. 216(b) is a timing chart showing the effect mode of the suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the first half (two seconds) of the button operation effective period. 216(d) is a timing chart showing the effect mode of the suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a presentation mode of a suggestive presentation when the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed) during the valid operation period; FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 216(b), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) during the first half (two seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestive effect is the specific effect a. Then, set the precursor period (8 seconds) from the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period to 1 second later, and set the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period to It is set as an execution period (12 seconds) of the countdown effect from 1 second to the timing when the specific effect a is started.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first half (2 seconds) of the switch timing between the first half (2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds) defined in the button operation effective period (8 seconds). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated just before the end of the first half (2 seconds), the timing of switching the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation (switching from the sign presentation to the countdown presentation) is delayed by 1 second. Even if there is, it is possible to execute the process of switching the effect smoothly using the period (1 second) until the effect is switched.

In this case, the button operation valid period changing process is executed to invalidate the operation of the frame button 22 for the latter half (6 seconds) of the preset button operation valid period (8 seconds). As a result, even if the countdown effect is executed during the period in which the button operation effective period is set in advance, the operation to the frame button 22 during the execution can be invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(c), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) within the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestive effect is specified. b, and is set as an execution period (3 seconds) of the countdown effect from the timing when the button operation valid period ends to the timing when the specific effect b starts. Then, if there is no operation to the frame button 22 during the valid period of the button operation, as shown in FIG. An omen effect (13 seconds) is executed, after which the suggestive effect is terminated without performing a countdown effect (a false suggestive effect).

As described above with reference to FIG. 216, even if it is configured to set the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period, An effect similar to that of FIG. 215 can be obtained.

Note that in the example described with reference to FIG. 216, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (first half, second half), and different times (first half ( 2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds)), but it is sufficient if the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period can be identified. The period may be divided into two or more periods (for example, divided into three periods), or the same time may be set for the divided periods. Also, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (for example, period A (1 second) and period B (1 second)), and the period A and the period B are set alternately. You can As a result, a different suggestion effect is executed even if the timing of the button operation on the frame button 22 is slightly shifted, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example explained with reference to FIGS. Presence or absence of operation, details of operation, timing of operation) are set, but other conditions may be set. Even if the generation timing of the ball entering the opening 140, the ball entering the general prize winning opening 63, and the ball entering (passing) the through gate 67, and the contents of the occurrence are set as predetermined conditions. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player stops shooting balls while the special symbols are changing.

Also, in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example explained using FIG. 215 and FIG. , As shown in FIG. 101 of the first control example described above, it may be configured to execute the suggestive effect across a plurality of special symbol variations.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In this control example, in place of the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), a countdown effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) is provided with respect to the above-described first control example. The difference is that process 5 (see FIG. 218) is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 217, the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5 will be described. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5. FIG. When the countdown effect setting process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a win (S4303), and if it is determined to be a win (S4303: Yes), 26 seconds after the start of the variation Effect b (cut-in) is set, and after 30 seconds, specific effect a (PUSH) is set (S4371), and the process proceeds to S4373.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not winning (S4303: No), the specific effect b (cut-in) is set after 26 seconds from the start of variation (S4372), and the process proceeds to S4373. Transition.

In the process of S4373, the button operation effective period is set in the period of 15 to 23 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (S4373), the precursor effect corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is set (S4374), and the precursor effect command for display is set. (S4375), and the process ends.

Next, the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5. As shown in FIG. When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051). finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been detected (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first predictive effect is currently valid (S5081), and if it is determined that the first predictive effect is valid, (S5081: Yes), the frame button operation-related processing (S5082 to S5088) during the first precursor effect is executed, and if it is determined that the first precursor effect is not valid (S5081: No), the second It is determined whether it is during the effective period of the omen effect (S5089), and if it is determined that the second omen effect is valid (S5089: Yes), processing related to frame button operation during the second omen effect is executed (S5090). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the effective period of the second precursor effect (S5089: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the processing (S5082 to S5088) related to frame button operation during the first omen effect will be described. First, the error between the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the designated timing set for the precursor effect is calculated (S5082), and it is determined whether the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083). If the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5084), and the period from 23 seconds to 30 seconds from the start of the fluctuation is set as the countdown effect period (S5085 ), a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode is set (S5077), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error is not within 0.1 seconds (S5083: No), then it is determined whether the error is within 0.5 seconds (S5086). If it is determined (S5086: Yes), the specific effect b is set to the effect mode (S5087), the period from 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of the fluctuation is set to the countdown effect period (S5088), and the processing of S5077 described above to end this process. In the process of S5086, if it is determined that the time is not within 0.5 seconds (S5086: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5077 described above as it is, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 219, the second precursor effect setting process executed in frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (see FIG. 218) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second precursor effect setting process. When the second precursor effect setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the current period is the first half period, that is, whether the period during which the frame button 22 was operated is the first half period (S5091). In the processing of S5091, if it is determined that it is the first half period (S5091: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the object of effect (S5092), the predictive effect period is set to 8 seconds (S5093), and 18 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. A period from seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5094), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first half period (S5091: No), then it is determined whether the current period is the second half period, that is, whether the period during which the frame button 22 was operated is the second half period (S5095). , If it is determined that it is the second half period (S5095: yes), the specific effect b is set as the object of effect (S5096), the sign effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5097), and 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. The period until is set as the countdown effect period (S5098), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5095 that it is not the second half period (S5095: No), the portent effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5099), and this process ends.

<Regarding another example of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the extended display described in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, another example of the extended display processing set after the end of the big win (processing to display the ending display of the big win by extending it even during the special symbol variation period after the end of the big win) will be described. In the first control example described above, when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the extended display is executed, or a predetermined period of time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the extended display is executed When the end condition of the extended display is determined to be satisfied, and if the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol, the third symbol is used. A demonstration display is performed on the display device 81, and the demonstration display is continued until the special symbol variation for which a short period of time (0.5 seconds) is set is completed.

On the other hand, in this another example, before the end condition based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, the end condition based on the elapsed period is established, and after the extended display ends, a short period (0.5 seconds) fluctuation When the special symbol variation with a set time is executed, the variation performance is set based on the remaining number of variations of the special symbol variation with a short-term (0.5 second) variation time. there is

Specifically, a specific period effect is set in which a variable effect is executed for a period longer than the actual special symbol variation period (0.5 seconds). Including), 2 seconds of variable production is set, and if the number of remaining fluctuations in the special design is 3 times (including this fluctuation), 3 seconds of variable production is set, and the remaining fluctuation of the special design When the number of times is 4 (including the current variation), a 4-second variation effect is set.

Then, when the next special symbol variation is executed while the variable performance which is the performance for the specific period is being executed, the performance period of the variable performance in which the remaining period of the already executed variable performance is newly executed. It is set so that the variable effect is rewritten so that

By constructing in this way, when the extended display is executed after the end of the big win, and the special pattern variation executed during the predetermined period (four special pattern changes or 4 seconds) after the end of the big win wins the big win. On the other hand, in the case of setting a short-term (0.5 second) variation time for special pattern variations for a predetermined number of times after the end of the big win, in order to continue the performance during the big win without discomfort, after the end of the big win Even if the special symbol variations are not executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within a predetermined period (4 seconds) of , the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variations can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Here, with regard to the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this example, differences from the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 220 . This example is different from the above-described first control example in that the content of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) is partially changed, and other processes are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing the contents of variable display setting processing 6 in this example. When the variable display setting process 6 is executed, first, the same processes of S3801 to S3804 as the variable display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 147) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223i is not ON (it is OFF) (S3803: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses from when the extended display is executed after the end of the jackpot to when the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (4 times).

In the process of S3871, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is not 1 or more (it is 0), S3811 to S3817, which are the same as the fluctuation display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 147), are executed. Execute the process and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S3871, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871: Yes), then the specific period effect corresponding to the value of the variation number counter 223j is determined (S3872). , sets a specific period effect command for display (S3873), subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j (S3874), and steps S3812 to S3817 which are the same as the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above. , and terminate this process.

As described above, in this example, after the end of the jackpot, the extended display is executed and the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times), in a state where a predetermined period (4 seconds) has passed. , When the special symbol variation is started, since it is configured to execute the specific period effect corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol variations (the value of the variation counter), a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (4 Even if the special symbol variation is not performed a predetermined number of times (four times) within a second), the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation can be performed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when using the configuration of another example described above, the period for executing the extended display (the number of special symbol fluctuations) may be greater than the upper limit number of reserved symbols 2 (4), for example, the extension Set the maximum number of special symbol variations (for example, 0.5 second variation 8 times) that can be executed before the elapsed period (4 seconds), which is one of the display termination conditions, is set as the extension display termination condition. You can As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of continuing the performance during the big win, and to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, after the end of the jackpot, the display is executed after a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times). When a jackpot is won by the special symbol variation, the big win game is started after the special symbol variation of 0.5 second variation is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, 0.5. In addition to the special symbol fluctuation period of seconds, it may be configured to execute the fluctuation performance using the opening period of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the variable production using a period of 0.5 seconds or more, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand production.

<Regarding another control example of the expectation level suggesting effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225, another control example of the expectation degree suggesting effect of the first control example described above will be described. In this control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, an effect period in which the expectation level 1 display Dk1 to the expectation level 3 display Dk3, which are the expectation level display modes displayed in one variable effect, can be displayed respectively. and a period in which the expectation level increase mode Dk4 obtained by summing up the variable amount of each expectation level display mode during the variable performance is set during one variable performance (see FIG. 221), and each performance period is set. It is configured to be able to set an operation effective period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective.

Furthermore, when setting the variable production, when the production mode that does not display the three expectation level display modes is selected, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed using the points acquired by the expectation level increase mode Dk4. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to use the points acquired by the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution, so that the player is motivated. You can participate in games.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, description will be given of the effect contents in the control example for each book. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the flow of the expectation degree suggesting effect in this specific control example. It should be noted that description of elements that are the same as those of the expectation degree suggesting effect of the first control example described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 221, when the variable effect in which the expectation degree suggesting effect is performed is executed, the expectation for notifying the expectation level increase mode Dk4 in the current variable effect is held for 10 seconds from the time point 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. A degree-variable suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 102(b)). At the timing shown in FIG. 221(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 222(a) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 222(a), display contents displayed during the expectation degree suggesting effect will be described.

FIG. 222(a) is a diagram schematically showing a display example during a period from when the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 is notified until the expectation level increasing effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the value ("3UP" in this figure) obtained as the expectation degree increasing mode Dk4 is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2. Returning to FIG. 221, the description continues. After that, when 33 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, an expectation increase effect is executed in which the first operation effective period of 5 seconds is set (Fig. 221(c). In this state, the The display screen shown is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the first operation valid period, as shown in FIG. The value is displayed as a subtraction. By operating the frame button 22 during each operation effective period in this manner, the display mode of the corresponding expectation degree display can be changed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. It becomes possible. In addition, as shown in FIG. 221, since the expectation level 1 display is displayed across a plurality of operation effective periods, even if the frame button 22 is operated in any operation effective period, , the display mode may vary. As a result, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first operation effective period, if the display mode of the expectation level 1 display Dk1 does not change or if the amount of change is small, that is, in the middle stage of the variable effect (first It is possible to suppress the player's early loss of expectation for the big win during the effective period of one operation.

Next, referring to FIGS. 224 and 225, the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in another control example of this expectation level suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the contents of the expectation degree effect setting process 7. FIG. When the expectation degree effect setting process 7 is executed, first, the degree of expectation is selected based on the degree of expectation selection table 222i as in the first control example described above (S4251). Then, based on the selected degree of expectation, points to be given in the degree of expectation increase mode Dk4 are set (S4252), and based on the degree of expectation, effects are executed in each of the first period, the second period, and the third period. A mode is set (S4253).

When the process of S4253 is finished, it is determined whether there is a period (vacant period) during which the production mode is not set in each period (first period, second period, third period) (S4254), and the production mode is set. If there is a period (vacant period) during which the game is not played (S4254: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information indicating a win among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S4255). Here, if it is determined that there is prize winning information indicating a hit (S4255: Yes), during a period (vacant period) in which the production mode is not set, a reserved design variable production mode for varying the reserved design is set. (S4256), the process proceeds to S4257. On the other hand, in the processing of S4254, if there is no period during which the effect mode is not set (S4254: No), or in the processing of S4255, if it is determined that there is no winning information indicating winning (S4255: No), S4257 is performed as it is. to process.

In the process of S4257, the operation valid period (first operation valid period, second operation valid period, third operation valid period) for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set for each period in which the effect mode is set. It sets (S4257), sets an expectation effect command for display (S4258), and terminates this process.

As described above, in the expectation level effect setting process 7 (S3808), using the level of expectation selected based on the level of expectation selection table 222i, the given points used in the current variable effect and the given points are determined. It is configured to set the effect mode used. Then, whether or not the effect mode using the given points is selected for each of a plurality of periods (first period to third period) defined in association with the variation pattern of the variable effect to be executed this time. (whether or not to set an effect mode) and the effect mode is set based on the content of the effect mode (the type of expectation level display mode to be set, the display mode).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp in which period (first period to third period) which performance mode is to be executed. In addition, since the number of the expectation level display modes whose display mode can be changed using the value acquired as the expectation level rising mode Dk4 during the expectation variable suggestion production period is also indeterminate, it is acquired as the expectation level rising mode Dk4. Even if the value obtained is small (for example, 2UP), if the number of displays of the expected degree display mode to be executed is small, the value acquired as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 for the expected degree display mode is used. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play is lowered due to the performance result during the expectation level variable suggestion performance period.

In addition, in another control example of this expectation level suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. It may be provided in the middle of the variable effect (for example, between the second operation valid period (see FIG. 221(d)) and the third operation valid period (see FIG. 221(e))). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which the production using the value acquired as the expectation level increase mode Dk4 during the expectation level variable suggestion production is performed, so that the expectation level increase mode Dk4 has a large value ( For example, when 3) is obtained, the degree of expectation for the big win can be further increased. Also, it may be configured such that the expectation level variable suggestive effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, twice) during one variable effect.

Furthermore, in another control example of this expectation degree suggesting effect, when the effect mode using the given points is not set for a plurality of periods in which the operation valid period can be set, the display mode of the pending symbol as an additional effect However, other contents may be used as the additional effect, for example, values collected by the player (for example, another example of the first control example described above) It is also possible to add an effect for adding the accumulated value (see FIG. 176(c)) explained above or an effect for suggesting the current game state.

Further, the effect selection means that allows the player to select the effect to be executed even when the effect mode using the given points is set for all of the plurality of periods for which the operation valid period can be set. (For example, means for displaying a selection screen for selecting the effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and selecting the effect to be executed by the operation means that the player can operate) Based on this, the effect to be executed may be varied.

In the expectation effect setting process 7 described with reference to FIG. 224, the expectation level variable suggestive effect period is a fixed period of the variable effect (a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 221). Although it is configured so that the expectation effect command is set, as another configuration, for example, based on the determination result of the determination means that determines the expectation selected by referring to the expectation selection table 222i, The period during which the variable expectation suggestion effect is executed is set to a plurality of periods (for example, a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 221, a period after the first period shown in FIG. 221 (40 seconds to A period of 50 seconds)) may be provided with an expectation level variable suggesting performance period setting means for setting any period. As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the expectation level variable suggestive effect is executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Also, the period in which the variable expectation level suggesting effect is executed is set by the above-described variable expectation level suggesting effect period setting means based on elements other than the level of expectation selected by referring to the expectation level selection table 222i. For example, it is possible to set a period during which the expectation level variable suggesting effect is executed based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operating means, or the winning stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It may be configured to set a period during which the expectation level variable suggestion effect is executed based on information included in the information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 . When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051). It is determined whether it is during the period (S5901), and if it is determined that it is during the suspension variable effect setting period (S5901: Yes), a display variable command for varying the suspension design is set (S5902), and subtraction A display command indicating the points to be given later is set (S5903), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5901, if it is determined that it is not in the hold variable effect setting period (S5901: No), it is determined whether it is the first operation effective period (S5904), and it is determined that it is the first operation effective period. If so (S5904: Yes), set a display variable command for varying the first expectation level display (expectation level 1 display) Dk1 (S5905), and set a display command indicating the given points after subtraction. (S5903), this processing ends.

In the process of S5904, if it is determined that it is not the first operation effective period (S5904: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation effective period (S5906), and if it is determined that it is the second operation effective period (S5906: Yes), a display variable command for varying the second expectation display (expectation degree 2 display) Dk2 is set (S5907), and a display command indicating the given points after subtraction is set (S5903) , the process ends.

In the processing of S5906, if it is determined that it is not the second operation valid period (S5906: No), it is determined whether it is the third operation valid period (S5908), and if it is determined that it is the third operation valid period (S5908: Yes), a display variable command for varying the third expectation display (expectation degree 3 display) Dk3 is set (S5909), and a display command indicating the given points after subtraction is set (S5903) , the process ends.

As described above, in this control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the expectation degree 1 display Dk1 to the expectation degree 3 display, which are the expectation degree display modes displayed in one variation effect A performance period in which Dk3 can be displayed respectively and a period in which an expectation level increase mode Dk4, which is a sum of the variable amount by which each expectation level display mode is varied during the variable performance, can be set in one variable performance ( (See FIG. 221), it is possible to set an operation valid period for validating the operation of the frame button 22 for each presentation period.

Furthermore, when setting the variable production, when the production mode that does not display the three expectation level display modes is selected, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed using the points acquired by the expectation level increase mode Dk4. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to use the points acquired by the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution, so that the player is motivated. You can participate in games.

It should be noted that the points given in this control example are set so that they can all be used when the frame button 22 is operated during the entire operation valid period, and the fluctuation ends when the frame button 22 is not operated. It may be configured so that time remains, and the contents of the above-described title granting performance may be varied with respect to the remaining grant points at the end of the variation.

The wording "at the start of the jackpot (jackpot game) (during execution)" used when explaining each control example described above means that the jackpot lottery with special symbols is won and the jackpot game is started. It is used as a concept to indicate the timing of when the special symbols are drawn. It is a concept that includes the timing at which the opening period of is started, the timing at which the jackpot round game is started, and the like.

The phrase "at the end of the jackpot (jackpot game)" used in describing each control example described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the jackpot game ends. The concept includes the timing at which the final round ends, the timing at which the jackpot ending period ends, the timing at which the first lottery of special symbols is performed after the jackpot ends, and the like.

If specific timing is not specified in each of the above-described control examples for each wording used in such a concept, any of the above-described timings may be adopted as appropriate.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described in each control example described above may be combined as appropriate, and for example, the pachinko machine 10 having drop lottery means for executing the drop lottery used in the second control example described above. In contrast, a small winning lottery means for executing the small winning lottery used in the third control example described above may be provided.

In addition, the falling lottery means used in the above-described second control example executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the special symbol jackpot probability from a high probability state to a low probability state, but other than that. It may be used to shift (fall) the contents set for the elements of, for example, the probability of winning the normal pattern (second pattern) is shifted (falled) from a high probability state to a low probability state. It may be configured to execute a lottery for the purpose or a lottery for shifting (falling) the time saving state to the normal state.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is used as the operation means that the player can operate. Lever-shaped operation means that can be operated by the player in the forward and backward direction, touch sensor type operation means that detects the player's contact (or proximity), and photographing results of the photographing means that photographs the movement of the player. A camera-type operating means or the like may be provided for determining the . Also, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each control example described above, a configuration is used in which various effects to be executed are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing at least two or more of the various effects described in the above control examples , the player may select an effect to be actually executed from two or more executable effects.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine (so-called simultaneous variation machine) in which a lottery (variation) of a plurality of types of special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) is executed at the same time.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Plate Member 620 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member with light, wherein light is incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiation means is increased. A game machine A1, characterized in that it comprises an output increasing means for increasing the output, and the output increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion is provided, and light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member is provided. A game machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflective portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of game machine, for example, by arranging the light transmission member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the display of the liquid crystal display device can be seen by the player through the light transmission member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined game state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. to emit from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or design on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it is difficult to make (display) the pattern or pattern clearly stand out. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiation means not only increases the cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, which causes a problem that other members and equipment are affected by the heat.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since it is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in the light emitted from the light irradiation means, the light reflected by the reflecting portion It is possible to intensify the light emitted from the front of the transmissive member. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, thereby suppressing deterioration of the external appearance.

In addition, the formation position of the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the rear surface of the light transmitting member, or may be inside the light transmitting member.

The gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the emission increasing means comprises an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A2, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiation means is emitted to the side end surface of the light transmission member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the amount of light that is incident on the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member is reduced accordingly. Light collection efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light reaching the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member out of the light irradiated from the light irradiation means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be increased. , patterns and designs can be made to stand out (display) clearly. Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this way, the emission increasing means is provided with an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that when another device in the game area emits light In this case, the outer edge member blocks the light from the other device, so that the light can be suppressed from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the display of a pattern or design on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

A game machine A3, wherein in the game machine A2, the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end face and goes off to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that goes off to the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light transmission member, even if the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member, , the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface can block the light, so that the incident light from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member can be suppressed. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent a pattern or design from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

A game machine A4 in the game machine A2 or A3, characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end face of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmission member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiation means can be emitted. , the light can be reflected by the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

A game machine A5 in any one of the game machines A2 to A4, wherein the outer edge member is made of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A5, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member in the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are made of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It easily permeates to the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member is transmitted between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary between and, so that the light reaching the reflecting portion can be ensured.

A gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmission member.

According to the gaming machine A6, the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front or back surface of the light transmitting member and the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5. The light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected on the front or rear surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive indices of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, light from the side end face of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member, and more likely to be transmitted through the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member with a predetermined gap formed between the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the reflected light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the front or back (boundary with the air) of the light transmitting member, it is possible to secure the light reaching the reflecting portion.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , a curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear that meshes with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and rotates the pinion gear. and a driving means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape A curved rack gear is engraved on the outer edge member, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshing with the curved rack gear on the outer edge member, and a drive means for rotating the pinion gear. Rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, thereby rotating the light transmitting member together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member serves both to condense the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and to transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A7, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotating mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotary mechanism is provided with a plurality of supporting rings guided along the guide grooves, the light transmitting member is exposed to the light through the action of the guide grooves and the supporting rings. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state in which light can enter from the side end surfaces of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light-transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member can be viewed by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can serve both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivoted, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as a mode in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove. A form in which a fixed support wheel slides along a guide groove is exemplified.

In addition, in the game machine A8 subordinate to the game machine A7, the outer edge member having the curved rack gear carved on either the front or the back of the light transmissive member, and the outer edge member having the guide groove recessed on the light transmissive member. Preferably, they are arranged on the other of the front or back, respectively. That is, by arranging the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member, respectively, the light emitted from the light irradiation means does not directly enter the side end surfaces of the light transmission member, This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the rear side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front side and the outer edge member on the back side, respectively, and enter from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member. In addition, by arranging the outer edge member on each of the front side and the back side of the light transmission member in this way, the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and can be suppressed from being incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine A8, the outer edge member is formed so that its outer peripheral side faces the front or rear surface of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the opposing space between the outer edge member and the light transmission member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front or back of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the outer edge member and the light transmission member are formed. Since a guide groove is provided between and facing each other, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by making one inner wall of the guide groove bear on the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, the outer edge member does not need to be formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure described above.

In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member is directed to the front surface of the light transmission member. Alternatively, it can be made easier to reflect on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

In any one of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has a direction in which light is irradiated from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine A10, characterized in that it is disposed so that the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means emits the light. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of the light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front or rear surface of the light transmission member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Irradiation Unit 650 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface of each target member is directed toward the target member, wherein the plurality of light emitting means One or a plurality of elastically deformable substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture Characterized game machine B1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in a posture in which each of the irradiation surfaces faces the target member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015. -29735). According to this game machine, by irradiating light from the light emitting means and making it enter from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting section. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member from a light-transmissive material in a disc shape and forms a reflecting portion, and at the same time, arranges a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disc shape (target member). in such a manner as to surround the object member in a posture directed toward the object, and a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the object member was devised (unknown at the time of filing of the present application).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it was newly found that there is a problem that a plurality of light-emitting means must be arranged around the target member, and therefore the arrangement work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, they are oriented in different directions), the arrangement work is also troublesome from this point of view. .

In contrast, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted on one or more substrate members formed to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined posture in which the substrate members are elastically deformed. Since the base member is provided, by arranging one substrate member on the base member, the work of arranging at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the installation work of the light emitting means.

Further, when the substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is elastically deformed and held in a predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member individually, the work of disposing the light-emitting means can be reduced from this point as well.

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, a block body formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member and arranged on the substrate member is held by the base member.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. Also, it is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and to easily regulate the attitude of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be restrained from being affected by the warpage or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be easily maintained.

In the game machine B2, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the light-emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, since the light emitting means is arranged in the area of the board member where the block body is arranged, the posture of the light emitting means is the same as the warp of the board member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be more easily maintained.

In the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of the blocks are arranged on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the substrate member positioned between the blocks is elastically deformed so that the base member can be moved. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board member at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since the substrate member is held in a deformed (bent) posture by the base member, the posture of the light emitting means (the direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized compared to the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any one of game machines B2 to B4, the light-emitting means is disposed on the front surface of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is disposed on the substrate member on the side opposite to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the back side.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the object member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

A game machine B6 in the game machine B5, wherein the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front of the board member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front of the board member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front side of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member to prevent damage due to contact with the light emitting means.

In game machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. By arranging the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B7, one of the base body and the block body is provided with a projection, and the other of the base body and the block body has a fitting hole into which the projection is received and fitted. A game machine B8 characterized by being recessed in the.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B7, a projection is provided on one of the base body and the block body, and a fitting that receives and fits the projection is provided. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body and the block body, by fitting the projection into the fitting hole, the block body can be arranged on the base body, and labor for the arrangement work can be reduced. . In particular, when a plurality of blocks are arranged on a substrate member, and the blocks are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture, one of the blocks is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), the substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B8, the block body has a concave portion on the side thereof arranged on the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member accommodates the electronic components arranged on the substrate member. A gaming machine B9, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine B9, in any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a concave portion on the side of the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member is arranged on the substrate member. Since the electronic parts are housed, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Vertical Displacement Unit 800 as an Example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member for displacement. In the machine, an elastic member is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position under the action of gravity. In a state in which the displacement member is disposed on the base member so as to be displaced in a direction, and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. There is known a gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacing member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position (for example, one of the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position and the second position) overhanging the game area, and the motion of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. A production that makes the person visually recognize is performed. However, in the game machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in a direction toward position 2 and is displaced from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravitational force acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, a reciprocating displacement (approximately a single vibration ) can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravitational direction can be the orthographic projection of the uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied to the displacement member from the driving means, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-described displacement (orthographic projection of uniform circular motion). can be increased, and variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, simply by switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, it is possible to increase the variation of the displacement, and there is no need to complicate the structure and control, thus reducing the product cost and improving the reliability. can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the displacement member is formed such that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side moves up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, one end side is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and the other end side is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. When the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released and the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately single vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, such The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only vertical linear motion but also rotational motion centered on the one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such displacement members perform interesting displacements.

In the game machine C2, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is a rotating member that is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. and a connecting member whose one end is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and whose other end is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the transmission means includes a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a connecting member whose one end is connected to the position where the displacement member is positioned and whose other end is connected to the displacement member. When the displacement member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) by force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member can be changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the pushing/pulling direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed, Such a displacement member can be made to perform interesting displacements.

In the gaming machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are in balance, A game machine C4 characterized in that a direction connecting a connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and a connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially perpendicular to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at equilibrium (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in either direction of push or pull from equilibrium. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balanced position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member has a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position is provided. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including A gaming machine C5 characterized in that, when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to , the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact therewith.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the predetermined position of the movable range, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is positioned at the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, so the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled. When the displacement member is caused to reciprocate about the balanced position (predetermined position), it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range, thereby smoothing the reciprocation of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, in the outer range, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member so as to be able to contact and rotate. Rattling between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the game machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the protruding portion is used to suppress looseness between the rotating member and the connecting member, thereby adjusting the posture of the displacement member. While being stabilized, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position toward the second position by the driving force of the driving means, the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion can be avoided, so that the displacement member is acted upon. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is projected toward the center of the game area. , At the first position (retracted position), it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member, improve the appearance and improve durability, and suppress obstruction of the performance of other members. When displacing the from the first position toward the second position (overhanging position), it is possible to rapidly overhang (displace) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. .

In the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are positioned substantially on a straight line. Gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. Since the displacement member is positioned on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction to rotate the rotating member is generated. A condition that does not occur (ie dead center) can be created. Therefore, when displacing the displacement member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, and to displace the displacement member smoothly (quickly). After being arranged at the position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member due to the action of the dead point described above, thereby improving the appearance and improving the durability.

In any one of the game machines C3 to C7, the connection member includes a contact portion formed to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion corresponds to a connection position between the displacement member and the base member and the rotation position. It is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Game machine C8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connection member has an abutment portion formed to be able to abut against the base member, and the abutment portion includes the displacement member and the base. Since it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , when the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the abutting portion of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion between the rotating member and the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member are rotatable). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to the. As a result, the driving force of the drive means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the driving means comprises first driving means and second driving means. and two driving means, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. A game machine D1 characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in different manners.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and which performs an effect by displacing the displacement member. (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is arranged at a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area. An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the player visually recognizes the motion of the displaced member displaced toward the extended position.

However, the conventional game machine has a problem that the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional game machine, the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, so the production by the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. As a result, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is increased or decreased, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the two driving means, the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, the effect is not one pattern, and one displacement member is used in at least two ways. Since it can be displaced in the same displacement mode, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first drive means, and a first member slidably displaceably disposed on the base member and driven by the second drive means and a second member driven by a second member, wherein the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are respectively connected to the first member and the second member so as to be at least rotatable. .

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the first member slidably displaceably arranged on the base member and driven by the first drive means and the first member slidably displaceable on the base member and a second member driven by the second drive means, wherein the first and second portions of the displacement member are at least rotatably coupled to the first and second members, respectively, so that the When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the driving force of the second driving means causes the second member to slide. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by having the same rotation center and different rotation directions, but different rotation directions and different rotation centers. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, making it easier to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from either the first portion of the displacement member or the first member is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion of the displacement member and the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. Depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced by the above, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, there is no need for a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement along a curved trajectory. Therefore, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are curvedly displaced. ), for example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operational reliability.

A gaming machine D4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, since the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, the first driving means or the second driving means can be used. In addition to a displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (e.g., traverse) the entire displacement member. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, by switching the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are made different, and the kind of displacement itself is made different. (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, making it easier to surprise the player.

In the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member is different from the displacement speed of the second member. A gaming machine D5 characterized by speed.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is set to a different displacement speed, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be displaced (linearly moved) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, and can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacing member in a displacing manner in which such rotary motion and linear motion are combined in the conventional configuration in which the displacing member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , as in the present invention, it has become possible for the first time to utilize two driving means.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member is provided displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D5, the second displacement member is provided displaceably on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the second displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. , the device (variation) between the displacement mode by the first driving means and the displacement mode by the second driving means can be enlarged. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Unit 5600 as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light and light irradiation means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable. , a game machine E1 characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of them.

Here, a game comprising a displacement member displaceably formed between a first position and a second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacing the displacement member. machine is known (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this game machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is provided inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a translucent material is provided on the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light portion from the back side by the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (light-transmitting portion) emits light. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the light irradiating means irradiates the target member in a constant manner, there is little change in the manner in which the player visually recognizes it, and there is a problem that it is difficult to make the game interesting.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable. It is possible to change the mode of visual recognition by the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

Examples of the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed include a form in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and a form in which the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. Examples include a form in which two parts are combined, a form in which these are combined, and the like.

A gaming machine E2 in which the gaming machine E1 comprises a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member. The target wiring can be kept in a fixed state, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

The gaming machine E2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, allowing the player to visually recognize a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and is formed with a reflecting portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. A game machine E3 characterized by.

Here, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, it is possible for the player to visually recognize different portions of the target member through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which a first group of the plurality of groups constituting the reflective portion is visible through the opening, and a second group that is different from the first group is the opening. When the target member is displaceable between a second position and a second position where the target member is visible through While allowing the player to visually recognize the formed first pattern or pattern, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. , to a second pattern or pattern formed by a second group.

In this case, since the target member is made of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. Gaming machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and can rotate about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape on the base member. Therefore, compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced, the target member is arranged while securing the number of patterns and patterns that are visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. can reduce the space required for

In the game machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front and has a reflecting portion, and receives the light emitted from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. , the game machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape and has a reflective portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and is projected from the side end face. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the center of rotation of the target member.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( irrespective of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant. That is, it is possible to stably form patterns and patterns displayed by light emitted from the front of the target member.

A game machine E7 in which the game machine E1 comprises a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member, so that the combination of the displacements of the two allows the light irradiation means to move the target member. It is possible to increase the variation of changes in the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the manner in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make the player more interested.

In the gaming machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace the target member is provided, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E7, it is provided with a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means displaces the object by the driving force applied from the driving means. Since the member is displaced together with the target member when the member is brought into contact with the target member, it can be used as a drive unit for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a drive unit for displacing the light irradiation unit. can.

<Feature F group> (Free setting of countdown notice)
effect period setting means for setting one effect period out of different effect periods; specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a specific period set within the one effect period; a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for notifying in advance that a specific effect is to be executed; and notification effect setting means for setting a trigger for ending the notification effect based on information.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, a game configured to be able to execute a pre-notification effect (countdown effect) for informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect) is executed among the effects to be executed for a predetermined period. there is a machine (For example, JP-A-2013-198568).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect is to be executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for the big win. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is to be executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set. There is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the performance. In addition, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-described configuration, while the advance notification effect is being executed, the effect mode of the advance notification effect is varied (for example, the specific effect that is the target of the advance notification effect is varied). ), and the production effect cannot be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, as the execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is to be executed, the notification effect setting means sets the start opportunity based on the first information, and sets the start opportunity based on the second information. A termination trigger is set. As a result, the period for executing the information performance is set based on a plurality of different information, so that the period for executing the information performance can be freely set and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 has execution information determining means for determining execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information determining means as the second information. The game machine F2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that the specific production is to be executed is set as the second information, and the timing for ending the notification production is set. You can set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period in which the notification performance is executed, and at the same time, it is possible to execute the notification performance corresponding to the specific performance to be executed, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the execution information discriminating means discriminates at least the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that the specific production is to be executed is set as the second information, and the end timing of the notification production is set. You can set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the timing at which the specific performance is executed while allowing the period in which the notification performance is executed to be freely set, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F2 or F3 has specific effect setting means for setting one specific effect out of a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A gaming machine F4 characterized by:

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set the notification effect in accordance with the timing at which the specific effect is executed for a plurality of specific effects with different execution timings. can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the period during which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means sets the timing for setting the start timing of the notification effect based on the first information to be different from the timing for setting the timing to start the notification effect based on the second information, and sets the timing for ending the notification effect based on the second information. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that it sets .

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification performance can be set at different timings, so that the period during which the notification performance is executed can be freely set. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. Characterized game machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, after the notification performance is executed, by making it possible to set the termination trigger of the notification performance, the notification performance is executed after the notification performance is executed. Set the execution period. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, when the notification effect is executed, it is not set at which timing the specific effect to be executed is targeted for the notification effect, so it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the content of the notification effect in advance. can be reliably prevented.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F6, an operation means operable by the player, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means. operation determination means for determining that the operation means is operated during the performance, and the notification performance setting means sets the performance mode of the notification performance based on the determination result of the operation determination means. A gaming machine F7 characterized by:

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines F1 to F6, the performance period of the notification performance is set based on the operation content of the operation means during the operation performance, so the player's participation in the performance is increased. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. and at least the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

According to the game machine F8, in any of the game machines F1 to F7, the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information in the period during which the notification effect is executed, so the notification effect period can be set freely. , it is possible to secure a period for executing an effect based on the second information, and it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine F8, the notification effect executing means executes a time-dependent effect indicating a period of time until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8, the timing effect can be executed during the second notification effect period. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine F9, based on the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means and the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means, A game machine F10 characterized by comprising temporal performance period setting means for setting a period in which the temporal performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the period for executing the performance with time is executed for a certain period of time by the time-lapse performance period setting means based on the length of the performance period during which the notification performance is executed. As a trigger for executing performance over time, the timing obtained by subtracting a fixed period from the execution timing of the specific performance is determined, so even when a different performance period is set by the performance period setting means, the start timing of the specific performance can be accurately determined. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player.

In any one of the game machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the first effect to be executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information. The game machine F11 is characterized by having a first effect mode varying means for varying the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during one notification effect period.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the performance mode of the first performance executed during the first notification performance period is established while the first performance is being executed. It is changed when a possible effect variable condition is established. As a result, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that the effect variable condition is satisfied when the notification effect setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification effect.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the timing for ending the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is determined, the effect mode of the first effect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set end timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine F1, an operating means operable by a player, an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the operating means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means. operation determination means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. A gaming machine F13, wherein the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the trigger for ending the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to change the presentation period of the notification presentation by the operation of the player, and to enhance the presentation effect.

The gaming machine F13 has specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. A gaming machine F14 characterized in that the information for the game is the second information.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F13, a specific period during which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and during the set specific period Since the effect period of the notification effect can be varied based on the above, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

In the game machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period out of a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect executing means is set by the specific period setting means. A gaming machine F15 characterized by executing the specific effect corresponding to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14, a specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the game machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and sets the length of the second notification effect period to correspond to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has an effect period variable means for varying the effect period. A gaming machine F16 characterized by:

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effects of the game machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period, The length of the notification effect is varied by varying the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation contents of the operating means during the operation effect. Therefore, when the length of the notification effect is varied, it is possible to ensure the period during which the operation effect is executed, so there is an effect that the effect can be executed in which the player can easily operate the operation means.

<Characteristic G group> (Variation of HP display)
Determination means for executing determination based on performance information; Variable performance execution means for executing variable performance for varying performance values based on the determination result of the determination means; a first effect value determining means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value, and the effect value when the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means. and a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the value of the second effect value.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won a big win. Then, as a variable production, a game machine executes a production (battle production) in which the player's character and the enemy character play against each other, and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the production. be. (For example, JP-A-2015-9075).

In such a conventional game machine, the effect of reducing the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle performance, and the decreasing physical strength points are used to determine whether the player has won the jackpot or not. By notifying the player in advance of the execution timing of the effect of (1), the variable effect can be executed while increasing the player's expectation for the big win. Furthermore, by setting in detail the physical strength points that decrease during the battle production, the number of production patterns of the battle production is increased, thereby suppressing the players from becoming bored with the battle production. However, in the conventional game machine, detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen are managed, and the next physical strength points are set based on the managed physical strength points. There is a problem that the amount of processing for management becomes enormous. It should be noted that it is possible to simplify the reduction management of physical strength points by reducing the number of patterns in which physical strength points are reduced during battle production. There was a problem that I got tired of it.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by the plurality of determining means, it is easier to increase the variations of the effect value than when the effect value is determined by one determining means. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine G1, an effect state setting means capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed, and when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means, the effect value is set. a production value updating means for continuously variably updating; and a first production value storage means capable of storing the first production value determined by the first production value determining means, wherein the production value updating means is A gaming machine G2, characterized in that said effect value is variably updated based on said first effect value stored in said first effect value storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, when the rendering value determined based on the first rendering value and the second rendering value is variably updated, the combined rendering value is not used. Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the effect value actually displayed (the effect value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value) is reduced. It is possible to reduce the patterns of values (first effect values) variably updated by the effect value updating means with respect to the display patterns, and to reduce the processing load.

In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value updating means, and an effect for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine G3, characterized by comprising mode display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect updating means is displayed. There is an effect that the variable amount of the effect value can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is composed of a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the A game machine G4, characterized by having effect value summing means for calculating the effect value by summing the effect value with a second effect value.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the first effect value, which is part of the effect value, and the second effect value, which is different from the first effect value, are added by the effect value adding means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be diversified.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a prescribed discrimination condition is established, and a privilege is given based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. and a privilege granting means, wherein the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the determination by the determining means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined when the determination by the determination means is executed, and the effect value changes. An effect can be executed so as to be related to the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable state of the production value, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the fact that the first effect value determining means has determined the first effect value. A game machine G6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first rendering value is determined, the second rendering value is determined. A production value that is the sum of the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the effect value that is changed by the execution of the discrimination by the discriminating means.

In the game machine G5 or G6, the game machine G7 is characterized in that the first effect value determination means varies the variable amount of the first effect value based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be changed based on the determination result of the determination means, so that the variable amount of the effect value can be changed for the player. can be made to pay attention, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determination means makes it easy to determine the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value is, the easier it is to give the privilege, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable amount of the effect value. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G8, a first range or a second range different from the first range as a selection range in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determination means can be selected. and determination value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and the second effect value determination The means selects one selection range from among a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means, and determines the second effect value. A game machine G9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the selection range for selecting the second rendering value is varied based on whether the first rendering value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. can let Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect value.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a first selection range storing a range in which the first effect value can be increased and decreased, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. and a second selection range in which the second effect value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value as a determination result of the determined value determining means. (2) a game machine G10, wherein the second effect value is set by selecting the second selection range;

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G9, when the first rendering value is less than the predetermined value, the second rendering value for decreasing the first rendering value is selected. It is possible to suppress the effect value obtained by adding the value and the second effect value from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when a lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to suppress the determination of a value greater than the lower limit value as the effect value, giving the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that causes the user to be overwhelmed.

<Characteristic group H> (Suggestion of advantageous period of falling lottery machine)
First determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is established, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game when a first determination result by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a high-probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination means is likely to be the predetermined first determination result; a probability setting means capable of setting a low-probability state in which the first determination result is unlikely to occur; The probability setting means sets the low probability state when the second determination result by the second determination means is the predetermined second determination result. A game state setting means capable of setting, as game states, a first game state in which the predetermined determination condition is likely to be established, and a second game state in which the predetermined determination condition is more difficult to be established than in the first game state. and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for notifying the period during which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means includes: The second game state is set when the first condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set, and the period effect executing means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. and a second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect, and the first condition is set by the probability setting means. Established when both the first requirement that the low-probability game is set and the second requirement that the determination is performed a predetermined number of times by the first determination means in the state where the first game state is set are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising a period effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the period effect in correspondence with the establishment information of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the game state is set to an advantageous game state (for example, a probability variable state in which the probability of winning is high) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the player wins. There is a gaming machine that indicates to the player whether or not the period in which the game state continues will end, depending on the result of an effect (for example, a battle effect). (For example, JP-A-2011-143197).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, if a win is made while the advantageous gaming state continues, the effect result of the win pattern in which the character wins is displayed, and if a win is made when the advantageous gaming state ends, the winning pattern is displayed. The result of the defeat pattern is displayed, and if the win is not won (when the advantageous game state is set continuously), the battle effect is displayed so that the result of the draw pattern without winning or losing is displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the battle production, and to enhance the production effect. However, if the game is executed for a long period of time without winning a win in an advantageous game state, as a result, it becomes easier to execute a battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed, and the player does not respond to the battle effect. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a specific variation pattern is drawn without winning a prize as a result of the lottery, the draw pattern battle effect is executed. When a specific variation pattern is continuously drawn, there is a problem that the battle performance of the draw pattern is continuously executed, and the player's expectation for the battle performance is further lowered.

According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are met based on the presentation mode of the second presentation. Thus, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the effect mode of the second effect to be newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the period presentation.

In the game machine H1, the game machine H2 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a first effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the effect mode of the first effect for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is the effect result of the second effect, and the first condition or Since it is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied can be predicted according to the effect mode of the first effect. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay more attention to the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1 or H2, the effect mode of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is based on whether or not the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the second effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when either the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Characterized game machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the effect mode of the period effect is changed by satisfying any one of the plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition. variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is established according to the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the period effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means determines the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. The game machine H5 is characterized in that it sets an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result.

According to the gaming machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied can be suggested by the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while giving him/her a sense of danger, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied, and It is characterized in that the easiness of establishment of the performance switching condition is differentiated between when the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and when the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the second Since the frequency of execution of one performance can be varied, the currently set probability state can be predicted based on the frequency of execution of the first performance, and interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that the gaming machine H6 has condition setting means for making it easier to establish the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is established.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, it is possible to facilitate execution of the first effect during a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency with which the first effect is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the period effect execution means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. A gaming machine H8 characterized by:

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the determination result of the first determination means is the determination result that the privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the first performance is executed, the player pays attention to the performance while being conscious of whether or not the privilege game is won or whether or not the first condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the performance that is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8 has a number-of-time measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect executed while the first game state is continuously set by the game state setting means. The game machine H9 is characterized in that the second effect mode setting means sets the second effect mode based on the number of executions of the period effect counted by the frequency counting means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period presentation is repeatedly executed, the second presentation mode is set based on the number of repetitions. When the game state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, effect period determination means for determining a effect period after the first effect is executed by the period effect execution means; a performance regulation means for regulating execution of the first performance by the period performance execution means when the performance period determined by the performance period determination means is within a predetermined period. Characterized game machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the presentation switching condition is established, it is determined that the presentation period after the first presentation is executed is within a predetermined period. When it is done, the execution of the first effect is regulated by the effect regulating means. As a result, frequent execution of the first effect can be suppressed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the execution of the first effect.

In the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is not restricted by the effect regulation means. Characteristic game machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H10, the first effect that is executed when the privilege game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the performance period determining means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress deterioration of the performance effect when executed. In addition, when the first performance is executed again within a predetermined performance period after the previous first performance is executed, the degree of expectation for execution of the privilege game can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced. has the effect of

<Feature J group> (Different target effects at the notification timing of the expectation increase effect)
Expectation level display control means capable of displaying, on a display means, a plurality of expectation level display modes capable of suggesting in stages an expectation level indicating that a predetermined condition has been established; display mode changing means for stepwise varying an expectation level display mode; variable information setting means for setting variable information to be varied by the display mode varying means; and at least one of the plurality of expectation level display modes. variable suggestion effect execution means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree display mode is variable, wherein the expectation level display control means controls the expectation level in at least one of the plurality of expectation level display modes. The game machine J1 is characterized in that display modes are displayed on the display means at different timings, and that the game machine J1 has an execution timing setting means for setting timings for executing the variable suggestive effects.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won a big win. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, there are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the degree of expectation of the big win, and the degree of expectation of the big win in this variable performance is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player by the display mode of the character that is displayed. (For example, JP-A-2013-248305).

In such a conventional game machine, the degree of expectation for a big win can be shown to the player by the display mode of the characters displayed during the variable performance, so that the player is interested in the performance contents of the variable performance to be executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, among the plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation display modes are provided in which a display mode corresponding to the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win to the player by judging it realistically, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation for the big win based on the display modes of the plurality of types of expectation degree display modes, and the effect is executed. It was possible to make the player pay attention to the contents, and to enhance the performance effect. In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation level display mode is configured to be executable, and which display mode is to be displayed as the expectation level display mode. There is also a game machine that executes an expectation degree display mode pre-suggestion effect for making a player predict in which display mode the expectation degree display mode will be displayed as a variable effect. There is also a game machine that changes the display mode of the degree-of-expectation display mode from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation level display modes, when an expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation level display mode is executed, expectations that are not subject to the expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect This implicitly denies that the degree display mode is variable, and there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered.

According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect execution means provides a variable suggestion effect suggesting that one of the plurality of expectation level display modes displayed on the display means at different timings will be varied. executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestive effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestive effect can be varied. As a result, even if the same presentation mode is used as the variable suggestion presentation, there is an effect that it is possible to make the expectation degree display mode that is the suggestion target of the variable suggestion presentation different.

In the gaming machine J1, a determination means for performing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit based on the result of determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; and wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation level display mode can easily indicate a high expectation level. I will keep an eye on the content. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the variable suggestion effect notifies variable information of an expectation level display mode that is changed in stages.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, it is possible to inform the variable information of the target expectation level display mode by the variable suggestion performance, so that the variable suggestion performance can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user pay attention and enhance the production effect.

In the game machine J3, the variable suggestive effect displays a plurality of variable amounts including at least a variable amount for indicating the extent to which the degree-of-expectation display mode is actually varied. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as the variable suggestive effect. There is an effect that the game can be played with expectation so that the amount becomes a real variable amount, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, a game machine having target notification means for notifying an expectation degree display mode targeted for the variable suggestion performance executed by the variable suggestion performance execution means before the variable suggestion performance ends. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestive effect to be executed this time, the variable There is an effect that the suggestive performance can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In any one of the game machines J2 to J5, an expectation class setting means for setting an expectation class based on the determination result of the discriminating means, and based on the expectation class set by the expectation class setting means and an expectation level setting means for setting an expectation level for each of the plurality of expectation level display modes, wherein the expectation level display control means comprises the plurality of expectation level display modes set by the expectation level setting means. of the expectations, the expectation level display mode for indicating at least a part of the expectations is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the already displayed expectations and the expectations level setting means. A game machine J6 characterized in that a difference from the expected degree is suggested as the variable amount.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines J2 to J5, an effect is executed that suggests the difference between the already displayed expectation level and the preset expectation level as a variable amount. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation level display mode in which the high expectation level is already displayed, the benefit is given. can increase the likelihood of Therefore, not only the performance content of the variable suggestive performance but also the display mode of the current degree of expectation display mode is selected by lottery, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine J2, an operation means operable by a player, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for causing the operation means to be operated, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. operation determination means for determining that the means has been operated, wherein the display mode changing means varies the degree of expectation display mode according to the determination result by the operation determination means. Characterized game machine J8.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2, the degree-of-expectation display mode can be varied in response to the operation of the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means. has the effect of

In the gaming machine J8, a determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; Acquisition means for acquiring entry information when a prescribed acquisition condition is met, and storing the entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a prescribed number as an upper limit until the prescribed determination condition is met. possible storage means, preliminary discrimination means for executing preliminary discrimination based on the said entering ball information stored in the storing means, and the number of entering ball information indicating the number of said entering ball information stored in said storing means. and display means for displaying the number of entered ball information displayed by the displayed means for the number of entered ball information in response to the determination result of the operation determination means when a predetermined additional condition is met. The game machine J9 is characterized by comprising an additional effect executing means for executing an additional effect for changing the display mode for indicating the number of entered ball information.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the display mode for indicating the number of entered ball information can be changed by the additional effect executed in response to the operation of the operating means. , there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

The game machine J9 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether the expectation level display mode displayed by the expectation level display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and the effect condition determining means satisfies the effect condition. A game machine J10 characterized in that the additional condition is satisfied when it is determined that the additional condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J9, when the expectation degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy the predetermined rendering conditions, the additional rendering is executed. There is an effect that the relevance can be given and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J10, the effect condition determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the expectation level display control means does not display a predetermined number of the expectation level display modes. Game machine J11.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J10, by executing additional effects, the number of effects to be executed can be complemented. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease.

<Feature K group> (Holding consecutive jackpot production)
Determining means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is established; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; and a predetermined acquisition condition. acquisition means for acquiring entry information when the condition is satisfied; and storage means capable of storing the entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. and a pre-discrimination means for executing pre-discrimination based on the entered ball information stored in the storage means, wherein the pre-discrimination means determines that a pre-discrimination condition is satisfied at least during the privilege game. The pre-determination is executed when the pre-determination is performed, and the pre-determination means has a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode during the privilege game corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, ball entry information is acquired based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, and holding means capable of holding the entry information until a lottery condition is established, and a lottery condition is established. A lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on ball entry information when the player wins, and an execution means for executing a winning game advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is winning. There is a game machine. Then, it has a preliminary discrimination means for discriminating in advance the entering ball information held in the holding means before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the advance discrimination means determines that there is a winning in the holding at the time of the end of the winning game. There is a gaming machine that continues to display the display mode (the number of rounds) during a winning game when it is determined. (For example, JP-A-2014-30737).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, when a win is won again during a hold, a special effect can be executed during the second win game, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction. However, it is configured to discriminate the winning information held at the end of the jackpot, and during the first winning game, the effect set at the time of winning is only executed, so for example, winning during the first winning game Even if the prize winning information is reserved, the performance for the first winning game cannot be changed, and the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

In addition, although the production is configured to be continuous with respect to a plurality of winning games, only the production that allows the player to easily identify the break between the first winning game and the second winning game is executed. , there is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how many winning games will be executed during the performance that is continuously executed during the winning game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the effect mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means executed during the privilege game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the effect mode corresponding to the preliminary determination result.

In the gaming machine K1, the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means includes a plurality of small privilege games, and the preliminary determination condition is established when the minor privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, when the small privilege game is executed, the pre-determining condition is satisfied and the effect mode during the privilege game is set, so the execution status of the small privilege game It is possible to set the effect mode of the privilege game in accordance with. Therefore, even if the performance mode of the privilege game is set during the privilege game, there is an effect that the privilege game can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

The gaming machine K2 has privilege game selection means for selecting one privilege game from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A game machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, one privilege game is selected from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. There is an effect that variation can be provided and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the pre-determining means, when the result of the pre-determining is a predetermined result of pre-determining, the storing means includes the entering ball information for executing the privilege game. The performance mode setting means sets the performance mode during the privilege game corresponding to the number of small privilege games to be executed in the privilege game pre-determined by the preliminary discrimination means. A game machine K4 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, the effect mode during the privilege game is set according to the number of the small privilege games determined by the preliminary determination means, so that the player can enjoy the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user pay attention to the production mode.

In a gaming machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means, and the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means. Among them, a small privilege game number reporting means for reporting at least a part, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means, and the small privilege reported by the small privilege game number reporting means a first difference determination means for determining a difference from the number of games; and a notification for setting the number of the small privilege games to be notified by the number of small privilege games notification means based on the determination result of the first difference determination means. and a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the number of small privilege games (round games) to be executed during the privilege game (jackpot) is partially notified, so that one privilege can be obtained. To make it difficult for a player to grasp the number of small privilege games to be executed during a game, and to play a game while expecting that more small privilege games are executed even while the privilege games are being executed. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine K5 is characterized by comprising adding means for adding the number of said small privilege games to be executed in said privilege game pre-determined by said pre-determination means to said execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, when it is determined in advance that the privilege game will be executed by the prior determination means during the privilege game (jackpot), in the privilege game determined in advance The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the adding means. As a result, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times at short intervals, the number of the small privilege games notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is the number of the small privilege games to be executed in the later privilege game. can be set by adding the number of Therefore, by seeing the number of small privilege games notified during the privilege game by the small privilege game number reporting means, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed, and one privilege game ends. There is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after playing.

The game machine K5 or K6 has update determination means for determining whether or not to update the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games informing means when the small privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5 or K6, the number of small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notifying means is determined by the update determining means. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small privilege game is executed, even if the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number reporting means is not updated, when the next small privilege game is executed, It is possible to leave the possibility of updating the number of small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games informing means, and it is possible to play games while expecting that more small privilege games will be executed. effective.

In the game machine K7, a forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notification means when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition. A game machine K8 characterized by having:

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition, the forced update means is notified by the small privilege game number notification means. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games being played, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period during which the player is allowed to play the privilege game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, executed small privilege game number reporting means for reporting the number of the small privilege games already executed, the number of the small privilege games reported by the small privilege game number reporting means, Second difference determination means for determining a difference from the number of small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means, and when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies a second condition. and forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notification means.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7 or K8, when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means reports by the small bonus game number reporting means. To prevent the number of executed minor privilege games from becoming larger than the number of minor privilege games notified by a minor privilege game number informing means in order to forcibly update the number of executed minor privilege games. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number reporting means performs the prior determination of the entering ball information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period of time during which the privilege game is executed. is a result of the predetermined pre-determination result, a game machine K10 which executes notification of the number of specific small bonus games.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines K5 to K9, among the periods during which the privilege game is being executed, the entering ball information acquired within the specific period is the privilege game as a result of the preliminary determination. , the specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of obtaining information on entering a ball during a privilege game.

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number reporting means a third difference determining means for determining a difference; and when the determination result of the third difference determining means satisfies a third condition in a state where the one privilege game is finished, the one privilege game is finished. and effect continuation means for continuing the effect executed during the privilege game until a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, when the determination result by the third difference determination means satisfies the third condition, the effect continuation means executes during the privilege game. The effect will continue to be displayed. As a result, when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the privilege game is to be executed, an effect to be executed during the privilege game can be continuously displayed after the end of the first privilege game. be.

In the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K11, during the period from the end of the first privilege game to the execution of the second privilege game by the effect continuation means, during the privilege game It is possible to reliably execute the production to be performed. Therefore, since a series of performances can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, it is possible to play the game while expecting that more small privilege games will be executed while the performance is being executed. effective.

In any one of the game machines K5 to K12, stored number determination means for determining the number of the entered ball information stored in the storage means when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; and a performance mode storage means for storing a plurality of performance modes to be executed during the privilege game, and stored in the performance mode storage means based on the number of the entering means determined by the storage number determination means. A gaming machine K13, characterized in that it has privilege game effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, in the case of a predetermined determination result, an effect mode during the privilege game is performed based on the number of entered ball information stored in the storage means. is selected, various effects can be provided to the player during the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the effect mode storage means stores, as the plurality of effect modes, that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result when the privilege game is started. A gaming machine K14, characterized in that it stores at least a first performance mode that can be notified to the player and a second performance mode that can be notified to the player after the privilege game is finished.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K13, it is notified that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result by the performance mode selected by the special game performance mode selection means. Since it is possible to vary the timing of the display, the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group L> (change the production frequency with the game history)
Determining means for executing determination when a determination condition is established, effect executing means for executing an effect for indicating the determination result of the determining means, and effect for indicating a specific result of determination by the effect executing means. When a special condition is satisfied, a memory means for storing corresponding game information as history information; and determining means for determining, based on the history information, whether to execute a specific effect among the effects to be executed.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, there is a game machine that executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player, as the variable effect that is executed for a predetermined period. (For example, JP-A-2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the presentation mode is varied based on the player's operation on the operating means, the player can be motivated to participate in the game. However, there is a problem that if the operation effect is frequently executed for a player who does not operate the operating means with enthusiasm, the player's desire to play will decrease.

According to the gaming machine L1, since execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the specific effect according to the progress of the game, etc., thereby improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine L1 has an effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables are set so that the selection rate of the specific effect is different, and the determination means selects the effect corresponding to the history information. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the game machine L2, the selection rate of the specific performance can be switched by selecting the corresponding performance selection table in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, so that the selection rate of the specific performance can be varied with easy control. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine L1 or L2 has operation means operated by a player and operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and one of the effects includes the An operation effect is set to change the effect mode when the operation determination means determines the predetermined operation, and the specific condition is at least one condition that the operation determination means determines the predetermined operation. A game machine L3 characterized by being set to the conditions of

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operation means in the operation presentation, not only can the presentation mode be changed, but also the specific condition can be easily established, so that the history information can be obtained. can be varied and the execution ratio of the specific performance can be affected.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, accumulation means capable of accumulating at least the history information, setting means capable of setting accumulation values up to a predetermined upper limit based on accumulation results of the accumulation means, and selecting means for selecting an accumulated privilege system corresponding to the set accumulation value from among a plurality of accumulated privilege systems; and accumulated privilege granting means for imparting an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system selected by the selecting means. and, when the new accumulated value is set by the setting means, the accumulated privilege granting means gives a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selecting means. and wherein the selection means selects one accumulated privilege system from among a plurality of accumulated privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, an accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is awarded. As a result, based on the history information, both the setting of the frequency with which the specific effect is executed and the provision of the accumulated benefit are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L4, the accumulated privilege imparted by the accumulated privilege imparting means differs for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selecting means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L4, the accumulated benefits to be granted can be varied according to the accumulated privilege system, so the enjoyment of obtaining various accumulated benefits while changing the operation contents of the operating means. can be provided to the player. Further, by changing the operation contents of the operation means, it is possible to change the performance frequency, so that there is an effect that the player can be provided with a new enjoyment for the performance to be executed.

The game machine L5 is characterized by comprising history information erasing means for erasing the history information stored in the storage means to the extent that the different accumulated privilege systems can be selected by the selecting means. Game machine L6 to play.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5, the history information can be deleted to the extent that a different accumulated privilege system can be selected. It is possible to make it easier for the accumulated privilege system to be selected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits.

In addition, since the history information is partially erased by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value set by the setting means also changes (decreases). There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the value is reached and the performance effect is lowered.

A game machine L7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines L4 to L6, the game machine L7 is characterized by having guide means for guiding game contents for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6, a specific accumulated privilege system is selected by playing a game based on the game content guided by the guidance means. Therefore, there is an effect that various accumulation benefits can be given to the player, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides game contents for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by varying the performance mode of the operation performance.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machine L7, since the presentation mode of the operation presentation can be varied by the guide means, a different accumulated benefit system can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the presentation mode of the operation presentation. It will be done. Therefore, there is an effect that various benefits can be given to the player and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine L8, the guide means selects, as the effect mode of the operation effect, a notification effect mode in which the operation means is made to perform the predetermined operation, or a non-report effect mode in which no notification is made. A game machine L9 characterized in that it guides game contents by using a.

According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effects, it is possible to execute the effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easily performed on the operation means and the effect mode in which it is difficult to perform the operation means. A different accumulated benefit system can be selected simply by operating. Therefore, there is an effect that various benefits can be given to the player and the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9 has system selection means for allowing the player to select the specific accumulated privilege system corresponding to the game contents guided by the guide means from among the plurality of accumulated privilege systems. A game machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9, it is possible to notify the game content so that the player can select the accumulated privilege system desired by the player, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, and L1 to L10, A gaming machine K1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, and L1 to L10, The game machine K2 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, and L1 to L10, The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
222g Continuation value sub-selection table (selection range storage means)
222g1 First continuous value subselection table (first selection range)
222g2 Second continuous value sub-selection table (second selection range)
S3805 Effect state setting means S4010 Effect value updating means S4011 Variable effect executing means S4101 Judging means S4102 First effect value determining means S4103 First effect value storing means S4105, S4106 Second effect value determining means

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine that executes a production (battle production) in which a player character and an enemy character play against each other, and notifies the result of winning or not based on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the production. There is In this conventional gaming machine, the result of winning can be suggested by the effect, so that the player can be interested in the effect to be executed. This was intended to increase interest.

JP 2015-9075 A

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises: determining means for executing determination based on performance information; Effect execution means, first effect value determination means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value when the variable effect is executed by the variable effect execution means, and the first effect value determination. a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the effect value when the first effect value is determined by the means. is.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, determination means for executing a determination based on the performance information; variable performance execution means for executing a variable performance for varying the performance value based on the determination result of the determination means; a first effect value determining means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value when the variable effect executing means executes the variable effect; A second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the effect value when the effect value is determined.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the displacement unit; FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member; FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; FIG. 20 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; 22 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21; FIG. Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; 24 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the displacement unit in the second aspect; 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 25; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of a displacement unit in a third aspect; FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27; 4 is a front view of the projection unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the projection unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. It is a front view of a back base. FIG. 4B is a rear view of the front base and the illumination unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the front base; 35 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34; FIG. 4 is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member and groove forming member; FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member and groove forming member taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37; FIG. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). (a) to (c) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). 44(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 44(b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit taken along line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 44(b). (a) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block along line XLVIb-XLVIb in FIG. 46(a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block taken along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in a second position; FIG. 4B is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position; (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the intermediate position, and (c) is the transmission in the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (a) to (c) are rear views of a transmission gear and a connecting member in the first drive range. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 57 is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXc-LIXc of FIG. 56; FIG. 60(a) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. 64(a) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. (a) is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and (b) is a projection plate along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a); FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the second block. FIG. 11 is a front view of a projection unit in a fifth embodiment; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. Fig. 10 is a rear view of the front base; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the projection unit; (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. FIG. 21 is a front view of a projection unit in a sixth embodiment; FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the front base with the front base and the irradiation unit assembled. (a) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing game states and effects in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the effect 1 during the big win in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the effect 2 during the big win in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the effect 3 during the big win in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing another example of the effect content of the effect 1 during the big win in the first control example. is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when an additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is started, and (b) is a diagram showing the first It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big-hit continuous production|presentation among the additional production|presentations displayed by 3 design display devices. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the number of rounds is added among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big-hit continuous production among the additional production|presentations displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1 control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot ending screen among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when a big hit is complete|finished among the additional effects displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the end of a big hit among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a continuous jackpot effect among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a special symbol high-speed change after the end of a big win, in the normal winning effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; [FIG. 11] is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a big win is won among normal winning effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. 8 is a timing chart showing the flow of a battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the battle mode displayed with the 3rd design display device in the 1st example of control. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pre-battle effect in the battle mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a battle ready-to-win display mode among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when winning Battle Reach among the battle modes displayed on the device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a draw in battle reach among the battle modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of being defeated by battle reach among the battle modes displayed with a 3rd design display device. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a battle ready-to-win resurrection effect in the battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the prognostic effect among the suggestion effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the countdown effect|presentation among the suggestive effects displayed on a display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the specific production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display device in the 1st example of control. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of suggestive effects executed within one variation among the suggestive effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of suggestive effects that are executed in multiple variations among the suggestive effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an expectation level suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an expectation level suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the expectation degree suggestion production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is the main controller in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of this. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the variation pattern table for big hits (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (d) is a schematic representation of the specified contents of the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the special variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot transition setting table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example; (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 1 table; 2C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 2 table, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 3 table. , (e) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 4 table, and (f) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 5 table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a state transition 6 table out of the state transition tables set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a state transition 7 table FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, (c) schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 8 table, and (d) schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 9 table. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the first control example; ((a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example) be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol reserved ball number counter in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the reserved rank selection table in the first control example. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the effect selection table during the jackpot. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the addition number selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the continuous effect mode selection table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the continuous value main selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first continuous value sub-selection table. , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second continuation value sub-selection table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the final mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the contents of effects set as the final mode. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the expectation level selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the expectation level effect selection table. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 7 is a flow chart showing variation count subtraction processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process during a jackpot performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows processing during addition production which is performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 1st example of control. 9 is a flow chart showing an additional display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process after a big hit performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing extension management processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing continuous value setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an expectation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing countdown effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a multiple variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing continued value-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing expectation level effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing countdown effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a character effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the example of adding the effect of the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a character effect displayed on a third symbol display device in an example of adding an effect of the first control example, and (b) is an example of adding an effect of the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which resets the title displayed with the 3rd design display device in an example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the additional example of the effect of the first control example; (b) is the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the example of the additional effect of the first control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the transformation pattern table in the additional example of the effect of the first control example, and (b) is the specification of the title system selection table in the example of the additional effect of the first control example. FIG. 12B is a diagram schematically showing the contents, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the title selection table in the effect addition example of the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the character object action level selection table in the example of addition of effect of the first control example, and (b) is a group of effect settings in the example of addition of effect of the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing change processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing title setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, and (b) is the prescribed contents of the falling lottery table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example; (d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a fall state transition 1 table out of the fall state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a falling state transition 2 table out of the falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the example of addition of the effect of the second control example. is a block diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the final mode selection 3 table in the second control example. is a diagram shown in FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing state determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in another example of the second control example; It is a schematic diagram. 10 is a flow chart showing countdown effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of effect. 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of effect. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the third control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the third control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example, (b) is the variation pattern selection table in the third control example Among them, it is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the big hit (variable probability) variation pattern table, and (c) is the first out (variable probability) variation pattern for the first out of the variation pattern selection table in the third control example FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the table, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the second outlier (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table among the fluctuation pattern selection tables in the third control example. It is a figure, (e) is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the special (probability variation) variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables in the 3rd control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example; (b) to (d) are diagrams in the third control example; FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of fluctuation scenarios 1 to 3 defined in a fluctuation scenario table. (a) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the defined contents of variation scenarios 4 to 7 defined in the variation scenario table in the third control example, respectively. (a) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the defined contents of variation scenarios 8 to 11 defined in the variation scenario table in the third control example, respectively. FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example, and FIG. 8B is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a first continuous value main selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a second continuous value main selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a third continuous value main selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the continuous production|presentation mode selection 4 table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a third control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 10 is a flow chart showing variation count subtraction processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the third control example. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; 14 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a continuous value setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing continued value-related command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing final mode command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example; is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example, and (b) is a third control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation scenario A1 defined in a variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example; ) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the post-small hit variation scenario stipulated in the variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in another example of the suggestive effects described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in another example of the suggestive effects described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing countdown effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a second precursor effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 6 in the additional explanation of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of an effect in another example of the expectation level suggesting effect explained in the first control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing display screens in another example of the expectation level suggesting effect described in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing display screens in another example of the expectation level suggesting effect described in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing countdown effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the expectation degree suggesting effect described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring and effect processing 7 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the expectation degree suggesting effect explained in the first control example; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16. - 特許庁

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing probability, shortening the working hours, or normal, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 judges whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also judges the kind of big win when it is judged as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state in which the probability is not variable or the time is shortened (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric role product 140a is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric role product 140a is in the closed state (closed state) The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric role product 140a is opened once. At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric role product 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric role product 140a and the second electric role product 82 are opened at one time. It is also possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol so as to be higher than in the normal state, without changing the number of times of winning.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays a variable pattern, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is to perform a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role object 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player more chances of opening the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the state is such that the ball can easily enter 140 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 140 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 140 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a like the second prize winning port 140, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 140 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to set the first electric accessory 140a in an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to form a pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include respective drive motors 481 , 491 , 661 , 880 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions. 400, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the motion unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are placed in the inner space of the rear case 300. housed in order.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a frame-shaped base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a base member 410 which are displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projection member 485 are retracted to the back side of the projection unit 600, and the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third pattern display device). 81) can be displaced between the projecting position projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485), By selecting the driving means to drive, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied (a plurality of types of displacement modes can be formed). Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape in front of the displacement unit 400 , a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged inside the base member 610 , and a projection plate member 620 . It includes a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 . The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

In this case, the projection unit 600 employs a structure that enhances the efficiency of incidence of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 on the projection plate member 620, and intensifies the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and designs). clearly emerge). Also, a structure is adopted that enhances workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation units 650 ) to the base member 610 . Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 which are arranged above the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. , the other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a (that is, the third pattern display device 81) of the rear case 300 and a projecting position projecting toward the front side. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a biasing spring SP that biases the displacement member 850. At a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the biasing spring SP By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) around the balanced position (predetermined position) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The displacement unit 400 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 9-28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400. FIG.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and displacement members (a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L) displaceably disposed on the base member 410. member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) driving means (lower driving mechanism 480 and upper driving mechanism 490) for applying driving force to the displacement member. When displacing the displacement member by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when displacing the displacement member by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when displacing the displacement member by driving the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 491) When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed to be displaced in different manners. The details of the structure will be described below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18. FIG.

First, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R that are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement. , the left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the truck member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is an elongated member arranged in a vertical posture, and includes a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the rear surface, a connecting hole 422 formed at the upper end, and a sliding member formed at the lower end. and a moving groove 423 . The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the rear side of the left displacement member 420L.

The length of the connecting shaft 421 is set so that the tip of the connecting shaft 421 protrudes from the rear surface of the left driven member 430L. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421 to displace the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one connecting shaft 441 of two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 described later is rotatably inserted therethrough. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative attitude change (rotation around the axis of the connection hole 422) with respect to the truck member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a driving pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of a lower left rack 488L, which will be described later, is rotatably and slidably inserted. . Therefore, when only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the attitude change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410 can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being installed between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L. and a sliding pin 432 protruding from the rear surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The slide pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a slide groove 410 a formed in the side of the base member 410 . Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing the relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The carriage member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending in the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It comprises two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441 . Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) via the truck member 440 by rolling on the rolling surface of the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440. .

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended from the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440 and supported.

The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide extending along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 are rotatably inserted. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R, the right driven member 430R, the left driven member 430L, the upper right rack 450R, and the upper left rack 450L are formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, respectively. Since they have substantially the same configuration, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the upper right rack 450R has a rack gear 452 engraved on its front surface. In addition, the upper right rack 450R is offset to the front side at the portion where the connecting hole 451 is formed, and is arranged in a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 is meshed with both rack gears 452 .

Accordingly, as the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the number of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is reduced. The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (the direction toward or away from each other). However, an even number of pinion gears 459 may be provided, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be displaced in the same direction.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. FIG. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. 13 to 16, illustration of the raising cover 413 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a driving mechanism with which the pinion gear 482 is meshed. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the rear surface of the protruding member 485, and the rack gear 486. It mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) in which the leading gear 487a is meshed with the gear train, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R that are meshed with the trailing gear 487e of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 projecting from the back of the left front cover 411L. be. The drive gear 483 and the drive arm 484 are rotatably supported on the rear surface of the left front cover 411L and the front surface of the base member 410, respectively.

The drive gear 483 is provided with an eccentric pin 483a that is positioned eccentrically from its center of rotation and that protrudes from its rear surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, A drive pin 484c protrudes from the front at the end opposite to the side where the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction through the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 moves from the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484. By acting on one or the other inner wall surface, the drive arm 484 rotates in the forward or reverse direction around the pivot hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The projecting member 485 has a linear sliding groove 485a through which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extending and retracting direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a base end rail provided on the front surface of the base member 410, a tip rail provided on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and a base end rail interposed between the base end rail and the tip rail. and an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be longitudinally displaceable relative to each other.

Therefore, when the driving arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484, the slide rail SL is extended and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is moved to the base. The member 410 is raised and lowered in the vertical direction.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the upward/downward direction of the projecting member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is arranged in a state where the top gear 487a is meshed with the rack gear 486, and the front and right front surfaces of the base member 410. They are rotatably pivotally supported between the rear surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, the linear motion of the rack gear 486 can be used to rotate the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) by moving the protruding member 485 up and down.

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-like members, and include a rack gear 488a engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488b protruding from the front at the longitudinal end. and respectively. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are arranged at different positions in the vertical direction, with the rack gears 488a opposed to each other, and between the rear surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the rear cover 412 in the horizontal direction (width direction). , left-right direction in FIG. 19).

A gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to an adjacent gear 487d, and protrudes rearward through an opening 410b formed in the base member 410 to form a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488L. It meshes with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) rotates as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487a at the end of the gear train causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to mutually move. They can be linearly moved in opposite directions (towards or away from each other).

The driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R protrude to the front side through linear insertion grooves 410c drilled in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. and the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R so as to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the truck member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R, which will be described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG.

17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. FIG. 17 and 18, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a driving mechanism with which the pinion gear 492 is meshed. It mainly comprises a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 which together with the drive gear 493 form a crank mechanism.

The upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper side portion formed in a substantially picture frame shape when viewed from the front) is formed as a divided structure in which an upper rear portion 410e, an upper intermediate portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially superimposed on the front side. be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of the upwardly projecting portion of the upper intermediate portion 410f. 492 is attached (fixed). A drive gear 493 and a drive arm 494 are rotatably journalled to the rear surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 is provided with an eccentric pin 493a located eccentrically from the center of rotation thereof and protruding from the rear surface. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and It has a linear drive groove 494c located at the end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction through the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 moves from the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 494 rotates forward or backward around the pivot hole 494a, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced left and right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted through the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating about the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c that is displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is supported. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced left and right.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is laterally displaced and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) rolls on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L moves to the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. The displacement (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the right displacement member is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459. 420R can be displaced. The rolling surfaces on which the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440 roll are formed in the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28. FIG.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). A first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24. FIG.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of displacement unit 400 in the first mode, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are views of displacement unit 400 in rear view of FIGS. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. and a state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhang position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the outermost positions (positions farthest apart from each other in the left-right direction), A protruding member 485 is arranged at the bottom.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, the states shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protruding member 485 is raised to the state (extended position in the first aspect). In the extended position in the first mode, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are combined (the side surfaces of the three members are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the projection member 485 (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (Figs. 16), the driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surfaces of the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby displacing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420L. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction approaching each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 becomes the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. 421. As a result, the truck member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L (the truck member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, thereby displacing the right displacement member 420R. The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In this embodiment, the amount of displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (the width direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 20) is such that the amount of displacement on the lower end side is smaller than the amount of displacement on the upper end side ( In other words, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is made shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start to displace substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the extended position in the first mode ( 23 and 24) are driven substantially simultaneously. That is, the lateral displacement speed of the upper end side (carriage member 440) is made faster than the lower end side (driving pin 488b).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while being rotated, instead of being non-rotatably displaced in the left-right direction while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to rotate and displace the displacement member in this way with the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. It has become possible for the first time to utilize the driving means of

Further, when the lateral displacement speed of the upper end side (the truck member 440) is different from that of the lower end side (the drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the truck member 440 is changed. Since the driving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending vertically with a length larger than the diameter of the driving pin 488b, it is possible to absorb the change in the distance between the two. In other words, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b can be formed to be rotatable and slidable. be able to.

23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in directions opposite to those described above, FIGS. 19 and 20 (retracted position), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) in a direction away from each other, and the protruding member 485 is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in a non-driving state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, A second mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. Note that FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are also referred to as appropriate in the description of the second mode.

25 is a front view of displacement unit 400 in the second mode, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of displacement unit 400 in rear view of FIG. 25 and 26 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the extended position in the second mode.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged at the retracted position), the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is such that the left displacement member 420L rotates on its upper end side (the axial center of the connection hole 422). It is placed in an attitude that allows it to rotate about its center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), the drive pin of the lower drive arm 484 is driven as shown in FIGS. 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485, so that the protruding member 485 is lifted, and the driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R move the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced (linearly moved) in a direction toward each other. That is, in the second mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around their upper end sides (the axis of the connecting hole 422).

Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-driving state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and A third mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. Note that FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are also referred to as appropriate in the description of the third mode.

27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third mode, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 as viewed from the rear in FIG. 27 and 28 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the extended position in the third mode.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending vertically with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b. Member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 acts on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. Together, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, displacing the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (linear motion).

That is, in the third mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around their lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side). Further, in the third mode, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the projecting member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the base member 410 is provided with guide means (for example, a guide groove), and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory along which the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way. As a result, the effect by displacing the displaceable member is one-pattern, and it is difficult to surprise the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (e.g., driving motor) is increased or decreased, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In contrast, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). Thus, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485) can be displaced in three modes (first mode, second mode and third mode). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one way, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode can be switched. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, in the first mode (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be caused to perform displacement dominated by parallel movement (linear motion), whereas in the second mode And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be caused to rotate (rotational motion) only, and the motion mode of the displacement can be different. can let As a result, it is possible to increase the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member, making it easier to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, there are some conventional products in which the rotation center is kept constant and only the rotation direction is changed to change the displacement mode. , It is not that the rotation center is the same but only the rotation direction is different. In this case, the lower end side is the center of rotation), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, making it easier to surprise the player.

In addition, in the first mode, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a combination of rotation and parallel movement (linear motion). is the same direction as the direction of rotation in Therefore, in the initial stages of the first mode and the third mode (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize that the displacement members are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other. can be hard to hit. On the other hand, in the first mode, the projecting member 485 is lifted as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the approaching direction, whereas in the third mode, the projecting member 485 is stopped. state can be maintained. That is, in the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction toward each other, if the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first mode. Players can be expected to

In the displacement unit 400, a truck member 440, a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R are arranged (held) on a base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable. The upper end side (connection hole 422) is rotatably connected, and the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is in the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

Thereby, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first mode) including a rotational component and rotational motion (second and third modes). can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove. That is, if the trajectory is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the truck member 440, the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, but also the members 440, 488R It is necessary to provide a mechanism for continuously applying the driving force to 488L and 488R).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the truck member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can be guided in a straight line, and therefore the truck member 440 can be guided by the flat surface to be rolled. , the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize a rack and pinion mechanism, so their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operational reliability.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in any of the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. , One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by rolling of the carriage member 440 on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is guided by the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488L. 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between base member 410 and back cover 412 . That is, there is no need to provide different guide mechanisms for each mode, and therefore there is no need to employ a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the operational reliability and durability can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape when viewed from the front, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620 , a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620 , and a driving force of the drive motor 661 for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 661 to the projection plate member 620 . and a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped rear base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 612 arranged in front of the rear base 611, and is formed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

Note that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 when viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as a “display area”), and an area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. In (that is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the player to see the display of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side, and also the irradiation unit 650 emits light. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a form of a pattern or design, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the rear side and the front side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620 . The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 has a plurality of teeth engraved along its outer peripheral surface, and meshes with a gear 664 at the end of the gear train. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 with a U-shaped cross-section that continues in the circumferential direction between itself and the projection plate member 620, and includes a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641 , the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 . The detailed configurations of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposes the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (five in this embodiment) are arranged in a posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 passes through substantially the center of the projection plate member 620 . The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the rear side of the rear base 611 , and the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is connected (fixed) to the top gear 662 of the gear train. A gear member 630 provided on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33, the rear base 611 includes an inner standing portion 611a erected on the inner edge of the annular plate member and an outer standing portion 611a erected on the outer edge of the annular plate member. A setting portion 611c, an intermediate standing portion 611b standing between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611c, and an inner concave groove in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the inner standing portion 611a. 611d, an outer concave portion 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a restricting projection 611f projecting from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611a is erected from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member toward the front side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer erected portion 611c is erected from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member toward the front side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate erected portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611b. The intermediate upright portion 611b is divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end is connected to the outer upright portion 611c.

The inner recessed groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. formed by

The outer recessed groove 611e is a region for arranging an irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, inside, and is formed so as to surround the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. be.

The restricting protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C, which is pivotally supported by the front base 612, from rattling toward the rear side. and formed to protrude on the front side. In addition, in the present embodiment, the regulating projections 611f are formed at six locations at predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the rear surface of the front base 612, inner standing portions 611a, intermediate standing portions 611b, outer standing portions 611c and restricting projections 611f of the rear base 611 are provided. A set portion 612a, an intermediate erected portion 612b, an outer erected portion 612c, and a shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, when the base member 610 is assembled, the upright end surfaces of the upright portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 overlap the upright end surfaces of the upright portions 611a to 611c of the rear base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted through the restricting protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the rear surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g are shafts with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of LEDs 651, and is a unit for causing the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. are placed. That is, the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650 on its outer peripheral side.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the rear base 611 is superimposed on the rear surface of the front base 612. Thus, it is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612 .

36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36, the intermediate standing portion 612b of the front base 612 is formed with a cutout portion 612b1 having a substantially semicircular shape on the leading end side of the standing portion. Similarly, an approximately semi-circular notch 611b1 is formed at the same phase as the notch 612b1 on the upright distal end side of the intermediate upright portion 611b of the rear base 611 (see FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state in which the upright distal end surfaces of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b are superimposed (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b2 form a substantially circular opening when viewed from the front. be. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions with the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the cutouts 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b, and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. be done. In addition, the circular opening is set to have a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651 .

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of projection plate member 620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 640 taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. In FIG. 38, a virtual line M indicates the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 has a notch portion 621 in a portion of the outer edge and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation projection 611f of the rear base 611, and is formed by cutting out a portion of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line perpendicular to the radial direction. be done.

The reflecting portion 622 is a portion in which the interior of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front is processed into a shape such as a pattern or design. As a result, when the light that has entered the interior of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the reflecting portion 622, the light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the diffusely reflected light, and can visually recognize the shape of the reflecting portion 622 . That is, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620 by the light being incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620 , is formed from a plate-like body that is annular in front view, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the projection plate member 620 . It is set large and arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 37), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 includes a toothed portion 631 carved along the outer peripheral surface, a rear portion 632 on the side surface on the rear side, and an end portion on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the rear portion 632 inclined toward the front side. and a slanted surface portion 633 .

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface with which the gear 664 meshes as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that extends from an end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and that is inclined toward the front side. In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the rear surface portion 632. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ2 between the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (θ1=θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Also, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Furthermore, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (the upper side in FIG. 38), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 .

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641a on one side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b on the other side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. It has a front portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 that is inclined from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) end portion of the front portion 642 toward the rear side.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between facing the front side (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and is spaced apart from the front side plane of the projection plate member 620 by a certain interval around the axis. formed apart.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that rotatably holds the projection plate member 620 by contacting the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620, and the cross section thereof is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed circularly around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can form the guide groove 641 that guides the collar C by being arranged on the projection plate member 620 . That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 .

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from an end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 and that is inclined toward the rear side. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back side is the intersection angle θ3 between the front portion 642 and the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ4 between the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3=θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). 40(a) to 40(c) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. FIG. 40(a) to 40(c) illustrate the transition state when attaching the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. FIG. 39 and 40 illustrate a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the projecting portion C1 projecting radially outward is located on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 39(b)). 39(b) lower side) and the side face portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (the guide groove 641).

Also, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is greater than the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. is also set small (L1<L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap therebetween, the projection plate member 620 can rotate vertically and horizontally by the gap. The contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C even if the contact surface 641b is shifted. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be rotated smoothly.

Next, referring to FIG. 40(a) to FIG. 40(c), attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 40(a), the projection plate member 620 is placed on the front base 612 when the collar C is placed on the shaft portion 612f.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612 d of the front base 612 . That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner groove 612d is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640. By arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612d, the projection plate Member 620 can be positioned and placed.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the cutout portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the collar C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the back side (the upper side in FIG. 40(a)) is the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 40(a)) with respect to the axis of the shaft portion 612f. It is performed in a state of being tilted to the In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the projecting portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641. As shown in FIG.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(b)) around the tip of the projecting portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis of the collar C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40(c), by displacing the collar C to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(c)), the contact between the tip surface of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 are arranged at positions facing each other. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620 , the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641 .

Here, if a groove is formed in the outer edge of a circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are placed inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) to place the collars. Since it is necessary to arrange the collar and both hands are used for assembling, there is a problem that the assembling efficiency is low.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, so that it is not necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the color C as described above. do not have. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the projection unit 600 assembled in this way with the rear base 611 from the rear side.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG.

41(a) to 43(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In addition, in FIG.41(b), FIG.42(b), and FIG.43(b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate|omitted in order to make an understanding easy.

41(b), 42(b), and 43(b), the refraction angles when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 are Considered to have no effect on the invention, the light from light source A entering projection plate member 620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 640 is illustrated in an orthogonal manner. Furthermore, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is projected onto the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 . Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine (upper side in FIG. 41(b)).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is irradiated to the front or back of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, , the amount of light entering the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or rear side of the projection plate member 620 and traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed from a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. Even when the light traveling through the member 620 irradiates the front or back of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, It can be totally reflected by the sides of the back. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620 from decreasing.

That is, when light passing through a medium with a high refractive index travels to a medium with a low refractive index, the light is totally reflected without being incident on the medium with a low refractive index if the angle of incidence is increased. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like shape, and the light is incident from the end surface (edge) thereof, so the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, the light from the projection plate member 620 does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low refractive index, and the light can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 . As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

Similarly, the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and the air is similar. Since the refractive index of air is a value (refractive index 1) that is sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transparent material, light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 Light does not enter the air (atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 . As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620 . In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be made incident on the projection plate member 620 side. .

That is, at positions where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at positions where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, since they are formed of a light-transmissive material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmissive material of the projection plate member 620, the irradiated Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel like the light with the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the above irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 to be emitted. can.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters from the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 can enter from the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A. By increasing the amount of , it is possible to make (display) patterns and patterns clearly appear. Moreover, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

In addition, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 640. You can prevent it from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is different from the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. direction), the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on its inner side surface, but at least part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed such that the intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). ), the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) can be reflected toward the end portion 644 and then propagated along the inclined surface portion 643 so that the light with the irradiation angle β reaches the projection plate member. The area reflected to the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43( a ) and 43 ( b ), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 , the light with the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630 .

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620 . In this case, the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 adjoin (face) each other.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is in a state of being adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere). be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The projected light can be incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 620, like the light with the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the above irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LEDs 651 (light amount).

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the light source A that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. can be increased to make (display) the patterns and patterns clearly stand out (display). Moreover, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

In addition, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the gear member 630, and the appearance deteriorates accordingly. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is more likely to be incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A than when the gear member 630 is behind the light source A (downward in FIG. 43(a)). , the angle of incidence when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced. As a result, it becomes difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 at its side surface, but at least part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the state described above is achieved. (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 has the inclined surface portion 633, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed such that the intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). ), the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) can be reflected toward the end portion 634 and then propagated along the inclined surface portion 633, so that the light emitted at the irradiation angle γ can be The area reflected to the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge of the gear member 630 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the mounting structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG.

44(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44(b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). 45(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 45(b) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. is a cross-sectional view of. 44 and 45 show the state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, the state in which the board member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front, and a substrate on the back of the substrate member 652. It comprises a plurality of (two each in this embodiment) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 that are arranged.

The substrate member 652 is made of an elastically deformable material and formed into a horizontally long belt shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LEDs 651 are light emitting means for emitting light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 , and are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front of the substrate member 652 . (Fig. 44(b) left-right direction) are arranged at regular intervals.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and the two first blocks 653 are arranged on the central side of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction. Second blocks 654 are arranged on both longitudinal sides of the substrate member 652 with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (a property of being less elastically deformable) than the substrate member 652 . Therefore, in the attached state to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG.

46(a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 along line XLVIb-XLVIb of FIG. 46(a). 46(c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c).

The first block 653 has a bottom wall portion 653a which is oblong in the front view, and side wall portions 653b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side (FIG. 46(a) paper surface). front side) is formed in a box shape with an open side.

Of the four side wall portions 653b, the facing side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a) has a fastening hole h recessed in the end face on the front side thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that Side wall portions 653b other than the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected to each other by a connecting wall 653c, and a projection 653c1 protrudes from the end face of the connecting wall 653c on the front side.

The second block 654 has a rectangular bottom wall portion 654a when viewed from the front, and side wall portions 654b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. side) is formed into an open box shape. The bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a rectangular opening 654a1 in a front view, through which an electrical connection line can be inserted.

Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h in the front end face thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Side wall portions 653b erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h in the end face on the front side. can be concluded.

In the first block 653 and the second block 654, through-holes 653b1 and 654b1 are formed at two locations in each of side wall portions 653b and 654b erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (a) and FIG. 46(b)). The holding pins 612g of the front base 612 are inserted through the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, it is possible to position the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and to hold the blocks 653 and 654 at the positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(a)) (that is, a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes h). Moreover, it is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to a second imaginary plane passing through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46(a)) and perpendicular to the first imaginary plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the first blocks 653 can be shared, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the product cost. can be done. In addition, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 does not have orientation in both the vertical direction and the longitudinal direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so workability during assembly work is improved. can be achieved.

Similarly, the second block 654 is positioned with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(c)) (that is, a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes h). It is formed into a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two second blocks 654 are arranged for one substrate member 620, since the second blocks 654 can be shared, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. can be done. Further, when the second block 654 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have vertical directionality with respect to the substrate member 620, so that workability during assembly work can be improved. can be done.

Returning to FIGS. 44 and 45, description will be made. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the rear side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and with a predetermined gap between adjacent blocks. be.

Specifically, the front surfaces of the first block 653 and the second block 654 are superimposed on the rear surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back side of the substrate member 652 . In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 toward the front side.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the board member 652 , and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back side of the board member 652 . In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in the shape of a box with an open front, and are arranged with the open side overlaid on the back of the substrate member 652 . That is, both blocks 653 and 654 are provided with recesses in the surfaces on which they are superimposed (arranged) on the substrate member 652, so that the recesses (internal spaces) accommodate electronic components and connectors mounted on the substrate member 652. can be accommodated. Therefore, the electronic parts and connectors can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, thereby suppressing damage to the electronic parts and connectors due to contact with surrounding displaceable members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Also, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the rear surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, thereby suppressing damage (disconnection) of the circuit due to contact with surrounding displaceable members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can. In addition, since the portion of the substrate member 652 where the blocks 653 and 654 are not disposed is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that protrudes toward the rear side (see FIG. 34), the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be spaced apart from the plate member 620 . As a result, it is possible to suppress damage (disconnection) of the circuit even in the portion where the blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

A method for arranging (assembling) the irradiation unit 650 thus configured to the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 in the region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, the holding pins 612g erected from the rear surface of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. .

As a result, both the blocks 653 and 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, the front surface of the rear base 611 is overlaid on the rear surface of the front base 612 , so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612 . That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (attached) to the base member 610 .

In this embodiment, when the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, as described above. That is, not only the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the others. be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 allows light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 . In addition to the large number of LEDs 651, the arrangement (mounting) of the LEDs 651 is such that each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do so, and the time and effort of the arrangement work increases.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on a substrate member 652 that is elastically deformable. are arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), the work of arranging a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the installation work of the LEDs 651 .

Further, by inserting the holding pins 612g of the rear base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. The direction of the illuminated surface can be defined (see Figure 34). In other words, it is not necessary to assemble the plurality of LEDs 651 to the rear base 612 while individually adjusting their irradiation surfaces. Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), it is possible to reduce labor for the work of arranging (attaching) the LED 651 from this point as well.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the rear base 612, vibrations and the like are prevented. By suppressing the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force, or by correcting the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself, it is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warpage and bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in the area where the first block 653 or the second block 654 of the substrate member 652 is arranged (that is, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in front view). is set. Therefore, warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to input of external force such as vibration can be easily suppressed, or warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself can be easily corrected. Easy to define. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the rear surface of the substrate member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at regular intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, one of the two fastening holes h formed in the second block 654 is formed in the connecting wall 654c. can be shortened. Also, the second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 in such a posture that the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed faces the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are positioned on both longitudinal end sides of the substrate member 652 .

Accordingly, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured while ) can be shortened to provide spacing between adjacent illumination units 650 . In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be arranged using such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily made close.

On the other hand, the first block 653 has two fastening holes h formed in the connecting wall 654c, so that the distance between the fastening holes h and the LEDs 651 can be shortened. In other words, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought closer to the LED 651 . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LEDs 651 to be affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration. Therefore, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, the distance between the fastening holes h formed at the two locations is large, so there is a possibility that the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes h at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, connecting walls 653c are provided between the side walls 653b in which the fastening holes h are formed, and projections 653c1 projecting from the connecting walls 653c are inserted through the substrate member 652. pass through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the projection 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by eliminating the need to provide the screw S1 separately. It can be easier to maintain.

Both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 (outermost in the longitudinal direction, left and right ends in FIG. 45(b)) are free ends (that is, not constrained by the second block 654). The attitude of the LEDs 651 positioned at both ends may become unstable. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the center of the arc is located on the front side. ) (see FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the rear surfaces of both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 against the front surface of the second block 654 . As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG.

47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a rear base 830 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 830, and a rear base 820 on the rear side of the rear base 830. A drive motor 880 arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the driving force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

The rear base 830 protrudes into an opening 831 formed to have a size through which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 can be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes shaft portions 832 and 833 formed thereon, and a back-side restricting portion 834 that protrudes toward the front side and extends in a curved shape.

A shaft portion of a driving motor 880 attached to the rear side of the rear base 830 is inserted through the opening 831 . Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the rear base 830 .

Also, the opening 831 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 . Accordingly, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of work processes for parts replacement when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts for supporting and rotatably holding transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 to be described later, and project from the rear base 830 toward the front side in a cylindrical shape.

The back-side restricting portion 834 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (backward direction of the paper surface of FIG. 47). It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view with an external shape slightly larger than that of the rear base 830 . The front base 820 includes a shaft supporting portion 821 recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 erected at the edge of the back side, and a side wall 822 protruding to the back side. , a front-side restricting portion 824 that protrudes toward the back side and extends in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 that protrudes toward the back side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 (to be described later) is inserted, and is recessed on the lower right side of the front base 820 in front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap between the rear base 830 and the front base 820 for arranging a transmission mechanism 860 and a connecting member 870 to be described later. It is erected on the upper and left and right edges (other than the lower end) of the front base 820 with a size larger than the size. Accordingly, when the front base 820 and the rear base 830 are fastened together, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be displaceably arranged therebetween.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion that engages with one end side (the upper side in FIG. 48 ) of a biasing spring SP, which will be described later.

The front-side restricting portion 824 is a projection that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 47). It extends in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP (to be described later) with a predetermined gap therebetween, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front base 820 toward the rear side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, which mesh with each other in series. is transmitted to

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a projecting portion 863c that projects in an arc shape about the shaft, and the rotation position of the shaft portion 863c. and a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting .

The toothed portion 863 a is a meshing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863 , so that the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863 .

The shaft portion 863 b is a shaft that is connected to the connecting member 870 , protrudes in a columnar shape toward the rear side, and is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863 .

The protruding portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the frontward displacement of the connecting member 870, and is formed to protrude from the outer edge portion on the back side of the transmission gear 863. It is formed curved in a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 is formed thereon. It is formed so as to protrude radially outward on the non-contact side surface.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850. The connecting member 870 is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front. A gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through, a displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and a contact formed projecting upward from the outside of the curved portion. a portion 873;

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870 .

The displacement-side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853 . Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850 .

The abutting portion 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the rear-side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 facing each other. be done.

In addition, the contact portion 873 has a front-to-rear width dimension of the front end that is slightly smaller than the distance between the rear-side regulation portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front-side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820 . It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the abutting portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back-side restricting portion 834 and the front-side restricting portion 824, thereby increasing the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced. can be prevented from becoming On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by contacting the front base 820 or the rear base 830 .

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (the right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft supporting portion 841 that is recessed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (supports) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the front end of the pin member 890 , and is positioned opposite the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 . formed in As a result, the pin member 890 is arranged between the opposing shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 , so that it can be prevented from falling out of the vertical displacement unit 800 .

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (the right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the other end side (the left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. The displacement member 850 is formed with a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a projection 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 for transmitting the driving force of the connecting member 870 .

The shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, as described above. is also formed large. Therefore, the displacement member 850 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 in a state in which the pin member 890 is inserted through the shaft hole 851 . , the displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a rotatable state about the axis of the shaft hole 851 .

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and protrudes from the back side of the displacement member 850 . Further, when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position protruding from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 to the back side, and the protrusion distance is set to the front side of the back base. is formed up to a position substantially coinciding with the side surface of the . Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the gravitational direction with respect to the front base 820 .

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft that is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, it is positioned below the front base 820 (see FIG. 50). lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870 .

The pin member 890 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 as described above, and is formed of a metal rod-shaped body that is harder than the displacement member 850 . As a result, damage to the rotating shaft can be suppressed when force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

In addition, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is divided into the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft supports 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistance can be divided into two parts, it is possible to suppress damage to the part due to an increase in resistance at one point.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. FIG. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. is. 54 to 56 show a state in which the rear base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 52) is positioned upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is positioned upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

At the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b connects the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. are arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, at the first position, the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 to form a state (that is, a dead point) in which no force component is generated to rotate the transmission gear 863 . As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

51 and 54, power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to rotate the drive motor 880, and the transmission gears 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are rotated. The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed in the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacing member 850, thereby rotating the displacing member 850.

In this case, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the displacement of the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the connecting member 870 A straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 intersects. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can cancel the state (that is, the dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 begins to rotate in the direction of rotation displacing the displacement member 850 (right rotation in FIG. 54), the gravity of the displacement member 850 pulls the gear-side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780. , in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, the energy consumed by the drive motor 880 during displacement from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the transmission gear 863 At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are substantially orthogonal, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, by turning off the power supply to the drive motor 880, the displacement member 850 is moved around the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be caused to reciprocate by the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction can be an orthographic projection of uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can perform interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if electric power is supplied to the driving motor 880 and driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement (the orthogonal projection of uniform circular motion) described above is different. In this manner, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, thereby increasing variations in displacement. That is, only by switching on or off the power supply to the driving motor 880 to switch whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, the variation of displacement can be increased, and the structure and control can be changed. Since there is no need for complication, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force to the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is cancelled, and the gravitational force of the displacement member 850 is applied. and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. The displacement can also be a combination of rotational motion about the shaft hole 851 as the center of rotation. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be made to perform interesting displacements.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (vertically displaced) as the displacement member 850 is displaced to rotate the transmission gear 863 . Since the posture of 863 is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the pushing/pulling direction. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocatingly displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be varied, and the displacement member can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axial center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 A straight line connecting the axial centers and a straight line connecting the axial centers of the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are located at substantially orthogonal positions. The magnitude of the force component in the direction to rotate the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the balanced position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced from the balanced position in either direction of pushing or pulling. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocatingly displaced, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balanced position. can be easily continued.

When power is supplied to the drive motor 880 from the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55 to further rotate the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (the transmission mechanism 860), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 moves further downward. is displaced to Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacing member 850 to rotate the displacing member 850 .

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (the left side in FIG. 53) is placed in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is placed downward. , a connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. As a result, since the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged downward, the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

At the second position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 A straight line connecting the axes of the holes 872 is arranged with the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 to create a state (that is, a dead point) in which no force component is generated to rotate the transmission gear 863 . As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

Next, transmission gear 863 and connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position. (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. 57(a) to 57(c), a portion of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), at the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the rear base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the rear base 830 or the transmission gear 863 .

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, at the first position, the displacement member 850 is arranged upward to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, so that the displacement member 850 is preferably stopped. However, by increasing the resistance to drive the displacement member 850, the stopped state can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 57(c), electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is rotated to the second position). 6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 do not face each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connection member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased. can be made smaller.

Therefore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace the displacing member 850 in front of the third pattern display device 81 in a short period of time. , the displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(c), the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 at the second position.

Here, when the displacing member that displaces up and down is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacing member is added to the inertial force at the time of stopping, so there is a problem that the displacing member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the vertical displacement unit 800 can bring the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 into contact with the transmission gear 863. is stopped by connecting member 870 contacting transmission gear 863, and by stopping rotation of transmission gear 863 (driving of drive motor 880). can be distributed in one As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), transmission gear 863 and connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described. 58(a) to 58(c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first driving range θ5. 58(a) to 58(c) illustrate transition states from the first position. 58(a) to 58(c), a portion of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced within the first drive range θ5, the first position is changed to the second position. As the transmission gear 863 shifts to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced along with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

Further, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while displacing the displacement member 850 to the first position of the retracted position. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to the position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be brought to a stopped state quickly.

That is, when displacing and stopping the displacement member 850, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force that stops the movement, but since the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, the stopped state can be quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced within the second drive range θ6, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. can be formed, the resistance to displace the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the extension operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second driving range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced about the intermediate position (balanced position), The reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be smoothly performed by avoiding the generation of resistance by the portion 863c.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820 and the rear base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c). 59(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along the LIXa-LIXa line in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along the LIXb-LIXb line in FIG. FIG. 59(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along line LIXc-LIXc in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front-side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820 and the rear-side regulation portion 834 of the rear base 830. placed in

That is, the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 . This restricts the longitudinal displacement of the connecting member 870 .

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement-side connecting hole 872, the displacement member 850 tilts in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from tilting in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59(c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in

Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 and the front base 820 and the rear base 830 at the second position can be increased. As a result, resistance when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, in the vertical displacement unit 800, the abutting portion 873 is on a substantially straight line connecting the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear-side connecting hole of the connecting member 870. It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear-side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the rear base 830 , the abutting portion 873 of the connecting member 870 abuts against the front base 820 and the rear base 830 . Inclination of the portion 863b and the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 .

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. FIG. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is It is set to have the same outer diameter as the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 .

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 60(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60(b) is a projection along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640;

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the rear and front sides of the projection plate member 2620, respectively. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter that is the same as the outer diameters of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 . In addition, the projection plate member 2620 has a notch portion 621 in a portion of the outer edge and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section that is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. and a guide groove 2641. The groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 60(b)) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. As shown in FIG. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and is formed to have a width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide grooves 2641 .

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. FIG. In addition, in FIG.61(b), FIG.62(b), and FIG.63(b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate|omitted in order to make an understanding easy.

61(b), 62(b) and 63(b), the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The angle of refraction at that time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is illustrated in a manner in which they are orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light of the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is projected onto the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620 . Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. This allows the edge of the projection plate member 2620 to be placed near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LEDs 651 .

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 62(a)) from the guide groove 641. Light at angle β2 is incident on the front edge of groove forming member 2640 .

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620 . In this case, as in the first embodiment, at positions where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light irradiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is projected onto the projection plate member 2620 . can be made incident on

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 irradiates the groove forming member 2640 on the back side of the guide groove 641 (lower side in FIG. 62(a)). The light with the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the rear edge of the groove forming member 2640 .

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surfaces of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 at positions where they are adjacent (facing).

That is, by recessing the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is directed to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and made incident on the projection plate member 2620 .

Therefore, by recessing and forming the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the collar C and the role of collecting the light onto the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. .

Moreover, compared to the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the additional irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 . .

Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 2640. You can prevent it from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light emitted to the gear member 630 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. In the first embodiment, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620. However, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are , a floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620 .

First, referring to FIGS. 64 and 65, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630 and groove forming member 640 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a projection along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 640;

65(a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and FIG. 65(b) is a side view of FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. 65(c) shows the projection plate member 3620 and gear member 3630 taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). and a cross-sectional view of a groove forming member 640. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. arranged on each side. The projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and has protrusions 3623 that protrude to the front side and the back side at the outer edge thereof.

The projecting portion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross-section projecting toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64(b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) toward the outer edge. In addition, the projection 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the virtual line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the recessed groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. be done. On the other hand, the projection 3623 protruding to the back side is set on a virtual line G connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a recessed groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 to be described later. be.

The gear member 3630 is formed as an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 . In addition, the gear member 3630 includes a recessed groove 3635 which is recessed at a predetermined interval in the side surface on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 64(b)) and a screw-fixing member which is formed through the recessed groove 3635 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. and a stop hole 636 for.

The recessed grooves 3635 are grooves that are recessed in the radial direction and are formed on both circumferential sides of each stop hole 636 . Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64(b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate-like body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 . In addition, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the groove 3645 which is recessed at a predetermined interval in the side surface on the back side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. and an opening 646 for screwing.

The recessed groove 3645 is a groove that extends in the radial direction and is formed at a position facing the recessed groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630 . Thereby, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620 .

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface where the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are grounded is an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 is inserted. The planes overlap in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the holding force. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG.

66(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In addition, in FIG.66(b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate|omitted in order to make an understanding easy.

In FIG. 66(b), as in the first embodiment, the angle of refraction when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 does not affect the present invention. , the light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is illustrated in an orthogonal manner. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 Incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620 . As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 toward the central side (axial side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end face of the projection plate member 3620 is can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the projection plate member 3620 can be made to reach the reflecting portion 622 more easily. and patterns can be made to stand out clearly.

On the other hand, the light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 . In this case, since the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side unlike the mode.

Therefore, light emitted from a light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620 side, and is caused to enter the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 . can be suppressed from being incident. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the display provided on the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from being highlighted (displayed) by light other than the LED 651 .

In addition, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A portion where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646 , when light enters from the radially outer side of the opening 646 , the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

Furthermore, in this case, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion of the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed in the entire area overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction. Displacement of the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 with respect to the plate member 3620 can be suppressed.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light from the LED 651 is passed through the gap toward the axial center of the projection plate member 3620, There is a risk that light may leak from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed on the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Furthermore, the projection 3623 can increase the dimension in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66(a)) of the edge side surface of the projection plate member 3620, so that the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 . .

Next, an irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 67(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67(b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. FIG. 68(a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68(b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. FIG. In addition, FIG.67(b) respond|corresponds to FIG.44(b). 68 schematically shows a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 with screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651 . That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the board member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651 .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is the height of the projection plate member 620 at the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. The dimensions are set so that the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot come into contact with the LEDs 651 disposed between the two screws S2 when the outer peripheral surface is brought into contact (circumscribed).

This allows the LED 651 to be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, if it comes close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to rattling in the radial direction based on dimensional tolerance or assembly tolerance, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is twisted. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is made of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is made of a metal material. can increase the effectiveness of In addition, if the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn out, causing the projection plate member 620 to rattle in the radial direction. Also, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided.

Since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2 in this way, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since complicated shapes can be omitted, the shapes of the rear base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

In addition, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, it is possible to reduce the allowable amount of rattling in the radial direction due to the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of the parts, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LEDs 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 .

Next, a projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disc shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated around the center of the circle. , and is slidably displaced in one direction.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 includes a base member 5610 formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and having an opening at the center, and a base member 5610 slidably disposed in the opening of the base member 5610. a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 for emitting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 for driving the projection plate member. A gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmission to 5620 is mainly provided.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rear base 5611 having a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center, and is arranged in front of the rear base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the rear base 5611 . A projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) are stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. a central opening 5612h, an inner standing portion 612a erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h, It mainly includes two shaft portions 5612k projecting rearward from between the pair of holding portions 5612i, and a sliding projection 5612m projecting rearward from below the central opening 5612h. be.

The central opening 5612h has a horizontally long rectangular shape at the central portion of the front base 5612 when viewed from the front. The player can visually recognize patterns and patterns of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portions 5612i are projecting portions for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later. Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 that is recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) on the projecting surface thereof.

The concave groove 5612i1 is recessed from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 71) toward the end portion so as to have an arcuate cross-sectional shape. formed larger than The pair of recessed grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is equal to the axis of the rod member 5625. Set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after disposing the rod member 5625 on the inner peripheral surface of the recessed groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is formed at a position facing the recessed groove 5612i1 from the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). By arranging holding portion covers 5628 provided with , at both ends, the rod members 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion that serves as a rotation shaft of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the lower side of the central opening 5612h toward the rear side. Also, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at symmetrical positions about a vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 as an axis.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmissive material so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of the pattern. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end, and a reflecting portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620 . The rack 5627 is arranged below the central opening of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612) and is arranged at a position that is not visible from the front side of the assembled projection unit 5600. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620 (horizontal direction in FIG. 72). As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620 .

The rack 5627 is formed with a rack gear 5627a that meshes with the gear 5668 on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). and is formed over the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627 .

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the inclination of the rack 5627 when the rack 5627 is displaced in the horizontal direction by driving the drive motor 661. The sliding groove 5627b is elongated in the horizontal direction. A pair of sliding projections 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the rear base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated, and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the rear side of the projection plate member 5620 is a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally long rectangle in a front view facing the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 interposed therebetween. A shaped front cover 5626 is provided.

The bar member 5625 is longer in the left-right direction than the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction and shorter than the outer diameter of the rear base 5611 . It is arranged on the projection plate member 5620 sandwiched therebetween.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the bar member 5625, and the length in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. It is disposed on the projection plate member 5620 with the bar member 5625 sandwiched between it and the member 5620 .

The front cover 5626 has a groove portion 5626a recessed in the left-right direction on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620 and recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 72). The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged, and is recessed to have a substantially U-shaped cross section. be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626a. This allows the projection plate member 5620 to be slidably displaced relative to the rod member 5625 in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 .

Also, the bar member 5625 is arranged on the back side rather than the front side surface of the front cover 5626 . That is, since the bar member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626 , the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620 .

Here, if the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the rear side of the projection plate member 5620. FIG. However, since the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits the light incident thereon from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in a pattern or design shape, a groove is formed in the projection plate member 5620 . If the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the amount of light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel due to the reduced thickness dimension, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be placed on the front cover 5626 in which the bar member 5625 is arranged without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the incident light from traveling inside the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult, and to prevent the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

In addition, as described above, since the bar member 5625 is attached to the front base 5612 at both ends so as not to fall off, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the bar member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid laterally. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the horizontal direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the first block are aligned with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. They are arranged in opposite positions. Accordingly, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is made incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the patterns and patterns of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be highlighted.

The side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged is formed with a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in a rear view toward the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 toward the rear side, and the raised dimension is set larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670, which will be described later. Thereby, a rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512 .

A projection 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the rear base 5611. FIG.

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650 .

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent into an L-shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front base 5612 with the bent portion positioned at the center in the left-right direction. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. A through hole 5671 is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, it can rotate with respect to the front base 5612 about the shaft portion 5612k.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670 , the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612 . That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670 , the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653 .

The rotating member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction of displacing the tip portion on one side of the shaft portion 5612k downward. 5612. Further, a displacement regulating projection 5612j projecting to the rear side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement restricting protrusion 5612j is a member that restricts the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip of the protrusion is located behind the rotating member 5670 arranged on the front base 5612 (toward the rear base 5611). It is positioned on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 . As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is restricted by the displacement restricting projection 5612j, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 toward the projection plate member 5620 is directed to the displacement restricting projection. It is possible to suppress being blocked by 5612j.

Next, the operation of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. 73(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

75(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. 76(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76 show a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed. In addition, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is just a left-to-right reversal of the displacement operation from the first state to the second state, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged substantially in the center of the central opening 5612h in the left-right direction, the rotational The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end thereof is displaced downward. Thereby, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotary member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed to It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light from the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be made incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 (left and right sides in FIG. 74(a)). The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, and the driving force is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) to the rack 5627. When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is slid rightward in front view (rightward in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 is also slid rightward (see FIGS. 73(b) and 74(b)). ). As a result, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side of the central opening 5612h when viewed from the front.

In this case, the front cover 5626 provided on the front side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 abuts on the other side of the L-shaped rotation member 5670 arranged in the sliding direction. As a result, a rotational moment can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k, which serves as the rotation axis, in a direction that pushes the one end side upward. Accordingly, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74) is displaced. (b) left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

As a result, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is slid, and the amount of light incident from the upper end face of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

In addition, as the projection plate member 5620 is slid and displaced, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed. can be changed. In other words, it is possible to change the mode of patterns and designs displayed on the projection plate member 5620 . As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, an LED arranged at a different position is turned on according to the displacement to keep the light amount of the projection plate member constant. As a result, it is necessary to control the lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs. As the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LEDs becomes more complicated, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Furthermore, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LEDs are arranged at different positions.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since there is no need to control the LED 651 to turn on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to irradiate a displaced irradiated object (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiating objects (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated object, the irradiation range of each irradiating object There is a problem that a portion with a weak amount of light is created between them, and when the object to be illuminated is displaced, brightness and darkness are created, which reduces the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-described problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the number of irradiators to be arranged increases, so the problem is that the product cost increases. there was a point

However, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 can be displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is displaced. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of brightness and darkness of light accompanying the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby suppressing loss of interest of the player. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the projection plate member 5620 is slid and displaced so that the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed. The drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654 can be combined, and it becomes unnecessary to newly provide a driving means for displacing the second block 654 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the product.

Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 and the respective blocks 653 and 654 made of an elastically deformable material, there is no need to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit can be arranged on the front base 5612 and then connected with wiring, so that the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base 5612, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, by reversing the driving of the drive motor 661, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h. Accordingly, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid to form the first state.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 on the side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is pushed up by the projection plate by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the front base 5612 and the front base 5612 . As the member 5620 is slid to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shape in the front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated around the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotational range of the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is restricted by being brought into contact with the displacement restricting protrusion 5612j.

As described above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. Description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the central opening 5612h in front view (see FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b)).

Next, a projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. possible.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 with the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member arranged so as to be partially visible through an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620 , an irradiation unit 650 that allows light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620 , a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620 , and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is transmitted to the projection plate member 6620 . A gear train (gears 662 to 664) for

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped rear base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 arranged in front of the rear base 611. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650 and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has an annular shielding member 6612r formed on the inner edge of the annular front base 612 of the first embodiment. A portion 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the rear side visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 which is annular in front view, The shielding member 6612r has a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 6612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c on the outer edge of the opening 6612p. are accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the bases 611 and 612 by overlapping the front surfaces of the bases 611 and 612 .

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612 . Also, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612 . Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the rear side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). ), so that it is difficult for the player to see it, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the display of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side to pass through and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. In addition, when the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design. , through the opening 6612p of the player. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or design in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 .

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside. Reflecting portion 6622 is a portion whose interior has been roughened by laser processing or the like, and a plurality of patterns, patterns, etc., are formed in the projection plate member 6620 in the circumferential direction by dividing the whole area of projection plate member 6620 in a front view. be. In this embodiment, the shape of the reflective portion 6622, such as patterns and patterns, is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and reflection areas 6622a to 6622f, such as six patterns and patterns, are formed (see FIG. 80). .

Further, the projection plate member 6620 has the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the rear side and the front side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge. Accordingly, as in the first embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664).

Next, referring to FIG. 80, the operation of projection unit 6600 will be described. 80(a) to 80(c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 80(a) to 80(c) illustrate transition states of the projection plate member 6620. FIG. Also, FIG. 80 illustrates a state in which the rear base 611 is removed. Also, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflecting portion 6622 (reflecting areas 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when the projection plate member 6620 is arranged at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is located inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front (viewed from the back to the front of the page). A reflective area 6622a is provided. Therefore, when the light from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to display the patterns and patterns of the reflection area 6622a inside the opening 6612p. In other words, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern that appears inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflective areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflective area 6622a. The display in areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be seen. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player will not be able to visually recognize the display other than the display surface, and other areas will be visible, which will spoil the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(b) and 80(c), when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, patterns and patterns of the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in front view are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and patterns can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or pattern is printed on the front surface of the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 6620), and the object to be irradiated is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible area (opening portion) of the object to be irradiated can be changed. 6612p), the pattern and pattern switching of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can understand which display will be displayed next before finishing the switching of the pattern and pattern. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed until the end.

In addition, even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates light to the object is turned off and the display surface of the object is darkened, the object to be irradiated may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lights in the store. By being irradiated, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns of the object to be irradiated.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmissive material, and by turning off the light from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the projection plate member 6620 becomes transparent, making it difficult to see the patterns and designs. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the illumination of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching of the patterns and patterns of the projection plate member 6620. 6620 displacements can be enjoyed to the end.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated about its center as the rotation axis. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of the 6612.

That is, when the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the installation space in the horizontal or vertical direction is limited. , the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and designs.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments described above, in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600, the substrate member 652 is provided with a total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654. However, this is not necessarily the case. The total number of the first blocks 653 and the second blocks 654 may be three or less, or may be five or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and the first block 653 alone or the second block 654 alone may be used.

In the first and second embodiments, the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface. Alternatively, the LED 651 , the first block 653 and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652 . In this case, the LED 651 is accommodated inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is made incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 .

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 of the projection unit 600 are made of a light transmissive material has been described. 630 and channel forming members 640, 2640 may be formed from two layers of light transmissive and non-transmissive material.

For example, the rear portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of non-permeable material, and the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 and 2620 sides of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of non-permeable material. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of non-transmissive material can prevent light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . That is, light emitted by devices other than illumination unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transmissive material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from other devices It is possible to suppress the light from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

Also, in this case, the layer formed of non-transmissive material is formed of a highly reflective metallic material or flexible material, or between the non-transmissive material layer and the transparent material layer. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material having a high reflectance or a flexible material. As a result, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be made stronger, and the patterns and patterns can be clearly embossed.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the rear surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portions 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described. For example, the rear view 632 and the front part 642 are attached with a seal of a member (for example, silver foil or aluminum) having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, or a color with a high reflectance is attached. (for example, white) may be printed.

In this case, it is possible to prevent light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by stickers or printing. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from other devices It is possible to prevent light from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

Furthermore, the seal or printing makes it easier to reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted.

When a seal is attached, it may be attached in such a manner that the seal protrudes from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portions 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 toward the outer edge. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the projected seal portion, so that the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily collected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

In the above-described third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620, a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided. May be interposed.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is certainly totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material with high reflectance, and can travel from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3. Patterns and patterns can be made to stand out clearly.

In addition, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance can prevent light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate member 3620 . That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member made of a highly reflective non-transmissive material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is projected onto the projection plate. It is possible to prevent patterns and designs from being incident on the member 3620 and displayed in front of the projection plate member 3620 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the coil spring is used as the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a leaf spring. As for the mounting method, a mode of connecting the projections 852 and 823 and mounting, or a mode of mounting between the rotating shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820 are exemplified.

In the first embodiment, the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotated around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. 850 may slide in a guide groove formed in front base 820 . In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (the direction of gravity), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be controlled as in the first embodiment. Since the motion can be an orthographic projection of uniform circular motion and the displacement speed can be varied, the displacement member 850 can be caused to perform interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light from the LED 651 is made incident from the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate Patterns and designs can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620. FIG.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 The surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 are arranged at positions different in the front-rear direction from the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620), and the light emitted from the LED 651 The projection plate members 620 , 2620 , 3620 , 6620 , the gear members 630 , 3630 and the groove forming members 640 , 2640 , 3640 may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end surfaces thereof.

In this case, the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are irradiated with light emitted in a direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LEDs 651, while the irradiation surfaces of the LEDs 651 are obliquely irradiated. Part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used both as light for displaying patterns and patterns on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and as light for irradiating other objects to be irradiated.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 are arranged in parallel. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620 , 2620 , 3620 and 6620 .

Specifically, the projection plate members 620, 2620, and 3620 are arranged such that the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the rear side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged. , 6620 may be irradiated. In this case, when a pattern or pattern is displayed on the surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620, the light from the LEDs 651 leaks from the inner edges of the front bases 612 and 6612, which are annular in shape when viewed from the front. can be suppressed.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged facing the front side, and the light irradiated in the direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Furthermore, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the rear side or the front side, and is arranged in a state of being inclined with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. The position may be such that the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 are irradiated with the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of .

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the back side or the front side and arranged in a state inclined with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is changed. The position may be such that the light irradiated in the direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated to the front portions 632 of the groove forming members 640 , 2640 , 3640 or the rear portions 632 of the gear members 630 , 3630 .

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is made incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is illuminated. Although the case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620 may be different.

That is, by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 to divide the region of the reflection part 622 (for example, into three regions), the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is divided into three regions. The light incident from the section is emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the first area, and the light incident from the left side is emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the second area, and is emitted from the right side. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 of the third region. Thereby, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns of patterns and designs to be displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the loss of interest of the player.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for illuminating the first to third regions are provided around the object to be illuminated (projection plate member 5620) to illuminate the first to third regions (for example, The light source arranged on the left side emits light from the upper end to illuminate the first area, the light source arranged on the left side emits light from the left end surface to illuminate the second area, and the light source arranged on the right side emits light from the right edge. It is also possible to irradiate the third area by irradiating the light from the surface), but it is necessary to arrange a plurality of light sources for that, and there is a problem that the product cost increases.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, that is, the case of irradiating the second or third area and the case of irradiating the first area. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be arranged can be reduced accordingly, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by connecting it to the shaft of a newly provided drive motor.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654. It is possible to partially increase or decrease the amount of light emitted from the front of the . That is, by changing the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620, it is possible to change the display density of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 for irradiating the projection plate member 620, and the gear for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 are placed between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. Although the case where the trains (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. Two or more of the plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying a pattern or a pattern on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize a combination of the patterns and patterns displayed on each projection plate member 620.例文帳に追加As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a display pattern of a plurality of patterns and designs, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

In the above-described third embodiment, the light from the LED 651 does not enter the central side from the side edge of the projection plate member 3620 where the bolt T is arranged, but this is not necessarily the case. Alternatively, the bolt T may be made of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) so that the light projected on the side surface of the bolt T is reflected toward the center of the projection plate member 3620 . In this case, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 can be easily condensed on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620 .

In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals to partially form a portion where no pattern or design is displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 (the light from the LEDs 651 is not incident). You may make it divide|segment a display.

In addition, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A portion where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646 , when light enters from the radially outer side of the opening 646 , the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while the LED 651 provided in the irradiation unit 650 is emitting light, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is being displaced (rotated). .

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It can be anything.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 123. FIG. In this first control example, an effect (fluctuation effect) for showing the lottery result of special symbols executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and an effect (variation effect) for showing that a jackpot game is being executed ( A big hit effect) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In this control example, as an effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, a jackpot effect (continuous jackpot effect) spanning the multiple jackpot games is executed. It is configured as follows. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the ball entrance information can be stored. It is discriminated whether or not ball entry information for winning a big win exists in the ball information, and when it is discriminated that the ball entry information for winning a big win exists, a plurality of jackpot games are straddled. A continuous jackpot effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is finished, depending on the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game. You can make them interested in the jackpot performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is possible to vary the contents of the jackpot presentation based on the ball entry information that is newly stored during the jackpot game as well as the ball entry information that is stored at the timing at which the jackpot game is executed. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball-entering information, to facilitate the execution of consecutive big win effects, and to make the players interested in the big win effects.

In addition, in this control example, as a continuous jackpot effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be varied based on the number of stored pieces of ball-entering information (the number of pending memories) at the time the jackpot game is executed. ing.

In addition, in this control example, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric sapo) (variable state (high probability, with electric sapo), time saving state (low probability, with electric sapo) )), an effect (battle effect) is executed to indicate that the game state is continuing. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuing.

Furthermore, the above-described battle effect is composed of a effect (battle ready-to-win) that suggests whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will end, and a effect (pre-battle effect) to determine the effect mode of the battle ready-to-win. Configure. By constructing in this way, when the game state advantageous to the player actually ends, for example, when the game state shifts to the normal state after the end of the big win, the battle performance is continued in a period other than when winning the normal jackpot. Therefore, the player continues to have a sense of anticipation for the continuation of the game state advantageous to the player and an uneasiness that makes the player think that the game state advantageous to the player has ended. It is possible to play a game while holding the robot.

In addition, in this control example, as an effect for suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, a plurality of effects with different degrees of expectation for big win are executed. As a result, the player can have different expectations for the big win depending on which performance is executed. Furthermore, a plurality of expectation degree suggesting modes capable of stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win can be displayed in one variable performance, and the expectation degree suggesting mode is configured to be variable during one variable performance. .

In addition, in the present control example, the amount of stepwise variation of a plurality of expectation level suggesting modes during one variable performance is summed up to execute the variable expectation level suggesting performance suggesting to the player. ing. By constructing in this way, a player who grasps the performance contents of the variable expectation suggestion performance can play the game while predicting which expectation level suggestion mode will be changed to what extent, and the performance effect. can increase

Furthermore, in this control example, a specific effect (PUSH display effect ) is executed, and a foreshadowing effect is executed to notify that the countdown effect will be executed. During one variable performance, the start timing of the precursor performance, the execution timing of the specific performance, and the period of the countdown performance can be determined from a plurality of times, and the precursor performance is determined based on the determined contents. It is configured such that the presentation mode and the presentation mode of the countdown presentation are set.

By configuring in this way, the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, compared to the structure in which the suggestive effect is executed for a predetermined period of time.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. The third pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main patterns imitating the numbers "0" to "9". . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (to be described later) is a big win, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are arranged (for example, "777"). It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this first control example), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

A small display area Dn1 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dn1 displays a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) (see FIG. 85(a)). That is, in this control example, the small display area Dn1 is used as the guidance display area Dn1. By constructing in this way, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot toward just by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dn1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

A small display area Dn2 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dn2 is configured to be able to simply display the variable display of the third pattern. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dn2, for example, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region Dm. is the case. During execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more comprehensible effect. Further, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area Dn2 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third pattern is continuing. can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this secondary display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 81(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In the first control example, since the maximum number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this control example, the number of reserved symbols is varied according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 even though the player has continuously shot the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game is not played at all by the pachinko machine 10 because the player quits the game. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters A variable display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140, the balls that have not been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of held balls. Although the details will be described later, the sub-display area Ds is divided into a first display area Ds1 and a second display area Ds2 for displaying game contents and effect contents to the player (see FIG. 102 ( a) see). The pending symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds are the pending symbols corresponding to the next variation (front view of FIG. ) is erased, and the remaining reserved symbols are shifted to the left and displayed.

Here, the symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed (the reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost during the previous variation) is the symbol display area during execution (the area where the expectation degree display mode Dk1 in FIG. 102 is displayed) ). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which reserved symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 81(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and left end (outside the active line) of the main display area Dm, three parts of the main pattern and three parts of the sub-symbol of the third pattern are displayed.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or enters the second ball entrance 140 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of times the ball enters are each held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the ball entering the second ball entrance 140 can be held up to four times each, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is It is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the second ball entrance 140 are not limited to be the same. The upper limit of the number of held balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be greater than the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the second ball entrance 140, or conversely, it may be less. good. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the flow of each effect executed in the first control example will be roughly described. FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the content of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 82( a ), in this control example, different effects are executed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, when the game state is "normal", that is, when the game state is a normal state that is not during the jackpot, the variable probability state, or the time saving state, the normal effect is executed, and the game state is the "jackpot". ”, the production during the jackpot is executed, and if the gaming state is “probability variable or time saving”, that is, if the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state, during probability changing (probability variable state or time saving state Middle) The production is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the currently set game state just by looking at the effect being executed, and to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine. In this control example, each effect is executed in association with the game state, but for example, a common effect that can be executed when a plurality of game states are set may be provided. . As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the game state that is currently set by visually recognizing the effect that is being executed, and the player can play the game while expecting that the game state that is advantageous to the player is set. You can let people play games.

In addition, although FIG. 82 explains that the effect contents (display contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differ according to the game state, the aspect included in the effect contents is the third symbol. It is not limited to the display mode displayed on the display device 81, and includes, for example, the output mode of sound output by the audio output device 226 and the lighting mode of the lamp executed by the lamp display device 227. be.

First, the effects executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. First, in this control example, the number of special symbol reserved balls and the contents of reserved and stored ball entry information (for example, determination of whether or not there is entry ball information that wins a prize) at the time the jackpot game is executed result), the content of the effect to be executed during the jackpot game is set.

Specifically, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed continuously, an effect (for example, 15 rounds of jackpot games is executed) that partially informs the content of the previous jackpot game (first jackpot game) a performance 1 during a jackpot, in which a performance of notifying the number of rounds for 5 rounds is continuously executed across a plurality of jackpots to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. , Execute the production corresponding to each individual jackpot game, and between the plurality of jackpot games (during the special symbol fluctuation period performed during the period from the end of the previous jackpot game to the execution of the next jackpot game) By continuing to display the ending effect of the jackpot game, a mid-jackpot effect 2 that directs as if a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed, and the following when the previous jackpot game is executed. A performance 3 during a big win, which notifies execution of a big win game and executes a continuous performance for a plurality of big win games, can be set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 83(a), the content of the above-described effect 1 during the big win will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect 1 during the jackpot. During the jackpot production 1, as shown in FIG. 83(a), when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "3" (a state in which a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a production during a big win that can be set when information on entering a winning ball is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the effect 1 during the jackpot is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, first, a part of the number of rounds of the jackpot 1 (5 rounds (R ))) is executed (5R effect) After that, the 5R effect is continuously executed until the next big win game (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) is completed. is set so that a jackpot game effect for 25R is executed.

In other words, instead of setting the production content (production scenario) to be executed during one jackpot game as a series of production content (production scenario), it is configured to be set in units of a predetermined period (for example, 5 rounds). , a new performance content (scenario) is set based on the ball entry information retained and stored at that time.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 83(a), when the jackpot 1 (15R) is started, the 5R effect 1 (see FIG. 85(a)) is executed. When this 5R effect is started, an effect (fixed round number notification) is executed to inform the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least 5 rounds. Then, when the jackpot game progresses up to the 4th R, a suggestive effect (see FIG. 85(b)) that suggests whether or not the next 5R effect will be executed is executed, and in the 5th R, the 5R effect is executed next. A notification effect (see FIG. 86(a)) for notifying the result of whether or not is executed is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 83(a), the 15th round jackpot is set as the first jackpot, so the 5R effect is executed three times. Here, the 5R effect executed for the third time (5R effect 3) is a period until the start of the second big win to be executed next, that is, the ending period of the first big win and the first big win. It is set so as to be executed even during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation which is executed after the end (see FIGS. 87(a) and 88(a)). Then, the 5R effect 4 is executed along with the start of the second big win (the start of the opening period of the second big win).

As a result, a new reserved memory is generated during the jackpot game, and if the reserved memory contains information on entering a ball corresponding to a jackpot with a special symbol, the information on entering a ball (for example, the number of rounds) is used. It is possible to set a new effect (additional round number display). Therefore, it is possible to easily change the performance to be executed during the big win (display of the number of additional rounds) as compared with the configuration in which the contents of the big win performance to be executed during the big win are set as a series of performance scenarios at the start of the big win. .

Note that FIG. 83(a) shows an example in which a period of five rounds is set as one performance unit during the jackpot game, but the content of the performance may be set for each round. Further, it is also possible to perform a discrimination management process for discriminating the content of winning ball information for each round, and to set the effect contents for each predetermined round (for example, every five rounds). In addition, when new ball entry information is generated, the content of the entry information is determined, and the information (whether or not there is a jackpot, the number of rounds) used when setting the content of the performance during the jackpot is stored in the storage area. can be configured to

As a result, it is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the processing load at the timing (every five rounds in FIG. 83(a)) of setting the content of the effect during the jackpot game.

Here, the display contents of the effect 1 during the big win will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the performance 1 during the jackpot is executed, and FIG. FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an effect display for indicating whether or not the 5R effect continues, and FIG. 86(a) is an effect display for indicating that a new 5R effect will be executed; 86(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen in the round before the end of the jackpot 1, and FIG. 87(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example. FIG. 87(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that the jackpot will continue during the ending period of the jackpot 1, and FIG. 87(b) is a display showing that the jackpot will end during the ending period of the jackpot 1. FIG. 88(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the screen, and FIG. 88(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the special symbol variation after the end of the first jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the effect 1 during the jackpot is executed, the characters "jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been won and "777" indicating that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the special symbols. The third symbol stopped and displayed at is displayed in the main display area Dm. In the small display area (guidance display area) Dn1 of the main display area Dm, characters "Right shot" are displayed to guide the player to shoot the ball to the right shot area. On the upper right side, in a round number display area Dm2 for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game, a number of running rounds display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds currently being run is displayed, and the number of rounds being executed is confirmed. A fixed round number display mode Dm4 indicating the fixed round number is displayed.

In this control example, as the effect 1 during the jackpot, a 5-round (R) effect for informing the player in advance that a jackpot game for at least 5 rounds will be executed is executed. , "5" is displayed as the fixed round number display mode Dm4.

Then, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game (number of running rounds display mode Dm3) becomes "4", as shown in FIG. 86(a) reference) is executed (jackpot continuation effect). In this control example, selected images Dm5 to Dm7 imitating a "treasure box" are displayed as a display mode that can be selected by the player as a continuous jackpot effect, and a selected image Dm8 imitating an "arrow" is displayed. are displayed so as to correspond to each of Dm7. The player selects one of the selection images Dm8 displayed corresponding to each of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7, thereby selecting one of the three displayed "treasure chests". Select Treasure Chest.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, one of the three "arrows" that are the selection image Dm8 is displayed such that the display mode of one "arrow" is regularly varied. The selected images Dm5 to Dm7 corresponding to the changed display mode (variable display mode Dm9) become the selected images selected by the player, and the player's arbitrary "arrow" becomes the variable display mode Dm9. When the frame button 22 is operated, an arbitrary selected image is selected.

It should be noted that the method by which the player selects an arbitrary image to be selected is not limited to the content described above, and other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured so that it can be selected by touching the display area of any selected image among the selected images Dm5 to Dm7 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the player can select a frame. By operating the button 22, it may be configured such that the selection image Dm8 that becomes the variable display mode Dm9 can be selected.

Furthermore, in this control example, the same display mode is displayed as the display mode of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7, but different display modes may be displayed for each of the selected images. In this case, when the selected image is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode, the following 5R effect may be easily executed. As a result, the expectation that the big win game will continue can be enhanced at the stage when the selected image is displayed, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

When the number of rounds of the jackpot game enters the fifth round with the selected image Dm5 selected, the screen shown in FIG. 86(a) is displayed. In FIG. 86(a), only the "treasure box" (selected image Dm5) selected in the jackpot continuation effect executed in the fourth round of the jackpot game is displayed, and from among the "treasure box", the number of confirmed rounds is displayed. "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 to be added to the mode Dm4, and an additional effect is displayed in which the value of the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10".

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least the next five rounds. Note that FIG. 86(a) shows the display screen when "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10, but in the jackpot continuation effect (see FIG. 85(b)), the selected selected image , the content of the additional round number display mode Dm10 is set differently. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the continuous jackpot effect.

In addition, in this control example, the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed with a numerical value corresponding to the number of rounds. Any display mode may be used as long as the display mode is variable corresponding to the character, and a display mode using abstract expressions such as the movement, color, and size of the character may be used. By using an abstract display mode as the fixed round number display mode Dm4 in this way, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of predicting the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game for the player.

In addition, since a player who has been playing games for a long time can understand the regularity of the display mode using abstract expressions, it becomes easier for the player to understand the content of the jackpot game than other players. satisfaction can be increased. As for the contents of the jackpot game in this case, the number of rounds of each jackpot game is displayed in the middle jackpot effect in which the effect that the first jackpot and the second jackpot are continuously executed is executed. It is preferable to make it possible to comprehend by the regularity of the mode.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to predict whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will be set especially after the second big win game is finished, based on the number of rounds of the second big win game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who has been playing the game for a long time with game information that is more advantageous than the other players, so that the player can be motivated to continue playing the game for a long time.

In addition, in FIG. 86(a), "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 to be added to the fixed round number display mode Dm4 while the fifth round of the round game is being executed. An example is shown in which the value of the display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10". The content of the effect may be set so as to be the inter-round interval period from the end of the 1st round game to the start of the 6th round game.

In addition, means for determining the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the continuous jackpot effect shown in FIG. 3 seconds), the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed during the fifth round of the game, and the operation timing is set for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). If it exceeds or if it is not operated, the additional round number display mode Dm10 may be displayed during the inter-round interval period after the end of the fifth round.

In this way, by varying the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode Dm10 based on the timing of the player's operation of the frame button 22 and the presence or absence of the operation, the player can actively participate in the production. , and the performance effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the number of additional rounds display mode Dm10 may be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 or the presence or absence of the operation. A determination means may be provided for determining whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 during a specific one second), and the timing for displaying the additional round number display mode Dm10 may be varied based on the determination result. . Further, only when the operation content of the frame button 22 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated during a specific one second during the fourth round of the round game), the additional round number display mode Dm10. may be configured so that the values displayed in are different.

Next, the production content for showing that a plurality of (two) jackpot games are continuously executed, that is, the special from the end of the first jackpot game to the start of the second jackpot game The contents of the effect during the symbol variation period will be described with reference to FIGS. 86(b) and 87(a).

First, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the continuous jackpot effect is executed based on the start of the round (14th round) immediately before the final round of the first jackpot game. FIG. 86(b) shows an effect mode different from the continuous jackpot effect shown in FIG. 85(b), and the number of selected images displayed on the display screen and the display mode are different. Specifically, the number of images to be selected is changed from three to two, and a more gorgeous display mode than usual is set as the display mode of the selected image Dm5. In this way, by varying the effect mode of the continuous jackpot effect, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the big win game will continue depending on the effect mode of the continuous jackpot effect to be executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the contents of the performance, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

FIG. 86(b) shows an effect mode different from FIG. 85(b) in order to explain variations of the continuous jackpot effect. The same effect mode as that of FIG. 85(b) is naturally set to be executed as the continuous jackpot effect executed in the round. In this way, by using the same performance mode for the continuous jackpot performance performed during the first jackpot game and the continuous jackpot performance performed at the end of the first jackpot game, it is possible to perform the first game at any timing. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the jackpot game has ended (how many rounds the first jackpot was in).

In addition to the method of setting the continuous jackpot production described above, for example, the continuous jackpot production is executed in the final round of the jackpot game according to the selected image ("treasure box") selected in the continuous jackpot production. It may be configured to suggest to the player that it is a continuous jackpot effect.

When the selected image Dm5 is selected in the continuous jackpot effect shown in FIG. 86(b) and the final round (15th round) is entered, the same display as the additional effect shown in FIG. 86(a) is executed. The display is continued during the ending period after the end of the final round, as shown in FIG. 87(a). Then, when the ending period of the jackpot ends (the jackpot ends) and the special symbols start to fluctuate, the display screen shown in FIG. 88(a) is displayed.

This FIG. 88(a) is an example of the display screen during the period when the first jackpot game is over and the special symbols are changing. As shown in FIG. 88(a), even after the first jackpot game is over (after the special symbols are started to change), the display of the additional effect is continuously executed. In the small display area Dn2, the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Then, when the variation of the special symbols that have won the jackpot stops, a combination of symbols (for example, "777") indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dn2, and the additional effect display is executed. The next jackpot game is started while the state is maintained.

In this control example, when the additional effect is set as the effect during the jackpot, the number of rounds set for the running jackpot and the next jackpot that will be held ) and the number of rounds set in ), so that the display mode of the additional effect can be set. An additional round number display mode Dm10 including the number of rounds set for the next big win can be displayed during the first big win.

In the above example, the period from the final round of the jackpot to winning the next jackpot (the period from winning the next jackpot, passing the opening period of the jackpot, and running the first round game) period), an additional effect is displayed continuously, but other effects may be used. For example, the additional effect is completed in the final round (15th round), 87(a)) and during the special symbol fluctuation period (see FIG. 88(a)), a blessing effect may be executed to congratulate the addition of the number of rounds, or the final round (15 round), and during the ending period (see FIG. 87(a)), the addition effect is completed, and during the special symbol fluctuation period (see FIG. 88(a)), the effect of congratulating the addition of the number of rounds. may be executed, and in the final round (15th round), the jackpot continuation effect (see FIG. 86(b)) executed in the 14th round is continuously displayed, and during the ending period (FIG. 87 (a)) and during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88(a)), the additional effect may be executed.

When executing the above-mentioned blessing effect, the round following the round in which the additional effect (for example, the additional effect executed in the fifth round (see FIG. 86(a))) is executed during one jackpot ( For example, it is preferable to configure so that a similar blessing effect is executed also in the sixth round). As a result, a performance mode in which it is difficult for a player to grasp how many times the jackpot has been won while the top-up performance is being executed, that is, a performance mode of the top-up performance executed during one big win; The effect mode of the additional effect executed between two big wins can be the same (same except for an error that makes it difficult for the player to identify).

On the other hand, when there is no round number to be added by the additional effect, as shown in FIG. ”, a comment “unfortunately, the big win is over” is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the big win ends.

In addition, this control example is configured such that a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as an interval period (interval interval period between rounds) between each round game executed during the jackpot game. may be used, for example, even if the number of jackpot rounds is the same according to the type of jackpot won, it may be configured to vary the period of the inter-round interval. In this case, as the inter-round interval set during one jackpot, the inter-round interval before the end of a round that is a multiple of 5 (for example, the inter-round interval set between 5 and 6 rounds) is set to 5 seconds, and the other round interval is set to 2 seconds, and the interval between rounds two rounds before the start of a round that is a multiple of 5 (for example, a round set between 3 and 4 rounds Interval between rounds is set to 5 seconds, and interval between other rounds is set to 2 seconds.

Moreover, when using the jackpot types with different inter-round intervals as described above, it is preferable to switch the effect during the jackpot at the timing when the long-term inter-round interval is set. Furthermore, as in this control example, when executing the effect during the jackpot with a predetermined period (5 rounds) as one unit, from the start of the jackpot (start of the opening period of the jackpot, or the start of the first round) Since the interval until the long interval between rounds is first set (for example, the end of the third round) is less than one unit of the performance during the jackpot, the performance other than the additional performance is executed. good to do

Furthermore, in this control example, regardless of the type of jackpot, a certain period (for example, 1 second) is set as the ending period of the jackpot. It may be configured to be different for each type, and the opening period of the jackpot may be configured to be different for each jackpot type to be set.

In this way, the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) is the same, but the opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period set for the jackpot are varied according to the set jackpot type. and setting the performance during the jackpot across a plurality of jackpot games, the player is asked how many times the jackpot has been won while the performance during the jackpot is executed once. can be difficult to grasp.

In addition, when the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the winning of the next jackpot is different, that is, when the next jackpot is won with the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the previous jackpot. Even if the special symbol variation period executed between the big wins differs between the case of winning the next big win in the special symbol variation of the third rotation, the opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the period set for the big win. By configuring the ending period to be different according to the type of the set big win, the performance during the big win can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, referring back to FIG. 83(b), the contents of the above-described jackpot mid-effect 2 will be described. FIG.83(b) is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation 2 during a big hit. During this jackpot production 2, as shown in FIG. 83(b), when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "2" (a state in which a new reserved ball can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a production during a big win that can be set when the winning ball entry information is not included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the effect 2 during the jackpot is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the jackpot game effect (15R After the end of the jackpot 1, the next jackpot (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) is executed. Then, when the jackpot 2 is executed, the contents of the effect are switched from the ending effect to the 10R effect.

This production during the jackpot 2 is such that a plurality of consecutively executed jackpot games are continuously executed when ball entry information corresponding to the hit is included in the reserved ball newly acquired during the jackpot game. It is directed to In other words, the jackpot game production corresponding to the jackpot 1 is the normal jackpot game production (15R production), and based on the ball entry information of the reserved ball newly acquired during the jackpot game, the content of the ending production is changed continuously. A plurality of jackpot games that are executed as a result can be produced so that they are continuously executed.

By configuring in this way, the production (continuous jackpot production) in which a plurality of jackpot game machines are continuously executed can be set based on the reserved balls obtained during the jackpot game, so that the continuous jackpot production can be performed. Execution can be facilitated, and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, even if the normal jackpot game effect is executed, the player can play the jackpot game while expecting to shift to the continuous jackpot game effect.

88(b) to 89(b), the contents of the effect displayed between two big wins in the effect 2 during the big win (see FIG. 83(b)) will be described. FIG. 88(b) is a diagram schematically showing the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first jackpot, and FIG. 89(a) shows that the first jackpot ends and the special symbols start to fluctuate. FIG. 89(b) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen in the state where the special symbols are won.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first big win, information for showing the number of rounds of the current big win and the number of balls acquired during the big win in the main display area Dm. (acquired points) is displayed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the special symbols start to change, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the ending display is continuously displayed and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is suggested to the player. In the round number display area Dm2 for the game, a running round number display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds that are currently being performed and a confirmed round number display mode Dm4 indicating the confirmed number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed are displayed during the jackpot. continue to be displayed in the same way. In addition, a small display area Dn2 for displaying the variation of the third symbol, a pending execution area Dn3, and a pending symbol display area Dn4 are displayed. In FIG. 89(a), the second reserved design from the left in the reserved design display area Dn4 (a reserved design with a circle marked with a 3 that is displayed in a variable manner one after another) wins the jackpot. It shows a state where

Then, when the special symbol jackpot is won (when the variable display of the reserved symbols marked with a circle 3 stops), as shown in FIG. A comment ``the jackpot will continue'' for notifying that a new jackpot will start is displayed, and a fixed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed so as to indicate the round number ``10'' of the second jackpot. The value is variably displayed from "15" to "25". Also, in the small display area Dn2, the third symbol combination "777" indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed.

Although the contents of the effects executed in the 2nd effect during the big win have been described above, the same effect may be used in the 1st effect during the big win. That is, in the above-described jackpot middle production 1, since the production using a plurality of rounds is executed as the jackpot continuous production, for example, during the final round of the first jackpot or the ending period after the final round, the jackpot When a new reserved ball containing ball entry information to be won is obtained, it is difficult to execute the performance during the jackpot so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots. In such a case, by executing the same effect as the above-described effect 2 during the big win, the effect during the big win can be smoothly executed so as to straddle a plurality of big wins.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84(a), the content of the above-described effect 3 during the big win will be described. FIG. 84(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect 3 during the big win. As shown in FIG. 84(a), during this jackpot production 3, when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "4" (a state where new reserved balls cannot be acquired during the jackpot game). ), and when information on entering a winning ball is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired, the effect during the jackpot can be set.

When the effect 3 during the jackpot is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the next jackpot game (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) A jackpot game effect (25R effect) is executed in which the game content of the game is also integrated.

The performance 3 during the jackpot is a state in which it is not possible to acquire a new reserved ball during the jackpot game, that is, a state in which it is already possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is won continuously at the timing when the jackpot 1 is executed. It is a production that is executed in When the performance 3 during the jackpot is executed, the player can be immediately notified that the jackpot has been won in succession, and the player can be given a sense of security, and a new hold is made during the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the player's excessive expectations for successively winning the big wins due to the execution of the performance 2 during the big wins in a state in which the ball cannot be acquired.

As described above, in this control example, when the jackpot is won consecutively within a predetermined period (within the holding memory), the jackpot is designed to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are being continuously executed. A plurality of middle performances are prepared, and the middle-big-hit performances to be executed are set based on the number of special pattern reserved balls at the time when the previous big-hit game is executed and the determination result of the ball entry information stored in the reservation. is doing.

Furthermore, the plurality of mid-jackpot productions have different timings for informing the player of successive jackpot wins. As a result, the player can enjoy the jackpot game to the end while expecting to win consecutive jackpots.

In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed in a state in which there is a vacancy in the reserved memory number of special symbols (a state in which a new reserved memory is possible during the jackpot game), it corresponds to a jackpot of special symbols during the jackpot game. Even if the reserved pattern is reserved and stored, the performance is reserved and stored at the time of execution of the big winning game because the performance during the big winning can be executed to make it appear that a plurality of big winning games are continuously executed. Compared to the case of determining the performance during the big win based on the information, the performance during the big win is easily executed to make it appear that a plurality of big win games are continuously executed, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

In addition, as one of the plurality of effects during the jackpot, the number of rounds to be executed in the previous jackpot game can be divided into a plurality of times and partially notified to the player, so that the effect during the jackpot this time is one time. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the performance is executed in the jackpot game or the performance is executed across a plurality of jackpot games. Therefore, the player can play while expecting that the big winning game will continue for a long time.

In this control example, during the special symbol variation period after the end of the jackpot game, the small display area Dn2 displaying the variation of the third symbol, the pending execution area Dn3, Although a configuration is used in which the reserved symbol display area Dn4 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, other configurations may be used. If it is determined by the means that the conditions for executing the continuous jackpot performance are established, the variation display of the third symbol or the above-described reserved symbol is provided even during the special symbol variation period. It is preferable to execute a process that does not display the related information, or execute a process that displays the contents in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the contents (for example, reduced display or movement of the display area).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the end timing of the first big win game and the start timing of the second big win game based on the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can make it harder to be

In addition, during the interval between rounds in the first jackpot game, a pseudo-ending display, a pseudo-fluctuation display that fluctuates the pseudo-pattern imitating the third pattern, and a pseudo-stopping of the fluctuating pseudo-pattern in a combination corresponding to the big win. A pseudo-game executing means for executing a stop display and a pseudo-jackpot start display after the pseudo-stop display is provided, and a pseudo-game execution means is provided as if a plurality of jackpots are being executed while one jackpot game is being executed. You may comprise so that production may be performed. By configuring in this way, the special pattern (main pattern) displayed on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b at the time of winning the first big win is a special pattern (main pattern) corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot game. ) can be made difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the production during the big win executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84(b), another example of the effect 1 during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 84(b) is a timing chart showing the contents of another example of the effect 1 during the big win. In this example, the content of the additional effect is changed from the 5R effect to the 10R effect with respect to the contents shown in FIG. The difference is in the presence or absence of prize winning information that indicates a win.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 84(b), the jackpot 1 (15R) is started in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is "1" and there is no winning. , 10R effect 1 is executed as the first additional effect. Then, while the 10R effect 1 is being executed, a new reserved ball containing winning ball entry information is acquired (the number of reserved balls becomes "2"), and the 10R effect 1 is performed. In the continuous jackpot performance, the performance indicating that the 10R performance 2 is executed is executed using the round number obtained by summing the round numbers corresponding to the jackpot 2. - 特許庁

By executing such a production, one additional production is executed so as to straddle multiple jackpots (one additional production is executed in the period from 11R of jackpot 1 to 5R of jackpot 2) Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds set for one big win. In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 84(b), the 10R effect 1 and the 10R effect 2 are executed because the effect for 10R is executed as an additional effect executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots. Later, the same 5R effect 5 as in FIG. 83(a) described above can be executed, and the data used for the additional effect can be shared.

It should be noted that FIG. 83(a) or FIG. 84(b) shows an example of an additional effect, and is configured to execute an additional effect other than the contents illustrated above. Specifically, in addition to the 5R production using a period of 5 rounds, the 10R production using a period of 10 rounds, the 7R production using a period of 7 rounds and the 8 rounds production 8R performance using a period is configured to be executable.

In this way, by using a plurality of effects corresponding to different numbers of rounds as the additional effects, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds to be executed during one big win. While predicting how long (how many rounds) the current big win will continue, the game can be played with the expectation that it will continue for a long time.

In addition, the game state set at the time when the production 1 during the jackpot executed corresponding to one or more jackpots is completed, that is, the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) executed last corresponding to the production 1 during the jackpot , normal jackpot) may be configured to vary the additional performance to be executed, for example, when it is determined that the game state set at the time when the performance 1 during the jackpot is completed is the probability variable state. , it is easy to set an additional performance (for example, 10R performance) corresponding to a long number of rounds as an additional performance executed at the beginning of the performance 1 during the big win, or at the time when the performance 1 during the big win is completed. It may be configured to execute an additional effect (for example, 7R effect) that is executed only when the set game state is the variable probability state.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player predict both the number of rounds to be executed during the big win and the game state to be set after the end of the big win by the extra performance to be executed, and the performance effect is obtained. can increase

Returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. In this control example, when the game state becomes a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) advantageous to the player, a specific production (probability variable medium production or time saving medium production (hereinafter referred to as high probability medium production )) is executed. The period during which the high-probability middle production is executed is a period during which a predetermined production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, and whether or not the game state advantageous to the player ends based on the result of the battle production. is executed to notify the player.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97, the contents of the high-probability middle effect (continuous effect) will be described in detail. FIG. 90 shows that the flow of the high-probability production (continuous production) executed when the gaming state is in an advantageous state (probability variable state or time-saving state) is continuously executed until the jackpot is won. It is the timing chart which showed production (continuous production). As shown in FIG. 90, during the high-probability middle production (continuous production), the battle production is configured to be repeatedly executed. The battle production is a battle reach (see FIGS. 93 to 96) in which the production for notifying whether the advantageous state (probability variable state or time saving state) ends is executed in a period of one rotation of the special figure fluctuation (see FIGS. 93 to 96), The effect for changing the display mode when the battle ready-to-win is executed is composed of a pre-battle effect (see FIGS. 91 and 92) executed in a period corresponding to a plurality of rotations of the special figure variation.

Details of the effect will be described later, but in Battle Reach, the effect (attack effect) in which the HP value (continuous value) of the own character and the opponent character is reduced is executed multiple times (three times). When the HP value (continuous value) of becomes "0" (in the case of the defeat pattern battle reach), the condition for ending the advantageous state (won the jackpot where the advantageous state ends, or the number of times the special pattern fluctuates is set When the HP value (continuous value) of the opponent's character becomes "0" (in the case of the victory pattern Battle Reach), it indicates that a jackpot has been won in which the advantageous state continues, When the mutual HP value (continuous value) does not become "0" (in the case of the battle reach of the draw pattern), it indicates that the high-probability middle production continues.

In addition, in the pre-battle effect, the effect of increasing or decreasing the HP value (continuous value) of the opponent's character at the time when the battle reach is started is executed. This pre-battle effect is configured so that the effect mode is set based on the look-ahead result of the reserved symbols and the number of times the battle effect is set repeatedly, and based on the effect mode, a plurality of special symbol variations are performed. HP management using is executed.

FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a battle effect is started as a high-probability medium effect (continuous effect). When the battle production is started, first, the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, is executed. In this pre-battle effect, an effect for increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent in the battle reach, which is the second half of the battle effect, is executed.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), when the pre-battle effect is executed, a boy character Dm11 is displayed on the left side of the center of the main display area Dm, and an opponent for selecting an opponent candidate for battle reach is displayed. A selection mode is displayed. In this opponent selection mode, selection sections Dm13 to Dm16 corresponding to four types of characters A to D are displayed as opponent candidates to be battle reach opponents, and one of the selection sections is selected. Note that FIG. 91(a) shows a state in which the selection portion Dm13 corresponding to the character A is selected.

Furthermore, an HP display area Dm17 indicating the continuous value (HP value) corresponding to each of the four characters A to D is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. The HP display area Dm17 is composed of a display portion showing the HP value with a horizontally long gauge and a display portion (Dm18) showing the HP value numerically. The value (display mode) displayed in the HP display area Dm17 is variably displayed so as to vary (decrease) according to the attack on the opponent during the pre-battle effect.

In the pre-battle effect, when the opponent is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 92(a) is displayed next, the effect of decreasing the HP value of the opponent is executed, and the HP display area Dm17 selects and displays it. A display (a circle mark on the character A) for identifying the HP display corresponding to the opponent character is displayed. This allows the player to easily grasp the HP value of the opponent character currently selected.

Also, during this pre-battle effect, only the effect of decreasing the HP value of the opponent character is executed, and the HP value of itself (character Dm11) does not decrease. As a result, until the Battle Reach is executed, as a result of the effect of attacking the opponent, the HP value will not decrease, so it is expected that many effects of attacking the opponent will be executed. You can play while In addition, since the HP value of the player (character Dm11) is not displayed on the screen during the pre-battle effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy that the HP value of the character Dm11 will decrease as a result of the effect being executed. can do.

It should be noted that the production mode of the pre-battle production is not limited to the contents described above. You may perform the production|presentation which increases the HP value of. In addition, in the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, the HP value of the opponent is reduced until it becomes "0", and the big hit (definite variable state after the big win ends, or , a jackpot where a time saving state is given) may be executed.

In FIG. 92(a), since the character ADm13 was attacked by reducing the HP by "200" (main attack effect), the display portion Dm18a corresponding to the character A in the HP display area Dm17 is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is variably displayed at "800" corresponding to the content of the presentation.

On the other hand, in the display example shown in FIG. 92(b), in addition to the effect in which the character Dm11 makes an attack (main attack effect), the cat character Dm20 appears and performs an additional attack (secondary attack effect). is also executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92(b), the character ADm13 is attacked to reduce its HP by "230", and the display portion Dm18c corresponding to the character C in the HP display area Dm17 becomes the main display area Dm. "770" is variably displayed corresponding to the content of the presentation.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), during this pre-battle production, the opponent may be changed in the middle, and if the opponent is changed, the current opponent can be identified. The HP display area Dm18 is displayed (the character A is circled).

Here, a brief description will be given of a method for setting the HP value that is decreased by the attack effect. In this control example, based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the pre-determination result (prefetching result) of the entering ball information that is reserved and stored, the result of the battle production and rough production contents (HP value Decrease value (100's place) and main attack effect) are determined. Then, with the aim of diversifying the types of effects for the effect contents (HP value reduction value and main attack effect) determined by the continuous value management means, the lottery result and the look-ahead result are determined by the effect setting means. It is configured such that detailed presentation contents (HP value decrease value (10's place) and secondary attack presentation) are determined without being affected.

Then, the continuation value (HP value) determined by the continuation value management means is stored, and the continuation value (HP value) is increased or decreased using the continuation value management means with respect to the stored continuation value (HP value). Configure.

Specifically, in FIG. 92(a) described above, an effect (main attack effect) in which the continuation value (HP value) is decreased by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the continuation value (HP value) is reduced by the effect setting means. This shows an example of the display when the content is set so that the value is not increased or decreased, and as a pre-battle effect, a main attack effect (character Dm11's attack effect) is executed to reduce the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 200. there is

On the other hand, in FIG. 92(b) described above, an effect (main attack effect) in which the continuation value (HP value) is decreased by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the value of the continuation value (HP value) is reduced by 20 by the effect setting means. This shows an example of a display when a reduction effect (secondary attack effect) is set. A secondary attack effect (attack effect of the cat character Dm20) is executed to reduce the continuous value (HP value) of the ADm13 by 30, and a total effect of reducing the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 230 is performed as a pre-battle effect. is running.

By configuring in this way, the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased with respect to the number of effects set by the continuous value management means. In other words, with respect to the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to reduce the number of effects managed by continuously increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value). It is possible to reduce the burden of control.

Further, when the opponent during one pre-battle effect is changed, the HP value of the opponent character before the change is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, when the opponent is changed and the same opponent character is selected again, the effect can be continued from the previous HP value. In this way, by gradually reducing the HP of the opponent character who can be the opponent of the battle reach during the pre-battle production, and then performing the battle reach, the battle reach is frequently performed in the high-probability medium production. A series of productions can be executed without generating them.

In addition, during the pre-battle production, if the degree of decrease in HP of a plurality of opponent candidates is uneven, the player is made to watch the production while expecting that the battle reach will be executed with an opponent with a low HP value as much as possible. be able to.

After the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, is completed, next, battle ready-to-win battles with specific opponents are executed. If the player wins this battle reach (the opponent's HP is set to "0"), it indicates that the player has won a big win in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, and the player is defeated (his own HP is set to "0"). If it becomes), it indicates that the player has won a game in which a game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player is set. In addition, when the battle ready-to-win is executed at the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a hit, the game ends in a draw (the HP of the game itself and the opponent does not become "0"), and the high-probability medium performance is continued.

This battle reach is when a jackpot is won during high probability (variable probability, short time), or when a predetermined condition is met during high probability (for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the battle If the ready-to-reach production lottery is won), and if the result of the battle ready-to-win is a draw, the pre-battle production is performed again. In this case, all HP values of the opponent character are set to initial values. That is, since the pre-battle production is performed to reduce the HP value of the opponent character, for example, if the period during which the special symbol is not won during the probability change state continues for a long time, the pre-battle production In order to prevent the opponent character's HP from becoming "0" at the beginning of the battle, it is necessary to make it difficult to execute the effect (attack effect) that reduces the opponent character's HP, and there is a risk that the effect of the pre-battle effect will be reduced. there were.

In this control example, a battle reach is generated even when a special symbol is won, and a "draw" is provided as a result of the battle reach. Since the HP value of is reset to the initial value and the pre-battle effect is resumed, the effect of the pre-battle effect decreases due to the execution of one pre-battle effect for a long period of time. can be resolved. In addition, by providing a "draw" as a result of the battle reach, even if an effect with a low degree of expectation is executed during the battle reach, the possibility of a "draw" can be left open.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 93(a) to 96(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during battle reach will be described. First, FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the start of battle reach. Here, the contents of the production of Battle Reach will be explained. In the battle reach of this control example, an effect is executed in which the attack of the player or the opponent is executed a total of three times, and the result is displayed according to the final HP value. There are three types of attacks: "strong attack", "medium attack", and "light attack", each of which is set to have a different HP value.

When the battle ready-to-win is started, the characters "battle start" and the characters "first time" indicating the number of battles in this battle are displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. be done. Below that, an HP gauge Dm21 indicating the value of the player's own HP and an HP gauge Dm22 indicating the value of the opponent's HP are displayed. The HP gauge Dm21 displays "1000" which is the upper limit value, and the HP gauge Dm22 displays "500" which is the value decreased in the pre-battle effect.

A storage gauge Dm23 is displayed below the HP gauge Dm21. This accumulation gauge Dm23 accumulates a value based on being attacked by the opponent, and when the accumulated value reaches "MAX", a reversal effect is executed, and an effect of winning the battle reach is executed. By enabling execution of this reversal performance, even if the performance in which the opponent side is superior is executed during the battle reach in which three battles are fought, the expectation of a big win can be made until the end.

A progress display area Dm24 for indicating the progress of the battle reach is formed below the main display area Dm, and the history of the attack effects during the battle reach is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93(b), the display contents when the first attack during battle reach is the player's own will be described. As shown in FIG. 93(b), an effect is executed in which the own character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (weakly attacks) the opponent's character Dm15 in the main display area Dm, and the value of the HP gauge Dm22 changes to " 500" to "300". Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "round mark" indicating that the first battle was the attack of the player himself is displayed.

When the second battle effect is executed following the first battle effect shown in FIG. 93(b), the second battle effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(a). Here, in FIG. 94(a), an effect in which the opponent's character Dm15 attacks is executed as the effect of the second battle, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuous value (HP value) of the own character Dm11 is "1000." ” to “700” and the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 is accumulated by half (50). Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "cross mark" indicating that the second battle was an attack by the opponent is displayed.

Next, when the effect for the third battle (last battle) is executed, the effect for the third battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(b). Here, in FIG. 94(b), as the third battle effect, the player's own character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (medium attack) the opponent's character Dm15 in the main display area Dm. The value of Dm22 is decreased from "300" to "0", and it is reported that the current battle reach was a battle reach showing that a big hit was won in which a game state advantageous to the player was set. Then, in the small display area Dn2, "777" is displayed as the combination display of the third symbol for indicating that the current special symbol lottery is a big win.

In addition to the battle reach (victory pattern) shown in FIG. 94(b), the battle reach in this control example is provided with a draw pattern and a defeat pattern as described above, and the battle reach of the draw pattern is set. If so, for example, instead of the third battle effect shown in FIG. 94(b), the effect shown in FIG. 95(a) is displayed. In the display example shown in FIG. 95(a), an effect in which the opponent's character Dm15 attacks is executed as the effect for the third battle. In the case of a draw pattern battle reach, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of your character Dm11 does not decrease to 0 (reduces to 500), and the battle reach ends without the continuous value (HP value) of yourself and the opponent becoming 0. do. In this case, a new battle effect is executed, and the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91) is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), even if the final attack (third attack) of Battle Reach is the opponent's attack, provide a draw pattern in which the continuation value (HP value) of the player does not decrease to 0. , the player can have expectations until the end of the battle reach. In FIG. 95(a), the pattern in which the opponent makes the third attack as the battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player is told that the current battle reach is either a defeat or a draw. I exemplified the production that seems to be a pattern, but in addition to that, there is a pattern in which the player makes the third attack as a battle reach of the tie pattern. An effect is also executed that makes one think that it is one of the draw patterns. In this case, when the third attack is made, the player will not be defeated in this battle reach, so the player can be relieved.

Also, when the battle reach of the defeat pattern is set, for example, instead of the third battle effect shown in FIG. 94(b), the effect shown in FIG. 95(b) is displayed. In the display example shown in FIG. 95(b), as the third battle effect, the opponent's character Dm15 attacks. Battle reach ends without accumulating to the upper limit (MAX).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96(a), even if the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 has decreased to 0, if the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 reaches the upper limit (MAX), the main The characters "Resurrection" are displayed in the upper center of the display area Dm, the player's own character Dm11 stands up, and as shown in FIG.

As described above, the battle reach effect in this control example is such that the result of the effect varies depending on the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23 in addition to the decrease in the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 and the HP gauge Dm22 of the opponent character Dm15. Because it is structured, you can expect a big hit until the end of the battle reach.

In addition, in the first control example, the content of the pre-battle production (production mode) is based on the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed, and the reserved storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle production. Configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is configured to be variable.

Here, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 97 (a) ~ (d), and the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, HP display area Dm17 that is variably set based on the reservation storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle effect It is the figure which showed the display mode.

FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 in a pattern in which the opponent's character is not replaced during the battle effect. is. As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the HP display area Dm17, only the characters of the same opponent (character ADm13) have different continuous values (HP values) (four levels from "700" to "1000"). is displayed. When such an HP display area Dm17 is displayed, the character ADm13 will always be set as the opponent for the pre-battle effect, and the player's own attack will be executed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 92(a)). , an effect is executed in which all HP values displayed in the HP display area Dm17 are reduced.

By using such a display mode, since a plurality of HP values are reduced at once, the effect to be executed can be flashy. Also, even with the same character ADm13, since the initial value of the continuous value (HP value) is different, it is expected that the character ADm13 with a low continuous value (HP value) will be selected when the battle reach is developed. A game can be played while Further, by making the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) different for the same character ADm13, it is possible to set a plurality of expectations for a big win for the same character ADm13. The types of image data for displaying a character can be reduced compared to the case where a different partner character is set for each time.

Next, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 97(b) shows a display mode in which the characters A to D are displayed in a different order than the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). It is a schematic diagram shown. When such a display mode is used, for example, in the case where the degree of selection as an opponent character during battle production is configured to vary depending on the position displayed in the HP display area Dm17, an opponent character who is likely to be selected during battle production is displayed. Characters can be changed. Furthermore, the display order of the characters A to D displayed in the HP display area Dm17 may be changed even while the battle effect is being executed.

FIG. 97(c) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the opponent character is displayed, which is different from the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). As shown in FIG. 97(c), in this display mode in which the opponent characters E and F are displayed, the opponent character is a special opponent character having a lower initial value of continuation value (HP value) than the normal opponent characters A and B. E and F are displayed as selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect to win the battle reach in the current battle presentation.

FIG. 97(d) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the number of selectable opponent characters is reduced with respect to the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). By using such a display mode, in order to reduce the options of the opponent character to be selected in the pre-battle production, the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character when the battle reach is developed is reduced in advance (during the pre-battle production). can be made easier.

As described above, in this control example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is changed based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, and the reserved storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbols when the battle effect is set. By variably setting, the variation of the battle production is increased and the production effect is enhanced. It may be configured to

For example, when the special opponent character E described above in FIG. 97(c) is selected as the battle ready opponent, the battle ready battle of the defeat pattern may be configured not to be executed. Thus, in addition to the pre-battle effect of reducing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character, the player can be interested in the opponent character selected in the battle reach. In addition, in the display mode shown in FIG. 97(a), when the opponent character E is set instead of the opponent character A, the battle reach of the defeat pattern is performed during the current battle production period at the timing when the battle production is executed. is not executed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, if the reservation memory information (entering ball information) of the special pattern at the time of setting the battle effect contains entering ball information for executing the battle reach of the winning pattern, the battle reach of the winning pattern is selected. may be displayed in a display mode including a specific opponent character for which is executed.

Further, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be variably set based on the operation result of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. In this case, the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 shown in FIG. 91 is displayed until the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. The display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be changed, for example, to the display modes described above with reference to FIGS. 97(a) to (d).

In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 97(a) to (d), the length of the HP gauge is configured to be constant even when different continuation values (HP values) are set. Therefore, for example, when the continuous value (HP value) is reduced by “100”, the decrease rate of the HP value gauge is variably displayed according to the set continuous value (HP value). It is also possible to display the HP gauge with a length corresponding to the set continuous value (HP value). In addition, in order to easily grasp the remaining continuous value (HP value) from the length of the HP gauge, the display mode (for example, color) of the HP value gauge is configured to vary according to the length of the HP gauge. You can

By configuring as described above, even if the battle effect is repeatedly executed for the player, the effect mode can be changed, and the player quickly gets tired of the effect content. It can be suppressed. In addition, in this control example, the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed, and the production mode of the pre-battle production based on the reservation storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle production (at the time of setting the production before the battle) is configured to be variably set, but the effect mode may be variably set using other conditions, for example, the first game state (for example, the probability variable state ) and a second game state (for example, time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state at the time of setting the battle production (at the time of setting the production before the battle) is the second game state. The effect mode may be set based on the result of determining whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state, or ball entry information retained and stored at the time of setting the battle effect (at the time of setting the pre-battle effect). is determined, and as a result of the determination, an effect mode may be set based on the determination result of whether or not there is entering ball information indicating that the game state is to shift from the first game state to the second game state. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the suggestive effect, which is the effect executed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This suggestive effect is a game that a specific effect for showing the high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed in the variable effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variation of the special symbol. It is a production for suggesting to the person in advance, and is a production that consists of a premonition production in the first half part and a countdown production in the second half part.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, the contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestive effect will be described. FIG. 98(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is started, and FIG. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the countdown effect, which is the second half part, is started, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), when the suggestive effect is started, the predictive effect is executed in the sub-display area Ds. In the example shown in FIG. 98(a), a dynamic effect is executed in which a character Dc1 imitating a "car" advances from left to right, and the character Dc1 reaches an arrival point Dc3 where characters "Goal" are displayed. By arriving at , the production is executed so as to switch to the countdown production.

As a moving route for the character Dc1 to move to the arrival point Dc3, either a first route Dc2a showing a straight route or a second route Dc2b showing a meandering route is set. In the example shown in FIG. 98(a), the second route Dc2b is selected, and a dynamic effect is executed in which the character Dc1 moves along the meandering route.

Here, a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 100, but in the first control example, the start timing of the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, can be selected from a plurality of points. Since the period during which the precursor effect is executed is indefinite, the path of the character Dc1 is selected according to the length of the period during which the precursor effect is executed. Thereby, when the portent effect is executed, the timing at which the countdown effect is started can be visually grasped.

In addition, in FIG. 98(a), an effect indicating the timing at which the countdown effect is started is used as the precursor effect, but other effects may be used as the predictive effect, for example, the countdown effect is executed. It is also possible to use an effect suggesting to the player that the countdown effect is to be performed, an effect suggesting the period of the countdown effect, or an effect suggesting the type of specific effect to be the target of the countdown effect. In other words, it is sufficient if the effect is to inform in advance of the information regarding the effect to be executed in the future as the suggestive effect.

When the portent effect ends, as shown in FIG. 98(b), a comment "Start countdown" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and in the subdisplay area Ds, the character Dc1 arrives at the arrival point Dc3 and counts down. A character "3" indicating that the period is 3 seconds is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4. As a result, the player can be specifically notified that the current countdown effect is an effect starting from "3" and the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed.

The example shown in FIG. 98(b) shows a countdown effect in which the countdown period is 3 seconds, but in the first control example, another countdown period (for example, 7 seconds) is set. It also has a countdown effect, and is set so that the longer the countdown period, the higher the expectation of a big hit. By configuring in this way, during the sign effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, while predicting the timing at which the countdown effect will start and the current variation pattern, the countdown effect with a long countdown period is executed. can be expected.

When the countdown effect shown in FIG. 98(b) ends, as shown in FIG. 99, a character "0" indicating that the countdown period has ended is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 of the sub-display area Ds, and the main display. In the area Dm, an operation effect is executed in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed as a specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, the flow of setting the precursor effect and the countdown effect to be executed as the suggestive effect of the first control example will be described. In this first control example, a suggestive effect is executed to inform the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and in the countdown effect executed in the second half of the suggestive effect, the target specific effect execution timing is executed (see FIG. 98(b)) to accurately (concretely) notify the effect (see FIG. 98(b)). (See FIG. 98(a)) is executed.

Here, conventionally, in the variable effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a suggested effect for suggesting (notifying) the player that a specific effect will be executed at a predetermined timing is predetermined. A configuration that executes for a predetermined period of time has been used. If the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is predetermined in this way, the execution period overlaps with other effects that are executed in the variable effect (for example, the effect that suggests a higher degree of expectation for winning than the suggestive effect). In some cases, prohibition processing was performed to prevent the suggestive effect from being executed. Also, there is a problem that the suggestive effect cannot be executed for the specific effect executed at the timing when the period for executing the suggestive effect cannot be secured.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, if a plurality of suggestive effect data with different predetermined periods are prepared, the storage capacity increases and the process for setting the variable effect becomes complicated. A new problem arises.

Therefore, in this control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestive effect are set separately so that the period during which the suggestive effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect, and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the first half part, the omen The start timing of the production) can be set from a plurality of points.

By configuring in this way, the suggestive effect can be executed without presetting the period during which it is executed. In addition, since the start timing of the suggestive effect can be set from multiple points, for example, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is variable based on the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, when the jackpot is won, It is possible to set the period during which the suggestive effect is executed longer) or to change the start timing of the suggestive effect according to the execution timing of other effects. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting the suggestive effect.

FIG. 100(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of executing the suggestive effect in the variable effect in which the variable time of 60 seconds is set. In the example shown in FIG. 100(a), the timing at which the suggestive effect can be started is set 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the specific effect "PUSH effect" is executed 33 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. is set to Then, a countdown period (30 to 33 seconds from the start of variation) is set so that the countdown performance (execution period of 3 seconds) ends at the timing (33 seconds after the start of variation) at which the specific performance is executed. Then, since the variation this time is a case of winning a jackpot, the timing (timing 10 seconds after the start of the variation) that can set a longer suggestive effect period from among the multiple start timings is selected as the start timing of the suggestive effect. set as

As a result, in the example shown in FIG. 100(a), after 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the precursor effect (20 seconds of the effect period) is executed (30 seconds after the start of the change), and then the countdown effect (3 seconds of the effect period) ) is executed. Then, a specific effect (“PUSH effect”) is executed at the end timing of the effect period of the countdown effect. It should be noted that, if the variation of this time does not win the jackpot, the timing at which the suggested presentation period is shortened (the timing after 20 seconds from the start of the variation) is set as the start timing of the suggested presentation (the start timing of the omen presentation). .

In this way, when the suggestive effect is executed for the specific effect executed at the specific timing of the predetermined variable effect, by using the configuration of setting the start timing of the suggestive effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol, The length of the suggestive presentation period can be varied based on the lottery result of the special symbols, and the player can be made aware of the length of the presentation period. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, even if the length of the suggestive effect period is variable, the countdown effect period, which is the second half of the suggestive effect, that is, the period for executing the effect that specifically (accurately) notifies the execution timing of the specific effect is , since it is configured to be set based on the execution timing of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the suggestive effect.

That is, when the length of the suggestive effect period is variable, only the period during which the premonitory effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is executed is variable. This foreshadowing effect directly or indirectly suggests that a specific effect will be executed as described above, and even if the length of the effecting period is changed, the second half part of the suggestive effect will be executed. A player can be surely notified of the timing at which the specific performance is executed by the countdown performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100(b), the flow of the suggestive effect executed in the variable effect B different from the variable effect A described above with reference to FIG. 100(a) will be described. FIG. 100(b) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of effects executed in the variable effect B. FIG.

The variable effect B shown in FIG. 100(b) is different from the variable effect A described above, and is a variable effect in which a plurality of specific effects that can be targeted for suggestive effects are set. A method of setting the variable effect executed in the variable effect B will be described, centering on the differences from the variable effect A described above. The variable performance B is set with a timing capable of starting a suggestive performance 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the variation, and a timing capable of executing a specific performance 26 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the variation is set.

In the variation effect B, as a specific effect that can be executed 26 seconds after the start of the variation, there is a "cut-in effect" (not shown) in which a boy character is displayed in a large size so as to cover the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81. , "PUSH effect" (see FIG. 99) can be set as a specific effect that can be executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The two specific effects are set with the same degree of expectation for big win, and the specific effect corresponding to the set suggestive effect is executed.

In the variable effect shown in FIG. 100(b), similarly to FIG. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the timing of starting the suggestion performance is set to 10 seconds after the start of the variation, and the specific performance is set to "PUSH performance" which is executed 40 seconds after the start of the variation. is doing.

More specifically, the above-described suggestive effect is the pattern with the highest expected degree of jackpot in descending order of the expected degree of jackpot, and then the timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation is set as the start timing of the suggested effect, A pattern that sets "PUSH effect" as a specific effect, a pattern that sets the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation as the start timing of the suggestive effect, and a pattern that sets the "cut-in effect" as the specific effect, the timing 17 seconds after the start of the change. is set as the start timing of the suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect is set corresponding to the degree of expectation for the big hit in the order of the pattern in which the "cut-in effect" is set as the specific effect.

Furthermore, in the variable production B shown in FIG. 100(b), the start timing of the countdown production (the length of the countdown period) can be varied according to the length of the set suggestive production period. When a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is set, the start timing of the countdown performance is set 7 seconds before the execution of the specific performance, and immediately after the start of the countdown performance, the sub of the third pattern display device 81. A countdown effect is executed in which the character "7" is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 (see FIG. 98(b)) of the display area Ds.

In addition, in the first control example, it is possible to execute suggestive effects across a plurality of variable effects. The flow of suggestive effects that are executed across a plurality of variable effects will be described with reference to FIG. 101 . FIG. 101 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the production when the suggestive production is set across the variable production corresponding to two consecutive special symbol fluctuations.

As shown in FIG. 101, in this control example, when a new pending memory is acquired during the execution of the variable effect, the information contained in the newly acquired pending memory (results of determination of success or failure, variation patterns, etc.) is determined in advance. (Read ahead), and based on the determination result, it is possible to set the effect mode of the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the corresponding reserved memory.

Specifically, the fluctuation of the variable production C (variation time 30 seconds) is started in a state where there is no pending memory, and at the timing after 15 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (the remaining period of the fluctuation production C is 15 seconds), the second When a ball enters the 1st ball entrance 64 or the 2nd ball entrance 140 and acquires a new reserved memory (a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable performance), the information contained in the new reserved memory is used. , determines whether or not to execute a suggestive effect.

Here, when it is determined that the next variable performance is the variable performance for executing the suggestive performance, it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the current variable performance is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In the example shown in FIG. 101, since the timing when the new reserved memory is acquired is the timing when the remaining period of the variable effect C is 15 seconds, it is determined that the remaining period of the current variable effect is longer than or equal to the predetermined period. Set the start timing of the suggestion production at a predetermined timing (timing 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) in the fluctuation production, and in the next fluctuation production (variation production D), a specific production (specific A countdown effect (effect period of 3 seconds) is set for the effect C).

As described above, by setting the start timing of the suggestive effect and the end timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the specific effect) across the continuously executed variable effects (variable effects C, D), the variable effect C When 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the premonitory production, which is the first half of the suggestive production, is executed for a period (10 seconds) until the fluctuation production C ends. Then, during the period (2 seconds) from the start timing of the fluctuation of the variable production D to the execution of the countdown production, the precursor production is continuously executed, and after that (2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation production D), the countdown production is executed. After being executed for 3 seconds, the privilege effect C is executed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 101, since it is possible to execute the suggestive effect in the variable effect that is executed before the variable effect in which the specific effect is executed, the beginning of the variable effect (for example, after 5 seconds from the start of the variation ), it is possible to execute the suggestive effect also for the specific effect executed in . Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of suggestive presentation.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 101, if the timing at which the new reserved memory is acquired is less than the predetermined period (less than 10 seconds) of the remaining period of the variable effect C (for example, the timing of the additional winning B shown in FIG. 101) case), it is not possible to secure a period for executing the suggestive performance for the specific performance C of the variable performance D, so that the suggestive performance for the specific performance C is not set.

In the above example, based on the timing of the additional winning (the timing of acquiring a new reserved memory), it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestive effect for the specific effect to be executed in the next and subsequent variable effects. Although the configuration is used, other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of additional winning (the timing of acquiring a new reserved memory), the timing of executing the specific effect in the next and subsequent variable effects is determined. It may be configured to be variable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the setting of suggestive effects that are executed across a plurality of variable effects, and to enhance the effect of effects.

In addition, in FIG. 101, as an example of the suggestive effect executed across a plurality of variable effects, the flow of the suggested effect when the condition for starting the next variable effect is satisfied during the execution of the variable effect has been described. It is also possible to execute a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable effects under other conditions.

For example, in a state where the condition for starting the next variable performance is satisfied, when the condition for starting the next variable performance is satisfied, any timing in the next variable performance is set as the execution timing of the specific performance, and the current The timing for executing the suggestive effect may be set to either the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the period during which the next variable effect is executed.

In this case, the performance to be executed in the variable performance currently being executed and the details of the performance to be executed during the next variable performance are discriminated, and the result of the determination and the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the next variable performance. It is preferable to configure so as to set the start timing of the suggestive effect based on the result. By configuring in this way, for example, when a continuous effect is set as a series of the currently changing variable effect and the next variable effect, a suggestive effect is provided for the next variable effect. If it is set to execute a special performance at the end timing of the currently fluctuating variable performance without execution, that is, at the start timing of the next variable performance, the suggestive performance will be performed within the next variable performance period. is set, and if there is no factor that prohibits the setting of the suggestive performance in the currently fluctuating variable performance and the next variable performance, the remaining period of the currently fluctuating variable performance or the next fluctuation The start timing of the suggestive effect can be set to any of the periods of the effect.

In addition, when the conditions for starting the next (one after another) variable performance are met, it is determined whether the variable performance is a variable performance corresponding to winning a jackpot, and the start timing of the suggestive performance is being executed based on the determination result. or the execution period of the next (one after another) variable performance. This makes it possible to easily set a suggestive performance period longer than one variable performance period.

In addition, in the first control example, the suggestive effect is executed for one specific effect, but the suggestive effect may be executed for a plurality of specific effects. In this case, it is preferable to set a precursor period during which a common precursor effect is executed and a countdown period during which a countdown effect is executed corresponding to each of a plurality of specific effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while predicting how many specific effects the suggestive effects have been executed for, thereby enhancing the effect of the effects.

In addition, it may be configured to execute a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect while the portent effect is being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the suggestive effect was executed for the specific effect to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, the expectation degree suggesting effect, which is the effect executed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This expectation level suggesting effect includes the expectation level display effect of displaying a plurality of expectation level display modes capable of informing the winning expectation level of the jackpot in stages, and the display mode of the expectation level display mode being variable (the expectation level of winning the jackpot). It is an effect composed of an expectation level increasing effect for changing to a high display mode).

First, with reference to FIG. 102(a), an expectation level display mode used for the expectation level suggesting effect of the first control example will be described. FIG. 102(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the degree-of-expectation display mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 102(a), in this control example, a plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed.

The expectation degree display mode Dk1 indicates the degree of expectation for the jackpot by using the display during execution indicating information corresponding to the variable effect being executed, and in FIG. ” is displayed. Although details will be described later, the degree of expectation display mode Dk1 is displayed 10 seconds after the start of the variable effect, and is displayed on the display screen earliest among the plurality of degree of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3. be.

The expectation degree display mode Dk2 indicates the degree of expectation for a big win using a character appearing during the variable effect, and "LV1" indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed in FIG. 102(a). The degree-of-expectation display mode Dk2, which will be described in detail later, is displayed 24 seconds after the variable effect is started.

The expectation degree display mode Dk3 indicates the degree of expectation for a big hit by using a dialogue display indicating the contents of the variable effect and progress information, and in FIG. It is The degree of expectation display mode Dk3 is displayed 36 seconds after the variable effect is started, although the details will be described later.

In addition, in FIG. 102 (a), each expectation level display mode is shown by LV display showing step by step, but it is sufficient if it is a mode that can notify the jackpot expectation level step by step, for example, corresponding to the jackpot expectation level It is also possible to use a configuration in which the color of each display mode, the speed of the dynamic effect, and the magnitude of the sound volume and the amount of light to be output are varied step by step. Also, a configuration may be used in which the presentation mode indicating the growth process or the transformation process is changed step by step toward the final mode.

In addition, regarding the display during execution displayed in the degree-of-expectation display mode Dk1, for example, the display mode of the pending symbol display displayed in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is continuously displayed. good too. As a result, when an effect (reserved pattern advance notice effect) for changing the display mode of the reserved pattern is executed while the reserved pattern is being displayed, the changed display mode of the reserved pattern can be continuously used as a display during execution. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the relationship between the variable display being executed and the reserved symbol display.

When the expectation level suggestion effect is executed, in addition to the expectation level display effect in which the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 shown in FIG. ) is executed (see FIG. 102(b)).

As shown in FIG. 102(b), when the expectation increase (addition) effect is executed, first, as the expectation setting effect, a display having selection areas Dk4a to Dk4c in which different increase (addition) values are displayed. Mode (roulette) Dk4 is rotated and displayed, and when roulette Dk4 stops, the increase (addition) value displayed in the selection area designated by arrow Dk5 is set.

This increase (addition) value indicates a variable amount for varying the display mode of each expectation display mode displayed during the expectation suggesting effect, and when "1UP" is set as the increase (addition) value means that, for any one of the respective expectation level display modes, an effect is executed in which the jackpot expectation level is changed step by step to a display mode one higher than the currently displayed display mode. showing.

By configuring in this way, by executing the expectation level increase (additional) effect, it is possible to notify only the variable amount of each expectation level display mode displayed during the current expectation level suggesting effect. . Therefore, the player can enjoy the expectation level increase (addition) effect while expecting that the expectation level of the expectation level display mode in which the display mode corresponding to the already high jackpot expectation level is displayed will further change (increase). can be done.

In addition, in this control example, as the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) production, each expectation that is variable (increases) while the current expectation increase (addition) production is being executed It is configured such that a value obtained by adding up the variable amount of the display mode is set. As a result, for example, when "3UP" is set as an increase (addition) value, whether the display mode of one expectation level display mode is variable by three levels, or each of the three expectation level display modes is variable by one level It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the effect result of the expectation-suggesting effect at an early stage, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

next. With reference to FIG. 103(a), description will be given of the effect content when "3UP" is set as the increase (addition) value. FIG. 103(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the display mode of each expectation level display mode is varied (raised) using a set increase (addition) value.

According to the example shown in FIG. 103(a), "3UP" is set as an increase (addition), and each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is The display is variably displayed one step at a time. Specifically, the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk1 is changed from "LV2" to "LV3", the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk2 is changed from "LV1" to "LV2", and the expectation level display mode Dk3 is changed. is changed from "LV2" to "LV3".

Note that FIG. 103(a) described above exemplifies a pattern in which the display modes of all the degree of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are changed at the same time. It may be configured to be variable. In this case, of the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) production, the increase (addition ) value is displayed on the display screen as a remaining increase (addition). By configuring in this way, it is possible to specifically predict the performance result based on the remaining increase (addition) value displayed on the display screen and the expectation level display mode in which the display mode is not changed. You can increase the effect. Furthermore, it may be configured to execute the expectation level increasing (additional) effect so as to vary the display mode a plurality of times with different timings for the same expectation level display mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

In addition, in this control example, each of the plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed at different timings in one variable effect is continuously displayed, thereby displaying as shown in FIG. 103(a). Although it is configured to be displayed on the screen at the same time, it is not necessary to provide a period in which each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at the same time. , at least some display timings may be set at the same time.

Furthermore, in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the player may be notified of the expectation display mode for which the increase (addition) value is set (see FIG. 103(b)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the comment "I will raise the level of the boy" suggesting the desired degree of expectation display mode is displayed above the main display area Dm. By displaying this comment, the player can grasp what kind of expectation level display mode is the target of the current expectation level suggesting performance, and can enjoy the game while predicting the future progress of the performance. It can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the flow of the degree-of-expectation display effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 104 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the degree-of-expectation display effect. As shown in FIG. 104, in one variation pattern (super reach 60 seconds), the expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 showing the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in stages are displayed with different timings. Specifically, the expectation level display mode Dk1 (expectation level 1 display) is displayed 12 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the expectation level display mode Dk2 (expectation level 2 display) is displayed 24 seconds after the fluctuation start, and the expectation level display Mode Dk3 (expectation level 3 display) is displayed 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

Then, an expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) for increasing (adding) the display mode of each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at any timing of 5 seconds, 17 seconds, or 29 seconds from the start of fluctuation. . Here, the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is configured so that the expectation level display mode to be targeted for increasing the expectation level is different depending on the timing of display (execution). It is configured so that the expectation level display mode displayed after the performance of increasing the level of expectation (display with added level of expectation) is executed.

Specifically, if the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is displayed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, all of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are targeted, and the expectation level rises 17 seconds after the fluctuation start When the production (expectation level added display) is displayed, the expectation level display modes Dk2 and Dk3 are targeted. An effect targeting only the display mode Dk3 is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect content of the expectation level increasing effect, which is the same effect mode, simply by changing the display timing (execution timing). In addition, since the expectation level increase effect is executed for a plurality of expectation level display modes, the player can determine how much the expectation level notified by the expectation level increase effect increases the expectation level of which expectation level display mode. It is possible to play the game while expecting the

In this control example, as described above, the target of the expectation level increase effect (expectation level added display) is the expectation level display mode in which the display timing is set later, but other configurations may be used. For example, the expectation level display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is executed may be targeted, or the above-mentioned expectation level display mode may be used as a target. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which display mode of the expectation level display mode will be changed (whether the expectation level will increase) by the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display). , can enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in order to enhance the effect of the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level addition display), a selection means that allows the player to select at least one of a plurality of expectation level display modes, and an expectation level selected by the selection means. A target determination means for determining whether the degree display mode is an object whose display mode is to be changed by the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display), and the expectation level display mode selected by the selection means is an expectation level increase effect ( a variable control means for varying the display mode by means of an expectation level increasing effect (expectation level added display) when the object determination means determines that the object is an object whose display mode is to be changed by the expectation level added display). Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a player-participation type effect, and to make the player participate in the game willingly.

In this case, for example, a suggestion notification suggesting an expectation level display mode to be subjected to an expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is provided during a period prior to the period in which the player selects the expectation level display mode by means of the selection means. It is preferable to provide means for notifying the suggestion to be executed. As a result, it is possible to limit the target range to be selected by the selection means for the player, and to increase the probability that the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level increasing display) is executed.

Further, when the expectation level display mode selected by the selection means is determined by the target determination means not to be subject to change in the display mode by the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display), It is preferable to provide an effect switching means for executing different effects using the increase (additional) value set in the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display). As a result, the increased (additional) value that has already been displayed on the display screen can be eliminated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

As the above-mentioned different effects, for example, effects for informing the player in advance of the contents of the winning information stored in reserve, and values accumulated by the player to obtain benefits (for example, game level, experience, etc.) It may be a production that is advantageous to the player, such as a production for increasing the value), or a production that is disadvantageous to the player, such as a production that changes the production mode so that the expectation level of the expectation display mode is lowered (expectation level lowering production). A performance is fine.

In addition, there is provided a means configured to vary the display mode of the performance switched by the performance switching means in correspondence with the increase (addition) value set in the expectation level increase performance (expectation level addition display). Also good. Further, when the player does not select the expectation level increasing mode by the selection means, the non-target expectation level display mode may be automatically selected. may be automatically selected. In addition, in the case where the target expectation level display mode is automatically selected, an effect is executed in which it is more advantageous for the player to select the non-target expectation level display mode by the selection means. good to do As a result, the player can actively select the degree-of-expectation display mode by means of the selection means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 125. FIG. First, the details of the main controller 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 113) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, first, with reference to FIG. 113, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

The setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 includes a first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). Hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the loss in the special symbol, variation type counter CS1 used to select the variation pattern, initial value setting of the first hit random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 136). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and each counter value for the winning to the second ball entrance 140. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is provided. As described above, in this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls are provided for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140 . For this reason, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol lottery is possible, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is changed to a special value. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a ball wins in any of the second ball entrances 140, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the oldest counter value in terms of time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processes are executed for the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 .

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 during the variable display of the special symbols or during the jackpot game, during which the lottery of the special symbols 1 is not possible, When the number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball It is stored in the storage area 203b. In addition, when the number of corresponding reserved balls is the upper limit value (4 in this control example) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired and only prize balls (three prize balls in this embodiment) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of held balls is four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140. 3), or more than 4 (eg, 8). In addition, the upper limit of the number of held balls may be different between the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140, or the upper limit may not be set. Furthermore, a reserved ball storage area may be provided only for either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 so that only one of them can store a reserved ball.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 238). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 238, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 238. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 136).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the special symbol jackpot is specified in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number for the big winning specified in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big winning.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 106(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each game state are set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106(a), when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is "7", and if it is "7", it is determined to be a big win. Also, when the game state is the high probability game state, it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is within the range of "5 to 9". If it is within the range of "5 to 9", it is determined as a jackpot.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a special symbol. It will be the one at the time of the big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-238. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 239, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 1, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol is "1/239". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of special symbols, there are five values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 239, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 10. Therefore, the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/47.8".

Returning to FIG. 113, the description continues. The value of the first win type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-199. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, one of the big wins A to K is selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the first winning type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107). A jackpot type is selected.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, details of the first winning type selection table 202c will be described. As shown in FIG. 107, in this first hit type selection table 202c, a jackpot type to be selected is defined in association with each value range of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Jackpot A" is defined in correspondence. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a variable state of special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player, the "jackpot A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 20 random values select "jackpot A". ' is 10%.

In addition, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 79", and "jackpot B" is defined in correspondence. . This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state with special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. The number of rounds executed during the jackpot is smaller than that of the "jackpot A", but the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. is. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 random numbers select "jackpot B". ' is 30%.

The corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 114" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the time-saving state is set 100 times as the game state after the jackpot, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers select "jackpot C". ' is 17.5%.

In addition, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "115 to 164", "jackpot D" is defined in correspondence. . This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state of special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers select "jackpot D". ' is 25%.

Then, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", and the "jackpot E" is defined in correspondence. . In this "jackpot E", when the number of rounds is 5 and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state (in the case of a normal state), the game state after the jackpot ends is the normal state. is set, and when the game state at the time of winning the big win is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), the time saving state is set 100 times as the game state after the big win is finished. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers select "jackpot E". ' is 17.5%.

Next, when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special figure 2), the "jackpot F ” to “jackpot K” are selected. Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2 is the jackpot type selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1 (First win type) is set so that the ratio of selecting a jackpot (“jackpot F”) with a round number of 15 rounds is high (selection ratio is 80%). As a result, when the special pattern jackpot is won, the jackpot that allows the player to obtain a large amount of balls in one jackpot is higher when winning the jackpot with the special pattern 2 than with the special pattern 1. The degree of advantage of the player can be made different between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery.

On the other hand, when the corresponding pattern type is special figure 2, the jackpot type (first hit type) that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding design type is special figure 1 may be selected. Specifically, when "jackpot I" to "jackpot K" are selected, 2 rounds less than 5 rounds, which is the smallest number of rounds among the jackpot types selected in the case of special figure 1 set.

In addition, when the jackpot types "jackpot H", "jackpot J", and "jackpot K" are selected as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the corresponding pattern type is a special figure. In the jackpot type (first hit type) selected in the case of 1, the number of times (number of times of time reduction) set when the time reduction state is given as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot (100 times) less than the number of times ( 50 times or 25 times) is set.

In this way, when the special figure 1 lottery wins and when the special figure 2 lottery wins the jackpot, the contents of the jackpot game to be executed (the number of rounds) and the jackpot game are set after the end. By making the game states different from each other, the game can be made complicated, and it is possible to prevent the player from always being given an excessive privilege.

Furthermore, since the game state to be set after the end of the big win is configured to be different based on the game state at the time of winning the big win, the set game state can be consciously set in the game aiming for the special symbol big win. I will play while playing. Specifically, even in a gaming state in which a jackpot lottery is performed with the same probability (for example, a low probability state), the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends in the case of the time saving state and the normal state Differently, a game state is set that is more advantageous to the player in the time-saving state. As a result, the game can be played while strongly anticipating winning a special symbol jackpot during a specific period (during time saving).

In addition, in this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the ratio of setting the high probability state in which the jackpot probability is improved after the jackpot ends is the same. Although the first winning type selection table 202c is defined as above, the rate at which the high probability state is set may be varied without being limited to this. In addition, by selecting a jackpot type (first hit type) based on the first hit type selection table 202c and passing the ball through a specific area during the jackpot, a probability variable state (high probability state) is given after the jackpot ends. In the gaming machine, in the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the ball passes through the above-mentioned specific area It may be configured to vary the easiness of application. As a result, it is possible to further differentiate the benefits given to the player depending on the special symbols won in the jackpot.

Furthermore, as a method of differentiating the privilege given to the player according to the special symbol that has won the jackpot, for example, a plurality of variable prize winning devices 65 (see FIG. 2) are provided and executed so that balls can win prizes during the jackpot game. The variable prize winning device 65 that allows the ball to win a prize during the jackpot game may be configured differently depending on the jackpot to be won. In this case, the easiness of winning the ball to the variable winning device 65, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins, and the end condition (the number of entering balls and the time limit) to end one opening operation should be different. As a result, it is possible to further differentiate the benefits given to the player depending on the special symbols won in the big win.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description continues. The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the ready-to-win occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before or after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for when the probability of special symbols is high and one for when the probability of special symbols is low. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 136), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109) storing a random number for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables are set according to the game state, and variation pattern tables are set for each result of win/fail determination. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126) is performed, and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 66, 67 where the ball is left or right (Hereinafter referred to as a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67) is acquired when it is detected, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

The value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is defined in the second winning random number table 202b (see FIG. 106(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a hit defined in the second winning random number table 202b, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second winning random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 106(b).

FIG. 106(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202b. In the second symbol random number table 202b, when the normal symbol probability is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are two random numbers that are normal symbol hits, and the range is "5 to 6". there is Among the 240 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the total number of winning random numbers is 2, so the probability of winning the normal symbol is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 140a associated with the second ball entrance 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". .

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. At , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second ball entrance 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, the open period of the electric accessory 140a is shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 second x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 140 . In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 140a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The details will be described later with reference to the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132) described later, but in this control example, the normal symbol state (low probability or high probability ), the variable display time of the normal design is determined, and depending on the state of the normal design (low probability or high probability) at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal design stops, it is granted when the normal design is won. The content of the privilege to be held, that is, the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a is determined.

In other words, when the fluctuation of the normal design is started during the high probability of the normal design (during the time saving state), a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal design, and the normal during the short fluctuation When the state of the pattern shifts to the low probability state (when the state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state), the electric accessory 140a is the normal pattern even if the normal pattern indicating the win is stopped after the short fluctuation is finished. The opening operation (for example, "0.2 seconds x 1 time") is performed during a low probability of (during normal state).

With such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation of the special symbols and the variation of the normal symbols are executed separately and independently, is based on the game state that can be varied according to the lottery result of the special symbols and the number of lotteries. In the case where the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the privilege contents at the time of winning are determined, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined based on the game state at the time of the lottery of the normal pattern, and the privilege contents at the time of winning the normal pattern can be determined based on the game state when the fluctuation of the normal symbols stops (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a). occurrence can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the normal symbol variation control is not limited to the contents of the above-described control example, and other controls may be used. The content of the privilege (the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) may be set. In addition, only when the normal pattern lottery and the normal pattern fluctuation stop (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) are in the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state), the benefits at the time of winning the normal pattern (Details of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) may set a privilege (for example, "1 second x 2 times") that is advantageous to the player, or at the time of lottery of normal symbols and when fluctuation of normal symbols is stopped. Only when both (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) are in the normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the benefit at the time of winning the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "0.2 seconds × 1 time”) may be set.

In addition, it may be configured to switch and execute a plurality of setting methods described above. And when the fluctuation of the normal symbols stops (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a), all of the combinations are given advantageous benefits to the player except when both are in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbols). , During the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, a combination that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the variable state It may be configured to set a combination in which an advantageous privilege is given to the player when . By constructing in this way, it is possible to further set advantages and disadvantages in the high-probability state of normal symbols, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 136).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 105(a), the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 105(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a second winning random number table 202b, and a first winning type selection table 202c as part of the fixed value data. , variation pattern selection table 202d, jackpot transition setting table 202e, and state transition table 202f are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)) is, as described above, a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter C1 is stored. The second winning random number table 202b (see FIG. 106(b)) is a data table in which the winning determination value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored, as described above. The first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type. It is defined in association with the type. Since each of these tables has already been described in detail together with the description of the various counters, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG.

FIG. 108(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 108(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example is a variation pattern table 202d1 for big wins used for selecting a variation pattern when winning a big win regardless of the gaming state. , The game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), and the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss used for selecting a variation pattern when winning a loss And, in a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) other than the normal state, a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 used to select a variation pattern when winning a deviation, and a lottery of special symbols It is composed of a special variation pattern table 202d4 used for selecting a variation pattern when a special condition is established regardless of the result.

First, with reference to FIG. 108(b), the details of the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 108(b), in the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" in association with various types of normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds, and "50 to 179". In the range of , various types of super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are associated and defined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the range of "180 to 198" with various types of special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds. ing. In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol wins a jackpot, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds is set as the variation pattern, and a command indicating this variation pattern is issued. By transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 executes a variation effect corresponding to the variation time.

As shown in FIG. 108(b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 is 60 seconds (selection rate is about 55%), 30 seconds (selection rate is about 25%). , 90 seconds (selection rate is about 20%). This is related to the specified contents of the variation pattern table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery result is lost, which will be described later, and the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit By the ratio and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation when the specific fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In addition, in this control example, regardless of the jackpot type won, it is configured to use the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, but it is not limited to this. A different variation pattern table may be used for the case of the jackpot type indicating . In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot selects a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. It should be configured so that it is easy to As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, details of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 108(c). As shown in FIG. 108(c), the outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 includes the range of values of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "completely out" and "common reach", and the variation pattern. are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(c), the stop type is "complete failure", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", and the fluctuation time is 7 seconds. The range of "99 to 198" is defined in association with a long fluctuation time of 10 seconds. When "Completely Missing" is selected as the stop type, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without entering the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the stop type is "common reach", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149", and the normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of "149 to 197". , various types of super reach with a variable time of 60 seconds are associated with each other, and various types of special reach with a variable time of 90 seconds are associated with the range of "198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(d), the details of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 will be described. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is a deviation and the game state is a probability variation state (time saving state). In this deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above, the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "complete failure" and "common reach" A range and a variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(d), the stop type is "completely out", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190" and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. are defined in association with each other, and the range of "191 to 198" is defined in association with a short deviation of a fluctuation time of 5 seconds.

In addition, the stop type is "common reach", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 190", and the normal reach with the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of "191 to 198" , various types of super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are defined in association with each other. In other words, when the game state is the variable probability state (time saving state), it is defined so that the variation time of 90 seconds is not selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. Therefore, when the game state is the probability variable state (time saving state) and the variation time of 90 seconds (variation pattern) is selected, it is only when the special symbol jackpot is won. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 executes a special effect to congratulate the big win. As a result, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction of the player by notifying the player that the special symbol is missing after the long-time variation pattern is executed in the variable probability state (time-saving state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. can be done.

As described above, when the variable probability state (time saving state) is set as the gaming state and the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3 is used, the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the deviation (normal ) Since the variation time of the special symbols is set to be shorter than when the variation pattern table 202d2 is used, the lottery of the special symbols during the probability variation state (time saving state) which is a game state advantageous to the player is performed. can be done efficiently. Although the detailed explanation is omitted, if the variable probability state (time saving state) is set as the gaming state, the stop type is reach when the special pattern is removed than when the normal state is set. It is set so that the percentage of outliers is low. Therefore, while the game state is a probability variable state (time saving state), the frequency of appearance of reach out is reduced (because it is difficult to execute deviation fluctuation with a long fluctuation time), which is a game state that is advantageous to the player. The lottery for the special symbols in the time saving state can be performed more efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, details of the special variation pattern table 202d4 will be described. This special variation pattern table 202d4 is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for 4 rotations of the special figure variation in the case where the game state after the end of the jackpot is a probability variation state or a time saving state, and is a continuous jackpot production described above. It is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation (see FIG. 89 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 109, the special variation pattern table 202d4 defines a variation pattern in association with the number of special symbol (special symbol) variations after the end of the jackpot, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Specifically, in the first to third special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit, the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the special symbol lottery result and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. short hit) is defined.

In the fourth special symbol variation after the end of the big hit, if the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation time is 0.5 seconds, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as an ultra-short hit with a variation time of 0.5 seconds in the range of "0 to 179", and a variation time of 32 in the range of "180 to 198". A special hit of .5 seconds is defined.

By configuring in this way, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is the variable probability state or the time saving state, the variation for four rotations of the special symbol can be immediately executed. As a result, when a series of jackpot performances are executed using a plurality of jackpot games, such as the above-described continuous jackpot performance, the variation period of the special symbols executed between the jackpot games can be shortened. You can increase the effect.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, in the state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set as the game state (during the continuous mode), the variable probability state or the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot. It is configured such that when winning, a variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table 202d4. By configuring in this way, only in a state in which the variable probability state (time saving state) is continuously executed, it is possible to shorten the special symbol variation time for a predetermined number of times (four times) after the end of the big win.

As a result, for example, in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, when the jackpot (for example, jackpot A to jackpot D) in which the variable probability state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, that is, the jackpot ends Later, since there is a reserved memory for the special pattern 1 and there is no reserved memory for the special pattern 2, in a state where the pattern variation of the special pattern 1 is easily executed, the variation pattern table 202d1 for big hits or for loss (probable variation) A variation pattern is set by referring to the variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, in the state where the probability variable state (time saving state) is set, when the jackpot (for example, jackpot F to jackpot K) in which the probability variable state or time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, that is, after the jackpot ends, In a state where the special symbol 2 is reserved and the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is easily executed, the special variation pattern and the special symbol variation are set to a very short variation of 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in the special variation pattern table 202d4 in FIG. 109, in this control example, at a rate of a part (about 10%) when winning in the fourth rotation after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern corresponding to the special hit (Variation time 32.5 seconds) is selected.

By configuring in this way, when a big win is won in a state in which a variation pattern is selected with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4, what is a series of big win effects (continuous big win effects) that continues from the previous big win game? Separately, it is possible to execute a special performance to congratulate the winning of successive jackpots. Therefore, various jackpot effects can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that the special variation (32.5 seconds) is selected in part of the fourth variation after the end of the big win, but this is not the case. Instead, the special winning variation (32.5 seconds) may be selected even in some of the first to third variations after the end of the big winning. In addition, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that a variation pattern in which a variation time other than 0.5 seconds is set (for example, a variation time of 10 seconds) is selected when the special symbol lottery result is lost. good too. By constructing in this way, when the variation for 0.5 seconds or more is executed before the number of variations after the end of the big win reaches 4 times, the player can be expected to win the big win. Therefore, it is possible to play a game considering the fluctuation time of the special symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the details of the jackpot transition setting table 202e will be described. This jackpot transition setting table 202e is a table for defining the gaming state set after the jackpot ends, and includes jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot K) selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202c. , state transition statuses (state transition 1 to state transition 9) are defined in association with the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

This jackpot transition setting table 202e is referred to (S1213) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes) in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 134) described later (S1213), and the selected state transition status , the game state is set according to the contents defined in the state transition table 202f, which will be described later.

Specifically describing the contents of the jackpot transition setting table 202e, the jackpot type is any one of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “jackpot F”, “jackpot G”, and “jackpot H”. There, when the game state at the time of jackpot winning is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, and "variable state (with high probability short working hours) (ST2)", or " In the case of "shortening working hours state (with low probability short working hours) (ST3)", "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status.

When "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, the game state is set based on the contents defined in a state transition 1 table 202f1 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111), which will be described later. 2” is set, the game state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 2 table 202f2.

Next, when the jackpot type is “jackpot C” and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is “normal state (ST1)”, “state transition 3” is set as the state transition status, and “probability variable state (high In the case of "time saving with probability) (ST2)" or "time saving state (low probability with time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is "jackpot E" , When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status, and "variable state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)" or "time saving state (There is a low probability of reduced working hours) (ST3)", "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status.

Furthermore, when the jackpot type is "jackpot H" or "jackpot J" and the game state when the jackpot is won is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status, and " In the case of a variable state (with high probability of time saving) (ST2)” or “time saving state (with low probability of time saving) (ST3)”, “state transition 7” is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is “jackpot K ”, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is “normal state (ST1)”, “state transition 8” is set as the state transition status, and “probability variable state (with high probability short working hours) (ST2)”, Alternatively, in the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status.

When any one of "state transition 3" to "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status, the state transition 3 table 202f3 to state transition 9 table 202f9 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) to be described later. , the game state is set based on the contents defined in the corresponding table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 111(a), the contents of the state transition table 202f will be described in detail. This state transition table 202f is a table used for transitioning the state status such as a game state or a variation pattern table based on the number of variations of special symbols, and is a specified number counter 203j stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. It transitions the state status based on the value of This state transition table 202f is referred to when acquiring the specified number of times counter 203j (S1214), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: Yes), When it is determined that the value of the specified number counter 203j is 0 in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S409: Yes), it is referred to set the next state status (S410).

FIG. 111(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table 202f in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the state transition table 202f in the first control example is a state transition status ("state transition 1" to "state transition 9") set using the jackpot transition setting table 202e described above. ) (“state transition 1 table 202f1” to “state transition 9 table 202f9”).

First, the details of the state transition 1 table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111(b). The state transition 1 table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status. )” is stipulated. In other words, in the state in which the state transition 1 table 202f1 is used (state in which "state transition 1" is set), the variable probability state is continuously set until the next big hit is won.

Next, the details of the state transition 2 table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 111(c). The state transition 2 table 202f2 is a table referred to when "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 2 table 202f2, the state status "ST2a (variable probability state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and the state status "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j "ST2 (variable probability state)" is defined. That is, after the jackpot is finished, first, "ST2a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0", and then "ST2" is set as the state status.

Here, when "ST2a" is set as the state status, the special variation pattern table 202d4 of the variation pattern selection table 202d is set to be used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, in a state where the same gaming state (probability variable state) is set continuously, it is possible to preset a rule for selecting a variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for a specific period. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the main controller 110 .

FIG. 111(d) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 3 table 202f3. The state transition 3 table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 3" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 3 table 202f3, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "100" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 111(e) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 4 table 202f4. The state transition 4 table 202f4 is a table referred to when "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 4 table 202f4, the state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "96" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are defined. In other words, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates 4 times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 96 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. Thereby, when the time saving state (100 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the first 4 special symbol variations.

FIG. 111(f) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 5 table 202f5. The state transition 5 table 202f5 is a table referred to when "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status. The state transition 5 table 202f5 defines a state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j. That is, the normal state is set without setting the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit.

FIG. 112(a) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 6 table 202f6. The state transition 6 table 202f6 is a table referred to when "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 6 table 202f6, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "50" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112(b) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 7 table 202f7. The state transition 7 table 202f7 is a table referred to when "state transition 7" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 7 table 202f7, the state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the state status is set to "ST3a" until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates 4 times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 46 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (50 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the first four times of special symbol variation.

FIG. 112(c) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 8 table 202f8. The state transition 8 table 202f8 is a table referred to when "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 8 table 202f8, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "25" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 25 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112(d) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 9 table 202f9. The state transition 9 table 202f9 is a table referred to when "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 9 table 202f9, the state status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the state status in which "21" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are defined. In other words, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3a" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates four times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 21 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (25 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the first 4 special symbol variations.

As described above, in the first control example, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the jackpot type of the jackpot won and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot are based on. , the game state set after the end of the big win and the variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the big win can be made different. As a result, the content of the game can be made more complicated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the period for selecting the variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 is the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big hit, but other configurations may be used. Alternatively, the special variation pattern table 202d4 may be used in the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the big win, instead of the special symbol variation executed immediately after the end of the big win. When configured in this way, the state transition table is set to the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "10" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. The state status "ST3a (time saving state)", the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j It is preferable to configure so that the defined "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select the variation pattern for the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the big win using the special variation pattern table.

In this way, by using the configuration of the state transition table described above, the state status set with the end of the jackpot as a starting point and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (predetermined number of times) for which the state status continues are set in association with each other. The game specifications can be easily set just by doing so, and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced. Also, when changing the game specifications, it is sufficient to change the contents of the state transition table, so that the game specifications can be easily changed.

Furthermore, in the first control example, when the normal state is set as the game state (when ST1 is set as the state status), the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set to "0", and always The same variation pattern table (variation pattern table 202d1 for big win or (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for losing) is configured to be referred to, but the variation pattern table that can be referred to when the game state is the normal state A plurality of them may be provided, and different variation pattern tables may be referred to in correspondence with the values of the specified number counter 203j. In this case, for example, in a state in which the time saving state is set as the game state, the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50 times), and the game state shifts to the normal state (when the value of the prescribed number of times counter 203j becomes "0" in the state transition 6 table 202f6), the value of the prescribed number of times counter 203j is set to "10" corresponding to the state status ST1.

Then, when the value of the specified number counter 203j is greater than "0" while the state status ST1 is set, the special variation (normal) pattern table may be referenced to select a variation pattern. By configuring in this way, immediately after the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, it is possible to select a different variation pattern than usual, so that the player can have a game state that is advantageous to the player. It can make you think that it is still continuing.

It should be noted that, in the state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the period for referring to the special variation pattern table is the effect mode of the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and output from the voice output device 226. It is preferable that the sound mode and the light emission mode output from the lamp display device 227 are configured to be a special mode corresponding to the period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a more special feeling. Further, even when a big win is won during a period in which a special variation pattern table is referred to, it is preferable to execute a special performance mode different from the usual performance during the big win. As a result, the player can feel that he or she has won a jackpot during a special period, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the first control example, the state transition table is provided in correspondence with each state transition status, but a common state transition table may be used for portions where the setting contents of the state transition table are common. By configuring in this way, the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the first control example, the configuration is used to switch the variation pattern table to be referenced by varying the state status based on the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. may be made variable. For example, in the state of referring to the state transition 6 table 202f6, when the state status ST3 is set and the value of the specified number counter 203j is "40", the lottery result of the special symbol is out, but a small amount of privilege is obtained. When winning a lottery result (a so-called small win) that can give (the privilege of opening the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time (for example, 3 seconds)), the state status is changed from ST3 to ST3b, and the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. is set to "4", the state status ST3b is set, and if the value of the specified number counter 203j is greater than "0" (in the case of "1" to "4"), the fluctuation pattern table dedicated after the small hit See The variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched. By configuring in this way, a dedicated variation pattern can be selected only for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbols are varied four times) after winning the small prize.

If the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" while the state status ST3b is set, the state status ST3b is set again as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. By configuring to set "35" subtracted by the value counted while is set, the period in which the time saving state is set as the game state (the period until the special symbol fluctuates 50 times) Without changing it, a dedicated variation pattern can be selected and executed for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbols are varied four times) based on the small win won during the time saving state.

In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is subtracted when the variation of the special symbol is executed, but other configurations may be used. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has the above-described small win as a special symbol lottery result, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j may be subtracted based on the number of times the small win is won. In this way, by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol (based on the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result) instead of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, time is reduced. Since the variation pattern table to be referred to can be changed at a timing different from the transition of the number of variations of the special symbol in the state, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 105(b). FIG. 105(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 105(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a probability variation flag 203g, a time saving medium counter 203h, a state status storage area 203i, a specified number counter 203j, and other memory areas 203z. have.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. Each value of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a special symbol lottery or the like is determined.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the original special symbol is displayed. Aside from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, based on the data corresponding to the starting winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1), various types obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting the information is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the start winning to the second ball entrance 140 is stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the holding area of 1 to a holding area with an area number smaller by 1. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) ( It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed) up to a maximum of 4 times. The value N1 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is initially set to zero. 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S504 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 127).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is the variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 140 (the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81). ) is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) up to four times. The value N2 of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Every time the number of held balls of symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S510 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 127).

Values of these special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of variable display in special symbol 1) and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of variable display in special symbol 2) are reserved balls. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 127, and S505 and S511 in FIG. 130). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed. command.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, are controlled by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reserved in the device 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number (standby number of times) up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See S804 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 133: No).

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols). Indicates that it is a probability variation state of special symbols. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203g is in an off state, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON each time the "jackpot A, B, D, F, G, I" ends (jackpot control process (see FIG. 137 ) of S1212). On the other hand, the variable probability flag 203g is turned off every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered off or the start of the jackpot is set (S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127)).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) is executed by the MPU 201, the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is executed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the state is ON, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is drawn based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203g is off, a lottery for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 128).

In addition, in this control example, while the variable probability state is set as the game state, the time saving state of normal symbols is also set. Therefore, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed, the variable probability flag 203g and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol working time saving state. Specifically, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203g is ON (if the time saving state or the probability variation state), it is determined that the time saving state of the normal design, A lottery for normal symbols is performed based on a random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off (if neither the time saving state nor the probability variation state), based on the normal symbol per random number table for low probability, the normal symbol A lottery is held (see S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203h for time saving is set to 0, and a special symbol jackpot is won in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot (S1212 in FIG. 137). ). Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C", "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h at the end of the jackpot. "50" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h, and in the case of "jackpot K", "25" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h at the end of the big win.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot E", the value of the time-saving medium counter 203h set at the end of the jackpot is set differently depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. If the game state is a time saving state (with low probability of time saving) or a variable state (with high probability of time saving), "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203h, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state ( If there is no low probability time saving), the value of the counter 203h is not set during time saving.

After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 ends until the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0 (S402 in FIG. 129). Also, even if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more, the value is reset to 0 when the jackpot is won (S218 in FIG. 127).

When the normal pattern winning lottery is performed, the value of the time saving counter 203h is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the normal pattern lottery is performed based on the normal pattern random number table for high probability. is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, and if the probability variation flag 203g described later is off, the normal design lottery is performed based on the normal per design random number table for the low probability time. (See S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The state status storage area 203i is a storage area for storing current state status (ST) information set by the state transition table 202f. In the state status storage area 203i, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, at the end of the jackpot, the acquired state status is Stored, after that, in the fluctuation frequency subtraction process (see FIG. 129), when the value of the prescribed number counter 203j subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuates becomes 0 (S409: Yes), it is newly set State status is stored.

The specified number of times counter 203j is a counter for measuring that the number of variations of the special symbols has reached the specified number of times. This stipulated number counter 203j corresponds to the stipulated number of times acquired when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: Yes), that is, at the end of the jackpot. A value is set (S1213), and then subtracted every time the special symbol fluctuates in the fluctuation frequency subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S407). When the value of the specified number counter 203j changes from "1" to "0", a new state status is set based on the contents specified in the corresponding state transition table 202f.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 114(a), the ROM 222 includes a variation pattern table 222a, a pending rank selection table 222b, a jackpot middle effect selection table 222c, an addition number selection table 222d, a continuous effect mode selection table 222e, and a continuous effect mode selection table 222e. It has at least a value main selection table 222f, a continuous value sub-selection table 222g, a final mode selection table 222h, an expectation level selection table 222i, and an expectation level effect selection table 222j.

The variation pattern table 222a is referred to for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the aspect of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. is a table. A variation pattern command for display is set based on the aspect of the variation effect selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S3812 in FIG. 147).

The reserved rank selection table 222b is a table for selecting a reserved rank based on the reserved status of special symbols, and the effect during the big win is determined based on the selected reserved rank. Here, the details of this reserved rank selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b).

FIG. 115(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 115(b), this reservation rank selection table 222b has the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 (the number of reserved balls of special symbol) and whether there is winning information indicating a big hit in the reserved balls of special symbol 2. A pending rank is defined in association with the determination result of whether or not. By constructing in this way, the performance executed during the big win can be determined based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special pattern (special pattern 2) executed after the big win.

Here, in this control example, when both the reserved ball of special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of special symbol 2 exist, the process of preferentially digesting the reserved ball of special symbol 2 is executed (see FIG. 127). ). That is, the timing at which the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 are digested is indefinite.

Therefore, in this control example, based on the winning information included in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 that preferentially fluctuates after the end of the big hit (the held ball whose fluctuation order is fixed after the end of the big hit) and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is configured to select a reserved rank, and a jackpot performance can be executed based on the fluctuation result (lottery result) of the special symbols executed after the jackpot is finished.

In addition, when both the reserved ball of special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of special symbol 2 exist, the reserved ball is in the order of being reserved (the order of entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140). If it is a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration (so-called winning order digestion) that digests, instead of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, all the reserved balls or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4) in order of digestion It may be configured to select the pending rank as a target. As a result, it is possible to execute the big win performance based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbols executed after the big win is finished.

Referring to FIG. 115(b), the contents of the reservation rank selection table 222b will be specifically described. If there is prize winning information, the reserved rank "3" is selected, and if there is no prize winning information indicating winning, the reserved rank "2" is selected.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols (special pattern 2) is "4" and there is winning information indicating winning among them, the reserved rank "4" is selected and there is no winning information indicating winning. ', the reserved rank '1' is selected. When the reserved number of special symbols (special symbol 2) is "0", the reserved rank "1" is selected without using the reserved rank selection table 222b.

The reserved rank selected with reference to the reserved rank selection table 222b is referred to in the later-described jackpot effect selection table 222c. Next, with reference to FIG. 115(c), the effect selection table 222c during the jackpot will be described. This jackpot middle effect selection table 222c is a table for selecting the effect to be executed during the jackpot. It is referred to when executing the setting process (see FIG. 143) (S3406).

In this jackpot middle effect selection table 222c, the jackpot middle effect is defined in association with the reserved rank selected in the reserved rank selection table 222b and the first effect counter 223y1. Specifically, when the reserved rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 99", the "ordinary win effect" is defined. This "ordinary win effect" is an effect (see FIG. 83(b)) that is completed during one big win game, and an effect corresponding to the jackpot type to be executed is executed.

When the reserved rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "100 to 149", the "additional effect" is defined. As described above with reference to FIG. 83(a), this "additional effect" partially displays the number of round games executed in one jackpot (for example, in the case of 15 rounds, first 5 rounds are displayed), and as the jackpot game progresses, the number of remaining rounds (undisplayed number of rounds) is displayed.

When the ``additional performance'' is executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds the jackpot currently being executed is, and to make the player pay attention to the performance during the jackpot game. . Furthermore, the "additional effect" of the first control example is when multiple jackpots are won in a short period of time (the next jackpot is included in the winning information (holding pattern) acquired at the end of the previous jackpot case), by adding the number of rounds of the next big win to the number of rounds of the previous big win, it is configured to run across a plurality of big wins.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the jackpot has been won while the "additional effect" is being executed. Therefore, the game can be played while enjoying how many rounds in total are displayed by the "additional effect".

Furthermore, in the "additional effect" of this control example, the number of rounds executed in one jackpot can be divided and displayed, and the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpots can be summed and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times of winning big wins and the number of rounds to be executed for each big win while one "additional effect" is being executed. As a result, for example, when the number of rounds executed during one big win is 15 rounds, the pachinko machine 10 always sets the variable probability state as the game state after the end of the big win, and wins the jackpot of 15 rounds. is difficult to understand, and the game can be played while predicting which game state will be set after the end of the big win.

In addition, when using an effect suggesting a game state set after the end of the big win as the effect to be executed during the big win, the effect is executed during one big win before the result of the effect is displayed. By grasping the number of rounds to be played, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game state set after the end of the jackpot is specified and the performance effect is lowered.

Next, when the pending rank is "2" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", the "normal winning effect" is defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is In the range of "50 to 149", "additional effects" are defined. When the reserved rank is "3" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", the "normal win effect" is defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "50 to 49". "Additional effect" is defined in the range of "99", and "Continuous winning effect" is defined in the range of "100 to 149" of the value of the first effect counter 223y1.

As described above with reference to FIG. 84, this "continuous winning effect" is an effect ( See FIG. 84). As the "continuous winning effect" executed here, for example, the sum of the number of rounds of the first big win (eg 15 rounds) and the number of rounds of the second big win (eg 10 rounds) (eg 25 rounds) Round) is executed when one big win game is started (the first round of the first big win is started).

By executing the ``continuous win effect'' in this way, it is possible to quickly inform the player that he or she has won a plurality of jackpots, and to give the player a sense of superiority while playing the jackpot game with peace of mind. can let

The reserved rank is "4" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", "normal win effect" is defined, and in the range of "50 to 149", "Continuous hit production" is stipulated.

As described above, in this control example, a different effect (during the big win) is executed during the big win based on the selected pending rank and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223y1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the effect executed during the big win.

Furthermore, since the timing of informing the player that the next big win is included in the hold is made different depending on the effect during the big win selected, for example, at the timing when the previous big win game ends, the next big win Compared to pachinko machines that notify the presence or absence of reserved patterns to win the jackpot (whether or not there is a reserved inner ring), compared to the case of notifying the presence or absence of a reserved inner ring only at a specific timing, It is possible to execute a jackpot game while making the player have expectations for the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the content and ratio of the performance during the big win selected according to the holding rank are made different, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations and the second ball entrance during the big win game. It is possible to execute an effect in which the look-ahead result of the winning ball 140 can be taken into consideration, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, if the pending rank is "1", that is, if the number of pending symbols is the upper limit value at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no prize information corresponding to the big win in the pending symbols, Since the game is not executed, it is specified that either the normal win effect or the additional effect is selected, and the selection ratio is defined so that the normal win effect is more likely to be selected. In other words, if the pending rank is "1" at the time of winning the jackpot, the player will not have excessive expectations for the pending inner resort, or Any of the "additional effects" that makes it difficult to understand how many rounds the jackpot is is executed.

If the reserved rank is "2", that is, if the number of reserved symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved symbols, the reserved rank is different from "1", There is a possibility of acquiring new reserved symbols during the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the reservation is not confirmed at the time of winning the jackpot, in order to cope with the case where the reservation is confirmed during the jackpot game, the "additional Production” is set to be selected at a high rate. Thus, when a reserved symbol for winning a jackpot is acquired during a jackpot game, the fact can be notified to the player by the "additional performance".

If the reserved rank is "3", that is, if the number of reserved symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot, and if there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved patterns, that is, if the reserved pattern is not the upper limit, When a jackpot game is executed in a state in which the consecutive residence is confirmed, in addition to the above-mentioned "normal winning effect" and "additional effect", it is possible to notify early that the reserved consecutive residence is confirmed. If the reserved rank is "4", that is, if the reserved design is the upper limit and there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved design, "normal winning It is stipulated that either one of "effect for winning" or "effect for continuous winning" is selected.

In other words, among the reserved ranks "3" and "4" in which the reserved inner renso has already been determined, the reserved rank "3" is in a state in which a new reserved ball (winning information) can be acquired during the jackpot game. Therefore, by making the ``additional presentation'' selectable, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the next big win by the reserved ball (winning information) acquired during the big win game.

On the other hand, in the case of the reservation rank "4", a new reservation ball (winning information) cannot be acquired during the jackpot game, and the next jackpot will not be won during the jackpot game. "Effect" is not selected, and the effect by "continuous winning effect" is executed. By configuring in this way, the result of determining whether or not the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot is the upper limit and in other cases, that is, whether or not new reserved balls can be obtained during the jackpot game. By differentiating the options of the performance executed during the big win based on the above, it is possible to suppress the execution of the performance with a sense of incongruity with respect to the actual holding situation.

It should be noted that, in this control example, even if any of the pending rank is selected, because it is defined that the "production for normal hit" is selected, even if the "production for normal hit" is executed Even if there is, it is possible to leave the possibility of reservation. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to execute the game during the big win while making the player expect the reservation within the reserve until the end.

Next, the add-on number selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 116(a). This addition number selection table 222d is a fixed round number display mode Dm4 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when "addition effect" is selected as the effect executed during the big win. This is a table for selecting a value (additional round number) to be added to (see FIG. 86(a)).

This addition number selection table 222d is, in the winning related command process (see FIG. 142), when a new round number command is received (S3304: Yes) and when the addition effect flag 223h is set to ON ( S3306: Yes) is referred to in part of the processing during the addition effect (see FIG. 144) executed (S3506). The selected additional number is stored in the area for storing the value to be added to the determined round number display mode Dm4 in the display round number storage area 223g (S3506).

Then, the value displayed in the running round number display mode Dm3 (the number of jackpot rounds that are currently running) and the value displayed in the fixed round number display mode Dm4 (the number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed) are different. If they are the same, the additional number stored in the display round number storage area 223g is displayed in the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86(a)).

As shown in FIG. 116(a), the addition number selection table 222d includes the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot, whether or not there is a winning prize (whether or not the reservation is confirmed), and the second effect counter 223y2. The number of additions is defined in association with . Specifically, when the value of the number of remaining rounds is "5", "5" is selected as the additional number regardless of the presence or absence of a winning prize and the value of the second effect counter 223y2.

In this first control example, the number of rounds of all jackpots (the number of rounds of jackpots in which the jackpot effect is executed) is set to a multiple of 5 (5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), and the number of remaining rounds is 5. This is because, in the case of a round, it is necessary to display the number of remaining rounds in the fixed round number display mode Dm4 at this timing.

If the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10, 15", the winning prize is "yes", and the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the number of additions is "5", and the value of "50 to 99" is added. The number of additions "10" is defined in the range, the number of additions "15" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10, 15", the winning prize is "none", and the second When the value of the effect counter 223y2 is in the range of ``0 to 49'', the number of additions is ``5'', when the value is in the range of ``50 to 99'', the number of additions is ``15'', and in the range of ``100 to 149'', the number of additions is `` 10” is defined.

As described above, when the number of remaining rounds is the same (for example, "15"), it is stipulated that the ratio of the number of additions to be selected differs depending on whether or not there is a winning prize. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not there will be a reserve house on the basis of the value added during the "additional effect", and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The value of the number of remaining rounds is "20~", the winning prize is "yes", the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the number of additions is "5", and the range of "50 to 99". , and the range of "100 to 149" defines the number of addition "15". In addition, in this first control example, since the maximum value of the number of jackpot rounds executed in one jackpot game is set to "15 rounds", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 ~", The winning prize is never "none". Therefore, if the number of remaining rounds is "20 or more" and the winning prize is "none", the additional number "-" is defined, and if selected, an error command is set. .

Here, when an error command is set, that is, when the remaining number of rounds actually executed is different from the remaining number of rounds managed by the sound lamp control device 113, the additional effect is continued. Since there is a high possibility that an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort will be executed if the game is played, the execution of the additional effect is stopped, and based on the information received from the main controller 110 for the jackpot that is currently being executed. , the number of rounds set for the jackpot that is currently being executed and the number of rounds that are currently being executed are preferably configured to start execution of performance for displaying on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the performance during the big win, which gives the player a sense of discomfort, is continuously executed.

Next, the continuous effect mode selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG.116(b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the continuous production|presentation mode selection table 222e. This continuation effect mode selection table 222e is the effect mode ( It is a table for selecting the continuous effect mode for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect), and is referred to in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) (S4005 in FIG. 149). ), the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m (S4006). Then, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), in this continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the value of a continuous effect setting counter 223q, which will be described later, the presence or absence of a winning prize (whether or not the reservation is confirmed), A different continuous effect mode is defined in association with the value of the third effect counter 223y3.

Here, the continuous production setting counter 223q is a counter for counting the number of times the continuous production is set in the variable probability state or the time saving state, and by continuing the variable probability state or the time saving state for a long period of time, the battle It is used to determine that the effect has been executed multiple times. The detailed contents of the continuous effect setting counter 223q will be described later with reference to FIG. 114(b).

Specifically describing the contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "1" and the winning is set to "yes" in the pending information (winning prize information). The value of the third effect counter 223y3 is set to the continuous effect mode "1" within the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "2" is defined to be within the range of "100 to 149". there is

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "1" and the winning information (winning information) is "Yes", the continuous effect mode "5" is set regardless of the value of the third effect counter 223y3. stipulated. As a pattern corresponding to this continuous performance mode "5", there is a case where the first spin in which the battle performance is executed for the first time after the end of the big win wins the jackpot, in order to provide the player with a special feeling. , a dedicated continuous production mode is set.

Next, when the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q is "2 to 5" and the win is "none" in the pending information (winning information), the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is within the range of "0 to 99". A continuous effect mode "2" is defined, a continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and when the pending information (winning information) is "yes", the third effect counter 223y3 The continuous effect mode "2" is specified in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "1" is specified in the range of "100 to 149".

Then, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "6 or more" and the hit is "none" in the pending information (winning information), the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is within the range of "0 to 99". The mode "3" is defined, the continuous effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and when the pending information (winning information) wins "yes", the value of the third effect counter 223y3 The continuous effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

In this control example, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuous effect mode selected with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e. ), the type of your character, the type and order of the opponent characters that are selectably displayed, the type and HP value of the opponent characters that are actually selected, etc. The type and color of the background displayed during the pre-battle production and the pattern of attacking the opponent character, which are not related to the display mode during the development of the battle reach, are set based on the continuous production mode in which the production mode is selected.

For example, when the continuation effect mode "5" is selected (that is, when the first battle effect is executed and there is a winning prize in the reserve), the player is notified that the jackpot will be won soon. A production mode for doing so is set. Specifically, a premier character that is set when there is winning information that will win a jackpot in the reserve is set as the character of the player or the opponent, or a specific value is set as the initial value or intermediate value of the HP value of the opponent character. (for example, "777" or "333"), or all the same characters are displayed as a combination of selectable opponent characters. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest to the player that he or she will win a big prize using a plurality of fluctuation periods.

Next, the contents of the continued value main selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f. Here, the continuation value in this control example will be described. In this control example, when a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, a battle effect is executed as a continuous effect to indicate that the game state is continuing. be done.

In this battle production, a battle reach (final mode) production for indicating whether or not the advantageous game state is over, and a pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed are executed. When the advantageous game state is not ended as a result of the battle ready-to-win effect, the pre-battle effect is executed again.

During the pre-battle effect, the third symbol display device 81 executes the effect of decreasing the opponent's HP value (continuous value) as described above with reference to FIG. Based on the continuation value decreased during the pre-battle production, a battle ready-to-win production mode (opponent's HP (continuous value) at the start of battle ready-to-win) is determined.

In the first control example, the continuation value to be decreased during the pre-battle effect is obtained by adding the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f and the value selected by the continuation value secondary selection table 222g. configured to be calculated. By setting the continuous value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining a plurality of values in this manner, the processing load when increasing the variation of the continuous value can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 117(a), the description is continued. In the continuous value main selection table 222f, based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a, the result of determining the number of remaining fluctuations until the fluctuation of the special symbol that wins the big hit is executed, and the currently displayed result. A continuation value to be selected in association with a continuation value that is specified is specified.

That is, the continuous value main selection table 222f defines that the continuous value is selected based on the special symbol lottery result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the battle ready-for-hire effect is executed by taking over the opponent's HP (continuous value) that is variable during the pre-battle effect.

Here, if the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f are set more complicated in order to increase the variation of display of increase/decrease of the continuous value executed during the pre-battle effect, for example, in this control example, 100 Although the continuous value is managed in units of , the continuous value is managed in smaller units (units of ten), and the special pattern lottery results are further subdivided, and each subdivided lottery result is In the case of specifying the continuation value in correspondence, there is a problem that the processing load for selecting the continuation value increases. However, in order to enhance the effect of the pre-battle production, it is necessary to increase the variation of the continuous value increase/decrease display.

Therefore, in this control example, when a continuation value is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value main selection table 222g, which is a table independent of the continuation value main selection table 222f, is used to select the continuation value main selection table 222g. The continuation value selected in the selection table 222f is configured to be further variable. Thereby, the variation of the continuous value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the first control example, the continuous value is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the difference value of the continuous value selected using the continuous value main selection table 222f. (HP value) is configured so as to set the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) to decrease. Then, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is displayed as the continuation value after reduction (after updating). It is configured as follows.

Then, an attack effect managed by a value (continuation value) selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f, and a continuation value ( The range of values selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is set so as not to differ from the difference value of HP value).

By configuring in this way, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) that decreases the continuous value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is selected in the continuous value main selection table 222f. Even if management is performed using only a rough continuation value, an effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Specifically, as the attack effect set based on the difference value of the continuation values selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, if the difference value is “0 to 200”, a “light attack” (see FIG. 92 (a)), "201 to 400" means "medium attack", and "401 or more" means "strong attack" (see FIG. 92(b)). be.

As a result, for example, even though the difference value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is in the range of “medium attack” (for example, 300), the displayed difference value of the continuation value is “weak”. It is possible to suppress the difference between the continuous value range based on the special symbol lottery and the actually displayed continuous value range (for example, 200).

As shown in FIG. 117(a), the continuous value main selection table 222f contains the number of remaining fluctuations until winning variation and the last selected continuous value (among the currently displayed continuous values, the continuous value main selection table 222f The value selected in ) is defined in association with the continuation value. Specifically, if the value of the residual variation counter 222t is "3" and the last selected continuous value is "1000", then "800" is selected, and if it is "900", then "700" is selected. A value with a difference value of "200" is selected so that Similarly, if the continuation value selected last time is "400" to "800", a value with a difference value of "200" is selected. If the continuation value selected last time is '300', '200' is selected (difference value '100'). 0” is selected.

Next, when the value of the residual variation counter 222t is "2", if the last selected continuation value is "300" to "700", a value with a difference value of "100" is selected. If the selected continuation value is '100' or '200', then a value with a differential value of '0' is selected. If the value of the remaining variation counter 222t is "1", that is, if the next variation is a winning variation, and if the last selected continuous value is between "300" and "700", the difference value is "200". is selected, and if the previously selected value is "200", the value ("200") that makes the difference value "0" is selected, and if the previously selected value is "100", , the value "0" is selected so that the difference value is "100".

As described above, in this control example, based on the continuous value main selection table 222f, out of the continuous values (HP values) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, roughly ( Hundred unit) value is configured to select, and the production mode of the attack production is set based on the difference value, so the continuation value displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 (HP value). The number of patterns can be reduced, and the processing load when setting effects can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 used as the continuation value subselection table 222g will be described with reference to FIGS. 117(b) and 117(c). FIG. 117(b) schematically shows the contents of the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, and FIG. 117(c) schematically shows the contents of the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2. It is a diagram.

As described above, the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is used to increase the variable pattern of the continuation value during the continuation effect, and is referred to after the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. table. In this control example, by adding the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (Continuation value for production) is set.

In this control example, the continuous value main selection table 222f is referenced to determine whether the selected continuous value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), and based on the determination result, a different continuous value secondary selection table 222g is selected. If the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value primary selection table 222f is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 200), the first continuation value secondary shown in FIG. The selection table 222g1 is referenced, and if it is less than a predetermined value (eg, 200), the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 shown in FIG. 117(c) is referenced.

The first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117(b) defines the continuation value in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuous value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 79", the continuous value "-10" is selected, In the range of "80-119", the continuous value of "-20" is selected, and in the range of "120-149", the continuous value of "+20" is selected.

As a result, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f is added to the continuation value selected using the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, thereby increasing the types of continuation values on display. can be done. Specifically, when the continuation value main selection table 222f is referred to and the continuation value is decreased (updated) from “1000” to “800”, the selected continuation value (“800”) is changed to the predetermined value ( For example, 200) or more, so the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 is referenced. When the value "+20" is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1, "820" is displayed as the continuous value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 ( See FIG. 92(a)). On the other hand, when the value "-20" is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1, "780" is displayed as the continuous value (HP value).

Thus, by adding the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g to the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 Value (HP value) variations can be increased.

Here, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 is referred to and the displayed continuation value ( HP value) is set, a value of "+20" will be selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 while "0" is selected as the continuation value in the continuation value main selection table 222f. As an attack effect, the HP value of the opponent character is set to "0", whereas the continuation value (HP value) on the display becomes "20".

Therefore, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200). It is configured to refer to the sub-selection table 222g2. As shown in FIG. 117(c), the second continuous value sub-selection table 222g2 defines a range of "-20" to "0" as values to be selected.

The first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117(b) defines the continuation value in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuous value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 99", the continuous value "-5" is selected, In the range "100 to 149", the continuation value "-10" is selected.

Here, differences between the above-described first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and second continuation value subselection table 222g2 will be described. The first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 provides a value to add ("+20") and a value to subtract ("- 10" and "-20") can be selected. On the other hand, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 provides values ("-5", "-10") to be subtracted from the continuation value (eg, 100) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f as values that can be selected. ) is configured to be selected.

By configuring in this way, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the displayed continuation value (HP value) range can be set wider. is possible, and the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set within a range that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of effects within a range that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition to the contents of the first control example described above, storage means for storing the value selected by the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 and determination of whether the value stored in the storage means is a positive value or a negative value. determining means for determining which of the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuous value sub-selection table 222g2 to use to select a value based on the determination result of the determining means; may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the values selected by the continuous value sub-selection table 222g from biasing toward the positive or negative direction.

In the first control example, as described above, a configuration is used in which the mode of the attack effect is selected based on the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. For example, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value (HP value) actually displayed on the display screen and the continuation value main selection table 222f and a calculation means for calculating a difference value from the continuation value (HP value) set based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g; It is good also as a structure using a means.

In the first control example, the audio ramp control device 113 has the continuous value sub-selection table 222g, but other configurations may be used. 222f only, and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g may be provided on the display control device 114 side, or the display control device 114 may perform the process of selecting the mode of the attack effect. With this configuration, the audio ramp control device 113 only needs to perform update management of continuous values using the continuous value main selection table 222f, and the processing load can be further reduced.

In addition, in the first control example, the continuous value selection using the continuous value main selection table 222f or the continuous value sub-selection table 222g described above is executed when there is winning information corresponding to a big hit as a result of pre-reading of reserved symbols. In addition to the setting, that is, even when there is no prize winning information corresponding to the big win as a result of the look-ahead of the reserved symbols, the process of changing the continuation value is executed. Although the detailed description is omitted, the continuous value variable processing in this effect is variable depending on the period during which the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is continuously executed and the type of the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. A later continuation value is configured to be selected.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to frequently execute the effect of decreasing the continuous value while the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is being executed, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the effect contents. can do.

In addition, in the first control example, as a continuation effect (pre-battle effect), continuation values of four opponent candidates (A to D) are displayed as possible opponent candidates during battle reach (see FIG. 91(a)). For example, even if the continuation value (HP) of a specific opponent is greatly reduced in the continuous production (pre-battle production), the continuous production (pre-battle production) can be continued by selecting another opponent. can be run as

With this configuration, only the continuous value continues to decrease when the continuous performance (pre-battle performance) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when winning is not won during probability variation). It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach production from becoming scarce.

In addition, in the first control example, in order to prevent the pre-battle effect from continuing for a long period of time, even if the special symbol is not won, a predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol is 10 If the pre-battle production continues while it fluctuates more than once, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a deviation fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds), the battle ready-to-win is executed, and the battle ready-to-win As a result of (2), when the win is not won, the continuation performance (second time) is executed again, and the continuation value is initialized. As a result, when the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is executed over a long period of time (for example, when the win is not won during the variable probability), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach production from becoming scarce.

Next, the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a). This final mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the effect mode of the battle ready-to-win that is executed during the above-described continuous effect, and is a table for determining the suitability of the special symbol variation in which the battle ready-to-win is executed, and the fifth effect. A different final mode is defined in association with the value of the counter 223y5.

Specifically, when the result of judging the success or failure of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot ends, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is increased. The range of "0-49" defines the final mode "1", the range of "50-129" defines the final mode "2", and the range of "130-149" defines the final mode "3".

When the result of judging whether or not the special symbols are successful is a big hit, and the game state advantageous to the player is not given after the big win is completed, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is changed to the range of "0 to 129" and the final mode "4". However, the final mode "5" is defined in the range of "130 to 149", and if the result of the judgment of the special symbol is out, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 will be in the range of "0 to 129". 6”, and the final aspect “7” is defined in the range of “130 to 149”.

In addition, in the case of a special figure variation in which the special symbol is out of the suitability determination result and the time saving end condition is established, the value of the fifth production counter 223y5 is in the range of "0 to 129" The final mode "4", The final mode "5" is defined in the range "130-149".

Here, the effect contents of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a diagram for explaining the effect contents of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96, as the final mode of the battle effect (battle reach), the effect is executed in which either the main character or the opponent character attacks a total of three times. different attack patterns are selected depending on the selected final mode.

Specifically, in the final modes "1" to "3", an attack pattern in which a winning battle is executed in which the main character wins is selected, and in the case of the final mode "1", all three attack opportunities , the attack pattern in which the main character attacks is selected, and in the case of the final mode "2", the main character attacks at the first and third attack opportunities, and the opponent character attacks at the second attack opportunity. The attack pattern to be performed is selected. In the case of the final mode "3", an attack pattern (resurrection effect (see FIG. 96)) in which the main character revives and defeats the opponent's character after the opponent's character has attacked in all three attack opportunities is selected. be done.

Although detailed description is omitted, the final mode selection table 222h is provided for each variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect to be executed. A final mode (final mode "1" and "2") completed with an attack is defined to be easily selected, and a variation pattern with a variable time of 90 seconds is defined to be easily selected for resurrection performance. Here, in the resurrection effect executed with a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, the effect data for the first three attacks is the same as the effect data of the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (final mode “5”). are used. As a result, the production data can be shared to reduce the data volume, and the first half of the production in which the winning battle is executed (the first half of the final mode “3”) and the production in which the losing battle is executed (the final mode “5”). ”), and by executing the same effect, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the result of the effect in the middle of the effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description continues. For the final modes "4" and "5", an attack pattern is selected in which a defeat battle in which the main character is defeated is executed. In this defeat battle, an effect is executed in which the HP gauge Dm21, which indicates the continuation value (HP) of the main character, finally becomes 0 as a result of the battle reach. In the case of the final mode "4", an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity, and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities, and the final mode "5". In the case of , an attack pattern is selected in which the opponent's character attacks in all three attack opportunities. Thus, in the attack pattern of the losing battle set in this control example, until the last attack (the third attack) is executed, other battles (winning battles, draw battles to be described later) and Since the same performance is executed, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the performance result in the middle of the performance.

In the final modes "6" and "7", an attack pattern is selected in which neither the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value of the main character nor the HP gauge Dm22 indicating the continuation value of the opponent character becomes 0, and a draw battle is executed. When this draw battle is executed, the battle reach ends, and the next pre-battle effect is executed. In the case of the final mode "6", an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity, and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities, and the final mode "7" is selected. In the case of , an attack pattern is selected in which the opponent's character attacks in all three attack opportunities. In this way, in the attack pattern of the draw battle set in this control example, since the same effect as that of another battle (defeat battle) is executed as the attack pattern, not only the attack pattern but also the It is possible to make the user pay attention to the degree of reduction of the HP gauge, and to surely suppress a situation in which the effect result is grasped in the middle of the effect.

In this control example, the same attack pattern as in the losing battle is selected as the attack pattern to be executed during the draw battle, but the same attack pattern as in other battles (winning battle) is selected. It may be configured such that an effect in which an attack pattern is executed is selected. As a result, when the third battle is executed, depending on the attack pattern executed at each attack opportunity (first to third attack opportunities), the current battle reach is either a winning battle or a draw battle (that is, , a battle without defeat), and can see the performance (battle reach) without worrying that the game state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 114(b). FIG. 114(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 stores a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a state storage area 223e, a jackpot information storage area 223f, and the number of display rounds. Area 223g, addition production flag 223h, display extension flag 223i, variation counter 223j, elapsed time counter 223k, continuous production mode storage area 223m, continuous value storage area 223n, duration counter 223p, continuation At least an effect setting counter 223q, a continuation effect flag 223r, an indication setting flag 223t, an effect counter group 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the special symbol 1, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the special symbol 2. ), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning is detected. , From the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (whether or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern ) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command; various types of information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223a when the winning information command is received; A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. By configuring in this way, an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be appropriately executed.

In this control example, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the setting of the performance mode such as the big win effect, the battle effect, and the degree of expectation display effect is executed as the look-ahead effect. In this way, various effects (read-ahead effects) are executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so that the player can see each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

As shown in FIG. 115(a), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b counts the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 for counting the reserved ball number of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball number of the special symbol 2. It has a special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 for doing, and the value of each counter according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a winning information command is received or when a variation pattern command is received. to update.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the special symbol 1 retained by the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance up to a maximum of 4 times for each type of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is a variable display of the special symbol 2 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended by the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance of the special symbol 2 up to 4 times at maximum for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S3208 in FIG. 140). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b1 of the audio lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b1 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b2 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol 1 or the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol 2 transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3202 in FIG. 140), and the third symbol display device It is turned off when the variable display is set in 81 (see S3802 in FIG. 147). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 140), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S3814 in FIG. 147). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The jackpot information storage area 223f is an area for storing information about the jackpot to be executed. This is an area for storing when received from 110 . In this control example, the aspect of the effect executed during the big win is set based on the information stored in the big win information storage area 223f.

The display round number storage area 223g is an area for storing information regarding the number of rounds displayed during the big win. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. A finalized round number display mode Dm4 for partially confirming and displaying the set number of rounds is displayed in the main display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information on the number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g. It is configured to be displayed in Dm.

This display round number storage area 223g stores 0 as an initial value, receives the round number command among the winning related commands transmitted from the main control device 110 (S3304 in FIG. 142: Yes), and adds the effect flag. 223h is set to ON (S3306 in FIG. 142: Yes) In the processing during the added effect (see FIG. 143) executed, the stored value (the number of rounds) is referred to and set internally. A difference between the current number of rounds and the number of finalized rounds is calculated, and the value of the number of finalized rounds (the number of rounds) newly determined based on the difference value is stored.

The number of rounds stored here is added for display so as to be displayed in the fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 when the number of rounds is a predetermined number of rounds (the number of rounds n) in the additional display process (see FIG. 145). It is used when setting a display command (see S3604 in FIG. 145). Then, when the additional effect ends, the stored value is initialized.

In this way, in this control example, when a new round is started, the processing during the addition effect (see FIG. 144) is executed, the final number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g is updated, and a predetermined number of When the number of rounds (which is a multiple of 5 in this control example) is started, a display process for updating the display mode of the determined round number display mode Dm4 is executed. Therefore, since the number of fixed rounds is constantly updated (every round), a condition for updating the display mode of the number of fixed rounds display mode Dm4 may be added, or the display of the number of fixed rounds display mode Dm4 may be displayed based on the player's operation. By selecting whether or not to update the mode, even if the display timing of the fixed number of rounds is changed, it is possible to reliably cope with the situation.

Further, in this control example, when an additional prize generated during the jackpot wins the jackpot, the number of rounds is identified in advance based on the prize information corresponding to the additional prize, and the result of the advance identification indicates the number of rounds. The number of displayed rounds is set according to the total number of rounds including round number information.

The add-on effect flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the add-on effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the add-on effect is selected as the effect during the big win. This add-on effect flag 223h is set to ON when the add-on effect is read out as the effect during the jackpot in the process for setting the effect during the jackpot (see FIG. 143) (see S3408 in FIG. 143), and the hit-related command process (see FIG. 142 ) (S3304 in FIG. 142), the setting state is determined (S3306 in FIG. 142). Then, in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146), when it is determined that there is no pending residence (S3703 in FIG. 146: No), it is set to OFF.

The display extension flag 223i is a flag for indicating a state in which the effect during the big win (end display of the big win) is extended and displayed even during the period of fluctuation of the special symbol executed after the end of the big win, and the effect during the big win ( It is set to ON when extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot). In the state where this display extension flag 223i is set to ON, that is, while the effect during the big win (display of the ending of the big win) is being executed, if a new big win is won, information about the big win (winning ball number and number of rounds) are displayed in a manner continued from the information on the previous big win (number of winning balls and number of rounds).

This display extension flag 223i is, in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146), when the jackpot effect executed this time is a normal hit effect and the game state after the jackpot is a probability variable state or a time saving state ( S3709 in FIG. 146: Yes), it is set to ON (S3710 in FIG. 146). Then, when the special symbol has changed four times since the display extension flag 223i was set to ON (S3904 in FIG. 148: Yes), or when the elapsed time is 4 seconds (S5103 in FIG. 154: Yes) , is set to off (S3905 in FIG. 148, S5104 in FIG. 154).

As described above, in this control example, after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times), or a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. is configured to be set to off when This is because the period during which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON is a period during which the effect during the jackpot is continuously executed, and when the jackpot is won during that period, the effect during the jackpot is performed. This is because it is a period that continues (continuous execution of the previous jackpot effect).

To explain in detail, as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to OFF, when only the number of fluctuations in the special design reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the special design is reserved at the end of the jackpot. The value of the number of balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is less than the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (4 times), and the player interrupts the launch of the ball after the end of the big win. If this happens, the game will be interrupted without the number of variations of the special symbol reaching a predetermined number (4 times) after the end of the big win, and there is a risk that the performance during the big win will continue for a long period of time. be. Furthermore, if the player stops playing in such a state, the effect during the jackpot will be displayed even though no one is playing the game. There is a problem that the pachinko machine 10 hesitates to play a game and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered.

Therefore, in this control example, in addition to the number of times the special symbol changes, the elapsed time (4 seconds) is also provided as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to OFF. As a result, the period during which the performance during the big win is continuously displayed and the performance over a plurality of big wins can be executed can be set as a limited period. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win the jackpot during the limited period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The variation number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol during the period when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. The fluctuation number counter 223j executes the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and when the extension management process (see FIG. 148) is executed, "5" is displayed. is set (see S3902 in FIG. 148).

The elapsed time counter 223k counts the elapsed time during the period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. This elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000 (corresponding to 4 seconds)" as a counter value when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146) (see FIG. 146). S3711), the counter value is decremented by "1" every time the effect update process (S3112) of the main process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113, which is executed every millisecond, is executed (FIG. 154). (see S5102 of ).

Then, in the effect update process (see FIG. 154), when the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k becomes "0", the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (see S5104 in FIG. 154). By configuring in this way, when the elapsed time after the end of the big win has passed the predetermined time (4 seconds), the production during the big win is ended, and the normal production corresponding to each game state can be executed. , the game can be motivated to win a jackpot within a limited period.

In this control example, the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000" corresponding to 4 seconds, but the time to be set is not limited to this. Alternatively, each time the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, one of a plurality of times may be selected and its period may be set. Moreover, as a value to be set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k, it is preferable to set a value longer than the sum of the variation periods for four rotations of the special symbol 2 executed after the end of the big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 preferentially digested during the big win while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The continuous effect mode storage area 223m is a storage area for storing the continuous effect mode selected when the continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed when it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) and the game state is the time saving state or the probability variable state. In the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), the continuous effect mode selected by the continuous effect mode selection table 222e is stored, and the Qingshu mode is selected by the final mode selection table (battle reach is executed). until), an effect (pre-battle effect) corresponding to the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed.

The continuous value storage area 223n is a storage area for storing the value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f among the continuous values (HP values) increased or decreased during the continuous effect executed in this control example. Then, based on the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, update (increase/decrease) processing of the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect is executed.

In this control example, the continuation value (HP value) is roughly selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the detailed value of the continuation value (HP value) is selected based on the continuation value secondary selection table 222g. By configuring as follows, the increase/decrease pattern of the continuation value displayed during the continuation effect is increased. Since it is configured to execute only with the continuous value selected based on the can be reduced.

The continuation period counter 223p is a counter for measuring the period during which the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, and is used to suppress frequent execution of the final mode (battle reach) in the continuation effect. , is the counter used.

This continuation period counter 223p continues every time the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed in a state where the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, that is, each time the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed. 1 is added in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4009 in FIG. 149). Then, in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), when it is determined that the counter value is less than "6" (S4003 in FIG. 149: No), the final mode (battle reach) is not selected. Configure. By configuring in this way, the selection of the final mode (battle reach) is suppressed until the value of the duration counter is 6 or more, that is, after the pre-battle effect is executed until the special symbol variation is executed 6 times. be done.

The continuous effect setting counter 223q is a counter for measuring the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set (the number of times the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON) while the game state is set to the variable probability state or the time saving state. It is set so that a different continuous effect mode can be easily selected based on the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q. As a result, when the continuous effect is executed for a long period of time and the battle effect is repeatedly set, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of the same mode of battle effect. Further, by setting a continuous effect mode that is executed only when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is a specific value (for example, 1), it is possible to provide the player with a rare effect.

This continuous effect setting counter 223q is referred to when selecting a new continuous effect mode in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4005 in FIG. 149), and 1 is added when the continuous effect mode is selected. (See S4007 in FIG. 149). Then, when the continuous effect ends (when the game state shifts to the normal state, or when a jackpot is won), the counter value is cleared to 0.

The continuous effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect mode is selected (that the pre-battle effect is being executed) during execution of the continuous effect, and when the continuous effect mode is selected, set to on. While this continuation production flag 223r is set to ON, the pre-battle production is executed in the same continuation production mode without selecting a new continuation production mode.

This continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF at the beginning when the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect mode is selected (see S4008 in FIG. 149). While it is set to ON, the process for selecting the continuous effect mode is skipped (S4004 of FIG. 149: Yes). Then, when the final mode is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (that is, when battle reach is selected and the pre-battle effect is completed), it is set to OFF (see S4015 in FIG. 149).

The portent setting flag 223t is a flag used when the countdown effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations (see FIG. 101), and is set to ON when the variable display is switched during the portent effect period. When this precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147), when setting a new variable effect, Control is performed so that the precursor performance of the previous variation is continuously executed from the start of the variation.

This sign setting flag 223t has a countdown effect (see S3232 and S3233 in FIG. 141) having a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) as the look-ahead information in the winning information command process (see FIG. 141), and is currently being executed. If it is determined that the remaining display fluctuation period is 10 seconds or more (S3234 in FIG. 141: Yes), it is set to ON (see S3236 in FIG. 141).

Then, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), it is referred to when setting the effect mode (see S4301 in FIG. 152), and when it is determined that the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON in the process of S4301 In the multiple variation effect setting process (see FIG. 153) executed in , the effect is set to OFF after setting the effect mode (see S4405 in FIG. 153).

The effect counter group 223y is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. The effect counter group 223y has at least a first effect counter 223y1 to a sixth effect counter 223y6, and any counter is an IC for generating random numbers electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. (not shown) is stored in the range of 0 to 198. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for random number generation is an IC capable of operating at an operating clock (e.g., 1 MHz) at least for each effect counter, which can be updated to separate random values and execute judgment. is adopted. The value of the effect counter group 223y is used when executing various judgments executed by the sound lamp control device 113, such as whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, determination of the notice type of the normal pressing effect, and the like.

The other memory area 223z is provided with an area for storing data other than the above-described data and flags other than the above-described flags for setting the state, and other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored. This is an area for storing Specifically, for example, a power-off flag is provided that is used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. This power-off flag receives a power-off command from main controller 110 and is set to ON before power-off processing is executed. After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 138), if the power off flag is on (3008 in FIG. 138: Yes), a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) before the audible lamp controller 113 is activated, i.e., there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S3009 in FIG. 138). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND-type flash memory 234a generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. In this way, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 125) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND-type flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 140 is detected. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 .

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 155).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 121 . FIG. 121 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 121(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 22(c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, there is a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. 22(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 is detected. 121(b) and 121(c), the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b is used to draw the power-on variation image, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. While the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the ball is detected in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81 can be displayed immediately.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 . can be done. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. However, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation has stopped during the time until the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. can.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 122(b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", while the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" is shown.

As shown in FIG. 122, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 122(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, the position a to the position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "Beach Stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122(b), for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, an image between position a and position b is resident. It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 122(a) and (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a stage change is determined by a lottery at the start of fluctuation, the resident video RAM 235 can be stored on the back side of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 for the rear B is stored in a rear image exclusive sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 120) of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described nine types of main patterns (see FIG. 81(b)) with numbers "0" to "9" as the third pattern are resident. be. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, but the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

Further, image data corresponding to sub-designs with no numbers are also resident in the third design area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sub-symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "young man" and "woman" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are permanently stored in the character design area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 stores the character in the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a total value storage area 233k, and an omen effect flag 233m.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, etc. , a display data table corresponding to a jackpot middle effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display variation pattern command corresponding to a period of one special symbol variation (variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110) as a display stop type. It is configured to output together with the command and set the effect mode corresponding to each command received by the display control device 114, but other configurations may be used. Divide the display variation pattern command corresponding to one period of special symbol variation (eg, 60 seconds) into a plurality of (eg, first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and second half variation pattern (30 seconds) and display control device 114 By configuring in this way, the game content that occurred during the period when the first half variation pattern was executed (for example, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, a new ball entry Acquisition of information), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the second half variation pattern can be set.

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, after once outputting the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation, when the additional display variation pattern command is received, the additional display variation The processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced because there is no need to perform the process of rewriting the effect content in correspondence with the pattern command. In addition, as described above, the voice ramp control device 113 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation (eg, 60 seconds) into a plurality of commands (eg, the first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half When outputting the variation pattern (30 seconds) to the display control device 114, it is preferable to output the display stop type command together with the display variation pattern command that is output first.

In addition, in this control example, a display effect command for executing a continuous effect (see FIG. 96) that is continuously executed when the game state is advantageous to the player, and the continuous effect is terminated. The voice lamp control device 113 provides a display final mode command for executing an effect (battle ready-to-win) to notify whether or not the player wins, and various other commands for increasing the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. When various commands are received, effects corresponding to the various commands are displayed.

Furthermore, even if the presentation contents have already been set based on the reception of the predetermined display command, if the additional display command is received after that, the additional display command is responded to. It is configured to overwrite the contents of the presentation with the contents. As a result, based on the reception of the display variation pattern command, in a state in which the effect for the period corresponding to the predetermined period (variation period of the special symbol) is set (created) in advance, additional during that period When a display command (for example, a player's operation of the frame button 22 or a display command indicating acquisition of new ball entry information) is received, the display contents of the effect can be changed smoothly.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the sub-patterns with no numerals "1" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a young man's image, characters, and other characters used for various effects, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back face is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "morning stage", "evening stage", and "night stage"), or to display one of back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C (special back faces A to C, etc.), the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display. .

When the type of the back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back face type is specified as the drawing content of the back face image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 75) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 124). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 124).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 124, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 124, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 . The simple image display flag 233c is set to the main image executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to ON in the process (see FIG. 155) (see S6005 in FIG. 155). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting processing of the transfer setting processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, , is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 170(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 157(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 157(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6308 in FIG. 157(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 157 to 169) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 170(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 125) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing of V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed (FIG. 167(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 125), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, ..., error pattern ) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 157(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7607 in FIG. 167). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 157B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of image in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of image.

The total value storage area 233k is an area for storing (memorizing) a history displayed (displayed as a total value) as a continuous value (HP value) variably displayed in the above-described continuous effect (see FIG. 91). Based on the difference between the value (total value) stored (stored) in the total value storage area 233k and the newly received continuation value (HP value), the display content in the continuous effect (for example, in FIG. 92(a) The decrease value Dm12, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and the effect mode of the attack effect) are determined and displayed.

In other words, in this control example, means (total value storage area 233k) for storing the previously set total value is provided on the display control device 114 side without storing the previously set total value on the sound lamp control device 113 side. The display control device 114 calculates the difference between the previous total value and the current total value, and displays a display mode based on the calculation result. Thereby, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In this control example, means for setting a performance value for increasing the display variation of the continuation value (HP value) on the sound lamp control device 113 side (the continuation value sub-selection table 222g and S4105 to S4107 in FIG. 150). ) is provided, the display control device 114 may be provided with means for setting this effect value. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be further reduced.

The portent effect flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the portent effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. If this portent effect flag 233m is on, it means that the portent effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, and if it is off, the portent effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. It means that the The portent effect flag 233m is set to ON when the additional portent command for display transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7505 in FIG. 166). In addition, this portent effect flag 233m is referenced in the variation pattern command processing (see S6501 in FIG. 159), and after setting the display data table corresponding to the portent effect executed across a plurality of special figure variations, , is set to OFF (see S6503 in FIG. 159). Thereby, it is possible to execute the sign effect across a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

Although detailed description is omitted, when executing a precursor effect across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, the effect data of the precursor effect executed in the previous special figure fluctuation and the effect data at the time of execution When setting the effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of this time (S6502 in FIG. 159), referring to the effect data stored in the above-described storage means, the last time It is configured so that the precursor effect executed in the special figure fluctuation is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the sign effect that is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set the precursor effect based on the reception of the display variation pattern command (that is, configured to execute the precursor effect as part of the variation pattern). Without being limited to this, when a display command indicating execution of an indication effect is received, regardless of the variable display content, the indication effect is displayed during the period indicated by the command, or indicating that the indication effect is stopped. It may be configured to display until a command is received.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 126 to 137. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 238, 199, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131.

After the starting winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is displayed. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

When it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed to start the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

As described above, in this control example, when executing the processing for starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is acquired, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is obtained. When the value (N2) of the number counter is 0, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired. . By configuring in this way, the variation of the special symbol 2 can be preferentially executed.

In addition, the processing for starting the variation of the special symbol is not limited to the configuration of this control example. And without setting priority to the special symbol 2, for example, the special symbols may be changed according to the order in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. . In this case, a storage area is provided for storing the order in which the balls enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, and the special symbol 1 is provided according to the order (ball entrance order) stored in the storage area. The value of the reserved ball number counter or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter may be acquired, or the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to use a common reserved ball number counter. .

Furthermore, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to vary independently and at the same time. In this case, when it is determined that one of the special symbols is in the middle of a jackpot, the other special symbol stops changing (stops subtraction of the variation time until one jackpot ends), or the other (Even if the fluctuation time has not passed, the lottery result is rewritten to be out and forced to stop). By configuring in this way, in a configuration in which a plurality of special symbols are varied at the same time, when one becomes advantageous to the player, the game can be played without worrying about the variation of the other special symbols. can.

Returning to FIG. 127, the description continues. In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if it is determined that the variable time has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1, and when the special symbol jackpot is determined, the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol The jackpot types (jackpots A to K) are determined according to the symbol 2) and the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In this control example, by changing the lighting pattern of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the jackpot types (jackpots A to K), it is possible to identify the hit jackpot type. Specifically, a plurality of lighting patterns are configured by lighting or extinguishing each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, seven) provided in the first pattern display device 37 . The lighting pattern of the first pattern display device 37 may be configured to have different lighting colors. Furthermore, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to notify the outside that the special symbol is fluctuating by flashing at least one of the plurality of LEDs, and is used in this flashing display. So that the lighting period (lighting period for indicating the stop state of the special design) displayed from the stop of the special design to the execution of the variation of the next special design is longer than the lighting period of the LED. It consists of Thereby, it is possible for the player to grasp whether the special symbols are fluctuating or stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), an opening scenario for the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type (S217). After that, the variable probability flag 203g is reset to OFF, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is reset to 0 (S218), and the start of the jackpot is set (S219). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S219, when the jackpot control processing (S1104) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) is executed, branch to S1201: Yes, and the opening command is set be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

When the process of S219 is finished, next, a stop command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of information about the stop pattern is set (S220), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is a loss (S216: No), the change count subtraction process is executed (S221). Note that the change count subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129 . After that, the process proceeds to the above-described S220 process, and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, a first hit random number counter stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203g of the RAM 203 is ON (S302). The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols. If the flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (low probability state).

When the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the value for the high probability time A lottery result as to whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot is acquired based on a random number table (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. As described above, five random numbers from "5 to 9" are set as the random numbers for the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers for these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the determination value for the big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 It is also possible to vary the determination value for a big hit. By constructing in this way, the random number determined to be out of the special symbol 1 is determined to be a hit in the special symbol 2, and the bias of the big win can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of determination values for the big hit, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number. The number of determination values that become a big hit may be varied. By constructing in this way, the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2 can have different probabilities of winning a big hit, and when the lottery is executed with the special pattern with a higher probability of a big win, the player wins the big prize. can have expectations of

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203g is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of special symbols, the first per random number acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first winning random number table for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. Only "7" is set as a random number value for a special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 coincides with "7", the special symbol jackpot is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes ), based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big winning is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202c, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot Among A to K), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot A (the number of rounds In the 15th round, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot type in which the game state is set to a probability variable state of special symbols (see FIG. 107), and "20 to 79". If it is within the range, it is determined to be a jackpot B (a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state of special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won).

Also, if the value of the acquired first win type counter C2 is within the range of "80 to 114", the jackpot C (the number of rounds is 10, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends) As a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times), and if it is in the range of “115 to 164”, the jackpot D (the number of rounds is 5 rounds, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot) It is determined that the game state after the end is a jackpot type set in the probability variable state of the special symbol).

Furthermore, if the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", the jackpot E (the number of rounds is 5, and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is a low probability state and not a time saving state In the case (if it is in the normal state), the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot, and if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), after the end of the jackpot As a game state, it is determined that the time saving state is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times (see FIG. 107).

Also, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 2 (special figure 2), as in the case of special figure 1 described above, based on the contents defined in the first per type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) Then, the jackpot F to jackpot K are determined.

In the processing of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to K). Also, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types (jackpots A to K) are set as the stop types.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of symbol variations such as normal reach and super reach is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108) as described above. After the process of S307 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot (no) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area) is set. 203b), based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of 203b), the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is front-rear off-reach, non-front-rear off-ready, or complete. Set whether it is out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the defined contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108), normal reach, Determines the fluctuation time of pattern fluctuation such as super reach and special reach. After the process of S309 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310, which is executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 ( S310). Next, a stop type command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, it returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127).

Next, the variation count subtraction process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this change count subtraction process (S221). In this fluctuation frequency subtraction process (S221), the time saving medium counter 203h and the specified number counter 203j are subtracted based on the end of fluctuation of the special symbols.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for measuring the remaining number of times the time saving state is set, and the number of time saving times is set when the game state shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot. The stipulated number counter 203j is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202f (see FIGS. 111 and 112), and is a stipulated number of times based on the content of the state transition table set after the end of the big win. is set.

When the process of FIG. 129 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203h during time saving is greater than 0 (S401). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S401: Yes), that is, when the current state is the time saving state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S402), and the time saving counter 203h A remaining time reduction command indicating the value of is set (S403). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136). be done. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the current game state, that is, the remaining time reduction count of the time reduction state from the remaining time reduction count command received as part of the state command, and stores it in the state storage area 223e.

When the processing of S403 is finished, next, whether the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0, that is, as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the counter 203h during time saving by the processing of S402, the value of the counter 203h during time saving becomes 0 (S404). In the process of S404, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S404: Yes), the game state is changed to the normal state, the corresponding state command is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. .

On the other hand, in the process of S404, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (1 or more) (S404: No), the process of S405 is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. In addition, in the process of S401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), the process relating to the time saving counter 203h (S402 to S405) is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. .

In the processing of S406, it is determined whether or not the value of the prescribed number counter 203j is greater than 0 (S406). In the process of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is greater than 0 (S406: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (S407), and the remainder indicating the value of the specified number of times counter 203j A variation count command is set (S408). The remaining variation count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136). The sound lamp control device 113 extracts the remaining variation count of each state status from the remaining variation count command received as part of the state command, that is, the remaining variation count until the game state and the variation pattern selection table to be referred to are switched. , is stored in the state storage area 223e.

When the processing of S408 is completed, next, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0, that is, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the specified number of times counter 203j by the process of S407. (S409). If it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202f, and the corresponding state command is set (S410).

In the process of S410, for example, the state transition 4 table 202f4 is set as the state transition table 202f, and the value "4" of the specified number counter 203j set for the state status ST3a is subtracted to become "0". When the state status changes from ST3a to ST3, information indicating the state status ST3 and information indicating the newly set specified number of times "96" are set as the state command.

When the process of S410 is finished, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set according to the set state transition table 202f (S411), and this process is finished. In the process of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S406: No), the processes (S407 to S411) relating to the specified number of times counter 203j are skipped. End this process.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, When there is a starting prize, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is added, the corresponding various counter values are stored in each reserved ball storage area, and from the stored various counter values, the special symbols To execute pre-reading processing for determining a lottery result in advance.

When the starting winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this first control example) (S503).

In the process of S503, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S504). . Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 136) described later. In the external output process (S1101), it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S505, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of the random number counter C4 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the ball has not won (entered) the first winning hole (entering ball hole) 64 (S501: No), or in the process of S503, the special symbol 1 reserved ball When it is determined that the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (is 4) (S503: No), the starting winning process for special symbol 1 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S507.

Next, in each process of S507-S512, the same process as each process of S501-S506 is executed for winning (entering a ball) into the second ball entrance 140. FIG. Each of the processes of S507 to S512 is different only in that the process of holding the held ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 140 is executed, and other processes are the same as those of S501 to S506. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the processes of S507 to S512 are finished, the prefetch process is executed (S513), and this process is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S513). In this look-ahead processing (S513), when there is a new winning (ball winning) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the special symbol lottery result for that winning (ball winning) is announced in advance. A process of determining (reading ahead) and setting a command for outputting the result of the preliminary determination (reading ahead) to the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the command (winning (winning a ball) information command) set here, an effect for the winning (winning a ball) information held and stored is performed based on the winning (winning a ball) information. It is possible to execute at a time before the special symbol variation is executed.

In this look-ahead processing (FIG. 131, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new win (a winning ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (ball winning) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning (entering ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601: Yes), from the special symbol reserved ball storage area, (special symbol 1 reserved ball Storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) The value of the first winning random number counter C1, the value of the first winning type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to this winning prize A value is acquired (S602).

Next, among the determination results defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)), the winning determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is acquired (S603), Among the determination results defined in the first winning type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107), the winning type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired (S604).

After the processing of S604 is finished, next, out of the determination results defined in the stop type table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S605), and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is obtained. (See FIG. 108) acquires the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 (S606).

Then, the hit determination result information indicating the hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the variation indicating the variation type determination result obtained in the processing of S603 to S606 described above. A winning information command including type information is set (S607), and this process is terminated.

Winning (winning a ball) information acquired in the process of S602 described above is information for indicating in advance the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed for a new winning (winning a ball). Good to have. The lottery result may be selected in advance using various selection tables used for lottery of special symbols, or the same selection table as the various selection tables described above may be provided for prefetch processing.

In addition, in the process of S607, the game state information for indicating the game state when the special symbol variation is executed based on the winning (ball winning) information to be the target of the current prefetch processing is added to the winning (ball winning) information command. may be included. Here, the game state information will be explained. In this control example, the game state is configured to be able to set the normal state, the variable probability state and the time saving state, and depending on each game state, the lottery result of the special symbol (jackpot determination result, jackpot type, and variation pattern ) and the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 set by the sound lamp control device 113 are configured to be different.

Furthermore, in this control example, the game state is configured to be shifted based on the number of variations of the special symbols. Specifically, when the time saving state (100 times) is set as the game state, on the condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in that state, the game state changes from the time saving state to the normal state. migrated.

In this control example configured in this way, it is determined whether or not the lottery of special symbols based on the winning (entering the ball) to be the target of the look-ahead process is executed during the time saving state, and the determination result is the game state information is included in the winning (ball winning) information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As a result, while the game state is the time saving state, the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern based on the ball that has won (entered) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 changes the game state to the normal state. Even if it is executed after the shift, it is possible to set the winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to the game state when the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed. Further, as the winning (ball winning) information command, only the winning information command corresponding to the game state when the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern corresponding to the winning (ball winning) information command is executed is set, and the voice lamp is set. Since the data can be output to the control device 113, the amount of data to be output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The method of setting the winning (ball winning) information command by the look-ahead process is not limited to the content of this control example, and is set by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the content of the received winning (ball winning) information command. It is sufficient if it is possible to suppress the problem that the content of the effect (read-ahead effect) to be performed contradicts the lottery (fluctuation) result of the special symbol that is changed by the transition of the game state.

For example, when setting the winning (ball winning) information command in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to a plurality of game states can be set, and the sound lamp control device 113 Determines the game state when the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to the winning (ball winning) information command is executed, and sets the pre-reading effect based on the winning (ball winning) information corresponding to the determination result. may be configured to do so. This eliminates the need to prefetch the game state in the prefetch processing of the main controller 110, so that the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, as the winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to the plurality of game states described above, for example, as a jackpot determination result, the first determination result that the jackpot is won in any game state, the game state is certain Either the second judgment result that the jackpot is won only in the state or the third judgment result that the jackpot is not won in any game state is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 side is made to correspond to the game state. Alternatively, the information indicating the value of each counter obtained in the look-ahead process is output as it is as a winning (ball winning) information command, and the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to be able to determine the lottery result based on the received information (information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the main controller 110 in the pre-reading process).

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 140a.

In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second ball entrance 140 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S701: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708). Specifically, the value of the counter 203h during time saving of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203g is ON, it is determined that it is a time saving state of normal symbols, and the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 0, And, if the variable probability flag 203g is off, it is determined that it is in the normal state of normal symbols (it is not in the time saving state).

In the processing of S708, when it is determined that it is normal symbol time saving state (S708: Yes), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second winning random number table 202b for high probability time Based on , the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S709). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202b for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202b in FIG. 106(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S708, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 and the second hit for the low probability time Based on the random number table 202b, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202b for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a win of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202b in FIG. 106(b)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S709 or S710 is a normal symbol win (S711), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S711: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S712). In the process of S712, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S714. .

On the other hand, in the process of S711, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S711: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S714.

In the process of S714, it is determined whether or not the time saving state of the normal design is in effect (S714). is set to 3 seconds (S715), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S716), and this process exit. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability (time saving state), compared to the normal pattern when the probability is low (normal state), the time of fluctuation display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds". As a result, the lottery frequency of normal symbols increases. Therefore, the frequency of wins in the normal pattern lottery increases, and the electric accessory 140a associated with the second ball entrance 140 is easily opened, so that the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 140. state.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the game state of normal symbols is configured to be set to the normal state when winning during the jackpot of special symbols. By configuring in this way, the game state of the normal symbols becomes advantageous during the big win which is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player. In addition, the period during which the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (special symbol jackpot period) and the period during which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open (ordinary symbol winning period) overlap, and the variable winning is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the electric accessary 140a being opened hinders the winning of the ball to the device 65. - 特許庁

To explain the above-mentioned contents in detail, when the electric accessory 140a is provided in the first flow path through which the ball flows so that the variable winning device 65 can win, the electric accessory 140a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the balls flowing down the first flow path end up winning the electric accessory 140a, and there is a problem that the balls cannot sufficiently enter the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, the electric accessory 140a is arranged at the lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and the ball flowing down the first flow path during the jackpot period (while the variable winning device 65 is open) Although the above-mentioned problem can be solved by using a configuration that facilitates winning by the variable winning device 65, in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted.

On the other hand, in this control example, normal symbols are shifted to a low-probability state (normal state) during the special symbol jackpot, so that the electric accessory 140a becomes difficult to open during the jackpot period, thereby solving the above-described problem. can do.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S717). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S715 or the process of S716 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S717, if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S717: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S717, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S717: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S718). In the process of S718, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S712, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S718, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After completion, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S712 or the process of S713.

Next, when the variation display currently being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. (S719). If the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal design (S719: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the present is in the time saving state of the normal design (S720), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S720: Yes), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second ball entrance 140 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S722), and the process proceeds to S723. . On the other hand, in the process of S720, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (not the time-saving state) (S720: No), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S721), and the process proceeds to S723.

In the process of S723, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary 140a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S721 or S722 (S723), and the process ends. By the process of S723, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140a is set, next when the electric accessory opening and closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, the electric accessory 140a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or S722 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S719, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S719: No), the processing of S720 to S723 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this first control example) (S803).

The ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is If it is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S805), and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this first control example) is performed. Execute (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1012.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1114 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1008). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the main processing described later is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1101). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) and the start winning process (see FIG. 130). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the first control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this first control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 140a is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 140a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or S722 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this first control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) ends, the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S715 or the process of S716 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. 132) in the display mode set by the processing of S712 or S713 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this first control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process ( S1109), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (238 and 239 in this first control example), they are reset to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of S1108, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 134 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1112 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1112), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1113). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the initial setting processing (see S1001 in FIG. 135) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1201: Yes), an opening command is set (S1202), and this process is finished.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1203). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1203, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1203: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1204). If it is time to start a new round (S1204: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened (S1205), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1206). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1204, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1204: No), it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are met (S1207). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the process of S1207, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is met (S1207: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1208), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are not satisfied (S1207: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1209). Specifically, when a special game state (all round games set as jackpots (for example, 15 rounds)) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than normal is completed, it is the start timing of the ending effect. and discriminate.

In the processing of S1209, if it is time to start the ending effect (S1209: Yes), an ending command is set (S1210), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the process of S1209, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211), and if it is not the end time of the ending effect If it is determined (S1211: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1211, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing that all the jackpot games have ended, the first winning type selection table 202c is used. Then, the contents of the variable probability flag 203g and the counter 203h during time saving are set (S1212). By the processing of this S1212, the game state (presence or absence of variable probability state, presence or absence of time saving state and setting of the number of time saving times) after the end of the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won is set.

Next, referring to the jackpot transition setting table 202e, a state transition destination is selected based on the jackpot type won this time and the game state at the time of winning (see FIG. 110), and state transition corresponding to the selected state transition destination Based on the table 202f, the state status and the specified number counter 203j are obtained (S1213). For example, in the state where "with high probability time saving (probability variable state)" is set as the gaming state, if you win the "jackpot G" as the jackpot type, "state transition 2" is selected as the state transition destination, the state Of the transition tables 202f (see FIG. 111(a)), the state transition 2 table 202f2 (see FIG. 111(c)) corresponding to "state transition 2" is referenced.

After that, set a state designation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the special symbol game state (high probability state (variable probability state), low probability state (normal state)) after the jackpot is completed ( S1214), the end of the jackpot is set (S1215), and the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 154, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 138, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, initial setting is executed upon power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S3118 (see FIG. 139) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (S3115 in FIG. 139: Yes), it executes power-off processing in S3118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S3118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and S3118 of FIG. , or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). It is a thing. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), it will transfer to S3004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the power-off processing flag is ON (S3002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S3118. It is started when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset during execution of the process. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 of FIG. 139 is executed (see S3117 of FIG. 139). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010.

The reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process of S3008 is reached from S3004 via the process of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S3010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and time setting processing is executed to set reference timing information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time presentation (S3012). , to the main processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 139, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3113 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the process of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S3102 to S3112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short period (within 1 msec). , S3113 command determination processing, and S3114 variable display setting processing are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S3113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b2 is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting effects. Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) will be described.

In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107), first, it is determined whether or not an effective period flag indicating a period during which pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively handled is set to ON. Here, if the validity period flag is set to ON, next, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that the depression of the frame button 22 has been detected, the display depression command corresponding to the depression of the button is set, and this processing ends.

Note that the valid period flag described above is provided for each effect executed based on pressing of the frame button 22 . For example, if the background of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 can be varied based on the depression of the frame button 22, the valid period flag (first valid period flag) for indicating that effect is turned on. If it is a period during which an operation effect that changes the variation effect mode of the third symbol is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 (a period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted in the operation effect), that A validity period flag (second validity period flag) for indicating this is set to ON.

Furthermore, in the plurality of valid period flags described above, priority is predetermined corresponding to the privilege value given when the player presses the frame button 22, and the plurality of valid period flags are set to ON. When the valid period flag is set to ON, processing based on pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the valid period flag having the highest priority among the plurality of valid period flags set to ON.

By configuring in this way, when the period during which the pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted overlaps, for example, the period during which the background can be changed (the period during which the first effective period flag is set to ON) and the operation effect is executed (the period in which the second valid period flag is set to ON) overlaps, based on the second valid period flag set with a higher priority based on the pressing of the frame button 22 Since the processing is executed, an effect with a high privilege value can be executed for the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is similarly configured to execute the effect for indicating that the second validity period flag is set to ON. Since only the effect corresponding to the validity period set with a high priority is executed, the player can operate timing while watching the effect being executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The frame button 22 can be pressed without making a mistake. Therefore, an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In this control example, as a method of setting priority to each valid period flag, a configuration is used in which priority is set to each valid period flag in advance, but other configurations may be used. In the button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107), it may be determined whether or not the effective period flag is set to ON in descending order of priority. As a result, even if a plurality of validity period flags are set to ON at the same time, processing based on pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the validity period flag with the highest priority. It is possible to execute an effect with a high privilege value for the player, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

After frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) ends, lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S3109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S3110 ends, various counter update processes are executed (S3111). In this various counter update processing, processing for updating various counters used in the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Specifically, each counter value of the first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 included in the effect counter group 223y is updated so as not to be synchronized. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are counters used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed (1 ms each time), an update process is performed so that the values are different.

In the first control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, since a plurality of effect counters with different update values are used, when selecting a plurality of effects in the main process , the same counter value is referred to, and the selection of effects is prevented from being biased. are desired to be synchronized, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

In addition, in the first control example, a plurality of counters (first effect counter 223y1 to sixth effect counter 223y6) with different update patterns are used. may be calculated and each effect may be selected using the calculated value. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, of the updated value of the effect counter, the value of the last digit, the value of the second digit, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit It is preferable to calculate each value without regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

When the processing of S3111 ends, next, effect update processing (S3112) is executed. This effect update process is a process of updating various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the elapsed period. In this effect update process (S3112), the control for the effect (for example, the display extension effect executed after the end of the jackpot) is executed regardless of the variation of the special symbol. A detailed description of this effect update process (S3112) will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3113, a command determination process is executed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S3113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S3114). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to execute the production corresponding to the special design fluctuation in the third design display device 81 (variation production of the third design and other production), based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 Then, a display variation pattern command is generated and set. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . In the processing of S3115, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S3115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off processing is executed. (S3118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from main controller 110. FIG.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S3201). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S3203) and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to for determining the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3204). When the stop type command is received (S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3204 that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S3207). When it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (S3207: Yes), the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received pending ball number command is displayed in the pending ball number counter. , stores the value contained in the received pending ball count command (S3208), and terminates this process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the received reserved ball number command A value (number N1 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 223b1 of voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special The holding number N2 of the variable display in the symbol 2) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 of the sound lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the value of either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is changed in the process of S3208, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. A command for the number of pending balls for display is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, the correct number of reserved symbols can always be displayed in the reserved display area Dn4 of the third pattern display device 81. can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, if it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S3207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3209). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3209: Yes), the winning information command process is executed (S3210), and this process ends.

Here, the winning information command process (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information command process (S3210). This winning information command process (S3210) is a process executed when a winning information command is received from the main controller 110, and the information included in the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a. Execute processing for storing in the area (reserved storage area corresponding to the winning information command).

Here, the information included in the winning information command is information for winning balls such as information on the result of judging whether a special symbol is right or wrong, information on a stop type, and information on a variation pattern, but other information is also included. For example, it may include winning information about a ball that has already won a prize (for which a winning information command has been received in the past).

When the winning information command process (S3210) is executed, first, the information (prefetch information) of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3231). As described above, the winning information storage area 223a can store up to 4 winning information commands for special symbol 1 and up to 4 winning information commands for special symbol 2, for a total of 8 winning information commands. Winning information commands are stored in a designated storage area in accordance with the order in which the winning information commands are received.

Next, as information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time, it is determined whether or not there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232). In the processing of S3232, if it is determined that there is no variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: Yes), then a specific effect C (see FIG. 101), that is, a predetermined amount from the start of variation It is determined whether or not there is variation type information indicating a specific effect (for example, an effect for the player to operate the frame button 22) to be executed within a period (for example, within 5 seconds) (S3233).

Here, if it is determined that there is a specific effect C (S3233: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the currently executed variation display is 10 seconds or more (S3234). In the process of S3234, based on the time (elapsed time with respect to the set fluctuation time) managed by the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113 A remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is determined.

In the processing of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes), it means that a period is secured in which the predictive effect can be added to the variation display being executed, so addition for display. A portent command is set (S3235), the portent setting flag 223t is set to ON (S3236), and this processing ends. By executing the above-described processing, it is possible to execute an indication effect across a plurality of variable displays as a suggestive effect targeting the specific effect C to be executed in the next and subsequent variable displays. As a result, the specific effect executed at the beginning of the variable display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variable display), that is, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed with only one variable display is reduced. Since suggestive effects can be executed using multiple variable displays even for specific effects that are executed at timings that cannot be secured, the frequency of occurrence of suggestive effects can be increased, and the range in which specific effects can be set can be increased. It is possible to widen it, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of presentation regarding the variable display.

In the processing of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is less than 10 seconds (S3234: No), that is, if the period during which the suggestion effect can be added to the variation display being executed cannot be secured, This processing ends without changing the display mode of the variable display. Here, if it is not possible to secure a period during which the suggestive effect can be added to the variable display being executed (S3234: No), the variable corresponding to the winning information determined to have the countdown effect in the winning information command process (S3210). When setting the display, a specific performance is set within a range in which the suggestive performance can be executed with only one variable display (for example, a range in which 15 seconds or more have passed since the start of variation), and the suggestive performance is set.

By configuring in this way, the timing (first ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance 64) at which the winning information is generated is The presentation mode of the countdown presentation can be varied depending on the timing at which the ball enters 140, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, a specific effect set at the beginning of the variable display (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) that is executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display) is changed to a specific effect set in another period (for example, It is defined to be an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than a specific effect executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. In other words, the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is stipulated so that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more likely to be selected.

As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning a big prize in the next and subsequent variations. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player ambitiously accumulate special symbols so that a suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, based on the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), a plurality of variable displays are displayed. , but other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). may be determined whether or not to be executed, and if it is determined to be executed, an omen effect is executed as a suggestive effect, and at the timing of starting the next variable display, a specific effect may be set. , a specific effect is set based on the contents of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the period in which the portent effect is being executed (the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Also good. By configuring in this way, based on the game situation after the suggestive effect is started (the lottery result of the next change, the variation pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)), the suggestive effect is produced. Aspects can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the presentation as compared with the configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

In addition, in this control example, as an example of executing a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display that is being executed and the variable display that will be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of variable display, the suggestive effect may be executed so as to extend from the variable display being executed to the variable display that is executed one after another, or it will be executed one after another from the variable display that is executed next time. A suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), it is determined whether the timing of executing the suggestive effect is set to the variable display being executed or to the next variable display. It is good to have a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113. For example, the number of pending balls of special symbols is displayed in the pending display area. In Dn4, in order to suggest a pending display (a pending pattern) corresponding to winning information indicating a big hit, a pending change notice effect for changing the display mode of the pending display is set, or a special pattern corresponding to winning information indicating a big win. It is referred to when setting a continuous advance notice effect that makes a big hit expected as a special symbol effect that starts to change before.

In addition, in the first control example, the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is referred to at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot, and the prize information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. (whether or not there is an on-hold renso), and based on the result of the determination, an effect is set during the jackpot game or after the jackpot ends. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the variable probability state, the content of the effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when an effect (read-ahead effect) referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is being executed, a flag ( For example, when the prefetching effect in progress flag) is set to ON and the prefetching effect in progress flag is set to ON, when a new prize information command is received, the winning prize included in the prize information command is displayed. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. This suppresses the occurrence of the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without an interval, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In order to solve the above-described problem, control other than the contents described above may be used. Comparing the priority rank of the pre-reading effect currently being given and the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command, the pre-reading effect with the higher priority rank may be controlled to execute In this case, when it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead performance is higher, the look-ahead performance switching notification is executed to notify the player that the look-ahead performance being executed will end in the middle. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the look-ahead effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the end timing initially set. You can

Further, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest. should be set to be high. By this. When the read-ahead performance being executed ends in the middle, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big win and can be made to pay attention to the new read-ahead performance to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description continues. In the processing of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3209: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning related command has been received (S3211), and if a winning related command has been received ( S3211: Yes), the hit related command process (S3212) is executed, and after the end of the hit related command process, this process ends.

Here, the contents of the hit-related command process (S3212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related command process (S3212). In the hit-related command process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3301). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), the process for setting the effect during the jackpot is executed (S3302). An opening command is set (S3303), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

Here, when the opening command is received (S3301: Yes), the content of the effect setting process (S3302) during the jackpot executed when the opening command is received will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S3302) during the big hit. In this jackpot middle effect setting process (S3302), the reservation status at the time of jackpot winning (contents of winning prize information stored in winning prize information storage area 223a and counter value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 (number of reserved balls)) A process for setting an effect to be executed during the jackpot is executed based on.

Specifically, the result of determining the presence or absence of winning information indicating that the special symbol jackpot has been won, and the result of determining whether the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit (4) The effect to be executed during the big win is selected using the effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 115(c)) during the big win.

When the jackpot middle effect setting process (S3302) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is extracted (S3401), and then based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2. The current number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is extracted (S3402), and it is determined whether the extracted number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is 0 (S3403).

Here, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (S3403; No), the reserved rank corresponding to the extracted winning information and the number of reserved balls is read from the reserved rank selection table 222b (S3404), The process proceeds to S3406, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the number of pending balls is 0, "1" is read as the pending rank, and the process proceeds to S3406.

A reserved rank selection table 222b is stored at the time of winning a jackpot in order to select a reserved rank based on the degree of expectation that there may be prize winning information that wins a jackpot again (continues to win during the reservation) during the reservation at the end of the jackpot. The result of determining whether or not the received prize information includes jackpot winning information, and whether or not there is a possibility that new prize winning information will be stored during the jackpot (whether the number of pending balls is the upper limit or not) ) is determined, and the pending rank is selected. Also, when the jackpot is won, if the number of pending balls is "0", there is no winning information, so the pending rank "1" is set without using the pending rank selection table 222b.

As described above, in this control example, when selecting the effect to be executed during the jackpot, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of pending balls, and the content of the winning information, that is, , and the result of the judgment of suitability. Based on the reserved rank selected here, an effect to be executed during the jackpot is selected in the processing of S3406, which will be described later.

By configuring in this manner, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls, and the contents of the winning information, that is, the winning/failing determination result, are executed during the big win. In addition to the effect of congratulating the player for winning the big win, the effect of suggesting the contents of the game after the end of the big win can be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the effect executed during the jackpot is configured to refer to the reservation rank selected by the above-described content. , The type of variation pattern and the transition of the game state (probability variable state, time saving state, normal state) (game state that can be determined when all the variations of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved ball are completed) Suspended rank based on information such as may be selected.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-described pending rank, the type of jackpot being executed this time, the number of times the winning of the jackpot is continued within a predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is within 50 times), and the player's advantage It is also possible to use the so-called number of consecutive games, such as the number of times a jackpot has been won while the game state is continuing, or the operation information indicating the details of the player's operation on the operation means. As a result, more various effects can be executed during the jackpot.

In addition, in this control example, the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-described pending rank is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 86(a)). The mode is not limited to this as long as the player can grasp the content during the big win, and the entire main display area Dm is used to execute a common big win production, and a partial area of the main display area Dm is executed. It may be possible to execute the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-described reservation rank as a secondary effect executed using , or a device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub display device, a lamp device, frame of pachinko machine 10, voice output device). As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player the contents of the game after the end of the big win based on the pending rank while standardizing the production for showing that the big win has been won (the production for showing that the big win is in progress). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the big win is in progress in an easy-to-understand manner, and to execute an effect that gives the player expectations after the big win is over.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description is continued. In the process of S3406, based on the read reservation rank and the value of the first effect counter 223y1, the effect during the big win is read by referring to the effect selection table 222c during the big win (S3406). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect during the jackpot read this time is an additional effect (S3407), and when it is determined that it is an additional effect (S3407: Yes), the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3408). , sets a display jackpot middle effect command corresponding to the read jackpot middle effect (S3409), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S3407, when it is determined that the effect during the jackpot read this time is not the additional effect (S3407: No), the process of S3408 is skipped and the process of S3409 described above is performed.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3304). Here, when the round number command is received (S3304: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3305), and then it is determined whether the addition effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306 ).

Here, if the add-on effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306: Yes), at the timing when a new round is started (that is, at the timing when the round number command is received), the process for the add-on effect is executed. Since it is necessary to do so, the processing during the addition effect is executed (S3307), then the display addition effect command is set (S3308), and the display round number command is set according to the number of rounds extracted this time (S3309 ), the process ends. The additional effect command for display and the number-of-rounds command for display set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (see FIG. 136) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 ( S3102), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Here, the contents of the process during addition effect (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process during addition effect (S3307). This process during the addition effect (S3307) is a process executed when the effect for addition is selected as the effect during the jackpot in the above-described effect setting process during the jackpot (see FIG. 143). This is a process for selecting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86(a)) displayed when the game is being executed.

This process during the addition effect (S3307) is a process executed when it is determined that the round number command is received (S3304: Yes) in the hit related command process (see FIG. 142). That is, during the jackpot, every time a new round is started, the above-described process during the addition effect is executed. As a result, the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the progress of the fixed round number display mode Dm4 and the running round number display mode Dm3 already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be selected.

In addition, in this control example, the number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) set for the jackpot being executed is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a as the number of rounds to be displayed in the additional effect. It is configured to add up the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) of the jackpot. In this control example configured as described above, by executing the processing during the addition effect (S3307) every time a new round is started, the winning information newly stored during the big win corresponds to the big win. Even if there is, it is possible to immediately execute an additional performance reflecting the contents thereof, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

When the process during addition effect (S3307) is executed, first, the number of big winning rounds stored in the big winning information storage area 223f, that is, the number of rounds set for the currently running big winning is read out (S3501), and then Then, all winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S3502). Then, it is determined whether or not there is prize winning information corresponding to a big win in the prize winning information (S3503).

Here, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the number of rounds read by the process of S3501 (the number of rounds set for the jackpot currently being executed) and the winning information A summing process (S3508 to S3511) for summing the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot included in the sum is executed. Note that the addition processing will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the big hit (S3503: No), the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 The number of displayed rounds (“10” in the case of FIG. 86(a)) displayed as the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is read out (S3504), and the number of winning rounds read out in the process of S3501 is read out in the process of S3506. The displayed number of rounds is subtracted (S3505). By the processing of S3505, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds displayed so as to be recognized by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds to be internally executed, that is, the number of rounds The number of unrecognized rounds (number of remaining rounds) is calculated.

Next, based on the number of remaining rounds calculated in the process of S3505 and the presence or absence of winning information corresponding to the jackpot, the number of display rounds is selected by referring to the number of addition selection table 222d, and stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223g. (S3506), superimposed display processing is executed (S3507), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that there is prize winning information corresponding to the big win (S3503: Yes), the addition process is executed. In this summation process, first, the number of rounds corresponding to the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3508), and then the number of rounds read in the process of S3501 and the number of rounds read in the process of S3508 are combined. is calculated (S3509).

Next, the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the display round number displayed as the fixed round number display mode Dm4 in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 (Fig. 86 ( In the case of a), "10") is read out (S3510), and the number of display rounds read out in the process of S3510 is subtracted from the total number of rounds added up in the process of S3509 (S3511). By the processing of S3511, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds displayed so as to be recognized by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds to be internally executed, that is, the number of rounds The number of unrecognized rounds (number of remaining rounds) is calculated. Then, after executing the processing of S3506 described above, the overlay display processing is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, among the processing during the addition effect (S3307) described above, the processing of S3501 to S3511 is a process for setting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10 during execution of the effect for addition, and is the process for setting the display mode of the round number display mode Dm10. As described above, it is configured to be executed when a new round is started (a new round game is started) during the jackpot. Thereby, the processing for setting the display mode of the effect related to the number of rounds can be executed at the optimum timing.

Note that the execution timing and processing details of the processing for setting the display mode to be displayed as the round number display mode Dm10 are not limited to the contents of this control example. is started, by configuring to execute the processing during the addition effect, the winning information determination processing (S3502, S3503 processing) and the display round number setting processing (S3504 to S3506, SS3510 to S3506 process) and are integrally executed, the above-described winning information determination process is executed in advance at the timing of receiving the winning information command, the result is temporarily stored, and the stored result is used. may be configured to execute the display round number setting process described above.

In addition, in this control example, when the round number command is received (S3304 in FIG. 142: Yes), it is configured to execute the processing during the addition effect, but during the round game (interval period), the addition effect It may be configured to execute intermediate processing. By configuring in this way, during the jackpot in which various control processes are executed, during the round game (interval period) in which the amount of processing is relatively small, it is possible to execute the processing during the additional effect, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the processing load of

In this case, the number of rounds to be executed next is discriminated based on the winning information command already received, and the above-described processing during the addition effect is executed based on the discriminated result. good. Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured to execute the processing during the additional effect each time a new round is started, but when a specific round (for example, an even round, a multiple of 5 round) is started Alternatively, a lottery may be conducted to determine whether or not to execute the process during the addition effect, and the process may be executed based on the result of the lottery.

In this control example, the processing of S3501 to S3511 is executed each time a new round is started. A process for determining whether information has been added may be provided, and if no new winning information has been added, the processes of S3503 to S3511 may be skipped. This makes it possible to reduce the processing that is executed each round.

Returning to FIG. 144, the description continues. When the processing of S3506 is finished, next, the additional display processing (S3507), which is the processing for executing the effect display related to the number of display rounds set in the processing of S3506, is executed, and this processing is finished. Here, the superimposed display processing (S3507) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the contents of the superimposed display processing (S3507). This addition display process (S3507) is a process for setting a display command for the addition effect corresponding to the number of display rounds (see S3508 in FIG. 144) determined in the process during the addition effect (see FIG. 144). In this control example, when the number of rounds during the jackpot reaches a predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5, i.e., 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), the number of displayed rounds (fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4 ) is updated, and when the number of rounds (i.e., 4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) is one before the predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5), the next round (the predetermined number of rounds n ), an indication effect (see FIG. 85(b)) suggesting that the number of displayed rounds (fixed number of rounds display mode Dm4) will be updated is executed.

When the additional display processing (S3507) is executed, first, the number of rounds n (specifically, 5 rounds, 10 rounds) at which the current round number is the update timing of the round number (the timing of displaying the confirmed round number in addition) , a multiple of 5 such as 15 rounds), which is the number of rounds n−1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601). If it is determined that the number of rounds this time is n-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: Yes), an omen effect for displaying the fixed number of rounds in the next round (Fig. 85 (b) )), a corresponding display selection command is set (S3602), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, based on the number of display rounds stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223g, the effect mode of the aforementioned precursor effect (see FIG. 85(b)) is set. When the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is 10 or more, a production mode in which the number of "treasure chests" displayed during the omen production is reduced (see FIG. 86(b)) or A presentation mode (see FIG. 86(b)) is displayed in which the display mode of the "treasure box" displayed is gorgeous. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict the effect contents of the additional display effect at the time when the precursor effect is executed.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the precursor presentation is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g. It may be configured to set the performance mode of the portent performance based on the number of rounds (the number of rounds including the number of rounds set for the jackpot within the suspension when the on-hold consecutive game is confirmed). As a result, the player can predict the number of rounds internally determined based on the performance mode of the sign performance and the performance mode of the additional performance for adding the number of displayed rounds, and is executed during the big win. You can keep them interested in the performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, by varying the display mode of the "treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" displayed during the omen effect, the player can see the future development of the additional effect that is executed during the big win. However, the display mode for other configurations may be changed, for example, the display of an "arrow (selected image Dm8)" for selecting a "treasure chest (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" The aspect (for example, color and size) may be varied, and the sound and LED lighting pattern may be varied. Also, it may be configured such that the periods during which the portent effect is executed are varied.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3601, if it is determined that the number of rounds this time is not n-1 rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: No), next the number of rounds this time is n rounds ( 5th round, 10th round, 15th round) is determined (S3603), and if it is determined to be the nth round (5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603: Yes), the number of displayed rounds is stored. An additional display command for display corresponding to the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is set (S3604), and this process is terminated. Also, in the processing of S3603, if it is determined that the number of rounds this time is not the n-th round (S3603: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

The superimposed display command for display set in the processing of S3604 described above is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 is performed. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the additional display command for display, it displays the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the content of the command on the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in this control example, the number of display rounds set in the process of adding effect during a specific round (the number of rounds n) is displayed (the display mode of the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is varied (added)). However, the display mode of the determined round number display mode Dm4 may be varied (added) at other timings. The lottery means may execute a lottery each time a new round starts, and set the timing for executing an effect for additionally updating the fixed round number display mode Dm4 based on the lottery result. As a result, it is possible to make the timing of updating the contents of the determined round number display mode Dm4 irregular, and to make the player continue to play the game during the big win while giving the player a sense of anticipation.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. In the processing of S3306, when it is determined that the addition production flag 223h is not ON (is OFF) (S3306: No), since there is no need to execute the processing during addition production (S3307), the processing of S3307 and S3308 is executed. It skips and executes the process of S3309 mentioned above, and ends this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3304 that the round number command has not been received (S3304: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S3310). When it is determined that an ending command has been received (S3310: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S3311), a jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3312), and this process ends. The ending command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

Here, the post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312) executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the contents of the post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312). This post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312) is a process for continuing to execute the effect executed during the big win in the period in which the big win is completed and the variation of the special symbol is executed. This is a process for setting a post-jackpot production corresponding to the executed production.

When the post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312) is executed, first, the game state after the jackpot is read from the information stored in the state storage area 223e (S3701), and then the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether the effect executed during the current jackpot is an additional effect (S3702). If it is determined that it is an additional effect (S3702: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is prize winning information about winning a jackpot in the prize winning information storage area 223a (whether or not the game is to be held) (S3703).

In the process of S3703, when it is determined that there is winning information that a jackpot has been won (S3703: Yes), a post-jackpot command for display additional effect is set (S3704), and this process is terminated. That is, in the processing of S3703, if it is determined that there is winning information that the jackpot has been won (S3703: Yes), all the total number of rounds calculated in the processing of S3505 of the processing during the addition effect of FIG. 144 (S3307) is displayed. Since it is not displayed as the number of rounds, the additional effect will continue until the next jackpot is executed (until the change in the special pattern corresponding to the winning information including the jackpot information ends). Set the command after the extra production jackpot for display so that it will be displayed.

The post-jackpot command for display that is set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136). , and transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the command after the display additional effect jackpot, while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 starts the display for continuously executing the additional effect (Fig. 88(a)). By configuring in this way, even after the end of the big win, the performance executed during the big win can be continuously executed.

In addition, in this control example, the display round number (fixed round number display mode Dm4) is partially displayed (for example, 5 rounds) for the number of rounds set for one big win (for example, 15 rounds). Since it is configured, from the production contents of the additional production displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to determine whether the additional production is being executed during one big win or between a plurality of big wins (the first big win is It is difficult to grasp whether it is an additional effect executed during a special symbol fluctuation period executed between the end of the game and the start of the second big win. By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the number of times of winning big wins or the number of rounds set for one big win while the performance for addition is continuously executed, in an incomprehensible manner to the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while making the player expect that the additional effect will continue for a long time (the big win will continue for a long time).

Returning to FIG. 146, the description continues. In the processing of S3703, if it is determined that there is no winning information that the jackpot has been won (S3703: No), all the total number of rounds calculated in the processing of S3505 of the processing during the addition effect (S3307) of FIG. 144 is the number of display rounds , the add effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S3705), the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3706), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3702, if it is determined that the effect executed during the current jackpot is not the additional effect (S3702: No), then the effect executed during the current jackpot is the continuous winning effect. (see FIG. 84) (S3707). Here, when it is determined that it is the effect for continuous winning (S3707: Yes), a command after the big win for continuous winning effect for display is set (S3708), and this processing is finished.

The post-jackpot command for display continuous winning effect set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the command after the display continuous win effect after the jackpot, the third symbol display device 81 executes the variable display of the third symbol, and starts the display of continuously executing the continuous win effect. do. By configuring in this way, even after the end of the big win, the performance executed during the big win can be continuously executed.

In the processing of S3707, if it is determined that it is not a continuous winning effect (S3707: No), that is, if the normal winning effect is executed during the big win, the game state after the end of the big win is a variable probability or a time saving state. It is determined whether there is (S3709), and if it is determined that it is a probability variable or time saving state (S3709: Yes), the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3710), and the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000" It sets (S3711) and ends this processing.

Here, the contents executed in the processes of S3710 and S3711 will be described. In this control example, the effect during the big win is selected with reference to the effect selection table 222c during the big win shown in FIG. 115(c). As shown in FIG. 115(c), the normal winning effect is the state of all the pending ranks "1" to "4", that is, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured as an effect that can be executed both when the (reserved pattern) contains the information that the jackpot is won (in the case of holding the reservation) and when it is not included (in the case of not holding the reservation). there is

Then, when the game state after the jackpot in which the production for the normal win is executed is the variable probability or the time-saving state, the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and the ending display displayed during the jackpot is changed to a predetermined value after the jackpot. The display is continued until the conditions are met (see FIG. 89(a)). By configuring in this way, the variation of the special symbols is executed while the ending display of the jackpot is displayed, and when the jackpot is won, the fact that the jackpot is won is displayed on the ending display screen (Fig. 89 ( b) see). As a result, even when the performance for normal win is executed, expectations can be given to the performance during the reservation, and the performance during the big win can be continued and executed in the case of the reservation.

Furthermore, in this control example, as a period during which the jackpot ending display is continued even after the jackpot ends, the number of times the special symbol changes is four times or four seconds after the jackpot ends until any condition is established. The period is set, and in the process of S3711, by setting the value of "4000" to the elapsed time counter 223k, the time elapsed after the end of the big hit (after the special symbol can be changed) are counted.

In this way, the period for executing the jackpot ending display is not set based on the number of variations of the special symbol (for example, 4 times), but is set based on the elapsed time after the jackpot ends. Even when the special symbols are not varied after the end (when the special symbols are not reserved), the jackpot ending display can be performed only for a limited period.

In addition, in this control example, when a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses after the end of the big win without the variation of the special symbol being executed after the end of the big win, the demo screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. is configured to be displayed.

In the processing of S3709, if it is determined that the game state after the end of the big win is not the probability variable or the time saving state (S3709: No), the effect executed during the big win during the special symbol fluctuation period executed after the big win is continued. The value in the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3712) without executing the process of displaying the number of rounds to display, and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. In the processing of S3310, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S3310: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S3313), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description continues. In the processing of S3211, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received (S3213), and if it is determined that the state command has been received (S3213: Yes), the current game state is extracted from the received command and stored in the state storage area 223e (S3214).

Incidentally, in the process of S3214, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main controller 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 is received, the current game state Separately, a process of storing the game state set after the end of the jackpot is executed. By configuring in this way, the state command indicating the current game state is distinguished from the state designation command indicating the game state (planned game state) set when a predetermined condition is established (when the jackpot ends). can be stored as After the jackpot is completed, a state command indicating the current game state is received. At that time, the content of the state command indicating the current game state and the content of the state designation command indicating the scheduled game state are combined. It is also possible to provide determination means for determining whether or not they match, and to determine whether or not the game state is appropriately set based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress fraudulent behavior such as illegally changing the game state after the end of the big win to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

In the process of S3213, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3213: No), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S3216), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

By this processing, commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S3114). This variable display setting process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process (S4014), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3801). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3801: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S3813. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is ON (S3801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S3802), and then in the processing of S3203 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 140) , the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 .

Next, it is determined whether the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3803), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3803: Yes), extension management processing is executed (S3804), and S3811 is executed. Go to processing. The extension management process (S3804) is a process for managing the end timing of the extension display effect for continuing (extending) the ending display during the big win even after the end of the big win. This extension management process (S3804) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, if it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3803: No), then the game stored in the state storage area 223e Information indicating the state is read out, and it is determined whether the current game state is a variable probability or a time saving state (S3805). When it is determined that the variable probability or the time saving state (S3805: Yes), the continuous effect setting process is executed (S3806), and then the process proceeds to S3811. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) (see FIG. 91) executed in the variable probability or time saving state. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3805, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the probability variation or the time saving state (S3805: No), based on the extracted variation pattern, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing the expectation performance. Determine (S3807). In the process of S3807, if it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the expectation effect (S3807: Yes), the expectation effect setting process is executed (S3808), and the process proceeds to S3811. The expectation level effect setting process (S3808) is a process of setting the effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 102) for suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. A detailed description of the degree-of-expectation setting processing will be given later with reference to FIG. 151 .

On the other hand, in the process of S3807, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute the expectation effect (S3807: No), the current variation pattern executes the countdown effect based on the extracted variation pattern. (S3809), and if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a countdown effect (S3809: Yes), a countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, and S3811 to process. The countdown effect setting process (S3810) informs the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed to suggest that the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit is high during the variable display of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect mode of the effect (refer to FIG. 98) for playing. This countdown effect setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3809, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute the countdown effect (S3809: No), or if the processing of S3804, S3806, S3808, S3810 is completed, the extracted variation Based on the pattern, the current variation display mode is determined from the variation pattern table 222a of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3811), and the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S3812).

After completing the processing of S3812, it is next determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S3813). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3813: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display setting is performed. The process (S3114) is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3813: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3814), and then in the processing of S3206 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 140), The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3815).

Next, in the process of S3815, it is determined whether the acquired stop type is a jackpot type indicating a jackpot (S3816), and if it is determined to be a jackpot type (S3816: Yes), acquired in the jackpot information storage area 223f Hit information corresponding to the type of jackpot (number of rounds of jackpot, information on game state set after jackpot) is stored (S3817), and the process proceeds to S3818. On the other hand, in the process of S3816, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot type (S3816: No), the process proceeds to S3818 as it is.

In the process of S3818, the stop type extracted by the process of S3815 is set (S3818), and based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set (S3819). ), the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, the extension management process (S3804) executed in the variable display setting process (S3114 in FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the content of the extension management process (S3804). In this extension management process (S3804), a process for managing whether or not the termination condition relating to the number of times of variation of the special symbol is met among the termination conditions for the jackpot ending display that is continuously displayed after the jackpot ends is executed.

When the extension management process (S3804) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223j is 0 (S3901). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is 0 (S3901: Yes), that is, if it is time to set the first fluctuation display after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the fluctuation number counter The value of 223j is set to "5" as a display termination condition (display extension termination condition) for the jackpot ending display (S3902), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3901, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S3901: No), that is, the second to fourth times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. If it is time to set the second variable display, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable number counter 223j (S3903), and then it is determined whether the value of the variable number counter 223j is "1" (S3904). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is "1" (S3904: Yes), that is, it is determined that it is time to set the fifth rotation display after the display extension flag 223i is turned on. If this is the case, the display extension flag 223i is set to off (S3905), and the present process is terminated because the condition "up to 4 special symbol variations" is established, which is one of the conditions for ending the display extension. do.

In the processing of S3904, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is not "1" (is "2" or more) (S3904: No), an extension effect command for display is set (S3906), and this processing is executed. finish. By configuring in this way, while the end display of the big win is being extended and executed, if the number of times of variation of the special symbol satisfies the end condition of the display extension, the variation corresponding to the next special symbol variation The display extension flag 223i is set to OFF at the timing when the display is executed, and the extension effect (ending display) can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ending display from ending during the variable display of the special symbols and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In this control example, when the probability variation or time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, by using a dedicated variation pattern table (special variation pattern table 202d4), during a predetermined period (1 to 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot) , a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (see FIG. 109). As a result, if the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit (4) after the end of the jackpot, the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols (4 rotations) rather than the elapsed time (4 seconds) as the end condition of the extension effect The termination condition based on is satisfied first.

Therefore, during the period in which the ending display of the jackpot is extended and executed, many special symbols are varied, and in order to see the special performance (see FIG. 89(b)), the game is always played with reserved balls secured. can be performed, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Regarding the management based on the elapsed time, which is one of the end conditions of the extended effect, the effect update process ( S3112). The effect update process (S3112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the continuous effect setting process (S3806) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (S3806). This continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) executed during the variable probability or the time saving state. Specifically, as a continuous effect (battle effect), the effect mode of the final mode effect (battle reach) that informs whether the probability change or the time saving state ends, and the final mode effect (battle reach) are executed. The effect mode of the effect (pre-battle effect) up to is stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 based on the determination result of the special symbol, the variation pattern (variation time), and the duration of the pre-battle effect. A setting process is executed with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value secondary selection table 222g, and the final mode selection table 222h.

This control example is configured such that the above-described continuation effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed until the variable probability or the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, when the variable probability or time saving state continues for a long period of time, each production (for example, It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the performance of increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value).

In addition, when the continuous production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, that is, when the final state production (battle reach) occurs at the timing when the game state does not shift from the probability change or the time saving state, the final state production ( "Draw" is selected as the production result of the battle reach), and the pre-battle production starts again. When trying to suppress the change, the final state production (battle reach with victory or defeat) other than the final state production (battle reach with victory or defeat) for indicating that the game state is shifted is frequently executed. , there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the final mode presentation.

On the other hand, in this control example, the elapsed period (the number of fluctuations of special symbols) after the last final mode production (tie battle reach) was executed last time is measured, and the measurement result is within a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol is less than 6 times), the final mode effect (tie battle ready-to-win) with no winning or losing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting tired of the performance due to frequent execution of the draw battle reach in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured to suggest to the player the success/failure determination result in the suspension of the special symbols and the remaining period of the probability variation or time saving state depending on the production mode of the draw battle reach. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the draw battle reach, and it is possible to enhance the production effect of the entire continuous production.

In addition, in this control example, the number of times the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed is measured, and the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the measurement result. As a result, when the variable probability or the time saving state continues for a long period of time and the continuous production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, the continuous production (battle production) of different production modes can be executed, and the player can quickly start the production. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Here, to briefly explain the processing executed in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) of this control example, first, in this variable display, the battle reach is executed as the continuous effect, or before the battle. A process for determining whether or not to execute an effect (execution effect selection process) is executed, and based on the determination result of the execution effect selection process, a process for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode setting process) or , a process for setting the effect mode of battle reach (second (final) effect mode setting process) are executed.

As described above, in this control example, each time the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is determined whether the pre-battle effect or the battle ready-to-win effect is to be executed in this variable display. It is possible to smoothly switch the presentation from the pre-battle presentation to the battle reach.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a winning variation (variation of winning a special symbol jackpot) (S4001). Here, if it is determined that it is not a hit variation (S4001: No), next, whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (a variation pattern that can execute Battle Reach) ) (S4002), and if it is determined to be a variation pattern of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the duration counter 223p is 6 or more (S4003).

In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the duration counter 223p is not 6 or more (less than 6) (S4003: No), it is determined whether the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004). , When it is determined that the continuous production flag 223r is not ON (S4004: No), that is, when the continuous production is not executed, the continuous production mode is selected based on the continuous production mode selection table 222e (S4005). , The selected continuous production mode is stored in the continuous production mode storage area 223m (S4006), the value of the continuous production setting counter 223q is incremented by 1 (S4007), and the continuous production flag 223r is set to ON (S4008).

If it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223r is not turned on in the processing of S4004 described above, if the first variable display is set after the variable probability or time saving state is set as the gaming state, or the previous variable display is the final This is a mode production (battle ready-to-win), and a case where a new continuous production (pre-battle production) is set in the current variable display.

In such a case, in the process of S4005, an effect mode (effect mode) of the pre-battle effect to be executed from the current variable display is selected based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222e. Here, as shown in FIG. 116(b), the continuous effect mode selection table 222e contains the number of times the continuous effect is repeatedly executed (the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q) and the winning stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Based on the information and the value of the third effect counter 223y3, a continuous effect mode (mode 1 to mode 5) is set, and the selected continuous effect is displayed until the next final mode effect (battle reach) is executed. A pre-battle production based on the mode is executed.

In this control example, when the continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is prefetched, and the continuous effect mode is set based on the result of the prefetching. Although a configuration is used in which the process of setting the variable display mode is executed based on the continuous effect mode set each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is prefetched. Any configuration other than that used in this control example may be used as long as it executes an effect based on the look-ahead result. For example, when the continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF, The stored winning information is read in advance, and the display mode of the variable display to be executed this time to the variable display corresponding to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are set in advance based on the result of the reading. It may be configured to

On the other hand, in the process of S4004, when it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004: Yes), or when the process of S4008 is terminated, the value of the duration counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4009). . As a result, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q can be varied when the continuous effect mode is selected next time, and the continuous selection of the same continuous effect mode can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, it is suppressed that the same continuous production mode is continuously selected, and at a specific timing (the timing when the value of the continuous production setting counter 223q is 1), a specific condition (holding hit ) is established, in order to be able to execute a specific effect (continuous effect mode 5), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is added by 1, but the same continuous effect mode continues. Other configurations may be used to achieve the purpose of suppressing selection by

For example, the value to which the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is added may be determined by lottery (for example, a lottery value from -5 to 5). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the regularity of selecting the continuous effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q may be increased based on the operation result of the frame button 22 by the player. The value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q may be added based on the number of times the jackpot has been won consecutively without being hit) or the lottery result of the special symbol when the continuation effect mode is selected.

After the process of S4009 is completed, next, a continuation value setting process is executed (S4010). Details of the continuation value setting process executed in the process of S4010 will be described later with reference to FIG. A display effect command corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the continuation value setting process of S4010 is set (S4011), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4011, an effect command indicating the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as a pre-battle effect among the continuous effects. Specifically, the display mode corresponding to the continuation effect mode selected in the process of S4005 and the display mode corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the process of S4010 are collectively set as a display effect command. .

The display effect command set in the process of S4011 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. , and transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display effect command as the variation pattern command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a pre-battle effect.

The processing from S4001 to S4003 in the continuous effect setting processing (S3806) described above corresponds to the execution effect selection process, and the processing from S4004 to S4011 is the process of setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode setting process).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4001, when it is determined that the current variation is a winning variation (S4001: Yes), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is reset (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4013. Also, in the process of S4003, if it is determined that the value of the duration counter is 6 or more (S4003: Yes), that is, if the pre-battle effect continues for 6 special symbol variations or more, the process proceeds to S4013. Transition.

In the process of S4013, the performance mode of battle reach (final mode) is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (S4013), and the corresponding display final mode command is set (S4014). The final mode command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display final mode command, the third symbol display device 81 performs battle reach using the continuation value (HP value) displayed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 93(a)). is executed. By configuring in this way, the effect can be switched from the pre-battle effect to the battle ready-to-win effect without making the player feel uncomfortable.

When the processing of S4014 is finished, next, the continuous production flag 223r is set to OFF (S4015), the continuous production mode storage area 223m is cleared (S4016), and the value of the duration counter 223p is cleared to 0 (S4017). , the process ends.

As described above, in this control example, a pre-battle effect is executed as a variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations that are executed while the game state is set to a variable probability or a short time state, and a specific one It is configured to execute the final mode production (battle reach) for special pattern fluctuations (hit fluctuations in special patterns and loss fluctuations in which the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected), but in addition to that Also, for example, it may be configured to execute the final mode effect (battle reach) using the variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (results of winning/failure determination in suspension and variation patterns) (based on the result of prefetching), the production mode of the final mode (battle ready-to-win) is displayed in each variable display. It is preferable to configure the setting so as to correspond to the . Thereby, it is possible to smoothly execute the final mode effect (battle ready-to-win) which is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

Also, when using a configuration that executes the final mode production (battle reach) across a plurality of special symbol variations, all the display modes displayed in the final mode production (battle reach) are targeted. It may be configured to be set in advance for each special pattern variation, or only the production contents of the battle reach, that is, the attack pattern and the production result are set in advance, and the continuous value (HP value) increase/decrease display control is performed. may be configured to be set each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the types of final mode effects (battle ready-to-win) preset based on the look-ahead result.

Next, the continuation value setting process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process (S4010). This continuous value setting process (S4010) is a process for setting the value of the continuous value (HP value in the battle effect) that is variably displayed during the continuous effect. In this control example, when setting the value of this continuous value (the value of the continuous value after variable), the value selected based on the lottery of the special symbols (the value of the hundred's place of the HP of the opponent), and the production It is set so as to add up the value selected based on the lottery (tenths place value of the opponent's HP). This makes it possible to increase the variation of displayed continuation values.

When the continuation value setting process (S4010) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is time to change the continuation value (S4101). Although detailed description is omitted, in S4101, based on the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the sound ramp control device 113 continues. Determine if it is a pattern that changes the value.

In this control example, as described above, a configuration is used in which the timing for changing the continuous value (HP value) is determined based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the sound ramp control device 113. In addition, a measurement means is provided for measuring the number of times that a variation pattern that does not change the continuous value is continuously selected, and when the number of times measured by the measurement means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), forced If the number of times measured by the above-mentioned measuring means is a specific number (for example, once), change regulation means that does not change the continuous value regardless of the extracted fluctuation pattern. You can set it. By configuring in this way, the continuous value (HP value) is not changed at all during the continuous effect (during the pre-battle effect) and the player gets tired of the effect (pre-battle effect), and the continuous value is frequently increased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which (the HP value) is changed and the content of the presentation becomes difficult to understand.

Further, the continuation value change timing may be set based on the operation result of the player's operation of the frame button 22 or the result of prefetching the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Further, the continuous value change timing is set based on the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the continuous value (HP value) selected from the continuous value main selection table 222f. It is also possible to change the frequency of

If it is determined in the process of S4101 that it is not the time to change the continuation value (S4101: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to change the continuation value (S4101: Yes), the value in the hundreds place of the continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f (S4102), and the selected continuation value (continuation value The continuous value selected based on the main selection table 222f) is stored in the continuous value storage area 223n (S4103). Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) that is executed when the continuation value changes is set to the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, that is, the continuation value main It is configured to refer to and set the continuation value selected based on the selection table 222f.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected in the process of S4102 is 200 or more (S4104). Based on the continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117(b)), the effect value (tens place value) is selected (S4105), and if it is determined to be less than 200 (S4104; No), the second Based on the continuous value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)), the effect value (tens digit value) is selected (S4106). A continuous value is calculated by summing the value selected in the process of S4102 and the value selected in the process of S4103 (S4104).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 117(b) and 117(c), the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 provide the selected effect value (tens place value). ) are configured differently, the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 defines the range of selectable effect values as "-20 to +20", and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is selectable. The range of effect values is defined as "-10 to 0". That is, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is configured so that a positive value (plus value) is not selected as the effect value. This is because, in the pre-battle production, for example, when "0" is selected as the continuation value (the value in the hundreds place) based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, internally (in the continuation value storage area 223n Although "0" is set as a stored value, the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not "0" (for example, "20 ”) This is a configuration for suppressing execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort due to the value being displayed.

In this way, the value of the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f is discriminated, and the range of selectable effect values is changed based on the discrimination result. In the normal mode (continuation value is 200 or more), the value of the continuation value (HP value) can be varied in both positive and negative directions, increasing the variation of effects and increasing the continuation value. If it is less than 200, the value of the continuous value (HP value) is changed only in the negative direction, thereby suppressing contradictions in the presentation.

Then, after the processing of S4105 or S4106 is completed, the continuous value (value in the hundreds place) selected in the processing of S4102 and the effect value (value in the tens place) selected in either S4105 or S4106 are are added to calculate a continuous value (HP value) (S4107), a display sum command corresponding to the calculated continuous value (HP value) is set (S4108), and this processing ends.

As described above, in this control example, variable management of the continuation value (HP value) that is variably displayed (increase or decrease display) while the continuation effect is being executed is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The displayed continuation value (HP value), that is, the continuation value (hundreds' value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value (HP value) selected based on the continuation value secondary selection table 222g 10's digit) and , but only the continuation value (100's digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f. By configuring in this way, the number of patterns for performing variable management of the continuous value (HP value) can be reduced with respect to the display pattern of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can reduce the processing load.

Furthermore, in this control example, even if variable management of the continuation value (HP value) is performed using only the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value (HP value ) and the display contents of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are configured so as not to be different, so that the processing load is reduced while the continuation effect is suitable. can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the sound lamp control device 113 of this control example, a continuous value is selected based on the continuous value main selection table 222f and the continuous value sub-selection table 222g, and information (command) indicating the selected continuous value is displayed on the display controller. 114. Then, only the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, and the continuation value increase/decrease management is repeatedly executed based on the stored continuation value.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 164, but in this control example, the display mode of the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, the attack pattern display mode to be executed and a variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) are set and displayed by the display control device 114 . In other words, the display control device 114 has an area (total value storage area) for storing the summed continuation value when the display control device 114 receives a command related to the continuation value output from the sound lamp control device 113. and calculating the difference between the total value stored in the total value storage area and the total value calculated from the command related to the continuation value received this time, and attack pattern display mode based on the calculated difference value; A variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) is set and displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferably execute the continuous effect while reducing the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a continuation value sub-selection table 222g for selecting the continuation value for effect, and the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to select the continuation value for effect. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with a configuration for selecting a continuation value for effect (for example, a continuation value sub-selection table 222g). By configuring in this way, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

In this control example, when a continuation value is selected from the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value secondary selection table 222g is also referred to to select the continuation value for effect. Other configurations may be used. For example, even if no continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f (for example, S4104 in FIG. 149: No), the continuation value for effect ( It may be configured to increase or decrease only the tens place value). As a result, it is possible to finely set the increase/decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In this control example, only values that are less than the current continuation value (the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n) are selected as the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that a value increased from the current continuous value is selected. In this case, when a value increased from the current continuation value is selected, as the effect mode of the continuation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value is selected instead of the normal attack effect. It is preferable to configure so that a recovery effect for recovering (HP value) is executed. In this way, by using the configuration for increasing the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect, it is possible to increase the variation of the increase/decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, It is possible to prevent the continuous value (HP value) from reaching the lower limit (for example, “0”) even if the value (HP value) is frequently varied (increased or decreased).

In this control example, the HP of the character is used as the continuation value that is variably displayed during the continuation effect. ) is set to the player based on a variable value. The number of operations performed (times) may be used.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is "0", the continuation value (HP value) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is In order to prevent a value greater than "0" from being set, if the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), Although it is configured so that a positive value is not selected as the continuation value, other configurations may be used. may be configured so as not to select a continuation value for effect (selection using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g).

Further, as in this control example, out of the different control devices (sound lamp control device 113 and display control device 114), the first control device (sound lamp control device 113) performs the process of setting rough presentation contents. In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly displayed by executing a process for setting a specific display mode of the effect in the second control device (display control device 114), the second control device (display control device 114) is output to the first control device (sound lamp control device 113), and then the first control device (sound lamp control device 113) performs processing for setting rough presentation contents. When executing, it is determined whether the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is within the allowable range, and if it is within the allowable range, the next performance content is set as it is. Execute the process, if it is out of the allowable range, correct the information about the rough effect content set at the time of setting the previous effect content, and based on the correction result, execute the processing to set the next effect content, When the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) has not been received at the timing of setting the next effect content, a process of postponing the timing of setting the next effect content is executed. It may be configured as

By configuring in this way, the next effect can be set in correspondence with the effect mode already displayed by the process executed by the second control device (display control device 114). The performance can be continuously executed without giving a sense of incompatibility. In this case, when it is determined that the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is outside the allowable range, the processing result is within a wider range than the error range set as the allowable range. It is determined whether it is within the limit range, and if the determination result is within the limit range, the effect can be set continuously by performing the above-mentioned correction, and if it is outside the limit range, the above-mentioned It is preferable to forcibly end the presentation without performing correction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the expectation effect setting process (S3808) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the expectation effect setting process (S3808). This expectation level effect setting process (S3808) changes the display mode of the expectation level display mode displayed during the special symbol change effect to determine whether or not the current special symbol change wins the jackpot. This is an effect suggested to the player (see FIGS. 102 and 103).

In this control example, three types of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 (see FIG. 102(a)) are displayed as the expectation degree effect in response to the passage of time of the special symbol variation. Then, an expectation increase mode Dk4 for changing one of the expectation level display modes to a display mode with a high expectation level is displayed, and any one of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed. Execute the production so that is variable. A display timing setting process for setting the timing at which the expectation degree increasing mode Dk4 is displayed is also executed.

Here, in this control example, since the three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 described above are configured to be displayed at different timings, depending on the timing at which the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is displayed, The target of the expectation level display mode whose display mode is variable can be changed according to the mode Dk4. As a result, even when the same expectation level rising mode Dk4 is used, it is possible to provide different presentation contents only by changing the timing of displaying the expectation level rising mode Dk4, thereby reducing the storage capacity of image data. can do.

In this case, only a still image (for example, a character image) having a small amount of image data may be displayed in accordance with the expectation level display mode that increases the expectation level. As a result, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation with a small amount of data.

Furthermore, in the present control example, display modes that serve as references for the three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are determined in advance according to the level of the expectation effect mode. As a result, it is possible to form a set of display modes of three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3, which are composed of a plurality of combinations, and to reduce the processing load of the display process. In addition, since the reference display mode (reference display mode) is determined according to the level of expectation rendering mode, it is possible to prevent the level of increase in the level of expectation from becoming biased.

In addition, the final display mode (the display mode that can be displayed after the completion of the expectation level performance) of the three types of expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 set based on the variation pattern, and the expectation level level are set according to the level. If there is a difference between the standard display mode and the standard display mode, the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is displayed when there is a difference in any of the expectation level display modes. The effect can be executed while expecting that the display mode of the degree-of-expectation display mode will change to a display mode showing a higher degree of expectation.

When the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) is executed, first, the current degree of expectation is selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i (S4201), and then the standard display mode is displayed based on the expectation degree effect selection table 222j. is selected (S4202). After selecting the expectation level presentation mode level, the display mode of each expectation level display mode predetermined for the expectation level presentation mode level and the actual expectation level presentation mode (each expectation level display set based on the variation pattern display mode) is extracted (S4203).

After completing the processing of S4203, it is determined whether there is a difference (S4204), and if it is determined that there is a difference, the difference is calculated for each expectation degree display mode (S4205), and based on the presence or absence of the calculated difference The display timing of the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 is determined (S4206). Next, the difference for each expectation degree display mode is summed up (S4207), the display contents (display mode, display timing) of the expectation level increase mode are determined based on the summed difference (S4208), and the expectation level effect is displayed. is set (S4209), and a high-display expectation level target mode notification command for informing the expectation level display mode targeted for the expectation level increase mode is set (S4210).

Specifically, the processing of S4208 described above will be described first. executed. Further, the difference discriminating means discriminates the degree of expectation display mode in which the difference occurs, determines a plurality of timings at which the degree of expectation display mode can be set based on the discrimination result, and selects one of the determined plurality of timings. , one timing is selected based on the degree of expectation selected by referring to the degree of expectation selection table 222i. As a result, the difference between the display content of the expectation level display mode set in the process of S4202 and the display content of the expectation level display mode set in the process of S4203 can be complemented by the expectation level increasing effect. Therefore, it is possible to set one timing to set the degree-of-expectation increase mode Dk4, so that variations of effects can be increased without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above example, the display mode of each expectation level display mode is determined first, and the content of the expectation level display mode Dk4 is set based on the value corresponding to the difference. , the display mode of the expectation level display mode Dk4 is set based on the expectation level selected by referring to the expectation level selection table 222i, and the display contents of each expectation level display mode are determined based on the set content. It may be configured as follows.

Next, referring to FIG. 152, the countdown effect setting process (S3810) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process (S3810). This countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the received variation pattern is the variation pattern for executing the countdown effect. A countdown effect that accurately informs the execution timing of the specific effect as a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the execution timing of the specific effect that is executed during the variable display. A process of setting a performance mode, a process of setting a performance mode of a sign performance for suggesting that the countdown performance will be executed, and a specific performance determination process of determining a specific performance to be the target of the countdown performance are executed. do.

When the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301). If it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4301: No), the suggestive effect can be executed among the plurality of specific effects included in the current variation pattern. One specific effect set in the timing is set (S4302). That is, among the specific effects (specific effects a, b (see FIG. 100(b))) other than the specific effect (specific effect c (see FIG. 101)) that is executed at a timing when it is difficult to execute the suggestive effect, set any.

When the processing of S4302 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (S4303). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (S4303: Yes), the indication display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of variation (Fig. 100(b) (see)) is set (S4304), and in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that has not been won (no) (S4303: No), as the start timing of the precursor effect A precursor display b (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) is set (S4305). That is, in this control example, the start timing of the suggestive effect suggesting the execution timing of the specific effect (the start timing of the premonition effect) can be set based on the lottery result of the variation (result of determination).

In the above-described example, based on the lottery result of the variation (result of judgment), the configuration is used to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the precursory effect), but based on other conditions It may be configured to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the omen effect), for example, the operation result of the player's frame button 22 or the determination of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is configured to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the predictive effect) based on the result (prefetch result), the time measurement result of the time measuring means (for example, real time clock) for measuring time, the past game history, etc. You can

In this way, in one variable display (variation pattern), a plurality of timings (suggestive production start possible points) that can be set as the start timing of the suggestive production (predictive production) are prepared, and the various conditions described above are satisfied. By using a configuration in which one of a plurality of suggestive performance start possible points is set based on the point, the degree of freedom of the suggestive performance to be executed can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the processing of S4304 or S4305, when the start timing of the precursor effect (suggestive effect) is set, next, a countdown period is set based on the start timing of the specific effect and the start timing of the predictive effect (suggestive effect) ( S4306).

This process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. specified effect), and in the process of S4304, the portent display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) is set as the start timing of the portent effect, the countdown period is 7 Seconds are set, and in the processing of S4302, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect in the current variable display is set to the specific effect a (specific effect to be executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), and in the process of S4305, the precursor effect is set. 100 (b)), the countdown period is set to 3 seconds.

Next, the timing for starting the countdown effect (display timing for the countdown effect) is calculated based on the start timing for the specific effect and the set countdown period, and the timing for starting the precursor effect and the display timing for the countdown effect are calculated. The interval, that is, the predictive effect period during which the predictive effect is executed is calculated (S4307). Next, in the processing of S4307, it is determined whether or not the calculated interval (predictive effect period) is within 15 seconds (S4308), and if it is within 15 seconds (S4308: Yes), the effect mode of the predictive effect (predictive effect (S4309), and when it is determined that the interval (prediction effect period) is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S4308: No), the long effect is set as the predictive effect mode. A mode is set (S4310).

When the processing of S4309 or S4310 is finished, the display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode (specific effect mode, countdown effect mode, portent effect mode) is set (S4311), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the portent setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301: Yes), that is, if the portent effect has already been executed (see S3210 in FIG. 141) in the winning information command process (see S3210 in FIG. If the precursor effect is executed across the variable display), the multiple variable effect setting process (S4312) is executed, then the above-described process of S4311 is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312). In this multiple variation effect setting process (S4312), the predictive effect continuation execution process for continuing the predictive effect executed during the previous variable display and the countdown effect for the specific effect corresponding to the predictive effect are set. and the processing to be performed.

When the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, first, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) is set as the specific effect (S4401), and the countdown period is set to 3 seconds (S4402). Then, a display precursor command is set (S4403). The display precursor command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display precursor command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the precursor effect simultaneously with the start of the current variation (including a time difference that the player cannot identify). By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the portent effect continuously from the previous variable display without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the display control device 114 of this control example has means for determining whether or not the portent effect is being displayed at the timing when the variable display ends (the port setting flag 223t is turned on from the sound lamp control device 113). means for determining that a command indicating the setting is received), and when the determination means determines that the precursor effect is being displayed at the timing when the variable display ends, the precursor effect being executed is determined. A performance data storage area for temporarily storing the data together with time data indicating the timing at which the variation ends; restart display means for restarting and displaying from the time when the variable display of is completed, and when the predictive effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a series of predictive effects (for example, the car to the destination The effect of running toward the target (see FIG. 98(a))) can be executed without interruption.

Furthermore, in this control example, since it is configured to output a display precursor command as a display variation pattern command indicating the variation display of the special symbol, a plurality of variations are straddled in correspondence with the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform display processing of the effect (continuous effect) executed in . Therefore, based on the processing of the conventional display control device 114, that is, the content of the variation pattern command received each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect mode of the period until the special symbol variation is completed is displayed. A continuous effect can be executed using the process, and the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, in such a configuration, when executing a continuous effect that continues the dynamic display even during the special symbol stop period (symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds)), based on the variation pattern command A continuous effect is set with a length obtained by adding the symbol fixing period described above to the calculated fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to smoothly execute the continuous performance even during the period during which the special symbols are fixed, that is, during the period between the continuous variation patterns.

It should be noted that a configuration other than this control example may be used as long as it is possible to execute a series of predictive effects without interruption when the predictive effects are executed across a plurality of fluctuations. Execute the precursor effect without setting the precursor effect period (end timing of the precursor effect) in the previous variable display, and set the end timing of the precursor effect based on the timing at which the countdown effect is executed in the current variable display. can be configured to

Returning to FIG. 153, the description continues. After completing the processing of S4403, next, the display countdown effect command is set (S4404), the precursor setting flag 223t is set to OFF (S4405), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the rendering update process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing effect update processing (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the variation of the special symbols. This is a process for setting effects.

When the effect update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is greater than 0 (S5101). If it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5101: No), that is, if the elapsed time is not counted, the process related to measuring the elapsed time is executed. It skips and shifts to the processing of S5108.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is greater than 0 (S5101: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the elapsed time counter 223k (S5102), and then the value of the elapsed time counter 223k after subtraction is It is determined whether it is 0 (S5103). Here, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S5103: No), the process proceeds directly to S5108.

In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is 0 (S5103: Yes), then the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (S5104), and the special symbols are currently fluctuating. It is determined whether there is (S5105). In the processing of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbols are not currently changing (S5105: No), a normal effect for display for notifying the display control device 114 of ending the extended display of the ending display of the jackpot A command is set (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently fluctuating (S5105: Yes), the process of S5106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5107. By configuring in this way, when the extension effect (effect of extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot) is executed after the end of the jackpot, the time condition (4 seconds elapsed), which is one of the termination conditions of the extension effect ) is established, if the special pattern does not fluctuate, the extension performance is immediately terminated, and if the special pattern fluctuates, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF, and the next special pattern fluctuation starts. When the extended performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the extended performance suddenly ends during the variation of the special symbols and confuse the player, and at the same time, complicated performance setting processing when the extended performance ends during the variation of the special symbols can be eliminated. Since there is no need to execute this, the processing load can be reduced.

In the processing of S5108, processing related to updating of other effects is executed. Specifically, for example, processing related to presentation based on time information acquired from a real-time clock (RTC) is executed (S5108). After that, this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 172. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 155, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 156, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by the DRAM. The program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 are transferred and stored. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 156, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 155 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 170(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 170(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157B), the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 157B) and the simple display setting processing are performed so that the power-on image is drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 157(b)) is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (start winning), and the instruction to start the variable effect is mainly When received from the control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and the simple variation presentation is performed. It can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157(a). FIG. 157(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157(b). FIG. 157(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 125) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 157(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172 .

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to (out) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 158, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S6405) and returns to the processing of S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 159(a). FIG. 159(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, it is determined whether or not the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501). Here, if it is determined that the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), that is, if the portent effect is executed continuously from the previous variation, the portent effect is executed from the start of the variation. In order to do so, the variable display data table corresponding to the portent effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6502), and the portent effect flag 233m is set off (S6503).

Specifically, from the display data table set during the previous fluctuation and the time data set in the display data table, the displayed period information for indicating the period displayed during the previous fluctuation is obtained. A storage means for temporarily storing the extracted extraction information is provided, and in the processing of S6502, the continuation of the precursor effect executed during the previous special figure fluctuation is configured to be executed in this special figure fluctuation. . As a result, the portent effect can be displayed smoothly even when the portent effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In this control example, the content of the precursor effect executed during the previous variation is stored, and the continuation of the stored precursor effect is executed in the current variation, but other configurations may be used. Also, for example, the display data table corresponding to the precursor effect is divided into a plurality of effect blocks corresponding to the passage of time, the effect block executed during the previous change is determined, and in the current change, the previous change It may be constructed such that the effect block set next to the effect block executed in the middle is executed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the management of the portent effect that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In addition, in this control example, as the precursor effect executed across a plurality of fluctuations, only the precursor effect for two variations can be executed, so in the processing of S6501, the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON. If it is determined that there is, the current fluctuation is the end fluctuation of the precursor effect, so the precursor effect flag 233m is set to OFF in the processing of S6503. If it is configured to be executed across, a counter (for example, a precursor effect counter) that can determine the period (number of times of special symbol fluctuation) during which the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON and a storage means (for example, performance continuation number storage means) for storing how many fluctuations the predictive effect being executed continues, and each time the variation pattern command process is executed, the value of the predictive effect counter is set. is updated, whether or not the updated value matches the value stored in the performance continuation frequency storage means is discriminated, and when it is discriminated that they match, the portent performance flag 233m is set off.

In the processing of S6501, if it is determined that the portent effect flag 233m is not ON (is OFF) (S6501: No), or if the processing of S6503 is finished, then the variable effect indicated by the display variation pattern command A variable display data table corresponding to the pattern is determined, the determined variable display data table is read out from the variable effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6504).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6504 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6505).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6504, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6507). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6508), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 159(a)), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6507, the display data table buffer 233d is stored by the process of S6504. From the set variable display data table, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of 1, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In this control example, when the portent effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), the variation display data table corresponding to the portent effect and the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern command are displayed. is set in the corresponding display data table buffer, and the display data corresponding to the indication effect is preferentially displayed where the display data overlaps. Specifically, the layer in which the precursor effect is executed and displayed is provided with priority over the layer in which the normal variable effect is executed and displayed. The player can visually recognize the contents displayed on the effect layer.

It should be noted that any configuration may be used as long as the aspect corresponding to the precursor effect is displayed with priority over the aspect corresponding to the normal effect. The display data for the normal effect set based on the above may be discriminated, and only the display data to be visually recognized by the player may be set in the display data table buffer.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 159(b). FIG. 159(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front/rear out reach, reach other than front/rear out, or complete loss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S6603), and the process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description continues. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether there is a win-related command for display among the unprocessed commands. The win-related command for display is a command to be referred to when the jackpot is won, and specifically, an opening command for display for indicating the start of the jackpot, a command for the number of rounds for display, and an ending for display. Executed when a command or the like is received.

Here, with reference to FIG. 160, the details of the win-related command process (S6409) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related command process (S6409). The hit-related command processing (S6409) executes processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

When the win-related command process (S6409) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display (S6701), and if there is an opening command for display (S6701: Yes), the opening command process is executed. (S6702), and the process ends. This opening command processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 161(a). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6701 that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703).

In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is a display round number command (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and this process ends. The round number command processing (S6704) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 161(b). Then, in the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), it is determined whether there is a display ending command (S6705), and if there is a display ending command (S6705: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S6706), and this process ends. This ending command processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the process of S6705, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6705: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161(a), the opening command processing (S6702) executed in the win-related command processing of FIG. 160 will be described. FIG. 161(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the opening command process. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6805), the opening command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S8702. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped.

In addition, the ending command for display instructing the start of the ending effect is matched with the timing when all the round effects (for example, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. Therefore, if the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, the round effect will end. A lot of waiting time occurs between the start of the ending effect and the start of the ending effect, which may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or to have a sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in this control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect in the third pattern display device 81 is all (for 16 rounds). , or for two rounds), the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player may feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feel uncomfortable. do not have. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in this control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started, Control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the third pattern display device 81 finishes the variation effect that becomes a big hit. As a result, when the variation performance that becomes a big win is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the opening performance can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is worried whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Next, the round number command processing (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. 161(b). FIG. 161(b) is a flow chart showing the content of the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number processing, first, the round number display data table is read from the round number rendering table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

Next, the ending command processing (S6706) will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending command processing (S6706). This ending command process (S6706) executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the ending command process (S6706), first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b for the ending effect. It reads from the table storage area (not shown) and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S7001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S7002). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7001, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot ends, so that the player can recognize that the jackpot has ended. can be made

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display hit-related command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is an image change command (S6410: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 163, the details of the back image change command process (S6411) will be described. FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing the back image change command process (S6411). The back image change command processing (S6411) is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the back image change command process (S6411), first, the back image change flag is set to ON (S7101). As a result, it is possible to determine the change of the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C and special back faces A to C corresponding to time effects), the back face corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command The image determination flag is turned on, and the back image determination flag corresponding to the other back image type is set to off (S7102), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the back image determination flag set by the process of S7102 is used to determine the post-change image. Specifies the back image type of the . If the specified back image type is back B or C, image data corresponding to the back images are not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image data is not stored. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . If the back image type after change is back A, all the image data are resident in the resident video RAM 235, so the image is not transferred.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any one of the back faces A to C and the special back faces A to C corresponding to the time effect according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, Based on the background image determination flag set by the processing in S7102, the type of the background image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the range of the background image is determined. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there is no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as the rear image change command. In the process of S7102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). Otherwise (S6412: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). FIG. 163(b) is a flow chart showing error command processing (S6413). This error command processing (S6413) executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the error command process (S6413), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Returning to the description of FIG. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a continuation value related command (S6414), and if it is determined that there is a continuation value related command (S6414: Yes), continuation value related command processing (S6415) is executed, processing corresponding to S6401 and other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 164, the details of the continuation value related command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing continuous value related command processing (S6415). This continuation value related command processing (S6415) executes processing corresponding to the continuation value related command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the continuous value-related command processing (S6415), first, the continuous value display data table corresponding to the received command is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S7301), and the total stored in the total value storage area 233k. A value (total value set when the previous command was received) is read out (S7302), and a difference from the total value indicated by the command received this time is calculated (S7303).

Then, the display data table indicating the attack pattern corresponding to the difference calculated in the processing of S7303 is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7304), and the value of the command received this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k. (S7305). The total value storage area 233k is configured to be able to store the total values indicated by the commands received during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed in the order in which the commands are received. Furthermore, the value of the difference calculated in the process of S7303 can also be stored.

As a result, for example, when the received total values continuously satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, when 7 is added to any of the total values in succession), A special attack pattern display data table can be set when the number of consecutive differences is a predetermined number (for example, 300 or more).

After the process of S7305 is completed, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing the Null data (S7306). Then, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7301 and S7304, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7307), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S7308). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S7309), the continuation value-related command processing is terminated, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the sound ramp control device 113 only outputs a command indicating the total value of the continuous value (HP value), and the total value set in the previous continuous value-related command process is , and the value of the difference is determined on the display control device 114 side, and the display mode (effect mode) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the determination result is executed by the display control device 114 Running. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced while diversifying the display of the continuation value (HP value) in the continuation effect (battle effect).

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 has means for setting the total value, and the display control device 114 has difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the total value set last time and the total value set this time. and a means for setting the display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means. For example, the sound ramp control device 113 has means for setting the first continuation value (the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f) to vary the continuation value (HP value). and all other means (means for setting the second continuation value (continuation value selected using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g) for varying the continuation value (HP value), the previously set sum Means for setting the difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the value and the total value set this time, and the display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means) Display control device 114 or only the attack pattern among the above means may be set by the sound lamp control device 113 .

Returning to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an expectation level effect related command (S6416), and if it is determined that there is an expectation level effect related command (S6416: Yes), the expectation effect related command process (S6417) is executed, and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 165, the details of the expectation level effect related command process (S6417) will be described. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the expectation level effect related command process (S6417). This expectation effect related command processing (S6417) executes processing corresponding to the expectation degree related command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the expectation level effect related command process (S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the received expectation level effect related command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7402).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7402, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7403), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7404) and returns to command determination processing.

In this control example, in the expectation effect setting process (see S3803 in FIG. 151) set and executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the display mode (see FIG. 102A) at the start of the expectation effect , the display mode (see FIG. 103(a)) that is the effect result (final display mode), the expectation level effect command for display for indicating the expectation level effect display mode, and the expectation level display mode to be notified in the expectation level effect. A display expectation level target mode notification command for indicating the display mode (see FIG. 103(b)) is set including information indicating display timing.

Then, in the expectation level effect related command process (S6417 in FIG. 165), the display mode corresponding to each received command is set to be displayed at the display timing corresponding to the display timing information included in each command. Specifically, the display mode at the start of the expectation level performance (see FIG. 102(a)) is displayed corresponding to the timing at which the expectation level performance is started, and then the display mode corresponding to the expectation level increasing performance is displayed. (see FIG. 102(b)) is displayed. After that, if the command indicating the current expectation level increase effect includes information for notifying the expectation level display mode to be notified, the display mode is displayed corresponding to the display timing information included in the command. display in time. After that, the display mode (see FIG. 103(a)), which is the effect result (final display mode), is displayed.

In addition, if the player is configured to be able to select which of the plurality of displayed expectation level display modes is the expectation level display mode that is the target of the expectation level increase effect, the selection result (correct answer or A command for indicating incorrect answer) is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and whether or not to display the final display mode is determined based on the contents of the received command. In other words, if the player's selection result is correct, each information included in the display expectation effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing) is sent to the expectation effect related command process (S6417). If the player's selection result is incorrect, each information included in the display expectation effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing), The setting information regarding the display of the final display mode is cleared, and display processing is executed so that the final display mode is not displayed.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description continues. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no expectation level effect related command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a countdown effect related command (S6417). In the processing of S6417, when it is determined that there is a command related to the countdown effect (S6417: Yes), the command processing related to the countdown effect is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 166, the countdown effect related command process (S6419) will be described. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect related command process (S6419). This countdown production related command processing (S6419) executes processing corresponding to the countdown production related command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the countdown effect-related command processing (S6419), first, it is determined whether or not there is an additional precursor command for display (S7501). In the case of executing the sign effect continued from the display, the additional sign data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the additional sign command for display is set in the display data table buffer (S7502), and corresponds to the display data table set in S7502. The transfer data table to be used is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7503).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7503, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to command determination processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7501, if it is determined that there is no display usage precursor command (S7501: No), the countdown effect data table corresponding to the received display countdown effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S7506), the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7506 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7507).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7507, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7508), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description continues. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no countdown effect-related command (S6418: No), it is determined whether there are other display commands. The corresponding process is executed (S6420). Here, other display commands include, for example, a display reserved ball number command indicating an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, or an effect (so-called continuous notice) that targets a specific change across a plurality of changes. There are a continuous notice command for display and a time effect command for display that indicates a time effect based on the result of measurement by time measuring means (so-called real-time clock) of the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the command for the number of pending balls for display is received, the flag for the number of new pending balls is set to ON. Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command for display, and the number of reserved balls displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is updated by updating the number of reserved balls counter based on the extracted number of reserved balls. Display update. In addition, when the display continuous notice command is received, the new continuous notice command flag is set to ON. Then, the distribution between the back surface of the school of fish and the back surface of the bubble is extracted from the continuous advance notice command for display. Next, based on the extracted distribution, the continuous announcement information storage area is updated, and the continuous announcement corresponding to the updated contents is displayed.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 159 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and other commands , the command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and Since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, In the process, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 167, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7601). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7602 and S7603 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7604. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7602), an error occurrence flag is on (S7603), and if the error occurrence flag is on (S7603: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed based on the error determination flag (S7604).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the details of the warning image setting process. When the warning image setting process is executed, the warning image data is expanded based on the error determination flag (S7701), the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7702), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7603: No), the process of S7604 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7605.

In S7605 of FIG. 167, pointer update processing is executed (S7605). Details of the pointer update processing (S7605) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing (S7605). This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7801). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7801, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7802). As a result, if it is End information (S7782: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7803). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7804), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7805), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7806), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always developed, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7802: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 167 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7606). Here, along with the previously developed warning image and the like, based on the rendering content developed in the process of S7606, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and the display coordinate position and Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7608). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7608: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7608: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7609).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7609: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. The processing of S7615 is executed. In the process of S7610, the confirmed display data table is read from the confirmed display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7610), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By doing so, the contents are cleared (S7611). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7612).

When the process of S7612 is completed, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7613). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S7614), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7615), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In task processing, until a predetermined time elapses after the start of variation, from the last stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S7615, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one before is specified, and the specified The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7609, if the fixed display flag is ON (S7609: Yes), the processing of S7616 to S7621 is executed in order to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the processing of S7616, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7616). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7616: No), the demonstration display data table is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7617), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the contents are cleared (S7618). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7619).

When the process of S7619 ends, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7620), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7621), this process ends, and the V division is performed. return to load processing.

As a result, even after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the start of the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 170(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so resident image transfer setting processing is performed. is executed (S7902), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not ON as a result of the processing of S7901, that is, if it is OFF (S7901: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7902), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 170(b). FIG. 170(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S8001). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S8002). In the processing of S8002, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S8002 that the transfer process has not ended (S8002: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8002: Yes), the process proceeds to S8003. Also, as a result of the process of S8001, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8001: No), the process proceeds to S8003.

In the process of S8003, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S8003). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8004), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S8003, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S8003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S8005), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157(b)), the command Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the normal image. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) (see S7901: No in FIG. 170(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 171, the normal image transfer setting process (S7903), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7605) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S8101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S8102). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S8103), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S8104), and the process proceeds to S8105.

Also, in the processing of S8102, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S8102: No), the processing of S8103 and S8104 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S8105. In the process of S8105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S8105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S8105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S8106).

In the process of S8106, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S8106 that the transfer process has not ended (S8106: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8106: Yes), the process proceeds to S8107. Also, as a result of the process of S8105, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S8105: No), the process proceeds to S8107.

In the processing of S8107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8107). is turned off (S8108), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S8103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S8113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S8107: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S8109: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S8111). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The top address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S8112), and the process proceeds to S8113.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S8111, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S8113, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113). The determination in the process of S8113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S8113, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S8113 (S8113: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S8114). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S8114, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S8115), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer process in this way, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process. When the received stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the jackpot performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated (S8201). That is, in the processing of S8201, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S8202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S8202, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S8203). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the load process (see FIG. 157(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first control example, in the third symbol variation display for showing the special symbol lottery result to the player, a specific effect (for example, "PUSH display" for operating the frame button 22 ”) as a suggestive effect to notify the timing of occurrence, a countdown effect that is set based on the timing at which the specific effect is set, and the period from the start of the suggestive effect to the start of the countdown effect It is configured to execute an omen effect that is set to

Therefore, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed (the period during which the predictive effect is executed) can be freely set as compared with the case where the suggestive effect for notifying the timing of occurrence of the specific effect is executed for a predetermined period. .

In the first control example, the timing for starting the suggestive effect and the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect are configured to be selectable from a plurality of options. By configuring in this way, it is possible to variously set the period in which the suggestive effect is executed by various combinations.

Further, it is determined whether there is a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) between the timing at which the suggestive effect is started and the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and based on the determination result, the form of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is determined. configured to be variable. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting the effects to be executed in the future based on the contents of the effects to be executed.

In addition, based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, it is configured so that the aspects of the portent effect and the countdown effect can be varied. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, it is configured such that a long period (for example, 7 seconds) is likely to be set as the period during which the countdown effect is executed. As a result, the game can be played while expecting that the variable display of this time corresponds to the special symbol won as a win by the mode of the countdown effect.

It should be noted that, as the form of the effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a mode other than the mode of the first control example may be used. Any aspect may be set. In this case, a part of the performance mode is configured to be variable according to the period during which the suggestive effect is executed (suggestive effect period), and the length of the suggestive effect period and the lottery result of the special symbol are different for the player. For example, the color of the display mode such as characters displayed during the suggestive effect is variable (blue → yellow → red → rainbow color) according to the length of the elapsed time. Alternatively, the stage index (for example, degree of expectation) displayed during the suggestive effect may be configured to vary according to the length of the elapsed period.

Moreover, it is also possible to set each of a plurality of specific effects to have different degrees of expectation for big wins, and to vary the degrees of expectation for big wins depending on the specific effects to be targeted. In this case, a plurality of points during the variable display period are provided with places where the specific effect can be executed, and among the plurality of points, the specific effect to be executed at the point targeted for the suggestive effect is selected by lottery of special symbols. It may be configured to be set based on the result. As a result, the countdown effect is started, and even after it is grasped at which timing (point during the variable display period) the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect executed for the player, as the specific effect It is possible to make it difficult to understand which production will be executed, and to enjoy the suggestive production until the end.

In addition, in the first control example, the effect executed as the precursor effect among the suggestive effects uses the effect mode (the effect mode that suggests the execution timing of the countdown effect) for indicating the period of the predictive effect. In this way, in addition to the effect for indicating the effect period to the player, for example, the effect mode for suggesting to the player the content of the specific effect that is the target of the current suggestive effect, and the current variable display , an effect mode (notification mode) for notifying the player that the countdown effect will be executed may be set.

In addition, in the first control example, the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect) and the end timing of the suggestive effect (end timing of the countdown effect) are set separately. Suggestive effects can be executed across a plurality of variable displays. As a result, even for a specific effect set at a point at the beginning of the variable display (for example, 5 seconds from the start of the variable display), the start timing of the suggestive effect can be set during the previous variable display. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting the suggestive effect.

In the case of using the above-described technology, based on the contents of the plurality of prize winning information already reserved and stored, the suggestive effect may be set across a plurality of variable displays, or the variable display of the special symbols may be executed. A means for discriminating the winning ball (winning ball to be the next fluctuation) is provided while the game is being played, and the discriminating means performs a suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays when the remaining fluctuation period is longer than a predetermined period. May be set. In the latter case, it is difficult to store the reserved memory (when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, or when it is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140), and the special symbol is Even when the first reserved memory (the reserved memory used for the next fluctuation) occurs during the fluctuation, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

The fluctuation time of the special pattern is generally configured such that a long fluctuation time is likely to be selected when the jackpot is won. configured to be high. In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, there is a problem that the degree of expectation for a big win with respect to the current variable display is predicted depending on the timing at which the suggestive effect is started. On the other hand, in the first control example, the timing at which the suggestive effect starts and the timing at which the suggestive effect ends are provided at a plurality of points, respectively, so that the suggestive effect period cannot be predicted from the timing at which the suggestive effect starts. It consists of Also, even if the suggestive effect period is the same, the period during which the sign effect is executed and the period during which the countdown effect is executed are configured to be variable. Further, as the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect, any one of the specific effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins can be selected.

In this first control example configured in this way, even after the suggestive effect is started, the current suggestive effect period, the target specific effect, the sign effect period, and the countdown effect period. can be suppressed from being predicted early and the production effect being lowered.

In the first control example, the countdown display in which the number is regularly decreased (for example, every second) is used as the effect mode executed during the countdown effect. For example, it may be configured such that a plurality of partitioned areas are filled regularly (for example, every second) and a specific effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. may In this case, the number of partitioned areas becomes a display mode for indicating the period of the countdown effect. Also, other configurations may be used.

In this first control example, display data for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds) are stored in the storage area of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 as display data to be displayed during the countdown effect, and are executed this time. Based on the period information indicating the period of the countdown effect set in the suggestion effect to be performed, the corresponding display data is displayed. Storage capacity can be reduced by having display data in this way.

In the first control example, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect) is configured to be set based on the start timing of the specific effect set in the target variable effect, but the countdown The end timing of the production should match the start timing of the specific production. For example, in the case where the specific production is to be executed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), it is set based on the end timing of the specific production. may be configured.

As described above, in the first control example, the end timing of the countdown effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect so that the end timing of the countdown effect executed as the suggestive effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. Then, the countdown effect period is set by calculating back the period (time) during which the countdown effect is executed from the set end timing. This makes it possible to easily set the countdown effect for the predetermined period in correspondence with the execution timing of the specific effect.

In the first control example described above, as the period for executing the suggestive effect, the sign effect period in which the predictive effect is executed and the countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is executed are set in advance before the suggestive effect is executed. However, other methods may be used, for example, the timing at which the suggestive effect starts (the timing at which the premonition effect starts) and the timing at which the suggestive effect ends (the timing at which the countdown effect ends, that is, A configuration may be used in which only the timing at which the specific effect is started is set in advance, and the timing at which the portent effect is switched to the countdown effect is set after the suggestive effect is executed.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to perform display control so as to switch from the portent effect to the countdown effect based on execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the portent effect. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the game so as to execute the countdown effect as soon as possible. A period in which the countdown performance can be executed is determined in advance based on the lottery result of the special symbols, and the countdown performance can be executed at the timing when a predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the omen performance. It is preferable that the portent performance is switched to the countdown performance only when it is timing, and the operation performance of operating the frame button 22 during the portent performance is executed at various timings. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to participate in the operation effect executed during the precursor effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Also, it may be configured to execute a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect during the omen effect. By executing this pseudo-countdown effect, the player can be made to think that the precursor effect has ended, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the future development of the effect. In this way, the pseudo countdown effect is configured to be easily executed when a big win is won, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the executed countdown effect is pseudo. Until the countdown effect (pseudo-countdown effect) is finished, the player can pay attention to the continuously executed effect.

In the first control example described above, the length of the precursor effect period to be executed as the suggestive effect is determined, and the effect mode of the precursor effect period is set based on the determination result. A configuration in which the execution length is not determined may be used, and for example, it may be configured so as to set the effect mode of the precursor effect based on the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed. In this case, since the length of the portent effect period is not determined, it is preferable to use, as the effect mode to be executed as the portent effect, a effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort even if the end is made at any timing. It is preferable to use a dynamic display mode that is executed according to a fixed rule, such as an effect in which a car continues to run on a road at a constant speed.

By using such a performance mode, even if the portent performance is executed without determining the length of the portent performance period, it is possible to smoothly switch to the countdown performance without making the player feel uncomfortable. Even in the case of using such an effect mode, the display mode (for example, the color) of part of the effect mode (the car in the above example) changes depending on the elapsed period of the omen effect as described above. Naturally, it may be configured to be variable.

Further, instead of determining in advance the length of the portent effect period in which the portent effect is to be executed, the length of only a part of the period may be determined. For example, it may be divided into a first precursor effect period of the first half and a second precursor effect period of the latter half, and the length of only the second precursor effect period may be determined in advance. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a specific predictive effect only during a predetermined period (second predictive effect period) retroactively from the end timing of the predictive effect (the start timing of the countdown effect), so that the specific predictive effect can be executed more smoothly. The production can be switched from the omen production to the countdown production.

As described above, in the above-described first control example, the game state (variable probability state (high probability, with electric sapo), which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric sapo), It is configured to execute an effect (battle effect) to indicate that the time saving state (low probability, with electric sapo)) is set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuing.

Furthermore, the above-described battle effect is composed of a effect (battle ready-to-win) that suggests whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will end, and a effect (pre-battle effect) to determine the effect mode of the battle ready-to-win. Configure. By configuring in this way, when the game state that is advantageous to the player actually ends (for example, when it is decided that the game state shifts to the normal state by lottery of special symbols), the battle is performed during the period other than. Since the performance can be continuously executed, the player feels anticipation for the continuation of the game state advantageous to the player and an uneasy feeling that the game state advantageous to the player has ended. The game can be continued while holding the robot.

Furthermore, during the above-described battle effect, an effect is executed in which the continuation value (HP value) increases or decreases to suggest whether or not the game state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player will continue to be set. . This continuation value (HP value) is configured to increase or decrease based on the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbols, the remaining period for which the advantageous state is set, or the like.

Here, when increasing the pattern of increase and decrease of the continuous value (HP value) described above and executing a production rich in variation, the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the advantageous state is set. It was necessary to perform complex management in which the displayed remaining period and the displayed continuous value (HP value) are associated with each other. Such management increases the processing load of the pachinko machine 10, and it is required to increase the variation of effects while reducing the processing load.

Therefore, in the first control example, the above-described expected value (HP value) is set based on the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the remaining period for which the advantageous state is set. (Main continuation value (e.g., 100th place value)) and a value (secondary continuation value (e.g., 10th place value)) set for the purpose of increasing production variation, Configured to display as a continuous value (HP value).

In this way, by summing the value actually managed and set and the value set for performance, the number of display patterns of performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be increased.

Further, in the above-described first control example, a display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuation value is displayed. By displaying this display mode, it is possible to visually inform the player of the degree of increase or decrease of the continuous value, so that an easy-to-understand effect can be executed.

In the first control example, as the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuous value, the display mode corresponding to the small difference amount (for example, the range of 50 to 150) is "weak attack", and the display mode corresponding to the large difference amount ( For example, the display mode corresponding to the range of 350 to 550) is "strong attack", and the display mode corresponding to the difference between them (for example, the range of 151 to 349) is "medium attack". , When the set display mode (attack pattern) is executed, a different effect is executed for each display mode, and then the continuation value is updated.

That is, by grasping the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player roughly grasps the amount of decrease (difference value) of the continuation value (HP), and after that, the updated continuation value can be used as a specific value. You will get a realistic numerical value. By displaying the information in such an order, it is possible to notify the player of the information regarding the game step by step, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Further, in the above-described first control example, when setting the above-described display mode (attack pattern) in order to reduce the control load of the effect, the main continuation It is configured to set a display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the values. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the patterns of the continuation values (pre-update continuation values, post-update continuation values) or difference values used when setting the display mode (attack pattern).

As described above, when the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the continuous value (HP value) is set based on the difference value of the main continuous value, the displayed continuous value (third symbol The difference value of the continuation value (sum of the main continuation value and the sub continuation value) displayed on the display device 81 does not match the difference value of the main continuation value, and the display mode differs from the apparent range of the difference value. (attack pattern) was set.

In order to solve the above-described problem, in the first control example, when the value of the continuation value (HP) is continuously updated a plurality of times, the difference value of the continuation value (HP) on the display and the main continuation value , the set display mode (attack pattern) is the same. By configuring in this way, the problem described above can be solved.

Further, in the first control example, main continuation value determining means for determining the value of the set main continuation value is provided, and the secondary continuation value set for the effect is determined based on the determination result of the main continuation value determining means. The selection tables for selection are configured to be different. Specifically, when the value of the primary continuation value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 200), a selection table that defines "-20 to +20" as a selectable range for the secondary continuation value is referred to, and a predetermined If the value is less than 200 (eg, 200), a selection table that defines "-30 to 0" as a selectable range for the secondary continuation value is referred to.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the selection of a positive value as the secondary continuation value when the primary continuation value is 0.

In the first control example, as described above, the first effect (pre-battle effect) and the second effect (battle ready-to-win) are effects for indicating a period (advantageous period) during which the game state is set to be advantageous to the player. ) to execute a unit effect (battle effect). In the first effect, an effect for suggesting the effect mode of the second effect is executed, and in the second effect, an effect for informing the player whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the above-described unit effect is repeatedly executed while the advantageous period is set. By configuring in this way, the second effect can be executed a plurality of times during the advantageous period, so that the player can play the game during the advantageous period while keeping the player feeling tense. .

Further, by making it possible to execute a plurality of unit performances while the advantageous period is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one unit performance continues for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the presentation from being slowed down.

In addition, in the first control example, as the condition for ending one unit effect (condition for executing the second effect), the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (the opportunity to end the advantageous period) In addition to the case of a lottery result), the case of the remaining period of the advantageous period being 0, and the case of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol being equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times. As a result, the second performance is executed even when the advantageous period is not terminated, but the second performance is executed when other conditions are satisfied. good too.

In addition, if the second effect for informing whether or not the advantageous period is over is executed a plurality of times in a short period of time, the player will quickly become bored with the second effect, so the first control is performed. In the example, the second effect (pseudo second effect) executed for the purpose of effect is suppressed from being executed multiple times within a predetermined period. Specifically, the number of variations of the special symbols after the unit performance is executed is counted, and the pseudo second performance is not executed when the counter value is less than a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the second effect early.

In the above-described first control example, a plurality of expectation degree performance modes are provided for stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol during fluctuation is a big hit, and any one of the expectation degree performance modes displayed as the expectation degree performance mode is provided. An expectation variable (increase) performance is executed to change the performance mode to a performance mode in which the expectation level is set higher than the performance mode.

Then, at least one of the plurality of expectation level presentation modes described above is configured to be displayed at a different timing, and the expectation level variable (increase) presentation determines which expectation level presentation mode the expectation level is to be varied. It is executed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to comprehend.

In the first control example configured in this manner, execution of the expectation level variable (increase) effect informs that the effect mode of any of the expectation level effect modes is variable (increased). In this state, the player watches the performance while expecting further variation (increase) of the desired expectation level performance mode (for example, the expectation level performance mode in which the expectation level that is already a big win is set high). can be done.

In addition, in the first control example, by varying the timing at which the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed, it is configured to vary the target expectation level effect mode. Specifically, it is configured to target the expectation level effect mode displayed after the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed.

In addition, in the first control example, the variable expectation (increase) effect is configured to be able to vary the effect modes of the plurality of expectation effect modes, and the variable amount to be varied for each expectation level effect mode It is configured to display a variable amount for indicating the sum of (steps). As a result, the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed, and after grasping that one of the expectation level effect modes will be changed, the player can grasp the amount by which the expectation level effect mode is changed in the current effect. can.

Furthermore, after the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed, a notification mode is displayed for informing the player of the target for which the expectation level is to be increased in the current effect, so that the player can receive the target expectation level effect mode. can be easily comprehended.

In the above-described first control example, a plurality of expectation level performance modes having a performance mode capable of displaying the jackpot expectation level in stages are provided, and each expectation level performance mode is configured to be able to display different stages, and displayed. It is constructed so as to predict whether or not the current variation wins the jackpot by combining and grasping the display contents of each expectation performance mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicate the aspect of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting. There is a problem that the processing load for control increases. Furthermore, when the performance modes for increasing the expectation level are biased, specifically, only one expectation level performance mode among the plurality of expectation level performance modes is changed to a performance mode indicating that the expectation for the big win is high. When the remaining expectation degree performance mode remains the performance mode indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is low, the player is made to have excessive expectations for the winning of the big win, and the player feels distrust in the content of the performance. There was a problem of giving

On the other hand, in the first control example, in the plurality of expectation level performance modes, the expectation level performance mode before being varied by the expectation level variable (increase) performance is set in a plurality of patterns, and the special symbols are set. According to the expectation degree set based on the lottery result of (1), the expectation degree of the expectation degree performance mode set by the pattern is configured to be variable (increased). By configuring in this way, the plurality of problems described above can be solved.

<Example of addition of effect to first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 181, an effect addition example of the first control example will be described. In this additional example, an effect (title giving effect) that progresses based on the operation content of the frame button 22 is added to the above-described first control example. This title giving effect includes the number of times an operation effect requiring a frame button operation has occurred, the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (the number of valid operations) for that operation effect, and the number of times the operation effect has been operated during a period in which the operation effect is not executed. Based on the number of operations of the frame button 22 (the number of invalid operations), it is executed so that the benefits (titles) given to the player are varied.

By using such an effect, the player can not only operate the frame button 22 as instructed, but also can be provided with the enjoyment of performing other operations (including non-operating), thereby allowing the player to enter the game early. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Furthermore, in this additional example, the appearance frequency of the operation effect for operating the frame button 22 (for example, the effect for dropping the accessory unit (displacement member) 450) is variable based on the privilege (title) granted to the player. It is configured to allow As a result, for a player who is willing to operate the frame button 22, the operation effect is made to appear frequently, and for a player who does not want to operate the frame button 22, the appearance frequency of the operation effect is reduced. can be lowered.

In addition, compared to the case of using a technique in which the player selects the appearance frequency of the operation presentation in advance, the appearance frequency of the operation presentation can be matched to the player's preference based on the operation result of the operation presentation executed during the game. Therefore, the operations performed by the player can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, the operation effect executed in this additional example will be described. FIG. 173(a) is a schematic diagram showing a conversation effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the content.

As shown in FIG. 173(a), in this additional example, a character unit (displacement member) 450 is provided so as to cover an upper part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2 for details). ). Then, the characters "You can talk with the button PUSH" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to prompt the operation of the frame button 22 . Here, when the frame button 22 is operated, as shown in FIG. 173(b), the characters "Hello" are displayed in the main display area Dm as if the character unit 450 were commenting. In this way, in this additional example, a conversation effect is executed in which the character unit 450 and the character unit 450 can have a conversation. Note that the accessory unit 450 can be moved to a position other than the position (initial position) shown in FIG. Therefore, for example, determining means for determining the role object position and comment display position setting means for displaying the comment in the display area corresponding to the role object position determined by the determining means may be provided. . As a result, regardless of the position of the character object, the character "Hello" can always be displayed in the main display area Dm as if the character unit 450 were commenting.

Further, as a determination means for determining the position of the role product, a means for directly detecting the position of the role product unit 450 using a proximity sensor may be used, a drive motor for driving the role product unit 450, or a drive motor for driving the drive motor may be used. A detecting means for detecting the drive state (for example, the number of steps) of a force transmitting means (pulley, etc.) may be provided, and means for determining the role object position based on the detection result of the detecting means, or a role object unit. In the case where the 450 is driven based on an action scenario, means for determining the position of the character object based on the progress of the action scenario may be used. When the latter configuration is used, it is possible to grasp not only the current character object position but also the future character object position based on the contents of the action scenario, so the display position of the comment is adjusted according to the character object position. Can be set in advance. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the operation scenario of the role product unit 450 is associated with the information regarding the display position of the comment in advance and stored, or a plurality of the above means may be combined.

A level display area Dr1 for indicating the current level (set value) and a title display area Dr2 for indicating the current title are displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. Here, the level (set value) is a value that is added (raised) based on the game history (game period, game result, effect content, etc.). 176(c)), and in FIG. 173(a), the lowest level, "Grade 3", is displayed.

A title is a benefit that is set based on the level (set value) described above and the details of the operation of the frame button 22 . Although a detailed description will be given later, a plurality of systems are set for this title, and one system is set according to game contents (operation contents of the frame button 22). A unique privilege (title) corresponding to each level is set for each system, and "beginner" is displayed in FIG. 173(a).

In FIG. 173(b), based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the state of FIG. 173(a), a comment is displayed from the character object unit 450, and the level displayed in the level display area Dr1 increases. Then, "2nd grade" is displayed, and "half serving" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. Note that the content of the comment of the role item unit 450 is variably set according to the level and title, and the higher the level and title, the more advantageous the player is to information (for example, the degree of winning expectation during fluctuation, the current game state, etc.). It is set so that information related to games such as As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, the contents of the character object-driven presentation, which is one of the operation presentations executed in this additional example, will be described with reference to FIG. 174(a). FIG. 174(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character-driven presentation. As shown in FIG. 174(a), when the character object driving effect is executed, as an effect for prompting the operation of the frame button 22, the characters "Press the button to drop the character object" are displayed in the main display area Dm. At the same time, an image simulating the frame button 22 is displayed.

Also, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Chance if you fall" suggesting the detection result of the character product driving effect are displayed. When the frame button 22 is operated during the period during which the character object driving effect is being executed (while the operation of the frame button 22 is valid), and the character object falls to the position covering the main display area Dm, the changing It suggests that there is a high possibility that the special pattern has won the jackpot. In this manner, in the operation presentation for operating the frame button 22, by operating the frame button 22, the player can be motivated to quickly perceive that he or she has won the big prize. A frame button 22 can be operated.

In this additional example, as described above, different benefits (titles) are given depending on whether the frame button 22 is operated intentionally or not. In addition, the player can voluntarily choose whether or not to operate the frame button 22, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this additional example, since different benefits (titles) are given according to the title system set as described above, even if the game is continued with one title system, It is configured so that all benefits (titles) cannot be obtained. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, since the title system is set according to the operation contents of the frame button, it is configured so that it is not possible to obtain all the benefits (titles) unless the operation contents of the frame button 22 are devised. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and to provide the player with various effects that are executed based on the details of the operation of the frame button 22. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Here, in order to obtain various benefits (titles) as described above, it is necessary to set a different title system, so the current title system is initialized (the history of the operation contents of the frame button 22 is initialized). However, if all the histories based on the games that have been continuously played so far are initialized, there is a possibility that the motivation of the player will decrease. .

Therefore, in this additional example, there is a change operation that allows the player to select whether to initialize all histories or erase histories up to a stage where a different title system can be set. FIG. 174(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during this change operation.

As shown in FIG. 174(b), in the main display area Dm, the characters "from the beginning" and a part of the history are displayed as the all erasing selection mode Dr3 indicating the selection section to be selected when all the histories are initialized. A character "from the middle" is displayed as a partial erasure selection mode Dr4 that indicates a selection portion to be selected when erasing . Here, when the all-clear selection mode Dr3 is selected, the level (set value) displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title displayed in the title display area Dr2 are set to initial values. This all-delete selection mode Dr3 is mainly selected when erasing operation histories of different players.

On the other hand, when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected, a display going back to the stage where a different title system can be set is displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title display area Dr2. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the same privilege (title) is granted regardless of the title system as long as the level (set value) is low. becomes higher, one title system among the plurality of title systems further branches into a plurality of title systems.

As a result, the contents retroactively displayed when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected can be made different depending on the level (set value) or title when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected. It should be noted that a title system may be provided that is not set unless this partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected. As a result, it is necessary to not only add (increase) the level (set value), but also subtract (decrease) it, so that it is possible to provide a game with more variations.

As described above, in the first control example, as an effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, a jackpot effect spanning the multiple times of the jackpot game (continuous jackpot performance) is executed, and the content of the jackpot performance executed during the jackpot game suggests to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game ends. However, if the gaming machine has a special game state other than a big winning game, for example, a gaming machine having a small winning game in which the privilege that can be given to the player is set less than that of the big winning game, during a predetermined period When a small winning game or a big winning game (hereinafter referred to as a winning game) is executed a plurality of times, a winning performance (continuous winning performance) spanning the multiple winning games is executed. can be In this way, in the above-described first control example, the contents described for the big win may also be executed for game results other than the big win (for example, the small win). The game results include various game results that exist as conventionally well-known configurations.

In addition, in this first control example, as a game result after the end of the currently executed jackpot game, it is configured to suggest to the player whether or not to win the jackpot again within a predetermined period (within reserved memory). However, other game results may be suggested to the player by the winning effect executed during the winning game, for example, the number of winning big wins (including small wins) in the reserved memory, the number of winning big wins ( (including small hits) privilege content (number of rounds), the game state (probability variable state or time saving state) after the jackpot (including small hits) that is won in the reserved memory, and multiple game results (jackpots, small hits) If it is targeted, it may be configured to suggest the type of the game result or the order of execution.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the content of the big win performance is varied based on not only the ball entering information stored at the timing of executing the big winning game, but also the ball entering information newly stored during the big winning game. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball-entering information, to facilitate the execution of consecutive big win effects, and to make the players interested in the big win effects.

In addition, in this control example, as a continuous jackpot effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be varied based on the number of pieces of entering information stored at the time when the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, based on the number of winning ball information stored at the time when the jackpot game is executed, there are a plurality of different timings for suggesting (announcing) that the jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (within reserved storage). It is configured so that the jackpot production of is executed.

Of these, in the specific jackpot performance (additional performance) that can be executed when the number of reserved balls (number of ball entry information) of special symbols is not the upper limit, new ball entry information is acquired during the jackpot game, and the ball entry information is obtained. is won as a big win, the contents of the big win performance can be changed so as not to be noticed by the player.

In the above-described specific jackpot effect, the jackpot game (multiple round games (eg, 15-round game)) to be executed during one jackpot is partially notified (eg, 5 rounds). Since the performance is executed, it is possible to inform the player incomprehensibly how many rounds of the big winning game have been executed while the specific big winning performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the game state after the big win, depending on the number of rounds set for the big win game.

In this control example, it is configured to perform an additional display (additional display of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game by the additional effect every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). The length of the inter-round interval period in a predetermined round is set longer than the length of other inter-round interval periods. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts whether or not the big win will end in every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). In addition, since the variation of the special pattern for a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the big win is executed in a shortened time (0.5 seconds), every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval period and the special symbol variation period between big wins.

It should be noted that it is preferable that the variation period of the special symbols for a predetermined period, which is executed after the end of the big win, is always constant regardless of whether or not the big win is won. Specifically, the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols for four rotations after the end of the big win is defined to vary by 0.5 seconds for the entire period when the lottery result is lost, and when the lottery result is a big win. , a 2-second variation for the first rotation, a 1.5-second variation for the second rotation, a 1-second variation for the third rotation, and a 0.5-second variation for the fourth rotation. As a result, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbols for four rotations after the end of the big win, the predetermined period (the period until the special symbols fluctuate four times or the period until the big win is won) is fixed (2 seconds). be able to. In this case, by configuring the interval period of each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) to coincide with the above-described predetermined period (2 seconds), the interval period of each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) and the interval between the jackpots are increased. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the special symbol fluctuation period.

Also, in the first control example, as a jackpot effect executed during the jackpot, during the jackpot game (while the round game is being played), a normal jackpot that does not suggest that the jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (within the reserved memory) have a performance. When this normal jackpot production is executed, the end display mode displayed in the final period during the jackpot game (ending period after the end of the round game) is a predetermined period after the jackpot ends (4 variations of special symbols, or 4 seconds) is displayed continuously. Then, when a big win is won again within a period in which the end display mode is continuously displayed after the end of the big win, the performance for continuous winning is executed in which the big win performance is started again via the end display mode.

By constructing in this way, the ball entry information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during a predetermined period (4 variations of special symbols or 4 seconds) after the end of the big win game is acquired after the end of the big win game, Even when the acquired ball entry information has won a jackpot, the performance for continuous winning can be executed. In other words, since it is possible to include the ball entry information acquired after the end of the big win as the condition for executing the continuous jackpot effect indicating that the big win is continuously executed, the ratio of executing the continuous jackpot effect can be increased. , can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in the first control example, whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot performance is determined based on whether or not there is ball entry information for winning a jackpot in the reserved memory. When there is ball entry information for winning a big win, it is determined whether or not the big win is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous big win presentation. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a game state (for example, a variable probability state) advantageous to the player is set as a game state after the big win in the reserved memory is executed, and based on the determination result, continuous It may be determined whether or not to execute the jackpot effect. Furthermore, after the game state (normal state (low probability state)) that is once disadvantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win to be executed this time, the game state after the big win in the reserved memory is executed. It may be determined whether or not an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) is set, and whether or not to execute continuous jackpot effects may be determined based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the added value to the player when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, as in the above-described second control example, in a gaming machine having a drop lottery configuration, it is difficult for a player to grasp the game state when a jackpot is won, so the drop lottery is performed using the above-described continuous jackpot effect. The result of the lottery may be notified to the player.

Specifically, means for discriminating the game state at the time of winning the current jackpot, means for discriminating the game state set after the end of the current jackpot, and a falling lottery executed until the next jackpot is won. and a means for discriminating the lottery result, and whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect may be determined based on the discrimination result of each discriminating means described above. Only when the state is a low-probability state of the special pattern, that is, when the game state of the special pattern has fallen by the falling lottery, the continuous jackpot performance is executed, or after the end of this jackpot, the special pattern is high. A probability state is set, and only when it is determined that the game state of the special pattern shifts to a low probability state by a drop lottery until the next big win is won, a continuous jackpot performance is executed or a fall is made. The game state of the special pattern does not shift to the low probability state by lottery, and the continuous jackpot performance is executed in the case of the high probability state of the special pattern even when the game state of winning the current big win and winning the next big win. It may be configured as follows.

In this control example, as the winning information used to determine the content of the jackpot effect to be executed during the jackpot game, the winning information at the time the jackpot game is executed is used. The timing may be any timing as long as it is the timing after it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed. or a predetermined timing within a period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the jackpot effect. Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the variation of the special symbol that has won the big hit is started, or a predetermined timing during the period during which the variation is being performed.

In addition, in this control example, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric sapo) (variable state (high probability, with electric sapo), time saving state (low probability, with electric sapo) )), an effect (battle effect) is executed to indicate that the game state is continuing. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. FIG. 175(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 175(a), the ROM 222 in this additional example has the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114), and the content of the fluctuation pattern table 222a is partially changed. The difference is that a title system selection table 222aa, a title selection table 222ab, and a role item action level selection table 222ac are added. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 176(a), the contents of the variation pattern table 222a for the accessory action added in this additional example will be described. FIG. 176(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table 222a (for character goods). As shown in FIG. 176(a), the variation pattern table 222a (for role product) includes role product action levels (1 to 3) selected by role product action level selection table 222ac, which will be described later, and extracted variation patterns ( a to z), and character product action frequencies (low) to (high) and (no) are defined. By configuring in this way, even when the same variation pattern is selected, the frequency of the action of the character product can be varied.

Next, referring to FIG. 176(b), the contents of the title system selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 176(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title system selection table 222aa. In this title system selection table 222aa, a plurality of title systems (1 to 3) are defined in association with the ratio of valid and invalid operations of the frame button 22 and the button operation ratio during execution of the operation effect.

FIG. 176(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title selection table 222ab. This title selection table 222ab defines titles that are privileges given to the player in association with the current level (set value) (“3rd grade” to “hermit”) and the title system (1 to 3). there is The title selected here is displayed in the title display area Dr2 (see FIG. 173(a)).

As shown in FIG. 176(c), while the level (set value) is low (third class to first dan), the same title is set regardless of which title system is set. Unable to grasp the set title system. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the currently set title system from being grasped immediately after the start of the game, and the execution of an operation to change the title system.

Next, the contents of the role product action level selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. 177(a). FIG. 177(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the role product action level selection table 222ac. The role product action level set in the role product action level selection table 222ac is referred to when using the variation pattern table 222a (for role product) described above with reference to FIG. 176(a).

As shown in FIG. 177(a), the role action level selection table 222ac defines role action levels in association with set values (levels) and title systems. Among them, only the title system 3 in which the setting value can reach "hermit" is configured so that the character action level 3 can be selected. In this way, by providing a role action level that is selected only when the level (set value) is increased while a specific title system is set, It becomes possible to impart a special feeling, and to enhance the production effect.

FIG. 175(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 175(b), the RAM 223 in this modified example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114) in that an effect setting group 223aa is provided. . Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first control example.

Here, the contents of the effect setting group 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 177(b). As shown in FIG. 177(b), the effect setting group 223aa includes an operation effect number counter 223aa1, a valid operation number counter 223aa2, an operation ratio storage area 223aa3, a title system storage area 223aa4, a set value storage area 223aa5, and an invalid operation number. A counter 223aa6, a change flag 223aa7, and a role product action level storage area 223aa8 are stored.

The operation effect number counter 223aa1 is a counter for counting the number of times an operation effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. This operation presentation number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) that the variation pattern is to execute an operation presentation (S3851 in FIG. 178: Yes), and the frame button input is performed. It is referred to when calculating the button operation ratio in the monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 179) (S5060 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), when the history of operation effects is changed (deleted), it is cleared (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

The valid operation number counter 223aa2 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect. In this control example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period of the operation effect. 179), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the effective period of the operation effect, 1 is added (see S5054 in FIG. 179), referred to when calculating the button operation ratio (see S5060 in FIG. 179), and further , is also referred to when calculating the valid operation ratio (see S5061 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), when the history of operation effects is changed (deleted), it is cleared (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

In this additional example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period of the operation presentation. Determination is made as to whether or not operation conditions are satisfied, such as pressing a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the case of an operation presentation to cause the frame button 22 to be pressed, and a success rate (for example, 50%) in the case of an operation presentation in which the frame button 22 is operated multiple times with good timing. However, if the determination result satisfies the operation condition, the value of the effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be incremented by one. As a result, the value of the counter can be added fairly regardless of the content of the operation effect to be executed.

Furthermore, in this additional example, the value of one effective operation number counter 223aa2 is added regardless of the instruction content of the operation presentation for the frame button 22 (press, repeated press, timing press, long press, etc.). However, for example, a valid operation number counter 223aa2 may be provided for each instruction content of the operation presentation for the frame button 22, and the value of the corresponding valid operation number counter 223aa2 may be added. With this configuration, the operation history indicating the details of the player's operation on the frame button 22 can be classified more finely, so that the details and frequency of the operation performance can be varied to suit the player. can be done.

The operation ratio storage area 223aa3 stores all operations of the frame button 22 based on the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 (value of valid operation number) and the value of invalid operation number counter 223aa6 (value of invalid operation number) described later. This is an area for storing the ratio (button operation ratio) of the number of valid operations to the number of times. This operation ratio storage area 223aa3 stores the button operation ratio calculated in S5060 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S4007) and the valid operation ratio calculated in S5061 (see S5062).

The title system storage area 223aa4 is an area for storing the title system selected using the title system selection table 222aa described above.

The setting value storage area 223aa5 is an area for storing game content and a level (setting value) set based on a change operation.

The invalid operation number counter 223aa6 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated at a timing other than the operation valid period (the operation valid period of the frame button 22 during operation presentation).

The change flag 223aa7 is a flag that is set to ON when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected by a change operation. By setting this flag to ON, an effect is executed that suggests to the player how to operate the frame button 22 for setting a different title system.

The role product action level storage area 223aa8 is an area for storing the role product action level selected using the above-described role product action level selection table 222ac. By referring to the role product action level stored in the role product action level storage area 223aa8, the appearance frequency of the role product action effect (operation effect) is variably set by the variation pattern table 222a (for role product).

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. FIG. Elements that are the same as those of the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 178, variable display setting processing 2 in this additional example will be described.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 2 in this additional example. In each of the processes of S3801 to S3810 and S3812 to S3817 of the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example, the same process as the variable display setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 147) is executed.

When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes of S3801 to S3810 as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are executed, and then the current variable pattern is a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851), and if it is determined to be a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: Yes), the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 (S3852). , S3853. On the other hand, in the process of S3851, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: No), the process of S3852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3853.

In the processing of S3853, the current variation display mode is determined based on the extracted variation pattern and the character action level (S3851). Specifically, based on the role product action level selected based on the role product action level selection table 222ac and the extracted variation patterns (a to z), a variation pattern table for role product action (see FIG. 176 ( a) Set the role object action frequency defined in (see a)), and determine the current variable display mode (variation effect display and presence/absence of role object action). Among the variable display modes determined here, for the contents to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the variable pattern command for display is set by the processing of S3812, and set by various processing of the sound lamp control device 113. In the same way as the display command, the display control device 114 is notified of the contents of the action of the character product, and the command output processing (see FIG. 139) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113. (see S3102 of )) sets the role product operation command to be notified to the device that drives and controls the role product unit 450 (the other device 228 (see FIG. 4)). After completing the processing of S3853, the same processing of S3812 to S3817 as in the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S3107).

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S3107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of frame button 22 has been detected (S5051). Here, if the pressing is not detected (S5051: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the conversation effect (see FIG. 173) of the operation effects is valid (S5052). If it is determined that it is the effective period of the conversation effect (S5052: Yes), the display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5053), the value of the valid operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054), and S5060 to process.

The display press command set in the process of S5053 is configured such that the content of the command is set based on the position of the role product unit 450, the role product action level, and the selected title. sets the comment display position of the conversation effect based on the result of determining the position of the role product unit 450, and determines the content of the comment to be displayed based on the role product action level and the selected title. is set. The display press command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display pressing command, the third pattern display device 81 displays the comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the character unit 450. An effect of having a conversation with the unit 450 can be displayed.

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the conversation effective period of the conversation production, the display press command is set so that the comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450. However, if the role object unit 450 is configured to be movable to a plurality of positions covered by the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the role object unit 450 and the position of the third symbol display device 81 The display content displayed on the display screen may be discriminated, and the timing of executing the conversation presentation (comment display) based on the discriminated result may be made different from the pressing timing of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加That is, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the character unit 450, and the main part of the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the display indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot, When it is determined that the above-described display areas do not overlap, that is, when the position of the character product unit 450 moves. The display area of the comment is changed, or the display area of the main part is changed by the progress of the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, so that the comment is made until the timing when each display area does not overlap. display may be delayed.

By constructing in this manner, both the variation performance displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the conversation performance, which is one of the operation performances, can be suitably executed, and the performance effect is enhanced. can be done. In addition, without using the above-described configuration, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the character unit 450 and the main part of the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, If it is determined that the display area for displaying the degree of expectation for a big win and the display area for displaying a pattern to be stopped overlaps, the conversation production may be stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5052, when it is determined that the conversation effect is not valid (S5052: No), it is determined whether the current is the valid period of the character action effect among the operation effects (S5055). If it is determined that it is the effective period of the role object action effect (S5055: Yes), the display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5056), and the value of the valid operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054). , S5060.

In the process of S5055, if it is determined that it is not the validity period of the character action effect (S5055: No), then it is determined whether it is the change valid period (S5057), and if it is the change valid period (S5057: Yes), change processing is executed (S5058), and then the process proceeds to S5060. Details of the change processing (S5058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, in the process of S5057, if it is determined that it is not within the change effective period (S5057: No), the current pressing operation is not during the effective period of the operation effect, so the value of the invalid operation counter 223aa6 is incremented by 1. (S5059), the process proceeds to S5060.

In the process of S5060, the button operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 and the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 (S5060). Next, the valid operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the valid operation counter 223aa2 and the value of the invalid operation counter 223aa6 (S5061), and the calculated button operation ratio and valid operation ratio are stored in the operation ratio storage area 223aa3. (S5062). After that, title setting processing is executed (S5063), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the change processing (S5058) will be described with reference to FIG. This change process (S5058) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the validity period of the change operation (see FIG. 174(b)), and various information is displayed based on the details of the player's operation. This is a process for clearing (the title system, the set value (level), and information on the button operation ratio and information on the valid operation ratio that are referred to when selecting the title system).

When the change processing (S5058) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current operation is all reset (whether the all erasure selection mode Dr3 is selected) (S5101). If it is determined to be a full reset (S5101: Yes), all information in the set value storage area 223aa5 is cleared (S5102), and the operation presentation number counter 223aa1 and effective operation number counter 223aa2. All the values of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 are cleared (S5103), the information of the title system storage area 223aa4 is cleared (S5104), and this processing ends. As a result, all the information based on the operation contents of the player is cleared, the initial value "3rd grade" is displayed in the level display area Dr1, and the initial value "beginner" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. (See FIG. 173(a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the reset is not complete (S5101: No), it is determined whether the operation content is a partial reset (whether the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected) (S5105). If it is determined to be a partial reset (S5105: Yes), the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5106), the information in the set value storage area 223aa5 is set to the first stage (S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103. . In the process of S5105, if it is determined that the reset is not partial (S5105: No), the process ends.

Next, the title setting process (S5063) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the details of the title setting process (S5063). When this title setting process (S5063) is executed, first, a title system is selected based on the title system selection table 222aa (S5201). Then, the selected title system is stored in the title system storage area 223aa4 (S5202), then the set value is determined based on the value of the operation effect counter 223aa1 and stored in the set value storage area 223aa5 (S5203).

Thereafter, a display setting value command is set (S5204), a title is selected based on the title selection table 222ab (S5205), and a display title command is set (S5206). Next, it is determined whether the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5207), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5207: Yes), a display operation instruction command is set (S5208), and the change flag is set. 223aa7 is set to off (S5209), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5207 that the change flag 223aa7 is not ON (it is OFF) (S5207: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the above-described additional example, the effect mode (for example, appearance frequency and effect content) of the operation effect, which is the effect for operating the frame button 22, is changed to the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. ), it is configured to be configurable. As a result, a desired presentation mode is set without making the player feel troublesome, compared with the case where the change operation for changing the frequency of the operation presentation to the frequency desired by the player is executed separately from the game. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 that changes the effect mode of the operation effect based on the player's operation history, in order to be able to set the effect mode of the operation effect suitable for various types of players, Although a plurality of presentation modes are prepared, while the same operation for the frame button 22 (for example, when the operation presentation is executed, the frame button 22 must be operated more than the required amount) is repeatedly executed. , there is a problem that only the same effect mode is set, and various operation effects cannot be provided to the player.

Therefore, in the above-described additional example, by accumulating game contents, a different privilege (title) is given to the player, and furthermore, the type of the privilege (title) is set at least by the player's frame button 22 It is configured to be different in accordance with the operation content (operation history) to.

By configuring in this way, various operations are executed on the frame button 22 in order to acquire different benefits (titles). Then, the effect mode of the operation effect is variably set based on the content of various operations executed with respect to the frame button 22 . Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various operation effects that can be variably set based on the operation contents (operation history) of the frame button 22 .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 having a structure in which different benefits (titles) are given by accumulating game contents, setting values (for example, levels) are variably set in stages according to the accumulation status of game contents. It is common to use a configuration that grants a privilege (title) corresponding to the set value (level), but when the set value (level) reaches the upper limit, a higher privilege (title) is obtained. There is a risk that the player will not be able to play the game, and the desire to play will decrease. Moreover, if the upper limit of the set value (level) is set high in order to prevent the set value (level) from reaching the upper limit, there is a problem that the storage capacity for the effect increases.

Therefore, in the above-described addition example, one of a plurality of systems (title system) with different benefits (titles) to be granted is set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. In this way, the privilege (title) given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system. As a result, since it is not possible to acquire all the benefits (titles) simply by accumulating the game contents, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in the above-described additional example, since there is an erasing means for erasing the past game contents, when setting a system different from the currently set system, the contents of operations executed in the past (operation history) It is possible to suppress the system from being set based on. In addition, in this additional example, in order to suppress the system from being set based on the details of operations (operation history) executed in the past, a deletion means for deleting the details of past operations (operation history) is used. , Other configurations may be used, for example, inputting the desire to set a different system (input by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22), in that case, for a predetermined period A new system may not be set until (period of operation history referred to when setting a system) has elapsed.

Further, in the above-described additional example, the erasing means includes a total erasing means for erasing all past game contents and operation contents and a partial erasing means for erasing a part of them. The partial erasing means is used when setting a different system from the currently set system, and the different system can set the past operation contents (operation history) referred to when setting the system. It is configured to erase up to the state. This eliminates the need to restart the game from the beginning when setting a different system, so that the player can be motivated to set a different system.

In this additional example, when the partial deletion means is operated, a part of the past operation contents (operation history) is deleted, and an initial value is set as a set value (level). However, by operating the partial erasing means, rather than restarting the game from the beginning (rather than operating the all erasing means), it is sufficient if a system different from the currently set system can be easily set. The set value (level) may be maintained and only part of the past operation contents (operation history) may be erased. Alternatively, the player may designate a desired system, and part of the past operation contents (operation history) may be erased until the designated system can be set.

Here, even if the player operates the partial erasing means to erase a part of the past operation contents (operation history) in an attempt to set a system different from the currently set system, the operation to be executed later is performed. If the frame button 22 is not properly operated for the effect, a different system will not be set, which may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Specifically, after operating the partial erasing means, if the operation effect is completed in the same operation mode as in the conventional art, the same system as the system set before operating the partial erasing means may be set. There is

Therefore, in this additional example, after operating the partial erasing means, there is provided guidance notification means for guiding the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player so that a different system is set. A different system can be easily set by executing the operation presentation based on the content notified by the guidance notification means. In addition, in order to set a different system, the guidance notification means notifies operation contents different from the conventional operation contents. The contents are also variably set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation presentation different from the one up to now, and enhance the presentation effect.

The content notified to the player by the guidance notification means may be content that simply prompts a different operation from the operation presentation, or content that specifically indicates the content of the operation to be executed. Further, in addition to the notification by the guidance notification means, a progress notification means may be provided for notifying the player of the progress until the condition for setting a different system is satisfied. As a result, the player can easily grasp whether or not the operation effect is completed so that a different system is set.

Furthermore, when the set system and the set value (level) satisfy the predetermined conditions for the system set in the additional example described above, the setting is possible only when the predetermined erasing means is operated. You can add system. By providing such a system, for example, when the set value reaches the upper limit, a dedicated system can be set only when the all erasing means is operated, or the set value is one lower than the upper limit. , a dedicated system may be set only when the partial erasing means is operated.

In addition, based on the erasing timing of the erasing means, it is also possible to change the system that can be set. Only a special system may be settable. In this case, it is preferable that the specific variable performance described above is executed only when the variable performance executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to set different systems depending on the timing of operating the erasing means, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

In the additional example described above, a configuration is used in which the privilege (title) is preset in correspondence with each set value (level) of each system, but other configurations may be used, and already acquired A storage means for storing the privilege (title) may be provided, and the privilege (title) to be given may be set based on the privilege (title) stored in the storage means.

In the above-described additional example, as the content of the privilege (title) given to the player (the content of the title), the content suggesting the setting condition of the currently set system is used. As a result, by grasping the content of the acquired benefits (titles), it is possible to predict the conditions necessary to set different systems.

Furthermore, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied, the player may be notified of the conditions necessary for setting the desired system, or the previously obtained benefits (titles) among the available benefits (titles) may be The number or ratio of (titles) may be notified to the player. As a result, the player's willingness to participate can be increased to obtain all the benefits (titles).

As described above, based on the operation contents (operation history) of the frame button 22, one of the plurality of systems (title system) with different benefits (titles) to be granted is set, In the case where the privilege (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system, the currently set system based on the granted privilege (title) There is a problem that it becomes easy for the player to grasp the

On the other hand, in the additional example described above, the same privilege (title) is granted until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage, regardless of which system is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage (unless the game is executed for a certain period of time after the predetermined system is set), the player cannot grasp which system is set. can be made difficult.

In addition, as the operation contents (operation history) to the frame button 22 referred to in the above-described addition example, for example, operation effect count information for indicating the number of times the operation effect has been executed, the frame button corresponding to the executed operation effect 22, operation success count information for indicating the number of successful operations (the number of times a predetermined operation condition is satisfied), and the period during which the operation effects are not executed (operation Information indicating the state of operation of the frame button 22 by the player, such as invalid operation count information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated outside the effective period, may be used.

Furthermore, as the content of the operation effect, in addition to the pressing effect of simply pressing the frame button 22 within a predetermined period, the timing operation effect of operating the frame button 22 at a predetermined timing, and the operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period. It is also possible to provide a repetitive-hit operation effect to make the user operate, and a long-press operation effect to keep pressing the frame button 22 continuously for a predetermined period or longer. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the operation contents (operation history) to the frame button 22 are managed for each type of the executed operation presentation.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine in detail whether the player simply dislikes operating the frame button 22 or dislikes predetermined operations (continuous hits, long presses, timing presses) on the frame button 22.例文帳に追加becomes possible. Therefore, when setting the operation presentation corresponding to the operation content (operation history), it is possible to provide the operation presentation more suitable for the player, and to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of operation means, each information may be managed for each operation means, or the operation contents for all the operation means may be combined and managed. may be configured. Furthermore, when an operation performance is executed to operate different operation means according to the degree of expectation of a big win, information indicating the number of times of execution of the operation performance and the number of times of operation of the operation means is managed in association with the degree of expectation of a big win. Alternatively, the operation content (operation history) may be managed only for the operation presentation executed when the jackpot is won.

In the above-described additional example, based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) for the operation effect, it is referred to when determining the operation effect mode (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) and the privilege (title) to be given. system and a set value (level) are set, but based on the operation contents of the operation means (frame button 22) , only one of the above-described system or set value (level) may be set.

In the additional example described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. Alternatively, a lever-shaped operation means that can determine that the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or back and forth, or a touch that can determine that it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A sensor-type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used, or a plurality of the above-described operating means may be provided.

As in the above-described additional example, when using a configuration that varies the mode of operation presentation based on the player's operation content (operation history) or grants a predetermined privilege (title), another day It is preferable to configure so that the game can be played while continuing the operation contents (operation history) of the game performed on the day. Information on game content and operation content is configured so that the player can acquire it (password issuing processing), and output information related to the acquired information is input to the pachinko machine 10, thereby continuing from the acquired information. It is preferable to configure so that a game in the state can be played.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 188. FIG. In the above-described first control example, when a special pattern jackpot is won and the variable probability state is set after the jackpot ends, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in the second control example, in addition to the jackpot lottery for judging whether or not special symbols ) (hereinafter referred to as a drop lottery) is executed each time the condition for judging whether a special symbol is true or not is established. In this way, in a gaming machine having a falling lottery function, even if a variable probability state (high probability state) is set, the period in which the high probability state continues reliably is not set, so the special symbol variation is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension every time.

Furthermore, in the second control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when the probability variable state is set, the high probability state in which the probability of the jackpot becomes high and the time-saving state in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open Even if you win the drop lottery and fall from the high probability state to the low probability state, for a predetermined period (for example, after the big win, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times until ) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the falling lottery is won immediately (for example, 3 rotations) after the end of the big win, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (100 rotations), so that the falling lottery is won depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the fact.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and when the fall lottery is won, the special symbol jackpot lottery is executed in a low probability state. be done. That is, if the falling lottery is won in a state exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of special symbol variations is 100 times), the game state is normal at the time when the special symbol variation is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if the effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the player has won the drop lottery is executed using the fluctuation time of the special symbol that wins the drop lottery, the player will fall just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There is a problem that it is easy to determine whether the lottery is successful or not. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state exceeding the above-described predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot ends), a special The game state is shifted to the normal state before the pattern variation is started.

By configuring in this way, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes the operation content of the non-time-saving state in a state exceeding a predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the jackpot). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he has won the fall lottery or the big win lottery, and to make the player have a sense of expectation until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. can.

In addition, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player whether the fall lottery is successful or not by using the continuous effect explained in the first control example. By configuring in this way, the player can pay more attention to the effect that is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 182(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 182(a), the ROM 202 in this control example is different from the ROM 202 in the first control example in that a falling lottery table 202ba and a falling state transition table 202bb are added, and a first win type selection table 202c is added. (See FIG. 107), the game state after the end of the jackpot was defined as "probability variable time short next time", but it is different in that it is defined as "probability variable until fall lottery win, or fall lottery win or short time up to 100 times". , are otherwise the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The falling lottery table 202ba is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the probability changing state to the normal state in the probability changing state of the special symbol (falling lottery). counter value) is stored. In the probability changing state of the special symbols, every time the lottery of the special symbols is executed, the falling lottery table 202ba is referred to and it is determined whether or not to fall to the normal state. Details of the drop lottery table 202ba will now be described with reference to FIG. 182(b).

FIG. 182(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 182(b), a random number value (counter value) determined as a fall in the fall lottery is stored. Specifically, in the special symbol probability state (high probability state), two random numbers (counter value ) are stipulated. In the special symbol probability variable state, when executing the special symbol lottery, the value of the fall lottery counter (not shown) and the random number (counter value) corresponding to the fall defined in the fall lottery table 202ba are compared. , falls to the normal state if the values match. The falling lottery counter (not shown) is a loop counter that is periodically updated within the range of "0 to 299" (for example, each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed). Of the 300 possible random numbers (counter values) of the drop lottery counter, two random numbers determined as a fall are specified, so the probability of being determined as a fall in one drop lottery is 1/150. is. It should be noted that the random number (the value of the first per random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the variable probability state is five of "5 to 9" (see FIG. 106 (a)), and becomes a big hit during the variable probability state Since the probability is 1/48, it is set so that the probability of winning a big hit is higher than the probability of being determined to fall in the falling lottery during the variable probability state. Therefore, once the state is shifted to the variable probability state, the player can expect to win a large number of times before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in the game during the variable probability state can be improved. can.

The falling state transition table 202bb is a state transition table that is referred to when the falling lottery is won during the variable probability state. The description of the same elements as those of the state transition table 202f described in the first control example is omitted.

FIG. 182(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the falling state transition table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 182(c), the fall state transition table 202bb stores a fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 and a fall state transition 2 table 202bb2. Here, the contents of the falling state transition 1 table 202bb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(d).

FIG. 182(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 1 table 202bb1. This fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 differs from the state transition 1 table 202f1 described in the first control example in that a state status in the case of winning the falling lottery is added to each state status. are identical.

Specifically, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (maximum 100), if the falling lottery is won, the state status is set to ST3 (with low probability and short working hours). The value of the number counter remains unchanged. In addition, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0, and the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST1 (no low-probability short working hours).

In other words, even if 100 is set to the value of the specified number of counters, and even if the fall lottery is won before the value of the specified number of times counters is decremented to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of counters is decremented to 0. status is given.

Next, the falling state transition 2 table 202bb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(e). FIG. 182(e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling state transition 2 table 202bb2. This falling state transition 2 table 202bb2 is different from the state transition 2 table 202f2 described in the first control example in that a state status when winning the fall lottery is added to each state status. are identical.

Specifically, when the state status is "ST2a" and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (maximum 4), when the falling lottery is won, the state status is set to ST3a (special with low probability and short working hours), The value of the specified number counter is maintained as it is. Also, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is greater than 0 (up to 96), if you win the fall lottery, the status status is set to ST3 (with low probability and short working hours), and the value of the specified number of times counter continues as is. In addition, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0, and the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST1 (no low-probability short working hours).

In other words, even if 100 is set to the value of the specified number of counters, and even if the fall lottery is won before the value of the specified number of times counters is decremented to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of counters is decremented to 0. status is given.

FIG. 183(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 183(a), the ROM222 in this control example is provided with a continuous production mode selection 3 table 222e instead of the continuous production mode selection table 222e in the ROM222 in the first control example, and final mode selection. The difference is that a final mode selection 3 table 222h is provided instead of the table 222h, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 184(a), the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e will be described. FIG. 184(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e. This continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e is associated with the value of the remaining period (number of remaining fluctuations) stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb for the continuous effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above, The difference is that the response to the continuous effect mode is selected. In addition, if there is winning information indicating jackpot winning in the hold at the time of falling winning, it is a special state that the jackpot is won immediately after winning the falling lottery (jackpot in low probability state), so regardless of the remaining period Instead, the special mode B can be selected to give the player a special effect.

Next, the contents of the final mode selection 3 table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b). FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a final mode selection 3 table 222h; This final mode selection 3 table 222h is different from the final mode selection table 222h used in the first control example in that the final mode is changed according to the setting state of the fall flag 222ba. The points are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 184(b), even if the winning/failing judgment result is a failure, if there is prize winning information indicating a big win winning in the reserve, it is possible to suggest that in the final mode of this time.

Returning to FIG. 183(b), the description is continued. FIG. 183(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 183(b), the RAM 223 in the second control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a fall flag 223ba and a remaining period storage area 223bb are provided. be. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The drop flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the drop lottery has been won, and is set to ON when a state command indicating that the drop lottery has been won is received from the main controller 110. FIG.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in second control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 185, control processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. This control example is different in that a special symbol variation start process 3 (S213) is used instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example described above, and other points are the same. . The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special fluctuation start process 3 (S213) is executed, first, the processes of S301 and S302 are executed in the same manner as the special fluctuation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example. , and the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the fall lottery table 202ba (S351), and whether or not the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random number value corresponding to the fall (lottery result corresponding to the fall (S352).

In the process of S352, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to falling (S352: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state by setting the variable probability flag 203g to OFF (S353), and the falling ( (S354).

Then, in the same way as the special variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, after executing the processes of S303 to S307, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot has been won after a short period of time (S355). Here, when winning after the short period of time (S355: Yes), reset the counter 203h during the short period of time (S356), then S310, S311 in the same manner as the special fluctuation start processing of the first control example (see FIG. 128) , and terminate this process.

As described above, in the second control example, when an advantageous state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, when the special symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, a special symbol lottery (jackpot Before the lottery is executed, a drop lottery is executed for determining whether or not the game state is to be shifted from an advantageous state to a normal state (a game state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state).

Furthermore, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit in a state (probability variable state or time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a high probability state of normal symbols)) in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open, The high probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low probability state before starting the variation of the target special design.

According to the control process of the main controller 110 in the second control example described above, there are two end conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the first end condition is that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number (the number of time saving times given to the set state), and the game state is a probability change. When the state is set, the falling lottery is won as the second end condition, and when the two end conditions described above are met, the high probability state of the normal pattern is ended. . It should be noted that, regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned two end conditions are established, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the end condition of the time saving condition is established.

In other words, for example, if you win a jackpot in which the probability variable state (next time) is set as the game state after the jackpot ends, and the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times, the special symbol has changed 100 times The above-mentioned first end As a condition, winning the fall lottery is the second termination condition described above. Specifically, in the above example, if the fall lottery is won in the 10th round of special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, the second end condition is satisfied at that time, but the first end condition is Since it is not established, the high-probability state of the normal design is continued until the first end condition is established (the special design fluctuates 100 times) (until both of the two end conditions are established). Then, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 times, both of the two end conditions are satisfied, and the normal symbol high-probability state shifts to the low-probability state.

On the other hand, in the state where the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot ended exceeds 100 times (the first end condition is satisfied), the falling lottery is not won (the second end condition is satisfied) If not), the high probability state of the normal pattern continues until the fall lottery is won. Then, when the falling lottery is won (when the second end condition is satisfied), the normal symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state.

In this way, by providing a plurality of (two) conditions necessary for shifting the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state, the state transition timing of the normal design can be diversified. In addition, if only the second end condition described above is not satisfied (in the above example, if the high probability state of normal symbols is set in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 times ), since it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the normal pattern will be shifted to the low probability state (whether the falling lottery will be won), the normal pattern is kept in the high probability state for as long as possible. The game can be played while expecting that

In addition, in this second control example, as one of the conditions for shifting the high-probability state (time-saving state) of the normal design to the low-probability state (normal state), 100 special design fluctuation times are set. However, a plurality of times may be set according to the type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings for ending the high-probability state (time-saving state) of the normal design together with whether or not the falling lottery is won. Specifically, if the fall lottery is won before the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100 times), the number of special symbol variations is a predetermined number ( For example, when reaching 1, 25, 50, 100 times), the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal design ends, and for example 25 times is set as the number of special design fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, When the falling lottery is won in the time saving when the number of times of special pattern fluctuation exceeds 25 times, the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) is terminated immediately.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) ends.

Furthermore, in the second control example, as one of the conditions for ending the high-probability state (time-saving state) of normal symbols, the number of fluctuations of special symbols is used, but other end conditions may be provided, For example, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result (so-called small winning) in which a game that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time is executed (the number of times the variable winning device 65 operates). Or, the number of fluctuations of the special design is measured separately for the special design 1 and the special design 2, and the number of fluctuations of the special design 1 reaches 10 times, or the total number of fluctuations of the special design 1 and the special design 2 reaches 100 times. You may set what was done as end conditions.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed instead of command determination processing (see FIG. 140), and command determination processing 3 (see FIG. The difference is that a state determination process (see FIG. 187) is added as a sub-process, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example described above.

After completing the processing of S3214, next, the state determination processing (S3251) is executed, then the processing of S3215 is executed, and this processing ends. Here, details of the state determination processing (S3251) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this state determination process (S3251), various processes on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 are executed when the falling lottery is won.

When the state determination process (S3251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252). The command indicating this drop is set when the drop lottery is won (S352 in FIG. 185: Yes) by the special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 185) of the main controller 110 (see S354 in FIG. 185). If the command indicating the fall has not been received in the process of S3252 (S3252: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the command indicating the fall is received (S3252: Yes), it is determined whether the present is in the short period of time (S3253). Here, if it is determined that it is in the short working hours (S3253: Yes), then the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3254), and the number of remaining short working hours is calculated (S3255). Then, the calculated remaining time reduction count is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3256).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information that a jackpot has been won in the reserve (S3257), and if it is determined that there is (S3257: Yes), special condition fulfillment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3258). Here, when the special condition establishment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, the special mode B is selected when the continuous effect mode is set using the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e (see FIG. 184).

When the process of S3258 is finished, it is next determined whether or not a command indicating that the game state is normal is received (S3260), and if it is determined that a command indicating the normal state is received (S3260), the player falls It is determined whether the flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261). In the process of S3261, when it is determined that the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261: Yes), that is, when the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state with the falling lottery won If so, the fall flag 223ba is set to OFF (S3262), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3260, if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state has not been received (S3260: No), or in the process of S3261, the fall flag 223ba is not set to ON (it is set to OFF). ) (S3261: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for judging whether a special symbol is appropriate, the variable probability state (that is, a high probability state with a high jackpot probability) to a low probability state with a low jackpot probability. A transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) that shifts (falls). will be explained about the game machine which is executed every time the condition for judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is established. In this way, in a gaming machine having a falling lottery function, even if a variable probability state (high probability state) is set, the period in which the high probability state continues reliably is not set, so the special symbol variation is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension every time.

Furthermore, in the second control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when the probability variable state is set, the high probability state in which the probability of the jackpot becomes high and the time-saving state in which the electric accessory 140a is easy to open Even if you win the drop lottery and the high probability state falls to the low probability state, for a predetermined period (for example, after the end of the big win, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times until ) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the fall lottery is won immediately (for example, three times) after the end of the big win, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period of time, so the player can be notified that the fall lottery has been won depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. It is possible to suppress being grasped by

In addition, although the details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and when the fall lottery is won, the special symbol jackpot lottery is executed in a low probability state. be done. That is, if the falling lottery is won in a state exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of special symbol variations is 100 times), the game state is normal at the time when the special symbol variation is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if the effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the player has won the drop lottery is executed using the fluctuation time of the special symbol that wins the drop lottery, the player will fall just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There is a problem that it is easy to determine whether the lottery is successful or not. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state exceeding the above-described predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot ends), a special The game state is shifted to the normal state before the pattern variation is started.

By configuring in this way, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes the operation content of the non-time-saving state in a state exceeding a predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the jackpot). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he has won the fall lottery or the big win lottery, and to make the player have a sense of expectation until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. can.

In addition, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode that can suggest to the player whether the fall lottery is successful or not by using the above-described continuous effect. By configuring in this way, the player can pay more attention to the effect that is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-described second control example, if the fall lottery is won during the variable probability state and the fall timing is during the short time period, the variation pattern table that is used during the short time period even after the fall is continued. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the fall lottery has been won by selecting the variation pattern using the . Alternatively, another example may be used in which a variation pattern is selected using a special variation pattern table upon winning the drop lottery.

Now, with reference to FIG. 188, the content of the above another example will be described. FIG. 188(a) is a block diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the case of using another example described above. As shown in FIG. 188(a), in the above another example, a post-fall fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is added.

The contents of this post-fall fluctuation pattern table 202d5 will be described with reference to FIG. 188(b). FIG. 188(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the post-fall fluctuation pattern table 202d5. As shown in FIG. 188(b), the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is a variation pattern table that is used for four rotations of the special symbol after winning the drop lottery during a short period of time. The post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is configured so that the variation pattern for 60 seconds is likely to be selected even in the case of a failure. Therefore, immediately after winning the fall lottery, battle reach is likely to occur. As a result, every time a battle reach occurs, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance while having a sense of tension.

In this case, depending on the effect mode of the battle reach, it is preferable to notify the player of the effect of notifying that the fall lottery has not been won at a predetermined rate. Specifically, depending on the battle reach opponent (opponent character) selected, it may be possible to suggest whether or not the fall lottery will be won, and depending on the production (attack pattern) performed during battle reach, the fall lottery The presence or absence of winning may be suggested, or the presence or absence of winning of the fall lottery may be suggested based on the result of the battle reach (remaining HP value at the time of the tie battle reach). As a result, as the outcome of the battle reach, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won, whether or not the falling lottery is won is also a matter of concern, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, when a big win is won during the period when the after-fall fluctuation pattern table is used, it is preferable that a special performance mode is executed as a special win. As a result, the player can easily understand that he or she has won a big win in a low probability state immediately after winning the falling lottery by watching the performance mode executed as a special win. In this case, the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the special win may be set to a variation time that cannot be set in other variation pattern tables. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the immediate hit after the fall due to the sense of incongruity due to the difference in the variation time.

<Description of another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example>
Next, another example of the suggestive effect explained in the above-described first control example will be explained. In the first control example described above, the effect mode of the suggestive effect composed of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is set in the variation display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the timing when the special figure variation is started. The configuration set in the countdown effect setting process (S3810 in FIG. 152), which is part of the process, was used. On the other hand, in this another example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, only the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect) is set, It is configured to set a specific effect to be the target of the current suggestive effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the precursor effect.

By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor production that is the trigger for the start of the suggestive production is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor production is being executed (while the suggestive production is being executed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the effect mode of the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the suggestive effect as compared with the case where the suggestive effect is executed for the predetermined specific effect.

Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, as suggestive effects, there are a sign effect that roughly informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed, and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific performance is set after the suggestive performance is executed (during execution of the portent performance), the suggestive performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

<Control Processing Executed by Sound Lamp Control Device 113 in Another Example of Suggestion Effect>
Next, referring to FIGS. 189 and 190, control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in this example will be described. In this example, the countdown setting process 3 (FIG. 189) is used in place of the countdown setting process (see FIG. 152) in contrast to the first control example described above, and the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 139 S3107) is changed to the processing content of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 190). Other elements are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 189, the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in this example will be described. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810). As shown in FIG. 189, when the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as in the first control example described above are executed, and then the current variation pattern is set. Based on the variable time and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect), the effect mode of the predictive effect is set (S4351), the command for starting the predictive effect for display is set (S4352), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is ON in the process of S4301 (S4301: Yes), the multiple variation effect setting process is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above (S4321), and then this process is executed. finish.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the suggestive effect The start timing of the premonitory effect that serves as a start opportunity is set. As a result, the precursor effect is set without setting the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect.

In addition, in this additional example, it is configured to vary the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the omen effect) according to whether or not the special figure change of this time is a variation pattern that wins the jackpot. Other conditions may be used to set the trigger for the start of the suggestive production (timing to start the predictive production). ) may be set, or a plurality of suggestive performance start timings (starting timings of predictive performances) that can be set for one variation pattern are provided, and the plurality of suggestive performance start timings (starting timings of predictive performances) are provided. A lottery means for performing a lottery for determining the start timing of one suggestive performance (the start timing of the omen performance) may be provided and set based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Furthermore, the start timing of suggestive effect (start timing of predictive effect) may be set based on the contents of the operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 before the start of the current variation of the special symbol.

Furthermore, based on the currently set gaming state, the trigger for starting the suggestive effect (timing to start the prognostic effect) may be varied. Specifically, for example, if the currently set game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variable state), the sign A ( It is preferable to set a point with a short period from the start of fluctuation (see portent pattern A shown in FIG. 100(a)). As a result, in addition to the lottery result of the variation, the currently set game state can be suggested to the player according to the effect mode of the suggestive effect, so that the player is interested in the suggestive effect to be executed. can let In addition, as in the above-described second control example, the pachinko machine 10 having transition (fall) means for transitioning (falling) from the variable probability state most advantageous to the player to the time-saving state without the player noticing. In , since the effect is to suggest the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested.

In addition, as a method of setting the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect), when a variation pattern corresponding to super reach or special reach is set as the variation pattern, a predetermined timing from the start of variation (for example , 5 seconds later, and 10 seconds later), the timing for starting the suggestive effect (starting timing of the prognostic effect) may be set.

As in this additional example, when the suggestive effect is started when the suggestive effect end trigger (countdown effect end timing), that is, the specific effect start trigger (start timing) to be the target of the suggestive effect is not set. Since the effect period of the suggestion effect is not set, there is a problem that the effect mode of the precursor effect cannot be set based on the effect period that is set as in the first control example described above. be.

On the other hand, in this additional example, in the process of S4351, the effect mode of the predictive effect is set based on the change time of the change pattern to be executed this time and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect). It is configured to Specifically, when the current variation pattern is 60 seconds or more and the trigger for starting the suggestive effect (timing to start the predictive effect) is omen A, a long-term predictive effect is selected as the effect mode of the predictive effect. A long production mode (second route Dc2b in FIG. 98(a)) corresponding to the production is set, and in other cases, a short production mode (first route Dc2b in FIG. 98(a)) corresponding to a short-term precursor production is set. A route Dc1a) is set.

In this way, by roughly setting the effect mode of the precursor effect based on the period in which the suggestive effect can be executed (the effect executable period based on the start trigger of the suggestive effect and the fluctuation time of the variation), it will be set later. It is possible to set an effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the specific effect (the effect period of the suggestive effect).

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107) executed in this example will be described. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107), the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed based on the pressing operation to the frame button 22 which is executed while the precursor effect set in the process of FIG. 189 is being executed. Setting processing is performed.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051). ), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the processing of S5051 (S5051; Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the premonition effect period is currently in progress (S5071).

In the processing of S5071, if it is determined that the present is not during the premonition effect period (S5071: No), other processing related to frame button operation is executed (S5078), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5071, if it is determined that the present is during the precursor effect period (S5071: Yes), next, a specific effect corresponding to the content of pressing the frame button 22 is set (S5072).

Here, the processing of S5072 will be specifically described. In this additional example, when the omen effect is being executed (that is, when the display of FIG. 98(a) is displayed), the player presses the frame button 22 in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. An operation presentation to operate is executed. In this operation effect, an effect of varying the movement mode (moving speed and movement position) of the car-like character Dc1 displayed in the sub-display area Ds is executed as an indication effect based on the operation of the frame button 22. . Then, in the secondary display area Ds scrolled corresponding to the movement of the character Dc1, a specific effect suggestion mode for indicating the type of the specific effect set in the current suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific effect suggestion obtained by the character Dc1 is displayed. A specific effect corresponding to the mode is set.

Here, the specific effect suggestion mode displayed in the sub display area Ds during the precursor effect is a mode (for example, with the characters "PUSH" attached) that allows the player to grasp the content of the corresponding specific effect (for example, PUSH effect). displayed). Then, this specific effect display mode is set based on a specific effect (specific effect corresponding to the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery) that can be set in this special figure variation pattern. ), a specific effect display mode corresponding to the "cut-in effect" executed 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and the "PUSH display effect" executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is displayed. be done.

In this additional example, the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed are associated, but the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be set separately. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of specific performance display modes displayed in the operation performance executed during the precursor performance should be acquired to set the suggestive performance period longer. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is grasped by a person. Therefore, even after the end of the operation performance, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the entirety of the suggestive performance, so that the player can continue to enjoy the suggestive performance.

Further, it is also possible to set the execution timing of the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect display mode obtained during the operation effect based on the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result). good. As a result, it is possible for the player to select a desired specific effect, and to motivate the player to participate in the game. Even when such a configuration is used, the timing at which the specific effect selected by the player is executed is based on the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result) as described above. By setting, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance executed during the variation of the special symbols.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. After finishing the process of S5072, the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated (S5073). In the process of S5073, the start timing of the countdown effect (3 seconds in this additional example) is calculated by calculating backward from the execution timing of the specific effect set in the process of S5072, and the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated. calculate. That is, the period calculated in the process of S5073 can be lengthened by quickly operating the frame button 22 during the operation effect executed during the omen effect.

Next, it is determined whether the interval calculated in the processing of S5073 is within 15 seconds (S5074). The mode is set to the short presentation mode (S5075), and on the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S5074: No), the presentation mode of the premonition presentation currently being executed is changed to the long presentation. The mode is set (S5076).

That is, in this additional example, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, first, based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern of this time (variation time, jackpot lottery result), the production mode of the precursor production is roughly set (S4351 in FIG. 189). ), the precursor effect is executed in accordance with the set effect mode. Then, during the execution of the predictive effect, at the time when the specific effect to be the target of this suggestive effect is set, the predictive effect is performed based on the remaining period of the suggestive effect (remaining period of the predictive effect). It is configured so as to vary the mode of presentation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the suggestive effect without discomfort toward the specific effect that is executed during the variable display. In addition, since it is possible to change the display mode of the predictive effect based on the operation content during the operation effect, for example, it is easy to intentionally set the short effect mode as the predictive effect mode (the remaining period of the predictive effect is short). ) The frame button 22 is operated at the end of the operation performance, which is the timing, and you can enjoy whether or not the long performance mode is set (whether or not the current variation pattern is a long variation time), or conversely. A frame button 22 is operated at the beginning of the operation performance, which is the timing when the long performance mode is likely to be set intentionally as the portent performance mode (the remaining period of the portent performance is long), and the portent performance is executed in the long performance mode. can be enjoyed, and an effect can be executed according to the player's request.

After setting the portent effect mode in the process of S5075 or S5076, the countdown effect command for display corresponding to the set effect mode is set (S5077), the above-described process of S5078 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown production setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, the start timing of the suggestive production (the start timing of the omen production) only is set, and a specific effect to be the target of the current suggestive effect is set based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the omen effect.

By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor production that is the trigger for the start of the suggestive production is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor production is being executed (while the suggestive production is being executed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the effect mode of the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the suggestive effect as compared with the case where the suggestive effect is executed for the predetermined specific effect.

Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, as suggestive effects, there are a sign effect that roughly informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed, and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific performance is set after the suggestive performance is executed (during execution of the portent performance), the suggestive performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this additional example, since it is possible to variably set the effect mode of the precursor effect, which is a part of the suggestive effect (effect executed in the first half) in stages, the effect mode of the entire suggestive effect can be changed. It can be set without discomfort. In this additional example, the effect mode of the countdown effect executed as part of the suggestive effect (effect executed in the second half) is fixed (countdown display for 3 seconds), but it is not limited to this. The interval until the specific effect is executed at the timing (see S5073 in FIG. 190) at which the specific effect to be executed this time is set is determined (see S5074 in FIG. 190), and based on the determination result, the effect of the countdown effect It may be configured to set the period (eg, 3 seconds or 7 seconds).

Each of the configuration and technical idea described in the above-described first control example may be added to this additional example described above. You may provide the pachinko machine 10 which respectively has.

<Description when the various effects described in the first control example are used in the second control example>
Next, the contents when the contents of the first control example and the contents of the second control example are combined will be described. Specifically, based on the lottery result of the fall lottery or the preliminary determination result of the fall lottery that is pre-determined based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the first control described above is performed. A description will be given of the contents of setting the effect mode of the various effects described in the example.

In the first control example described above, in the effect setting process during the big hit (see S3302 in FIG. 143) for setting the effect during the big hit, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the entering ball information that wins the big hit in the reserved ball Continuous jackpot effects can be set by referring to the jackpot middle effect selection table 222c based on the determination result of whether or not there is a drop lottery. Alternatively, it is preferable to set the effect during the big win by referring to the pre-determined result of the fall lottery pre-determined based on the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Specifically, a second pre-determining means capable of determining by associating winning information for winning a jackpot and winning information for a falling lottery as look-ahead information in the order in which special symbol variations are executed is provided, and When it is determined as a result of discrimination that the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize information winning the jackpot is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize information winning the fall lottery is executed, continuous jackpot performance is set. It is better to configure it so that it does not. As a result, when the continuous jackpot performance is executed, the prize information retained and stored at that point in time does not include the prize winning information for winning the falling lottery. value can be increased.

Further, when it is determined by the second advance determination means that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning prize information winning the jackpot is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning prize information winning the falling lottery is executed, continuous It may be configured to set a jackpot effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the continuous jackpot performance without executing the fall suggestion performance suggesting that the player has won the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy due to the execution of the fall suggestion effect.

In addition, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the first rotation after the end of the jackpot among the look-ahead information at the time of winning the jackpot contains information indicating that the player wins the falling lottery, the winning information during the jackpot is determined. As an effect, it is preferable not to execute an effect suggesting that a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win. In other words, when the fall lottery is won at the start timing of the special symbol variation in the first rotation after the end of the big win, the player never receives the special symbol big win lottery in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player. In such a state, if an effect suggesting that a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win during the big win, the player will be given an excessive sense of expectation. It will be. When the above-described configuration is used, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation.

Next, in the above-described first control example, a continuous effect (battle effect) for informing the player of the period in which the game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is continuously set can be executed. , the production form of the continuous production (the production form of the production before the battle and the production form of the battle reach) is the lottery result of the special symbol this time, the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and The display mode of the continuous production (battle production) is set based on the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed during one advantageous state (during the variable probability state or the time saving state). In a game machine having a fall lottery configuration, the result of the fall lottery or the prior determination result of the fall lottery that is pre-determined based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also referred to. It is preferable to configure so as to set the effect mode of the continuous effect.

In each control example described above, the variation pattern (variation effect) is set at the timing when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. That is, the setting of the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also configured to be executed at the variation start timing of the special symbols. In this case, since the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e) is subtracted by 1 in order to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the prize is won. There is a problem that the variation pattern (variation effect) cannot be set when the information (read-ahead information) stored in the information storage area 223a reaches the upper limit number.

In order to solve the above-described problem, as a configuration for setting the variation pattern (variation effect) by the sound lamp control device 113, regardless of the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is executed in common. A first variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is preferable to have a second variation pattern setting means for setting two variation patterns (for example, a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a win in the hold), and use the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, only the first variation pattern described above is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140).

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (prefetch information ), and executes a variable performance in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variable performance executed in the first variation pattern. By constructing in this way, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation performance) based on the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

Therefore, when the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit number, it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation effect) based on the prefetch information, and the effect ( read-ahead effect) can be made easier to execute.

It should be noted that, by the second variation pattern setting means described above, the timing at which the process of setting the second variation pattern is executed, even if it is set after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the variation of the special symbol is started Alternatively, the setting timing of the second variation pattern may be varied in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means. By configuring in this way, the timing of setting the look-ahead effect can be changed according to the variation pattern to be executed, so that the player can be motivated to reserve the reserved balls.

Here, as the execution timing set corresponding to the first variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means, for example, a relatively long variation time (variation time of 60 seconds or more) as the first variation pattern When set, the setting timing of the second variation pattern is set 15 seconds after the start of variation, and when a relatively short variation time (variation time of 30 seconds) is set as the first variation pattern, the second variation It is preferable to set the pattern setting timing to 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

In addition, if the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second variation pattern setting means may not be executed. By constructing in this way, when a variable time period during which it is difficult to execute a look-ahead performance is set, the look-ahead performance is not added during the variation, and a performance that is difficult for a player to understand is executed. can be suppressed.

In addition, as a second variation pattern (prefetch effect) that can be set by the second variation pattern setting means, a short effect (for example, comment display notice) executed in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds) and a long period (for example, 20 seconds) and a long effect (for example, a chance stop notice) can be set, the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), by configuring not to execute the second variation pattern setting means, the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is a predetermined period (For example, 10 seconds) or more, the second variation pattern (prefetch effect) can be easily executed by the second variation pattern setting means.

In addition, as described above, when configuring so as not to execute the second variation pattern setting means according to the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means, in the winning information storage area 223a Of the stored prize information, the prize information for which determination of whether or not to set the second variation pattern has already been executed by the second variation pattern setting means and the prize information for which the determination of whether to set the second variation pattern has not been performed are identifiably stored. When the second variation pattern setting means is executed, whether or not the second variation pattern is already set by the second variation pattern setting means among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a It is preferable to perform the setting determination of the second variation pattern by excluding the winning information for which the determination has been performed.

Further, in addition to the above-described example, a prefetch effect execution command indicating that the second variation pattern (prefetch effect) set by the second variation pattern setting means is executed by the display control device 114 is sent from the display control device 114 by a voice lamp. Although it is configured to output to the control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 has set the second variation pattern (prefetching effect), if the prefetching effect execution command cannot be received (prefetching effect was not executed case), the second variation pattern setting means may be executed again for the same winning information in the next variation.

Storage means capable of storing (holding) a plurality of starting prizes (first entrance 64 or second entrance 140) of special symbols, and special symbols based on information (winning information) stored in the storage means. Before the lottery (variation) is executed (before the special symbol lottery conditions based on the winning information stored in the storage means are established), the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means In a gaming machine having a pre-determining means (pre-reading means) that determines in advance, when executing a variation effect (pre-reading effect) based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, in advance There is a configuration of providing an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the special symbol variation of this time based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to set the effect mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means as the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. and the determination result of the winning information stored in the storage means, and the performance that makes the player interested can be executed. However, since the effect mode is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination result when the special symbols start to fluctuate, the effect mode is set in a state in which the number of winning information stored in the storage means has not reached the upper limit number. I had a problem that I had to In other words, the timing of setting the effect mode is the timing of executing the variation of the special symbol using the oldest winning information (winning information used for the next special symbol variation) stored in the storage means (stored in the storage means (the timing at which the number of winning information stored in the storage means is reduced by one), it is not possible to set the performance mode in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit number, and the preliminary determination means There is a problem that the execution frequency of the variable effect (prefetch effect) based on the determination result is lowered.

Furthermore, in the above-described configuration, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbols, the processing of determining the content of the winning information stored in the storage means, and the processing of setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation of the special symbols. Therefore, there is a problem that the processing is concentrated in a short period of time and the processing load increases.

In addition, as a configuration for executing a variable effect (prefetch effect) based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, in addition to the above-described configuration, the above-described preliminary determination means based on the fact that new winning information is stored in the storage means There is also a game machine that executes a determination by and based on the determination result, performs an effect (prefetch effect) for showing a pre-determined result different from the variable display of special symbols.

With such a configuration, the prefetch effect can be executed at the timing when new winning information is stored in the storage means, so the effect based on the determination result of the advance determination means can be performed smoothly. However, since the effect to be executed is an effect for indicating the determination result of the preliminary determination means, the effect indicating the determination result of the special symbol currently being executed and the display content overlap, and the player is not informed. However, there is a problem that the display becomes difficult to understand. Moreover, since control is performed to execute the look-ahead effect at the timing when new winning information is stored in the storage means, there is a problem that the processing load increases temporarily.

In order to solve the above-described problem, as a configuration for setting the variation pattern (variation effect) by the sound lamp control device 113, regardless of the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, commonly executed A first variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. A second variation pattern setting means for setting two variation patterns (for example, a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a win in the hold), and the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration may be used. That is, only the above-described first variation pattern is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140).

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (prefetch information ), and performs a variable performance in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variable performance executed in the first variation pattern. By constructing in this way, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation presentation) based on the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

<Third control example>
Next, another control example of the continuation effect explained in the above-described first control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 90, the first control example described above is configured such that the battle production (pre-battle production and battle reach) is repeatedly executed during high probability (during variable probability state or during short working hours state). . In the control content of the first control example described above, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, a variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or more) that can execute battle reach, and a variation pattern that cannot execute battle reach (Variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds) may be selected continuously. In the above-described first control example, in order to prevent the player from losing interest in the production, a variation pattern that can execute Battle Reach (a deviation variation pattern in which the variation time is 60 seconds or more) is set within a predetermined period. When multiple selections are made (for example, within an interval in which the special symbol fluctuates six times), the battle reach is not executed for the latter fluctuation pattern, so that the battle reach is executed unnecessarily. Although it is configured to solve the problem of lowering the performance effect, the variation pattern that can execute the battle reach and the variation pattern that cannot execute the battle reach are randomly selected based on the lottery results of the special symbols. In the first control example to be selected, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, a variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds) that does not allow battle reach to be executed is continuously selected, resulting in a pre-battle production. However, the problem of long-term persistence remained.

Therefore, in the present third control example, a continuous effect (battle effect) is configured to be executed during the variable probability state as the game state, and a special symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the variable probability state. As a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of variation, a variation pattern table in which pre-battle production is (easily performed) and a variation pattern table in which battle reach is (easily performed) are predetermined. It is configured to be used according to the rules (fluctuation scenario).

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, when the special symbol variation frequency is the predetermined number (for example, the 14th rotation from the end of the big win), the battle reach is always executed. can solve the problems mentioned above. Furthermore, in the third control example, the variation scenario used while the variable probability state is set is configured to be selected from a plurality of variation scenarios with different contents. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game even when using a configuration in which a variation pattern is selected in accordance with a predetermined variation scenario.

Furthermore, in the third control example, a plurality of types of jackpots are prepared for jackpots that provide the same value (contents of the jackpot game, game state set after the jackpot ends), and the selected jackpot type The variation pattern to be executed after the end of the jackpot is selected based on the variation scenario corresponding to. As a result, the variation scenario to be executed after the end of the big win can be set according to the type of the big win, so that the variation pattern in accordance with the variation scenario can be surely selected from the special pattern variation of the first rotation after the end of the big win. be able to.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 202. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the content of the ROM 202 and the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main control unit 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and voice lamp control The difference is that the content of the ROM 222 and the content of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 are partially changed, and the content of the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 is partially changed. are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 191(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 191(a), the ROM 202 in this control example has a variable scenario setting table 202ca added to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and the content of the first hit type selection table 202c is partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 192, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202c in the third control example will be described. FIG. 192 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202c in the third control example. The detailed description of the same elements as those of the first win type selection table 202c used in the first control example described above will be omitted.

In the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example, the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot K) corresponding to the contents of the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed. Subdivided jackpot types (jackpots Aa to Aj) are defined. Specifically, among the values of the first winning type counter C2 "0 to 19" that are defined in association with the "jackpot A", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0, 1" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot Aa", in the range of "2, 3" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot Ab", and in the range of "4, 5", "jackpot Ac” is defined in correspondence, the range of “6, 7” corresponds to “jackpot Ad”, and the range of “8, 9” corresponds to “jackpot Ae”. The range of "10, 11" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot Af", and the range of "12, 13" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot Ag". The range of "14, 15" is defined in association with "jackpot Ah", and the range of "16, 17" is defined in association with "jackpot Ai". 18, 19” is defined in association with “jackpot Aj”.

That is, in the third control example, 10 kinds of random numbers for 20 random numbers for which "jackpot A" is selected among 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot types (jackpots Aa to jackpots Aj) are defined to be evenly distributed, and the selection rate of each jackpot type (jackets Aa to jackpot Aj) is set to 1%.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third control example, when any one of "jackpot Aa" to "jackpot Aj" is selected, the jackpot game (15 rounds) defined in "jackpot A" game) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a game state defined as "jackpot A" is set. Then, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol executed after the end of the big win game is configured to be different depending on the selected big win type (big win Aa to big win Aj). .

By configuring in this way, when a specific jackpot game is set, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game ends can be varied, so that for example, the jackpot type is "jackpot Aa". Selection of ``big win Aj'' makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a shorter variation time as a variation pattern of special pattern variation to be executed after the end of the big win game than when is selected. That is, even if the same game state is set for the same jackpot game content, the number of fluctuations per unit time in the special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot game is finished can be varied depending on the jackpot type. A player who wants to win the next big win as soon as possible can have expectations for the winning big win type until the timing when the special pattern variation is executed after the end of the big win game.

Similarly to the above-described "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "jackpot G", and "jackpot I" defined in the first win type selection table 202c, that is, a high probability after the jackpot game ends State and time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as probability variable state) are given to the jackpot types, and it is defined that "a to j", which are small classifications of each jackpot type, are evenly allocated. On the other hand, "jackpot C", "jackpot H", "jackpot J", "jackpot K", that is, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state and the time saving state are not given (the low probability state and the time saving state are given ) For the jackpot type, a common fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game is completed without defining the small classification (a to j) of the jackpot type. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(a), the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example will be described. FIG. 193(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 193 (a), in this third control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is deleted from the first control example, and the big hit (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1, for the first deviation The difference is that a (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc2, a second outlier (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3, and a special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 are added.

Here, with reference to FIG. 193(b), the (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 for big hits will be described. FIG. 193(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc1. This big hit (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 is a variation pattern table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the game state is the probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 193(b), it is configured to select one of the variation patterns with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 179" in association with a variation pattern (various types of super reach) with a variation time of 60 seconds, and "180 to 198" The range is defined in association with a variation pattern (various types of special reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds. In this third control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the voice ramp control device 113 executes a battle reach (winning battle) in which three attacks are performed (see FIG. 94). When the variation pattern of 90 seconds is selected, a battle reach (victory battle) is executed in which a resurrection effect is performed after three attacks are performed (see FIG. 96).

Next, referring to FIG. 193(c), the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2 will be described. FIG. 193(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc2. This first loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a loss. One.

As shown in FIG. 193(c), in the first outlier (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, the variation pattern with a short variation time (eg, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) is the variation pattern with a long variation time (eg, 60 seconds). It is configured to be more easily selected than the variation pattern. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" in association with a variation pattern (short deviation a) with a variation time of 3 seconds, and "150 to 197" The range is defined in association with a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation b), and "198" is defined in association with a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a). It is

That is, in the first outlier (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, among 199 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the variation type counter C1, for 198 random values (range of "0 to 197") , a short deviation (short deviation a, short deviation b), which is a variation pattern with a short variation time, is defined, and for the remaining one random value (“198”), a long variation pattern with a long variation time Since the deviation (long deviation a) is defined, in most cases (about 99.5%) when selecting a variation pattern with reference to the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, the variation time is short A variation pattern is selected.

In the third control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds (short deviation a) or a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation b) is selected, the sound ramp control device 113 performs a pre-battle effect (Fig. 91, see FIG. 92) are executed, and when "short loss b" is selected, an attack effect (see FIG. 92) for increasing or decreasing the opponent's continuous value (HP value) is executed. It should be noted that, when the "short out a" is selected, without executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent, A production for switching the characters of is executed. Also, when the "outside a" is selected, a battle reach (tie battle) in which three attacks are performed is executed (see FIG. 94).

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(d), the contents of the second deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc3 will be described. FIG. 193(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc3. This second loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a loss. There is one, and as shown in FIG. 193(d), any variation pattern is selected from among variation patterns with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds.

Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 197" in association with a variation pattern (long deviation a) with a variation time of 60 seconds, and "198" A variation pattern (long deviation b) with a variation time of 90 seconds is associated and defined.

FIG. 193(e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc4. This special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the jackpot gaming state is a probability variation state. A variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is configured to be selected. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (ultra-short deviation) corresponds to the entire range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 198”). If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the entire range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 198”), and the variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (ultra-short hit) are defined in association with each other.

Returning to FIG. 191(a), the description is continued. The variation scenario setting table 202ca defines the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)), which is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, in correspondence with the number of variations of the special symbol. It is defined in association with the jackpot type. This variation scenario setting table 202ca, in the jackpot control process executed by the main controller 110 (see S1104 in FIG. 137), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production, that is, the jackpot game end timing (FIG. 137 S1211: Yes), reference is made to set a variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time, and the variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

Here, the contents of the variation scenarios defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. FIG. 194(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable scenario setting table 202ca. This variation scenario setting table 202ca, as shown in FIG. 194(a), corresponds to each variation scenario (variation Scenarios 1 to 11) are defined.

That is, in the third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the big win (special symbol variation executed after the big win ends) according to the jackpot type won and the gaming state when the big win was won. ) can be varied. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, in addition to the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game, the variation pattern set after the jackpot game can also be made different. Interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 194(a), the variable scenario set after the end of the big win is configured to differ depending on the gaming state when the big win is won. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is no time saving state (high probability state of special symbols, common low probability state), any jackpot type (small classification of jackpot type (a to j)) Even if is set, a common variation scenario (variation scenario 1) is set, and if the game state when winning the jackpot is in a time-saving state (special pattern high probability state, low probability state common) , It is configured to set a variation scenario (variation scenarios 2 to 11) corresponding to the set jackpot type (small classification (a to j) of the jackpot type).

By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol variations per unit time is greater in the case of winning the jackpot (probable variable jackpot) in the time saving state than in the case of winning the jackpot (variable probability jackpot) in the state without time saving. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to make the player more conscious of the game state when winning the jackpot, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this third control example, when the jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is elected in the state with time saving, rather than the variation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when the jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is won in the state without time saving Each variation scenario is configured so that the set variation scenario (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) has more special symbol variations per unit time, but not limited to this, for example, no time reduction Each variation scenario may be configured so that the number of times of special symbol variation per unit time increases when a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is won in the state. By configuring in this way, for example, in the production mode that can be set only when winning the probability variable jackpot in the time-saving state, it is possible to run the privilege video for a long time.

In addition, some of the variable scenarios (variable scenarios 2 to 11) that are set when the jackpot (variable jackpot) is won in a time-saving state are converted to jackpots (variable jackpots) in a time-saving state. It may be set so that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is less than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when winning, or when winning a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) without time saving. , It may be configured such that a plurality of variation scenarios are set based on the jackpot type (small classification (a to j) of the jackpot type).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 194(b) to 196(d), the contents of each variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be described. FIG. 194(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 1. As shown in FIG. First, the contents defined in the variable scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 194(b). The variation scenario is referred to when selecting the number of variations of special symbols executed after the end of the jackpot game (that is, one special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game becomes the number of variations 1) and the variation pattern of the variation. is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern table.

Further, in the third control example, as described above, when the jackpot type in which the variable probability state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the corresponding variable scenario is set by the variable scenario setting table 202ca, and the variable scenario is set. It is configured so that the variation pattern is selected according to the contents specified in .

As shown in FIG. 194 (b), in variation scenario 1, table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined as a variation pattern table to be referred to when the number of variations is "1 to 4", and the number of variations A table B (outlier (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined as a variation pattern to be referred to when is "5~".

This variation scenario 1, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), is set when all the jackpots to which the jackpot type (small classification) is given are won in a state where the time saving state is not given as the gaming state. be done. When the variation scenario 1 is set, the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 (table A) (see FIG. 193 (e)) is used during the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big hit, and the special symbol A variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the lottery.

Then, after the 5th round of special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (table B) (see FIG. 108 (d)) is used, and the variation time is 7 seconds to 90 seconds. A variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type CS1. Since the variation scenario 1 is a scenario that is set when the game state is a variable probability state, if a special symbol jackpot is won in a state in which the variation scenario 1 is set, as described above, A variation pattern is selected using the (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc1.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 194(c). As shown in FIG. 194 (c), in the variation scenario 2, the number of variations is in the range of "1 to 4", similar to the above-described variation scenario 1, the table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is associated. table C (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of "5 to 13" for the number of fluctuations, and table D (for the second deviation ( A probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "199", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is associated with nine fluctuations, and the table D (second A deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association. In other words, during the period of "5 to 199" after the end of the jackpot, the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table C is executed 9 times, and then the variation pattern is selected using the table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

By configuring in this way, in the battle production executed during the period in which the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the special symbol variation in which the pre-battle production is executed (short out (short out a , special symbol variation in which short out b) is selected) and special symbol variation in which battle reach is executed (special symbol variation in which long out (long out a, long out b) is selected using table D) , can be set in advance, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the pre-battle effect toward the special symbol variation in which the battle ready-to-win is executed.

Further, in the third control example, when selecting a variation pattern using the table C, a slightly long deviation a (60 seconds deviation variation) is selected. As a result, when a variable scenario is set in advance, the battle reach can be executed at an unexpected timing. As a result, when the battle ready-to-win is executed at an unexpected timing (that is, when a variable time (60 seconds or more variable time) that allows the battle ready-to-reach is selected), the player will receive a big hit. A game can be played while expecting that the player has won the lottery.

In addition, as described above, by setting a variable scenario and making it possible to set in advance the period during which the pre-battle effect and the battle ready-to-win are executed, a long period of time (for example, holding It is possible to set the production mode of the pre-battle production during the period in which the number of special symbol variations greater than the upper limit number of memories is executed), but every time the battle production is executed, the same variation scenario is set every time. There is a problem that the player gets bored with the battle production itself if the production based on the game is executed.

In order to solve such a problem, in the third control example, the jackpot game content (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot ends are the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A"). , a plurality of jackpot types (for example, "jackpot Aa" to "jackpot Aj") are provided in which different fluctuation scenarios are defined, so that the player cannot easily grasp the contents of the fluctuation scenario during the battle production. Configure.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the demerit of scenario creation (monotonous presentation) while having the advantage of creating a scenario of variation patterns (providing a long-term presentation that does not make the player feel uncomfortable). In addition, since the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot is the same for the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A"), a plurality of variable scenarios are configured, To make it difficult for a player to grasp in which variation scenario the special figure variation is executed after the end of the big win even when the player comprehends the game contents of the big win and the game state set after the end of the big win. . Therefore, when the battle reach is executed, it is difficult to understand whether it is a predetermined battle reach (a draw battle) based on a variable scenario or a battle reach (a battle of victory or defeat) based on winning a jackpot. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, for all of the "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "jackpot G", and "jackpot I", the jackpot types given "a to j" are defined. However, the type of jackpot defined for each jackpot may be different. For example, when a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot A" is executed, a specific variation scenario (for example, a variation scenario It may be configured such that only 2) can be set. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing for a long time to grasp the relationship between the game content of the big win and the variable scenario. Therefore, when a battle ready-to-win is executed at a timing different from usual after a specific big winning game (for example, a big winning game corresponding to "big winning A") is finished, expectations for a big winning can be heightened.

Then, a table B (loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in association with the range of the number of variations of the special symbol "200-". By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability variable state continues until the next big win like this control example, it is not necessary to create variable scenarios infinitely, so that the data capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced. can be done. It should be noted that, in this third control example, for the special symbol jackpot probability (approximately 1/48 (see FIG. 106 (a)) in the variable probability state, variation reached when the lottery of 4 times or more of the probability is executed When the number of times "200" is exceeded, the table B (loss (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3) is executed. ) The variation pattern table 202d3) may be executed, for example, when the number of variations reaches “500” when a lottery with a probability of 10 times or more of the jackpot is executed, the table B is used. It is also possible to configure such that selection of the variation pattern is executed.

In addition, in the third control example, when the number of fluctuations "200", which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is exceeded, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed. A table may be used, for example, the selection of a variation pattern using Table A may be configured to be executed until the next jackpot is won, or the number of variations from "200", which is the upper limit of the variation scenario. Selection of the variation pattern using the table A is performed during the period of the number of times "399", and when the number of variations exceeds "400", selection of the variation pattern using the table B is performed until the next jackpot is won. It may be configured as follows.

As described above, in the third control example, the battle effect is executed based on the variation scenario for the special symbol variation within the range of the number of lotteries that can normally win the jackpot. However, when the upper limit of the variation scenario (the number of variations "200") is exceeded, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to execute an effect other than the battle effect. In this case, it is preferable to perform a privilege effect such as providing video and audio that the player cannot normally see, or awarding the points collected by the player. As a result, it is possible to give a special privilege to a player who has not been able to win a big prize for a long period of time. In addition, in the third control example, the above-described privilege effect is executed using a variation pattern different from the variation pattern corresponding to the variation scenario set to smoothly execute the battle effect executed during the variable probability state. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the privilege presentation.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 194(d). FIG. 194(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variation scenario 3. As shown in FIG. This variation scenario 3 is configured such that the period in which the variation pattern is selected using the tables C and D is different from the above-described variation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194(c)). Specifically, in fluctuation scenario 3, the number of fluctuations is defined in the range of "1 to 4" in association with table A (special (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc4) similar to fluctuation scenario 2 described above, and the number of fluctuations Table C (first outlier (probable variable) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of "5 to 9", and table D (second outlier (probable variable) variation pattern table when the number of fluctuations is "10" 202dc3) is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "190", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is associated with five fluctuations, and the table D (second A deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association. In other words, during the period of "5 to 190" after the end of the jackpot, the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table C is executed 5 times, and then the variation pattern is selected using the table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the change scenario is executed can be varied depending on the type of the set change scenario. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a victory battle or a defeat battle), and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Then, as in the above-described variation scenario 2, the table C (first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of variations "190 to 198", and when the number of variations is "199" Table D (second deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined, and table B (loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in the range of the number of variations "200-".

In this way, the period of the pre-battle production corresponding to the last battle reach (the battle reach executed when the number of fluctuations is "199") (the period when the number of fluctuations is "190 to 198") regardless of the jackpot type By unifying, it is possible to easily unify the performance contents to be executed regardless of which jackpot type is set. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to prepare for each jackpot type a production that suggests to the player that the battle production is over (a production that makes the production mode before the battle or the battle reach different from the usual), so the capacity of the production data can be reduced. can be reduced.

It should be noted that there is no need to unify the effects that suggest to the player that the battle effects will end (the effects that make the effects before the battle and the effects of the battle reach different from normal) for all the jackpot types, and at least two The variable scenario must be configured so that the production that suggests to the player that the battle production will end for each of the two jackpot types (the production before the battle and the production that makes the battle reach production mode different from the usual) is unified. , the capacity of performance data can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 4. FIG. In this variation scenario 4, the same contents as the above-described variation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194 (c)) are defined in the period from "1 to 14" for the number of times of variation, and the contents defined after that is configured to be different from the variation scenario 2. In this way, a plurality of variable scenarios define the same content for a predetermined period of time after the end of the big win, and change the content after the predetermined period of time. It can make it more obscure what the volatility scenario is.

FIG. 195(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of variation scenario 5. As shown in FIG. This variation scenario 5 is different from the variation scenarios 2 to 4 in that the variation pattern is selected using the table D after the variation number "1 to 4" in which the variation pattern is selected using the table A. is executed. That is, the battle reach (tie battle) is executed without executing the pre-battle production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of incongruity with respect to the battle presentation as compared with the case where other variable scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win for the battle ready-to-win that is executed immediately after the start of the battle production. Since other contents are the same as those of the above-described fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 195(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the change scenario 6. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 195(c), this variation scenario 6 does not have a period in which a variation pattern is selected using table A, and a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using table D. is set continuously, which is different from other variable scenarios. Other elements are the same as those in the above-described fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, for the above-described variation scenario 6, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the variation scenario, the variation pattern table defined in the variation scenario is made the same, and each variation pattern table is associated with the same variation pattern table. A variation scenario 7 (see FIG. 195(d)) in which only the number of times of variation is different is provided. As a result, even if a variation pattern is selected using the table C after the end of the big win (that is, when the battle effect is started immediately after the end of the big win), the currently set variation is applied to the player. It can obfuscate what the scenario is.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 8 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(a). FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of variation scenario 8. FIG. Variation scenario 8, as shown in FIG. 196(a), is different from the variation scenarios 1 to 7 described above in that the period in which the variation pattern is selected using table A is set longer. . Specifically, the table A is defined in association with the range of "1 to 10" for the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period for selecting a variation pattern using the table A in which a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. jackpot can be provided in a short period of time.

Also, during the period defined in association with this table A, the third symbol display device 81 displays the same display as the extended display of the first control example, that is, the ending screen showing the end of the jackpot game. configured to be displayed. As a result, a series of jackpot effects can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games.

Next, variation scenario 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(b). FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of variation scenario 9. FIG. As shown in FIG. 196(b), this variation scenario 9 is different from the other variation scenarios in that the variation pattern table initially defined after the end of the jackpot is changed from table A to table B. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that the variable probability state is not set as the game state after the end of the big win. After that, when the period defined in association with table B (the period of the number of fluctuations "1 to 4") passes, the fluctuation pattern using table C and table D will be selected in the same way as other fluctuation scenarios. , and since the battle performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the selected variation pattern, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance.

FIG. 196(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 196(c), variation scenario 10 is different from other variation scenarios in that the period for selecting a variation pattern using table D is not set. That is, in this variable scenario 10, since the variation pattern is not selected using the table D during the period in which the battle effect is executed, a predetermined battle reach (tie battle) based on the variable scenario is executed. never be done.

In this variation scenario 10, when the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 when selecting the variation pattern using the table C is "198" and the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is selected Alternatively, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected using the (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 for the big win, the battle reach is executed. . Therefore, when this variable scenario 10 is set, the probability of winning a jackpot when battle reach is executed can be made higher than when other variable scenarios are set.

In addition, in the third control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, and the probability variable big win in which the probability variable state is given as the game state after the big win, and the big win As a game state after the end, there is a normal jackpot in which a normal state is given, and in the battle reach executed during the battle production, a winning battle is executed when the probability variable jackpot is won, and the normal jackpot is won. In this case, a losing battle is executed, and a draw battle is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out.

In other words, when this variable scenario 10 is set, the frequency of execution of draw battles can be reduced compared to when other variable scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the effect when the battle ready-to-win is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Note that if a variable scenario is set without using the table D like the variable scenario 10, there is a risk that the pre-battle effect will be executed for a long period of time. It is preferable to use a table (table C2) that can select a variation pattern with a shorter variation time (for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 to 1 second) than a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 to 5 seconds. . As a result, the period during which the pre-battle effect is continuously executed can be shortened.

Next, variation scenario 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(d). FIG. 196(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 11. FIG. In this variation scenario 11, as shown in FIG. 196(d), the variation pattern table specified first after the end of the big win is the table C, and after a predetermined period of time has passed after the end of the big win (the special symbol changes 249 times It is different from the other fluctuation scenarios in that Table A is defined after the above) and that the upper limit number of fluctuation scenarios is set to "400".

According to the variation scenario 11, as with the variation scenario 10 described above, there is no period in which the variation pattern is selected using the table D, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be won when the battle reach is executed. (the possibility that a winning or losing battle will be executed) can be increased, and the player can be made to pay attention to the contents of the battle ready-to-win production.

In addition, when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot exceeds a predetermined number (399 times), the table A, which has the highest number of fluctuations per unit time, is set as a game state. Dissatisfaction felt by the player when the period during which the jackpot is not won continues for a long period of time (for example, the period during which the special symbol variation is performed ten times as many times as the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability). Feelings can be suppressed.

As described above, in the third control example, a plurality (10 types) of variation scenarios can be set for the same jackpot type in which the same jackpot is executed, and battle reach (draw) based on the variation scenario Battle) and battle reach (victory or defeat battle) based on winning a special pattern jackpot are difficult to understand, but the type of change scenario is not limited to this, and there are more types. A variable scenario may be configured to be settable.

In addition, in the third control example, a variable scenario is determined for all periods during which the battle effect is executed, and the content of the battle effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) can be determined in advance. Only a part of the period during which the battle production is performed (for example, the period between the end of the jackpot and the execution of 50 special symbol fluctuations, or the period of 10 special symbol fluctuations calculated backward from the timing at which the battle production ends) It may be configured to define a variable scenario.

In the third control example, a configuration is used to set the variation scenario of the special symbol variation based on the winning jackpot type. Although the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure, the variable scenario may be set (variable) in the case of a lottery result (so-called small win) that gives a small amount of benefits to the player rather than the big win. Alternatively, the falling lottery means used in the second control example described above may be configured to set (variable) a variation scenario when the falling is won. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern fluctuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), a means for performing a lottery for varying the fluctuation scenario is provided, and the fluctuation scenario is set (variable) based on the lottery result. It may be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 191(b), the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 used in the third control example will be described. FIG. 191(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 191(b), the RAM 203 of the third control example differs from the RAM 203 of the first control example in that a variable scenario storage area 203ca is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The variable scenario storage area 203ca is an area for storing variable scenarios set using the variable scenario setting table 202ca. In this third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. In this variation scenario storage area 203ca, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a variation scenario corresponding to the winning jackpot type is stored, and variation frequency subtraction processing 4 ( (see S452 in FIG. 204). In this way, after the jackpot is won (after the process of starting the variation of the special symbols to indicate that the jackpot has been won), until the special symbol variation after the jackpot is completed. Since the variation scenario is stored in between, the variation pattern of the special symbol to be executed after the end of the big win can be reliably selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 197(a), the ROM 222 of the third control example has the continued value main selection table 222f and the continued value sub-selection table 222g deleted from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. A point, a change scenario storage area 222ca, a first continuous value main selection table 222cb, a second continuous value main selection table 222cc, a third continuous value main selection table 222cd, and a continuous effect mode selection 2 table 222ce. The difference is that they are added. Note that the third control example shows a modification of the continuation effect (battle effect) of the first control example described above. Descriptions of elements that are not related to the production are omitted, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the other elements, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The variable scenario storage area 222ca is an area in which information indicating the contents of a plurality of variable scenarios defined in the variable scenario setting table 202ca of the main controller 110 is stored, and output from the main controller 110. Based on a command for indicating the setting status of the variation scenario (for example, a command for indicating the type of jackpot or a command for indicating the set variation scenario), the voice lamp control device 113 side updates the variation scenario. Information used for management is stored.

This variable scenario storage area 222ca is stored when it is determined in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) of the sound lamp control device 113 that a state command including related information related to the variable scenario has been received (S3271 in FIG. 205: Yes ), the variable scenario corresponding to the received command is read and set in the variable scenario update area 223ca (see S3272 in FIG. 205).

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to synchronize the variation scenario set by the main controller 110 and the variation scenario managed by the audio lamp control device 113, the variation pattern selected in the future by the main controller 110 (Variation pattern selected based on the set variation scenario) can be grasped in advance on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a long-term effect without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, the contents of a plurality of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are determined, and based on the determination result, specific winning information (for example, the third winning information is Winning information in which special symbol variation is executed), long term using the variation period of special symbol variation (special symbol variation performed first and second among winning information) performed before that However, if, for example, a plurality of pieces of winning information are not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it becomes difficult to execute long-term effects. At the same time, the maximum value of the range in which long-term performance can be executed is the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation corresponding to the maximum number of winning information that can be stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so there is a problem that the performance period is limited. was there.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) is scenario managed, and the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) to be executed in the future can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom for long-term production.

In addition, in the third control example, since the sound lamp control device 113 has the variable scenario storage area 222ca, it is not necessary for the main controller 110 to output all the contents of the variable scenario to be set. Information for indicating the variation scenario (for example, information indicating the winning jackpot type, identification information that can specify the variation scenario to be set from among a plurality of variation scenarios) may be output, so the main controller 110 The amount of data to be output can be reduced.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in this third control example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted (when power failure occurs), when the power supply is restored, the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 (or during the period from when the power supply is cut off to when the processing of the main control unit 110 is stopped) is executed to output the game state stored. In the information for indicating the gaming state output in the restoration process, at least the type of jackpot that was previously won and the type of jackpot that is currently set as information for indicating the currently set variation scenario. Information for indicating any of the variation scenarios, information for indicating any of the update status of the currently set variation scenario, and the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the previous jackpot is completed, and It is configured so that As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the game, after the restoration, the update contents of the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 and the variation managed by the sound lamp control device 113 It can be easily synchronized with the update contents of the scenario.

In this case, a predetermined period after the update management process of the variation scenario by the audio lamp control device 113 is restored based on the information output from the main control device 110 as the recovery processing (for example, the special symbol is changed multiple times (five times) and the period until the variation pattern table specified in the variation scenario is switched) are managed by the update contents of the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. It is good to use it as a confirmation period for determining whether the update contents of the fluctuation scenario have been correctly updated. As a result, it is possible to more accurately restore the update management process of the variable scenario. It should be noted that during the confirmation period described above, to indicate that the variation production corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 and the recovery is in progress without being based on the variation scenario. It is preferable to configure so that the recovery display of is executed. As a result, since the third symbol display device 81 can display the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The first continuation value main selection table 222cb is a table that is referred to when updating the continuation value (HP value) when the continuation effect (battle effect) is being executed. period (remaining period) is a predetermined period or more (for example, when the number of special symbol variations until the special symbol variations corresponding to battle reach are executed is 4 or more), it is a table to be referred to.

Here, the method of setting the continuation value in the third control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-described first control example. The first control example described above sets the main continuation value for updating the continuation value in the sound lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. by referring to the corresponding table, calculating a total value by adding the set main continuation value and the sub continuation value, and issuing an information command for indicating the total value to the display control device 114, in the third control example, only the value of the main continuation value is set by the sound ramp control device 113, and the main continuation value set by the sound ramp control device 113 is indicated. An information command including information for is output to the display control device 114, and based on the information command received by the display control device 114 side, a secondary continuation value is set and a total value is calculated.

That is, in the third control example, when the continuation value is repeatedly increased and decreased, only the main continuation value, which is the value managed to correspond to the lottery result of the special symbols and the variation scenario, is selected by the sound lamp control device 113. , and all other processes are executed by the display control device 114 . As a result, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be greatly reduced.

The contents of the first continuous value main selection table 222cb will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first continuous value main selection table 222cb. In the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, the ratio of the selected value (main continuation value) to the value (main continuation value) stored in the current continuation value (continuation value storage area 223n) is different. is stipulated to be

It should be noted that this selection ratio is set by allocating each value to a range (for example, 0 to 199) that can be taken by a dedicated effect counter (not shown). In addition, the first continuation value main selection table 222cb defines the lower limit of selectable selection values to be "400". As described above, in the first continuous value main selection table 222cb, when the value of the remaining number counter is 4 or more, that is, at least four special symbol This is because the table is used when it is necessary to perform a change, so that an unnecessarily low selection value is set and the progress of the continuous value increase/decrease effect is prevented from being delayed. As a result, when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb becomes 3 or less, ie, when battle ready-to-win is about to start, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value can be performed without discomfort.

To explain the contents shown in FIG. 198, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "1000", the rate at which "1000" is selected as the selection value (main continuous value) to be selected. is 5%, "900" is selected by 50%, "800" is selected by 30%, "700" is selected by 10%, and "600" is selected by 3 %, and the rate at which "500" is selected is defined as 2%.

Here, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the increase/decrease of the continuation value (main continuation value) will be described. In the third control example, an effect corresponding to an increase or decrease in the total value obtained by summing the main continuation value selected by the sound lamp control device 113 and the secondary continuation value selected by the display control device 114 is executed. . Since the effect to be executed is configured such that the secondary continuation value is selected so that the range of increase/decrease of the main continuation value and the range of increase/decrease of the total value are the same as in the first control example described above, Substantially, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the selection value (main continuation value) selected using the first continuation value main selection table 222cb.

Specifically, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selected value is "1000", a "check-in" effect is executed to prevent the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen from increasing or decreasing. be done. Note that when a selection value that does not decrease the main continuation value is selected in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, a command to that effect is output to the display control device 114, and when that command is received, The display control device 114 is configured so that the secondary continuation value is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the secondary continuation value is selected even though the main continuation value does not decrease, and the displayed continuation value (HP value) increases or decreases.

Next, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "900" to "500", an "attack" presentation is executed to decrease the opponent's continuation value (HP value). The detailed effect mode of this "attack" effect is set by the difference value between the current main continuation value and the selected value. In the case of 300, "strong attack" is set, in the case of 400, "strong attack" is set, and in the case of 500, "strongest attack" is set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to predict the extent of decrease in the continuation value (HP value) according to the content of the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can be of interest.

Similarly, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "900", the rate of selecting "900" as the selection value (main continuous value) to be selected is 10%, and "800" is selected as 50%, "700" is selected as 30%, "600" is selected as 5%, and "500" is selected as 5%. When the value stored in the storage area 223n is "800", the rate of selecting "800" as the selection value (main continuation value) to be selected is 20%, and the rate of selecting "700". is 50%, "600" is selected at 20%, and "500" is selected at 10%.

Further, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "700", the rate of selecting "900" as the selection value (main continuous value) to be selected is 10%, and "700" is The percentage of selection is 30%, the percentage of selection of "600" is 40%, the percentage of selection of "500" is 20%, and the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "600". , the rate of selecting "800" is 10%, the rate of selecting "600" is 40%, and the rate of selecting "500" is 40%. If the stored value is "500", the percentage of "900" selected is 10%, the percentage of "700" selected is 10%, and the percentage of "500" selected is 80%. When the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "400", the rate of selecting "900" is 30%, the rate of selecting "700" is 20%, and the rate of selecting "500" is The percentage of selection is defined as 10%, and the percentage of selection of "400" is defined as 40%.

As described above, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "700" to "400", the selected value may be higher than the current continuous value. In this case, as an effect executed on the display screen, a "recovery" effect is executed in which the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent increases. By executing this recovery effect, when the continuous value (HP value) decreases unexpectedly, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value) can be continuously executed again.

As described above, the first continuous value main selection table 222cb, which is used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 4 or more, shows the rate at which the effect (weak attack) that gradually decreases the main continuous value is selected. is set higher than the rate at which other effects are selected. As a result, even when the pre-battle effect is executed over a long period of time, the continuous value increase/decrease effect can be advanced. Also, even if the percentage of "weak attacks" selected is set high, similar to the first control example described above, the effect mode executed on the display screen is varied in accordance with the selected secondary continuation value. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentation modes, and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description continues. The second continuous value main selection table 222cc is used when selecting the effect mode of pre-battle effect when the pending win flag 223cc is set to ON, that is, when the special symbol fluctuates several times and then the big win is achieved. table used. Next, referring to FIG. 199, the contents of the second continuous value main selection table 222cc will be described. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second continuous value main selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 199, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc has "777", "333", The difference is that "300" to "0" are added. Differences from the first continuous value main selection table 222cb will be mainly described below. Among the contents defined in the second continuous value main selection table 222cc, the detailed description of elements that are the same as those in the first continuous value main selection table 222cb or that differ only in selection ratio will be omitted. .

The second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured so that '777' and '333' can be selected as the main continuation value in order to inform in advance that winning information corresponding to a big win exists in the reserve. there is When "777" or "333" is selected as the selection value, a dedicated command indicating this is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, the display control device 114 performs secondary continuation. Configured to prevent value selection. As a result, the secondary continuation value is selected even though the main continuation value for indicating the winning of the jackpot is selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, and the displayed continuation value (HP value) can be prevented from increasing or decreasing.

In addition, in the third control example, when a main continuation value for indicating winning of a jackpot is selected, by prohibiting the selection of a secondary continuation value, Although the values ("777", "333") are configured to be able to be notified, other configurations may be used, and when a command related to the main continuation value for indicating the winning of the jackpot is received Then, the display control device 114 is configured to select a secondary continuation value using a dedicated selection table, and when the value (secondary continuation value) selected using the dedicated selection table is "0", Only "777" and "333" may be displayed as continuous values (HP values) on the display screen. In this case, for example, if the main continuation value is "777", the value obtained by adding "23" and "13", or "7" and "17" can be taken by the dedicated selection table described above. is preferably configured so that the value from which is subtracted can be selected. With this configuration, when a value other than "0" is selected as the secondary continuation value, the value of the last digit of the continuation value (HP value) can be set to "0". It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that '777' is selected as the continuous value, and the added value of displaying the continuous value (HP value) for indicating the winning of the jackpot on the display screen. can increase

Further, unlike the first continuous value main selection table 222cb, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc is configured so that selection values from "300" to "0" can be selected. As a result, when the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen in the pre-battle effect becomes less than "300", the player can predict that the battle ready-to-win will be executed soon. . Although the details will be described later, the third continuation value main selection table 222cd (a table used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less) also has "300" to "0" as the selection value, and the second It is configured to be selectable at a selection rate lower than that of the continuous value main selection table 222cc. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of expectation for the big win.

In addition, in FIG. 199, multiple values such as "1000 to 800" are collectively described as the current continuation value and selection value, but in reality, "1000", "900", and "800" have independent contents. are specified, and since the content specified for each is the same, multiple values are listed together.

In addition, in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, a value of "1000 to 800" is selected as a value to be selected when the resurrection effect is executed, regardless of the value of the main continuation value currently set. Set a high percentage. This is because the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured so that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuation values to indicate that a jackpot will be won, and the continuation value (HP value) is restored. In the pre-battle production after the game, the continuation value (HP value) is increased to a range in which the main continuation value indicating that the player will win the big win can be selected, so that the player is encouraged to win the big win again. The game can be played with the expectation that the main continuation value will be selected to indicate.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description continues. The third continuous value main selection table 222cd is for when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less, that is, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the Battle Reach is executed, which is set based on the fluctuation scenario, is 3 or less. This is a table used when selecting an effect mode of pre-battle effect. Next, referring to FIG. 200, the third continuous value main selection table 222cd will be described. FIG. 200 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third continuous value main selection table 222cd.

As shown in FIG. 200, the third continuous value main selection table 222cd has similar contents to the second continuous value main selection table 222cc shown in FIG. The percentage of selecting the main continuation values (“777”, “333”) is set to “0”, the percentage of selecting “0” as the selection value is set to “0”, and the overall The difference is that the rate of selecting low values (“300” to “0”) as the selection value is reduced, and the content other than that is the same with a slight difference in the selection rate.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description continues. The continuous production mode selection 4 table 222ce is a table for selecting the production mode (production mode) of the pre-battle production in the continuous production. Here, with reference to FIG. 201, the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce will be described. FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce. The continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce is different from the continuous effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above, when the upper limit of the variation scenario is reached (the number of times the special symbol is changed is 200 while the probability variation state is set). It is different in that a dedicated effect (mode 6) is selected when the number of times is exceeded). Other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the third control example, a variation scenario is set for the special symbol variation after the end of the big hit, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is determined using the variation pattern table defined in the set variation scenario. configured to be selected. Then, in view of the data capacity of the main control device 110, the variation scenario is set to a range where the number of variations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, the number of times of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability by 5). is constructed so that a variation pattern is selected using a specific variation pattern table (table B) until the next big win is won (see FIG. 194).

In this third control example configured in this way, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the above-described predetermined number of times, it becomes difficult to execute the continuous performance using the variation scenario, so a special performance mode "Mode 6" is selected as the When "mode 6" is selected, the battle production ends, and the variation pattern (see FIG. 108(d)) defined in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (table B) is specified. A performance is performed. As this specific effect, for example, an effect that cannot be seen normally is executed, such as an effect in which a party is held after reconciliation with an opponent with whom no settlement has been reached during the battle effect.

In addition, in this third control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is set to "200" or "400", and only when the period during which the jackpot is not won in the variable probability state is long It is configured to execute the above-mentioned specific effect and give the player a sense of satisfaction. The number of times of variation of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the variation scenario, may be set to "20" only for the specific variation scenario to be performed, so that the above-described privilege effect can be easily seen. As a result, when a plurality of jackpot types (minor classifications "a" to "k") are provided for jackpots (for example, large classification "jackpot A") in which the same jackpot game is executed, games are played for each small classification. It is possible to differentiate the privilege (ease of execution of the specific performance) to be given to the person, and to make the player interested in the winning jackpot type even after winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. Compared to the RAM 223 of the first control example, the RAM 223 of the third control example has a duration counter 223p removed, a variable scenario update area 223ca, a remaining number counter 223cb, a pending hit flag 223cc, and a continuation setting flag 223cd. The difference is that the In addition, in the third control example, since another control example related to the continuous effect of the first control example described above is explained, among the elements defined in the RAM 223, the elements that are not involved in the continuous effect are Description is omitted.

The variable scenario update area 223ca is an area updated and managed so that the sound lamp controller 113 side can grasp the variable scenario set in the main controller 110 and the update status of the variable scenario. This variable scenario update area 223ca is displayed when it is determined in command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 205) that variable scenario related information for indicating a variable scenario set in main controller 110 has been received (FIG. 205: S3271 : Yes), a variable scenario corresponding to the received variable scenario-related information is selected from a plurality of variable scenarios stored in the variable scenario storage area 222ca, the selected variable scenario is set, and a variable display setting process ( 147) is executed, the progress of the variable scenario is updated. Based on the update status of the variable scenario set in the variable scenario update area 223ca, the value of the remaining counter 223cb is set in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). Then, when the jackpot is won, the set variation scenario is cleared (not shown).

The remaining number counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the special symbols until the next battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario, and when the set value becomes 0, the battle reach is performed. is configured to run. This remaining number counter 223cb calculates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the information of the fluctuation scenario update area 223ca in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). The value obtained is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb (S4052 in FIG. 207).

The value set in the remaining number counter 223cb is decremented by 1 (see S4057 in FIG. 207) each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed, and the battle ready-to-win is executed as the continuous effect or the pre-battle effect. It is referenced when determining whether to execute In addition, in the winning information command process (see FIG. 206), if it is determined that there is a winning prize in the pending state (S3251 in FIG. 206: Yes), the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is referred to correspond to the winning state in the pending state. ( S3253 in FIG. 206). Then, when battle reach is executed, the value is set (cleared) to 0 (S4060 in FIG. 207).

The pending winning flag 223cc is a flag for indicating whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a. This indicates that there is prize-winning information for winning a jackpot.

The pending winning flag 223cc is not always set to ON when there is winning information for winning a big win in the winning information storage area 223a. , is set to ON when it is determined that it will be executed before the value of the remaining counter 223cb becomes "0" (S3253 in FIG. 206: Yes). In the continuous value setting process 4 (see FIG. 208), it is determined whether the pending hit flag 223cc is set to ON (see S4151 in FIG. 208). S4151: Yes), the continuation value hundreds place is executed based on the second continuation value main selection table 222cc.

The continuation setting flag 223cd is a flag for determining whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set in the variable probability state, and the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set when set to ON. It indicates that

This continuation setting flag 223cd is determined in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) by determining the setting status (see S4051 in FIG. 207) and determining that it is not set to ON (set to OFF). (S4051 in FIG. 207: No), after the value of the remaining counter 223cb is set, it is set to ON (S4053 in FIG. 207). On the other hand, in the process of S4051 of FIG. 207, when it is determined that the setting is ON (S4051 of FIG. 207: Yes), the process of setting the value of the remaining counter 223cb is skipped. Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value of the remaining counter 223cb is cleared to 0 (see S4060 in FIG. 207).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent resetting the value of the remaining number counter 223cb in a state in which a value has already been set to the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, after setting the value of the remaining number counter 223cb, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is subtracted by 1 (see S4057 in FIG. 207) each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed. The update status of the variable scenario set in the main controller 110 and the update status of the variable scenario managed by the audio lamp controller 113 can be easily synchronized by simply executing .

Also, in the process of S3254 executed in the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 206), a value that does not correspond to the variation scenario, that is, a value that indicates the number of special symbol variations until the winning information for winning the jackpot is executed. When it is set in the remaining number counter 223cb, subtraction based on that value can be reliably executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202, details of the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration provided in the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 202, the display control device 114 of the third control example differs from the display control device 114 of the first control example in that a continuous value storage area 233ca is added to the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 The difference is that a first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 and a second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 are added to the NAND flash memory 234a.

The continuous value storage area 233ca is an area for storing the continuous value calculated based on the display continuous value command received from the sound ramp control device 113. In the continuous value related command process 4 (see FIG. 210), The calculated continuation value is stored (see S7305 in FIG. 210). Then, in the final mode command process (see FIG. 211), when it is determined that the final mode to be executed this time is not the winning battle (S8305 in FIG. 211: No), the stored value is referred to (see FIG. 211). (see S8306 of ).

The first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 are the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (FIG. 117(b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the first control example described above. ) and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)), which is the fourth effect provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the above-described first control example. The difference is that an effect counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is used instead of the counter 223y4.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the third control example>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in this third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, in place of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127), the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used for the above-described first control example, and the variation count subtraction processing (see FIG. 129 (see FIG. 204) in place of the change count subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204), and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 203, the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104). In this special symbol variation process 4, the variation time of the special symbol has passed (S214: Yes) in contrast to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the first control example described above, and the lottery result of this time is a big hit. The difference is that the content of the processing to be executed when it is determined (S216: Yes) is partially different, and the same processing is executed for other elements. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 4 is executed, first, the processes of S201 to S216 which are the same as the above-described special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) are executed. Then, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: Yes), then the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 192) Selected with reference to the jackpot type Set the opening scenario of the specific winning mouth based on. Specifically, the game contents of the jackpot to be executed this time (for example, 15 rounds), the opening period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, the interval period between each round, the last round (for example , 15th round), a scenario is set in which the specific prize winning opening is opened in the current jackpot, including the ending period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot.

When the processing of S217 is finished, next, the variable probability flag 203g and the time saving medium counter 203h are reset (S218), the start of the jackpot is set (S219), and the state command based on the jackpot type is set (S251). Then, the process of S220, which is the same as that of the first control example described above, is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S216, even if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (no) (S216: No), the same process of S221 as in the above-described first control example is executed, and the process of S220 is performed. and terminate this process.

In the process of S251 described above, a state command is set that includes at least information for indicating the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time. The status command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136). It is sent towards device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, it extracts information about the jackpot type from the state command, and responds from the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 222ca of the ROM 222 based on the extracted information. A variable scenario is selected, and the selected variable scenario is stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp which variation scenario is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the big win at the timing when the big win game is started. . As a result, for example, compared to the case of simultaneously outputting the information command indicating the variation pattern at the timing when the big hit ends and the variation of the special symbol starts and the command for indicating the variation scenario set this time, the variation is more reliable. You can set the production corresponding to the scenario.

In addition, in the third control example, the state command set at the start of the jackpot game includes information for indicating the variation scenario set after the jackpot ends. You can also set the production during the jackpot. Therefore, since the effect executed during the big win can suggest to the player the variable scenario to be set after the end of the big win, the player can be interested in the effect executed during the big win. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the content of the variation count subtraction process 4 executed in the third control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a flow chart schematically showing the content of the variation number subtraction process 4. As shown in FIG. The change count subtraction process 4 differs from the change count subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above in that the process for updating the change scenario stored in the change scenario update area 223ca (S451, S452) is added. The difference is in the added point, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the change count subtraction process 4 is executed, the processes 401 to S411 of S3709, which are the same as the change count subtraction process of the first control example (see FIG. 129), are executed. Next, it is determined whether a variable scenario is stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca (S451), and if it is determined that a variable scenario is stored (S451: Yes), the stored variable scenario is updated ( S452), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S451 that no variation scenario is stored (S451: No), this process ends without executing the process of S452.

Here, the contents of updating the variable scenario executed in the process of S452 will be described in detail. First, the variation count subtraction process 4 (see S204) is executed as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process (see S203). As a result, when it is determined that the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation scenario can be reliably updated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 205 to 208, control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, command determination processing 4 (S205) is used instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 140), and instead of the winning information command processing (see S141), , Winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used, and variation count subtraction processing 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of variation count subtraction processing (see FIG. 129). are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, when the process of FIG. 205 is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3214 as in the first control example described above are executed. After the processing of S3214 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the received state command contains relevant information for setting the variation scenario (S3271), and if the relevant information for setting the variation scenario is included, (S3271: Yes), the variable scenario corresponding to the variable scenario related information included in the received status command is selected from the variable scenario storage area 222ca and stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca (S3272). . Then, a display status command is set (S3215), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3271 that the relevant information for setting the variation scenario is not included (S3271: No), the process of S3272 is skipped, the process of S3215 is executed, and this process is terminated. finish.

Next, referring to FIG. 206, winning information command processing 4 will be described. FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information command process 4. FIG.

When the winning information command process 4 is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area (S3231). (S3251). In the processing of S3251, when it is determined that the winning prize is a winning prize (S3251: Yes), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning prize information received this time is based on the place where the prize winning information received this time is stored in the prize winning information storage area. is calculated (S3252).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223cb is greater than the order of variation calculated in the process of S3252 (S3253), and if it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223cb is greater (S3253: Yes) , the value set in the remaining number counter 223cb, that is, the value indicating the remaining number of times (the number of special symbol variations) until the battle reach is executed based on the content of the set variation scenario, has been won as a jackpot. is variably set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until battle reach is executed based on (S3254).

As a result, it is possible to flexibly set and determine the period until the battle reach is actually executed, so during the battle production, the pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed The content (increase or decrease content of the continuous value) can be set based on the remaining period until the next Battle Reach is executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

When the process of S3254 is completed, the on-hold hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S3255), other prefetching processes are executed (S3256), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3251, when it is determined that the winning command received this time is not a winning prize (S3251: No), the processing of S3252 to S3255 is skipped, the processing of S3256 is executed, and this processing ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4. FIG. This continuous effect setting process 4 (S3806 in FIG. 207) is for setting the effect mode of a plurality of effects to be executed during the continuous effect. When the continuation effect setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4051). If it is determined that the continuation setting flag 223cd is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S4051: Yes), then the remaining number counter is set based on the information stored in the variable scenario update area 223ca. 223cb is set (S4052).

Here, the processing of S4052 will be described. The variable scenario update area 223ca stores a variable scenario corresponding to (synchronized with) the variable scenario set by the main controller 110. FIG. Then, using the table D, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol until the special symbol fluctuation in which the fluctuation pattern is selected is executed is calculated, and the calculated number is set in the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb indicates the number of variations of the special symbols until the next battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario.

In the third control example, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is discriminated, and the table for setting the continuation value is varied based on the discrimination result. As a result, it is possible to vary the continuation value set corresponding to the period until the next battle reach is executed (the number of variations of the special symbols). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the continuation value is significantly reduced even though the battle ready-to-win is not executed for the time being (the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is large).

In addition, in a situation where the battle ready-to-win will soon be executed (a situation in which the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is small), the continuation value can be greatly reduced in order to make the player expect that a winning battle will be executed in the battle ready-to-win. can.

Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of times of special symbol variation until the special symbol variation in which Battle Reach is executed is determined in advance based on information (variation pattern information) defined in the variation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to determine the variation of the special symbol that the battle reach is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the content of the winning prize information that is reserved and stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not cause discomfort.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the variation pattern stored with hold, in the special symbol variation that is performed before the battle reach (draw battle) that is determined in advance using the variation scenario is performed, variation Variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is out at 60 seconds (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table (table C) Variation pattern selected when the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired. ) or when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) or more before the special symbol variation is executed, the special symbol A value corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations until is changed is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, even if the battle reach is performed without being based on the variation scenario, that is, even if the battle reach is performed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, in the special symbol variation performed by the battle reach (battle In the pre-production), the continuous value can be increased or decreased appropriately.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description continues. After completing the process of S4052, next, the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4053). As described above, while the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON, the determination processing of S4051 is configured so that the processing of S4052 is not executed. This prohibits the value of the remaining number counter 223cb from being set again in a state in which a value has already been set in the remaining number counter 223cb. Therefore, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb that is not based on the variation scenario (the value of the remaining number counter 223cb that is set corresponding to the special symbol variation that becomes the big hit when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win) is set. Even if the value is

When the processing of S4053 is completed, then, it is determined whether the current variation (special symbol variation) is a hit variation corresponding to a big hit (S4054), and if it is determined to be a hit variation (S4054: Yes), the battle In order to set the effect mode of battle reach, which is the final mode of the effect, the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a hit variation (it is a loss variation) (S4054: No), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223cb is 0 (S4055).

Here, if it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 0 (S4055: Yes), that is, the special symbol variation of this time is a special symbol variation in which battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario (table D If it is a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using, the process proceeds to S4013 described later, and when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is not 0 (1 or more) (S4055: No ) then determines whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (S4056).

In the process of S4056, it is determined whether the variation pattern (long deviation a) with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected using the first outlier (probable variation) variation pattern table (table C), and the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds If so (S4056: Yes), the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of 60 seconds (long deviation a) (S4056: No), the process proceeds to S4057.

That is, in the determination process of S4054 to S4056 described above, whether to set the pre-battle effect or set the battle reach as the variable effect (the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81) set corresponding to the special symbol change this time. Whether or not to set is discriminated, in S4054 it is discriminated whether or not a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, and in S4055 it is discriminated whether or not the battle reach is set based on the special symbol variation scenario. However, in S4056, it is determined whether or not it is a specific lottery result even though the winning lottery for the special symbol is out of the lottery.

When the variation performance to be executed corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is the pre-battle performance, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is subtracted by 1 (S4057), and then S4004 as in the first control example described above. The processing of S4008 is executed, then the continuation value setting processing 2 is executed (S4058), and this processing ends. The contents of this continuous value setting process 2 (S4058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the variation production to be executed in response to this special symbol variation is battle reach (if Yes is determined in any of S4054, S4055, and S4056), the final mode selection table 222h is used. A mode is selected (S4013), the corresponding display final mode command is set (S4014), the continuation effect flag 223r, the continuation setting flag 223cd, and the on-hold hit flag 223cc are set to OFF (S4059), and the remaining counter 223cb is set to 0 (S4060), the contents stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m are cleared (process 4016 of S3709), and this process is terminated.

Next, the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058) executed in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see S3806 in FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process 4 (S4058). In this continuation value setting process 4 (S4058), a process of determining a selection table for selecting a continuation value is executed according to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb and the setting status of the on-hold hit flag 223cc. Thus, by varying the selection range of the continuation value set as the effect mode of the pre-battle effect according to the game situation, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A player can be interested.

When the continuous value setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the continuous value fluctuation timing. In the third control example, in the first deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202dc2 (table C), when the short deviation b with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected, it is determined that it is the continuous value variation timing. . In addition, in the third control example, as the variation pattern of the special symbol, a variation pattern (short deviation b) that is determined to be continuous value variation timing, and a variation pattern that is determined not to be continuous value variation timing (short deviation a ), but without being limited to this, if a lottery means is provided for determining whether or not to vary the continuous value in the sound ramp control device 113, and the continuous value is varied with respect to the same variation pattern. It may be configured to be able to set the case where it is not made and the case where it is not made. Further, when it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (operation means), it may be determined that it is time to change the continuous value. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the process of S4101, when it is determined that it is time to change the continuous value (S4101: Yes), in order to execute the process of setting the effect mode for increasing or decreasing (variable) the continuous value in the current variable effect, S4151 Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the continuation value change timing (S4101: No), the process ends.

In the process of S4151, it is determined whether the on-hold hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151). Here, if it is determined that the on-hold winning flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151: Yes), that is, if there is winning information corresponding to the special symbol that wins the jackpot, the second Based on the continuation value main selection table 222cc, a main continuation value (hundreds digit of HP) is selected (S4157), and the selected main continuation value is a specific value (“333” or “777”). It is determined whether there is (S4158).

In the process of S4158, when it is determined that the selected main continuation value is a specific value (S4158: Yes), display control is performed to display the selected value on the third symbol display device 81 as it is. The device 114 sets a display specific continuation value command to which the effect continuation value (secondary continuation value) is not added (S4159), and ends this processing. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 206, even if there is a special symbol that will win a big hit in the reserve of special symbols, it is possible to wait until the variation of the corresponding special symbol is executed based on the variation scenario. When a battle reach (tie battle) is executed, the pending hit flag 223cc is not set to ON, so the main continuation value is not selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. As a result, it is possible to execute the battle reach (win or lose battle) immediately after the battle reach (tie battle) based on the variable scenario is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player.

As described above, in the third control example, based on the variation order of the special symbols that win the jackpot existing in the reserve and the special symbols in which the battle reach (tie battle) is executed based on the variation scenario, the specific Technically, it is configured so that the value of the main continuation value is selected according to the contents corresponding to the special symbol variation to be executed first, but other configurations may be used, for example, it exists in the reserve. If the type of jackpot is determined in advance, and the determination result is a predetermined determination result (for example, a determination result corresponding to a probability variable jackpot in which a winning battle is performed), or a predetermined determination result (for example, a defeat battle is The selection table for selecting the value of the main continuation value may be different between the determination result corresponding to the executed normal hit and the determination result.

Specifically, for example, when the variation of the special symbol in which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the variation scenario is performed rather than the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot that exists in the reserve is executed first sets a new value of the remaining number counter 223cb to the number of times of variation until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot is executed, and the variation scenario is higher than the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the normal winning existing in the reservation. If the variation of the special symbol in which the battle ready-to-win (draw battle) based on is executed is executed first, the value of the already set remaining number counter 223cb is configured not to be changed. In this way, by varying the value of the main continuation value that can be selected until the battle reach is executed based on the type of jackpot to be executed (probable variable jackpot or normal jackpot), pre-battle production It is possible to predict the type of jackpot by the presentation mode of (1), and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, it may be configured such that the continuation value finally displayed in the battle ready-to-win, which is a draw battle, is inherited as it is to set the effect mode of the next battle effect. As a result, the relevance can be given to the battle effects that are repeatedly executed a plurality of times, and the players can be interested in the effects that are executed over a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the process of S4151, if it is determined that the pending hit flag 223cc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4151: No), then the value of the remaining counter 223cb is 4 or more (S4152), and if it is determined to be 4 or more (S4152: Yes), select the value of the main continuation value (hundreds place of HP) based on the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. (S4153), and the process proceeds to S4154.

Further, in the process of S4152, if it is determined that the value of the remaining count counter 223cb is not 4 or more (3 or less) (S4152: No), the main continuation value is determined based on the third continuation value main selection table 222cd. A value (hundreds place of HP) is selected (S4156), the process proceeds to S4154, a display continuation value command corresponding to the value of the main continuation value selected this time is set (S4154), and the process proceeds to S4155. Transition.

In the process of S4155, the values of the main continuation values selected in the processes of S4153, S4156 and S4159 are stored in the continuation value storage area 223n. As a result, at the next timing of setting the continuation value, the value of the main continuation value selected this time can be read out and a new continuation value can be selected. After finishing the processing of S4155, this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device 114 in the third control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 211. FIG. In this control example, command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) is used in place of the command determination processing (see FIG. 158) in contrast to the above-described first control example. ) in place of continuous value-related command processing 4 (see FIG. 210) and the addition of final mode command processing (see FIG. 211), but other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the third control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuation effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) is configured to be set by the display control device 114 . By setting the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen by the display control device 114 in this way, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. As described above, the main continuation value set based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the variable scenario is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the command for indicating the set main continuation value is displayed and controlled. Since it is configured to output to the device 114, more information than necessary for the display control device 114 (for example, information for indicating the lottery result of special symbols, information for indicating the update status of the variable scenario) information) is not required to be output. Therefore, the load of processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 (processing for setting a continuation value, processing for setting a command to be output to the display control device 114) can be reduced.

First, the contents of command determination processing 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 4. FIG. In this command determination process 4, in contrast to the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above, the process executed when there is a continuous value-related command and whether or not there is a display final mode command are executed. The difference is that a process for determining is added.

When the command determination process 4 is executed, the same processes of S6401 to S6414 as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 158) are executed, and in the process of S6414, it is determined that there is a continuation value related command. If so (S6414: Yes), continuous value related command process 4 is executed (S6451), and the process proceeds to S6401. Continuation value related command process 4 executed in the process of S6451 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no continuation value-related command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is a display final mode command (S6452), and it is determined that there is a display final mode command. If so (S6452: Yes), the display final mode command process is executed (S6453), and then the process proceeds to S6401.

Details of the display final mode command processing executed in the processing of S6453 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6452 that there is no display final mode command (S6452: No), after executing the same process of S6420 as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 158), It shifts to process 6401 of S3709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the continuous value related command process 4 (S6451) executed in the above-described command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuation value-related command process 4. FIG. In this continuation value related command process 4, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while the continuation effect is being executed is set and displayed. A process for displaying the effect to be executed during is executed.

When the continuation value related command process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time includes a specific continuation value command for display (S7351). This specific continuation value command for display is a specific value ("333 , "777") is selected. Although a detailed description will be given later, in this processing, when it is determined that there is a display specific continuation value command, the main continuation value output from the audio lamp control device 113 is displayed as it is on the display screen. is doing. As a result, when a specific value (“333”, “777”) for indicating that a jackpot is won is selected as the main continuation value, the display control device 114 sets the secondary continuation value and sets the main continuation value. To prevent a situation in which a continuation value obtained by summing a continuation value and a sub continuation value is displayed on a display screen so that a player cannot be informed of a specific value ('333', '777') for indicating winning of a jackpot. can be done.

In the process of S7351, if it is determined that there is no display specific continuation value command (S7351: No), that is, if a display continuation value command is received, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the command received this time ) is calculated (S7352), and it is determined whether the calculated continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353). In the processing of S7353, if it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is not 0 (100 or more), a secondary continuation value is selected based on the first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3, and the process proceeds to S7356. Transition. Note that each secondary continuation value defined in the first continuation value subselection table 234a3 is the same as the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117(b)) of the first control example described above. , the description of which is omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7353 that the continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353: Yes), the secondary continuation value is selected based on the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4, and the processing of S7356 is performed. Move to Note that each secondary continuation value defined in the second continuation value subselection table 234a4 is the same as the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)) of the first control example described above. , the description of which is omitted.

Then, in the processing of S7356, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command and the secondary continuation value selected by the processing of S7354 or S7355 are added (S7356). As described above, when the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command is 0, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is greater than 0. Since it is configured to use the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 that defines sub-continuation values that cannot be values (that is, positive values cannot be selected as sub-continuation values), the sound lamp control device Regarding the content indicated by the continuation value (main continuation value) selected in 113 (the content indicating that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is set to "0" and that the probability variable jackpot is won in this battle production) , the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is inconsistent (a value other than "0" is displayed) can be suppressed.

After completing the processing of S7356, next, the sum value stored in the sum value storage area 233k is read out (S7357), and the sum value calculated in the processing of S7356 and the sum value read out in the processing of S7357 are compared. A difference is calculated (S7358). Then, the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), the total value calculated this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process of S7365 is performed. Move to

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7351 that there is a specific continuation value command for display (S7351: Yes), then the total value is read out from the total value storage area 233k (S7361), and the continuation value calculated in the process of S7352 is read. The difference between the value and the total value read out in the process of S7361 is calculated (S7362), the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), and the current calculated The continuous value is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process proceeds to S7365.

After the processing of S7360 or the processing of S7364 described above is finished, then the continuation value calculated in the processing of S7352 is stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca (S7365), and then the continuation value related to the first control example described above is stored. The same processing of S7306 to S7309 as the command processing (see FIG. 164) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the details of the final mode command processing (S6453) executed in the above-described command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the contents of final mode command processing. In this final mode command process, there is a process of setting a battle ready-to-win effect mode (continuous value (HP value) display mode) for indicating the result of the continuous effect (battle effect), and the set effect mode is displayed on the display screen. and a process for displaying are executed.

When the final mode command processing (S6453) is executed, first, the final mode data table corresponding to the received command is determined (S8301). The received command indicates the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118(a)) in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) executed in the sound lamp control device 113. The final mode data table corresponding to the information is read from the character ROM 234 and determined.

Next, the total value stored in the total value storage area 233k, that is, the continuation value (HP value) currently displayed on the display screen is read (S8302), and the initial value of the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read. It is set as value data (S8303). In this way, data related to the continuous value (HP value) that can be set to various values is additionally set for the effect data corresponding to the predetermined number of patterns of the Battle Ready effect effect mode (attack pattern mode). By enabling the configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the effect mode of battle reach.

After completing the processing of S8303, the final result information included in the received command is then read (processing 8304 of S3709), and it is determined whether the read final result is information indicating victory (S8305). Here, as the final result information included in the received command, information indicating the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118(a)) is used to determine the final result. Alternatively, the display final mode command process may be executed including dedicated information for indicating the final result of the battle.

In the process of S8305, if it is determined that the final result is not a victory (defeat or draw) (S8305: No), the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca and the total value storage area are stored. Calculates the difference from the calculated total value (S8306), and changes the subtraction value of the first own attack effect data among the determined effect data of the final mode data table to the subtraction value to which the calculated difference is added. (S8307), and the process proceeds to S8308.

Here, the processing contents of S8306 and S8307 described above will be described. In the third control example, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the main continuation value set by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the special symbol lottery result. , and the secondary continuation value set for the effect in the display control device 114 are added together. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113, thereby enhancing the performance effect. However, in battle ready-to-win where the results of continuous effects (battle effects) are displayed, a situation may occur in which the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is infinitely close to “0”.

In such a case, for example, even if the main continuation value (HP value) of the opponent is not set to "0" based on the lottery result of the special symbol in the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 There is a risk that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen will become "0" due to the effect secondary continuation value set in . That is, while the displayed continuation value (HP value) is large, there is an error between the main continuation value set and managed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. Even if there is, there is no adverse effect on the performance, and rather it has a positive effect of increasing the variation of the performance. An error between the main continuation value set and managed at 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen causes contradiction in the performance result, and execution of performance that makes the player feel distrustful. There is a problem that there is a possibility that

Therefore, in the third control example, when setting the effect mode of the final mode (battle reach) of the continuous effect (battle effect), the final result of the current continuous effect (battle effect) is determined. In cases other than victory, that is, when the opponent's continuous value (HP value) does not become "0", the error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is used as an attack during battle reach. I'm trying to solve it by directing.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the above-described problem caused by displaying the result of the continuation effect (battle effect) while leaving an error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. can be done. In addition, in the third control example, in the first own attack pattern set as the final mode (battle reach) of the continuation effect (battle effect), the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP) displayed on the display screen value), it is possible to share the effect mode of the remaining attack patterns (for example, the second and third attacks).

In addition, if the production mode of the final mode (battle reach) selected this time is set to the mode where the attack pattern is 0 times, the effect that the opponent's continuation value does not decrease during the battle reach. Since it is a mode, even if the error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is not eliminated, the error with the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen will be produced. In order to avoid the problem of inconsistency in the results, the process of S8307 is configured so that the process of changing the attack effect data is not executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8305, if it is determined that the final result is a victory (S8305: Yes), the processes of S8306 and S8307 are skipped and the process proceeds to S8308.

In the process of S8038, the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read from the countdown effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8308). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8308 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8309).

Then, based on the attack pattern display data table included in the final mode data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8309, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8310), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8311). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8312), the final mode command process is terminated, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding another control example of the third control example>
Next, another control example of the above-described third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. FIG. In the third control example described above, by setting a variation scenario based on the jackpot type and selecting a variation pattern based on the set variation scenario, during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, the pre-battle performance and , Battle Reach and was configured to be able to execute effectively. In addition, in order to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the continuous performance executed in accordance with a predetermined variation scenario, a plurality of variation scenarios are prepared and different according to the type of the jackpot. It was configured to select the variable scenario.

The third control example configured in this manner was configured to be able to enhance the production effect of the continuous production, but the storage capacity for storing a plurality of variable scenarios and the setting corresponding to the plurality of variable scenarios. There is a problem that the storage capacity for storing a plurality of jackpot types increases. In particular, the main controller 110 needs to store various processing related to games and data within a limited memory capacity. There is a risk that the players will be put under pressure and, as a result, lose interest in the game.

On the other hand, in another control example of the third control example, even if the number of variation scenarios is reduced, in order to provide a rich variety of continuous effects, the jackpot type In addition to the variation scenario set corresponding to, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result, a variation using a different variation scenario during a predetermined period (for example, 10 rotations of the special symbol variation) Configured for pattern selection.

By constructing in this way, even when one variable scenario is set, the contents of the continuous performance to be executed can be varied depending on the timing when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a specific lottery result. can. In addition, since the performance mode during the continuous performance is set by combining a plurality of variable scenarios, even if the number of stored variable scenarios is reduced, the continuous performance can be executed in a wide variety.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in another control example of the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214, the electrical configuration in this specific control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described third control example in that the content of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially changed and the content of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. is doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 212(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in another control example of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212 (a), in this control example, with respect to the above-described third control example, the point of adding a small hit type selection table 202da, and the contents of the first hit random number table 202a are partially changed The difference is that the content of the variable scenario setting table 202ca is partially changed. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The first winning random number table 202a in this control example provides a range for determining "small winning" in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out. The first hit random number table 202a in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 213(a). FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 213(a), in the above-described third control example, the range of the first winning random number counter value C1 ("5 to 299”), a “small win” is defined for the range of “295 to 299”. When a "small win" is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbols, a privilege which is less than the above-mentioned big win but advantageous to the player is given.

Specifically, control is executed to open the variable prize winning device 65 for a short period of time so that the ball can enter the specific prize winning port 65a. In addition, as described above, since the "small win" can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbols is not a big win, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 when the "small win" is won. It is possible to prevent the state from being set.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 213(b). FIG. 213(b) shows the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. As shown in FIG. 213(b), in another control example of the third control example, a small hit type is set from a plurality. Specifically, among the 100 counter values in total of "0" to "99", the acquired value of the small hit type counter value C5 that can acquire any value is in the range of "0 to 49" , “small win A” are defined in association with each other, and “small win B” is defined in association with the range of “50 to 99”.

Then, when the ``small win A'' is won, a variation scenario for executing a specific variation pattern is additionally set, and when the ``small win B'' is won, the specific variation pattern is performed. It is configured so that additional fluctuation scenarios are not set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b), the contents of the variable scenario setting table 202ca in this specific control example will be described. FIG. 214(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variable scenario A1 stored in the variable scenario setting table 202ca, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stored post-small hit variation scenario.

The variable scenario setting table 202ca in this control example stores only the two variable scenarios described above, and when winning the probability variable jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the variable scenario A1 is set after the jackpot ends. , is stored in the variable scenario storage area 203ca. Further, when a small win is won in the special symbol 2 lottery executed during the variable probability state, a post-small win variation scenario is set and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. After the end of the small win, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the contents specified in the post-small win variation scenario for the number of times of special symbol variation prescribed in the post-small win variation scenario. there is

Although detailed description is omitted, even in this control example, as in the above-described third control example, the variation count subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is executed, and each time a special symbol variation is performed ( In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 203), whenever it is determined that the special symbol variation time has passed, the variation scenario set in the variation scenario storage area 203ca is updated. .

The variable scenario storage area 203ca is configured to be able to store both the variable scenario A1 and the post-small winning variable scenario, and when a small winning is won during the probability variable state, both variable scenarios are subjected to the variable frequency subtraction process 4. (See FIG. 204). Therefore, the variation scenario A1 can be updated irrespective of the number of winning small wins during the variable probability state, and the table B can be set when the number of special symbol variations after the end of the big win reaches 200 times. .

As shown in FIG. 214 (a), the variation scenario A1 is defined in association with the above-described table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) in the range of the number of variations "1 to 4", and the number of variations Table C (first deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of “5 to 13”, and table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in the number of fluctuations “14”. is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "195", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is associated with nine fluctuations, and the table D (second A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association. In other words, during the period when the number of fluctuations in the special design after the jackpot is "5 to 195", the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C, and after executing the special design fluctuation nine times, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

Then, the table C (first deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of variations "195 to 198", and the table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation A pattern table 202dc3) is defined. Then, the range of the number of fluctuations from "200 to" is defined in association with Table B, as in the third control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 214 (b), the variation scenario after the small hit is defined by the above-described table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) associated with the range of the number of variations "1 to 9", A table D (second deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in the range of the number of variations "5 to 13", and a table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined for the number of variations "10". 202dc3) is defined. The variation scenario is terminated when the number of variations exceeds 10 times. When the post-small hit variation scenario ends, the variation pattern of the special symbols is continuously selected in accordance with the content defined in the variation scenario A1, in which the variation scenario is updated at the same time.

As described above, in another control example of the third control example, when a small hit is won as a special symbol lottery result, different variation scenarios occur during a predetermined period (for example, 10 variations in special symbols). Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to vary the variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the timing of winning the small prize. Therefore, it is possible to provide continuous effects of various patterns without preparing a plurality of variable scenarios in advance as in the third control example described above.

In addition, at the end of the variation scenario used when winning a small hit, a variation pattern table (table D) in which battle reach is executed (easily) is defined. This will prevent situations where Battle Reach will not run for a long period of time.

In addition, in this another control example, a configuration having one variation scenario (variation scenario A1) is used as a variation scenario set after the end of the probability variable jackpot, but a plurality of variation scenarios are used as in the third control example described above. configuration may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide continuous effects of more patterns. In addition, in this separate control example, when a small hit is won, the small hit type (small hit A) that sets a different variation scenario and the small hit type (small hit B) that does not set a different variation scenario are the same. Although it is configured to be the ratio (50%) of may be set based on the intervals defined in the variation pattern table (table D) in which is (easily) performed, and the content of the privilege (prize ball) provided when a small win is won.

In addition, in this control example, the same variable winning device (variable winning device 65) is opened in the case of winning a special symbol jackpot and in the case of winning a small prize. The machine 10 may be provided with a second variable prize winning device which is opened only when a small prize is won. In this case, the fact that the second variable prize winning device has been opened should be more difficult to grasp than the fact that the variable prize winning device 65 has been opened. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend this fact, it is possible to provide the player with continuous effects of various patterns without a sense of incongruity. In addition, in this case, the display mode of the third symbol to indicate that the small win has been won is also difficult for the player to understand, for example, at the third symbol stop timing, the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size, or the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size. In the main display area Dm of the 3-pattern display device 81, it is preferable to display a lively effect that is more conspicuous than the 3rd pattern.

In this control example, the first winning random number table 202a is configured so that only the special symbol 2 wins a small win, but the special symbol 1 may also win a small win. In this case, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may have different probabilities of winning a small prize.

In another control example of the third control example described above, as a condition for setting a variation scenario (variation scenario after a small hit) different from the variation scenario (variation scenario A1) predetermined based on the lottery result of the special symbol , shows the case where the special symbol wins a small hit, but when other conditions are met, it may be configured to set a different variation scenario, for example, in the above-described second control example It may be configured such that a different variation scenario is set when the falling lottery used is won.

<Regarding another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, another control example of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 100) described in the first control example will be described. In the first control example described above, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestive effect are set separately, and the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is configured to be adjustable. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect, and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the first half part, the omen The start timing of the performance can be set from a plurality of points, and the suggestive performance is executed without presetting the execution period, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive performance. In the suggestive effect of the first control example described above, the timing at which the specific effect targeted for the suggestive effect is executed is set from a plurality of timings, and the end timing of the suggestive effect (countdown effect) is set based on the execution timing of the suggestive effect. By setting the end timing) and setting the execution period of the suggestive effect, various combinations of suggestive effects can be executed.

On the other hand, in this control example, the suggestive effect is executed without setting the end timing of the suggestive effect, and the predetermined condition (operation content of the frame button 22) is satisfied during the period when the suggestive effect is being executed. Based on this, a specific effect to be a target of the suggestive effect is determined, and a countdown effect is executed toward the determined specific effect. By constructing in this way, the effect mode of the suggestive effect can be changed according to the operation contents of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the execution of the suggestive effect, so that the player can be motivated to participate in the game. can be done.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of suggestive effect in this specific control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is changed according to the operation content of the frame button 22 during the suggestive effect execution. The same elements as in the timing chart (see FIG. 100) showing the flow of suggestive effects in the first control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 215, when the variation of the special symbol capable of executing the suggestive effect is started, 10 seconds after the start of the variation, the precursor display (see FIG. 98(a)), which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is executed for 13 seconds. be done. A button operation effective period is set for the last 8 seconds of the display period during which the foreshadow is displayed, and the frame button 22 is activated during the button operation effective period. Depending on the content of the operation to , the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect, which is the second half of the suggestive effect, is determined.

Specifically, during the valid period of button operation, the comment "Press the button at the right time" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 in response to the display. The timing is discriminated by the operation timing discriminating means. The operation timing discriminating means is configured to be able to discriminate the operation timing of the player with respect to the frame button 22 in a plurality of stages, and the frame button 22 is operated with the best timing (for example, within a range of 0.2 seconds before or after the specified timing). When the operation (hereinafter referred to as button operation B) is performed, and the range deviated from the specified timing from button operation B (for example, the range of 1 second before or after the specified timing, excluding the range of button operation B) The frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter referred to as button operation A) in the range where the frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter referred to as button operation A), the frame button 22 is operated at other timings, or the frame button 22 is not operated (hereinafter, button operation is not performed). (referred to as ) can be at least discriminated.

Here, if the operation timing determination means determines that the button operation is A, that is, if the button operation is performed during the valid period of the button operation, but the operation timing is slightly deviated, it is executed during the current variation effect. A countdown effect is set for the specific effect b (cut-in display executed 26 seconds after the start of variation) among the specific effects to be performed. Specifically, a three-second countdown display is executed as a countdown effect (the values displayed in the second display area of the display screen in FIG. 98(b) are "3", "2", "1", " 0” is executed to count down). Then, at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes "0", the cut-in display, which is the specific effect b, is displayed.

Next, when the operation timing determining means determines that the button operation is B, that is, when the button is operated with good timing during the valid period of the button operation, the specified A countdown effect is set for effect a (PUSH display executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 99)). Specifically, a countdown display for 7 seconds is executed as the countdown effect. Then, at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes "0", the PUSH display, which is the specific effect a, is displayed.

Further, when the operation timing determination means determines that no button operation is performed, that is, when the button operation is not performed during the button operation valid period, or when the button operation is performed at a significantly deviated timing, a countdown effect is executed. Without doing, the suggestive effect ends at the timing when the sign effect ends (fake suggestive effect).

As described above, in this control example, similar to the above-described first control example, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestive effect are set at different timings (conditions). Based on the predetermined conditions (determined results of the operation contents of the frame button 22) that are established during the execution period of the precursor effect, which is the first half part, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect being executed is determined, and the second half part of the suggestive effect is determined. is configured to set the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in this control example, the later the timing at which the specific effects (specific effects a, specific effects b) executed at a plurality of timings are executed, the higher the expectation that the special symbol variation of this time will win the jackpot. configured to be high. Therefore, if the button operation is performed with good timing during the valid period of the button operation, the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect with high expectation for the big win, so that the player can feel at ease.

In other words, FIG. 215 shows an example of a variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed. 215. Therefore, in the variation pattern shown in FIG. , it is not possible to notify in advance whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern in which both the specific performance a and the specific performance b are executed, and the performance proceeds while making the player feel uneasy. Become.

However, when the frame button 22 is operated with good timing during the effective period of the button operation, the countdown effect for the specific effect a is executed, so that the player can play the game without feeling uneasy. can let Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game in which the frame button 22 is operated.

In addition, in this separate control example, in the variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed as one variation pattern, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set to a predetermined condition ( (operation content of the frame button 22), but it may be configured not to display a specific effect that was not targeted for the suggestive effect. In addition, in the variation pattern in which only the specific performance a is executed as one variation pattern, the timing at which the specific performance a, which is the target of the suggestive performance, is executed is determined based on a predetermined condition that is established after the suggestive performance is executed. It may be configured to By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 cannot be operated with good timing, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the content of the suggestive effect to be executed when the frame button 22 is operated with good timing, so that the player is motivated. can be made to operate the frame button 22 .

In the other control example described above, as the content of the operation of the frame button 22 after the suggestive effect is started, an operation effect for operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner is executed during the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect. Then, based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the operation performance, the specific performance to be the target of the suggestive performance is determined, and the performance mode of the countdown performance corresponding to the determined specific performance is set. ing.

In this case, as the operation effect, the display screen of the third pattern display device displays the characters "Press the button at the right time" as a display mode indicating the content of the operation effect, and the index display for indicating the designated timing of the operation effect. It is preferable to display the mode and the movement display mode that moves with the passage of time so as to indicate to the player that the timing at which the movement display mode overlaps the index display mode is the best timing. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the operation presentation in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as a result of operation of the frame button 22 for the operation effect, the movement display mode is stopped and displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is actually operated, and the error from the indicator display mode is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. It is preferable to display characters of "excellent" or "good" for notifying whether the error range is within the allowable range (whether it corresponds to button operation A or button operation B). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the operation presentation in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the example described above, in order to change the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the operation details of the frame button 22, the configuration is such that the error between the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the designated timing specified in advance is discriminated. However, other configurations may be used as long as the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation can be varied based on the specified conditions determined in advance and the actual operation content. The number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (depressed) may be discriminated, and the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be varied based on the determination result. An operation means other than 22 may be provided, it may be determined whether or not a specific operation means is operated among a plurality of operation means, and the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be varied based on the determination result.

In another control example shown in FIG. 215, it is configured to set the effect mode of the suggestive effect (the effect mode of the countdown effect, which is the second half of the suggestive effect) based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the valid period of the button operation. However, in order to achieve the same effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be set based on the timing at which the pressing operation is performed during the valid period of the button operation. A detailed description will now be given with reference to FIG.

FIG. 216(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is varied according to the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the suggestive effect. The same elements as in the timing chart (see FIG. 100 or FIG. 215) showing the flow of suggestive effects in the above-described first control example and another control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 216, in this specific control example, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) set during the precursor effect period, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is determined to be the first half (2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds). separated as possible. 216(b) to (d), the effect mode of the suggestive effect set based on the operation timing (press timing) of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period will be described.

FIG. 216(b) is a timing chart showing the effect mode of the suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the first half (two seconds) of the button operation effective period. ) is a timing chart showing the effect mode of the suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a rendering mode of a suggestive rendering when the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed) during the valid operation period; FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 216(b), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) during the first half (two seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestive effect is the specific effect a. Then, set the precursor period (8 seconds) from the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period to 1 second later, and set the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period to It is set as an execution period (12 seconds) of the countdown effect from 1 second to the timing when the specific effect a is started.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first half (2 seconds) of the switch timing between the first half (2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds) defined in the button operation effective period (8 seconds). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated just before the end of the first half (2 seconds), the timing of switching the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation (switching from the sign presentation to the countdown presentation) is delayed by 1 second. Even if there is, it is possible to execute the process of switching the effect smoothly using the period (1 second) until the effect is switched.

In this case, the button operation valid period changing process is executed to invalidate the operation of the frame button 22 for the latter half (6 seconds) of the preset button operation valid period (8 seconds). As a result, even if the countdown effect is executed during the period in which the button operation effective period is set in advance, the operation to the frame button 22 during the execution can be invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(c), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) within the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestive effect is specified. b, and is set as the execution period (3 seconds) of the countdown effect from the timing when the button operation valid period ends to the timing when the specific effect b starts. Then, if there is no operation to the frame button 22 during the valid period of the button operation, as shown in FIG. An omen effect (13 seconds) is executed, after which the suggestive effect is terminated without a countdown effect (a false suggestive effect).

As described above with reference to FIG. 216, even if it is configured to set the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period, An effect similar to that of FIG. 215 can be obtained.

Note that in the example described with reference to FIG. 216, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (first half, second half), and different times (first half ( 2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds)), but it is sufficient if the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period can be identified. The period may be divided into two or more periods (for example, divided into three periods), or the same time may be set for the divided periods. Also, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (for example, period A (1 second) and period B (1 second)), and the period A and the period B are set alternately. You can As a result, a different suggestion effect is executed even if the timing of the button operation on the frame button 22 is slightly shifted, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example explained with reference to FIGS. Presence or absence of operation, details of operation, timing of operation) are set, but other conditions may be set. Even if the generation timing of the ball entering the opening 140, the ball entering the general prize winning opening 63, and the ball entering (passing) the through gate 67, and the contents of the occurrence are set as predetermined conditions. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player stops shooting balls while the special symbols are changing.

Also, in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example explained using FIG. 215 and FIG. , As shown in FIG. 101 of the first control example described above, it may be configured to execute the suggestive effect across a plurality of special symbol variations.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In this control example, in place of the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), a countdown effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) is provided with respect to the above-described first control example. The difference is that process 5 (see FIG. 218) is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 217, the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5 will be described. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5. FIG. When the countdown effect setting process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a win (S4303), and if it is determined to be a win (S4303: Yes), 26 seconds after the start of the variation Effect b (cut-in) is set, and after 30 seconds, specific effect a (PUSH) is set (S4371), and the process proceeds to S4373.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not winning (S4303: No), the specific effect b (cut-in) is set after 26 seconds from the start of variation (S4372), and the process proceeds to S4373. Transition.

In the process of S4373, the button operation effective period is set in the period of 15 to 23 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (S4373), the precursor effect corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is set (S4374), and the precursor effect command for display is set. (S4375), and the process ends.

Next, the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5. As shown in FIG. When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051). finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been detected (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first predictive effect is currently valid (S5081), and if it is determined that the first predictive effect is valid, (S5081: Yes), the frame button operation-related processing (S5082 to S5088) during the first precursor effect is executed, and if it is determined that the first precursor effect is not valid (S5081: No), the second It is determined whether it is during the effective period of the omen effect (S5089), and if it is determined that the second omen effect is valid (S5089: Yes), processing related to frame button operation during the second omen effect is executed (S5090). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the effective period of the second precursor effect (S5089: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the process (S5082 to S5088) related to frame button operation during the first omen effect will be described. First, the error between the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the designated timing set for the precursor effect is calculated (S5082), and it is determined whether the error is within 0.1 second (S5083). If the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect object (S5084), and the period from 23 seconds to 30 seconds from the start of the fluctuation is set as the countdown effect period (S5085 ), a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode is set (S5077), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error is not within 0.1 seconds (S5083: No), then it is determined whether the error is within 0.5 seconds (S5086). If it is determined (S5086: Yes), the specific effect b is set to the effect mode (S5087), the period from 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of the fluctuation is set to the countdown effect period (S5088), and the processing of S5077 described above to end this process. In the process of S5086, if it is determined that the time is not within 0.5 seconds (S5086: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S5077 described above, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 219, the second precursor effect setting process executed in frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (see FIG. 218) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second precursor effect setting process. When the second precursor effect setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the current period is the first half period, that is, whether the period during which the frame button 22 was operated is the first half period (S5091). In the process of S5091, when it is determined that it is the first half period (S5091: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the object of effect (S5092), the precursor effect period is set to 8 seconds (S5093), and 18 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. A period from seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5094), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first half period (S5091: No), then it is determined whether the current period is the second half period, that is, whether the period during which the frame button 22 was operated is the second half period (S5095). , If it is determined that it is the second half period (S5095: yes), the specific effect b is set as the object of effect (S5096), the sign effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5097), and 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. The period until is set as the countdown effect period (S5098), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5095 that it is not the second half period (S5095: No), the portent effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5099), and this process ends.

<Regarding another example of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the extended display described in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, another example of the extended display processing set after the end of the big win (processing to display the ending display of the big win by extending it even during the special symbol variation period after the end of the big win) will be described. In the first control example described above, when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the extended display is executed, or a predetermined period of time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the extended display is executed When the end condition of the extended display is determined to be satisfied, and if the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol, the third symbol is used. A demonstration display is performed on the display device 81, and the demonstration display is continued until the special symbol variation for which a short period of time (0.5 seconds) is set is completed.

On the other hand, in this another example, before the end condition based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, the end condition based on the elapsed period is established, and after the extended display ends, a short period (0.5 seconds) fluctuation When the special symbol variation with a set time is executed, the variation performance is set based on the remaining number of variations of the special symbol variation with a short-term (0.5 second) variation time. there is

Specifically, a specific period effect is set in which a variable effect is executed for a period longer than the actual special symbol variation period (0.5 seconds). Including), 2 seconds of variable production is set, and if the number of remaining fluctuations in the special design is 3 times (including this fluctuation), 3 seconds of variable production is set, and the remaining fluctuation of the special design When the number of times is 4 (including the current variation), a 4-second variation effect is set.

Then, when the next special symbol variation is executed while the variable performance which is the performance for the specific period is being executed, the performance period of the variable performance in which the remaining period of the already executed variable performance is newly executed. It is set so that the variable effect is rewritten so that

By constructing in this way, when the extended display is executed after the end of the big win, and the special pattern variation executed during the predetermined period (four special pattern changes or 4 seconds) after the end of the big win wins the big win. On the other hand, in the case of setting a short-term (0.5 second) variation time for special pattern variations for a predetermined number of times after the end of the big win, in order to continue the performance during the big win without discomfort, after the end of the big win Even if the special symbol variations are not executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within a predetermined period (4 seconds) of , the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variations can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Here, with regard to the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this example, differences from the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 220 . This example is different from the above-described first control example in that the content of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) is partially changed, and other processes are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing the contents of variable display setting processing 6 in this example. When the variable display setting process 6 is executed, first, the same processes of S3801 to S3804 as the variable display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 147) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223i is not ON (it is OFF) (S3803: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses from when the extended display is executed after the end of the jackpot to when the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (4 times).

In the process of S3871, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is not 1 or more (it is 0), S3811 to S3817, which are the same as the fluctuation display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 147), are executed. Execute the process and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S3871, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871: Yes), then the specific period effect corresponding to the value of the variation number counter 223j is determined (S3872). , sets a specific period effect command for display (S3873), subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j (S3874), and steps S3812 to S3817 which are the same as the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above. , and terminate this process.

As described above, in this example, after the end of the jackpot, the extended display is executed and the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times), in a state where a predetermined period (4 seconds) has passed. , When the special symbol variation is started, since it is configured to execute the specific period effect corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol variations (the value of the variation counter), a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (4 Even if the special symbol variation is not performed a predetermined number of times (four times) within a second), the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation can be performed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when using the configuration of another example described above, the period for executing the extended display (the number of special symbol fluctuations) may be greater than the upper limit number of reserved symbols 2 (4), for example, the extension Set the maximum number of special symbol variations (for example, 0.5 second variation 8 times) that can be executed before the elapsed period (4 seconds), which is one of the display termination conditions, is set as the extension display termination condition. You can As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of continuing the performance during the big win, and to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, after the end of the jackpot, the display is executed after a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times). When a jackpot is won by the special symbol variation, the big win game is started after the special symbol variation of 0.5 second variation is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, 0.5. In addition to the special symbol fluctuation period of seconds, it may be configured to execute the fluctuation performance using the opening period of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the variable production using a period of 0.5 seconds or more, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand production.

<Regarding another control example of the expectation level suggesting effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225, another control example of the expectation degree suggesting effect of the first control example described above will be described. In this control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, an effect period in which the expectation level 1 display Dk1 to the expectation level 3 display Dk3, which are the expectation level display modes displayed in one variable effect, can be displayed respectively. and a period in which the expectation level increase mode Dk4 obtained by summing up the variable amount of each expectation level display mode during the variable performance is set during one variable performance (see FIG. 221), and each performance period is set. It is configured to be able to set an operation effective period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective.

Furthermore, when setting the variable production, when the production mode that does not display the three expectation level display modes is selected, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed using the points acquired by the expectation level increase mode Dk4. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to use the points acquired by the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution, so that the player is motivated. You can participate in games.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, description will be given of the effect contents in the control example for each book. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the flow of the expectation degree suggesting effect in this specific control example. It should be noted that description of elements that are the same as those of the expectation degree suggesting effect of the first control example described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 221, when the variable effect in which the expectation degree suggesting effect is performed is executed, the expectation for notifying the expectation level increase mode Dk4 in the current variable effect is held for 10 seconds from the time point 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. A degree-variable suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 102(b)). At the timing shown in FIG. 221(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 222(a) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 222(a), the display contents displayed during the expectation degree suggesting effect will be described.

FIG. 222(a) is a diagram schematically showing a display example during a period from when the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 is notified until the expectation level increasing effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the value ("3UP" in this figure) obtained as the expectation degree increasing mode Dk4 is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2. Returning to FIG. 221, the description continues. After that, when 33 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, an expectation increase effect is executed in which the first operation effective period of 5 seconds is set (Fig. 221(c). In this state, the The display screen shown is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the first operation valid period, as shown in FIG. The value is displayed as a subtraction. By operating the frame button 22 during each operation effective period in this manner, the display mode of the corresponding expectation degree display can be changed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. It becomes possible. In addition, as shown in FIG. 221, since the expectation level 1 display is displayed across a plurality of operation effective periods, even if the frame button 22 is operated in any operation effective period, , the display mode may vary. As a result, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first operation effective period, if the display mode of the expectation level 1 display Dk1 does not change or if the amount of change is small, that is, in the middle stage of the variable effect (first It is possible to suppress the player's early loss of expectation for the big win during the effective period of one operation.

Next, referring to FIGS. 224 and 225, the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in another control example of this expectation level suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the content of the expectation degree effect setting process 7. FIG. When the expectation degree effect setting process 7 is executed, first, the degree of expectation is selected based on the degree of expectation selection table 222i as in the first control example described above (S4251). Then, based on the selected degree of expectation, points to be given in the degree of expectation increase mode Dk4 are set (S4252), and based on the degree of expectation, effects are executed in each of the first period, the second period, and the third period. A mode is set (S4253).

When the process of S4253 is finished, it is determined whether there is a period (vacant period) during which the production mode is not set in each period (first period, second period, third period) (S4254), and the production mode is set. If there is a period (vacant period) during which the game is not played (S4254: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information indicating a win among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S4255). Here, if it is determined that there is prize winning information indicating a hit (S4255: Yes), during a period (vacant period) in which the production mode is not set, a reserved design variable production mode for varying the reserved design is set. (S4256), the process proceeds to S4257. On the other hand, in the process of S4254, if there is no period during which the effect mode is not set (S4254: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4255 that there is no winning information indicating winning (S4255: No), S4257 is performed as it is. to process.

In the process of S4257, the operation valid period (first operation valid period, second operation valid period, third operation valid period) for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set for each period in which the effect mode is set. It sets (S4257), sets an expectation effect command for display (S4258), and terminates this process.

As described above, in the expectation level effect setting process 7 (S3808), using the level of expectation selected based on the level of expectation selection table 222i, the given points used in the current variable effect and the given points are determined. It is configured to set the effect mode used. Then, whether or not the effect mode using the given points is selected for each of a plurality of periods (first period to third period) defined in association with the variation pattern of the variable effect to be executed this time. (whether or not to set an effect mode) and the effect mode is set based on the content of the effect mode (the type of expectation level display mode to be set, the display mode).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp in which period (first period to third period) which performance mode is to be executed. In addition, since the number of the expectation level display modes whose display mode can be changed using the value acquired as the expectation level rising mode Dk4 during the expectation variable suggestion production period is also indeterminate, it is acquired as the expectation level rising mode Dk4. Even if the value obtained is small (for example, 2UP), if the number of displays of the expected degree display mode to be executed is small, the value acquired as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 for the expected degree display mode is used. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play is lowered due to the performance result during the expectation level variable suggestion performance period.

In addition, in another control example of this expectation level suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. It may be provided in the middle of the variable effect (for example, between the second operation valid period (see FIG. 221(d)) and the third operation valid period (see FIG. 221(e))). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period during which the production using the value acquired as the expectation level increase mode Dk4 during the expectation level variable suggestion production is performed, so that the expectation level increase mode Dk4 has a large value ( For example, when 3) is obtained, the degree of expectation for the big win can be further increased. Also, it may be configured such that the expectation level variable suggestive effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, twice) during one variable effect.

Furthermore, in another control example of this expectation degree suggesting effect, when the effect mode using the given points is not set for a plurality of periods in which the operation valid period can be set, the display mode of the pending symbol as an additional effect However, other contents may be used as the additional effect, for example, values collected by the player (for example, another example of the first control example described above) It is also possible to add an effect for adding the accumulated value (see FIG. 176(c)) explained above or an effect for suggesting the current game state.

Further, the effect selection means that allows the player to select the effect to be executed even when the effect mode using the given points is set for all of the plurality of periods for which the operation valid period can be set. (For example, means for displaying a selection screen for selecting the effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and selecting the effect to be executed by the operation means that the player can operate) Based on this, the effect to be executed may be varied.

In the expectation effect setting process 7 described with reference to FIG. 224, the expectation level variable suggestive effect period is a fixed period of the variable effect (a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 221). Although it is configured so that the expectation effect command is set, as another configuration, for example, based on the determination result of the determination means that determines the expectation selected by referring to the expectation selection table 222i, The period during which the variable expectation suggestion effect is executed is set to a plurality of periods (for example, a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 221, a period after the first period shown in FIG. 221 (40 seconds to A period of 50 seconds)) may be provided with an expectation level variable suggesting performance period setting means for setting any period. As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the expectation level variable suggestive effect is executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Also, the period in which the variable expectation level suggesting effect is executed is set by the above-described variable expectation level suggesting effect period setting means based on elements other than the level of expectation selected by referring to the expectation level selection table 222i. For example, it is possible to set a period during which the expectation level variable suggesting effect is executed based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operating means, or the winning stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It may be configured to set a period during which the expectation level variable suggestion effect is executed based on information included in the information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 . When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051). It is determined whether it is during the period (S5901), and if it is determined that it is during the suspension variable effect setting period (S5901: Yes), a display variable command for varying the suspension design is set (S5902), and subtraction A display command indicating the points to be given later is set (S5903), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5901, if it is determined that it is not in the hold variable effect setting period (S5901: No), it is determined whether it is the first operation effective period (S5904), and it is determined that it is the first operation effective period. If so (S5904: Yes), set a display variable command for varying the first expectation level display (expectation level 1 display) Dk1 (S5905), and set a display command indicating the given points after subtraction. (S5903), this processing ends.

In the process of S5904, if it is determined that it is not the first operation effective period (S5904: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation effective period (S5906), and if it is determined that it is the second operation effective period (S5906: Yes), a display variable command for varying the second expectation display (expectation degree 2 display) Dk2 is set (S5907), and a display command indicating the given points after subtraction is set (S5903) , the process ends.

In the processing of S5906, if it is determined that it is not the second operation valid period (S5906: No), it is determined whether it is the third operation valid period (S5908), and if it is determined that it is the third operation valid period (S5908: Yes), a display variable command for varying the third expectation display (expectation degree 3 display) Dk3 is set (S5909), and a display command indicating the given points after subtraction is set (S5903) , the process ends.

As described above, in this control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the expectation degree 1 display Dk1 to the expectation degree 3 display, which are the expectation degree display modes displayed in one variation effect A performance period in which Dk3 can be displayed respectively and a period in which an expectation level increase mode Dk4, which is a sum of the variable amount by which each expectation level display mode is varied during the variable performance, can be set in one variable performance ( (See FIG. 221), it is possible to set an operation valid period for validating the operation of the frame button 22 for each presentation period.

Furthermore, when setting the variable production, when the production mode that does not display the three expectation level display modes is selected, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed using the points acquired by the expectation level increase mode Dk4. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to use the points acquired by the expectation level increasing mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution, so that the player is motivated. You can participate in games.

It should be noted that the points given in this control example are set so that they can all be used when the frame button 22 is operated during the entire operation valid period, and the fluctuation ends when the frame button 22 is not operated. It may be configured so that time remains, and the contents of the above-described title granting performance may be varied with respect to the remaining grant points at the end of the variation.

The wording "at the start of the jackpot (jackpot game) (during execution)" used when explaining each control example described above means that the jackpot lottery with special symbols is won and the jackpot game is started. It is used as a concept to indicate the timing of when the special symbols are drawn. It is a concept that includes the timing at which the opening period of is started, the timing at which the jackpot round game is started, and the like.

The phrase "at the end of the jackpot (jackpot game)" used in describing each control example described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the jackpot game ends. The concept includes the timing at which the final round ends, the timing at which the jackpot ending period ends, the timing at which the first lottery of special symbols is performed after the jackpot ends, and the like.

If specific timing is not specified in each of the above-described control examples for each wording used in such a concept, any of the above-described timings may be adopted as appropriate.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described in each control example described above may be combined as appropriate, and for example, the pachinko machine 10 having drop lottery means for executing the drop lottery used in the second control example described above. In contrast, a small winning lottery means for executing the small winning lottery used in the third control example described above may be provided.

In addition, the falling lottery means used in the above-described second control example executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the special symbol jackpot probability from a high probability state to a low probability state, but other than that. It may be used to shift (fall) the contents set for the elements of, for example, the probability of winning the normal pattern (second pattern) is shifted (falled) from a high probability state to a low probability state. A lottery for the purpose or a lottery for shifting (falling) the time saving state to the normal state may be executed.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is used as the operation means that the player can operate. Lever-shaped operation means that can be operated by the player in the forward and backward direction, touch sensor type operation means that detects the player's contact (or proximity), and photographing results of the photographing means that photographs the movement of the player. A camera-type operating means or the like may be provided for determining the . Also, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each control example described above, a configuration is used in which various effects to be executed are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing at least two or more of the various effects described in the above control examples , the player may select an effect to be actually executed from two or more executable effects.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine (so-called simultaneous variation machine) in which a lottery (variation) of a plurality of types of special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) is executed at the same time.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Plate Member 620 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member with light, wherein light is incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiation means is increased. A game machine A1, characterized in that it comprises an output increasing means for increasing the output, and the output increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion is provided, and light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member is provided. A game machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflective portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of game machine, for example, by arranging the light transmission member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the display of the liquid crystal display device can be seen by the player through the light transmission member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined game state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. to emit from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or design on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it is difficult to make (display) the pattern or pattern clearly stand out. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiation means not only increases the cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, which causes a problem that other members and equipment are affected by the heat.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since it is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in the light emitted from the light irradiation means, the light reflected by the reflecting portion It is possible to intensify the light emitted from the front of the transmissive member. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, thereby suppressing deterioration of the external appearance.

In addition, the formation position of the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the rear surface of the light transmitting member, or may be inside the light transmitting member.

The gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the emission increasing means comprises an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A2, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiation means is emitted to the side end surface of the light transmission member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the amount of light that is incident on the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member is reduced accordingly. Light collection efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light reaching the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member out of the light irradiated from the light irradiation means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be increased. , patterns and designs can be made to stand out (display) clearly. Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this way, the emission increasing means is provided with an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that when another device in the game area emits light In this case, the outer edge member blocks the light from the other device, so that the light can be suppressed from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the display of a pattern or design on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

A game machine A3, wherein in the game machine A2, the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end face and goes off to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that goes off to the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light transmission member, even if the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member, , the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface can block the light, so that the incident light from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member can be suppressed. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent a pattern or design from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

A game machine A4 in the game machine A2 or A3, characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end face of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmission member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiation means can be emitted. , the light can be reflected by the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

A game machine A5 in any one of the game machines A2 to A4, wherein the outer edge member is made of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A5, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member in the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are made of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It easily permeates to the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member is transmitted between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary between and, so that the light reaching the reflecting portion can be ensured.

A gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmission member.

According to the gaming machine A6, the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front or back surface of the light transmitting member and the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5. The light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected on the front or rear surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive indices of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, light from the side end face of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member, and more likely to be transmitted through the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member with a predetermined gap formed between the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the reflected light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the front or back (boundary with the air) of the light transmitting member, it is possible to secure the light reaching the reflecting portion.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , a curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear that meshes with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and rotates the pinion gear. and a driving means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape A curved rack gear is engraved on the outer edge member, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshing with the curved rack gear on the outer edge member, and a drive means for rotating the pinion gear. Rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, thereby rotating the light transmitting member together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member serves both to condense the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and to transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A7, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotating mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotary mechanism is provided with a plurality of supporting rings guided along the guide grooves, the light transmitting member is exposed to the light through the action of the guide grooves and the supporting rings. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state in which light can enter from the side end surfaces of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light-transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member can be viewed by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can serve both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivoted, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as a mode in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove. A form in which a fixed support wheel slides along a guide groove is exemplified.

In addition, in the game machine A8 subordinate to the game machine A7, the outer edge member having the curved rack gear carved on either the front or the back of the light transmissive member, and the outer edge member having the guide groove recessed on the light transmissive member. Preferably, they are arranged on the other of the front or back, respectively. That is, by arranging the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member, respectively, the light emitted from the light irradiation means does not directly enter the side end surfaces of the light transmission member, This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the rear side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front side and the outer edge member on the back side, respectively, and enter from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member. In addition, by arranging the outer edge member on each of the front side and the back side of the light transmission member in this way, the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and can be suppressed from being incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine A8, the outer edge member is formed so that its outer peripheral side faces the front or rear surface of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the opposing space between the outer edge member and the light transmission member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front or back of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the outer edge member and the light transmission member are formed. Since a guide groove is provided between and facing each other, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by making one inner wall of the guide groove bear on the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, the outer edge member does not need to be formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure described above.

In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member is directed to the front surface of the light transmission member. Alternatively, it can be made easier to reflect on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

In any one of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has a direction in which light is irradiated from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine A10, characterized in that it is disposed so that the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means emits the light. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of the light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front or rear surface of the light transmission member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Irradiation Unit 650 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface of each target member is directed toward the target member, wherein the plurality of light emitting means One or a plurality of elastically deformable substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture Characterized game machine B1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in a posture in which each of the irradiation surfaces faces the target member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015. -29735). According to this game machine, by irradiating light from the light emitting means and making it enter from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting section. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member from a light-transmissive material in a disc shape and forms a reflecting portion, and at the same time, arranges a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disc shape (target member). in such a manner as to surround the object member in a posture directed toward the object, and a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the object member was devised (unknown at the time of filing of the present application).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it was newly found that there is a problem that a plurality of light-emitting means must be arranged around the target member, and therefore the arrangement work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, they are oriented in different directions), the arrangement work is also troublesome from this point of view. .

In contrast, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted on one or more substrate members formed to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined posture in which the substrate members are elastically deformed. Since the base member is provided, by arranging one substrate member on the base member, the work of arranging at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the installation work of the light emitting means.

Further, when the substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is elastically deformed and held in a predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member individually, the work of disposing the light-emitting means can be reduced from this point as well.

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, a block body formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member and arranged on the substrate member is held by the base member.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. Also, it is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and to easily regulate the attitude of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be restrained from being affected by the warpage or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be easily maintained.

In the game machine B2, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, since the light emitting means is arranged in the area of the board member where the block body is arranged, the posture of the light emitting means is the same as the warp of the board member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be more easily maintained.

In the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of the blocks are arranged on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the substrate member positioned between the blocks is elastically deformed so that the base member can be moved. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board member at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since the substrate member is held in a deformed (bent) posture by the base member, the posture of the light emitting means (the direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized compared to the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any one of game machines B2 to B4, the light-emitting means is disposed on the front surface of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is disposed on the substrate member on the side opposite to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the back side.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the object member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

A game machine B6 in the game machine B5, wherein the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front of the board member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front of the board member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front side of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member to prevent damage due to contact with the light emitting means.

In game machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. By arranging the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B7, one of the base body and the block body is provided with a projection, and the other of the base body and the block body has a fitting hole into which the projection is received and fitted. A game machine B8 characterized by being recessed in the.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B7, a projection is provided on one of the base body and the block body, and a fitting that receives and fits the projection is provided. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body and the block body, by fitting the projection into the fitting hole, the block body can be arranged on the base body, and labor for the arrangement work can be reduced. . In particular, when a plurality of blocks are arranged on a substrate member, and the blocks are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture, one of the blocks is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), the substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B8, the block body has a concave portion on the side thereof arranged on the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member accommodates the electronic components arranged on the substrate member. A gaming machine B9, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine B9, in any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a concave portion on the side of the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member is arranged on the substrate member. Since the electronic parts are housed, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Vertical Displacement Unit 800 as an Example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member for displacement. In the machine, an elastic member is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position under the action of gravity. In a state in which the displacement member is disposed on the base member so as to be displaced in a direction, and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. There is known a gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacing member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position (for example, one of the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position and the second position) overhanging the game area, and the motion of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. A production that makes the person visually recognize is performed. However, in the game machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in a direction toward position 2 and is displaced from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravitational force acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, a reciprocating displacement (approximately a single vibration ) can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravitational direction can be the orthographic projection of the uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied to the displacement member from the driving means, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-described displacement (orthographic projection of uniform circular motion). , and the variation of displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, simply by switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, it is possible to increase the variation of the displacement, and there is no need to complicate the structure and control, thus reducing the product cost and improving the reliability. can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the displacement member is formed such that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side moves up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, one end side is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and the other end side is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. When the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released and the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately single vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, such The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement obtained by combining not only a vertical linear motion but also a rotational motion centered on the one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such a displacement member perform interesting displacements.

In the game machine C2, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is a rotating member that is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. and a connecting member whose one end is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and whose other end is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the transmission means includes a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a connecting member whose one end is connected to the position where the displacement member is positioned and whose other end is connected to the displacement member. When the displacement member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) by force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotary member, out of the force in the push-pull direction, can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed, Such a displacement member can be made to perform interesting displacements.

In the gaming machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are in balance, A game machine C4 characterized in that a direction connecting a connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and a connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially perpendicular to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at equilibrium (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in either direction of push or pull from equilibrium. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balanced position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member has a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position is provided. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including A gaming machine C5 characterized in that, when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to , the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact therewith.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the predetermined position of the movable range, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is positioned at the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, so the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled. When the displacement member is caused to reciprocate about the balanced position (predetermined position), it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range, thereby smoothing the reciprocation of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, in the outer range, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member so as to be able to contact and rotate. Rattling between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the game machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the protruding portion is used to suppress looseness between the rotating member and the connecting member, thereby adjusting the posture of the displacement member. While being stabilized, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position toward the second position by the driving force of the driving means, the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion can be avoided, so that the displacement member is acted upon. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is projected toward the center of the game area. , At the first position (retracted position), it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member, improve the appearance and improve durability, and suppress obstruction of the performance of other members. When displacing the from the first position toward the second position (overhanging position), it is possible to rapidly overhang (displace) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. .

In the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are positioned substantially on a straight line. Gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. Since the displacement member is positioned on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction to rotate the rotating member is generated. A condition that does not occur (ie dead center) can be created. Therefore, when displacing the displacement member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, and to displace the displacement member smoothly (quickly). After being placed at the position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member due to the action of the dead point described above, thereby improving the appearance and improving the durability.

In any one of game machines C3 to C7, the connection member includes a contact portion formed to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion corresponds to a connection position between the displacement member and the base member and the rotation position. It is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member and on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Game machine C8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connection member has an abutment portion formed to be able to abut against the base member, and the abutment portion includes the displacement member and the base. Since it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , when the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the abutting portion of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion between the rotating member and the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member are rotatable). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to the. As a result, the driving force of the drive means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the driving means comprises first driving means and second driving means. and two driving means, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. A game machine D1 characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in different manners.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and which performs an effect by displacing the displacement member. (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is arranged at a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area. An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the player visually recognizes the motion of the displaced member displaced toward the extended position.

However, the conventional game machine has a problem that the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional game machine, the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, so the production by the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. As a result, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is increased or decreased, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the two driving means, the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, the effect is not one pattern, and one displacement member is used in at least two ways. Since it can be displaced in the same displacement mode, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first drive means, and a first member slidably displaceably disposed on the base member and driven by the second drive means and a second member driven by a second member, wherein the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are respectively connected to the first member and the second member so as to be at least rotatable. .

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the first member slidably displaceably arranged on the base member and driven by the first drive means and the first member slidably displaceable on the base member and a second member driven by the second drive means, wherein the first and second portions of the displacement member are at least rotatably coupled to the first and second members, respectively, so that the When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the driving force of the second driving means causes the second member to slide. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by having the same rotation center and different rotation directions, but different rotation directions and different rotation centers. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, making it easier to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from either the first portion of the displacement member or the first member is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion of the displacement member and the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means or the driving force of the second driving means. Depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced by the above, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, there is no need for a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement along a curved trajectory. Therefore, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are curvedly displaced. ), for example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operational reliability.

A gaming machine D4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, since the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, the first driving means or the second driving means can be used. In addition to a displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (e.g., traverse) the entire displacement member. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, by switching the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are made different, and the kind of displacement itself is made different. (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, making it easier to surprise the player.

In the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member is different from the displacement speed of the second member. A gaming machine D5 characterized by speed.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is set to a different displacement speed, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be displaced (linearly moved) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, and can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacing member in a displacing manner in which such rotary motion and linear motion are combined in the conventional configuration in which the displacing member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , as in the present invention, it has become possible for the first time to utilize two driving means.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member is provided displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D5, the second displacement member is provided displaceably on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the second displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. , the device (variation) between the displacement mode by the first driving means and the displacement mode by the second driving means can be enlarged. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Unit 5600 as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light and light irradiation means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable. , a game machine E1 characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of them.

Here, a game comprising a displacement member displaceably formed between a first position and a second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacing the displacement member. machine is known (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this game machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is provided inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a translucent material is provided on the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light portion from the back side by the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (light-transmitting portion) emits light. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the light irradiating means irradiates the target member in a constant manner, there is little change in the manner in which the player visually recognizes it, and there is a problem that it is difficult to make the game interesting.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means changes depending on the displacement of one or both. It is possible to change the mode of visual recognition by the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

Examples of the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed include a form in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and a form in which the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. Examples include a form in which two parts are combined, a form in which these are combined, and the like.

A gaming machine E2 in which the gaming machine E1 comprises a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member. The target wiring can be kept in a fixed state, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

The gaming machine E2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, allowing the player to visually recognize a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and is formed with a reflecting portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. A game machine E3 characterized by.

Here, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, it is possible for the player to visually recognize different portions of the target member through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first group out of a plurality of groups constituting the reflective part can be visually recognized through the opening, and a second group, which is a group different from the first group, is the opening. When the target member is displaceable between a second position and a second position that is visible through While allowing the player to visually recognize the formed first pattern or pattern, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. , to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is made of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. Gaming machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and can rotate about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape on the base member. Therefore, compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced, the target member is arranged while securing the number of patterns and patterns that are visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. can reduce the space required for

In the game machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front and has a reflecting portion, and receives the light emitted from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. , the game machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape and has a reflective portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and is projected from the side end face. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the center of rotation of the target member.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( irrespective of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant. That is, it is possible to stably form patterns and patterns displayed by light emitted from the front of the target member.

A game machine E7 in which the game machine E1 comprises a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member, so that the combination of the displacements of the two allows the light irradiation means to move the target member. It is possible to increase the variation of changes in the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the manner in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make the player more interested.

In the gaming machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace the target member is provided, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E7, it is provided with a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means displaces the object by the driving force applied from the driving means. Since the member is displaced together with the target member when the member is brought into contact with the target member, it can be used as a drive unit for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a drive unit for displacing the light irradiation unit. can.

<Feature F group> (Free setting of countdown notice)
effect period setting means for setting one effect period out of different effect periods; specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a specific period set within the one effect period; a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for notifying in advance that a specific effect is to be executed; and notification effect setting means for setting a trigger for ending the notification effect based on information.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, a game configured to be able to execute a pre-notification effect (countdown effect) for notifying the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) is executed among the effects to be executed for a predetermined period. there is a machine (For example, JP-A-2013-198568).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect is to be executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for the big win. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is to be executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set. There is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the performance. In addition, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-described configuration, while the advance notification effect is being executed, the effect mode of the advance notification effect is varied (for example, the specific effect that is the target of the advance notification effect is varied). ), and the production effect cannot be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, as the execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is to be executed, the notification effect setting means sets the start opportunity based on the first information, and sets the start opportunity based on the second information. A termination trigger is set. As a result, the period for executing the information performance is set based on a plurality of different information, so that the period for executing the information performance can be freely set and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 has execution information determining means for determining execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information determining means as the second information. The game machine F2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that the specific production is to be executed is set as the second information, and the timing for ending the notification production is set. You can set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period in which the notification performance is executed, and at the same time, it is possible to execute the notification performance corresponding to the specific performance to be executed, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the execution information discriminating means discriminates at least the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that the specific production is to be executed is set as the second information, and the end timing of the notification production is set. You can set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the timing at which the specific performance is executed while allowing the period in which the notification performance is executed to be freely set, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F2 or F3 has specific effect setting means for setting one specific effect out of a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A gaming machine F4 characterized by:

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set the notification effect in accordance with the timing at which the specific effect is executed for a plurality of specific effects with different execution timings. can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the period during which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means sets the timing for setting the start timing of the notification effect based on the first information to be different from the timing for setting the timing to start the notification effect based on the second information, and sets the timing for ending the notification effect based on the second information. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that it sets .

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification performance can be set at different timings, so that the period during which the notification performance is executed can be freely set. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. Characterized game machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, after the notification performance is executed, by making it possible to set the termination trigger of the notification performance, the notification performance is executed after the notification performance is executed. Set the execution period. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, when the notification effect is executed, it is not set at which timing the specific effect to be executed is targeted for the notification effect, so it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the content of the notification effect in advance. can be reliably prevented.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F6, an operation means operable by the player, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means. operation determination means for determining that the operation means is operated during the performance, and the notification performance setting means sets the performance mode of the notification performance based on the determination result of the operation determination means. A gaming machine F7 characterized by:

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines F1 to F6, the performance period of the notification performance is set based on the operation content of the operation means during the operation performance, so the player's participation in the performance is increased. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. and at least the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

According to the game machine F8, in any of the game machines F1 to F7, the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information in the period during which the notification effect is executed, so the notification effect period can be set freely. , it is possible to secure a period for executing an effect based on the second information, and it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine F8, the notification effect executing means executes a time-dependent effect indicating a period of time until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8, the timing effect can be executed during the second notification effect period. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine F9, based on the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means and the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means, A game machine F10 characterized by comprising temporal performance period setting means for setting a period in which the temporal performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the period for executing the performance with time is executed for a certain period of time by the time-lapse performance period setting means based on the length of the performance period during which the notification performance is executed. As a trigger for executing performance over time, the timing obtained by subtracting a fixed period from the execution timing of the specific performance is determined, so even when a different performance period is set by the performance period setting means, the start timing of the specific performance can be accurately determined. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player.

In any one of the game machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the first effect to be executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information. The game machine F11 is characterized by having a first effect mode varying means for varying the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during one notification effect period.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the performance mode of the first performance executed during the first notification performance period is established while the first performance is being executed. It is changed when a possible effect variable condition is established. As a result, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that the effect variable condition is satisfied when the notification effect setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification effect.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the timing for ending the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is determined, the effect mode of the first effect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set end timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine F1, an operating means operable by a player, an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the operating means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means. operation determination means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. A gaming machine F13, wherein the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the trigger for ending the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to change the presentation period of the notification presentation by the operation of the player, and to enhance the presentation effect.

The gaming machine F13 has specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. A gaming machine F14 characterized in that the information for the game is the second information.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F13, a specific period during which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and during the set specific period Since the effect period of the notification effect can be varied based on the above, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

In the game machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period out of a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect executing means is set by the specific period setting means. A gaming machine F15 characterized by executing the specific effect corresponding to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14, a specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the game machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and sets the length of the second notification effect period to correspond to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has an effect period variable means for varying the effect period. A gaming machine F16 characterized by:

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effects of the game machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period, The length of the notification effect is varied by varying the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation contents of the operating means during the operation effect. Therefore, when the length of the notification effect is varied, it is possible to ensure the period during which the operation effect is executed, so there is an effect that the effect can be executed in which the player can easily operate the operation means.

<Characteristic G group> (Variation of HP display)
Determination means for executing determination based on performance information; Variable performance execution means for executing variable performance for varying performance values based on the determination result of the determination means; a first effect value determining means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value, and the effect value when the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means. and a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the value of the second effect value.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won a big win. Then, as a variable effect, a game machine executes a effect (battle effect) in which the player character and the enemy character play against each other, and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot is won based on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the effect. be. (For example, JP-A-2015-9075).

In such a conventional game machine, the effect of reducing the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle performance, and the decreasing physical strength points are used to determine whether the player has won the jackpot or not. By notifying the player in advance of the execution timing of the effect of (1), the variable effect can be executed while increasing the player's expectation for the big win. Furthermore, by setting in detail the physical strength points that decrease during the battle production, the number of production patterns of the battle production is increased, thereby suppressing the players from becoming bored with the battle production. However, in the conventional game machine, detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen are managed, and the next physical strength points are set based on the managed physical strength points. There is a problem that the amount of processing for management becomes enormous. It should be noted that it is possible to simplify the reduction management of physical strength points by reducing the number of patterns in which physical strength points are reduced during battle production. There was a problem that I got tired of it.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by the plurality of determining means, it is easier to increase the variations of the effect value than when the effect value is determined by one determining means. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine G1, an effect state setting means capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed, and when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means, the effect value is set. a production value updating means for continuously variably updating; and a first production value storage means capable of storing the first production value determined by the first production value determining means, wherein the production value updating means is A gaming machine G2, characterized in that said effect value is variably updated based on said first effect value stored in said first effect value storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, when the rendering value determined based on the first rendering value and the second rendering value is variably updated, the combined rendering value is not used. Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the effect value actually displayed (the effect value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value) is reduced. It is possible to reduce the patterns of values (first effect values) variably updated by the effect value updating means with respect to the display patterns, and to reduce the processing load.

In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value updating means, and an effect for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine G3, characterized by comprising mode display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect updating means is displayed. There is an effect that the variable amount of the effect value can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is composed of a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the A game machine G4, characterized by having effect value summing means for calculating the effect value by summing the effect value with a second effect value.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the first effect value, which is part of the effect value, and the second effect value, which is different from the first effect value, are added by the effect value adding means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be diversified.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a prescribed discrimination condition is established, and a privilege is given based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. and a privilege granting means, wherein the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the determination by the determining means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined when the determination by the determination means is executed, and the effect value changes. An effect can be executed so as to be related to the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable state of the production value, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the fact that the first effect value determining means has determined the first effect value. A game machine G6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first rendering value is determined, the second rendering value is determined. A production value that is the sum of the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the effect value that is changed by the execution of the discrimination by the discriminating means.

In the game machine G5 or G6, the game machine G7 is characterized in that the first effect value determination means varies the variable amount of the first effect value based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be changed based on the determination result of the determination means, so that the variable amount of the effect value can be changed for the player. can be made to pay attention, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determination means makes it easy to determine the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value is, the easier it is to give the privilege, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable amount of the effect value. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G8, a first range or a second range different from the first range as a selection range in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determination means can be selected. and determination value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and the second effect value determination The means selects one selection range from among a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means, and determines the second effect value. A game machine G9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the selection range for selecting the second rendering value is varied based on whether the first rendering value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. can let Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect value.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a first selection range storing a range in which the first effect value can be increased and decreased, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. and a second selection range in which the second effect value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value as a determination result of the determined value determining means. (2) a game machine G10, wherein the second effect value is set by selecting the second selection range;

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G9, when the first rendering value is less than the predetermined value, the second rendering value for decreasing the first rendering value is selected. It is possible to suppress the effect value obtained by adding the value and the second effect value from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when a lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to suppress the determination of a value greater than the lower limit value as the effect value, giving the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that causes the user to be overwhelmed.

<Characteristic group H> (Suggestion of advantageous period of falling lottery machine)
First determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is established, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game when a first determination result by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a high-probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination means is likely to be the predetermined first determination result; a probability setting means capable of setting a low-probability state in which the first determination result is unlikely to occur; The probability setting means sets the low probability state when the second determination result by the second determination means is the predetermined second determination result. A game state setting means capable of setting, as game states, a first game state in which the predetermined determination condition is likely to be established, and a second game state in which the predetermined determination condition is more difficult to be established than in the first game state. and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for notifying the period during which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means includes: The second game state is set when the first condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set, and the period effect executing means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. and a second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect, and the first condition is set by the probability setting means. Established when both the first requirement that the low-probability game is set and the second requirement that the determination is performed a predetermined number of times by the first determination means in the state where the first game state is set are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising a period effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the period effect in correspondence with the establishment information of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the game state is set to an advantageous game state (for example, a probability variable state in which the probability of winning is high) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the player wins. There is a gaming machine that indicates to the player whether or not the period in which the game state continues will end, depending on the result of an effect (for example, a battle effect). (For example, JP-A-2011-143197).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, if a win is made while the advantageous gaming state continues, the effect result of the win pattern in which the character wins is displayed, and if a win is made when the advantageous gaming state ends, the winning pattern is displayed. The result of the defeat pattern is displayed, and if the win is not won (when the advantageous game state is set continuously), the battle effect is displayed so that the result of the draw pattern without winning or losing is displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the battle production, and to enhance the production effect. However, if the game is executed for a long period of time without winning a win in an advantageous game state, as a result, it becomes easier to execute a battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed, and the player does not respond to the battle effect. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a specific variation pattern is drawn without winning a prize as a result of the lottery, the draw pattern battle effect is executed. When a specific variation pattern is continuously drawn, there is a problem that the battle performance of the draw pattern is continuously executed, and the player's expectation for the battle performance is further lowered.

According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are met based on the presentation mode of the second presentation. Thus, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the effect mode of the second effect to be newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the period presentation.

In the game machine H1, the game machine H2 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a first effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the effect mode of the first effect for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is the effect result of the second effect, and the first condition or Since it is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied can be predicted according to the effect mode of the first effect. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay more attention to the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1 or H2, the effect mode of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is based on whether or not the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the second effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when either the first requirement or the second requirement is met. Characterized game machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the effect mode of the period effect is changed by satisfying any one of the plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition. variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is established according to the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the period effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means determines the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. The game machine H5 is characterized in that it sets an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result.

According to the gaming machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied can be suggested by the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while giving him/her a sense of danger, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied, and It is characterized in that the easiness of establishment of the performance switching condition is differentiated between when the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and when the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the second Since the frequency of execution of one performance can be varied, the currently set probability state can be predicted based on the frequency of execution of the first performance, and interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that the gaming machine H6 has condition setting means for making it easier to establish the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is established.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, it is possible to facilitate execution of the first effect during a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency with which the first effect is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the period effect execution means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. A gaming machine H8 characterized by:

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the determination result of the first determination means is the determination result that the privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the first performance is executed, the player pays attention to the performance while being conscious of whether or not the privilege game is won or whether or not the first condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the performance that is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8 has a number-of-time measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect executed while the first game state is continuously set by the game state setting means. The game machine H9 is characterized in that the second effect mode setting means sets the second effect mode based on the number of executions of the period effect counted by the frequency counting means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period presentation is repeatedly executed, the second presentation mode is set based on the number of repetitions. When the game state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, effect period determination means for determining a effect period after the first effect is executed by the period effect execution means; a performance regulation means for regulating execution of the first performance by the period performance execution means when the performance period determined by the performance period determination means is within a predetermined period. Characterized game machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the presentation switching condition is established, it is determined that the presentation period after the first presentation is executed is within a predetermined period. When it is done, the execution of the first effect is regulated by the effect regulating means. As a result, frequent execution of the first effect can be suppressed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the execution of the first effect.

In the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is not restricted by the effect regulation means. Characteristic game machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H10, the first effect that is executed when the privilege game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the performance period determining means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress deterioration of the performance effect when executed. In addition, when the first performance is executed again within a predetermined performance period after the previous first performance is executed, the degree of expectation for execution of the privilege game can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced. has the effect of

<Feature J group> (Different target effects at the notification timing of the expectation increase effect)
Expectation level display control means capable of displaying, on a display means, a plurality of expectation level display modes capable of suggesting in stages an expectation level indicating that a predetermined condition has been established; display mode changing means for stepwise varying an expectation level display mode; variable information setting means for setting variable information to be varied by the display mode varying means; and at least one of the plurality of expectation level display modes. variable suggestion effect execution means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree display mode is variable, wherein the expectation level display control means controls the expectation level in at least one of the plurality of expectation level display modes. The game machine J1 is characterized in that display modes are displayed on the display means at different timings, and that the game machine J1 has an execution timing setting means for setting timings for executing the variable suggestive effects.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won a big win. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, there are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the degree of expectation of the big win, and the degree of expectation of the big win in this variable performance is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player by the display mode of the character that is displayed. (For example, JP-A-2013-248305).

In such a conventional game machine, the degree of expectation for a big win can be shown to the player by the display mode of the characters displayed during the variable performance, so that the player is interested in the performance contents of the variable performance to be executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, among the plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation display modes are provided in which a display mode corresponding to the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win to the player by judging it realistically, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation for the big win based on the display modes of the plurality of types of expectation degree display modes, and the effect is executed. It was possible to make the player pay attention to the contents, and to enhance the performance effect. In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation level display mode is configured to be executable, and which display mode is to be displayed as the expectation level display mode. There is also a game machine that executes an expectation degree display mode pre-suggestion effect for making a player predict in which display mode the expectation degree display mode will be displayed as a variable effect. There is also a game machine that changes the display mode of the degree-of-expectation display mode from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation level display modes, when an expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation level display mode is executed, expectations that are not subject to the expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect This implicitly denies that the degree display mode is variable, and there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered.

According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect execution means provides a variable suggestion effect suggesting that one of the plurality of expectation level display modes displayed on the display means at different timings will be varied. executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestive effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestive effect can be varied. As a result, even if the same presentation mode is used as the variable suggestion presentation, there is an effect that it is possible to make the expectation degree display mode that is the suggestion target of the variable suggestion presentation different.

In the gaming machine J1, a determination means for performing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit based on the result of determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; and wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation level display mode can easily indicate a high expectation level. I will keep an eye on the content. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the variable suggestion effect notifies variable information of an expectation level display mode that is changed in stages.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, it is possible to inform the variable information of the target expectation level display mode by the variable suggestion performance, so that the variable suggestion performance can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user pay attention and enhance the production effect.

In the game machine J3, the variable suggestive effect displays a plurality of variable amounts including at least a variable amount for indicating the extent to which the degree-of-expectation display mode is actually varied. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as the variable suggestive effect. There is an effect that the game can be played with expectation so that the amount becomes a real variable amount, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, a game machine having target notification means for notifying an expectation degree display mode targeted for the variable suggestion performance executed by the variable suggestion performance execution means before the variable suggestion performance ends. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestive effect to be executed this time, the variable There is an effect that the suggestive performance can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In any one of the game machines J2 to J5, an expectation class setting means for setting an expectation class based on the determination result of the discriminating means, and based on the expectation class set by the expectation class setting means and an expectation level setting means for setting an expectation level for each of the plurality of expectation level display modes, wherein the expectation level display control means comprises the plurality of expectation level display modes set by the expectation level setting means. of the expectations, the expectation level display mode for indicating at least a part of the expectations is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the already displayed expectations and the expectations level setting means. A game machine J6 characterized in that a difference from the expected degree is suggested as the variable amount.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines J2 to J5, an effect is executed that suggests the difference between the already displayed expectation level and the preset expectation level as a variable amount. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation level display mode in which the high expectation level is already displayed, the benefit is given. can increase the likelihood of Therefore, not only the performance content of the variable suggestive performance but also the display mode of the current degree of expectation display mode is selected by lottery, which has the effect of enhancing the performance effect.

In the game machine J2, an operation means operable by a player, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for causing the operation means to be operated, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. operation determination means for determining that the means has been operated, wherein the display mode changing means varies the degree of expectation display mode according to the determination result by the operation determination means. Characterized game machine J8.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2, the degree-of-expectation display mode can be varied in response to the operation of the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means. has the effect of

In the gaming machine J8, a determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; Acquisition means for acquiring entry information when a prescribed acquisition condition is met, and storing the entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a prescribed number as an upper limit until the prescribed determination condition is met. possible storage means, preliminary discrimination means for executing preliminary discrimination based on the said entering ball information stored in the storing means, and the number of entering ball information indicating the number of said entering ball information stored in said storing means. and display means for displaying the number of entered ball information displayed by the displayed means for the number of entered ball information in response to the determination result of the operation determination means when a predetermined additional condition is met. A gaming machine J9 characterized by having additional effect executing means for executing an additional effect for changing a display mode for indicating the number of pieces of information on entering a ball.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the display mode for indicating the number of entered ball information can be changed by the additional effect executed in response to the operation of the operating means. , there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

The game machine J9 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether the expectation level display mode displayed by the expectation level display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and the effect condition determining means satisfies the effect condition. A game machine J10 characterized in that the additional condition is satisfied when it is determined that the additional condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J9, when the expectation degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy the predetermined rendering conditions, the additional rendering is executed. There is an effect that the relevance can be given and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J10, the effect condition determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the expectation level display control means does not display a predetermined number of the expectation level display modes. Game machine J11.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J10, by executing additional effects, the number of effects to be executed can be complemented. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease.

<Feature K group> (Holding consecutive jackpot production)
Determining means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is established; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; and a predetermined acquisition condition. acquisition means for acquiring entry information when the condition is satisfied; and storage means capable of storing the entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. and a pre-discrimination means for executing pre-discrimination based on the entered ball information stored in the storage means, wherein the pre-discrimination means determines that a pre-discrimination condition is satisfied at least during the privilege game. The pre-determination is executed when the pre-determination is performed, and the pre-determination means has a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode during the privilege game corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, ball entry information is acquired based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, and holding means capable of holding the entry information until a lottery condition is established, and a lottery condition is established. A lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on ball entry information when the player wins, and an execution means for executing a winning game advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is winning. There is a game machine. Then, it has a preliminary discrimination means for discriminating in advance the entering ball information held in the holding means before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the advance discrimination means determines that there is a winning in the holding at the time of the end of the winning game. There is a gaming machine that continues to display the display mode (the number of rounds) during a winning game when it is determined. (For example, JP-A-2014-30737).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, when a win is won again during a hold, a special effect can be executed during the second win game, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction. However, it is configured to discriminate the winning information held at the end of the jackpot, and during the first winning game, the effect set at the time of winning is only executed. Even if the prize winning information is reserved, the performance for the first winning game cannot be changed, and the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

In addition, although the production is configured to be continuous with respect to a plurality of winning games, only the production that allows the player to easily identify the break between the first winning game and the second winning game is executed. , there is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how many winning games will be executed during the performance that is continuously executed during the winning game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the effect mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means executed during the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the effect mode corresponding to the preliminary determination result.

In the gaming machine K1, the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means includes a plurality of small privilege games, and the preliminary determination condition is established when the minor privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, when the small privilege game is executed, the pre-determining condition is satisfied and the effect mode during the privilege game is set, so the execution status of the small privilege game It is possible to set the effect mode of the privilege game in accordance with. Therefore, even if the performance mode of the privilege game is set during the privilege game, there is an effect that the privilege game can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

The gaming machine K2 has privilege game selection means for selecting one privilege game from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A game machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, one privilege game is selected from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. There is an effect that variation can be provided and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the pre-determining means, when the result of the pre-determining is a predetermined result of pre-determining, the storing means includes the entering ball information for executing the privilege game. The performance mode setting means sets the performance mode during the privilege game corresponding to the number of small privilege games to be executed in the privilege game pre-determined by the preliminary discrimination means. A game machine K4 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, the effect mode during the privilege game is set according to the number of the small privilege games determined by the preliminary determination means, so that the player can enjoy the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user pay attention to the production mode.

In a gaming machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means, and the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means. Among them, a small privilege game number reporting means for reporting at least a part, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means, and the small privilege reported by the small privilege game number reporting means a first difference determining means for determining a difference from the number of games; and notification for setting the number of the small privilege games to be notified by the number of small privilege games reporting means based on the determination result of the first difference determining means. and a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the number of small privilege games (round games) to be executed during the privilege game (jackpot) is partially notified, so that one privilege can be obtained. To make it difficult for a player to grasp the number of small privilege games to be executed during a game, and to play a game while expecting that more small privilege games are executed even while the privilege games are being executed. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine K5 is characterized by comprising adding means for adding the number of said small privilege games to be executed in said privilege game pre-determined by said pre-determination means to said execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, when it is determined in advance that the privilege game will be executed by the prior determination means during the privilege game (jackpot), in the privilege game determined in advance The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the adding means. As a result, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times at short intervals, the number of the small privilege games notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is the number of the small privilege games to be executed in the later privilege game. can be set by adding the number of Therefore, by seeing the number of small privilege games notified during the privilege game by the small privilege game number reporting means, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed, and one privilege game ends. There is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after playing.

The game machine K5 or K6 has update determination means for determining whether or not to update the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games informing means when the small privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5 or K6, the number of small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notifying means is determined by the update determining means. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small privilege game is executed, even if the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number reporting means is not updated, when the next small privilege game is executed, It is possible to leave the possibility of updating the number of small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games informing means, and it is possible to play games while expecting that more small privilege games will be executed. effective.

In the game machine K7, a forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notification means when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition. A game machine K8 characterized by having:

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition, the forced update means is notified by the small privilege game number notification means. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games being played, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period during which the player is allowed to play the privilege game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, executed small privilege game number reporting means for reporting the number of the small privilege games already executed, the number of the small privilege games reported by the small privilege game number reporting means, Second difference determination means for determining a difference from the number of small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means, and when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies a second condition. and forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notification means.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7 or K8, when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means reports by the small bonus game number reporting means. To prevent the number of executed minor privilege games from becoming larger than the number of minor privilege games notified by a minor privilege game number informing means in order to forcibly update the number of executed minor privilege games. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number reporting means performs the prior determination of the entering ball information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period of time during which the privilege game is executed. is the result of the predetermined pre-determination, the game machine K10 is characterized in that a specific number of small bonus games is notified.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines K5 to K9, among the periods during which the privilege game is being executed, the entering ball information acquired within the specific period is the privilege game as a result of the preliminary determination. , the specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of obtaining information on entering a ball during a privilege game.

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number reporting means a third difference determining means for determining a difference; and when the determination result of the third difference determining means satisfies a third condition in a state where the one privilege game is finished, the one privilege game is finished. and effect continuation means for continuing the effect executed during the privilege game until a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, when the determination result by the third difference determination means satisfies the third condition, the effect continuation means executes during the privilege game. The effect will continue to be displayed. As a result, when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the privilege game is to be executed, an effect to be executed during the privilege game can be continuously displayed after the end of the first privilege game. be.

In the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K11, during the period from the end of the first privilege game to the execution of the second privilege game by the effect continuation means, during the privilege game It is possible to reliably execute the production to be performed. Therefore, since a series of performances can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, it is possible to play the game while expecting that more small privilege games will be executed while the performance is being executed. effective.

In any one of the game machines K5 to K12, stored number determination means for determining the number of the entered ball information stored in the storage means when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; and a performance mode storage means for storing a plurality of performance modes to be executed during the privilege game, and stored in the performance mode storage means based on the number of the entering means determined by the storage number determination means. A gaming machine K13, characterized in that it has privilege game effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, in the case of a predetermined determination result, an effect mode during the privilege game is performed based on the number of entered ball information stored in the storage means. is selected, various effects can be provided to the player during the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the effect mode storage means stores, as the plurality of effect modes, that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result when the privilege game is started. A gaming machine K14, characterized in that it stores at least a first performance mode that can be notified to the player and a second performance mode that can be notified to the player after the privilege game is finished.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K13, it is notified that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result by the performance mode selected by the special game performance mode selection means. Since it is possible to vary the timing of the display, the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group L> (change the production frequency with the game history)
Determining means for executing determination when a determination condition is established, effect executing means for executing an effect for indicating the determination result of the determining means, and effect for indicating a specific result of determination by the effect executing means. When a special condition is satisfied, a memory means for storing corresponding game information as history information; and determining means for determining, based on the history information, whether to execute a specific effect among the effects to be executed.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, there is a game machine that executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player, as the variable effect that is executed for a predetermined period. (For example, JP-A-2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the presentation mode is varied based on the player's operation on the operating means, the player can be motivated to participate in the game. However, there is a problem that if the operation effect is frequently executed for a player who does not operate the operating means with enthusiasm, the player's desire to play will decrease.

According to the gaming machine L1, since execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the specific effect according to the progress of the game, etc., thereby improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine L1 has an effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables are set so that the selection rate of the specific effect is different, and the determination means selects the effect corresponding to the history information. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the game machine L2, the selection rate of the specific performance can be switched by selecting the corresponding performance selection table in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, so that the selection rate of the specific performance can be varied with easy control. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine L1 or L2 has operation means operated by a player and operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and one of the effects includes the An operation effect is set to change the effect mode when the operation determination means determines the predetermined operation, and the specific condition is at least one condition that the operation determination means determines the predetermined operation. A game machine L3 characterized by being set to the conditions of

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operation means in the operation presentation, not only can the presentation mode be changed, but also the specific condition can be easily established, so that the history information can be obtained. can be varied and the execution ratio of the specific performance can be affected.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, accumulation means capable of accumulating at least the history information, setting means capable of setting accumulation values up to a predetermined upper limit based on accumulation results of the accumulation means, and selecting means for selecting an accumulated privilege system corresponding to the set accumulation value from among a plurality of accumulated privilege systems; and accumulated privilege granting means for imparting an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system selected by the selecting means. and, when the new accumulated value is set by the setting means, the accumulated privilege granting means gives a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selecting means. and wherein the selection means selects one accumulated privilege system from among a plurality of accumulated privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, an accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is awarded. As a result, based on the history information, both the setting of the frequency with which the specific effect is executed and the provision of the accumulated benefit are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L4, the accumulated privilege imparted by the accumulated privilege imparting means differs for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selecting means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L4, the accumulated benefits to be granted can be varied according to the accumulated privilege system, so the enjoyment of obtaining various accumulated benefits while changing the operation contents of the operating means. can be provided to the player. Further, by changing the operation contents of the operation means, it is possible to change the performance frequency, so that there is an effect that the player can be provided with a new enjoyment for the performance to be executed.

The game machine L5 is characterized by comprising history information erasing means for erasing the history information stored in the storage means to the extent that the different accumulated privilege systems can be selected by the selection means. Game machine L6 to play.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5, the history information can be deleted to the extent that a different accumulated privilege system can be selected. It is possible to make it easier for the accumulated privilege system to be selected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits.

In addition, since the history information is partially erased by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value set by the setting means also changes (decreases). There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the value is reached and the performance effect is lowered.

A game machine L7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines L4 to L6, the game machine L7 is characterized by having guide means for guiding game contents for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6, a specific accumulated privilege system is selected by playing a game based on the game content guided by the guidance means. Therefore, there is an effect that various accumulation benefits can be given to the player, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides game contents for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by varying the performance mode of the operation performance.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machine L7, since the presentation mode of the operation presentation can be varied by the guide means, a different accumulated benefit system can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the presentation mode of the operation presentation. will be Therefore, there is an effect that various benefits can be given to the player and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine L8, the guide means selects, as the effect mode of the operation effect, a notification effect mode in which the operation means is made to perform the predetermined operation, or a non-report effect mode in which no notification is made. A game machine L9 characterized in that it guides game contents by using a.

According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effects, it is possible to execute the effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easily performed on the operation means and the effect mode in which it is difficult to perform the operation means. A different accumulated benefit system can be selected simply by operating. Therefore, there is an effect that various benefits can be given to the player and the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9 has system selection means for allowing the player to select the specific accumulated privilege system corresponding to the game contents guided by the guide means from among the plurality of accumulated privilege systems. A game machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9, it is possible to notify the game content so that the player can select the accumulated privilege system desired by the player, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, and L1 to L10, A gaming machine K1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, and L1 to L10, The game machine K2 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, and L1 to L10, The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine that executes a production (battle production) in which a player character and an enemy character play against each other, and notifies the result of winning or not based on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the production. There is In this conventional gaming machine, the result of winning can be suggested by the effect, so that the player can be interested in the effect to be executed. This has been intended to improve interest (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-9075).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a determining means for executing a determination based on performance information and a variable effect for executing a variable performance for varying a performance value based on the determination result of the determining means. Effect execution means, first effect value determination means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value when the variable effect is executed by the variable effect execution means, and the first effect value determination. a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the effect value when the first effect value is determined by the means. is.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the specified effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed; A performance value updating means for continuously variably updating the performance value when a performance state is set, and a first performance value capable of storing the first performance value determined by the first performance value determining means. and storage means, wherein the effect value update means variably updates the effect value based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value updating means; and an effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the second effect value determined by the second effect value determining means is selected as a selectable range of A selection range storage means having one range or a second range different from the first range, and a determination for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. and value determining means, wherein the second effect value determining means selects one selected range from among the plurality of selected ranges stored in the selected range storing means based on the determination result of the determined value determining means. It selects and determines the second effect value.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, wherein the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased. and a second selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be decreased is stored. When it is determined that the first effect value is less than the predetermined value, the second selection range is selected and the second effect value is set.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, determination means for executing determination based on performance information, and variable performance execution means for executing variable performance for varying performance values based on the determination result of the determination means. a first effect value determining means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value when the variable effect executing means executes the variable effect; A second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the effect value when one effect value is determined.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed, and the effect value is continuously set by the effect state setting means. a production value updating means for variably updating; and a first production value storage means capable of storing the first production value determined by the first production value determining means; 1 The effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value stored in the effect value storage means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. Namely, effect mode setting means for setting a effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value updating means, and effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. and
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the game machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are obtained. That is, selection range storage means having a first range or a second range different from the first range as a selection range from which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determination means can be selected; determination value determining means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, wherein the second effect value determining means is the determined value determining means; Based on the determination result of (1), one selection range is selected from among a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means, and the second effect value is determined.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased and decreased and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased are stored. The second effect value determination means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value when the determination result of the determined value determination means determines that the first effect value is less than the predetermined value. The second effect value is set by selecting the second selection range.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
222g Continuation value sub-selection table (selection range storage means)
222g1 First continuous value subselection table (first selection range)
222g2 Second continuous value sub-selection table (second selection range)
S3805 Effect state setting means S4010 Effect value updating means S4011 Variable effect executing means S4101 Judging means S4102 First effect value determining means S4103 First effect value storing means S4105, S4106 Second effect value determining means

Claims (5)

determination means for performing determination based on performance information;
variable effect execution means for executing a variable effect that varies the effect value based on the determination result of the determination means;
a first effect value determining means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value when the variable effect executing means executes the variable effect;
A second effect value determination for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the effect value when the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means. an effect state setting means capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed;
effect value updating means for continuously variably updating the effect value when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means;
a first effect value storage means capable of storing the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means;
2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein said effect value update means variably updates said effect value based on said first effect value stored in said first effect value storage means. an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value update means;
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising an effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. selection range storage means having a first range or a second range different from the first range as a selection range from which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determination means can be selected;
determination value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value;
The second effect value determination means selects one selection range from among a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means, and determines the second effect value. 4. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that it determines. The selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased and decreased and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased are stored. and a second selection range,
The second effect value determination means selects the second selection range to produce the second effect value when the determination result of the determined value determination means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, characterized in that it sets the .

Images